Advanced System Controller

ASC/3

ASC/3 Programming Manual

P/N 100-0903-001 Rev. 15
April 2014

Software Version:
ASC/3 – 2.59.00
ASC/3-2070 – 22.59.00
ASC/3-LX – 32.59.00

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00
Warranty
Econolite Control Products, Inc. warrants, for a period as shown below, from date of shipment, all
control equipment listed below to be free from defects in material or workmanship and to be of the
kind and quality designated or specified in the contract. This warranty does not extend to products not
manufactured or sold by Econolite. Econolite has the sole right to determine whether or not an item
is covered under our warranty policy.

Controller Standard Warranty Period

ASC⁄3 Series Controller 2 years
Safetran ASC⁄3-RM Series Controller 2 years
2070 Series Controller 2 years

Econolite is not responsible for damage caused by negligence, acts of God, or use of equipment in a
manner not originally intended. Econolite’s liability under this warranty shall not exceed the cost of
correcting defects in the equipment. Upon the expiration of the warranty period, all such liability shall
terminate.

Service
Prior to returning a product, you should first consult with your local support team to make sure the
product needs to be returned for repair. Occasionally, product that appears to need repair can be made
operable by configuration changes.

To obtain service, whether under warranty or not, contact the Econolite Repair Department at
Repairs@Econolite.com (phone 714-575-5566).

To return products for service:

1. Obtain a Repair Authorization (RA) number from the Repair Department. Supply them with
model name/number, equipment serial number, description of the problem and date of
installation. They will send you a confirmation email that has details about the product and
includes shipping instructions and shipping address.
2. Pack the product in its original (or equivalent) shipping container and include the confirmation
email.
3. Insure the package (or assume the risk of loss/damage during shipment).

For products that are out-of-warranty, to eliminate the delays inherent in the repair quoting process,
we are developing a flat rate repair schedule to give you a repair quote immediately on first contact. If
you agree with the quote, you will then be required to supply a purchase order or authorized credit card
prior to return shipping.
Documentation
Published: April 24, 2014
© Copyright 2014 by Econolite Group, Inc. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Econolite Control Products Inc. provides this manual for its licensees and customers. No part of this
manual may be reproduced, copied or distributed in any form without the prior written approval of
Econolite Control Products Inc. The content of this manual is subject to change without notice.

Trademarks
Econolite Control Products, Inc., the Econolite logo, and the ASC/3 logo are registered trademarks
of Econolite Control Products, Inc. in the United Stated and/or in other countries. All other
trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
For your notes:
Table of Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Purpose of this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
DRAFT

Contents of this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
ASC/3 Installation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2070 Installation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

ASC/3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

ASC/3 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
ASC/3 Cable Connectors and Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
ASC/3 Environmental Operation Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
ASC/3 OS Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
ASC/3 Software Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
ASC/3 Storage/Shipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

2070 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

2070 Hardware Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
ASC/3-2070 or ASC/3-LX Software Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Supporting Windows Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Equipment Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

ASC/3 Controllers, General Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Equipment Enclosure Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Central Processing Unit (CPU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

ASC/3 Programming Manual v

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Table of Contents

ASC/3 System Operating Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

ASC/3 Inputs/Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

ASC/3-1000 and ASC/3-RM 1000 (TS2-T1 only) Connector . . . . . 3-5
ASC/3-2100 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
ASC/3-RM (C1) Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

The 2070 Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

2070 L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
2070 LN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
2070 ITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
2070 Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

ASC/3 NEMA & 2070 HW Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Keypads and Displays for ASC/3 and 2070 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

DRAFT

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Keypads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Liquid Crystal Displays (LCDs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

ASC/3-Specific Functions and Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

ASC/3 LCD Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
ASC/3 Function and Numeric Keypads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

2070-Specific Functions and Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

2070 LCD and Key Click . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
AUX Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
2070 Keypads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
2070 Keypad Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
2070 Display Contrast Adjust Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

ASC/3 & 2070 Key Click and Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

ASC/3 & 2070 Key Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

MAIN MENU or A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
SUBMENU or ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
NEXT DATA or D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
NEXT SCREEN or NEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
NEXT PAGE or + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
STATUS DISPLAY or E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
HELP or F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
SPEC FUNC then HELP or * then F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Cursor Arrow Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
ENTER or ENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Number Keys 0 thru 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

vi ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Table of Contents

Alpha-Numeric Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10

Toggle Keys: 0,8 or YES,NO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
Special Function, SPEC FUNC or * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
Clear or C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12
Arrows for Screen Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12
Call Simulation with the Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12
Help, HELP or F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
Front Panel Access Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13

MAIN MENU and Screen Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

DRAFT

Programming Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Display Screen Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Horizontal Display Screen Scrolling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Vertical Display Screen Scrolling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Illustrations of the Full Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
2070 and ASC/3 Fast Display Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Hyperlink Field Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Normally Inaccessible Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Transaction Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Changing Data with the Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Changing Data with SNMP/STMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Automatic Backup to Datakey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Automatic Backup to Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

ASC/3 Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
2070 Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Configuration Submenu, MM-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Controller Sequence Submenu, MM-1-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Programming Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Phase Ring Sequence and Assignment, MM-1-1-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Phase Compatibility, MM-1-1-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11
Backup Prevent Phases, MM-1-1-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12
Simultaneous Gap Phases, MM-1-1-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13

ASC/3 Programming Manual vii

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Table of Contents

Diamond Configuration Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15

Phases in Use/Exclusive Pedestrian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16

Phases in Use, MM-1-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Exclusive Pedestrian Timing, MM-1-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16

Load Switch Assignment (MMU CHANNEL), MM-1-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17

Port 1 (SDLC) Submenu, MM-1-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20

SDLC Options, MM-1-4-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
MMU Compatibility Programming, MM-1-4-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Color Check Enable, MM-1-4-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Secondary Stations/Tests, MM-1-4-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29

Programmable Communication Ports Submenu, MM-1-5 . . . . . . . . . . 6-30

Ethernet Port, MM-1-5-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
DRAFT

Serial Communication Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32

Port 2/C50S, MM-1-5-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Port 3A/C21S, MM-1-5-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Port 3B/C22S, MM-1-5-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Serial Port Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
NTCIP Parameters, MM-1-5-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
ECPIP Parameters, MM-1-5-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44

Enable Logging Submenu, MM-1-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45

Event Logging, MM-1-6-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45

Display/Access Submenu, MM-1-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49

Administration, MM-1-7-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
Display Options, MM-1-7-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Security Access, MM-1-7-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55

Logic Processor Submenu, MM-1-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59

Logic Processor Statement Control, MM-1-8-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
Logic Processor Statements, MM-1-8-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
General Programming Notes for Logic Statements, MM-1-8-2 . . . 6-60

Extended Logic Processor Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64

Comment Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
Control Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65

Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Controller Submenu, MM-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Programming Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

viii ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Table of Contents

Timing Plans, MM-2-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Vehicle Overlap, MM-2-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Vehicle or Pedestrian Overlaps, MM-2-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17
Guaranteed Minimum Times, MM-2-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19
Start/Flash Data, MM-2-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20
Option Data, MM-2-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-30
Pre-Timed Mode, MM-2-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-36
Recall Data, MM-2-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-36

Coordinator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Coordinator Submenu, MM-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Programming Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Coordinator Options, MM-3-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

DRAFT

Programming Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Coordinator Pattern Data, MM-3-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16

Programming Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17

Added Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32

Split Pattern, MM-3-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34

Programming Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34

Automatic Permissive Minimum Green, MM-3-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37

Split Demand, MM-3-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38

Preempt/TSP/SCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Preempt Submenu, MM-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Programming Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Preempt Plans 1-10, MM-4-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Preempt Filtering & TSP/SCP Mapping, MM-4-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28
TSP/SCP Plans 1-6, MM-4-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30
TSP/SCP Split Pattern, MM-4-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30

Time Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Time Base Submenu, MM-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Programming Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-1
Clock/Calendar Data, MM-5-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Creating an Action Plan, MM-5-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6
Creating a Day Plan, MM-5-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Day Plan Schedule, MM-5-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Exception Days, MM-5-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19

ASC/3 Programming Manual ix

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Table of Contents

Detectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Detector Submenu, MM-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Programming Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Vehicle Detector Phase Assignment, MM-6-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3

Vehicle Detector Setup, MM-6-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6

Pedestrian and System Detector Options, MM-6-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14

NTCIP Mode with MM-6-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Econolite Mode with MM-6-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15

Log Interval - Speed Detector Setup, MM-6-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16

Vehicle Detector Diagnostics, MM-6-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19

Pedestrian Detector Diagnostics, MM-6-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21

DRAFT

Status Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Main Status Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Status Display Submenu, MM-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15

Controller Status Display, MM-7-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20

Coordinator Status Display, MM-7-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-27

Preemptor Status Display, MM-7-3-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-34

TSP/SCP Status Display, MM-7-3-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-44

Time Base Status Display, MM-7-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-54

Communications Submenu, MM-7-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-57

Ethernet Communication Status, MM-7-5-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-57
Ports 2/C50S, 3A/C21S, 3B/C22S Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-58
NTCIP Status Screen, MM-7-5-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-63
ECPIP Status Screen, MM-7-5-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-64
IEEE 1570 Status, MM-7-5-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-65

Detector Status Display, MM-7-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-66

Flash/SDLC/MMU Status Display, MM-7-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-68

Flash Status Display, MM-7-7-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-68
SDLC (Port 1) Status, MM-7-7-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-75
MMU Status, MM-7-7-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-76
MMU Extended Status, MM-7-7-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-80
MMU AC Status, MM-7-7-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-82

x ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Table of Contents

MMU Compatibility Status, MM-7-7-6, ECPI Feature . . . . . . . . . 12-84

Input/Output Status Submenu, MM-7-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-85

Controller Inputs, MM-7-8-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-85
Controller Outputs, MM-7-8-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-86
Hardware Inputs, MM-7-8-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-87
Hardware Outputs, MM-7-8-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-88
Auxiliary Hardware I/O, MM-7-8-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-89
T&F BIU I/O, MM-7-8-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-90
D&R BIU I/O, MM-7-8-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-90
I/O Differences Status, MM-7-8-9, ECPI Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-91

Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Utilities Submenu, MM-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
DRAFT

Programming Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-1

Copy/Clear Utility, MM-8-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-2
USB Management, MM-8-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-8
Print Utility, MM-8-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-9
Transfer Utility, MM-8-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Sign-On Screen Utility, MM-8-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11

Log Buffers Submenu, MM-8-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Display Log Buffers Submenu, MM-8-6-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Print Log Buffers, MM-8-6-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Clear Submenu, MM-8-6-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

Software Modules, MM-8-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

Diagnostics Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

Front Panel LED Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Tri-Color Mode (ASC/3-2100, 1000, RM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-1
Single-Color Mode (2070 Controller) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2
Diagnostics Information, MM-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Diagnostics Information, MM-9-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2
Warning Check Submenu, MM-9-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2
What is a Warning Check? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3
Context-Sensitive Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-4
Enable Warning Check Categories, MM-9-2-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-4
Compile and View Active Warnings, MM-9-2-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Edit/View Disabled Warnings, MM-9-2-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-7
Startup Warning Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-8

ASC/3 Programming Manual xi

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Table of Contents

Appendix A - ASC/3, ASC/3-2070 & ASC/3-LX Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Appendix B - ASC/3 Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

Appendix C - Reserved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

Appendix D - Program Reference Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

ASC/3 Program Reference Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

Configuration Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2

MM-1-1-1 Phase Ring Assignment (PRI = Priority) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
MM-1-1-2 Phase Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
MM-1-2 Phases In Use / Exclusive Ped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
MM-1-1-3 Enable Backup Prevent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
MM-1-1-4 Simultaneous Gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
DRAFT

MM-1-3 Phase-to-Load-Switch (MMU) Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8

MM-1-4-1 SDLC Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8
MM-1-4-2 MMU Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
MM-1-4-3 Color Check Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
MM-1-4-4 Secondary Stations/Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
MM-1-5-1 Ethernet Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10
MM-1-5-2 ASC/3 Port 2 – 2070 C50S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10
MM-1-5-3 ASC/3 Port 3A – 2070 C21S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10
MM-1-5-4 ASC/3 Port 3B – 2070 C22S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10
MM-1-5-5 Global Port Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-11
MM-1-5-6 ECPIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-11
MM-1-6-1 Enable Event Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-11
MM-1-7-1 Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12
MM-1-7-2 Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12
MM-1-8-1 Logic Statement Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12
MM-1-8-2 Logic Processor Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13

Controller Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-16

MM-2-1 Controller Timing Data, sheet 1 of 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-16
MM-2-1 Controller Timing Data, sheet 2 of 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-17
MM-2-2 Vehicle Overlaps, sheet 1 of 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-18
MM-2-2 Vehicle Overlaps, sheet 2 of 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-19
MM-2-2 Vehicle Overlaps, sheet 3 of 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-20
MM-2-2 Vehicle Overlaps, sheet 4 of 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-21
MM-2-2 Vehicle Overlaps, sheet 5 of 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-22
MM-2-2 Vehicle Overlaps, sheet 6 of 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-23
MM-2-3 Veh/Ped Overlaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-24
MM-2-4 Guaranteed Minimum Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-25

xii ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Table of Contents

MM-2-5 Start/Flash Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-25

MM-2-6-1 Controller Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-26
MM-2-7 Pre-Timed Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-26
MM-2-8 Phase Recall Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-27

Coordinator Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-28

MM-3-1 Coordinator Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-28
MM-3-2 Coordinator Pattern, sheet 1 of 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-29
MM-3-2 Coordinator Pattern, sheet 2 of 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-30
MM-3-3 Split Pattern, sheet 1 of 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-31
MM-3-3 Split Pattern, sheet 2 of 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-32
MM-3-3 Split Pattern, sheet 3 of 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-33
MM-3-3 Split Pattern, sheet 4 of 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-34
MM-3-4 Auto Permissive Minimum Green Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-35
DRAFT

MM-3-5 Split Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-35

Preemptor Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-36

MM-4-1 Preemptor, sheet 1 of 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-36
MM-4-1 Preemptor, sheet 2 of 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-37
MM-4-2 Low Priority Preemptor Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-38
MM-4-3 TSP/SCP Plan (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-38
MM-4-4 TSP/SCP Split Pattern (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-39

Time Base Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-40

MM-5-1 Clock/Calendar Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-40
MM-5-2 Action Plan, sheet 1 of 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-40
MM-5-2 Action Plan, sheet 2 of 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-41
MM-5-2 Action Plan, sheet 3 of 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-42
MM-5-2 Action Plan, sheet 4 of 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-43
MM-5-3 Day Plan, sheet 1 of 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-44
MM-5-3 Day Plan, sheet 2 of 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-45
MM-5-4 Schedule, sheet 1 of 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-46
MM-5-4 Schedule, sheet 2 of 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-47
MM-5-4 Schedule, sheet 3 of 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-48
MM-5-5 Exception Day Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-49

Detector Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-50

MM-6-1 Vehicle Detector Assignment, sheet 1 of 2 . . . . . . . . . . . D-50
MM-6-1 Vehicle Detector Assignment, sheet 2 of 2 . . . . . . . . . . . D-51
MM-6-2 Vehicle Detector Setup, sheet 1 of 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-52
MM-6-2 Vehicle Detector Setup, sheet 2 of 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-53
MM-6-2 Vehicle Detector Setup, sheet 3 of 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-54
MM-6-2 Vehicle Detector Setup, sheet 4 of 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-55

ASC/3 Programming Manual xiii

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Table of Contents

MM-6-2 Vehicle Detector Setup, sheet 5 of 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-56

MM-6-2 Vehicle Detector Setup, sheet 6 of 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-57
MM-6-2 Vehicle Detector Setup, sheet 7 of 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-58
MM-6-2 Vehicle Detector Setup, sheet 8 of 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-59
MM-6-2 Vehicle Detector Setup, sheet 9 of 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-60
MM-6-2 Vehicle Detector Setup, sheet 10 of 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-61
MM-6-2 Vehicle Detector Setup, sheet 11 of 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-62
MM-6-2 Vehicle Detector Setup, sheet 12 of 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-63
MM-6-2 Vehicle Detector Setup, sheet 13 of 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-64
MM-6-2 Vehicle Detector Setup, sheet 14 of 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-65
MM-6-2 Vehicle Detector Setup, sheet 15 of 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-66
MM-6-2 Vehicle Detector Setup, sheet 16 of 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-67
MM-6-3 Ped Detector Phase Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-68
DRAFT

MM-6-4 Log Intervals – Speed Detector Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-68

MM-6-5 Vehicle Detector Diagnostics, sheet 1 of 4 . . . . . . . . . . . D-69
MM-6-5 Vehicle Detector Diagnostics, sheet 2 of 4 . . . . . . . . . . . D-70
MM-6-5 Vehicle Detector Diagnostics, sheet 3 of 4 . . . . . . . . . . . D-71
MM-6-5 Vehicle Detector Diagnostics, sheet 4 of 4 . . . . . . . . . . . D-72
MM-6-6 Ped Detector Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-73

Appendix E - Event Log Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1

Appendix F - ASC/3 Hardware Diagnostic Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1

Diagnostic Screen Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2

Appendix G - Part Number and Software File Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1

ASC/3, ASC/3-2070 and ASC/3-LX Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1

Database Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3

ASC/3 and ASC/3-2070 Database Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3
ASC/3-LX Database Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-4

Creating and Restoring Default Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-5

Database Creation and Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-6

Supporting Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-6

Appendix H - Coordination Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1

Appendix I - ASC/3 Boot Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-1

Appendix J - Interface Connector Pin Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-1

Default Mapping for ASC/3 and ASC/3-2070 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-1
Default Mapping for ASC/3-LX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-2

xiv ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Table of Contents

I/O Mode Bits (3 per unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-4

Connector D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-7

Port 3B 25-pin Telemetry Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-9

CU Port 1 SDLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J-10

Type 1 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J-11

Port 2/C50S Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J-11

Port 3A EIA-232 Telemetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J-12

Port 3B 9-pin FSK Telemetry Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J-12

Appendix K - BIU Connector Pin Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-1

Appendix L - Logic Processor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L-1

DRAFT

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L-1

General LP Programming Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L-2

IF Condition – Testable Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-2
THEN/ELSE – Executable Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-5
Logic Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-7

Testable Elements in the IF Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L-9

Phase Testable Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-9
Ring Timer Testable Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-10
Ring Input Testable Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-12
Overlap Testable Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-13
Coordinator Testable Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-14
Preemptor Testable Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-15
Detector Testable Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-17
Time-of-Day (TOD) Testable Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-18
Logic Processor (LP) Testable Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-19
CIB & COB Testable Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-19
Miscellaneous Testable Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-19

Executable Elements in THEN/ELSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-20

Phase Output Executable Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-20
Overlap Output Executable Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-20
Detector Input Executable Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-21
Ring Input Executable Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-21
Unit Input Executable Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-22
Phase Input Executable Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-24
Logic Processor (LP) Executable Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-25

ASC/3 Programming Manual xv

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Table of Contents

Miscellaneous Executable Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-25

Appendix M - Hardware Diagnostic Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-1

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-1

33279G1 – ASC-2100 A Connector Loop Back Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-2

33279G2 – ASC-2100 B Connector Loop Back Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-3

33279G3 – ASC-2100 C Connector Loop Back Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-4

33279G4 – ASC-2100 D Connector Loop Back Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-5

33279G5 – 25-Pin FSK Loop Back Diagnostic Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-6

33279G6 – 9-Pin FSK Loop Back Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-7

33279G7 – 15-Pin SDLC Loop Back Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-7

DRAFT

33279G8 – 25-Pin Port 2 Loop Back Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-7

100-1044-501 – 20-Pin Telemetry Interface Loopback Connector . . .M-7

33279G10 – 9-Pin Port 3A Test Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-8

Ethernet Crossover Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-8

32864G1 – ASC-2S/1000 Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-8

Appendix N - Pretimed Controller Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-1

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-1

Pretimed Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-1

Pretimed Operation During Coordinated Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-2

Appendix O - Boot Mode Hyperterminal Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-1

Appendix P - ASC/3-2070 Software Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-1

Appendix Q - Diamond Intersection Application Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-1

Diamond Intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-1

Default Database Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-2

Diamond Menus and Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-3
Diamond Sequence & Phase Ring Assignment, MM-1-1-5-1 . . . . . Q-3
Diamond Phase Compatibility, MM-1-1-5-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-4
Diamond Backup Prevent, MM-1-1-5-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-5
Default Overlaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-6
Default Channel Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-6
Selection of Diamond Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-7

xvi ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Table of Contents

Switching Sequences/Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Q-8

Phase Timing and Detector Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Q-9

Four-Phase Diamond . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-10

Four-Phase Diamond Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-10
Sequence and Concurrency Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-10
Four-Phase Diamond Detector Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-12
Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-13

Three-Phase Diamond . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-14

Three-Phase Diamond Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-14
Sequence and Concurrency Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-14
Three-Phase Diamond Detector Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-16
Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-17
DRAFT

Separate Intersections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-18

Separate Intersection Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-18
Sequence and Concurrency Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-18
Separate Intersection Diamond Detector Programming . . . . . . . . Q-20
Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-21

NEMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-22
Sequence and Concurrency Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-22
ASC/3 Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-24
Controller Start/Flash, MM-2-5, PWR START SEQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-24
Coordinator Active Pattern, MM-3-2, SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-24
Time Base Active Step, See MM-5-4, CONTROLLER SEQ . . . . . . . Q-24
Commanded and Runtime Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-24

Controller Programming Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-25

Pre-Programmed Database Selection Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-25
Phase Ring Sequence and Assignment Screen, MM-1-1-5-1 . . . . Q-26
Phase Compatibility Screen, MM-1-1-5-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-27
Backup Prevent Phases Screen, MM-1-1-5-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-28

NEMA Sequence Charts for Four-Phase Diamond . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-29

Sequences Starting From Phases 2 and 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-29
Sequences Starting From Phases 3 and 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-30
Sequences Starting From Phases 4 and 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-31
Sequences Starting From Phases 1 and 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-32
Sequences Starting From Phases 1 and 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-33
Sequences Starting From Phases 1 and 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-34

Appendix R - Warning Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-1

ASC/3 Programming Manual xvii

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Table of Contents

Configuration Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-2

Controller Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-4
Coordinator Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-9
Preemptor/TSP Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-10
Time Base Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-13
Detector Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-14

Appendix S - CIB/COB Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1

Controller Input Buffer (CIB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1

Controller Output Buffer (COB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-8

Appendix T - Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .T-1
DRAFT

Acronyms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .T-1
Controller Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .T-2
Abbreviations in Connector Pin Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-14

xviii ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 1
Introduction
Purpose of this Manual 1

This programming manual gives procedures for the Econolite Advanced System
Controllers, Series 3 (ASC/3). It is written for qualified programmers and operators of
traffic controllers. Use this manual to program and operate the traffic signal controllers
given below:
 The Econolite ASC/3
Or
 The Econolite Advanced Transportation Controller (ATC) Model 2070 Controller
Unit with ASC/3-2070 software
Or
 The Econolite Advanced Transportation Controller (ATC) Model 2070 Controller
Unit with a 2070-1C CPU module and ASC/3-LX software

Note • ATC acronyms used in this document have two different meanings:
 The “ATC” in “ATC 2070 Controller” is part of the name of a controller that
conforms to a Caltrans standard.
 The “ATC” associated with ASC/3-LX software refers to software that runs
on an engine board that was designed to ATC Standard v06.0x. The
2070-1C CPU is a host module with an ATC-standard engine board mounted
on top.

The instructions in this programming manual tell you how to enter software control
parameters into an ASC/3 or 2070 with ASC/3-2070 or ASC/3-LX software. The
purpose is to correctly configure the controller for both vehicular and pedestrian traffic
patterns in the pre-defined traffic area.

Note • The ASC/3-LX software is a Linux version of the ASC/3 software designed to
operate on an Econolite 2070-1C CPU module. Linux is an operating system patterned
after Unix and is a free and open source software.

Use these instructions to do initial system configuration and later to do updates, as

necessary. You may need to change the controller parameters for changes in both vehicular
and pedestrian traffic patterns, direction of traffic flows, and time-of-day traffic variations.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 1-1

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Introduction
Contents of this Manual

Contents of this Manual 1

This manual is divided into 14 chapters, followed by the appendices. Where there are
differences between the ASC/3 and the ASC/3-2070 or ASC/3-LX , there are individual
sections for each type of software. However, most of the information is the same.

Chapters 1

Description Contents

Chapter 1, Introduction Describes the purpose and content of this document.

Chapter 2, Installation Procedures This has two sections, one for the ASC/3 series and one for the 2070
series of controllers.
Gives instructions and precautions for when you unpack, install, and
store the controller hardware. This chapter has two tables: Cable
Connector Part Numbers and Equipment Environmental
Specifications.
Chapter 3, Equipment Descriptions This has two sections, one for each type of controller. It describes the
physical and functional features of each of the possible models of the
controllers included in this manual. It also lists the general
Operational Features in the system Main Menu.
Chapter 4, Keypads and Displays for This describes the basic features and functions of the front panel
ASC/3 and 2070 keypads and displays for both an ASC/3 and a 2070 with
ASC/3-2070 or ASC/3-LX Software.
Chapter 5, MAIN MENU and This starts with a summary of the data and/or status selections on the
Screen Navigation Main Menu (MM) screen. Then it tells you how to navigate
 To the Main Menu
 To a Submenu
 In a screen(s)
Chapter 6, Configuration, 1 Controller Sequence
MM-1
2 Phase in Use/Exclusive Pedestrian
3 Load Switch Assignment
4 Port 1 (SDLC)
5 Communication Ports
6 Enable Logging
7 Display/Access
8 Logic Processor

1-2 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Introduction
Chapters

Description Contents

Chapter 7, Controller, 1 Timing Plans

MM-2
2 Vehicle Overlaps
3 Vehicle/Pedestrian Overlaps
4 Guaranteed Minimum Time
5 Start/Flash Data
6 Option Data
7 Pre-Timed Mode
8 Phase Recall

Chapter 8, Coordinator, 1 Coordinator Options

MM-3
2 Coordinator Patterns
3 Split Patterns
4 Auto Permissive Minimum Green
5 Split Demand

Chapter 9, Preempt/TSP/SCP, Note • TSP = Transit Signal Priority and

MM-4 SCP = Signal Control and Prioritization
1 Preempt Plan 1-10

2 Enable Preempt Filtering & TSP/SCP

3 TSP/SCP Plan 1-6
4 TSP/SCP Split Pattern

Chapter 10, Time Base. 1 Clock/Calendar Data

MM-5
2 Action Plan
3 Day Plan/Event
4 Schedule Number
5 Exception Days

ASC/3 Programming Manual 1-3

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Introduction
Chapters

Description Contents

Chapter 11, Detectors, 1 Vehicle Detector Phase Assignment

MM-6
2 Vehicle Detector Setup
3 Pedestrian Detector Input Assignment
4 Log Intervals/Speed Detector Setup
5 Vehicle Detector Diagnostics
6 Pedestrian Detector Diagnostics

Chapter 12, Status Displays, 1 Controller

MM-7
2 Coordinator
3 Preemption/TSP/SCP
4 TBC/Action Plan
5 Communications
6 Detectors
7 Flash/SDLC/MMU
8 Inputs/Outputs

Chapter 13, Utilities, 1 Copy

MM-8
2 Reserved
3 Print
4 Transfer
5 Sign On
6 Log Buffers
7 Software Modules

Chapter 14, Diagnostics Information, Information about the location of diagnostic operations data
MM-9

1-4 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Introduction
Appendices

Appendices 1

Description Contents

Appendix A, ASC/3, This menu tree shows the hierarchy of all the ASC/3 screens,
ASC/3-2070 & ASC/3-LX Menu starting at the Main Menu. It shows what keys to press to access each
Tree screen.
Appendix B, ASC/3 Screens Illustrations of all the screens in the ASC/3 and 2070 with
ASC/3-2070 or ASC/3-LX software
Appendix C, Reserved
Appendix D, Program Reference A blank copy of the ASC/3 Program Reference Card.
Card Use this to establish the programming criteria for your specific
controller operating parameters.
Appendix E, Event Log Messages A list of error messages and flash status condition messages
Appendix F, ASC/3 Hardware Illustrations of all screens that are used with the Hardware
Diagnostic Screens Diagnostics programs
Appendix G, Part Number and
Software File Management
Appendix H, Coordination Pattern A table that defines the Coordination pattern selected when the
interconnect format is TS2 or STD (COS)
Appendix I, ASC/3 Boot Menu A tree diagram that shows the ASC/3 Boot Menu tree
Tree
Appendix J, Interface Connector Pin A pin list for each interface connector
Lists
Appendix K, BIU Connector Pin Pin lists and function assignments for the Terminal & Facilities and
Lists the Detector Rack Bus Interface Units (BIUs)
Appendix L, Logic Processor A list of all the testable elements available to the IF Condition and
Operation executable elements available to the THEN and the ELSE Elements
— used when you configure logic gates
Appendix M, Hardware Diagnostic Interconnection information for the set of Loop Back Cables —
Cables used when you do Diagnostic tests on the controller
Appendix N, Pretimed Controller Pre-timed controller operation information
Operation
Appendix O, Boot Mode Reserved for future use
Hyperterminal Transfer

ASC/3 Programming Manual 1-5

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Introduction
Appendices

Description Contents

Appendix P, ASC/3-2070 Reserved for future use

Software Utility
Appendix Q, Diamond Intersection
Application Notes
Appendix R, Warning Checks
Appendix S, CIB/COB Tables CIB = Controller Input Buffer
COB = Controller Output Buffer
Appendix T, Glossary

1-6 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 2
Installation Procedures
Introduction 2

ASC/3 Installation Instructions 2

If you have an ASC/3 controller, use these installation instructions, given in the
paragraphs below:
Unpacking on page 2-1
ASC/3 Installation on page 2-2
ASC/3 Preparation on page 2-2
ASC/3 Cable Connectors and Part Numbers on page 2-4
ASC/3 Environmental Operation Specifications on page 2-4
ASC/3 Software Installation on page 2-5
ASC/3 Storage/Shipping on page 2-5

2070 Installation Instructions 2

If you have a 2070 controller with ASC/3-2070 or ASC/3-LX software, use these
installation instructions, given in the paragraphs below:
Unpacking on page 2-1
2070 Installation on page 2-6
2070 Hardware Requirements on page 2-6
ASC/3-2070 or ASC/3-LX Software Installation on page 2-6

Unpacking
Your ASC/3 or 2070 controller is packed in a specially-designed protective shipping
carton. All necessary precautions have been taken to make sure that equipment arrives
intact and in proper working order. However, to make sure that there is no shipping
damage, use the procedure below when you unpack the controller.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 2-1

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Installation Procedures
ASC/3 Installation

To unpack the controller:

1 Before you open the shipping container, carefully inspect it for damage. If the
container is damaged, unpack the controller unit in the presence of the carrier.
2 Save the packing materials because they have been specially designed to protect the
controller during shipment. If it is necessary to ship the controller again, you must use
the special packing materials.
3 Carefully inspect the controller for damage.

4 Examine for broken wires, broken connectors, loose components, bent panels, and
dents or scratches on the enclosure.
5 If you find any physical damage, tell the carrier.

ASC/3 Installation 2

ASC/3 Preparation 2

Install ASC/3-1000, ASC/3-2100, and ASC/3-RM controllers in a location where the

front panel is easily accessible. Leave adequate room around the controllers so they will be
easy to remove. Take care to make sure vents on the backside of the shelf-mount
controllers are not blocked. For all controllers, before you apply AC power, obey the
procedures that follow:

For the controller:

1 Loosen the two thumb screws at the top of the panel, and open the front panel.

2 Make sure that all modules are secured correctly and all connectors are in place.
3 Examine the unit to make sure that all ASC/3 socket-mounted components are
correctly seated.

On the Processor/Power Supply Board:

1 Find the battery jumper JP-2 next to connector J11. During shipping or storage, this
jumper is normally placed in the OFF (center-to-right, 2-3) position.
2 To activate the backup battery, move jumper JP-2 to the ON (center-to-left, 1-2)
position.

2-2 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Installation Procedures
ASC/3 Preparation

Processor/Power Supply Board (top left on the front panel)

IMPORTANT • If the intersection cabinet is equipped with an MMU or CMU that latches
Fault Monitor (FM) or Controller Voltage Monitor (CVM), you must set the monitor
power-on flash time on the MMU/CMU to nine seconds or more.
For setting instructions, refer to the MMU/CMU manufacturer manual.

The controller is now ready for installation. Cable connector part numbers are shown
below. For pin lists for all interface connectors, refer to Appendix J, Interface Connector Pin
Lists and Appendix K, BIU Connector Pin Lists.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 2-3

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Installation Procedures
ASC/3 Cable Connectors and Part Numbers

ASC/3 Cable Connectors and Part Numbers 2

Connector Cable Connector Econolite Part No.

A (ASC/3-1000) and
Rear Connector MS-3106-18-1S 44181P1
(ASC/3-RM 1000, TS2-T1 only)
A (ASC/3-2100) MS-3116-22-55S 44143P1
B (ASC/3-2100) MS-3116-22-55P 44143P2
C (ASC/3-2100) MS-3116-24-61P 44143P3
D (ASC/3-2100) AMP #205842-1 31163P2
SDLC (Port 1) CANNON DAU-15P 54665P4
TERMINAL (Port 2) CANNON DBU-25P 54665P7
TELEMETRY (Port 3A) CANNON DEU-9S 54647P9
TELEMETRY (Port 3B)
(Optional 9-pin) CANNON DEU-9S 54647P9
(Optional 25-pin) CANNON DBU-25S 54647P6
C11 AMP #206305-1 31163P29
Rear Connectors,
ASC/3-RM (C1) AMP #201692-3 (connector) 37134P2
C1
AMP #202119-2 (shell) 37134P12

ASC/3 Environmental Operation Specifications 2

The ASC/3 controller meets or exceeds the NEMA environmental standards for traffic
control equipment, summarized below.

NEMA TS 2-2003 SECTION 2:

Category NEMA Environmental Requirement

Ambient Temperature Operating Range: -34°C to +74°C

Storage Range: -45°C to +85°C
Humidity Relative humidity is not to exceed 95% over the temperature
range of +4.4°C to +43.3°C

2-4 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Installation Procedures
ASC/3 OS Support

Category NEMA Environmental Requirement

Vibration The controller will maintain its programmed functions and

physical integrity when subjected to a vibration of up to 0.5g at
5 to 30 cycles per second, applied in each of the three mutually
perpendicular planes.
Shock The controller will not suffer either permanent mechanical
deformation or any damage that renders the unit inoperable,
when subjected to a shock of 10g applied in each of the three
mutually perpendicular planes.

ASC/3 OS Support 2

There are 2 versions of ASC/3 OS depending on the supplied AC power type. With 60 Hz
power, OS version 1.xx.xx is required. With 50 Hz power, OS version 2.xx.xx is required.

ASC/3 Software Installation 2

To install software, refer to ASC/3 Utility instruction that comes with the Controller
Software release package.

ASC/3 Storage/Shipping 2

If it is necessary to store or ship an ASC/3 controller that is equipped with a backup

battery, move the battery jumper JP-2 to the OFF (center-to-right, 2-3) position.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 2-5

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Installation Procedures
2070 Installation

2070 Installation 2

You install software and maintain the system through a serial port on the PC or laptop and
the front panel port, C50S, and Ethernet port on the 2070 controller.

2070 Hardware Requirements 2

The hardware requirements are:

 A computer that has a serial port.
 A serial download cable (either part # 35119G20, 21 or 22, depending on the length
needed). The wiring configuration is illustrated below:

 Cross-over Ethernet cable, or regular Ethernet cable going through a network switch.

ASC/3-2070 or ASC/3-LX Software Installation 2

To install software, refer to the ASC/3-2070 or ASC/3-LX Utility instruction that comes
with every Controller Software release package.

2-6 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Installation Procedures
Supporting Windows Applications

Supporting Windows Applications 2

Below are listed several Windows applications that are included in the ASC/3 software
package to help you manage the controller software. For more information, refer to the
respective manual — also in the software package.

Name Functions

ASC/3 Utility Only for ASC/3 & ASC/3-RM (RackMount)

controllers
 Download application, OS, and database to the
controller.
 Upload logs and database to the controller.
ASC/3-2070 Utility Only for 2070 controllers with ASC/3-2070 software
 Download application, OS, and database to the
controller.
 Upload logs and database to the controller.
ASC/3-LX Utility Only for ASC/3-LX software
 Download application, OS, and database to the
controller.
 Upload logs and database to the controller.
ASC/3 Configurator I/O: mapping, copying, and comparison
Timing parameters: programming, copying, and
comparison
ASC/3-LX Configurator Only for ASC/3-LX software
Timing parameters: programming, copying, and
comparison
ASC/3 Security File Manager* Program front panel access security for up to 50 users.

* For information about the ASC/3 Security File Manager, refer to Front Panel Access
Security on page 4-13 and Security Access, MM-1-7-3 on page 6-55.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 2-7

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
For your notes:

2-8 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 3
Equipment Descriptions
Introduction 3

If you have an ASC/3 controller, refer to these equipment descriptions:

ASC/3 Controllers, General Features on page 3-2
Equipment Enclosure Features on page 3-3
Central Processing Unit (CPU) on page 3-3
Power Supply on page 3-3
ASC/3 System Operating Characteristics on page 3-4
ASC/3 Inputs/Outputs on page 3-4
ASC/3-1000 and ASC/3-RM 1000 (TS2-T1 only) Connector on page 3-5
ASC/3-2100 Connectors on page 3-5
ASC/3-RM (C1) Connectors on page 3-5
If you have an 2070 controller, refer to these equipment descriptions:
The 2070 Family on page 3-5
2070 Modules on page 3-8

ASC/3 Programming Manual 3-1

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Equipment Descriptions
ASC/3 Controllers, General Features

ASC/3 Controllers, General Features 3

The ASC/3 Controllers include two shelf-mount models, ASC/3-1000 and ASC/3-2100,
and two rack-mount models, ASC/3-RM 1000 (TS2-T1 only) and ASC/3-RM (C1),
shown below. As you can see, all the ASC/3 Controllers have the same displays and
keypads on the front panels. However, the connectors and fuses are different::
 The ASC/3-1000 has one fuse and one input/output connector.
 The ASC/3-2100 has two fuses and four input/output connectors.
 The ASC/3-RM 1000 (TS2-T1 only) has one fuse with an input/output connector at
the rear.
 The ASC/3-RM (C1) has one fuse with C1/C11 connectors at the rear.
The ASC/3 controller designs use the latest microprocessor, display, and keypad
technology. Fewer components increase overall system reliability with an efficient use of
space. Each controller has two main electronic modules that you can access without
extender cards.
There are minor differences in the databases for the ASC/3-1000, ASC/3-2100 and
ASC/3-RM (C1) because the hardware platforms are different. These differences are
clearly indicated in the text describing the data entries.
Only brief descriptions of the physical characteristics are included in this document.
Detailed physical specifications and descriptions are included in the respective ASC/3
maintenance manuals.

ASC/3-1000, Shelf Mount ASC/3-2100, Shelf Mount

3-2 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Equipment Descriptions
Equipment Enclosure Features

ASC/3-RM, RackMount, Front Panel

ASC/3-RM (C11), Rear View ASC/3-RM 1000 (TS2-T1 only), Rear View

Equipment Enclosure Features 3

All ASC/3 controllers are enclosed in an aluminum enclosure, designed for either shelf-
mount or rack-mount in a street-side cabinet.

Central Processing Unit (CPU) 3

All four ASC/3 controllers use the Motorola MPC862 Power PC Reduced Instruction Set
Computer (RISC) Processor and, as a result, can all run the same software programs and
use the same database configuration. For these reasons, use this programming manual for
all four ASC/3 controllers.

Power Supply 3

Each ASC/3 controller has an easily-accessible power supply assembly.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 3-3

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Equipment Descriptions
ASC/3 System Operating Characteristics

ASC/3 System Operating Characteristics 3

An ASC/3 functions as a semi-actuated or fully-actuated traffic controller unit in

accordance with the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Standards
Publication TS2-2003.
An ASC/3 operates as a 16-phase controller with any combination of 16 vehicle phases,
16 pedestrian phases, 16 timed overlaps, and four timing rings. A configuration file may be
specifically programmed to meet customer configuration requirements. In addition to the
standard controller capabilities, an ASC/3 has outstanding software and hardware features
that greatly simplify programming, operation, monitoring, and maintenance.
Programming is completely menu-driven and in most cases involves only option selections
or numeric value data entries. Control flexibility is provided by numerous programming
options and enhancements that include time-base coordination, preemption, and
diagnostic capabilities. You can monitor real-time controller activity with the dynamic
status displays, which together show all controller dynamic parameters.

ASC/3 Inputs/Outputs 3

All four of the ASC/3 models — the ASC/3-1000 and ASC/3-2100, and the two rack-
mount models, ASC/3-RM 1000 (TS2-T1 only) and ASC/3-RM (C1) ASC/3 — have the
same control functions, but use different hardware input/output (I/O) configurations to
interface with other components in a traffic control cabinet.
All ASC/3 models include three serial communication channels. The Port 1 channel
(SDLC) is used to exchange data with a Malfunction Management Unit (MMU), retrieve
vehicle detector data from detector rack Bus Interface Units (BIUs) and route I/O
functions through Terminal and Facility BIUs. Port 2 and Port 3A are serial
communication ports that use an RS-232 interface. An optional Port 3B supplies either a
25-pin or 9-pin System Communication port that uses frequency-shift-keying (FSK), or a
5-pin or 9-pin Serial Communication port; this port is compatible with the ASC/2 and
ASC-8000 controllers.

The Port interfaces for ASC/3 series are:

 Port 1 NEMA TS2 3.3.1
 Port 2 NEMA TS2 3.3.2
 Port 3A NEMA TS2 3.3.3-specified connector used for RS232 communication
 Port 3B (Optional plug-in module) NEMA TS2 3.3.3-specified connector used for
FSK communication

3-4 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Equipment Descriptions
ASC/3-1000 and ASC/3-RM 1000 (TS2-T1 only) Connector

ASC/3-1000 and ASC/3-RM 1000 (TS2-T1 only) Connector 3

The single NEMA-specified “A” connector on the front panel of an ASC/3-1000

controller and the rear panel of an ASC/3-RM 1000 (TS2-T1 only) meets NEMA TS2
Type 1 requirements, as referenced in NEMA TS2 3.3.4.

ASC/3-2100 Connectors 3

The ASC/3-2100 controller has NEMA specified “A”, “B”, “C” connectors and meets the
NEMA TS2 Type 2 requirements, referenced in NEMA TS2 3.3.5. In addition, an
Econolite specific “D” connector allows the model 2100 to replace any NEMA TS1,
NEMA TS2, ASC-8000 or other controllers (with adapter cables).

ASC/3-RM (C1) Connectors 3

The ASC/3-RM (C1) rack-mount controller has C1/C11 connectors.

The 2070 Family 3

2070 L 3

2070 L Front View

2070 L Rear View

The 2070 L uses the 2070-1B and 2070-2A field I/O modules with a C1 connector. This
configuration replaces 170-type controllers, and is compatible with the 170 I/O
connectors.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 3-5

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Equipment Descriptions
2070 LN

2070 LN 3

2070 LN Front View

2070-8 Module

2070 LN Rear View

The 2070 LN replaces a TS1 or TS Type 2 controller and contains one 2070-2B module
and a 2070-8 NEMA field I/O module.

3-6 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Equipment Descriptions
2070 ITS

2070 ITS 3

2070 ITS Front View

2070 ITS Rear View

The 2070 ITS replaces an ITS or TS2 Type 1 and has 2070-1B and 2070-2B modules.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 3-7

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Equipment Descriptions
2070 Modules

2070 Modules 3

With each model, you can install the cards shown in the list below into the serial
motherboard through the indicated slots of the card cage.

Slot

Module
Type Model No. Description A1 A2 A3 A4 A5

CPU 2070-1B Processor Card running OS/9, X

TEES 1999, TEES 2002
2070-1E CPU Lite, running OS/9, X
TEES 2009
2070-1C CPU Host Module with ATC Engine X
Board, running Linux OS
I/O 2070-2A Field I/O Module with C1 and C11 X X
connectors, TEES 2002
2070-2B Dual SDLC Interface Card for TS1 X
or TS2 Type 2
2070-2E Field I/O Module with C1 and C11 X X
connectors, TEES 2009
2070-2N Field I/O module for TS2 Type 1 X X
Comm 2070-6A Dual 1200-baud FSK Modem X X
2070-6B Dual zero 9600-baud Modem X X
2070-7A Has a Dual async Serial X X
Communications Module, with
hardware flow control for external
modem interfaces

3-8 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Equipment Descriptions
ASC/3 NEMA & 2070 HW Differences

ASC/3 NEMA & 2070 HW Differences 3

ASC/3 2070 Hardware ASC/3 Hardware

Serial Port Support: SP1/C21S, SP2/C22S, Port 2, Port 3A, Port 3B, Port1(SDLC)
and SP4/C50S
8-line LCD display – user has to scroll 16-line LCD display
down to see the content of the 16 line
display. Next key is recommended to scroll.
10BaseT Ethernet 10/100 BaseT Ethernet
External storage: Data key External storage: Token key
2070 Keyboard is remapped based on Keyboard is native to ASC/3 Controller
ASC/3 keyboard. An keyboard overlay is
available in both the manual or can be
ordered
NEMA TS1 cabinet requires a 2070-8. ABCD connectors are included in
ASC/3-2100
NEMA TS2 Type 1 cabinet requires a SDLC connector is included in ASC/3
2070-2N Port 1
NEMA TS2 Type 2 cabinet requires a ABCD connectors & SDLC connector are
2070-2B and 2070-8 included in ASC/3-2100
300 series cabinets requires a 2070-2A 300 series cabinets require an ABCD to C1
module adaptor.
FSK requires 6B or 6A module. ECPIP on FSK requires a Telemetry module.
6A module with ASC/2M at 1200 bps has
not been proven to work.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 3-9

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
For your notes:

3-10 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 4
Keypads and Displays for ASC/3 and 2070
Introduction 4

This chapter describes and gives basic operating procedures for the Function Keypads,
Numeric Keypads, and the Liquid Crystal Displays (LCDs) for both the ASC/3 and 2070
Controllers.
Although the functions of the ASC/3 and 2070 are almost the same, the Keypads and
LCDs have differences, as listed below.

Keypads 4

Note • In this manual, bold face type identifies a key on a keypad.

For example, “Press 1.” = “Press the #1 key.” At times, to clarify, we insert the word “Key”.
For example, “In an alpha data field, Key 2 enters an A.”

The functions for an ASC/3 Controller are written on the keys. However, for a 2070
Controller with ASC/3-2070 or ASC/3-LX software, the keys are different. To know
which keys are equivalent to the functions, refer to the table below.

Function ASC/3 Key 2070 Key

Main Menu MAIN MENU A

Sub Menu SUB MENU ESC

Toggle Forward 0 YES or 0

Toggle Back 8 NO or 8

Next Data NEXT DATA D

Next Screen NEXT SCREEN NEXT

Next Page NEXT PAGE +

Status Display STATUS DISPLAY E

Help HELP F

Enter ENTER ENT

ASC/3 Programming Manual 4-1

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Keypads and Displays for ASC/3 and 2070
Liquid Crystal Displays (LCDs)

Function ASC/3 Key 2070 Key

Special Function SPEC FUNC *

Clear CLEAR C

When in a hyperlink field, to SPEC FUNC then NEXT DATA B

follow the hyperlink

For the 2070, an alternative way to know which key to use for each function is to install a
keypad overlay on the front panel. Refer to 2070 Keypad Overlay on page 4-5 for an
illustration of a 2070 keypad overlay.

Liquid Crystal Displays (LCDs) 4

The dimensions of the LCDs of the two types of controllers are given in the table below.

Type of Controller Dimensions of the LCD

ASC/3 40 characters wide by 16 lines high

2070 40 characters wide by 8 lines high

As much as possible, to prevent scrolling with the 2070, the text of the displays is written
to fit in 8 lines.

Note • Usually, in this manual, the 16-line displays for the ASC/3 are shown. With the
2070 displays, blank lines are deleted to fit the text into the 8-line display.

ASC/3-Specific Functions and Display 4

ASC/3 LCD Screen 4

The User Interface module contains an LCD formatted as 16 lines of 40 characters, the
display contrast control, the display backlight circuit, the display heater circuit, the keypad
matrix and the system buzzer. The display contains its own control and drive electronics.
The User Interface connector, J3, connects the display to the processor module.

ASC/3 Function and Numeric Keypads 4

The Function Keypad, shown below, contains a group of keys that provides control of
specific functions used within the ASC/3 system. Generally they control selection of
displays and navigation in and between display screen pages. Refer to the paragraphs that
follow.

4-2 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Keypads and Displays for ASC/3 and 2070
2070-Specific Functions and Display

To adjust the backlight contrast:

 Press the two small arrow-shaped keys at the left of the cursor/enter array.

The Numeric Keypad, shown below, contains a group of numbered keys, 0 thru 9, used
to enter numerical information into the system memory. This keypad also has two other
keys, SPEC FUNC (Special Function) and CLEAR. There are also alphabetic characters,
special characters, and words printed above the keys to show other functions for which
they are used. Refer to the paragraphs that follow.

2070-Specific Functions and Display 4

2070 LCD and Key Click 4

The Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) has 8 lines of 40 characters with a backlight. Use a knob
on the front panel to control t0he contrast of the LCD. There is an optional key click that
operates to make a sound when you press a key. You can enable/disable the key click with
MM-1-7-2; refer to ASC/3 & 2070 Key Click and Backlight on page 4-6.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 4-3

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Keypads and Displays for ASC/3 and 2070
AUX Switch

AUX Switch 4

When the AUX switch is ON, it activates CIB bit 424 and you can perform different
actions through Logic Processor statements — for example, stop time and interval
advance.

2070 Keypads 4

Use the keypads, shown below, to control the 2070 system. To map the 2070 keypad to
that of an ASC/3 Controller, you can order an overlay to install over the keypads; refer to
2070 Keypad Overlay on page 4-5. For explanations of the key functions, refer to ASC/3 &
2070 Key Functions on page 4-6.

2070 Keypads

4-4 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Keypads and Displays for ASC/3 and 2070
2070 Keypad Overlay

2070 Keypad Overlay 4

A keypad overlay labels the functions of the 2070 keys that are used with ASC/3-2070 and
ASC/3-LX software. You can order a keypad overlay, as shown below, and install it on
the front panel around the key pads.

2070 Display Contrast Adjust Knob 4

There is a CONTRAST knob on the right side of the front panel. To adjust the contrast
of the LCD, turn this knob.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 4-5

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Keypads and Displays for ASC/3 and 2070
ASC/3 & 2070 Key Click and Backlight

ASC/3 & 2070 Key Click and Backlight 4

Use Display Options, MM-1-7-2, to enable/disable Key Click and Backlight. Press 0 (for
2070, press YES), toggle, to enable (YES) or disable (NO) these functions.
 When the Key Click function is enabled, each time you press a key, you hear the sound
of a “beep”.
 When the Backlight function is enabled, the LCD backlight comes ON.

MM-1-7-2

DISPLAY OPTIONS
KEY CLICK ENABLE.................... YES

BACKLIGHT ENABLE.................... YES

LED MODE........................... AUTO

MAIN STATUS DISPLAY MODE....... ADVANCED

ASC/3 & 2070 Key Functions 4

MAIN MENU or A 4

To show the Main Menu (MM):

1 Press and release MAIN MENU (for 2070, press and release A).

The main menu lists nine submenus that contain the different data entry and status
displays.
2 While the Main Menu is in view, press one of the keys 1 thru 9 that relates to the
desired submenu title.
The submenu comes into view.
For example, while viewing the Main Menu screen, press 2 and the Controller Submenu
screen comes into view.

MAIN MENU (MM)

MAIN MENU

1. CONFIGURATION 6. DETECTORS
2. CONTROLLER 7. STATUS DISPLAY
3. COORDINATOR 8. UTILITIES
4. PREEMPTOR/TSP 9. DIAGNOSTICS
5. TIME BASE

4-6 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Keypads and Displays for ASC/3 and 2070
SUBMENU or ESC

To immediately return to the Main Menu from any other screen, press and release
MAIN MENU (for 2070, press A).

SUBMENU or ESC 4

From any screen, to go rearward to see its submenu screen:

 Press and release SUBMENU (for 2070 press and release ESC).

 If you continue to press this key, you will move back through previous submenu
screens until you get to the Main Menu.

NEXT DATA or D 4

To search the controller for non-zero data:

1 Press and release NEXT DATA (for 2070, press D)

A prompt asks for direction.

2 Press a cursor (arrow) key to select the direction of the search. There are two possible
directions for this function. The up/left arrows (▲,◄) have the same effect and
down/right arrows (▼, ►) have the same effect.
The controller searches for non-zero data and goes to that screen and lets you search
through data screens for valid entries.

NEXT SCREEN or NEXT 4

To move a screen forward through the screens in the selected submenu:

 Press NEXT SCREEN (NEXT for 2070)

The arrows at the top right of the screen show the possible direction(s) to access more
screens. If there is only one direction (down or right) the controller automatically goes to
the next screen.

If there are two possible directions:

 When a prompt asks for direction, press an applicable arrow key.

• The next screen in the selected direction comes into view.

• When you get to the end of the screens, the display wraps back to the start.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 4-7

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Keypads and Displays for ASC/3 and 2070
NEXT PAGE or +

NEXT PAGE or + 4

When you press this key you can advance a single page or rapidly advance page-by-page to
the previous or next group of data entry screens (data group) in a submenu.

Single Page Advance:

1 Press and release NEXT PAGE (for 2070 press and release +).

A prompt asks for direction.

2 Press the applicable cursor up or down arrow key to go to the next page in that
direction.

Rapid Page Advance:

1 Press and hold NEXT PAGE (for 2070, press and hold +).

A prompt asks direction.

2 While you continue to hold NEXT PAGE/+, press the applicable cursor arrow key until
you get to the page you want.
3 Release the keys.

STATUS DISPLAY or E 4

To go to the main controller Status Display:

 Press STATUS DISPLAY (for 2070, press E).
This screen shows a large variety of current status indications for the intersection(s) being
serviced by this controller. For detailed information about this screen, refer to Main Status
Displays on page 12-2.

HELP or F 4

To show help screens:

1 Move the cursor to a field.

2 Press HELP (for 2070, press F).

The help screens give information about the data entry field or status display at the
cursor location.

To exit from help:

 Press CLEAR (for 2070, press C).

Or
 Press HELP/F again.

4-8 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Keypads and Displays for ASC/3 and 2070
SPEC FUNC then HELP or * then F

SPEC FUNC then HELP or * then F 4

From any screen:

To see general help information about basic ASC/3 functions:

 Press SPEC FUNC then HELP (for 2070, press * then F).

To exit from this help:

 Press CLEAR (for 2070, press C).

Or
 Press HELP/F again.

Cursor Arrow Keys 4

These four keys move the cursor in the direction of the arrow on the key:

up 
down 
right 
left 

To move the cursor a short distance:

 Press and release the arrow key.

To move the cursor at a moderate speed:

 Press and hold the arrow key.
 To stop the cursor, release the key.

ENTER or ENT 4

To store data or to execute a function (as described below):

 Press ENTER (for 2070, press ENT).

After you enter data, to Store Data:

 Press ENTER (for 2070, press ENT).

Or
 Exit the data field (press a cursor arrow key or press a function key to go to the Main
Menu or a Submenu).

ASC/3 Programming Manual 4-9

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Keypads and Displays for ASC/3 and 2070
Number Keys 0 thru 9

To Execute a Function:
 To make sure you do not accidentally execute a major function, the controller requires
you to press ENTER (for 2070, press ENT).
For example, in MM-8-6-3, to clear memory, after you press a number key, there is a
prompt to press ENTER/ENT if you are sure you want to clear the log.

Number Keys 0 thru 9 4

These keys are usually used to enter numeric data into the system programming files. While
viewing a data entry screen, use these keys to enter/select menu options, timing values,
detectors, program steps, addresses and other data entry values. With the auto-repeat
feature, to enter the same number again and again, continuously press a number key.

Vehicle Calls

To make a Vehicle Call:

 Go to any status display, MM-7-X, that has the VEH CALL parameter, and obey the
applicable procedure, below.

To Make a Vehicle Call on: Procedure

All Phases 1 Move the cursor to the second L of VEH CALL

2 Press ENTER (for 2070, press ENT).

One Phase (range 1 thru 16) 1 Move the cursor to the applicable phase, 1 thru 16.

2 Press ENTER (for 2070, press ENT).

One Phase (range 1 thru 10) 1 Move the cursor to anywhere in the VEH CALL
line.
2 Press the applicable number key 1 thru 0.

Alpha-Numeric Keys 4

When you put the cursor at an alphanumeric data entry field, the numeric keypad
automatically enters the alpha mode. For 2 thru 9, the letters you can enter for each
number key are the same as a standard telephone keypad. The characters for Key 1 are
given in an example that follows.

4-10 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Keypads and Displays for ASC/3 and 2070
Toggle Keys: 0,8 or YES,NO

Examples:
 Key 1 can input space $/>#*;\"!@&.?=-1, Key 2 can input a b c, and
Key 3 can input d e f.
 When the keypad is in the alpha mode, when you press a numeric key, the first
character of its character sequence will come into view in the cursor position. For
example, Key 2 enters an A; if you do not press Key 2 again within 2 seconds, the letter
A is entered and you can move the cursor to the next position. If you press Key 2 again
in less than 2 seconds, the letter B comes into view in the cursor position. If you press
Key 2 again and again in less than 2 second intervals, you go through the full sequence
of A B C a b c and 2. If you press Key 2 again (in less than 2 seconds), you can repeat
the sequence.
 Each of the numeric keys (except for Key 1 and Key 0) has a similar sequence in which
you input its alphabetical characters in sequence as capital letters, then lower-case
letters, then the number itself (for Key 3 the sequence is D E F d e f 3); you can repeat
the sequence.
 For Key 1, the sequence is: space $/>#*;\"!@&.?=-1
0/YES and 8/NO are Toggle keys, described in the paragraph that follows.

Toggle Keys: 0,8 or YES,NO 4

 Use Key 0 (for 2070, use YES) to “toggle” between two or more choices at a data entry
field, such as: YES/NO, ON/OFF, enable (X) or disable (.), red/yellow/green, rings
1/2/3/4, etc. The change between its numeric function and Toggle function is
automatic, depending upon the cursor position.
 To toggle in the opposite direction, use Key 8 (for 2070, use NO). This is especially
useful when you program Logic Processor statements in MM-1-8-2, for which there is
a very long sequence of choices. If you know the choice you want is close to the end
of the sequence, to save time, use 8/NO to toggle in the opposite direction, starting at
the end of the sequence. Also use 8/NO if you first toggle with 0/YES through a long
sequence and accidentally pass the selection you want. If this happens, press 8/NO as
necessary to go back to the selection you passed.

Special Function, SPEC FUNC or * 4

Use SPEC FUNC (for 2070, use *), Special Function, to place Pedestrian Calls or Lock
Access to controller data.

Lock Access

To lock access to controller data entry:

 For ASC/3, press SPEC FUNC then STATUS DISPLAY

 For 2070, press * then E.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 4-11

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Keypads and Displays for ASC/3 and 2070
Clear or C

The keypad is locked until you enter supervisor or data change access codes. The Lock
Access function operates only if you entered access codes before.

Clear or C 4

To clear just-typed data or to exit from help screens, as described below, press CLEAR
(for 2070, press C).

Clear Data

To clear a current data entry and restore the previous entry:

 For ASC/3, press CLEAR.

 For 2070, press C.

IMPORTANT • Make sure you use CLEAR (for 2070, C) before you store/enter the data
(with ENTER/ENT, the cursor, or the function keys). After you store the data, CLEAR/C has
no effect.

Exit Help Screens

After you press HELP (for 2070, F) and view the help screen:

To exit from the help screen:

 For ASC/3, press CLEAR or press HELP again.
 For 2070, press C or press F again.

Arrows for Screen Navigation 4

When only part of the full screen shows on the LCD, at the top right there is an arrow(s).
For example:  . This message is at the top right of the LCD to show that you must
scroll down and to the right to see the full screen.
Possible arrows are: Up , Down , Right , and Left .
In the example above, when you scroll down, the Up arrow comes into view to show that
you can now scroll up to return to the original position. Equally, when you scroll right, the
Left arrow comes into view. Thus, it is possible to see all four arrows at the same time.

Call Simulation with the Keypad 4

User can simulate Vehicle, Pedestrian, Preemptor, or TSP calls from the keypad while in a
Status display. For details, refer to To make a Call on a Display Row: on page 12-2.

4-12 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Keypads and Displays for ASC/3 and 2070
Help, HELP or F

Help, HELP or F 4

When the cursor is at a data entry parameter, in a status screen or in a read-only field, to
read context-sensitive information, press HELP (for 2070, press F).

Exit 4

To exit a screen, press SUBMENU, MAIN MENU, or STATUS DISPLAY

(for 2070, press ESC, A, or E).

Front Panel Access Security 4

Front Panel Security access privileges can be created using the Security Manager software
or through Front Panel MM-1-7-3. Once security is activated, users are required to enter a
security code to get write access. But, if Front Panel access security is not activated, the
controller lets all users access all data and menus.
The system administrator can set access privileges in the security system for up to 50 users.
Then, using their assigned 5-digit access codes, the administrator or authorized users may
access permitted menus to make system configuration changes. The administrator enters
separate menu and data masks for each user. These masks define what data that user may
view (Read-Only), view and modify (Read/Write), or Diagnostic level where user can
perform more advanced diagnostic functions.
When activated, you can also remotely access the security access provisions with remote
NTCIP SNMP messages. These remote messages use a “Community Name” imbedded
within the message to know who is sending the message and his/her level of permitted
access.
After you access the ASC/3, to manually lock the controller against any data entry, press
SPEC FUNC then press STATUS DISPLAY (for 2070, press * then press E). If access codes
are programmed, the controller also automatically locks after no keypad activity for 20
minutes. When the keypad is locked, it stays locked until you enter administrator or user
access codes.
For more information on this security access code feature, refer to the programming
instructions in Security Access, MM-1-7-3 on page 6-55.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 4-13

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
For your notes:

4-14 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 5
MAIN MENU and Screen Navigation
Introduction 5

Start at the Main Menu (MM) screen to program or operate ASC/3 , ASC/3-2070 or
ASC/3-LX software. Throughout this manual, “MM” refers to the Main Menu.

To access the Main Menu screen:

 For ASC/3, press MAIN MENU.

 For ASC/3-2070 or ASC/3-LX software, press A on the left keypad of the 2070.

There are 9 selections on the Main Menu, each of which represents a submenu of a major
system data group.

From the Main Menu, to view or enter data:

 Press the key pad number 1 thru 9 of the related data group.

Start at the Main Menu to navigate to all normally-accessible system data entry and display
screens. Chapters 6 thru 14 tell you about each of these major data groups of an ASC/3
system. The sequence of these chapters (6 thru 14) is the same as the sequence of the
selections (1 thru 9) as described in the Programming Summary table in the next section.

Main Menu 5

Programming Summary 5

The Main Menu has 9 selections, as shown in the illustration below and described in the
table that follows.
Submenus are referenced by the navigation path from the Main Menu. For example,
“MM-1” refers to the Configuration submenu.

MAIN MENU

1. CONFIGURATION 6. DETECTORS
2. CONTROLLER 7. STATUS DISPLAY
3. COORDINATOR 8. UTILITIES
4. PREEMPTOR/TSP 9. DIAGNOSTICS
5. TIME BASE

ASC/3 Programming Manual 5-1

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
MAIN MENU and Screen Navigation
Programming Summary

Main Menu Option Programming Summary

1. CONFIGURATION Access a submenu with 8 data groups that cover controller

sequencing, phases in use/exclusive pedestrian, load switch
assignment, SDLC options, communication ports, event
logging, display/access, and logic processor. Refer to
Chapter 6, Configuration for instructions.
2. CONTROLLER Accesses a submenu with 8 data groups that cover timing
plans, vehicle and ped overlap, guaranteed minimum time,
start flash data, option data, actuated pre-timed mode, and
recall data. Refer to Chapter 7, Controller for instructions.
3. COORDINATOR Accesses a submenu with 5 data groups that cover
Coordinator options, pattern data, split pattern data, auto-
permissive minimum green, and split demand. Refer to
Chapter 8, Coordinator for instructions.
4. PREEMPTOR/TSP/SCP Accesses a submenu with 4 data groups that cover Preempt
Plan 1-10, Enable Preempt Filtering & TSP/SCP,
TSP/SCP Plan 1-6, TSP/SCP Split Pattern. Refer to
Chapter 9, Preempt/TSP/SCP for instructions.
5. TIME BASE Accesses a submenu with 5 data groups that cover
clock/calendar, action plans, schedule, day plan events, and
exception days. Refer to Chapter 10, Time Base for
instructions.
6. DETECTORS Accesses a submenu with 6 data groups that cover vehicle
detector phase select and setup, ped and system detector
assignments, log interval/speed detection, vehicle/ped
detector diagnostics. Refer to Chapter 11, Detectors for
instructions.
7. STATUS DISPLAY Accesses a submenu with 8 data groups that cover all
aspects of Status Display for the entire system. Refer to
Chapter 12, Status Displays for instructions.
8. UTILITIES Accesses a submenu with 7 data groups that cover utilities
for copy, a “reserved” data group, print, transfer, sign on,
log buffers, and software modules. Refer to Chapter 13,
Utilities for instructions.
9. DIAGNOSTICS Accesses an information screen that refers you to
Appendix F, ASC/3 Hardware Diagnostic Screens for
instructions on loading the diagnostic file and its operation.
Refer to Chapter 14, Diagnostics Information for instructions.

5-2 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 MAIN MENU and Screen Navigation
Display Screen Navigation

Display Screen Navigation 5

Basic Screen Navigation

This manual illustrates the displays, discusses each submenu and data entry display, and
gives programming instructions. Note that each display is identified by the keys to press to
access it, for example MM-2-6-1.

Note • For an 2070, press A for MM (to go to the Main Menu).

To go to MM-2-6-1 (Controller Options data entry) from any other screen:

1 Press MAIN MENU (for 2070, press A).

The Main Menu screen, MM, shown in Programming Summary on page 5-1, comes into
view.
2 Press 2 to select the Controller Menu, MM-2, shown below.

MM-2

CONTROLLER SUBMENU

1. TIMING PLANS 5. START/FLASH

2. VEHICLE OVERLAPS 6. OPTION DATA

3. VEH/PED OVERLAPS 7. ACT PRE-TIMED

4. GUAR MIN TIME 8. PHASE RECALL

3 Press 6 to select the Option Data Submenu, MM-2-6, shown below.

MM-2-6

OPTION DATA SUBMENU

1. CONTROLLER OPTIONS

2. EXTENDED OPTIONS

4 Press 1 to select Controller Options, MM-2-6-1, shown below.

Thus, start at the Main Menu to navigate with applicable submenu selections to get to any
normally-accessible data entry or display screen in the system.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 5-3

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
MAIN MENU and Screen Navigation
Horizontal Display Screen Scrolling

Horizontal Display Screen Scrolling 5

Look below at the data entry screen, Controller Options, MM-2-6-1. With an 2070 with
ASC/3-2070 or ASC/3-LX software (8-line display), when you first access it, you see the
screen shown below, at the left. However, because there is not enough horizontal space on
the screen to show all 16 phases, you have to scroll horizontally to view and/or edit the
data for phases 9 thru 16.

MM-2-6-1 MM-2-6-1 (Scroll right)

CONTROLLER OPTIONS  CONTROLLER OPTIONS 

PED CLEAR PROTECT . UNIT RED REVERT 2.0 PED CLEAR PROTECT . UNIT RED REVERT 2.0
PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PHASE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FLASHING GRN PH . . . . . . . . FLASHING GRN PH . . . . . . . .
GUAR PASSAGE.... . . . . . . . . GUAR PASSAGE.... . . . . . . . .
NON-ACT I....... . X . . . X . . NON-ACT I....... . . . . . . . .
NON-ACT II...... . . . X . . . X NON-ACT II...... . . . . . . . .

In the upper right corner of the screen, are arrows (▼ and/or ►) that indicate to scroll
vertically down and/or horizontally right to access more data field. For an ASC/3
controller, there is only the right arrow.

To scroll to the right:

 On the Function keypad, repeatedly press ►.

As you scroll to the right, notice that both right and left arrows are visible (◄ ►). Notice
also that only the Phase columns are scrolled. The top three lines, the data line labels, and
the bottom instruction line do not scroll. When Phase 16 comes into view (shown above,
at the right), only the left arrow (◄) shows to indicate that you cannot go further right.

To return to the original Phase 1 thru 8 display:

 Repeatedly press ◄.

Note • To jump immediately to the right half of the screen, with ASC/3, press
NEXT SCREEN. For a 2070, press NEXT and then the right cursor arrow.

Vertical Display Screen Scrolling 5

In an 2070, to access the other Controller Options in MM-2-6-1...

To scroll vertically down:

 Repeatedly press ▼.

To jump a screen at a time:

 Press NEXT.

5-4 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 MAIN MENU and Screen Navigation
Vertical Display Screen Scrolling

The full MM-2-6-1 screen is shown below.

MM-2-6-1 (Scroll right/down to access)

CONTROLLER OPTIONS
PED CLEAR PROTECT . UNIT RED REVERT 2.0
PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FLASHING GRN PH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GUAR PASSAGE.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NON-ACT I....... . X . . . X . . . . . . . . . .
NON-ACT II...... . . . X . . . X . . . . . . . .
DUAL ENTRY...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COND SERVICE.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COND RESERVICE.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PED RESERVICE... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REST IN WALK.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FLASHING WALK... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PED CLR>YELLOW.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PED CLR>RED..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IGRN + VEH EXT.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

In general, to vertically scroll up/down a screen:

 Press  and ▼.
Illustrated below are the first display of MM-1-1-2 with a 2070 (8-line display), and the full
MM-1-1-2 screen.

MM-1-1-2

PHASE COMPATIBILITY v
6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 . . . . . . . . . . .
6 . . . . . . . . . .

ASC/3 Programming Manual 5-5

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
MAIN MENU and Screen Navigation
Vertical Display Screen Scrolling

MM-1-1-2 (Scroll down to access)

PHASE COMPATIBILITY ^
6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 . . . . . . . . . . .
6 . . . . . . . . . .
7 . . . . . . . . .
8 . . . . . . . .
9 . . . . . . .
10 . . . . . .
11 . . . . .
12 . . . .
13 . . .
14 . .
15 .

For MM-1-1-2, Phase Compatibility, scroll the display up/down to view and/or edit the
compatibility data for phases 7 thru 15.
With ASC/3 (16-line display), you only need to scroll to access the last line.

5-6 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 MAIN MENU and Screen Navigation
Illustrations of the Full Screen

Illustrations of the Full Screen 5

The viewing area of the ASC/3 controller is limited to 40 characters wide by 16 lines high;
the 2070 display is limited to 40 characters wide by 8 lines high. This manual usually shows
full screens, as if there were no limit on the physical size of the display.
The full screen for MM-6-6 is shown below.

MM-6-6 (Scroll down to access)

PED DETECTOR DIAG PLAN[1]

DET COUNTS ACT PRES MULTIPLIER
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 0 1
3 0 0 0 1
4 0 0 0 1
5 0 0 0 1
6 0 0 0 1
7 0 0 0 1
8 0 0 0 1
9 0 0 0 1
10 0 0 0 1
11 0 0 0 1
12 0 0 0 1
13 0 0 0 1
14 0 0 0 1
15 0 0 0 1
16 0 0 0 1

At times, as shown in MM-6-5 below, some data is not shown (in this case, Detector
numbers 9 through 63). Here, it is understood that the same pattern repeats and it is not
necessary to illustrate every line.

MM-6-5 (Detectors 9 thru 63 not shown)

VEH DET DIAG V

VEH DIAG PLAN NUMBER[ 1] | FAILED |
DET COUNT|ACT|PRES| X’S|TIME|CL DELAY|
1 255 255 255 60 255 255
2 0 0 0 1 0 0
3 0 0 0 1 0 0
4 0 0 0 1 0 0
5 0 0 0 1 0 0
6 0 0 0 1 0 0
7 0 0 0 1 0 0
8 0 0 0 1 0 0
// (DET 9 through 63 are not shown)
64 0 0 0 1 0 0

ASC/3 Programming Manual 5-7

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
MAIN MENU and Screen Navigation
2070 and ASC/3 Fast Display Navigation

2070 and ASC/3 Fast Display Navigation 5

To be compatible with ASC/3, most screens are designed as 16 lines or less.

2070
When you go to a screen that has more than 8 lines (such as MM-7-1), the first display that
comes into view shows the top 8 lines, as shown below:

CONTROL[CORD SYS P120] MM/DD/YY|HH:MM:SS

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
PH STAT . G R R G R R R - - - - - - - -
VEH OVL R G R - - - - - - - - - - - - -
PED STAT - D - C - D - D - - - - - - - -
VEH CALL . I I . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PED CALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLAN SPLT:.12|TP:.4|SEQ:.1|ACT:100|DP:4

To show the bottom half of the screen:

 Press NEXT:

R1/PH 04|R2/PH 08|R3/PH ..|R4/PH ..

MGR1 0.0|YEL 0.0|INACTIVE |INACTIVE
PDCL 12.0|FORCE OFF| |
DEN00/000|DEN00/000|DEN00/000|DEN00/000
MAX 00.0|MAX 00.0|MAX 00.0|MAX 00.0
OLA G . |OLB Y 2.9|OLC R . |OLD R .
FUNCTION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
LP FLAG . A . . . A . . . . . . . . . .

To go back to the top display:

 Press NEXT again.
ASC/3
When you go to a screen that has more than 16 lines, the first display that comes into view
shows the top 16 lines.

To show the next (up to 16) lines:

 Press NEXT SCREEN.

Help Screen Navigation

To navigate if Help has more than one screen/page:

 You can scroll one line at a time with the up/down arrow keys.

 To go to the first page from the last page, press NEXT SCREEN.

5-8 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 MAIN MENU and Screen Navigation
Hyperlink Field Navigation

Cursor Movement from the End of a Line

When the cursor is on the far left of a line:

To move the cursor to the far right of the line above:

 Press the left arrow key.
Similarly, when the cursor is on the far right of a line:

To move the cursor to the far left of the line below:

 Press the right arrow key.

Hyperlink Field Navigation 5

With a hyperlink, you can go directly to a related display, then back to the original display.
For example, from a status screen field with a hyperlink, the hyperlink takes you to the data
entry screen for that field.
Hyperlink fields are shaded black1, as shown in five places below in screen MM-7-1.

Note • For each screen with hyperlink fields, navigation instructions for the hyperlinks
are given in a procedure box to the right as shown below.

MM-7-1, with five hyperlink fields

When in a hyperlink field:

To follow the hyperlink:

For ASC/3, press SPEC FUNC, then

NEXT DATA.

For 2070, press B.

To go back:

For ASC/3, press SUB MENU.

For 2070, press ESC.

1. Todisable/enable the black hyperlink shading on a screen, press SPEC FUNC five times.
In ASC/3-LX Ver. 32.59.00, hyperlink fields operate, but they are not shaded black as shown in this
manual.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 5-9

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
MAIN MENU and Screen Navigation
Normally Inaccessible Screens

To go to the hyperlinked display:

1 Put the cursor in the black hyperlink field.

2 For an ASC/3, press SPEC FUNC, then press NEXT DATA.

Or
For a 2070, press *, then press D.

To go back to the original display:

 For an ASC/3, press SUB MENU.

Or
 For a 2070, press ESC.

When the cursor is not in a hyperlink field, to go to the next hyperlink field:
 For an ASC/3, press SPEC FUNC, then press NEXT DATA.

Or
 For a 2070, press *, then press D.

If there is another non-consecutive hyperlink field, to go to the next hyperlink:

 For an ASC/3, press > + SPEC FUNC + NEXT DATA.

Or
 For a 2070, press > + * + D.

To turn the black highlight on or off:

 For an ASC/3, press SPEC FUNC five times within four seconds.

Or
 For a 2070, press * five times within four seconds.

Normally Inaccessible Screens 5

To see some display screens, you do not press keys (MM-1-2-3 etc.). These special screens
come into view automatically, as applicable.
These screens include the Power On screens and the Hardware Diagnostic screens:
 The Power On screens are the first screens shown in Appendix B, ASC/3 Screens on
page B-1.
 The Hardware Diagnostic screens are shown in Appendix F, ASC/3 Hardware
Diagnostic Screens on page F-1.

5-10 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 6
Configuration
Transaction Mode 6

IMPORTANT • To program an ASC/3 or a 2070 Controller with ASC/3-2070 or

ASC/3-LX software, it is necessary for you to understand Transaction Mode. Before you
proceed, read and understand this section about Transaction Mode.

Introduction 6

An ASC/3 Controller contains a wide variety of Traffic features designed to give you
maximum flexibility in configuring an intersection. This broad base of applications
requires database functions which, in many cases, depend on other data entries to work
properly. To ensure that critical data is entered properly, the controller must run
consistency checks on the database. These tests make sure interrelated database functions
are compatible with each other.
The consistency checks are done in what is called “Transaction Mode”.
Some data is relatively independent, such as timing entries. Other data, like the selection
of controller startup phases, depends on the phases and compatibilities of programmed
sequence. These data must be done within the Transaction Mode. Another type of data
that triggers Transaction Mode is one that has 2 or more functions — examples include
HH:MM or 10.70.10.51.
Controller data may be modified manually via the keypad or remotely using SNMP/STMP
messages. In either case, critical data must be protected from incorrect or inconsistent
changes.

Changing Data with the Keypad 6

If you attempt to modify a critical piece of data with the keypad (for example, controller
start-up phases), the controller automatically goes to Transaction Mode. A warning
message will appear on the display and the top line of the screen will flash. At this point,
all changed data is stored in a temporary buffer until you exit Transaction Mode.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 6-1

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Configuration
Changing Data with the Keypad

When the ASC/3 is in Transaction Mode, the controller gives you audio-visual indications
as explained below:
 As a reminder, if there is no key activity for 30 seconds, the controller will produce a
continuous beep sound and a pop-up reminder message will be displayed. This
reminder is the same as the message seen when you first triggered transaction mode
and serves as a reminder to users who might not remember how to exit transaction
mode. Any key activity will stop the buzzer but only the CLEAR key will clear the
transaction mode message.
 The front-panel LED will blink:
• Fast Yellow with ASC/3-2100, ASC/3-1000, and ASC/3-RM
Or
• Fast Red with a 2070 controller with ASC/3-2070 or ASC/3-LX software
For a complete list of the different modes for the ASC/3 front-panel LED, refer to Front
Panel LED Indicator on page 14-1. To select the LED Mode, refer to Display Options,
MM-1-7-2 on page 6-53 in the descripton of the LED MODE parameter.

To exit Transaction Mode without saving the data:

 For ASC/3, press SPEC FUNC and then CLEAR.

Or
 For 2070, press * and then C.

To initiate the VERIFY state, once you have completed all of the changes:
 For 2070, press SPEC FUNC and then ENTER.

Or
 For 2070, press * and then ENT.

During the verify state, the controller runs its consistency checks on the newly entered
data. If the data passes, then the changes are copied to the active database and Transaction
Mode is terminated. If the Consistency Checks find an error (for example, incompatible
Startup Phases), then the controller displays a description of the problem and gives you the
option to disregard/throw away all changes or to go back into Transaction Mode to correct
the data.
Although the controller’s display will show your changes, it is important to note that those
changes will NOT take effect in the controller’s operation until Transaction Mode has
exited. Also, if you cycle power during Transaction Mode, then upon start-up all modified
data will be lost. This is because the modified data was only stored in the temporary buffer
and never officially copied to the database.

6-2 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Configuration
Changing Data with SNMP/STMP

Please note that not all data changes force the controller to Transaction Mode. Timing
parameters such as Minimum Green and Yellow Clearance may be modified as soon as you
enter the data. These changes take effect immediately.

Changing Data with SNMP/STMP 6

You may also change the ASC/3 database with an SNMP or STMP SET message from
Central. In this case, it is Central’s responsibility to force the controller into Transaction
Mode if critical data is to be modified. Before SETs will be accepted on any P2 (or critical)
objects, Central must send a SET to dbCreateTransaction.0, changing it to a value of 2-
transaction. At this point, Central may send any number of SETs to database objects. These
values are stored in a temporary buffer, the same as with the manual keypad entry.
Once Central has completed its SNMP/STMP SETS and is ready to commit the new data
to the database, Central must send a 3-Verify to dbCreateTransaction.0. The ASC/3 will
run the same Consistency Checks as for the Keypad entry. Once completed, the controller
internally sets the transaction state to 6-DONE. If no errors were found, the new data is
automatically copied to the active database. Otherwise, the data is held in the temporary
buffer until the discrepancies have been corrected. (Central can see the error messages by
doing a GET on the object, dbVerifyError.0.)

Summary 6

The ASC/3 contains many database elements which are dependent on other entries. To
ensure proper controller operations, these dependencies must be checked before data is
committed to the active database.
Two methods exist to modify the controller’s database- keypad and NTCIP
communications. Both require the ASC/3 or 2070 to enter a Transaction Mode state to
allow Consistency Checks to run on the modified data. If you cycle power BEFORE these
checks can be run, then the modified data will be lost.
Also note that while the changes may appear on the controller’s screens, those values will
NOT be implemented in the controller’s operation until Transaction Mode is complete.
That is, the Consistency Check must be done before the new data is officially copied to the
database.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 6-3

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Configuration
Automatic Backup to Datakey

Automatic Backup to Datakey 6

This feature allows automatic back up of configuration data 20 minutes after any change
is made to the database from any source. This requires the Datakey be installed. You can
enable this feature in MM-1-7-1. Refer to Administration, MM-1-7-1 on page 6-49.

Automatic Backup to Flash 6

ASC/3 Backup 6

Data changes will be backed up to flash 5 seconds after the last data change.

2070 Backup 6

Data changes will be backed up at 3 am to the flash memory of the controller.

Note • Changes are always saved to super-cap backup NVRAM within 15 seconds after
the last change.

Configuration Submenu, MM-1 6

CONFIGURATION SUBMENU

1. CONTROLLER SEQ 5. COMMUNICATIONS

2. PHASE IN USE/PED 6. ENABLE LOGGING

3. LOAD SW ASSIGN 7. DISPLAY/ACCESS

4. PORT 1 (SDLC) 8. LOGIC PROCESSOR

6-4 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Configuration
Controller Sequence Submenu, MM-1-1

Controller Sequence Submenu, MM-1-1 6

IMPORTANT • Do not change the controller sequencing while the controller is in

operation on the street. Make sure the controller is in flash or on the bench before you
change the sequencing.

Programming Summary 6

CONTROLLER SEQUENCE SUBMENU

1. PHASE RING SEQUENCE AND ASSIGNMENT

2. PHASE COMPATIBILITY

3. BACKUP PREVENT PHASES

4. SIMULTANEOUS GAP PHASES

5. DIAMOND SEQUENCE 17 TO 20

MM-1-1 Menu Option Programming Summary

1. PHASE RING SEQUENCE AND ASSIGNMENT Assigns phase sequences and phase
ring assignments.
2. PHASE COMPATIBILITY Assigns the compatibility of phases.
Compatibility is defined as those
phases that can time together.
3. BACKUP PREVENT Assigns phases that are prevented
from backing up. Also selects the
action that is to take place when a
phase needs to backup.
4. SIMULTANEOUS GAP Assigns phases that must gap at the
same time to allow servicing a
conflicting phase.
5. DIAMOND SEQUENCE 17 TO 20 Diamond Sequence menu is only
active when Diamond Configuration
is enabled.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 6-5

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Configuration
Phase Ring Sequence and Assignment, MM-1-1-1

Phase Ring Sequence and Assignment, MM-1-1-1 6

IMPORTANT • Do not change the controller sequencing while the controller is in

operation on the street. Make sure the controller is in flash or on the bench before you
change the sequencing.

There are two possible sequence data entry modes: Barrier or Compatibility. These modes
are referred to as B Mode or C Mode. The mode is indicated by either Bs or Cs on Line 4
of MM-1-1-1.

To easily switch between Barrier (B) mode and Compatibility (C) mode:
1 Move the cursor to the SEQUENCE COMMANDS field in Line 2.

2 Toggle to the applicable command.

3 To execute, press ENTER.

In B Mode, phase order-of-rotation, ring assignment and barrier position (showing

compatibility) are all controlled by data entry in MM-1-1-1. Active phases (Phases In Use)
are programmed in MM-1-2. This makes it much easier to program single controller
sequences using full barriers. This mode also supports multiple logical controllers if all are
single-ring controllers. The Econolite default database is in B-mode.
In C Mode, phase order-of rotation and ring assignment is programmed on MM-1-1-1 and
compatibility is programmed on MM-1-1-2. Active phases (Phases In Use) are
programmed in MM-1-2. This mode must be used if the controller has multiple logical
controllers and any logical controller has 2 or more rings, sequences with partial barriers,
or “no serve” phases.

B Mode Programming

MM-1-1-1

CONTROLLER SEQUENCE [ 1]
SEQUENCE COMMANDS . HW ALT SEQ ENA. NO
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
BC-B - B - B - - - - - - - - - - -
R1- 01 02 03 04 . . . . . . . . . . .
R2- 06 05 07 08 . . . . . . . . . . .
R3- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R4- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

R1-R4=RING 1-4, DATA ENTRY, PHASES 1-16

BC=BARRIER CONTROL, VALUES: B,C
B= BARRIER MODE
C=COMPATIBILITY MODE

6-6 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Configuration
Phase Ring Sequence and Assignment, MM-1-1-1

To do B Mode programming:
1 Go to MM-1-1-1 and make sure CONTROLLER SEQUENCE is set to 1. You should
only modify Sequence 1 in B Mode.
2 If not in B Mode already, go to SEQUENCE COMMANDS field to switch to B Mode.

3 Position the cursor on Line 4 wherever a barrier will occur. Be sure to leave enough
positions between barrier positions to allow entry of phases between barriers.
4 Position the cursor to the right of the Ring to be assigned. Press a Number Key (1-16)
to assign the phase to the specified ring. Enter 0 (zero) if there is no other phase in the
ring before the next barrier.

Note • Phase Ring assignments can be made in any order. The order defines service
order.

5 To remove a phase ring assignment, enter 0 (zero).

Note • MM-1-1-2 (Phase Compatibility) is not required. MM-1-1-2 is not accessible in “B”
mode.

C Mode Programming

MM-1-1-1

CONTROLLER SEQUENCE [ 1]
SEQUENCE COMMANDS . HW ALT SEQ ENA. NO
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
BC-C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C
R1- 01 02 03 04 . . . . . . . . . . .
R2- 06 05 07 08 . . . . . . . . . . .
R3- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R4- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

R1-R4=RING 1-4, DATA ENTRY, PHASES 1-16

BC=BARRIER CONTROL, VALUES: B,C
B=CURRENT GROUP RING BARRIER
C=COMPATIBILITY PROGRAMMED BY MAIN MENU 1-1-2

To do C Mode programming:
1 If not already in “C” mode, go to MM-1-1-1 SEQUENCE COMMANDS field to
switch to the desired “C” mode.
2 Position the cursor to the right of the Ring to be assigned. Press a Number Key (1-16)
to assign the phase to the ring.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 6-7

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Configuration
Phase Ring Sequence and Assignment, MM-1-1-1

Note • Phase Ring assignments can be made in any order, but no gap is allowed
between phases (the entries must be contiguous).

3 If you enter 0 (zero), it removes a phase ring assignment.

Note • Phase compatibility is determined by programming in MM-1-1-2.

MM-1-1-1
Parameter Description Range

CONTROLLER Controller Sequence 1-16

SEQUENCE
Phase order-of-rotation by ring.
NTCIP 1202 2.8.3
1-16: Selects the programmed phase sequence (1-16) to use with the
controller.

6-8 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Configuration
Phase Ring Sequence and Assignment, MM-1-1-1

MM-1-1-1
Parameter Description Range

CONTROLLER If you have a factory default database, the sequences are as listed 1-16
SEQUENCE below:
(cont’d)
Econolite factory default controller phase sequences:
 1 - Standard Quad.
 2 - Alt Seq A reverses phases 1-2 & 9-10.
 3 - Alt Seq B reverses phases 3-4 & 13-14.
 4 - Alt Seq A & B reverse phases 1-2, 3-4, 9-10 & 13-14.
 5 - Alt Seq C reverses phases 5-6 & 11-12.
 6 - Alt Seq A & C reverse phases 1-2, 5-6, 9-10 & 11-12.
 7 - Alt Seq B & C reverse phases 3-4, 5-6, 11-12 & 13-14.
 8 - Alt Seq A, B & C reverse phases 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 9-10, 11-12 &
13-14.
 9 - Alt Seq D reverses phases 7-8 & 15-16.
 10 - Alt Seq A & D reverse phases 1-2 , 7-8, 9-10 & 15-16.
 11 - Alt Seq B & D reverse phases 3-4, 7-8, 13-14 & 15-16.
 12 - Alt Seq A, B & D reverse phases 1-2, 3-4, 7-8, 9-10, 13-14 &
15-16.
 13 - Alt Seq C & D reverse phases 5-6, 7-8, 11-12 & 15-16.
 14 - Alt Seq A, C & D reverse phases 1-2 , 5-6, 7-8, 9-10, 11-12 &
15-16.
 15 - Alt Seq B, C & D reverse phases 3-4, 5-6, 7-8, 13-14, 11-12 &
15-16
 16 - Alt Seq A, B, C & D reverse phases 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8, 9-10,
11-12, 13-14 & 15-16.
HW ALT SEQ ENA Hardware Alternate Sequence Enable YES, NO
 YES: Enables the NEMA Alternate Sequence Hardware inputs
(refer to TS2-2003, Table 3-12, page 113). If this parameter is
enabled, the Power Start sequence programmed on MM-2-5 may
be overwritten by these inputs (refer to the note below).
 NO: The NEMA Alternate Sequence hardware Inputs are
ignored.
Note • This HARDWARE entry, if enabled, is selected according to
the following hierarchy: SYSTEM, COORDINATION, TIME-
BASE, HARDWARE.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 6-9

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Configuration
Phase Ring Sequence and Assignment, MM-1-1-1

MM-1-1-1
Parameter Description Range

SEQUENCE (ECPI feature) N/A

COMMANDS
1 Toggle to the applicable command.

2 To execute, press ENTER.

Refer to the command descriptions, below.
COPY TO HIGHER SEQUENCE: Copies the sequence shown
to all, higher-numbered sequences. The screen will return to the
default state (SEQUENCE COMMANDS) after copying and the
CU will be in TRANSACTION MODE!
Note • The commands below are only available for Controller
Sequence 1, NOT Controller Sequence 2 thru 16. The copy
action will copy only Sequence Plans (MM-1-1-1) and
Phase in Use (MM-1-2). It does not copy Load Switch
Assignment (MM-1-3).
SELECT B-MODE/DFT SEQUENCE: Select Barrier mode
and copy default Econolite phases for all 16 sequences. The screen
will return to the default state (SEQUENCE COMMANDS) after
copying and the CU will be in TRANSACTION MODE!
SELECT C-MODE/DFT SEQUENCE: Select Compatibility
mode and copy default Econolite phases for all 16 sequences. The
screen will return to the default state (SEQUENCE COMMANDS)
after copying and the CU will be in TRANSACTION MODE!
SELECT COMPATIBILITY MODE: switching to compatibility
from barrier mode without changing the sequence data. The screen
will return to the default state (SEQUENCE COMMANDS) after
copying and the CU will be in TRANSACTION MODE!
SEL CUSTOM DFT SEQUENCE: Copy Customer default
Sequences from Customer default Database. If customer default
Database does not exist, SELECT B-MODE/DFT SEQUENCE
will be performed. The screen will return to the default state
(SEQUENCE COMMANDS) after copying and the CU will be in
TRANSACTION MODE!

6-10 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Configuration
Phase Compatibility, MM-1-1-2

MM-1-1-1
Parameter Description Range

RING 1 RING PHASE SEQUENCE Phase 1-16

RING 2 assigns Phase
RING 3 Defines the Ring to which a Phase is assigned.
to a Ring
RING 4
NTCIP 1202 2.8.3.3
0 removes
For rings 1-4 NTCIP 1202 2.2.2.22 Phase from
IMPORTANT • Do NOT change the ring assignments while the Ring
controller is in operation on the street. Be sure the assignment
controller is in flash or on the bench before you
change this parameter.
1-16: assigns that phase to the ring for each of sixteen (1-16)
sequences.
The left-to-right order determines the order of rotation.
0 (zero): Removes the phase ring assignment and displays a “.”.
Ring assignment requirements:
 A phase assigned to a ring in sequence one will also change the
Phase-Ring-Assignment (NTCIP 1202 2.2.2.22).
 There can be no gaps in the ring assignments. If a phase is
eliminated, all the phases to the right of it must be shifted left to
close the gap. This must be done for all sequences.
 Sequences 2-16 must be consistent with the Phase-Ring-
Assignment generated in sequence 1. Sequences are commanded
using the NEMA alternate sequence inputs, Time Base or
hardware inputs if enabled.

Phase Compatibility, MM-1-1-2 6

Phase compatibility defines the phases that can time concurrently (together):
 Pressing the Toggle, 0/YES, alternately selects (X) or deselects (“.”) the phases that are
compatible (allowed to time concurrently).
 Phases in the same ring cannot be compatible. Only phases in different rings can be
compatible.

Note • If the controller is programmed in Barrier mode, this screen is not accessible.
Refer to Phase Ring Sequence and Assignment, MM-1-1-1 on page 6-6 for more details.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 6-11

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Configuration
Backup Prevent Phases, MM-1-1-3

MM-1-1-2 (Standard Quad Shown)

PHASE COMPATIBILITY
6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 . . . . . . . . . . .
6 . . . . . . . . . .
7 . . . . . . . . .
8 . . . . . . . .
9 . . . . . . .
10 . . . . . .
11 . . . . .
12 . . . .
13 . . .
14 . .
15 .

Backup Prevent Phases, MM-1-1-3 6

A backup condition occurs when a phase is at rest and there is a call on a specified phase
in the same ring. The Backup Prevent Phases screen programs the action that is to take
place when a backup condition occurs.

ENABLE BACKUP PREVENT

TMG\BKUP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 B . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 . C B . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 . . . . B . . . . . . . . . .
7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 . . . . . C B . . . . . . . .
9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10 . . . . . . . . X . . . . . .
11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12 . . . . . . . . . . X . . . .
13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

To inhibit (X)/enable (B or “.”) service to backup phase from the current phase:
 Press toggle, 0/YES

Backup (B) will be through an enabled (C) phase or red revert. “.” allows normal non-
restricted phase rotation.

6-12 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Configuration
Simultaneous Gap Phases, MM-1-1-4

In the standard Quad example shown:

 Phases 2/6 will backup through all-red in response to a call on phase 1 or 5.
 Phases 4/8 will backup through phase 2/6 in response to a call on phase 3 or 7.
 Phases 10/12 will not backup in response to a call on phase 9 or 10.
 Phases 14/16 will time nominally in response to calls on any phase.

MM-1-1-3
Parameter Description Range

X X Inhibits the controller from servicing the BACKUP (column) X inhibits

phase when the “TIMING” (row) phase is active or next.
B without C “B” without a “C” programmed for the timing phase, inhibits the B without C
controller from servicing the 'BACKUP” phase when the Inhibits
“TIMING” phase is active or next until the controller goes through
red revert as described in NEMA TS2 3.5.5.7 and RED CLEAR as
described in NEMA TS2 3.5.4.2.
B with C “B” with a “C” programmed for the timing phase, places a demand B with C
on that “BACKUP” (column) phase. The controller will then enables
service the called phase and proceed normally.

Simultaneous Gap Phases, MM-1-1-4 6

To select (X) or deselect (“.”) the phases that are to gap together:
 Press Toggle, 0/YES

SIMULTANEOUS GAP PHASES

GAP\PH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 . . . . X X . . . . . . . . . .
2 . . . . X X . . . . . . . . . .
3 . . . . . . X X . . . . . . . .
4 . . . . . . X X . . . . . . . .
5 X X . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 X X . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 . . X X . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 . . X X . . . . . . . . . . . .
9 . . . . . . . . . . X X . . . .
10 . . . . . . . . . . X X . . . .
11 . . . . . . . . X X . . . . . .
12 . . . . . . . . X X . . . . . .
13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X X
14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X X
15 . . . . . . . . . . . . X X . .
16 . . . . . . . . . . . . X X . .
DISABLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ASC/3 Programming Manual 6-13

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Configuration
Simultaneous Gap Phases, MM-1-1-4

Each row associates a phase (“row” phase) with the phases (“column” phases) it must
simultaneously gap with when terminating together to service a conflicting demand. If the
“row” phase is terminating to service a phase that is permissive with the “column” phases,
then it will not wait to gap simultaneously with the “column” phases. If a “column” phase
is not selected, it is allowed to gap independently with the “row” phase.
1 From the Controller Sequence submenu (MM-1-1), select Option #4 Simultaneous
Gap and the Simultaneous Gap Phases screen (MM-1-1-4) appears.
2 Use Toggle 0/YES, to insert an “X” or “.” where appropriate.

• “X” indicates that when the row and column phases are required to terminate
together because of Phase Compatibility (ref. MM-1-1-2), they must gap together.
• “.” indicates that when the row and column phases are required to terminate
together because of Phase Compatibility (ref. MM-1-1-2), they gap independently.
In the Quad example shown:
 Phases 1/5, 1/6, 2/5, and 2/6 gap together in response to a demand on phases 3, 4, 7-
16.
 Phases 3/7, 3/8, 4/7, and 4/8 gap together in response to a demand on phases 1, 2, 5,
6, 9-16.
 Phases 9/11, 9/12, 10/11, and 10/12 gap together in response to a demand on phases
1-8, 13-16.
Phases 13-16 do not gap together in response to a demand on phases 1-12.

MM-1-1-4
Parameter Description Range

X X on a (“row”) phase requires that it gaps with the (“column”) X selects

phase when terminating together to service a conflicting demand. If “.” deselects
the either phase is terminating to service a phase that is permissive
with the other/s then it will not wait to gap simultaneously with the
“column” phase/s. When the column phase has not yet reached
such a point, the row phase shall revert to the extendable portion
and time passage intervals based on vehicle calls. The phases must
be permitted to time concurrently.
“.” “.” on the (“row”) phase allows it to gap independently with the
(“column”) phase.

6-14 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Configuration
Diamond Configuration Information

Diamond Configuration Information 6

To start Diamond Configuration, you must have a Diamond configured database loaded
and active in the controller.

To convert an ASC/3 Database to Diamond Configuration:

1 Open the database file using the ASC/3 Configurator.

2 Click on the “Diamond Setting” check box. It should set all the programming values
described in Appendix Q, Diamond Intersection Application Notes.

IMPORTANT • Before you proceed, note that the subsequent operation is irreversible—
once a Diamond, it is always a Diamond.

3 Save the database with Diamond configuration.

4 Use the appropriate ASC/3 utility to download the Diamond configured database to
the controller.
5 You can perform additional Programming using the controller’s Front Panel/Keypad
after the database is downloaded.

To select a Diamond Database or a Standard Database:

1 Download the Diamond database with the ASC/3 Utility.

2 Make sure this database is active.

3 Use MM-8-2 to perform “CONTROLLER DATA > DEFAULT DATABASE”

4 In MM-8-2, select:

• Standard DB with “ECONOLITE DBASE > CONTROLLER DATA”

Or
• Diamond DB with “DEFAULT DATABASE > CONTROLLER DATA”

ASC/3 Programming Manual 6-15

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Configuration
Phases in Use/Exclusive Pedestrian

For complete information on Diamond programming, refer to Appendix Q, Diamond

Intersection Application Notes.

Phases in Use/Exclusive Pedestrian 6

Phases in Use, MM-1-2 6

Phases must be programmed IN USE to be active and able to use any assigned functions.
This allows phases to be omitted from use without having to remove them from the phase
sequence, phase compatibility, phase ring sequence, applying phase omit, deleting the
assignment of detectors and/or recall functions through various data entry pages. When
the phase is needed, it can be selected as active.
In the following example, the 16-phase quad is reduced to a standard 8-phase quad.

To select phases for use:

1 Use Toggle, 0/YES, to select phase(s) in use.

2 Select with X under Phases 1-8 next to the IN USE parameter. To deselect, select “.”

PHASES IN USE / EXCLUSIVE PED

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
IN USE....... X X X X X X X X
EXCLUSIVE PED . . . . . . . .

PHASE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
IN USE....... . . . . . . . .
EXCLUSIVE PED . . . . . . . .

Exclusive Pedestrian Timing, MM-1-2 6

Applications that require phases only to time pedestrian intervals are programmed as
Exclusive Pedestrian. An example is diagonal pedestrian crossings at an intersection where
vehicle traffic is stopped in all directions and only pedestrian intervals are displayed to
allow pedestrian traffic to cross in any number of directions at one time.
In this example, Phase 9 has been added to the 8-phase standard quad as an exclusive ped
movement.

To select exclusive pedestrian timing:

1 Use Toggle, 0/YES, to select exclusive pedestrian phase(s). Press key to indicate X
under desired phase next to EXCLUSIVE PED parameter.
2 Enter pedestrian interval timing values as needed (Controller Submenu, Timing Data).

6-16 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Configuration
Load Switch Assignment (MMU CHANNEL), MM-1-3

PHASES IN USE/EXCLUSIVE PED

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
IN USE....... X X X X X X X X
EXCLUSIVE PED . . . . . . . .

PHASE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
IN USE....... X . . . . . . .
EXCLUSIVE PED X . . . . . . .

MM-1-2
Parameter Description Range

IN USE Indicates phases to be active. A phase times intervals only when it X enables
is in use, so phases not selected are omitted from controller “.” disables
operation. This is not programmable if Barrier mode is used in MM-
1-1-1.
EXCLUSIVE PED Phases timing only pedestrian intervals without concurrent vehicle X enables
movement “.” disables

Load Switch Assignment (MMU CHANNEL), MM-1-3 6

LD SWITCH ASSIGN
PHASE DIMMING ---FLASH---
/OVLP TYPE R Y G D PWR AUT TGR
1 1 O . . . + X . .
2 2 O . . . + X . .
3 3 O . . . + X . .
4 4 O . . . + X . .
5 5 O . . . + X . .
6 6 O . . . + X . .
7 7 O . . . + X . .
8 8 O . . . + X . .
9 2 P . . . + X . .
10 4 P . . . + X . .
11 6 P . . . + X . .
12 8 P . . . + X . .
13 13 O . . . + X . .
14 14 O . . . + X . .
15 15 O . . . + X . .
16 16 O . . . + X . .

ASC/3 Programming Manual 6-17

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Configuration
Load Switch Assignment (MMU CHANNEL), MM-1-3

MM-1-3
Parameter Description Range

PHASE/OVLP 1-16: Assigns phase 1-16 or overlap A-P (respectively) indications 0 - 16

(Green/Walk, Yellow/Ped Clear and Red/ Don’t Walk) to that
load switch and MMU channel.
0 (zero): deselects any control for that load switch.
Note • “O” (overlap) 1-16 refer to overlaps A-P respectively.
This assignment applies only to TS2 operation with a TS2 MMU. It
provides the assignment of and correlation between the indication
and MMU channel for verifying that the load switch output sensed
by the MMU corresponds to the BIU command.
Note • For TS2 operation unused load switch/MMU Channels
should be cleared of all Phase/OVLP and TYPE
programming.
TYPE V: Vehicle V, P, O, “.”
P: Pedestrian
O: Overlap
“.”: NTCIP “Other” not defined
This assigns the source of that load switch as a Vehicle, Overlap or
Pedestrian indication (Walk, Pedestrian Clear, and Don't Walk) to
that load switch and MMU channel.
This assignment applies only to TS2 operation with a TS2 MMU. It
provides the assignment of and correlation between the indication
and MMU channel to make sure that the load switch output sensed
by the MMU corresponds to the BIU command.
This assignment also allows the controller to redundantly check and
verify the load switch outputs indications as sensed by the MMU are
as it commanded.
DIMMING X: Selects the load switch indication(s) that are to be dimmed when X, “.”
(R,Y,G) dimming is enabled.
“.”: Inhibits dimming of the load switch indication(s) when
dimming is enabled.
DIMMING(D) “+”: Selects the positive 1/2 cycle for dimming “+”, “-”
“-”: Selects the negative 1/2 cycle for dimming.
Note • When dimming, the indication load current should be
balanced for the positive and negative 1/2 cycles of the
AC line.

6-18 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Configuration
Load Switch Assignment (MMU CHANNEL), MM-1-3

MM-1-3
Parameter Description Range

PWR Load Switch Power Up Flash Color A, Y, R, “.”

A: Indicates that the channel color will follow Automatic Flash. If
any PWR is programmed R or Y, then the controller cannot have A
programmed for any other PWR channels.
Y: Indicates that the channel will flash yellow. These load switches
must represent compatible MMU channels.
R: Indicates that the channel will flash red. These load switches
must represent compatible MMU channels.
.: Indicates that the channel will be dark.
IMPORTANT • It is your responsibility to match the PWR load
switch setting on MM-1-3 with the actual cabinet
flash output.
AUT Load Switch Automatic Flash Color R, Y, “.”
R: Indicates that the channel will flash red. These load switches
must represent compatible MMU channels.
Y: Indicates that the channel will flash yellow. These load switches
must represent compatible MMU channels.
.: Indicates that the channel will be dark.
IMPORTANT • It is your responsibility to match the PWR load
switch setting on MM-1-3 with the actual cabinet
flash output.
TGR Flash Together Indications X, “.”
X: Phases selected with an X will flash on the alternate half Hertz.
.: Phases selected with “.” will flash on the half Hertz.
Note • The load current during flashing should be balanced to
provide a balanced load to the AC supply.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 6-19

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Configuration
Port 1 (SDLC) Submenu, MM-1-4

Port 1 (SDLC) Submenu, MM-1-4 6

PORT 1 (SDLC) SUBMENU

1. SDLC OPTIONS

2. MMU PROGRAM

3. COLOR CHECK ENABLE

4. SECONDARY STATIONS/TESTS

SDLC Options, MM-1-4-1 6

General
TS2 controllers use the Port 1 controller interface which connects to the Malfunction
Management Unit (MMU), Terminals and Facilities (TF), and/or Detector (DET) rack.
Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC) protocol is used to communicate with various
devices where the controller is the master and BIUs and MMU are slaves. Only the
controller can send or request data from the BIUs or MMU. Up to eight TF BIUs, eight
DET rack BIUs, and one MMU can be attached to the controller network.

SDLC PORT 1 CONFIG

BIU 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TERM & FACILITY . . . . . . . .
DETECTOR RACK . . . . . . . .

ENABLE TS2/MMU TYPE CABINET......... NO

ENABLE MMU EXTENDED STATUS.......... NO
ENABLE SDLC STOP TIME............... NO
ENABLE 3 CRITICAL RFEs LOCKUP....... YES
MMU TO CU SDLC EXTERNAL START... ENABLED

IMPORTANT • If you incorrectly program TF BIUs or MMU Enable, the controller

immediately goes into intersection flash.

Terminal and Facilities

Toggle to enable TF BIUs when the controller is operating in a NEMA TS2 Type 1
cabinet.

Detector Rack
Toggle to enable DET BIUs when the controller is operating in a NEMA TS2 Type 1 or
Type 2 cabinet.

6-20 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Configuration
SDLC Options, MM-1-4-1

MMU Type Cabinet

Toggle to select:
 YES for NEMA TS2 installations

Or
 NO for NEMA TS1 installations

 For a NEMA TS2 Type 1 installation (TF BIUs enabled), the MMU communication is
enabled, regardless of this programming.
 For a NEMA TS2 Type 2 installation (no TF BIUs enabled), the MMU communication
must be enabled.
 For a NEMA TS1 installation no TF BIUs, DET BIUs, or MMU are enabled.

SDLC Stop Time

Note • The MMU must be enabled for this option to be useable

Use toggle key to select:

 YES to enable the MMU FAIL (output relay transferred) response to stop time the
controller.
Or
 NO to disable MMU FAIL response from stopping the controller timing. This option
allows a cabinet STOP TIME: AUTO-OFF-ON switch to control the TF BIU stop
time and/or the TS2 connector stop time input.

MM-1-4-1
Parameter Description Range

BIU 1-8 These BIU numbers label the next two rows: 1-4 usable
BIUs
 For TERM & FACILITY, BIU 1-8 refers to the Terminal and
Facilities BIUs #1-8, which correspond to TS2 BIUs 1-8 5-8 spare or
respectively. reserved
 For DETECTOR RACK, BIU 1-8 refers to the Detector Rack
BIUs #1-8, which correspond to TS2 BIUs 9-16 respectively.
Each BIU provides an interface between the controller’s serial
RS-485 SDLC link and discrete NEMA level I/O ports.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 6-21

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Configuration
SDLC Options, MM-1-4-1

MM-1-4-1
Parameter Description Range

TERM & NEMA TS2 5.3.1.4, NEMA TS2 5.3.4.3 X enable BIU
FACILITY
X: Enable Terminal & Facility BIUs. “.” disable
BIU
. : Disable Terminal & Facility BIUs.
Terminal & Facility BIUs #1-4 are defined by NEMA.
Each BIU provides an I/O interface between the controller unit
and the cabinet through (SDLC) PORT 1. BIUs can be used in:
 TS 2 Type 1 for Terminal & Facility and Detector Rack.
 TS 2 Type 2 for the Detector Rack only.
DETECTOR RACK NEMA TS2 5.3.1.4, NEMA TS2 5.3.4.3 X enable BIU
X: Enable Detector Rack BIUs. . disable BIU
. : Disable Detector Rack BIUs.
Detector Rack BIUs #1-4 are defined by NEMA.
Each BIU provides an I/O interface between the controller unit
and the cabinet through (SDLC) PORT 1. BIUs can be used in:
 TS 2 Type 1 for Terminal & Facility and Detector Rack.
 TS 2 Type 2 for the Detector Rack only.
ENABLE TS2/MMU This is an ECPI Feature. YES enables
TYPE CABINET
NO: For NEMA TS1 installations. NO disables
YES: For NEMA TS2 installations.
 NEMA TS2 Type 1 (TF BIUs enabled), the MMU
communication is enabled regardless of this programming.
 NEMA TS2 Type 2 (No TF BIUs enabled), the MMU
communication must be enabled.
Note • This field is treated as YES for an ASC/3-1000 controller
type, regardless of the setting. To disable all Port 1
Communications (for bench test), put a jumper between Pin 2 and
Pin 10 on the SDLC port.

6-22 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Configuration
SDLC Options, MM-1-4-1

MM-1-4-1
Parameter Description Range

ENABLE MMU This is an ECPI Feature. YES enables

EXTENDED
STATUS NO: Disable MMU Extended Status. NO disables
YES: Enable Extended MMU Status on MM-7-7-4 and MM-7-7-5.
Note • MMU Extended Status (RF 192/RF 202) is supported on
Econolite, EDI and Reno controllers. Please use extra
caution if you enable this feature on other types of MMU.
ENABLE SDLC This is an ECPI Feature. YES enables
STOP TIME
YES: Enables the MMU in a FAIL condition to apply Stop Time NO disables
to the CU through the SDLC.
NO: Disables the MMU in a FAIL condition so it does NOT apply
Stop Time to the CU through the SDLC.
Note • TS2/MMU TYPE CABINET is treated as YES for
ASC/3-1000 controller type.
To simulate ASC/3-2100, put a jumper between pin 2 and 10 on
SDLC port.
ENABLE 3 Enable Critical RFE Failure Lockup YES disables
CRITICAL RFEs
LOCKUP This is an ECPI Feature. NO enables
NO: Disables latching of the 3rd critical RFE within 24 hours.
YES: Controller will latch the 3rd critical RFE within 24 hours as
required by NEMA TS2-2003, 3.9.3.1.3 Port 1.
Note • A critical RFE occurs when more than 5 of the last 10
critical response frames are not received.
MMU TO CU SDLC The default is ENABLED. ENABLED,
EXTERNAL START DISABLED, 90
Note • After 90 minutes or a power cycle, if the function is NOT MIN
set to ENABLED or DISABLED, then the value will be set
to ENABLED. This is to make sure that this function is
always enabled unless explicitly disabled by the user.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 6-23

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Configuration
MMU Compatibility Programming, MM-1-4-2

MMU Compatibility Programming, MM-1-4-2 6

MMU PROGRAM [MANUAL] ERROR

MMU CH 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 . . . . . . . . . . .
6 . . . . . . . . . .
7 . . . . . . . . .
8 . . . . . . . .
9 . . . . . . .
10 . . . . . .
11 . . . . .
12 . . . .
13 . . .
14 . .
15 .

Feature Summary
The ASC/3 controller can be programmed as standard with MMU (Malfunction
Management Unit) channel compatibility data identical to that programmed on the MMU
Programming Card described in Paragraph 4.3.6, Control and Programming, Figure 4-1, of the
NEMA TS 2-2003 standards document. The purpose of the MMU Compatibility feature
is to prevent accidental installation of an MMU with incorrect channel programming in a
live intersection. An additional benefit, using the AUTO mode, is to help the user program
the MMU Program Card.
If enabled and programmed, this feature will cause the controller to activate the Voltage
Monitor/Fault Monitor outputs if there is any mismatch between the program stored in
the controller and the program on the MMU Program Card. If incompatibility is detected,
an ERROR indicator comes into view to help you to correctly program the MMU. This
feature is enabled when:
 The field “ENABLE TS2/MMU TYPE CABINET” in MM-1-4-1 is set to “YES” and
 There is channel compatibility information programmed in MM-1-4-2. If this occurs,
a status screen (MM-7-7-6) lets you determine the exact nature of a channel mismatch.
In summary, this feature:
 Lets you set internal MMU compatibility programming using one of three methods
(MANUAL, AUTO, COPY MMU). Also, there is a CLEAR function to clear out the
data.
 Compares internal compatibility programming to programming on the MMU Program
Card and sets Voltage Monitor/Fault Monitor outputs if there is a mismatch between
the two.

6-24 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Configuration
MMU Compatibility Programming, MM-1-4-2

MM-1-4-2 (shown above) is visible only if the field “ENABLE TS2/MMU TYPE
CABINET” in MM-1-4-1 is set to “YES”. If the value is “NO,” the screen will be blank
with the message “MMU DISABLED IN MM-1-4-1.”

MMU Program Mode Selection

If the MMU is enabled, you can toggle between MANUAL, AUTO, CLEAR and COPY:

To toggle the MMU PROGRAM field:

1 Move the cursor to this field.

2 Press 0/TOGGLE.

Note • The field selection is acted on only when you press ENTER.

IMPORTANT • Use this menu with care because it can cause the cabinet to go into flash.

MM-1-4-2
Parameter Description Notes

MANUAL Manually enter If you select MANUAL compatibility programming, any change
channel to MM-1-4-2 in a controller installed in a live cabinet will almost
compatibility certainly result in CVM FLASH. You should program the
information controller in your shop before cabinet installation, or place a live
cabinet in LOCAL FLASH before you make changes.
If you select this, the data entry is set to MANUAL, by default.
To manually enter channel compatibility, move the cursor over
an array position and press 0 (toggle). Each toggle will
alternately cause the array position to switch between “.” and
“X”.
If there are no programmed compatibility points, the MMU
Compatibility feature is disabled.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 6-25

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Configuration
MMU Compatibility Programming, MM-1-4-2

MM-1-4-2
Parameter Description Notes

AUTO Automatically The use of AUTO mode is highly recommended to set internal
compute channel ASC/3 compatibility programming and as a guide for MMU
compatibility based Program Card programming. There is the remote possibility the
on ASC/3 AUTO computations would not pick up every channel
programming compatibility point because of very complex ASC/3
(the AUTO mode) programming. In this case, AUTO mode can be used to
generate most of the programming. You can then switch to
MANUAL mode to fine-tune programming. Automatic
computations are based on an enabled MMU and take into
consideration phases-in-use, phase concurrency, valid
pedestrian movements, vehicle and pedestrian overlaps, and
pedestrian carryover. To obtain phase-to-channel information,
refer to Load Switch Assignment (MMU CHANNEL), MM-1-3 on
page 6-17. If you select this, the data entry is set to AUTO,
which has the value of 1 in the database.
When selected, the controller automatically computes ASC/3
channel compatibility based on:
 Vehicle/pedestrian/overlap channel assignments (MM-1-3).
 Phases in use (MM-1-2).
 Phase sequencing (MM-1-1-2 and/or MM-1-1-1).
 Vehicle and pedestrian overlaps (MM-2-3).
 Pedestrian carryover (MM-2-1, field “PED CO”).
In AUTO mode, “X” will be shown at channel compatibility
points if the channel outputs can be on at the same time and “.”
if they cannot. The user will not be able to change the
compatibility array in AUTO mode.
If you first select AUTO mode, then select MANUAL mode,
the AUTO channel compatibility will be copied to the
MANUAL screen. This allows you to automatically populate the
array in AUTO mode and move the results to the MANUAL
screen.
COPY MMU Copy the The content of the MMU Programming Card is copied to the
programming from compatibility array. Then the controller returns to the
the MMU MANUAL mode.
Programming Card The use of COPY MMU is not recommended unless you are
100% sure the MMU Program Card is correct.

6-26 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Configuration
MMU Compatibility Programming, MM-1-4-2

MM-1-4-2
Parameter Description Notes

CLEAR Clear the This function is a command. Its value is not stored in the
compatibility table database. Channel compatibility programming is cleared and the
user is returned to MANUAL mode. This will disable the MMU
Compatibility feature until compatibility points are again
programmed using the MANUAL, AUTO or COPY MMU
modes.

Status Screen, MM-7-7-6 (hyperlinked with MM-1-4-2)

MMU COMPATIBILITY STATUS MFG: EDI/RENO

CH|6 5 4|3 2 1|0 9 8|7 6 5|4 3 2
1 . . . . M X . . . . X X . . .
2 . . . . . X . X . . X X . .
3 . . . . X . . . X X . . .
4 . . . . X . X . X X . .
5 . . . . . . . C . . .
6 . . . . . X . X . .
7 . . . . . . X . .
8 . . . . X . X .
9 . . . . . X .
10 . . . . X .
11 . . . . .
12 . . . .
13 . . .
14 . .
15 .

In this sample Status Screen, assume the ASC/3 has the STD database. Channels 1
through 8 are assigned phases 1 through 8 and channels 9 through 12 are assigned
pedestrian movements 2, 4, 6 and 8, respectively. The x’s indicate MMU Programming
Card and the controller compatibility programming match points. Note, however, that the
channel 1/12 compatibility point contains an “M” and the channel 5/9 compatibility point
contains a “C”. The “M” indicates the MMU Programming Card has a jumper incorrectly
installed at this point. The “C” indicates the CU has determined these two channels will be
on together, but the point is not jumpered on the MMU Programming Card.
MFG
This field will display the manufacturer of the MMU, where:
 EDI = Eberle Design, Inc.
 RENO = Reno A&E, Inc.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 6-27

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Configuration
Color Check Enable, MM-1-4-3

Channel Status
Each compatibility array point will contain one of the characters that follow:

Character Definition

“.” Neither the CU or MMU is programmed

C The CU is programmed, but the MMU is not

M The MMU is programmed, but the CU is not
x Both the CU and MMU are programmed

Color Check Enable, MM-1-4-3 6

COLOR CHECK ENABLE

ENABLE COLOR CHECK.. X

MMU/LS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
RED X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
YELLOW X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
GREEN X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Note • If ENABLE COLOR CHECK is disabled ( . ), the bottom four lines will not be in view.

Use this screen to do selective color checks on some or all of the 16 MMU channels.

MM-1-4-3
Parameter Description Range

ENABLE COLOR “.”: Disables all color checks by the controller unit (CU) “X” Enable all
CHECK checks
X: Enables the COLOR CHECK DIAGNOSTIC by the CU.
The color check feature will verify the CU to MMU by Channel by “.” Disable all
Color. Any mismatch between the CU and the MMU will cause a checks
CU monitor FLASH.
If you selected X next to ENABLE COLOR CHECK, lines for
MMU/LS, RED, YELLOW and GREEN will be in view.

6-28 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Configuration
Secondary Stations/Tests, MM-1-4-4

MM-1-4-3
Parameter Description Range

RED If the COLOR CHECK ENABLE Color line is marked “X”: “X” Enable
YELLOW Feature
GREEN X: Enables a CU to MMU Color Check Diagnostic on a by
Channel, by Color, per selection. “.” Disable
Feature
“.”: Disables a CU to MMU Color Check Diagnostic.
Note • This allows an unused or unusual MMU channel color not
to be checked by the CU. This is a redundant check that
insures that the indication being commanded by the CU is
being sensed by the MMU.

Secondary Stations/Tests, MM-1-4-4 6

SECONDARY TO SECONDARY ADDRESSING

T&F 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 MMU
. . . . . . . . .
D/R 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 DIAG
. . . . . . . . .
ENABLE SDLC DIAGNOSTIC TEST...........NO

Enable 3 Critical RFEs Lockup

Toggle to select:
 NO to disable the lockup feature that occurs when 3 critical Response Frame Errors
(RFEs) occur.
Or
 YES to allow such lockups to occur.

Secondary-to-Secondary Addressing (only on supported devices)

Toggle to enable Secondary-to-Secondary Addressing when the controller is operating in
a NEMA TS2 Type 1 or Type 2 cabinet. When Peer-to-Peer communication is enabled,
the controller will act as the SDLC gateway for the enabled Secondary-to-Secondary
devices. Make sure the device is pre-configured for secondary communication. When a
request is present, the controller receives and transmits information from one device to the
other.

Programming procedure:
1 Use Toggle key to enable (X) peer-to-peer communication.

2 Use keypad numeric keys to enter a unique address for each device used in the network.
Address assignment enables and a zero entry disables device communication. Do not
enable a device if it is not physically present in the network.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 6-29

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Configuration
Programmable Communication Ports Submenu, MM-1-5

3 Diagnostic (Test Feature) – Toggle to enter YES to enable or NO to disable

communication with a test fixture that responds to the TS2 defined frame 30. An error
is logged, if enabled, when not connected to a test fixture.

MM-1-4-4
Parameter Description Range

SECONDARY TO Toggle to enable (X) or disable (.) peer-to-peer communications X enables

SECONDARY with secondary stations via the RS-485 SDLC link.
ADDRESSING . disables
ENABLE SDLC An error is logged if enabled, when not connected to a test fixture. NO disables
DIAGNOSTIC
TEST YES enables

Programmable Communication Ports Submenu, MM-1-5 6

COMMUNICATIONS SUBMENU

1. ETHERNET

2. PORT 2/C50S

3. PORT 3A/C21S

4. PORT 3B/C22S

5. NTCIP

6. ECPIP

Ethernet Port, MM-1-5-1 6

ETHERNET MAC FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF

CONTROLLER IP........... 255.255.255.255
SUBNET MASK............. 255.255.255.255
DEFAULT GATEWAY IP...... 255.255.255.255
SERVER IP .............. 255.255.255.255
LINK SPEED/DUPLEX............. 1000/FULL
DROP-OUT TIME...................... 300

The Ethernet Port can connect 100 Mbs between the controller and external devices.
Ethernet communication supports NTCIP and ECPIP protocols. Settings for these 2
protocols are on MM-1-5-5 and MM-1-5-6 respectively. UDP port for NTCIP is user-
configurable on MM-1-5-5. UDP port for ECPIP is fixed at 2101.

6-30 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Configuration
Ethernet Port, MM-1-5-1

Note • Contact your Internet Protocol (IP) specialist to determine the correct setting for
each of the parameters defined below.

MM-1-5-1
Parameter Description Range

MAC ADDRESS Display (for info only) of the factory-set controller MAC address. -
CONTROLLER IP A unique address used by the Ethernet interface. The format follows 0-255
the Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
standard dot notation. When used, the address must be assigned from
the same subnet as the other network devices with which it may
communicate, such as a system controller or File Transfer Protocol
(FTP) server. If the controller is connected to an IP router, the address
must be valid for that router.
Note • Changing IP address will force transaction mode to make
sure the entire IP address is entered before committing.
Accepting IP change on each field may cause unintentional
IP conflict on the network.
On the 2070-1C CPU module, this is to configure the ethernet port
NET2.

Ethernet Port NET2

SUBNET MASK The subnet mask must be the same as the other devices on the IP 0-255
subnet to which the controller is attached (when an Ethernet interface
is being used).
On the 2070-1C CPU module, this is to configure the ethernet port
NET2, illustrated above.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 6-31

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Configuration
Serial Communication Protocols

MM-1-5-1
Parameter Description Range

DEFAULT The default IP address must be that of the Ethernet interface which is 0-255
GATEWAY IP on the same subnet as this controller. This gateway address will be
used for transmitting IP messages to end systems, which are not on the
same subnet as this controller.
On the 2070-1C CPU module, this is to configure the ethernet port
NET2, illustrated above.
SERVER IP This address is optional, and is only required when the IP-based file 0-255
download options are to be used. The address must be that of the
system where the FTP server resides. This field is only used for local
downloads from an FTP server “host” on the local area network.
LINK SPEED/ Select the link speed and duplex setting for your Ethernet LAN. AUTO
DUPLEX Selecting AUTO will cause the link setting to be auto-negotiated or 1000/FULL
auto-sensed. As of now, only AUTO is allowed on some controller 1000/HALF
platforms. 100/FULL
100/HALF
10/FULL
10/HALF
DROP OUT TIME 1-65535: The time from the last valid command before returning to 0-65535
local control. seconds
0: Disables the drop-out feature. This should never be used unless
there is an explicit reason.
On the 2070-1C CPU module, this is to configure the ethernet port
NET2, illustrated above.

Serial Communication Protocols 6

ASC/3 software provides support for numerous serial ports and protocols. Protocols
supported are GPS NMEA, Terminal (VT100), NTCIP Level 2, ECPIP, limited AB3418,
Metro Rapid and IEEE 1570.

6-32 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Configuration
Serial Communication Protocols

Note • ASC/3-LX Ver. 32.59.00:

 Does not support communication protocols IEEE1570 and Metro Rapid
 Supports NTCIP on Ethernet, C22S and C21S, but not on C50S
 Uses C50S as a Linux Console for diagnostics
 Supports GPS NMEA only on C22S
 Hyperlinks operate, however the black shading (reverse video) in the
hyperlink fields is not shown as illustrated in this manual.

Protocol Selection
GPS NMEA
Provides a connection to process a GPS NMEA message to set the time and date (or
longitude/latitude). The controller supports an Eltec GPS unit and all other standard GPS
devices that support a GPS NMEA Protocol message $GPRMC on serial Ports 2, 3A,
C50S or C21S. This feature is compatible with Centracs Version 1.5.3 or later. To order a
GPS unit (antenna, antenna cable and serial interface cable) from Econolite, use the part
numbers listed below:

Part No. Connector Name For Controllers

TSD25-GPS 25 Pins for Eltec GPS DB25 Serial Time ASC/3, ASC/3-RM
Port 2 Sync Unit
TSD9-GPS 9 Pins for Ports Eltec GPS DB9 Serial Time ASC/3, ASC/3-RM,
3A, C50S, C21S Sync Unit 2070

Set the parameters in MM-1-5-2 or MM-1-5-3 as shown in the sample screens for GPS
NMEA in Port 2/C50S, MM-1-5-2 on page 6-34 and Port 3A/C21S, MM-1-5-3 on
page 6-35.
Terminal
Provides VT100-compatible communication.
NTCIP
Provides NTCIP-compatible communication.
ECPIP
Provides ECPIP-compatible communication. This protocol is tailored to function in an
Econolite Aries or Zone Master system.
AB3418
Provides AB3418-compatible communication. This protocol is tailored to comply with the
California AB3418 specification.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 6-33

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Configuration
Port 2/C50S, MM-1-5-2

Metro Rapid
Provides a Metro Rapid and Pilot Protocol Bus-to-Signal Priority compatible
communication between computers and modems. This protocol was developed to comply
with the County of Los Angeles Metro Rapid specification.
IEEE 1570
Provides a limited IEEE 1570 interface compatible communication between wayside
devices and modems. These are specific applications that use IEEE 1570.

Port 2/C50S, MM-1-5-2 6

These ports provide for the EIA-232 terminal communications.

Note •
 In the screens below, the different Protocols are shown in bold.
 Some of the options on ASC/3 may not be available in ASC/3-2070 or
ASC/3-LX.
 To make data entries in these displays, refer to Serial Port Parameters on
page 6-38.

MM-1-5-2 — Port 2 on ASC/3 MM-1-5-2 — Port C50S on 2070

COMM PORT 2 COMM PORT C50S
ENABLE......... NO PROTOCOL GPS NMEA ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL GPS NMEA
BIT RATE.... 9600 BIT RATE.... 9600
D/P/S........ 8/N/1 D/P/S........ 8/N/1
DUPLEX........ FULL DUPLEX........ FULL
FLOW CONTROL... YES

COMM PORT 2 COMM PORT C50S

ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL TERM ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL TERM
BIT RATE.... 9600 BIT RATE.... 38400
D/P/S........ 8/N/1 D/P/S........ 8/N/1
DUPLEX........ HALF DUPLEX........ HALF
FLOW CONTROL... YES

COMM PORT 2 COMM PORT C50S

ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL NTCIP ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL NTCIP
BIT RATE.... 9600 ADDRESS....... 65535 BIT RATE.... 38400 ADDRESS....... 65535
D/P/S........ 8/N/1 GROUP ADDRESS. 65535 D/P/S........ 8/N/1 GROUP ADDRESS. 65535
DUPLEX........ HALF SINGLE FLAGGED.. YES DUPLEX........ HALF DROP-OUT TIME. 65535
FLOW CONTROL... YES DROP-OUT TIME. 65535

INTERSECTION MONITOR
MODEM SETUP STRING................. USER
USER STRING:

6-34 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Configuration
Port 3A/C21S, MM-1-5-3

MM-1-5-2 — Port 2 on ASC/3 MM-1-5-2 — Port C50S on 2070

COMM PORT 2
ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL ECPIP Note: ECPIP is not supported on Port
BIT RATE.... 9600 TRD (ms)....... 0.0 C50S.
D/P/S........ 8/N/1 DROP-OUT TIME. 65535
DUPLEX........ HALF
FLOW CONTROL... YES

COMM PORT 2 COMM PORT C50S

ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL AB3418 ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL AB3418
BIT RATE.... 9600 ADDRESS....... 65535 BIT RATE.... 38400 ADDRESS....... 65535
D/P/S........ 8/N/1 GROUP ADDRESS. 65535 D/P/S........ 8/N/1 GROUP ADDRESS. 65535
DUPLEX........ HALF SINGLE FLAGGED.. YES DUPLEX........ HALF DROP-OUT TIME. 65535
FLOW CONTROL... YES DROP-OUT TIME. 65535

COMM PORT 2
ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL METRO RAPID
BIT RATE.... 9600
D/P/S........ 8/N/1
DUPLEX........ HALF
FLOW CONTROL... YES

COMM PORT 2
ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL IEEE 1570
BIT RATE.... 9600 ATCS RAILROAD... 0
D/P/S........ 8/N/1 ATCS RR LINE.... 0
DUPLEX........ HALF ATCS GROUP...... 0
FLOW CONTROL... YES WAYSIDE ATC
DEVICE 0 0
SUBNODE 0 0

Port 3A/C21S, MM-1-5-3 6

These ports provide for the EIA-232 terminal communications.

For ASC/3 hardware, port 3A provides for EIA-232 serial communications through the
NEMA-defined Port 3 connector (reference NEMA TS2 3.3.3). This adapts the controller
to operate in place of an ASC/2 equipped with an RS 232 telemetry module.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 6-35

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Configuration
Port 3B/C22S, MM-1-5-4

Note •
 In the screens below, the different Protocols are shown in bold.
 Some of the options on ASC/3 may not be available in ASC/3-2070 or
ASC/3-LX.
 To make data entries in these displays, refer to Serial Port Parameters on
page 6-38.

MM-1-5-3 — Port 3A on ASC/3 MM-1-5-3 — Port C21S on 2070

COMM PORT 3A COMM PORT C21S
ENABLE......... NO PROTOCOL GPS NMEA ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL GPS NMEA
BIT RATE.... 9600 BIT RATE.... 9600
D/P/S........ 8/N/1 D/P/S........ 8/N/1
DUPLEX........ FULL DUPLEX........ FULL
FLOW CONTROL... YES

COMM PORT 3A COMM PORT C21S

ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL..... TERM ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL..... TERM
BIT RATE.... 9600 BIT RATE.... 9600
D/P/S........ 8/N/1 D/P/S........ 8/N/1
DUPLEX........ HALF DUPLEX........ HALF
FLOW CONTROL... YES FLOW CONTROL... YES

COMM PORT 3A COMM PORT C21S

ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL..... NTCIP ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL..... NTCIP
BIT RATE.... 9600 ADDRESS....... 65535 BIT RATE.... 9600 ADDRESS....... 65535
D/P/S........ 8/N/1 GROUP ADDRESS. 65535 D/P/S........ 8/N/1 GROUP ADDRESS. 65535
DUPLEX........ HALF SINGLE FLAGGED.. YES DUPLEX........ HALF DROP-OUT TIME. 65535
FLOW CONTROL... YES DROP-OUT TIME. 65535 FLOW CONTROL... YES

COMM PORT 3A COMM PORT C21S

ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL..... ECPIP ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL..... ECPIP
BIT RATE.... 9600 TRD (ms)....... 0.0 BIT RATE.... 9600 TRD (ms)....... 0.0
D/P/S........ 8/N/1 DROP-OUT TIME. 65535 D/P/S........ 8/N/1 DROP-OUT TIME. 65535
DUPLEX........ HALF DUPLEX........ HALF
FLOW CONTROL... YES FLOW CONTROL... YES

COMM PORT 3A COMM PORT C21S

ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL..... AB3418 ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL..... AB3418
BIT RATE.... 9600 ADDRESS....... 65535 BIT RATE.... 9600 ADDRESS....... 65535
D/P/S........ 8/N/1 GROUP ADDRESS. 65535 D/P/S........ 8/N/1 GROUP ADDRESS. 65535
DUPLEX........ HALF SINGLE FLAGGED.. YES DUPLEX........ HALF DROP-OUT TIME. 65535
FLOW CONTROL... YES DROP-OUT TIME. 65535 FLOW CONTROL... YES

Port 3B/C22S, MM-1-5-4 6

These ports provide for the EIA-232 terminal communications.

For ASC/3 hardware, port 3B provides for FSK communications through NEMA defined
Port 3 connections (reference NEMA TS2 3.3.3) or an ASC/2 defined 25-pin Telemetry
connector. These options allow the controller to be compatible with NEMA TS2 and
replace an ASC-8000 or ASC/2 family controller.

6-36 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Configuration
Port 3B/C22S, MM-1-5-4

Note •
 In the screens below, the different Protocols are shown in bold.
 Some of the options on ASC/3 may not be available in ASC/3-2070 or
ASC/3-LX.
 To make data entries in these displays, refer to Serial Port Parameters on
page 6-38.

MM-1-5-4 — Port 3B on ASC/3 MM-1-5-4 — Port C22S on 2070

COMM PORT 3B COMM PORT C22S
ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL..... NTCIP ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL..... NTCIP
BIT RATE.... 115200 ADDRESS....... 65535 BIT RATE.... 115200 ADDRESS....... 65535
D/P/S........ 8/N/1 GROUP ADDRESS. 65535 D/P/S........ 8/N/1 GROUP ADDRESS. 65535
DUPLEX........ HALF SINGLE FLAGGED.. YES DUPLEX........ HALF DROP-OUT TIME. 65535
FLOW CONTROL... YES DROP-OUT TIME. 65535 FLOW CONTROL... YES
RTS-CTS DELAY. 6810
RTS TURN OFF.. 6810
EARLY RTS...... YES

COMM PORT 3B
ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL..... ECPIP
BIT RATE.... 115200 TRD (ms)....... 0.0
D/P/S........ 8/N/1 DROP-OUT TIME. 65535
DUPLEX........ HALF
FLOW CONTROL... YES
RTS-CTS DELAY. 6810
RTS TURN OFF.. 6810
EARLY RTS...... YES
FSK HARDWARE... YES

COMM PORT 3B
ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL..... TERM COMM PORT C22S
BIT RATE.... 115200 ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL..... TERM
D/P/S........ 8/N/1 BIT RATE.... 115200
DUPLEX........ HALF D/P/S........ 8/N/1
FLOW CONTROL... YES DUPLEX........ HALF
RTS-CTS DELAY. 6810 FLOW CONTROL... YES
RTS TURN OFF.. 6810
EARLY RTS...... YES

COMM PORT 3B
ENABLE....... RS232 PROTOCOL..... AB3418 COMM PORT C22S
BIT RATE.... 115200 ADDRESS....... 65535 ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL..... AB3418
D/P/S........ 8/N/1 GROUP ADDRESS. 65535 BIT RATE.... 115200 ADDRESS....... 65535
DUPLEX........ HALF SINGLE FLAGGED.. YES D/P/S........ 8/N/1 GROUP ADDRESS. 65535
FLOW CONTROL... YES DROP-OUT TIME. 65535 DUPLEX........ HALF DROP-OUT TIME. 65535
RTS-CTS DELAY. 6810 FLOW CONTROL... YES
RTS TURN OFF.. 6810
EARLY RTS...... YES

ASC/3 Programming Manual 6-37

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Configuration
Serial Port Parameters

MM-1-5-4 — Port 3B on ASC/3 MM-1-5-4 — Port C22S on 2070

COMM PORT C22S
ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL.METRO RAPID
BIT RATE.... 115200 ADDRESS....... 0
D/P/S........ 8/N/1
DUPLEX........ HALF
FLOW CONTROL... YES

COMM PORT C22S

ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL.IEEE 1570
BIT RATE.... 115200 ATCS RAILROAD... 0
D/P/S........ 8/N/1 ATCS RR LINE.... 0
DUPLEX........ HALF ATCS GROUP...... 0
FLOW CONTROL... YES WAYSIDE ATC
DEVICE 0 0
SUBNODE 0 0

Serial Port Parameters 6

Below are the descriptions of all the parameters you can program for the serial
communication ports in MM-1-5-2, MM-1-5-3 and MM-1-5-4.

MM-1-5-2, 3, 4
Parameter Description Range

ENABLE Toggle to enable (YES) or disable (NO). YES enables

Note • The port should not be enabled during setup or non- NO disables
use.
BIT RATE (BPS) Toggle to select the data transfer rate from range values 1200, 4800, 9600,
provided. Rate is in bps. 19.2K, 38.4K,
57.6K, or 115.2K
Port 3B value can only be either 1200 or 9600 bps.
Port C50S value can only be either 9600 or 38400 bps.
Ports C21S and C22S value can only be one of 1200, 2400, 4800,
9600, 38400
D/P/S Toggle to select: 8N1, 8Z1, 8E1 or 7E1 8N1, 8Z1, 8E1,
DATA, PARITY, or 7E1
STOP Data bits of 7 or 8.
Parity E=Even, Z=Odd, or N=None.
Stop bits 1.
The selected value applies only when the communication
protocol is either TERMINAL or NTCIP.
AB3418 automatically selects 8N1 and ECPIP automatically
selects 8Z1.

6-38 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Configuration
Serial Port Parameters

MM-1-5-2, 3, 4
Parameter Description Range

DUPLEX IMPORTANT • Please consult with the factory before HALF/FULL

HALF OR FULL changing this setting.
As required by modem specifications, the port may be con-
figured as Half or Full Duplex. Toggle to select HALF or FULL.
HALF duplex can receive data only after transmission of a
response is complete.
FULL duplex can receive and transmit data at the same time.
Port 3B supports FSK module that may have a physical switch
that arbitrates Half or Full duplex for port 3B.
FLOW CONTROL Modem control signals sent over serial ports: YES enables
Carrier Detect (CD) NO disables
Data Set Ready (DSR)
Data Terminal Ready (DTR)
Set this to NO when using devices that do not support modem
control signals, such as fiber modems.
PROTOCOL Ports 2, 3A, 3B: Toggle to select TERM, NTCIP, ECPIP, TERM, NTCIP,
AB3418 ECPIP, AB3418,
Port 2: Toggle to select METRO RAPID, IEEE 1570 METRO
RAPID,
Port 2 and Port 3A: Toggle to select GPS NMEA IEEE 1570,
Note • Regardless of the protocol selected, if a modem is GPS NMEA
going to be connected, a null-modem adaptor or cable
may be required.
For ASC/3-2070 or ASC/3-LX:
Ports C50S, C21S, C22S: Toggle to select NTCIP, AB3418,
ECPIP, TERM
Ports C21S and C22S: Toggle to select IEEE 1570 and
GPS NMEA
Port C21S: Toggle to select ECPIP

ASC/3 Programming Manual 6-39

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Configuration
Serial Port Parameters

MM-1-5-2, 3, 4
Parameter Description Range

ADDRESS Use numeric keys (0-9) to specify a unique address number 1-65535 address
(1-65535) to which this port will respond. Zero (0) disables 0 disables
responding to any address.
NTCIP/AB3418 protocol
1-65535: Address to respond to.
0: Disables responses.
ECPIP protocol
1-24: Address to respond to.
0 & 25-65535: Disables responses.
Metro Rapid protocol
1-8191: Address to respond to.
0 & 8192-65535: Disables responses.
GROUP ADDRESS Use the numeric keys (0-9) to specify an address number that 0-65535
allows a master station to access this slave station via group except 63
command of NTCIP protocol.
1-62 and 64-65535 for AB3418.
1-62 for NTCIP.
Address 63 is reserved as an “all stations” group address.
Address zero (0) excludes the station from any group.
SINGLE FLAGGED For AB3418 or NTCIP. YES, NO
Toggle to select YES (enable) or NO (disable).
YES: The frame flag is used as both the closing flag for one
frame and the opening flag for the next frame.
NO: Each response frame contains an opening and a closing
flag.
DROP-OUT TIME Use the numeric keys (0-9) to enter the time in seconds 1-65535 seconds
(1-65535) from when the last valid command occurs before the 0 disables
controller is returned to local control. Zero (0) disables the
dropout feature.
MODEM SETUP Toggle to select one of the internal modem setup string options NONE, 56K,
STRING (NONE, 56K, or USER). Use this typically for the optional USER
Intersection Monitor module.

6-40 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Configuration
Serial Port Parameters

MM-1-5-2, 3, 4
Parameter Description Range

USER STRING Specifies the unique modem setup string required for the 0-9, A-Z,
modem being used. This string is only used if the MODEM Enter these other
SETUP STRING is set to USER. characters with
The keypad is in alphanumeric data entry mode when in this key 1: space
field. Consult the manual for your modem to determine the $/>#*;\"!@&.?
setup string required. Use this typically for the optional =-
Intersection Monitor module.
TRD ECPIP Only 0.0-25.5 msec
TELEMETRY
RESPONSE DELAY Telemetry Response Delay (TRD) compensates response timing
for overall communication delays. Decrease (start
communication earlier) to compensate for longer delays and
increase (start communication later) to compensate for shorter
delays.
RTS TO CTS Applicable to Port 3B FSK Only 0-381
DELAY milliseconds
Use numeric keys (0-9) to specify the amount of delay (in
milliseconds) between Request To Send (RTS) and Clear To
Send (CTS). (0-9) to specify the amount of delay (in
milliseconds) between RTS and CTS. Delay between the RTS
and CTS is required by some communication devices. This
period of time after RTS is applied prior to sending data for
transmission. RTS is turned on and timing begins at the end of
the telemetry response delay or a response is ready for
transmission, whichever is greater.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 6-41

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Configuration
NTCIP Parameters, MM-1-5-5

MM-1-5-2, 3, 4
Parameter Description Range

RTS TURN OFF Applicable to Port 3B FSK Only 0-681

DELAY milliseconds
Use numeric keys (0-9) to specify the amount of delay (in
milliseconds) between Request To Send (RTS) and Clear To
Send (CTS). (0-9) to specify the amount of delay (in
milliseconds) between RTS and CTS. Delay between the RTS
and CTS is required by some communication devices. This
period of time after RTS is applied prior to sending data for
transmission. RTS is turned on and timing begins at the end of
the telemetry response delay or a response is ready for
transmission, whichever is greater.
EARLY RTS Applicable to Port 3B FSK Only YES enable
Toggle to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the Early RTS function. NO prevent
YES: RTS is turned on when the telemetry response delay
begins. This minimizes overall response time, if Telemetry
Response Delay is not zero, by using that delay time as part of
the RTS to CTS delay. RTS is not turned on early if Telemetry
Response Delay is zero.
NO: RTS is off during timing of Telemetry Response Delay.
This can be a minimum turnaround delay for half-duplex
operation.

NTCIP Parameters, MM-1-5-5 6

NTCIP
BACKUP TIME....................... 65535
UDP PORT.......................... 65535
ETHERNET PRIORITY..................... 1
PORT C50S PRIORITY.................... 4
PORT C21S PRIORITY.................... 2
PORT C22S PRIORITY.................... 3

The example screen, above, is for a 2070 screen.

Port parameters define the NTCIP backup time, UDP Port and priority of the port
communications. This programming is only required when the controller is
communicating through one of its ports.

6-42 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Configuration
NTCIP Parameters, MM-1-5-5

From this screen, you specify the NTCIP Backup Time parameters and Ports 2/C50S,
3A/C21S, 3B/C22S, and Ethernet Priority values.

MM-1-5-5
Parameter Description Range

NTCIP BACKUP Use numeric keys (0-9) to enter the appropriate NTCIP Backup 0 disables
TIME Time value in seconds. Value entered (1-65535) establishes the time 1-65535 sets
that the parameters are under control of the “SET” command and time
will remain if no “SET” command is received by the controller.
Value 0 disables clearing of the parameters that were set regardless
of the time between “SET” commands.
UDP PORT STMP or IP over PMPP using SNMP or STMP Frame should use 161,
this port setting. 500-65535
For ASC/3-2070 or ASC/3-LX, you can set port 161 to support
applications that have a fixed SNMP port setting.
PORTS 2/C50S, Use numeric keys (0-9) to enter appropriate priority level value (1- 1-4, with 1
3A/C21S, 4, with 1 highest) for the port. Value selects the priority of highest
3B/C22S, and
commands from that port. While a higher priority port is in control,
ETHERNET
PRIORITY the lower priority port can continue to retrieve status information.
The order of priority when two or more have the same priority
number is (from highest to lowest) Ethernet, Port 2/C50S, Port
3A/C21S, then Port 3B/C22S.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 6-43

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Configuration
ECPIP Parameters, MM-1-5-6

ECPIP Parameters, MM-1-5-6 6

ECPIP FRI 02/10/2012|08:22:32

CONTROLLER ADDRESS.....................0
EXPANDED SYSTEM DETECTOR ADDRESS.......0

SYSTEM DETECTOR ASSIGNMENT:

SYSTEM DET 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LOCAL DET 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64
SYSTEM DET 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
LOCAL DET 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64

MM-1-5-6
Parameter Description Range

CONTROLLER ECPIP Protocol ECPIP 1-

ADDRESS 24 address 0
1-24 programs the address to which this port will respond.
disables
0 disables communication responses.
Note • There is only 1 ECPIP address setting.
EXPANDED SYSTEM Use numeric keys (0-9) to specify a unique address (1-24) to allow the 0 Disable
DETECTOR Zone Master to access system detectors 9-16.
ADDRESS 1-24 Enable
1-24: Allows access by the Zone Master (when PROTOCOL set to
ECPIP) to system detectors 9-16. This address must be one of the 24
addresses available on the Zone Master system.
0 (zero): Disables access to system detectors 9-16.
Note • System detectors 1-8 do NOT require an address separate
from that of the controller.
LOCAL DET Local System Detector 0 Disable
Cursor to a Local System Detector, 1 thru 16. 1-64 Enable
Assign Vehicle Detector (1-64) or disable (0) that Local System
Detector.
Note • Detectors assigned to a phase may also be assigned as
local system detector for reporting to a Zone Master or Aries
system.

6-44 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Configuration
Enable Logging Submenu, MM-1-6

Enable Logging Submenu, MM-1-6 6

ENABLE LOGGING SUBMENU

1. EVENT LOGGING

Event Logging, MM-1-6-1 6

This menu permits you to selectively enable and disable the real time logging of ASC/3
events. The event buffer can store 500 non-detector error events and 300 detector error
events. When full, the oldest events are discarded to make room for the new.

To program Event Logging:

 Use Toggle, 0/YES, to select either YES or NO for each of the options (including the
scroll area) provided on the Event Logging data entry (MM-1-6-1).

EVENT LOGGING
RFEs (MMU/TF).. YES 3 RFEs >24 H.... YES
MMU FL FAULTS.. YES LOCAL FLASH..... YES
RFEs (DET/TEST) YES DETECTOR ERRORS. YES
COORD ERRORS... YES CTR DOWNLOAD.... YES
PREEMPT........ YES TSP............. YES
POWER ON/OFF... YES LOW BATTERY..... YES
ACCESS......... YES DATA CHANGE..... YES
ONLINE/OFFLINE. YES
ALARM 1........ YES ALARM 2......... YES
ALARM 3........ YES ALARM 4......... YES
ALARM 5........ YES ALARM 6......... YES
ALARM 7........ YES ALARM 8......... YES
ALARM 9........ YES ALARM 10........ YES
ALARM 11....... YES ALARM 12........ YES
ALARM 13....... YES ALARM 14........ YES
ALARM 15....... YES ALARM 16........ YES

MM-1-6-1
Parameter Description Range

CRITICAL RFEs Enables logging SDLC Response Frame Errors (RFEs) that YES enables
(MMU/TF) result in the controller flash. These RFEs, related to the NO disables
MMU and/or Terminals & Facilities (TF), are considered
critical and will put the intersection into flash when there are
six or more RFEs in the last ten tries. This logging mode
applies to TS2 operation only.
3 CRITICAL RFE Enables logging of the latched controller flash caused by 3 of YES enables
ERRORS IN 24 the same critical RFEs (MMU/TF) in the last 24-hour period. NO disables
HOURS
This logging mode applies to TS2 operation only.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 6-45

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Configuration
Event Logging, MM-1-6-1

MM-1-6-1
Parameter Description Range

MMU FLASH FAULTS Enables logging of flash events reported via SDLC from the YES enables
MMU or detected by the controller. This logging mode NO disables
applies to TS2 operation only.
LOCAL FLASH Enables logging of local flash events: YES enables
CYCLE FAULT: A serviceable call has not been serviced for NO disables
two controller cycles.
Note • A controller cycle is the time the controller would
take to time all phases if max recall was applied to
all phases.
CABINET FLASH caused by input, TIME BASE action
plan, coordination pattern, manual selection, or system
command.
This logging mode applies toTS1 and TS2 operation.
NON-CRITICAL Enables logging of the non-critical SDLC response frame YES enables
RFEs (DET/TEST) errors (RFEs) when there are six or more in the last ten tries NO disables
related to detector (DET) BIUs and the TEST fixture. These
RFEs are considered non-critical and will not put the
intersection into flash. Applies only if the DET BIUs and/or
TEST fixture are enabled (Reference MM-1-4-1). This
logging mode applies to TS2 operation only.
DETECTOR ERRORS Enables logging of detector errors reported by: YES enables
NO disables
Valid SDLC response frames including watchdog failure,
open loop, shorted loop, and excessive inductance change.
Controller detected errors reported under TS1, TS2
operations that include no activity, max presence, and erratic
counts.
COORDINATION Enables logging of: YES enables
ERRORS NO disables
COORD ACTIVE: No fault or conflict.
COORD FAULT: A cycle fault is in effect and a serviceable
call has not been serviced within two cycles.
COORD LOCAL FREE: Controller taken out of co-
ordination by a command or input.
COORD PROGRAM FREE: Controller taken out of
coordination by the TIME BASE program.
COORD DATA ERRORS: Incorrect programming data.
The coordinator cannot run.

6-46 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Configuration
Event Logging, MM-1-6-1

MM-1-6-1
Parameter Description Range

CONTROLLER Enables the logging of controller download events. An event YES enables
DOWNLOAD will be logged when the controller starts responding to NO disables
download commands. This logging mode applies to TS1 and
TS2 operation.
PREEMPT Enables logging of preemption events. Log indicates when YES enables
priority preemptors are active. Records occurrence date, NO disables
time, and preemptor number. This logging mode applies to
TS1 and TS2 operation.
TSP This is an ECPI feature whose logging mode applies to TS1 YES enables
and TS2 operation. NO disables
Enables logging of 4 possible TSP events:
 TSP Call Received
 TSP Inhibited Call Received
 TSP Cycle Activated
 TSP Cycle Terminated
Note • You can see the TSP events on Screen MM-8-6-1-1.
POWER ON/OFF Enables logging of power ON and power OFF events. YES enables
Reports when power on and off occur. This logging mode NO disables
applies to TS1 and TS2 operation.
LOW BATTERY Enables logging of low voltage conditions of the battery used YES enables
to hold up the CMOS RAM that stores run-time data. A NO disables
battery in good condition can hold up the RAM in excess of
30 days. This logging mode applies to TS1 and TS2
operation.
ACCESS Enables the log to record the access code and when an access YES enables
was granted to the controller. This logging mode applies to NO disables
TS1 and TS2 operation.
DATA CHANGE Enables the log to record when there is a data change by the YES enables
keypad. Only the first data change event is logged after access NO disables
is granted. All further data change events are not logged until
a new user logs in or the display has timed out (20 minutes).
This logging mode applies to TS1 and TS2 operation.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 6-47

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Configuration
Event Logging, MM-1-6-1

MM-1-6-1
Parameter Description Range

ONLINE/OFFLINE Online/Offline Events YES enables

NO disables
Enables logging of the Online and Offline Events. These
typically occur before and after preempt, flash and power-up.
LOG ALARM EVENTS Enables logging of all ALARM 1-16 EVENTS. Each alarm YES enables
can be individually enabled or disabled by positioning the NO disables
cursor on the line to be changed, then pressing Toggle,
0/YES, to display either YES or NO. This logging mode
applies to TS1 and TS2 operation.

6-48 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Configuration
Display/Access Submenu, MM-1-7

Display/Access Submenu, MM-1-7 6

DISPLAY/ACCESS SUBMENU

1. ADMINISTRATION

2. DISPLAY OPTIONS

3. SECURITY ACCESS

Administration, MM-1-7-1 6

ADMINISTRATION

ENABLE CU/CABINET INTERLOCK CRC.... NO

CU/CABINET INTERLOCK CRC VALUE..... 0000
CU/CABINET INTERLOCK HW VALUE...... 0000

REQUEST DOWNLOAD CONTROLLER DATA... NO

CONTROLLER DATABASE CRC ........... A650
ENABLE AUTOMATIC BACKUP TO DATAKEY. NO

MM-1-7-1
Parameter Description Range

ENABLE YES: Enables checking of the database 16-bit CRC and YES enables
CU/CABINET the CRC wired in the cabinet to the controller inputs.
INTERLOCK CRC NO disables
When there is a discrepancy, the controller will go to
flash.
IMPORTANT • The 16-bit CRC input must match the
database CRC. With this option
enabled, there is NO data entry or
download.
NO: Disables the CRC check and allows for data entry
and download.
Note • When this option is used, the cabinet must be
wired to reflect any change to the ASC/3
database before the controller is put in service.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 6-49

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Configuration
Administration, MM-1-7-1

MM-1-7-1
Parameter Description Range

CU/CABINET This feature, when enabled, requires a CRC match 0 to 0xffff

INTERLOCK CRC between certain database variables (the computed CRC)
VALUE
and a CRC wired to 16 controller inputs (the hardwired
and CRC).
If a CRC mismatch is detected at power ON, the
CU/CABINET
controller will remain in CVM flash. If a CRC mismatch
INTERLOCK HW
VALUE occurs while the controller is running, it will proceed to
automatic flash with CVM TRUE.
CRC is checked for the database sections that follow:
MM-1-1-1 Ring Sequence
MM-1-1-2 Phase Compatibility
MM-2-2 Vehicle Overlaps
MM-2-3 Pedestrian Overlaps
MM-4-1 Preemptor 1-10
MM-4-2 Low Priority Preemptors
REQUEST DOWNLOAD YES requests the download of this controller’s database YES enables
OF CONTROLLER from the Traffic Operations Center. This entry is
DATA NO disables
temporary and not part of the database. It automatically
sets to NO when the download is complete or access is
logged off.
CONTROLLER This CRC is computed over the entire ASC/3 Database. 0 to 0xffff
DATABASE CRC

ENABLE AUTOMATIC YES: Enables the controller to backup database changes YES enables
BACKUP TO to the Datakey 20 minutes after the change has occurred. NO disables
DATAKEY
NO: Disables this function.

CU/CABINET INTERLOCK CRC application procedure:

1 Map all designated CU/CABINET INTERLOCK CRC Input signals in the cabinet.

Enabled Remote flash – Tied to Logic Ground. This is to signify that CU/CABINET
INTERLOCK CRC is enabled in the cabinet. Auto Flash input is inverted in this
operation so that any non CRC enabled controller will have a true flash command.
2 Complete the programming of the Database to make sure valid CU/CABINET
INTERLOCK CRC is completed and final.
3 Enable CU/CABINET INTERLOCK CRC Option (MM-1-7-1).

6-50 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Configuration
Administration, MM-1-7-1

4 Check for the computed CRC value (CU/CABINET INTERLOCK CRC VALUE).
Make sure the bits that have 1 value are grounded.
5 Turn ON the controller/Cabinet.

CU/CABINET INTERLOCK CRC example

Assuming the designated signals are the following (Typical TS1 IDOT cabinet):

CRC Bit Designation Input Signal

00 INHIBIT MAX TERM (Ring 1)

01 IND. LAMP CONTROL
02 WAS FORCE OFF (Ring 1)
03 OMIT RED CLEAR (Ring 1)
04 RED REST (Ring 1)
05 CALL NON-ACT II
06 WALK REST MODIFIER
07 PED RECYCLE (Ring 1)
08 MAX 2 SELECTION (Ring 1)
09 PED RECYCLE (Ring 2)
10 MAX 2 SELECTION (Ring 2)
11 FORCE OFF (Ring 2)
12 INHIBIT MAX TERM (Ring 2)
13 TEST B
14 RED REST (Ring 2)
15 OMIT RED CLEAR (Ring 2)

ASC/3 Programming Manual 6-51

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Configuration
Administration, MM-1-7-1

Computed CU/CABINET INTERLOCK CRC Value is 51DD as seen from MM-1-7-1:

Interlock CRC in Hex 5 1 D D

Bit # 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC (Binary) 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1
Grounded Inputs 14 12 8 7 6 4 3 2 0

ON Bits Tie these Input Signals to Logic Ground

N/A REMOTE FLASH Input

14 RED REST ( 2 )
12 INHIBIT MAX TERM ( 2 )
8 MAX 2 SELECTION ( 1 )
7 PED RECYCLE ( 1 )
6 WALK REST MODIFIER
4 RED REST ( 1 )
3 OMIT RED CLEAR ( 1 )
2 FORCE OFF ( 1 )
0 INHIBIT MAX TERM ( 1 )

6-52 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Configuration
Display Options, MM-1-7-2

Display Options, MM-1-7-2 6

DISPLAY OPTIONS

KEY CLICK ENABLE................ YES

BACKLIGHT ENABLE................ YES

LED MODE....................... AUTO

MAIN STATUS DISPLAY MODE... ADVANCED

SCREEN FORMAT...............ADVANCED

MM-1-7-2
Parameter Description Range

KEY CLICK ENABLE YES: Enables a beep sound feedback (in addition to the YES enables
tactile feedback) when you press a front panel key. NO disables
NO: Selects silent operation.
BACKLIGHT ENABLE YES: Turns ON the LCD backlight whenever you press YES enables
a front-panel key. The backlight turns OFF automatically NO disables
after 30 minutes of keypad inactivity.
NO: Disables the backlight.
LED MODE AUTO: The software automatically selects what mode to AUTO,
display based on hardware capability: SINGLE COLOR,
ASC/3-2100, 1000, RM: Tri-Color (Yellow, Green, and ALT MODE 1,
Red)
ALT MODE 2
2070: Same as SINGLE COLOR
SINGLE COLOR (Red): You can set the controller to
stay in this mode.
ALT MODE 1: Reserved
ALT MODE 2: Reserved
For a list of the LED conditions for Tri-Color and Single-
Color modes, refer to Front Panel LED Indicator on
page 14-1.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 6-53

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Configuration
Display Options, MM-1-7-2

MM-1-7-2
Parameter Description Range

MAIN STATUS Main Status Display Mode ADVANCED,

DISPLAY MODE BASIC
Use this field to change the default Main Status Display
option. To switch between display modes, press
NEXT SCREEN.
Basic and Advanced Main Status Displays are explained
and shown in Main Status Displays on page 12-2.
SCREEN FORMAT Format for the Controller Screens ADVANCED,
BASIC
ADVANCED: Normal screens for ASC/3. This is the
default.
BASIC: Each menu selection first shows the fields for
basic operation. Other fields for advanced operation are
also present but, to accesss them, you must scroll down
beyond the bottom of the first screen.
Note • After you change this setting, to enable it you
must power cycle the controller.

6-54 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Configuration
Security Access, MM-1-7-3

Security Access, MM-1-7-3 6

To activate Front Panel Access Security, change the User Account 1 (Administrator)
Access Code to a non- zero number. To do this, refer to the instructions below for
MM-1-7-3.
When security is enabled, if you press a menu key, the screen shown below will come into
view:
****************************************
* ACCESS CODE:[XXXXXXXX] *
*FOR READ-ONLY ACCESS PRESS [ENTER] KEY*
****************************************
To gain access privilege, enter the valid Access Code. If you do not know an Access Code,
to gain READ-ONLY privilege, press ENTER. To change the Access Code or to log off,
press SPEC FUNC then press STATUS DISPLAY (for 2070, press * then press E).
You can access MM-1-7-3 (shown below):
 If security has not been activated.
 If security has been activated, with the access code that has the ALL Access for the
security privilege.

SECURITY ACCESS -SELECT NAME- v

01 administrator-- 02 L TA-----------
03 M WILLIAMS----- 04 D PADDOCK------
05 M ALLWOOD------ 06 J GARCIA-------
07 R DUNMYER------ 08 K YANG---------
09 J FORBES------- 10 P HOLLINGSWORTH
11 --------------- 12 ---------------
13 --------------- 14 ---------------
15 --------------- 16 ---------------
17 --------------- 18 ---------------
19 --------------- 20 ---------------
21 --------------- 22 ---------------
23 --------------- 24 ---------------
25 --------------- 26 ---------------
27 --------------- 28 ---------------
29 --------------- 30 ---------------
31 --------------- 32 ---------------
33 --------------- 34 ---------------
35 --------------- 36 ---------------
37 --------------- 38 ---------------
39 --------------- 40 ---------------
41 --------------- 42 ---------------
43 --------------- 44 ---------------
45 --------------- 46 ---------------
47 --------------- 48 ---------------
49 --------------- 50 ---------------

The Security Access feature has security access for up to 50 users. There are different levels
of security privilege to which each user can be programmed.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 6-55

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Configuration
Security Access, MM-1-7-3

To edit User Account information:

1 In MM-1-7-3, use arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired User Account.

2 Press ENTER..

The display below comes into view.

USER ACCOUNT 2

CURRENT CHANGE

NAME L TA L TA

ACCESS READ-ONLY READ-WRITE

ACCESS CODE ******** 0

ACCESS CODE CONFIRM 0

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SPACE ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZ

Use this display to change user information. Make entries in this display as shown in the
table below. Except for ACCESS CODE, which requires confirmation, all entry fields take
effect immediately after you move the cursor or press ENTER.
 After you make changes, to keep the changes in permanent memory, wait a minimum
of 10 seconds before you cycle power to the controller.
 After you set up security up for the first time, to prevent unauthorized access, log off
at the end of the session. To log off, press SPEC FUNC STATUS DISPLY (for 2070,
press * E).

6-56 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Configuration
Security Access, MM-1-7-3

MM-1-7-3
Parameter Description Range

USER ACCOUNT Enter the number of the User Account you want to 1 thru 50
change.
NAME Use the numeric keypad to edit the user Name, which 1 thru 9, a thru z,
must be from 6 to 15 characters long. For the characters A thru Z
that each key can enter, refer to the list below. (special characters)
Repeatedly press (within one second) the key for the
character you want until it comes into view.
Note • Before you enter another consecutive character
with the same key, wait a minimum of two
seconds before you press it again.
1 enters space $/>#*;\"!@&.?=-1
2 enters A B C a b c 2
3 enters D E F d e f 3
4 enters G H I g h i 4
5 enters J K L j k l 5
6 enters M N O m n o 6
7 enters P Q R S p q r s 7
8 enters T U V t u v 8
9 enters W X Y Z w x y z 9
0 enters 0
CLEAR deletes the entire entry
Cursor Left: clears the character in the far right column

ASC/3 Programming Manual 6-57

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Configuration
Security Access, MM-1-7-3

MM-1-7-3
Parameter Description Range

User Account Toggle to select: READ-ONLY

ACCESS READ-ONLY: The user may view most screens but not READ-WRITE
change any values.
Privilege DIAGNOSTIC
Note • All users have this privilege.
ALL
READ-WRITE: The user may view most screens and
may change values except MM-1-7-1 (CU/CABINET
INTERLOCK CRC) and MM-1-7-3 (Security Access).
DIAGNOSTIC: Same as READ-WRITE with the
addition of performing diagnostics that can be intrusive to
normal operations.
ALL: No restriction, which includes the ability to set
access to a USER ACCOUNT.
IMPORTANT • Be careful as to whom you give this
privilege.
ACCESS CODE 1 Use number keys to enter the ACCESS CODE value. 0-65535

ACCESS CODE 2 Press the down arrow to the ACCESS CODE

CONFIRM CONFIRM field.
3 Enter the ACCESS CODE again.

6-58 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Configuration
Logic Processor Submenu, MM-1-8

Logic Processor Submenu, MM-1-8 6

LOGIC PROCESSOR SUBMENU

1. LOGIC STATEMENT CONTROL

2. LOGIC STATEMENTS

Logic Processor Statement Control, MM-1-8-1 6

LOGIC STATEMENT CONTROL

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5
LP 1-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LP 16-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LP 31-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LP 46-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LP 61-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LP 76-90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LP 91-100. . . . . . . . . .

D = DISABLED E = ENABLED
“.” = ENABLED / DISABLED BY OTHER SOURCE

The Logic Statement Control screen selects whether or not the particular Logic Processor
Statement is:
 ALWAYS enabled (‘E’)
 NEVER enabled (‘D’)
 Subject to activation or deactivation by a lower priority source (“.”)
The priority of Logic Processor sources, from highest to lowest is as follows:
1 Front Panel Selection (MM-1-8-1)

2 External Input

3 Central (Remote) Command

4 Time Base Action Plan (MM-5-4)

5 Hard-coded entries

ASC/3 Programming Manual 6-59

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Configuration
Logic Processor Statements, MM-1-8-2

Logic Processor Statements, MM-1-8-2 6

The Logic Processor (LP) can hold up to 100 logic gates. A typical logic gate configuration
is shown below.

LP# 98 COPY FROM: ACTIVE: M FALSE

IF GREEN ON PHASE 10 IS ON T
AND VEHICLE DET # 1 IS ON F
OR MINGRN TMR ON PHASE 10 < 15.7 T

THEN SET VEHICLE DET # 1 OFF

SET GREEN OVERLAP B OFF
SET YELLOW OVERLAP B ON

ELSE DELAY FOR 15.7 SECONDS

SET VEHICLE DET # 1 ON

The Logic Processor Statements screen allows the inputs and outputs to be under logical
control of conditions developed by the user.

Note • Because of the small 8-line display, users of a 2070 should use a PC-based Logic
Processor Programming to make it easier to program the LP.

General Programming Notes for Logic Statements, MM-1-8-2 6

How to Program a Logic Processor Statement (LPS):

1 Go to MM-1-8-2.

2 In the LP# field, enter the number (1-100) of the LPS to program.

3 To select an LPS:

a Go to the IF, THEN or ELSE element field.

b Press ENTER to go to an expanded Select List.

c Use the arrows to go to the desired element.

d Press ENTER again.

Note • If you press SUB MENU, the Select List will not change.

4 To prevent partial LP execution, the first LP element you select when you press ENTER
forces Transaction Mode.
5 To exit unchanged, press SUB MENU.

6-60 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Configuration
General Programming Notes for Logic Statements, MM-1-8-2

Tips for Fast Navigation on LP Select Lists

 To examine different LPS that are programmed, move the cursor to the LP # field and
press NEXT DATA. The screen will jump to the next LP # that is programmed. It wraps
around at the last programmed LPS.
 To go to the next Select List screen, press NEXT SCREEN.
 To go to the first LPS that starts with given letter, press the key with the related letter
(like a telephone key pad).
Example: Press 8 to go to the first “T” element and press 8 again to go to the first
“U” element.

How to Clear the Entire LPS (that is, Erase all “IFs,” “THENs,” and “ELSEs”):
1 Move the cursor to the LPS Number in the top line.

2 Press CLEAR.

How to Clear a Single Testable or Executable Element:

1 Move the cursor to element you want to clear.

2 Press CLEAR.

To discard all changes to a Logic Processor Statement (LPS):

 Press SPEC FUNC/CLEAR.

What to do when the LPS are Completed:

1 Press SPEC FUNC/ENTER to save the changes.

2 Go to MM-1-8-1 or desired Action Plan.

3 Make sure the LPS is set to ‘E’ (enabled).

Logic Process Status

You can see the result of the overall Logic Processor evaluation or of an individual element
on the same menu:
When LPS is enabled, overall result is shown on top right as TRUE or FALSE.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 6-61

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Configuration
General Programming Notes for Logic Statements, MM-1-8-2

Individual result is shown in far right column, aligned with the respective Logic Processor
Element
 T = True
 F = False

MM-1-8-2
Parameter Description Range

LP # The number of the Logic Processor Statement 1-100

(LPS) that is being programmed or viewed. 0 - Selects next open
Note • 0 (zero): Selects the next open LPS gate.
starting with Logic Gate 1.
IMPORTANT • The LPS are executed in
sequence once every 1/10th
second from 1-100. Any
condition that is to be used by a
LPS must be determined before
that LPS is evaluated.
COPY FROM If another LPS is similar, use this field to copy that 1-100
LP Statement into the current LPS. Because most
of the elements are the same, you only need to edit
what is different. This is useful if similar elements
are used for each traffic direction.
ACTIVE You can activate MM-1-8-2 LPS by different A, M, R, N
sources. The source of the activation is shown on
the ACTIVE field:
 A = Enabled by Action PLAN
 M = Enabled by MM-1-8-1 (Manual)
 R = Enabled by Remote command
 N = Not Enabled
IF A set of testable elements that are connected by
operators to create a TRUE or FALSE outcome.
This outcome will execute the THEN elements if
TRUE and the ELSE elements if FALSE.
(operator column) Determines how the “IF” testable elements are AND, OR, NAND,
combined to create a “TRUE or “FALSE.” NOR, XOR
(testable element Refer to Appendix L, Logic Processor Operation for a Various*
column) list of all testable elements available to the IF
testable elements.

6-62 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Configuration
General Programming Notes for Logic Statements, MM-1-8-2

MM-1-8-2
Parameter Description Range

(testable element The number of the testable element *. Various*

number column) Example: “2” when “VEH GREEN ON PH”
(original “GREEN ON PHASE”) is the testable
element represents Phase 2 Green.
(testable element Selects how the testable element is to be IS, <, >. <>*
operator column) compared* to the testable element value.
(testable element value The value that the testable element will be ON, OFF 0-65535*
column) evaluated* to by the operator to determine the
TRUE or FALSE of the testable element
THEN When all of the conditions of the IF elements are
met, the THEN elements are executed from top
to bottom.
(executable element Refer to Appendix L, Logic Processor Operation for a Various*
column) list of all executable elements available to the
THEN executable element.
(executable element The number of the executable element *. Various*
number column) Example: “1” when “CTR HOLD PHASE”
(original “HOLD PHASE”) is the executable
element represents setting or resetting Phase one
Hold.
(executable element The condition that the executable element will set ON, OFF 0-65535*
value column) or the time in 1/10-second increments that the
following executable elements will be delayed.
ELSE When all of the conditions of the IF testable
element are not met, the ELSE executable
elements are executed from top to bottom.
(executable element Refer to Appendix L, Logic Processor Operation for a Various*
column) list of all executable elements available to the
ELSE elements.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 6-63

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Configuration
Extended Logic Processor Group

MM-1-8-2
Parameter Description Range

(executable element The number of the executable element *. Various*

number column) Example: “1” when “CTR HOLD PHASE”
(original “HOLD PHASE”) is the executable
element represents setting or resetting Phase one
Hold.
(executable element The condition that the executable element will set ON, OFF 0-65535*
value column) or the time in 1/10-second increments that the
following executable elements will be delayed.

Extended Logic Processor Group 6

You can turn ON and OFF a group of ASC/3 Logic Processor Statements (LPS). These
statements are in the range of 101-200 and can be programmed with the ASC/3 Controller
Configurator run on a PC.
You have to program allowable LP # range (group of LP) in the ASC3.ext file.
Give it a name (LP feature 1).
Then you can turn LP feature group 1 ON and OFF with MM-2-6-2.

Note • The last LP group will precede the earlier group if the LP # is overlapped Format.

Comment Statement 6

A line that starts with the '' character will not be processed. This is used to put comments
in the file.

Message 6

A line that starts with 'CONFIG=', the text after the '=' will be displayed in the sign-on
screen and MM-2-6-2. Max number of characters is 12.
This is optional. For example:
CONFIG= Any City

6-64 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Configuration
Control Statements

Control Statements 6

These are used to specify which LP Statements you can turn ON or OFF.
Max number of control statements is 25. The format is:
<on/off>,<start LP>,<end LP>,<Text>

Parameter Description

<on/off> 0 = Turn OFF feature at power ON.

1 = Turn ON feature at power ON.
<start LP> Starting LP Statement. Range is from 101 - 200
<end LP> Ending LP Statement. Range is from 101 - 200
<Text> Text is shown in MM-2-6-2 for the corresponding feature.
Max length is 36 characters.

For example:

asc3.ext Display on MM-2-6-2

CONFIG=AnyCity EXTENDED OPTIONS

1,101,106, IDOT 5 SECTION HEAD CONTROL
0,107,111,LP FEATURE IDOT 5 SECTION HEAD CONTROL ON
0,112,113,CANADIAN LEFT TURN LP FEATURE OFF
CANADIAN LEFT TURN OFF

1st LPS group “IDOT 5 SECTION HEAD CONTROL” specifies a group of LPS from
101 and 106 that can be turned ON or OFF together. Default is ON (1 on first left of
asc3.ext).
2nd LPS group “LP FEATURE” specifies a group of LPS from 107 and 111 that can be
turned ON or OFF together. Default is OFF (0 on first left of asc3.ext).
3rd LPS group “CANADIAN LEFT TURN” specifies a group of LPS from 112 and 113
that can be turned ON or OFF together. Default is OFF (0 on first left of asc3.ext).
Refer to Appendix L, Logic Processor Operation for more Logic Processor definitions.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 6-65

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Configuration
Control Statements

6-66 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
For your notes:

6-67 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Configuration
Control Statements

6-68 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 7
Controller
Controller Submenu, MM-2 7

Programming Summary 7

CONTROLLER SUBMENU

1. TIMING PLANS 5. START/FLASH

2. VEHICLE OVERLAPS 6. OPTION DATA

3. VEH/PED OVERLAPS 7. PRE-TIMED

4. GUAR MIN TIME 8. PHASE RECALL

MM-2 Menu Option Programming Summary

1. TIMING PLANS Enter phase timing values for each of 16 phases and four
timing plans.
2. VEHICLE OVERLAPS Select the Overlap Type: OTHER/ECONOLITE,
NORMAL, -GRN/YEL, or PPL/FYA
Enable trailing, leading or overlap flashing, etc. as applicable
Enter timing values for trailing and advanced green for the
applicable overlap types.
3. VEH/PED OVERLAPS Assign phase(s) to each of 16 (Included, Protected, Modifier,
Pedestrian Protect, and not Overlap) vehicle or pedestrian
overlaps.
4. GUAR MIN TIME Enter guaranteed minimum times (Minimum Green, Walk,
Pedestrian Clearance, Yellow and Red Clearance) for each of
16 phases.
Enter guaranteed minimum Green times for each of 16
overlaps.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 7-1

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Controller
Timing Plans, MM-2-1

MM-2 Menu Option Programming Summary

5. START/FLASH DATA Select active phase(s), overlap(s) and interval at power start.
Select entry automatic flash phase(s).
Select exit automatic flash phase(s) overlap(s) and colors.
Set power start timing for All Red and Flash.
Enable minimum vehicle recall before entering automatic
flash.
Enable flash through the load switches.
Set minimum automatic flash time.
Enable cycle through phases before going into automatic
flash.
6. OPTION DATA Access the Option submenu with two data groups that allow
programming of controller phase and extended options.
7. ACT PRE-TIMED Assign phase(s) that are to time as pre-timed.
Enable the free input to disable pre-timed operation.
8. PHASE RECALL Provides ability to select options that include: Lock Detector,
Vehicle Recall, Pedestrian Recall, MX (Max) Recall, SF (Soft)
Recall, No Rest, and AI (Added Initial) Calculation for
phases 1 thru 16.

Timing Plans, MM-2-1 7

General Information
The Phase Timing Plans establish which phase intervals will time and their time. The
interval time entries that require additional enabling are described in the paragraphs
following the screen illustrations. Those that do not require additional enabling are
described in the table that follows those paragraphs.

To do data entry/storage:
1 Enter data using the keypad number, cursor, and ENTER keys. Move cursor up/down
to the desired parameter then right/left to the desired phase number.
2 To store the data, enter the timing value, then press ENTER or any other keypad key.

7-2 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Controller
Timing Plans, MM-2-1

Data in MM-2-1 and MM-2-8 are in the same plan and would execute together, so these
displays are hyperlinked.

When in a hyperlink field:

To follow the hyperlink:

For ASC/3, press SPEC FUNC, then

NEXT DATA.

For 2070, press B.

To go back:

For ASC/3, press SUB MENU.

For 2070, press ESC.

MM-2-1
Parameter Description Range

TIMING Selects the timing plan to edit or view. 1-4

PLAN

MIN GRN Minimum Green (initial green) 0-255 sec.

The shortest possible vehicle green time, before any added initial or
vehicle extensions.
Note • Actual minimum green indication is the longest of the minimum
green plus any added initial, vehicle extension, bike minimum
green, ped walk plus ped clearance, or guaranteed minimum
green*.
BK MGRN Bike Minimum Green 0-255 sec.
The minimum green due to a bike detector call. Bike minimum green has
no effect if the phase has no bike detector input.
CS MGRN Conditional Service Minimum Green 0-255 sec.
The minimum green time for a phase being conditionally serviced.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 7-3

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Controller
Timing Plans, MM-2-1

MM-2-1
Parameter Description Range

DLY GRN Delayed Green 0-255 sec.

The time that the vehicle green indication is delayed from the start of the
walk interval. The delay is ignored if there is no pedestrian service call
when the phase is started. If the delay time is greater than the Walk time,
the walk is extended to the end of delay green.
WALK Pedestrian Walk 0-255 sec.
Time during which WALK or walking person symbol is displayed when 0 disables
servicing a ped call.
WALK or PED CLR timing cannot be programmed to zero if the phase
is the ped carryover start phase or part of a ped overlap.
Note • Actual walk time is the longer of the walk time in effect or
guaranteed* walk.
WALK 2 Pedestrian Walk 2 0-255 sec.
WALK 2 defines the duration of the interval in which WALK or the
walking person symbol is displayed following a ped call from the WALK 2
input. If it is not a larger value, it is replaced by guaranteed WALK Time
(MM-2-4). If WALK 2 is zero and enabled, the Walk time is substituted.
Note • Actual walk time is the longer of the walk time in effect or
guaranteed* walk.
WLK MAX Walk Maximum 0-255 sec.
When the walk in effect has been timed: if the phase’s Ped Extend
Detector is TRUE, the walk is extended until 1) its total length reaches
Walk Maximum, or 2) the elapsed length of the walk extension plus the
ped clear equals the max in effect, or 3) the Ped Extend Detector input
goes false. Walk maximum time has no effect when there is not a
pedestrian extend detector for the phase.
PED CLR Pedestrian Clearance 0-255 sec.
Time during which DON'T WALK or hand symbol is flashing following
pedestrian WALK time.
WALK or PED CLR timing cannot be programmed to zero if the phase
is the ped carryover start phase or part of a ped carryover.
Note • Actual pedestrian clearance time is the longer of the pedestrian
clearance in effect or guaranteed* pedestrian clearance.

7-4 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Controller
Timing Plans, MM-2-1

MM-2-1
Parameter Description Range

PD CLR 2 Pedestrian Clearance 2 0-255 sec.

Pedestrian clearance time that is to be in effect when WALK 2 is enabled
by a time base Action Plan (MM-5-4). This is the time during which
DON'T WALK or the hand symbol is flashing following ped WALK time.
Note • Actual pedestrian clearance time is the longer of the pedestrian
clearance in effect or guaranteed* pedestrian clearance.
PC MAX Pedestrian Clearance Maximum Time 0-255 sec.
by timing
This is an ECPI feature.
plan (1-4)
(Applies to TS1 and TS2 operation)
The Pedestrian Clearance indication can be extended to the smaller of the
two values by the phase ped extend input.
 PC Max time
 Phase Max time remaining
PED CO Pedestrian Carryover 0-16
If phase’s pedestrian service can be carried over into another phase in the
same ring when that phase times next, enter the phase that is allowed to
time next while the pedestrian service (pedestrian carryover) is completed.
If the phase identified as the pedestrian carryover phase doesn’t have a
vehicle call or won’t to be serviced next, the pedestrian service will be
completed before the initiating phase is allowed to terminate. This option
allows two vehicle movements while pedestrians are crossing wide streets.
Note • A pedestrian carryover service is not permitted to be part of a
Pedestrian Overlap.
VEH EXT Phase Vehicle Extension (Preset gap, Passage Time) 0-25.5 sec.
When minimum green finishes timing, the green interval is allowed to
extend for a length of time equal to maximum time in effect. Actual length
of extension period depends on this phase vehicle extension time,
frequency of vehicle actuations and minimum gap setting.
Note • Detector-by-Detector extension time can be set in the vehicle
detector setup screen (MM-6-2).
VEH EXT2 Phase Vehicle Extension 2 0-25.5 sec.
Vehicle Extension period 2 operates like VEH EXT. VEH EXT2 replaces
VEH EXT when its usage is enabled by the selected time base Action Plan
(MM-5-4).

ASC/3 Programming Manual 7-5

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Controller
Timing Plans, MM-2-1

MM-2-1
Parameter Description Range

MAX 1, 2, 3 Maximum Green (1, 2, 3) 0-255 sec.

Maximum green time allowed in the presence of an opposing call.
Note • The higher numbered maximum green selected is in effect.
DYM MAX Dynamic Maximum 0-255 sec.
Determines the upper or lower limit of the running max time. The max in 0 disables
effect (*MAX 1, 2, or 3) determines the other limit.
When a phase maxes out twice in a row, and on each successive max out
thereafter, the running max is incremented one dynamic max step until it
reaches the dynamic maximum upper limit.
When a phase gaps out twice in a row, and on each successive gap out
thereafter, the running max is decremented one dynamic max step until it
reaches the dynamic maximum lower limit.
If a phase gaps out in one cycle and maxes out in the next cycle, or vice
versa, the running max is not changed.
Refer to Phase Dynamic Max Limit described in NTCIP 1202 paragraph
2.2.2.17 for a more complete explanation.
Note • When DYM MAX is not used (DYM MAX = 0), the maximum green
time is equal to the selected max timer (MAX 1, 2 or 3).
DYM STP Dynamic Step 0-25.5 sec.
The amount of time that the running max time is increased or decreased
by max or gap out.
Refer to Phase Dynamic Max Step described in NTCIP 1202 paragraph
2.2.2.18 for a more complete explanation.
YELLOW Yellow Change 0-25.5 sec.
The time that the phase yellow indication is displayed following a green
interval.
Note • Actual yellow change in effect is the longest of yellow change or
guaranteed* yellow.
RED CLR Red Clearance 0-25.5 sec.
The time that the phase red indication is displayed following a yellow
change interval when terminating the phase.
Note • Actual red clearance time in effect is the longest of the red
clearance or guaranteed* red clearance.

7-6 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Controller
Timing Plans, MM-2-1

MM-2-1
Parameter Description Range

RED MAX Red Maximum 0-25.5 sec.

When the red clearance in effect has been timed, if the phase’s Red Extend
Detector is TRUE, red clearance is extended until its total length reaches
Red Maximum or the Red Extend Detector input goes FALSE. Red
Maximum has no effect when there isn’t a red extend detector for the
phase.
RED RVT Red Revert 0.0-25.0 sec.
Minimum red time before a phase can be re-serviced. Red revert begins
timing at the start of red clearance. The actual red revert time for any phase
is the larger of this and the Unit Red Revert time (MM-2-6-1).
IMPORTANT • NEMA mandates minimum limit time setting at 2
seconds. NTCIP allows for this value to be set lower.
ACT B4 Actuations Before 0-255
Number of actuations that must be received during the phase’s yellow and actuations
red intervals before seconds per actuation time is added to initial green.
SEC/ACT Seconds per actuation (Added Initial) 0-25.5 sec.
Time by which the phase’s added initial time period is increased from zero
for each vehicle actuation received during the phase’s yellow and red
intervals that exceed the Actuations Before limit.
MAX INT Maximum Added Initial 0-255 sec.
Maximum time that added initial green can attain. The number of vehicle
actuations received during a phase’s yellow and red intervals multiplied by
the seconds per actuation time cannot exceed this time.
TIME B4 Time Before (Reduction) 1-255 sec.
Length of time before start of gap reduction. Begins timing when phase is 0 disables
green and there is a conflicting serviceable call.
Note • Start of gap reduction (time to reduce or step to reduce) is
initiated by TIME B4 or CARS WT, whichever reaches its
programmed value first.
CARS WT Cars Waiting before reduction 1-255 cars
Number of vehicle detections that have been recorded on all conflicting 0 disables
phases during their yellow and red intervals.
Note • Start of gap reduction (time to reduce or step to reduce) is
initiated by TIME B4 or CARS WT, whichever reaches its
programmed value first.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 7-7

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Controller
Vehicle Overlap, MM-2-2

MM-2-1
Parameter Description Range

STPTDUC Step To Reduce 0.1-25.5 sec.

Step reduction: When gap reduction starts and STPTDUC isn’t zero, / step
TTREDUC multiplied by 10 is divided by STPTDUC to calculate the 0 = linear
number of 1/10 second cycles timed between each reduction step. By the
time the TTREDUC interval has completed its timing, vehicle extension
in effect will have been reduced the MIN GAP.
Linear reduction: When gap reduction starts and STPTDUC is zero, MIN
GAP is subtracted from the vehicle extension in effect and that value is
divided by the product of TTREDUC multiplied by 10. The result is
subtracted from vehicle extension in effect every 1/10 second until vehicle
extension in effect is reduced to the MIN GAP.
TTREDUC Time To Reduce 0-255 sec.
Length of time between the start and end of gap reduction. During the
Time to Reduce interval, the vehicle extension in effect is reduced from its
initial time down to the specified MIN GAP time.
MIN GAP Minimum Gap 0-25.5 sec.
Minimum vehicle extension to be timed for each vehicle actuation. If the
minimum vehicle extension times out before a vehicle actuation is received
and the timer is restarted, gap out occurs.

* Guaranteed minimum values are programmed in MM-2-4.

Vehicle Overlap, MM-2-2 7

Overlap Data
You can program four types of overlaps:
 Normal
 Minus Green Yellow (-GRN/YEL)
 PPLT FYA
 Other/Econolite
Normal and Minus Green Yellow operate per the requirement specified in NTCIP 1202
paragraph 2.10.2.2. PPLT FYA uses overlap so you can program Protected Permissive left
hand turns. Type Other/Econolite identifies overlaps that supplement the Normal overlap
with the Econolite-specific options.

7-8 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Controller
Vehicle Overlap, MM-2-2

To select an overlap type in MM-2-2:

1 Move the cursor to the TYPE field.

2 Toggle again and again as necessary.

3 After the desired type of overlap comes into view, move the cursor to another field to
automatically refresh the screen to only show the parameters related to the overlap you
selected.
The table that follows describes the four types of overlaps and shows the screens for each
type.

TYPE: Types of Vehicle Overlaps in MM-2-2

NORMAL

The state of the Included Phases of the overlap determines the output, as given below:

Included Phase Overlap Output

Green Green
Yellow or Red Clearance
-and-
one of these phases is Next
(For example, Overlap A = 1+2. 1 Terminates and 2 is Next)
Yellow and no included phase is Next Yellow
Green and Yellow OFF Red

ASC/3 Programming Manual 7-9

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Controller
Vehicle Overlap, MM-2-2

TYPE: Types of Vehicle Overlaps in MM-2-2 (cont.)

-GRN/YEL
Minus Green Yellow

The state of the Included Phases and the Modifier Phase Assignments of the overlap determine the
output.
This is used to avoid conflicting movements between modifier phase and overlap.
For example, Overlap A=1. Modifier phase is 6. Phase 6 is in conflict with Overlap A. When 6 is ON or
Next, Overlap A is NOT ON.

Included Phase Modifier Phase Overlap Output

Green NOT Green Green

Yellow or Red Clearance and one is Next

Yellow and NOT Next NOT Yellow Yellow

Green and Yellow OFF --------------- Red

PPLT FYA
Protected Permissive Left Turn Flashing Yellow Arrow

This is a special Econolite overlap type for Protected/Permissive Left Turns using the Flashing Yellow
Arrow. It changes programmed controller outputs to meet NEMA specification and requires a
compliant MMU or CMU.

7-10 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Controller
Vehicle Overlap, MM-2-2

TYPE: Types of Vehicle Overlaps in MM-2-2 (cont.)

OTHER/ECONOLITE

The Other/Econolite type is altered by the selected usage of these parameters:

Protect; Pedestrian Protect; Not Overlap; Flash Overlap Green; Lag (Trailing) Overlap; Lead Overlap;
Lag (Trailing) Green, Yellow & Red; Advance Green.

MM-2-2
Parameter Description Range

TMG VEH OVLP Timing Vehicle Overlap A thru P

Enter the desired overlap, A thru P, to edit or view that overlap.

Parameter for NORMAL, - GRN/YEL and OTHER/ECONOLITE

INCLUDED Overlap Included Phases ‘X’ selects

The Included Phases specify the phases whose timing state is used to
derive the state of the overlap.
In general terms, when any included phase is timing its green interval
or the controller is advancing from one included phase to another
included phase, the overlap will be green. If no included phase is green,
then the overlap will be yellow when any included phase is yellow. If
no included phase is green or yellow, the overlap will be red. The
normal derivation of the overlap’s state can be altered by using any of
the programming options described below.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 7-11

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Controller
Vehicle Overlap, MM-2-2

MM-2-2
Parameter Description Range

Parameters only for NORMAL and OTHER/ECONOLITE

LAG GRN, YEL, Lag (Trailing) Green, Yellow and Red times 0-25.5 sec.
RED
Normally, if an included phase is terminating and no other included
phase is timing or a phase next selection, the terminating included
phase’s yellow and red are also output to the overlap. Trailing Green,
Yellow, and Red provide a means of extending the overlap’s green and
then timing a specified yellow and red. When the last timing overlap
included phase begins its yellow change, the overlap’s green interval is
extended by the specified Trailing Green time. After Trailing Green has
timed, Trailing Yellow and Trailing Red times are used to time the
overlap’s yellow change and red clearance intervals.
Note • Lagging times take effect only if the if the GREEN and
YELLOW entries are both non-zero.

Parameter only for - GRN/YEL

(Minus Green Yellow)

MODIFIER Modifier Phases ‘X’ selects

Used when the overlap type is MINUS GREEN YELLOW to provide
an overlap that will terminate to red during a modifier phase green and
yellow.
Note • When Modifier phases are assigned, only it and the Included
Phases option are used to derive the state of the overlap. All
other overlap programming options are ignored.

Parameters only for PPLT FYA

(Protected Permissive Left Turn Flashing Yellow Arrow)

PROTECTED ASSIGN the left turn phase number associated with the PPLT/FYA. 0-16
PHASE This phase represents the protected turning movement. An assignment
(LEFT TURN)
of zero disables the feature.
PERMISSIVE ASSIGN the opposing through movement in which the left turn phase 0-16
PHASE is permitted for PPLT/FYA. When the assigned phase is timing green
(OPPOSING
or timing with the protected left turn as a next phase decision, then the
THRU)
FLASHING YELLOW ARROW output will be active.

7-12 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Controller
Vehicle Overlap, MM-2-2

MM-2-2
Parameter Description Range

Parameters only for PPLT FYA

(Protected Permissive Left Turn Flashing Yellow Arrow), continued

FLASHING IMPORTANT • MMU/CMU must be validated for compatibility before GRN OLP,
ARROW OUTPUT attempting to program this feature. ASSIGN the PED YEL,
CHANNEL output mode for the load switch assignment on either
the protected or permissive phase. ISOLATE
GRN OLP: Connect the wire of the Flashing Yellow Arrow (FYA)
signal to the GREEN output on the assigned overlap load switch
channel (MM-1-3) which is indicated by the CH—read-only field. Note
that the protected and permissive left turn clearance intervals will be
the same on the overlap and phase load switch channels.
YEL PED: Connect the wire of the Flashing Yellow Arrow (FYA)
signal to the YELLOW output on the assigned permissive through
load switch channel (MM-1-3) which is indicated by the CH—read-
only field.
ISOLATE (Isolate Protected Green): Connect the wire of the
Flashing Yellow Arrow (FYA) signal to the GREEN output on the
assigned overlap load switch channel. The protected and permissive
left turn clearance outputs will also be located on the overlap load
switch channel. ISOLATE refers to the isolated green indication
remaining on the original protected left turn channel. This is based on
the EDI “BASIC FYA MODE.”
DELAY START OF ASSIGN the period of time in tenths-of-a-second to delay flashing the 0 -25.5
FYA yellow arrow output once the permissive through movement begins seconds
timing green. This is a safety feature that will limit the exposure of left
turning vehicles because it is assumed that opposing queued vehicles
will not provide adequate headway. This delay timer will not apply
during preemption. The channel output will be red.
Note • To make sure that the flashing interval duration is at least
two seconds, a phase HOLD is applied to make sure the
parent opposing through movement does not terminate too
soon. If the opposing through phase has reached yellow
clearance before the delay start timer expires, then the FYA
channel output remains in red.
DELAY START OF ASSIGN the period of time in tenths-of-a-second to continue flashing 0-25.5
CLEARANCE the yellow arrow output once the permissive through movement seconds
reaches yellow clearance. This is a safety feature that will limit the
exposure of providing two conflicting solid yellow clearance arrows in
PPLT/FYA operation.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 7-13

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Controller
Vehicle Overlap, MM-2-2

MM-2-2
Parameter Description Range

Parameters only for PPLT FYA

(Protected Permissive Left Turn Flashing Yellow Arrow), continued

ACTION PLAN SF 1-8: ASSIGN the bit number that can be used in an Action Plan (MM- 0-8
BIT DISABLE 5-2) to disable the permissive left turn by time-of-day.
0 (zero): PPLT/FYA will not be disabled by a Special Function Bit.
Note • Disabling PPLT/FYA while the permissive phase is either
timing or assigned as a next phase will not take effect until
the permissive phase has completed the timing interval.

Parameters only for OTHER/ECONOLITE

PROTECT Protected Overlap ‘X’ selects

A movement having a protected green arrow (no conflicting phases
timing).
Note • When a phase has protected overlap phase assignments,
Modifier, Lead, and Trailing assignments are ignored
(inhibited).
PED PRTC Pedestrian Protect ‘X’ selects
The Pedestrian Protect option provides for the specification of phase
pedestrian movements that cannot be serviced while the overlap is
active. If a pedestrian call is present on a pedestrian protected phase
when that phase becomes the phase next selection, the overlap is
terminated while the ring transitions from the timing phase to the
phase with the protected pedestrian service. If a pedestrian call is not
present when the pedestrian protected phase becomes the phase next
selection, the overlap remains active if an included phase is timing or a
phase next selection. Should a pedestrian call be input while the ring is
in yellow change or red clear on the way to the pedestrian protected
phase, the overlap is not terminated until the pedestrian protected
phase starts and then only if there is enough time to terminate the
overlap and time the pedestrian movement before the phase will max
out.

7-14 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Controller
Vehicle Overlap, MM-2-2

MM-2-2
Parameter Description Range

Parameters only for OTHER/ECONOLITE, continued

NOT OVLP Not Overlap ‘X’ selects

The Not Overlap option is provided to inhibit the activation of an
overlap when selected phases are timing. If an overlap is active when a
call is placed on a not overlap phase, the phase is not allowed to time
until the overlap is terminated. If the order of rotation would normally
allow the not overlap phase to time, overlap termination will be
initiated even if an overlap included phase is timing or a phase next
selection.
To select a not overlap inhibit phase, position the cursor on the desired
NOT OLP phase and toggle the “0” key.
FLSH GRN Flash Overlap Green “.”, 1, 2,
Flash Overlap Green is specified for each included phase of an overlap and 5
and defines the rate at which the overlap green interval is to flash when
the included phase is timing. To select a flash rate, position the cursor
on the appropriate FLSH GRN phase entry and toggle the “0” key to
cycle to the desired rate. The allowable flash settings are as follows:
“.” = no flash or phase is not an included phase for the overlap
1 = flash at 1 pps.
2 = flash at 2.5 pps.
5 = flash at 5 pps.
The flash is extended across the transition from one included phase to
another included phase if their flash rates are the same.
Overlap green will be solid when transitioning between included
phases that have different flash rates.
LAG X PH Lag (Trailing) Overlap Phases ‘X’ selects
This option identifies which phases are to time programmed trailing
green, yellow, and red. If Trailing phases are defined, only those phases
will time trailing green, yellow, and red when they advance to yellow
change and no other included phase is timing or a phase next selection.
If no Trailing phases are defined, then trailing green, yellow, and red are
disabled.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 7-15

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Controller
Vehicle Overlap, MM-2-2

MM-2-2
Parameter Description Range

Parameters only for OTHER/ECONOLITE, continued

LAG 2 PH Lead Overlap Phases ‘X’ selects

When the overlap is active, the last timing overlap included phase is
advancing to yellow, no included phase is a phase next selection, and a
Lead phase (that is not an included phase) is next, trailing green, yellow,
and red will be timed. This operation may be thought of as timing a
lagging overlap when proceeding to a particular phase.
When the overlap is not active and a Lead phase that is an included
phase is a phase next selection, overlap advance green will be displayed.
Overlap advance green output starts, defined by the ADV GRN time,
when the phase of the ring that is transitioning to the included Lead
phase begins its yellow service.
Note • The ADV GRN time takes effect only if the lagging YELLOW
time is non-zero.
ADV GRN Advance Green 0-25.5 sec.
Advance Green specifies the minimum amount of overlap advance
green to be displayed before a phase next selected included lead phase
is started. If the amount of advance green is less than the yellow change
time and red clear timed by a ring before its phase next included lead
phase can be started, the overlap advance green is extended. If the
amount of advance green is greater than the yellow change and red
clear timed by the ring before the overlap lead phase next selection
would normally start, the terminating ring phase's red clearance is
extended until the advance green time is satisfied.
Overlap advance green output starts when the phase of the ring that is
transitioning to the included Lead phase begins its yellow service.

7-16 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Controller
Vehicle or Pedestrian Overlaps, MM-2-3

Vehicle or Pedestrian Overlaps, MM-2-3 7

VEH/PED OVERLAPS
INCLUDED 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
VEH OL A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VEH OL B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VEH OL C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VEH OL D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VEH OL E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VEH OL F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VEH OL G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VEH OL H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VEH OL I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VEH OL J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VEH OL K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VEH OL L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VEH OL M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VEH OL N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VEH OL O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VEH OL P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PD OL 01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PD OL 02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PD OL 03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PD OL 04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PD OL 05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PD OL 06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PD OL 07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PD OL 08 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PD OL 09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PD OL 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PD OL 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PD OL 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PD OL 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PD OL 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PD OL 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PD OL 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

To Program Overlaps:
 TOGGLE to include (X) or exclude (“.”) each vehicle or pedestrian movement from
the overlap.
A vehicle or pedestrian overlap (1-16) overrides the service output of the phase having the
same number (1-16). This provides for a total of 16 possible vehicle or pedestrian overlaps.
A vehicle or pedestrian overlap is programmed by specifying phases with vehicle or
pedestrian service whose movements are to be used to derive the overlap’s outputs.

More Information on Pedestrian Overlap

Whenever a pedestrian overlap included phase is timing a walk or the controller is
transitioning from a walk end condition on a timing phase to a walk service on another
overlap included phase, the overlap will display walk. When no ped included phase is

ASC/3 Programming Manual 7-17

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Controller
Vehicle or Pedestrian Overlaps, MM-2-3

timing a walk and is not a phase next selection with a ped call, the overlap will display
pedestrian clearance as long as any included ped phase is timing a ped clearance. When all
included ped phases are in don’t walk, the ped overlap will display don’t walk.
A preemptor can terminate a pedestrian overlap at any time. The preemption can override
a preempted phase’s ped walk and clearance time and those override times will be used to
terminate the overlap. Refer to Preemption Entrance Minimum Times on page 9-19 for the
Preemptor Walk and Pedestrian Clearance program options (MM-4-1). The pedestrian
overlap will terminate even if the phase is halted in red transfer.

MM-2-3
Parameter Description Range

OVERLAP Use the cursor arrows (right, left, up, down) to position the cursor to “X” selects,
NUMBER – the appropriate OVERLAP NUMBER and INCLUDED PHASES “.” excludes.
1 thru 16 coordinates, then use Toggle, 0/YES, include (X) or exclude (“.”) each
pedestrian movement from the overlap.
INCLUDED FOR Overlap Included Phases: ‘X’ selects
VEHICLE AND
PED OVERLAPS The Included Phases specify the phases whose timing state will be
used to derive the state of the overlap.
In general terms, when any included phase is timing its green interval
or the controller is advancing from one included phase to another
included phase, the overlap will be green. If no included phase is
green, then the overlap will be yellow when any included phase is
yellow. If no included phase is green or yellow, the overlap will be red.
The normal derivation of the overlap’s state can be altered by using
any of the programming options in MM-2-2.

7-18 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Controller
Guaranteed Minimum Times, MM-2-4

Guaranteed Minimum Times, MM-2-4 7

Guaranteed minimum time for phase or overlap intervals. These entries establish the lower
limit that the phase or overlap intervals must time.

Note • The circumstances that can cause guaranteed minimum times to be ignored
include: Manual advance input, Preemptor timing, and External Start input.

GUARANTEED MINIMUM TIME DATA

PHASE A01 B02 C03 D04 E05 F06 G07 H08
MIN GRN 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
WALK 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
PED CLR 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
YELLOW 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0
RED CLR 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
OVL GRN 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
PHASE I09 J10 K11 L12 M13 N14 O15 P16
MIN GRN 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
WALK 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
PED CLR 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
YELLOW 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0
RED CLR 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
OVL GRN 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

MM-2-4
Parameter Description Range

MIN GRN Guaranteed Minimum Green: The shortest possible vehicle green time, 0-255 sec.
before any added initial or vehicle extensions.
Note • Actual minimum green time will be the longest of the following:
minimum green plus any added initial, vehicle extension, bike
minimum green, ped walk plus ped clearance and guaranteed
minimum green.
WALK Guaranteed Pedestrian Walk: The shortest possible pedestrian walk time. 0-255 sec.
Note • Actual minimum walk time will be the longer of the Walk time in
effect or guaranteed* walk.
PED CLR Guaranteed Pedestrian Clearance: The shortest possible pedestrian 0-255 sec.
clearance time.
Note • Actual minimum pedestrian clearance time will be the longer of the
Pedestrian Clearance in effect or guaranteed* pedestrian
clearance.
YELLOW Guaranteed Yellow Change: The shortest possible phase yellow indication 0-25.5 sec.
following a green interval.
Note • Actual minimum yellow change time will be the longer of the Yellow
time or guaranteed* yellow.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 7-19

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Controller
Start/Flash Data, MM-2-5

MM-2-4
Parameter Description Range

RED CLR Guaranteed Red Clearance: The shortest possible red indication following 0-25.5 sec.
a yellow change interval when terminating the phase.
Note • Actual minimum red clearance time will be the longer of the Red
Clearance time in effect or guaranteed* red clearance.
OVL GRN Guaranteed Overlap Green: Minimum overlap green that must be timed 0-255 sec.
before the overlap is allowed to terminate.
Note • If an overlap’s guaranteed green has not been satisfied by the time
the overlap initiating included phase is ready to terminate its green
interval, the phase’s green interval is extended until the overlap
guaranteed green has been timed.

* Circumstances that can alter this minimum time include: Manual Advance input,
Preemptor timing, and External Start input.

Start/Flash Data, MM-2-5 7

START/FLASH DATA
------START UP--------------------------
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
PHASE R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P
OVERLAP X X X X . . . . . . . . . . . .
FLASH>MON. NO FL TIME..255 ALL RED... 6
PWR START SEQ.. 1 MUTCD->YES Y->G: NO
------AUTOMATIC FLASH-------------------
PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
ENTRY . X . . . X . . . . . . . . . .
EXIT . X . . . X . . . . . . . . . .
OVERLAP A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P
EXIT X X X X . . . . . . . . . . . .
FLASH>MON. NO EXIT FL. W MIN FLASH. 8
MINIMUM RECALL. NO CYCLE THRU PHASE. NO

The Start/Flash Data screen (MM-2-5) is divided into Start Up and Automatic Flash
sections.
In the Start Up section, the phase and overlaps selections, type of flash, power start red
time, and power on flash time are specified.
The Automatic Flash includes Auto Flash, Remote Flash, system flash, programmed flash,
and TBC flash.
The Automatic Flash section provides for the selection of entry phases and exit phases and
overlaps, a minimum flash time, type of flash, and the enabling of options used during
automatic flash.

7-20 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Controller
Start/Flash Data, MM-2-5

Start Up Programming
The Power Start-Up Phases begin timing after the flash and power start red times have
been satisfied or after an external start input.

To program Start Up:

1 Use Toggle, 0/YES, to select the start phases and their start interval. Only one phase
selection is allowed for each ring and it must not conflict with any other ring phase
selections.
2 Enter the Power Start all Red time. This interval times after flash time. Zero entry
disables the all red timing function.
3 Enter the Power Start Flash Time. This interval times before all red time. Zero entry
disables the controller flash timing function.
4 Select the type of Flash via FLASH>MON to select flashing either through the
Controller Voltage Monitor (CVM) or Load Switches.

To program Automatic Flash:

1 Select the last non-conflicting active phase(s) that are to be timed before entry to
automatic flash.
2 Select non-conflicting phase(s) that are to be active when automatic flash is exited.

3 Select overlap(s) that will be active when exiting automatic flash. The overlap(s) follow
the normal overlap programming. This programming has no effect on the normal
overlap operation except when exiting automatic flash.
4 Select “Flash through Load Switches” option (NTCIP standard is “X”).

5 Select “Minimum Recall” option to apply min recall to all phases when automatic flash
is requested.
6 Select “Cycle through Phase” option to allow cycling of all intervening phases when
going into automatic flash. When both Minimum recall and “Cycle through Phases”
are selected, the controller will time every phase for the minimum green time before
entering automatic flash.
7 Select the minimum automatic flash time. The controller will not exit automatic flash
until this time has expired.
8 Select the type of Flash via FLASH>MON to select flashing either through the
Controller Voltage Monitor (CVM) or Load Switches.
9 Select the Exit Automatic Flash interval.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 7-21

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Controller
Start/Flash Data, MM-2-5

MM-2-5
Parameter Description Range

Start Up

PHASE Power Start Phase Interval G, W, Y, R

Phase(s) and intervals selected to begin timing when controller power enables
is first applied to the controller after an interruption greater than 0.6 phase and
interval.
seconds, or an external start input is applied.
“.” disables
. : Indicates the phase indication is red and the phase is not timing.
phase
G: The phase indication is green without walk and MIN GRN is
timing.
W: The phase indication is green with walk and WALK is timing.
Y: The phase indication is yellow and YELLOW CHANGE is timing.
R: The phase indication is red and RED CLEARANCE is timing.
Note • If no phase is programmed (All phases programmed “.”), the
controller will start in the first phase in ring one and the first
phase in each ring that is compatible with it.
START UP Power Start Overlaps ‘X’ enables
OVERLAP
X: Enable overlaps that will be:
 Green if it would normally be green during the Power Start phase
indication.
 Yellow if it would normally have been yellow during the Power Start
phase indication.
 Red if it would normally have been red during the Power Start phase
indication.
. : Disables the overlap during power start. The overlap will start in
Red and follow the overlap programming when the next phase starts
timing.
FLASH>MON Flash through CVM or through Load Switches YES, NO
(at Power Start Up)
Power Start-up flash type.
YES: Power Start Flash through Controller Voltage Monitor (CVM)
NO: Power Start Flash through Load Switches

7-22 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Controller
Start/Flash Data, MM-2-5

MM-2-5
Parameter Description Range

FL TIME Power Start Flash Time 0-255 sec.

Time during which all phases are in Flash at power start following a
power interruption greater than 750 plus or minus 250 milliseconds. If
START FLASH time is non-zero, the Controller sets all outputs
FALSE for 2 seconds prior to timing START FLASH period.
Note • If the intersection cabinet is equipped with a MMU or CMU
that latches Fault Monitor (FM) or Controller Voltage Monitor
(CVM), the monitor power-on flash time must be set to nine
seconds or larger.
Note • FLASH interval times first when both RED and FLASH times
are entered. If FLASH timing is non-zero, the controller sets
all outputs FALSE for 2 seconds prior to timing the FLASH
period.
ALL RED All Red Interval Time After Flash 0-255 sec.
Time during which all phases are red after a flash condition except
preempt flash.
Note • [MUTCD = Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices.]
MUTCD 2009 requires the controller to exit red/red-flash to a
minimum of 6 seconds of all red. To meet the MUTCD
requirement, you must set this parameter to 6 seconds or
greater. The MUTCD default time is 6 seconds. This function
was mandatory as of December 2013, although many
agencies required it before that date.
Note • If the intersection cabinet is equipped with an MMU or CMU
that latches Fault Monitor (FM) or Controller Voltage Monitor
(CVM), the monitor power-on flash time must be set to nine
seconds or larger.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 7-23

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Controller
Start/Flash Data, MM-2-5

MM-2-5
Parameter Description Range

PWR START SEQ Power Start Sequence 1-16

1-16: Selects one of 16 possible configurations of sequence data or
(refer to NTCIP 1202 2.5.7.5 and NTCIP 1202 2.8.3.3). If “?” is 17-20
displayed, the database contains a zero (0), which is converted to 1.
17-20: Selects one of 4 pre-programmed controllers, each with one pre-
programmed sequence. For diamond intersection application notes,
refer to Appendix Q, Diamond Intersection Application Notes.
 17 = Diamond 4-Phase controller.
 18 = Diamond 3-Phase controller.
 19 = Diamond NEMA controller (8-phase Standard Quad).
 20 = Diamond Separate Intersection controller.
Note • This entry will be overwritten by SYSTEM, COORDINATION,
TIMEBASE inputs, or by HARDWARE inputs if HARDWARE
ALTERNATE SEQUENCE ENABLE is YES on
MM-1-1-1 (which results in sequence number 1 if the
alternate sequence input bits are zero).

7-24 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Controller
Start/Flash Data, MM-2-5

MM-2-5
Parameter Description Range

MUTCD-> MUTCD = Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices NO, disable

No: Econolite Flash Operation that affects Startup, Automatic and YES,
Preempt Flash operations. enable
Yes: MUTCD-2009 Flash Operation that affects Startup, Automatic
and Preempt Flash operations.
MUTCD Operation specifies these phase sequences for the respective
initial flashing color:
Flashing Red
1 Flashing Red

2 Solid Red (all phases)

3 Start Phases
Flashing Yellow
1 Flashing Yellow

2 Solid Yellow (same phase as Flashing Yellow)

3 Solid Red (all phases)
4 Start Phases
Flashing Yellow (when Y->G, yellow to solid green mode, in this
screen is set to Yes)
1 Flashing Yellow

2 Solid Green (same phase as the Flashing Yellow)

Programming that is affected by this parameter:
 Startup Flash and Automatic Flash
 Startup Flash All Red time, 6 sec default
 Startup Flash Phases (Yellow is not allowed)
 Automatic Flash Exit Color (Yellow is not allowed)
Consistency Checks have been added to prevent database entries that
would allow incorrect MUTCD operation.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 7-25

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Controller
Start/Flash Data, MM-2-5

MM-2-5
Parameter Description Range

MUTCD-> External Start application: NO, disable

(cont.)
 In general, applying External Start will force the controller to its All YES,
Red Startup state and wait until External Start is released. enable
 However, applying External Start during Preempt will first force the
controller to Fault Flash state which drops CVM. Fault Flash will
continue until External Start and All Preempt inputs are removed, at
which point the controller will time its All Red Startup state and then
start its programmed start phases.
 When External Start is applied during Startup Flash, the controller
will complete the flash time and then wait in MUTCD Red until
External Start is released.
Y->G MUTCD Yellow to Green NO, disable
Note • For this parameter to operate, MUTCD-> (the MUTCD 2009 YES,
parameter) in this screen must be enabled (set to Yes); if not, enable
this parameter is hidden.
Refer to the detailed explanation of this in the MUTCD 2009
description above.
Yes = Enables MUTCD 2009 Yellow > Green for Flashing Yellow
No = Disables MUTCD 2009 Yellow > Green for Flashing Yellow

Automatic Flash

AUTOMATIC Entry into Automatic Flash Phase(s) ‘X’ enables

FLASH PHASE
ENTRY Phase(s) active last before flash. The phase controller enters and times
minimum green, yellow, and red clearance before initiating automatic
flash.
Note • All overlaps will terminate normally to all red with the
automatic flash entry phases.

7-26 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Controller
Start/Flash Data, MM-2-5

MM-2-5
Parameter Description Range

AUTOMATIC Exit Automatic Flash Phase(s) and Indications G, W, Y, R

FLASH PHASE enables
EXIT Phases and indications that the controller times first when exiting
phase and
automatic flash
interval.
. : Indicates the phase indication is red and the phase is not timing. “.” disables
G: The phase indication is green without walk and MIN GRN is phase
timing.
W: The phase indication is green with walk and WALK is timing.
Y: The phase indication is yellow and YELLOW CHANGE is timing.
R: The phase indication is red and RED CLEARANCE is timing.
Note • If no phase is programmed (All phases programmed “.”), the
controller will start in the first phase in ring one and the first
phase in each ring that is compatible with it.
AUTOMATIC Exit Automatic Flash Overlap(s) and Indications ‘X’ enables
FLASH OVERLAP
EXIT X: The overlap indication will be:
 Green if it would normally be green during the exit automatic flash
phase indication.
 Yellow if it would normally have been during the exit automatic
flash phase indication.
 Red if it would normally have been red during the exit automatic
flash phase indication.
. : The overlap will be start in Red and follow the overlap
programming when the next phase starts timing.
FLASH>MON Flash through CVM or through Load Switches YES, NO
(at Automatic Flash)
Automatic Flash type.
YES: Power Start Flash through Controller Voltage Monitor (CVM)
NO: Power Start Flash through Load Switches

ASC/3 Programming Manual 7-27

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Controller
Start/Flash Data, MM-2-5

MM-2-5
Parameter Description Range

EXIT FL Remote / Automatic Flash Exit Interval G, W, Y, R

Range: G, W, Y, R
G, Y, R (ECPI Features)
W NEMA TS2 3.9.1.2.1
W NTCIP 1202 2.2.2.21 BIT 2
TOGGLE to enable interval that the phase will start in when exiting
remote (automatic) flash.
G: The phase indication is green without walk and MIN GRN is
timing. (This is an ECPI Feature.)
W: The phase indication is green with walk and WALK is timing. If
there is no walk time programmed, the phase will start in MIN
GREEN. (This is a NEMA TS2 and NTCIP requirement.)
Y: The phase indication is yellow and YELLOW CHANGE is timing.
(This is an ECPI Feature.)
R: The phase indication is red and RED CLEARANCE is timing.
(This is an ECPI Feature.)
MIN FLASH Minimum Automatic Flash Time 0-255
0 – 255: Enter the minimum time, in seconds, that the controller must Seconds
remain in Automatic or automatic flash before it is allowed to exit.

7-28 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Controller
Start/Flash Data, MM-2-5

MM-2-5
Parameter Description Range

MINIMUM Minimum Recall ‘X’ enables

RECALL
X: Enables, allows the controller to cycle through the active phase(s),
applying only the minimum green to each phase until the automatic
flash entry phase(s) is reached and then going into automatic flash.

. : Disables and the controller does not apply minimum vehicle recall
while automatic or automatic flash is requested.
Note • When enabled and cycle through phases is enabled, the
controller will service every phase for a minimum time and
then advance to the automatic flash entry phases.
CYCLE THRU Cycle Through Phases X enables
PHASE
X: Enables, allowing the controller to service phases with a demand . disables
that are between the active phase(s) and automatic flash entry phase(s).
. : Disables and the controller goes directly to the automatic flash entry
phase(s).
Note • When enabled and minimum recall is enabled, the controller
will service every phase for a minimum time and then
advance to the automatic flash entry phases.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 7-29

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Controller
Option Data, MM-2-6

Option Data, MM-2-6 7

OPTION DATA SUBMENU

1. CONTROLLER OPTIONS

2. EXTENDED OPTIONS

Controller Options, MM-2-6-1

CONTROLLER OPTIONS
PED CLEAR PROTECT . UNIT RED REVERT 2.0
MUTCD 3 SECONDS DONT WALK .......... NO
PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FLASHING GRN PH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GUAR PASSAGE.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NON-ACT I....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NON-ACT II...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DUAL ENTRY...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COND SERVICE.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COND RESERVICE.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PED RESERVICE... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REST IN WALK.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FLASHING WALK... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PED CLR>YELLOW.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PED CLR>RED..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IGRN + VEH EXT.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MM-2-6-1
Parameter Description Range

PED CLEAR Pedestrian Clearance Protection X enables

PROTECT
Use toggle to enable (X) or disable ( . ) this function. . disables
Pedestrian clearance protection requires the controller to time
pedestrian clearance on all phases with pedestrian clearance settings
when manual control is enabled. Manual advance inputs are ignored
during the pedestrian clearance interval.

7-30 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Controller
Option Data, MM-2-6

MM-2-6-1
Parameter Description Range

UNIT RED Unit Red Revert 0.0-25.5 sec.

REVERT
Provides the minimum red revert time for every phase. The actual red
revert time for any phase will be the larger of this and the phase Red
Revert time (MM-2-1).
Note • Red Revert is the minimum phase red indication to be timed
after the yellow change interval before a phase can once
again display green. The greater of the Unit Red Revert or the
phase’s Red Revert is timed.
IMPORTANT • NEMA mandates minimum limit time setting at 2
seconds. NTCIP allows for this value to be set lower.
MUTCD MUTCD 3 Seconds DONT WALK YES enables
3 SECONDS
DONT WALK This conforms to MUTCD 2009, Section 4E.06, Pedestrian Intervals NO disables
and Signal Phases, Paragraph 04, that states:
Following the pedestrian change interval, a buffer interval consisting of
a steady UPRAISED HAND (symbolizing DONT WALK) signal
indication shall be displayed for at least 3 seconds prior to the release
of any conflicting vehicular movement.
No: If Ped protected overlap is enabled, after serving an included
protected phase pedestrian demand, it starts the overlap if there is
enough time before maxout to service the overlap minimum green.
Yes: If Ped protected overlap is enabled, after serving an included
protected phase pedestrian demand, stays in DONT WALK for 3
seconds and then starts the overlap if there is enough time before
maxout to service the overlap minimum green.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 7-31

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Controller
Option Data, MM-2-6

MM-2-6-1
Parameter Description Range

FLASHING GRN Flashing Green Phase F1, F2, F5,

PH
Range: ., F1, F2, F5 “.” disables
This is an ECPI Feature (applies to TS1 and TS2 operation).
TOGGLE to select F1, F2 or F5.
Select Phase Green SOLID or FLASHING operation:
.: The Phase Green is solid during service (no flash).
F1: The Phase Green is Flashed at 1 PPS during service.
F2: The Phase Green is Flashed at 2 PPS during service.
F5: The Phase Green is Flashed at 5 PPS during service.
Use this Flashing Green Phase option to easily select the phases and
their respective flashing rates (there is no need to use the Logic
Processor).
Note • This setting does not affect Preempt TRACK and DWELL
phase selection. Preempt programming has separate data
entries to flash phases while in TRACK and DWELL intervals.
However, the CYCLE phases are the same as those
programmed here.
GUAR PASSAGE Guaranteed Passage X enables
Position the cursor at the desired column and row and use Toggle, “.” disables
0/YES, to enable (X) or disable (“.”) the phase for Guaranteed Passage.
If a phase’s vehicle extension times out while timing a reduced vehicle
extension and guaranteed passage is selected, the difference between
the reduced interval and the initial vehicle extension is timed before a
vehicle extension time out is reported. This option guarantees the
timing of a full vehicle extension for the last detected vehicle.
NON-ACT I Call-to-Non-Actuated (CNA) Mode Inputs I and II X enables
NON-ACT II
Position the cursor at the desired column and row and use Toggle, “.” disables
0/YES, to enable (X) or disable (“.”) Non-Actuated service for the
phase.
CNA I and II mode inputs are used to enable and disable the NON-
ACT I and NON-ACT II settings. In Dual Coordination, the phases
programmed as call-to-nonactuated II are the crossing artery phases.
Note • Non-actuated phases normally have pedestrian time
settings.

7-32 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Controller
Option Data, MM-2-6

MM-2-6-1
Parameter Description Range

DUAL ENTRY Dual Entry X enables

Position the cursor at the desired column and row and use Toggle, “.” disables
0/YES, to enable (X) or disable (“.”) a phase’s Dual Entry assignment.
Dual entry is a mode of operation in which one phase in each ring must
be in operation. If there is no call on a ring when the controller crosses
a barrier, a call is automatically placed on a compatible dual entry phase
in that ring.
Note • Dual Entry processing includes actively delayed detectors as
a serviceable call. The controller does not skip a phase that
has an active but delayed detector. A Delayed Detector (with
a DELAY TIME in MM-6-2) is serviced when this Dual Entry is
enabled.
COND SERVICE Conditional Service X enables
conditional
This allows the order of service to be modified. It permits an actuated
preceding phase in the same ring as the specified phase to be timed if service from
it has a call and is compatible with the phases timing in the other rings. an actuated
phase
Such timing is only allowed when a cross ring phase not ready to
terminate is timing max green and the time remaining until max out is “.” disables
greater than or equal to time required to transition to the preceding conditional
phase and time its conditional service minimum green. service for a
phase
COND Conditional Reservice X Enables
RESERVICE conditional
This allows conditional service phases to be reserviced after a ring
phase that precedes it has been conditionally serviced and is ready to reservice for
an actuated
terminate. Such timing is only allowed when a cross ring phase not
phase that is
ready to terminate is timing max green and the time remaining until
max out is greater than or equal to time required to transition back to also enabled
the conditional service phase and time its conditional service minimum for
conditional
green.
service.
“.”Disables
conditional
reservice for
a phase.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 7-33

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Controller
Option Data, MM-2-6

MM-2-6-1
Parameter Description Range

PED RESERVICE Pedestrian Re-service X enables

Position the cursor at the desired column and row and use Toggle, “.”disables
0/YES, to enable (X) or disable (“.”) the phase for Pedestrian Re-
service.
This option enables the phase’s pedestrian movement to be serviced or
re-serviced any time if there is adequate time for its walk and pedestrian
clearance intervals to be completed before a Max out or coordinated
force off. If re-service is enabled for a pedestrian service that is already
in walk or pedestrian clearance when a call for service is input, the
pedestrian movement returns to start of walk.
REST IN WALK Actuated Rest in Walk X enables
Position the cursor at the desired column and row and use Toggle, “.”disables
0/YES, to enable (X) or disable (“.”) the Actuated Rest In Walk option
for a phase’s pedestrian service.
Allows a phase with an actuated pedestrian call to rest at end of the
pedestrian walk interval until a serviceable conflicting call is received.
FLASHING WALK Flashing Walk X enables
Position the cursor at the desired column and row and use Toggle, “.”disables
0/YES, to enable (X) or disable (“.”) the phase’s pedestrian service for
flashing walk.
Pedestrian walk output is turned on for half a second and then off for
half a second. The ON and OFF flash is repeated for the duration of
the walk interval.
PED CLR> Pedestrian Clearance through Yellow Change X enables
YELLOW
Position the cursor at the desired column and row and use Toggle, “.”disables
0/YES, to enable (X) or disable (“.”) the phase’s pedestrian clearance
interval from being extended to the end of the Yellow Change interval.
Enables a phase pedestrian clearance indication to time through the
yellow change interval. The pedestrian clearance time remains the same
but the last portion is timed during the Yellow Change interval.

7-34 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Controller
Option Data, MM-2-6

MM-2-6-1
Parameter Description Range

PED CLR>RED Pedestrian Clearance through Red Clearance X enables

Position the cursor at the desired column and row and use Toggle, “.” disables
0/YES, to enable (X) or disable (“.”) the phase’s pedestrian clearance
interval from being extended to the end of the Red Clearance.
Enables a phase pedestrian clearance indication to time through the
Yellow Change and Red Clearance intervals. The pedestrian clearance
time remains the same but the last portion is timed during the Yellow
Change and Red Clearance intervals.
IGRN + VEH Initial Green times then Vehicle Extension Starts X enables
EXT
Position the cursor at the desired column and row and use Toggle, “.” disables
0/YES, to enable (X) or disable (“.”) this phase timing option.
This option requires a phase time in its initial green interval before
starting vehicle extension timing. During normal operation, the initial
green and vehicle extension intervals both begin timing at the start of
the phase’s green interval.

Extended Options, MM-2-6-2

This menu displays the Extended Logic Processor Groups described in asc3.ext file that is
part of the Controller Database set. Refer to Extended Logic Processor Group on page 6-64 for
more information

EXTENDED OPTIONS

NO CONFIGURABLE DATA

EXTENDED OPTIONS

IDOT 5 SECTION HEAD CONTROL.........ON

LP FEATURE.........................OFF
CANADIAN LEFT TURN.................OFF

ASC/3 Programming Manual 7-35

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Controller
Pre-Timed Mode, MM-2-7

Pre-Timed Mode, MM-2-7 7

PRE-TIMED MODE
ENABLE PRE-TIMED MODE............... NO
FREE INPUT ENABLES PRE-TIMED........ YES
PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
PRETIMED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Provides “fixed time” capability on selected (X) phases. The phases not selected (“.”) will
operate as programmed.

To enable/disable Pre-Timed operation mode:

 To enable, press toggle, 0/YES, to select X.
Or
 To disable, press toggle, 0/YES, to select “.”

Fixed time means:

The phase is placed on Max vehicle and pedestrian recall.
The Walk interval is expanded to make walk plus ped clearance equal to the phase max in
effect time. If the programmed Walk plus Pedestrian Clearance intervals are longer than
the max in effect time, the phase will time the programmed Walk and Pedestrian clearance.
Phases programmed as Rest in Walk (MM-2-6-1) are commanded to fixed time.

Note • Pre-timed operation can be disabled by:

 External input by mapping an input (MM-1-8-1)
 Time Base
 Logic Processor (MM-1-9) activating the “INHIBIT PRE-TIME” input.

Recall Data, MM-2-8 7

Phase Recall Options

Use this screen to select options for phases 1 thru 16 that include: Lock Detector, Vehicle
Recall, Pedestrian Recall, Max Recall, Soft Recall, No Rest, and Added Initial Calculation.
Display below is repeated for plans 2-4.

To set options:
1 Press 1…4 to set the Timing Plan Number value.

2 Use the cursor arrow keys (right, left, up, and down) to position the cursor at the
appropriate option/phase location.

7-36 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Controller
Recall Data, MM-2-8

3 Use Toggle, 0/YES, to an X (enable) or “.” (disable) the selected option for the selected
phase.
Data in MM-2-1 and MM-2-8 are in the same plan and would execute together; so these
two displays are hyperlinked together.

When in a hyperlink field:

To follow the hyperlink:

For ASC/3, press SPEC FUNC, then

NEXT DATA.

For 2070, press B.

To go back:

For ASC/3, press SUB MENU.

For 2070, press ESC.

MM-2-8
Parameter Description Range

TIMING PLAN Timing Plan Number 1-4

NUMBER
Use the numeric (0-9) keys to specify the timing plan (1-4) to view or
edit. This has a hyperlink that links to MM-2-1, Timing Plan.
LOCK DET Phase Locking of Vehicle Detector X enables
Toggle to enable (X) or disable (“.”) the phase locking of detector “.” disables
inputs.
When locking memory is enabled, an actuation on any detector input
assigned to the associated phase during yellow or red is
“remembered” as a vehicle call and is not reset when the vehicle call
is no longer present. Reset occurs during green.
Note • Locking memory function can be assigned per detector for
each detector associated with a phase. (MM-6-2).
VE RCALL Phase Vehicle Recall X enables
Toggle to enable (X) or disable (“.”) phase vehicle recall. “.” disables
Vehicle recall places a demand for vehicle service on a phase by
registering a call while the phase is not in the green interval.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 7-37

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Controller
Recall Data, MM-2-8

MM-2-8
Parameter Description Range

PD RCALL Phase Pedestrian Recall X enables

Toggle to enable (X) or disable (“.”) phase pedestrian recall. “.” disables
Pedestrian recall places a demand for pedestrian service on a phase
by registering a call while the phase is not in the walk interval.
MX RCALL Phase Recall To Maximum Time X enables
Toggle to enable (X) or disable (“.”) recall to max. “.” disables
Places a continuous vehicle call on the phase.
The phase times to the maximum green time.
Maximum green timer begins timing as though an opposing call was
present, but the phase does not terminate unless there is an actual
opposing call.
SF RCALL Soft Recall (Rest in these Phases). X enables
Toggle to enable (X) or disable (“.”) soft recall. “.” disables
Soft recall places a call on these enabled phase(s) when the controller
goes to rest in other phases.
Note • Typical Soft Recall phases are through-phases such as 2
and 6.
NO REST Do Not Rest In These Phases X enables
Toggle to enable (X) or disable (“.”) phases that the controller may “.” disables
not rest in.
Absence of detector calls, the controller automatically goes to the
next phase that is allowed to rest.
Note • Soft Recall overrides the No Rest entry.
AI CALC Added Initial Calculation by Phase X enables
Toggle to enable (X) or disable (“.”) the added initial calculation to “.” disables
include all detector inputs to the phase.
Note • This overrides individual detector option (USE ADDED
INITIAL, MM-6-2) where the added initial calculation
includes only the most active detector.

7-38 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 8
Coordinator
Coordinator Submenu, MM-3 8

Note • The Coordination Phase Reservice services the phase in the same ring of its
concurrent group.

Programming Summary 8

COORDINATOR SUBMENU

1. COORDINATOR OPTIONS
2. COORDINATOR PATTERNS
3. SPLIT PATTERNS
4. AUTO PERM MIN GREEN
5. SPLIT DEMAND

A brief description follows of the programming functions that you can view and/or
change at each of the menu options.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 8-1

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Coordinator
Programming Summary

MM-3 Menu Option Programming Summary

1. COORDINATOR OPTIONS Accesses a data entry screen that you can use to specify 18
different coordinator option values as follows:
 Enable manual pattern.
 Select source of interconnect commands.
 Select format of interconnect commands.
 Select transition method.
 Enable ECPI coordination operations.
 Select offset reference point.
 Enter dwell/add time.
 Enable Walk delayed to Local Zero.
 Select floating or fixed force-off.
 Enable Force-off added initial green.
 Enable the use of pedestrian time in determining
smooth transition direction.
 Enable pedestrian recall.
 Enable pedestrian re-service.
 Enable manual sync input.
 Enable local zero override.
 Enter re-sync count.
 Select max or inhibit during coordination.
 Enable multi-sync operation.

8-2 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Coordinator
Programming Summary

MM-3 Menu Option Programming Summary

2. COORDINATOR Accesses a data entry screen that includes 19 coordinator

PATTERNS pattern data groups as follow:
 Enter cycle length.
 Select COS command
 Select split pattern.
 Enter offset value.
 Select controller sequence.
 Select split and offset timing in sec. or %.
 Select crossing artery pattern.
 Enter vehicle permissive periods 1 and 2.
 Enter vehicle permissive 2 displacement.
 Select a time-base action plan
 Enable actuated coordination.
 Select a timing plan.
 Enable actuated walk rest.
 Enable phase re-service.
 Select ring split extension value.
 Select split demand pattern.
 Enter ring displacement value.
 Enable directed split preference phases.
 Enable special function outputs.
3. SPLIT PATTERNS Split pattern data has three data groups as follows:
 Select coordinated phases.
 Enter phase splits.
 Select mode for each phase.
4. AUTO PERMISSIVE Enter auto permissive minimum green time.
MINIMUM GREEN

5. SPLIT DEMAND Split Demand data has four groups as follows:

 Select split demand phases.
 Select split demand detectors.
 Enter split demand call time.
 Enter split demand cycle count.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 8-3

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Coordinator
Coordinator Options, MM-3-1

Source Priority
Priority Determination of the source of request:
ASC/3 treats all the 120 Coordinator patterns and 2 special patterns, Automatic Flash and
Free, with the same priority. Pattern can be commanded by different sources, Manual,
Remote, Internal, and Input.
Priority of the source is as follows:
1 Manual/Program Entry (MM-3-1 or MM-5-1) (Highest Priority)

2 Remote Command

a NTCIP (Through Coordinator pattern or Action plan command)

b ECPIP

3 Internal TOD MM-5-3 day plan scheduling MM-5-2 Action plan

4 Hardwire Input

Coordinator Options, MM-3-1 8

Programming Summary 8

COORD OPTIONS
MANUAL PATTERN... 1 ECPI COORD......YES
SYSTEM SOURCE.. TBC SYSTEM FORMAT.. STD
SPLITS IN....SECONDS OFFSET IN...SECONDS
TRANSITION.. ADDONLY MAX SELECT. MAXINH
DWELL/ADD TIME... 0 ENABLE MAN SYNC. NO
DLY COORD WK-LZ. NO FORCE OFF... FIXED
OFFSET REF.... LEAD CAL USE PED TM..YES
PED RECALL...... NO PED RESERVE..... NO
LOCAL ZERO OVRD.. NO FO ADD INI GRN.. NO
RE-SYNC COUNT.... 0 MULTISYNC....... NO

Use this screen to specify 20 different coordinator option values as follows:

MM-3-1 Parameter Programming Summary

MANUAL PATTERN Any non-zero entry selects that coordination pattern. If

the pattern selected is not programmed correctly,
coordinator is set to free.
ECPI COORD Allows ECPI coordination operation and parameters
SYSTEM SOURCE Move the indicated source option to the highest priority
source for the coordination pattern.

8-4 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Coordinator
Programming Summary

MM-3-1 Parameter Programming Summary

SYSTEM FORMAT Determines the format in which the source is presenting

the coordination pattern selection
SPLITS IN Selects the split units as seconds or percent
OFFSET IN Selects the offset units as seconds or percent
TRANSITION Selects the method that the coordinator uses to get into
coordination
MAX SELECT Allow the maximum split time in coordination to be
either the phase split or selected Max 1, 2, or 3.
DWELL OR ADD TIME Enters the maximum time that the coordinator can dwell
or add when transitioning
ENABLE MANUAL When a manual pattern is enabled and the Interconnect
SYNCHRONIZATION Source is TOD, the CLEAR key sets:
 Local Master Dial to zero.
 Local dial to the offset value of the pattern.
 The internal sync reference point to the present time.
DELAY COORDINATE PHASE Enable the coordinated phase walk to be prevented from
WALK UNTIL LOCAL ZERO starting until the local zero. Normally, the coordinated
phase walk starts as soon as it is able to after the last
permissive is closed.
FORCE OFF Selects the method of determining the position of the
phase force off
OFFSET REFERENCE Selects the reference point for the programmed offset
CALCULATION USES Allows the smooth transition algorithm to use or not to
PEDESTRIAN TIME use the pedestrian times in determining the smooth
transition direction
PED RECALL Allows the programmed pedestrian recall (MM-6-3) to
recycle the pedestrian movement when the Coordinator
Pattern has Actuated Walk programmed
PED RE-SERVICE Allows pedestrian movement when walk plus ped
clearance can time before force-off point

ASC/3 Programming Manual 8-5

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Coordinator
Programming Summary

MM-3-1 Parameter Programming Summary

LOCAL ZERO OVERRIDE Allows the non-coordinated phase/s to use a portion of

the coordinated phase split before the coordinated phase
becomes green. The movement continues to run and
remain in sync with the Local Master Dial until the
coordinated phase would violate the Yield point. At that
time, the Local Dial stops until the coordinated phase is
green and reports a local zero error.
Note • Typically used on short cycles that have seldom
used non-coordinated movements.
FORCE OFF ADDED Allows the coordinator to terminate the phase green
INITIAL GREEN when added initial is timing. This only has an effect when
added initial is programmed during volume-density
operation (MM-2-1).
RE-SYNC COUNT Selects the number of missed syncs allowed from an
external source before reverting to time-base.
MULTISYNC Allows the coordinator to receive multiple sync pulses.
The coordinator will synchronize to the pulse that
represents cycle in effect.

MM-3-1
Parameter Description Range

MANUAL Manual Pattern Selection 0-120, 254, or

0: Selects automatic selection of coordination pattern, free, or flash 255
PATTERN

by other sources.
1-120: Selects that pattern for coordination operation. This selection
overrides all other pattern selections.
254: Selects free operation and overrides any pattern or flash from
any other source other than preemption. Sequence defaults to 1 if
not specified.
255: Selects flash operation and overrides any coordination pattern
or free from any other source.
AUTOMATIC FLASH pattern is treated in the same priority as any
other pattern.
Note • Manual Pattern selection overrides any other source.
Manual Pattern overrides Manual Action plan (MM-5-1).

8-6 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Coordinator
Programming Summary

MM-3-1
Parameter Description Range

ECPI COORD Toggle to enable (YES) or disable (NO). YES, NO

YES: The coordinator will:
 Not be set free if the critical phase (Minimum time to service the
phase) time is greater than the split.
 Not be set free if the critical path (Minimum time to service all
phases with minimum recall applied) through the phase diagram
is greater than the cycle length.
 Will time 20 seconds of dwell with zero programmed in the
DWELL / ADD time parameter.
 Will time the Smooth transitions add time if the DWELL / ADD
time is greater than zero. If equal to zero, it will time 17%.
Toggle to enable (YES) or disable (NO).
NO (default): The coordinator will:
 Be set free if the critical phase (Minimum time to service the
phase) time is greater than the split (Reference NTCIP 1202-
2.5.9.3).
 Be set free if the critical path (Minimum time to service all phases
with minimum recall applied) through the phase diagram is
greater than the cycle length (Reference NTCIP 1202-2.5.9.3).
 Will time max dwell regardless of what is programmed in the
DWELL / ADD time parameter (Reference NTCIP 1202-2.5.2).
 Will time the Smooth transitions add time if the DWELL / ADD
time is greater than zero. If equal to zero, it will time 17%
(Reference NTCIP 1202-2.5.2).
 Force the coordinator to MAX INHIBIT when MAX SELECT
is set to MAX3.
 Force the coordinator free when the Cycle is greater than 255.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 8-7

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Coordinator
Programming Summary

MM-3-1
Parameter Description Range

SYSTEM System (Coordination) Source HDW, TBC, or

Press Toggle, 0/YES, to select HDW, TBC or SYS as the source of SYS
SOURCE

coordination commands.
Default source priority (Manual-Highest): Manual, Remote
Command, TBC, hardwire. Selecting the below option to place it at
the top priority source of coordination. All other sources will stay
with default priority order.
HDW: The source of coordination data is the NEMA TS2 inputs.
TBC: The source of coordination data is Time Base.
SYS: The source of coordination data is Port 2/C50S, Port
3A/C21S or Port 3B/C22S depending on the GLOBAL PORT
PARAMETERS (MM-1-5-1) programming.
SYSTEM System (Coordination) Format STD, TS2 or
FORMAT PTN
Use Toggle, 0/YES, to select STD, TS2 or PTN interconnect
format.
STD: The coordination patterns are selected by Econolite-Standard
cycle/offset/split commands. The pattern with the matched COS
value is selected.
The coordinator is free if the cycle or split is zero.
TS2: The coordination patterns are selected by TS2 timing plans
and offset. The pattern selected is determined by the following:
(((Timing plan) * 3) + offset) = pattern number.
(Reference NEMA TS2 Table 3-14 “TIMING PLAN”).
The coordinator is free if the offset is zero. Flash is by a separate
command.
PTN: The coordination pattern is selected directly by number.
1-120: Selects the coordination pattern
254: Sets the coordinator free
255: Commands automatic flash

8-8 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Coordinator
Programming Summary

MM-3-1
Parameter Description Range

SPLITS IN Split Units SECONDS,

PERCENT
SECONDS NTCIP 1202 2.5.9.3
PERCENT (ECPI feature)
Use Toggle, 0/YES, to select SECONDS or PERCENT.
SECONDS: Defines the units programmed in the Split Pattern
(MM-3-3) as seconds.
PERCENT: Defines the units programmed in the Split Pattern
(MM-3-3) as percentage of the cycle time.
Note • When this parameter is changed between SECONDS and
PERCENT on any coordination pattern, every pattern is
changed.
OFFSET IN Offset Units SECONDS/
PERCENT
SECONDS NTCIP 1202 2.5.7.3
PERCENT (ECPI feature)
Use Toggle, 0/YES, to select SECONDS or PERCENT.
SECONDS: Defines the units programmed in the OFFSET VAL
(MM-3-2) as seconds.
PERCENT: Defines the units programmed in the OFFSET VAL
(MM-3-2) as percentage of the cycle time.
Note • When this parameter is changed between SECONDS and
PERCENT on any coordination pattern, every pattern is
changed.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 8-9

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Coordinator
Programming Summary

MM-3-1
Parameter Description Range

TRANSITION Use Toggle, 0/YES, to select SMOOTH, ADD ONLY or DWELL SMOOTH,
to select the method of offset change. ADD ONLY or
SMOOTH: Is accomplished by adding or subtracting a maximum DWELL
of 17% of cycle length per cycle (Ref NTCIP 1202 2.5.2 Integer 3).
Econolite lets you change this factor by changing the
“DWELL / ADD TIME” when it is non-zero.
ADD ONLY: Is accomplished by adding a maximum of 17% of
cycle length per cycle (ref NTCIP 1202 2.5.2 Integer 4). Econolite
lets you change this factor by changing the “DWELL / ADD
TIME” when it is non-zero.
DWELL: Change is by holding in the coordinated phases for a
specified dwell period (refer to NTCIP 1202 2.5.2 Integer 1).
Snap offset correction is active at all times. The general operation
performs as follows: “If a local cycle can be in sync, make it in
sync.”
MAX SELECT Press Toggle, 0/YES, to select MAXINH, MAX 1, MAX 2 or MAXINH,
MAX 3.
MAX 1,
MAXINH: Allows the coordinator phase split to control the time
a phase is allowed to be green in any Coordination Pattern. MAX 2,
MAX 1, MAX 2 or MAX 3: Allows the shorter of the MAX timing MAX 3
(MM-2-1) or the coordinator phase split to control the time a phase
is allowed to be green in any Coordination Pattern.

8-10 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Coordinator
Programming Summary

MM-3-1
Parameter Description Range

DWELL/ADD Use the numeric keys (0-9) to enter the maximum time that Dwell 0-255 seconds
TIME or Add/Subtract time during transition.
1-99 percent
When the Offset Correction is Dwell:
0 (zero): NTCIP maximum dwell period (ref NTCIP 1202 2.5.2
Integer 2) is 20% of the cycle (if the offset is in percent) or 20
seconds (if the offset is in seconds).
1-99: Percentage if the offset is in percent
100-255: Seconds if the offset is in seconds
When the Offset Correction is Add Only or Smooth Transition:
0 (zero): During add only or Smooth Transition, maximum 17%
of the cycle to be adjusted (ref NTCIP 1202 2.5.2 Integers 3
and 4)
1-99: Maximum percentage of the cycle to be adjusted during
Add Only or Smooth Transition
Note • During Smooth Transition, the coordinator subtracts a
maximum of 17% of the cycle.
ENABLE MAN Enable Manual Coordination Synchronization X enable
SYNC “.” disable
Press Toggle, 0/YES, to enable (X) or disable (“.”) manual
synchronization of the coordinator during manual pattern selection
when Manual Pattern is enabled.
X: Enables the CLEAR key to set:
 Local Master Dial to zero.
 Local dial to the offset value of the pattern before zero.
 The internal sync reference point to the present time. This allows
the local dial to continue cycling without transition until manual
operation ceases.
“.”: Disables manual synchronization
Note • Any power interruption will disrupt manual coordination.
This feature is not saved in the DB.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 8-11

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Coordinator
Programming Summary

MM-3-1
Parameter Description Range

DLY COORD Delay the Coordinated Walk to Local Zero YES, NO

WK-LZ
Press Toggle, 0/YES, to enable (YES) or disable (NO) delaying the
start of the coordinated phase walks.
YES: Delays the start of walk of the coordinated phases until the
start of local zero.
NO: Allows the coordinated phase walk to start after the end of the
last permissive period is closed.
FORCE OFF Determines position of the phase force off FIXED,
FIXED: The phase will force off at the fixed position in the cycle FLOAT
regardless of when it started.
FLOAT: The phase will force off after it has serviced its split
regardless of when it started.
OFFSET REF Offset Reference LEAD, LAG,
YIELD,
Press Toggle, 0/YES, to select LEAD, LAG, YIELD, or YELLOW
YELLOW or
as the offset reference.
RING 1
LEAD: References the start of the Local Dial to the start of the first
coordinated phase green.
LAG: References the start of the Local Dial to the start of the last
coordinated phase green.
YIELD: References the start of the Local Dial to the start of the
yield of the first coordinated phase.
YELLOW: References the start of the Local Dial to the start of the
first coordinated phase yellow.
RING 1: References the start of Ring 1 coordinated phase.
Note • Criteria for Ring 1 are listed below.
 If there is no coordinated phase on Ring 1 or the coordinated
phase is in a ring that runs independently of Ring 1 (not in the
same concurrent group with Ring 1 coordinated phase), the
offset reference is the start of the first coordinated phase (same as
LEAD).
 In 3 or 4-ring configurations, TSP is not supported if the
coordinated phase of Ring 1 is not the first or last coordinated
phase.

8-12 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Coordinator
Programming Summary

MM-3-1
Parameter Description Range

CAL USE PED For Offset Correction, Use Pedestrian Times When YES, NO
TM Calculating Minimum Cycle
Press Toggle, 0/YES, to enable (YES) or disable (NO) using
pedestrian times for minimum cycle calculations.
Note • The minimum cycle value has effect only on subtraction
during SMOOTH TRANSITION.
YES: Includes pedestrian times in minimum cycle calculation for
offset correction.
NO: Omits pedestrian times from the minimum cycle calculation
for offset correction.
Note • NO is typically used at intersections that have little or no
pedestrian movements.
PED RECALL Coordinated Phase Pedestrian Re-service YES, NO
Press Toggle, 0/YES, to enable (YES) or disable (NO) pedestrian
recall (MM-2-8 and MM-3-2) during coordination.
YES: Allows the programmed pedestrian recall to recycle the
pedestrian movement when the Coordinator Pattern has Actuated
Walk programmed. The pedestrian actuations will have no effect .
NO: Allows only pedestrian actuations to recycle the pedestrian
movement during coordination. The programmed pedestrian recall
will not recycle the pedestrian movement when the Coordinator
Pattern has actuated Walk programmed.
PED RESERVE Pedestrian Re-service YES, NO
Press Toggle, 0/YES, to enable (YES) or disable (NO) re-serviced
the Walk during coordination.
YES: Allows the pedestrian movements to be re-serviced during
coordination.
NO: Prevents the pedestrian movements from being re-serviced
during coordination.
Note • When pedestrian phases are re-serviced, they will return
to the start of the Walk interval. Any pedestrian phase can
be re-serviced when there is a pedestrian call and Walk
plus Pedestrian Clear can be timed in full before the force-
off point (Split Time).

ASC/3 Programming Manual 8-13

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Coordinator
Programming Summary

MM-3-1
Parameter Description Range

LOCAL ZERO Local Zero Override YES, NO

OVRD
YES: Allows the coordinator local dial to continue running and
remain in synchronization with the Local Master Dial until the
coordinated phase would violate the Yield point. At that time, the
Local Dial stops until the coordinated phase is green and reports a
local zero error.
NO: Normal coordinator operation. The Local Dial stops at Local
Zero until the coordinated phase is green and reports a local zero
error.
Note • Typically used on short cycles that have seldom used non-
coordinated movements. Allows the non-coordinated
phase(s) to use a portion of the coordinated phase split
before the coordinated phase becomes green. The seldom
used movement has a phase split that violated the
coordinated cycle or phase split because of a pedestrian
movement, density, full phase demand, or guaranteed
minimum times. There will be “not reported” or “logged
errors” if the coordinated phase is “can yield” by the yield
point.
FO ADD INI Force Off Added Initial Green YES, NO
GRN
Press Toggle, 0/YES, to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the Force
Off of Added Initial Green by the Coordinator.
Note • This option allows the use of the Added Initial calculations
while maintaining coordination.
YES: Allows the coordinator to force off the Added portion of
Initial Green that was generated by volume density.
NO: Prevents the coordinator from Forcing off the Added portion
of Initial Green that was generated by volume density.

8-14 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Coordinator
Programming Summary

MM-3-1
Parameter Description Range

RE-SYNC Allows the coordinator to self sync when a sync pulse does not 0-255
COUNT occur at Local Master Zero.
0: Defaults to “1” self-sync cycle.
1-254: Self-sync cycles that will be completed if a sync pulse does
not occur. After which, Coordination reverts to Time Base
operation.
255: Allows the coordinator to continue to re-sync until a sync pulse
is detected.
Note • This option is used when the interconnect sync pulses are
an even multiple of the local cycle.
Example: Set the re-sync count to 3 when:
 The interconnect sync pulse every 180 seconds.
 The local cycle is 60 seconds.
MULTISYNC Press Toggle, 0/YES, to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the YES, NO
MULTISYNC Operation.
YES: Allows the coordinator to receive sync pulses that represent
multiple cycle lengths and synchronize to the sync pulse that
represents cycle in effect.
NO: Resets the local master dial on every sync pulse.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 8-15

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Coordinator
Coordinator Pattern Data, MM-3-2

Coordinator Pattern Data, MM-3-2 8

Coordinator/Split Pattern numbers default to a 1-to-1 relationship — that is, both

numbers are the same.

When in a hyperlink field:

To follow the hyperlink:

For ASC/3, press SPEC FUNC, then

NEXT DATA.

For 2070, press B.

To go back:

For ASC/3, press SUB MENU.

For 2070, press ESC.

Hyperlink fields are shaded black and link to related displays as follows:
 USE SPLIT PATTERN is hyperlinked to MM-3-3.
 TIMING PLAN is hyperlinked to MM-2-1.
 SEQUENCE is hyperlinked to MM-1-1-1.
 ACTION PLAN is hyperlinked to MM-5-2.
 SPLIT DEMAND PATTERN is hyperlinked to MM-3-3.
 XART PATTERN is hyperlinked to MM-3-2.
This screen repeats for Coordinator Patterns 2 thru 120.

8-16 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Coordinator
Programming Summary

Programming Summary 8

Note • If the Sequence is programmed in a coordinator plan, then it overrides any

sequence programmed in an action plan that refers to this specific coordinator plan.

Go to MM-3-1, SPLITS IN and OFFSET IN(Split Units on page 8-9 and Offset Units on
page 8-9), to select seconds or percent for SPLIT PREFERENCE PHASES and OFFSET
VAL. Scroll through MM-3-2 to specify all coordinator pattern data values.
Coordination is controlled with patterns. Each pattern is defined by the associated
coordination parameters programmed by the user. The pattern consists of independent
cycle time, offset value, split pattern and units for offset and split values. With each pattern,
you can independently select controller sequence, vehicle permissive operations, phase re-
service, split extension, split demand pattern, crossing artery pattern, phase sequences,
actuated coordination/walk rest, timing plan, ring displacement, split preference phases,
spare outputs and time-base action plan for by-phase selection of vehicle recall, max recall,
ped recall, and phase omits.

MM-3-2 Parameter Programming Summary

COORDINATOR PATTERN To advance to a desired pattern, enter the desired pattern

number and press the ENTER function key.
USE SPLIT PATTERN Selects the split pattern that this pattern will use. The split
pattern has the coordinated phases selection, phase splits
and modes.
TS2 (PAT-OFF) Displays the TS2 pattern and offset that will select this
pattern.
COORDINATION CYCLE Enters the cycle length in seconds that the coordinator
LENGTH (CYCLE) will use when this pattern is active. To coordinate the
cycle length must be greater than 30 seconds.
STD (COS) Enter the standard interconnect Cycle, Offset, and Split
(COS) that will select this pattern.
OFFSET VALUE Enters the value in seconds or percent that the local cycle
zero will lag the system sync. This value must be
consistent with the offset in selection.
DWELL/ADD TIME A non-zero value will override the DWELL/ADD TIME
setting in MM-3-1 when this pattern is in effect.
ACTUATED COORDINATED Makes the coordinated phases non-actuated until the yield
PHASE point then actuated thereafter. Required when ring split
extensions, actuated walk rest or phase re-service is
programmed.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 8-17

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Coordinator
Programming Summary

MM-3-2 Parameter Programming Summary

TIMING PLAN Selects the TIMING PLAN that is in effect when this
coordination pattern is selected. Changes to a timing plan
are also set in all Action Plans (MM-5-2) that select that
coordination pattern.
ACTUATED WALK REST Makes the coordinated phase(s) rest in walk when
actuated coordination is programmed.
SEQUENCE Selects the controller sequence that this pattern will
command.
PHASE RESERVICE Allows the coordinator to respond to demands on any
phase that has an open permissive. For phase Reservice to
function, the controller must be fully actuated, including
coordinated phases, actuated coordination programmed
and automatic permissives enabled.
ACTION PLAN Selects the time base action plan that will be active during
this coordination pattern. The properties of the selected
action plan will be “OR’ed” with those in effect. The
pattern, flash, red rest and timing plan in this action plan
will not be in effect.
MAX SELECT Use this field to override the MAX SELECT setting in
MM-3-1 when this pattern is in effect.
FORCE OFF When this pattern is in effect, it overrides the FORCE
OFF setting in MM-3-1.
PHASE SPLIT (SPT) Enter the split value for each active phase.
PREFERENCE 1/2 PHASES Select the phases to receive any non-coordinated phase
(PREF 1, PREF 2) unused split time. Preference 1 phases have precedence
over Preference 2 phases when unused split time is being
allocated.
COORDINATED PHASE Allows the coordinated phase in each ring to extend by
SPLIT EXTENSION actuations from the split extension time before
(SPLT EXT)
coordinated phase split termination. Once gapped, the
ring can service any open permissive phase.

8-18 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Coordinator
Programming Summary

MM-3-2 Parameter Programming Summary

VEHICLE PERMISSIVE Automatic: Enter zero for Vehicle Permissive Period 1

PERIODS (VEH PERM.) (VPP1), Vehicle Permissive Period 2 (VPP2) and Vehicle
Permissive Period 2 Displacement (VPP2D).
Single: Enter desired single permissive period for VPP1
and zero for VPP2 and VPP2D.
Dual: Enter desired values for VPP1, VPP2 and VPP2D.
RING DISPLACEMENT Select the displacement or offset from ring one that an
independent ring coordinated phase will start. When two
or more rings have a barrier in common, the higher
numbered ring is forced to use the value of the lower
numbered ring.
SPLIT DEMAND PATTERN Enter the pattern to be in effect that is used in the split
1/2 demand screen. (MM-3-5) enables split demand 1 or 2.
CROSSING ARTERY (XART) Select the coordination pattern to be used when dual
PATTERN coordination is selected.
COORDINATED PHASE(S) Select the phase(s) that will be coordinated when the Split
Pattern is operational.
VEHICLE RECALLS Select the phases that vehicle recall will be placed when
the pattern is selected.
PED RECALLS Select the phases that ped recall will be placed when the
pattern is selected.
MAX RECALLS Select the phases that max recall will be placed when the
pattern is selected.
PHASE OMITS Select the phases that will be omitted when the pattern is
selected.
SPECIAL FUNCTION Select the special function outputs to be active when this
OUTPUTS (SF OUT) coordination pattern is in effect.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 8-19

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Coordinator
Programming Summary

MM-3-2
Parameter Description Range

COORDINATOR Use the numeric keys (0-9) to select the number of the desired 0-120
PATTERN Coordination Pattern.
0 (zero): Selects the first Coordination Pattern that is not
programmed.
1-120: Selects the pattern having the number entered.
USE SPLIT Coordination Split Pattern 1-120 - selects
PATTERN pattern
Use the numeric keys (0-9) to select the number of the desired
Split Pattern.
1-120 is the SPLIT PATTERN that represents the phase split
values, coordinated phases, vehicle and pedestrian recalls, and
phase omits that are to be used when this coordination pattern is
in effect.
SPLIT SUM Automatic calculation of the split sum based on data entry. N/A
Note • The split sum in Free mode is composed of Minimum
Green, Yellow, and Red clearance.
TS2(PAT-OFF) The TS2 patterns (Timing Plan – Offset) that represent this N/A
pattern are displayed for information only.
CYCLE Coordination Cycle Length 0-999
Use the numeric keys (0-9) to enter the length of the coordination
cycle in seconds.
0 (zero): Forces Free and replaces the phase Max in effect with
the split time as the Max for the phase.
1-29: Forces Free. This is a result of the coordinator not being
able to function below 30 seconds.
30-255: Programs the cycle length.
Note • The Offset and Split values (MM-3-1) can be in seconds
or percent with cycle length between 30 and 255.
256-999: Programs the cycle length.
Note • The Offset and Split values will be in percents only with
cycle length greater than 255, regardless of what is
programmed (MM-3-1).

8-20 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Coordinator
Programming Summary

MM-3-2
Parameter Description Range

STD (COS) Cycle Offset Split (COS) 0

This Associates the COS command with the selected Coordinator or
Pattern to allow different sources to select this pattern. COS with range
Each number in the 3-digit number has a meaning: of 111-654
1st number is the Cycle with range of 1 thru 6
where C=1 to 6
2nd number is the Offset with range of 1 thru 5 O=1 to 5
S=1 to 4
3rd number is the Split with range of 1 thru 4
 Enter the 3-digit number for the COS command for this
Coordinator Pattern.
Or
 To not have a COS command associated with this
Coordinator Pattern, enter 0 (zero).
Example: Coordination Pattern 20 has a COS value of 152. If the
Master sends COS command 152, it selects Coordination
Pattern 20.
OFFSET VAL Offset from the System Sync 0-255
Use the numeric keys (0-9) to enter the Offset value seconds or
percent depending on the programming of OFFSETS IN
parameter.
0 to (CYCLE minus 1): Time or percent that the Local Dial lags
the Local Master Dial (synchronization pulse).
CYCLE to 255: Results on the coordinator going free.
Note • When the cycle length is greater than 255, the
acceptable offset value is 0-255 seconds or 0-99%.
Depending on the programmed offset reference (MM-3-1) this
offset may be referenced to the start of the first coordinated
phase green, the start of the last coordinated phase green, start of
the first coordinated phase yield or the start of the first
coordinated phase yellow.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 8-21

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Coordinator
Programming Summary

MM-3-2
Parameter Description Range

DWELL/ADD TIME A non-zero value will override the DWELL/ADD TIME setting 0-255
in MM-3-1 when this pattern is in effect.
When the Offset Correction is DWELL:
0 (zero): no override (the default). Use the maximum dwell
period set in the DWELL/ADD TIME in MM-3-1.
1-99: If the offset is in percent, Dwell/Add Percentage that is
used in place of the value entered in the DWELL/ADD
TIME in MM-3-1.
1-255: If the offset is in seconds, Dwell/Add Time in Seconds
that is used in place of the value entered in the DWELL/ADD
TIME in MM-3-1
When the Offset Correction is ADD ONLY or SMOOTH
TRANSITION:
0 (zero): Maximum percentage of the cycle to be adjusted is
determined by the DWELL/ADD TIME setting in MM-3-1.
1-99: Maximum percentage of the cycle to be adjusted during
Add Only or Smooth Transition.
Note • During Smooth Transition, the coordinator subtracts a
maximum of 17% of the cycle.
ACTUATED COORD Actuated Coordinated Phase YES enables
Enables the coordinated phase(s) to respond to vehicle NO disables
demand(s) and extend the coordinated phase between the ring
split extension time before the yield point. When enabled, allows
actuated walk rest to be enabled.
Use Toggle, 0/YES, to select YES (enable) or NO (disable) for
the coordinated phases to be actuated.
YES: Enables the coordinated phases to respond to vehicle
detector inputs and to extend the coordinated phase split after the
yield point to a maximum of the SPLT EXT entry.
Note • When Actuated Coordinated phase is enabled, it also
allows for Actuated Walk / Rest and Phase Reservice if
enabled.
NO: Disables the coordinated phase from responding to any
vehicle or pedestrian detector inputs and forces Vehicle and
Pedestrian Recall. It also disables the Phase Reservice.

8-22 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Coordinator
Programming Summary

MM-3-2
Parameter Description Range

TIMING PLAN Coordination Timing Plan 0-4

1-4: Selects the Phase TIMING PLAN that is in effect when this
coordination pattern is in effect.
0 (zero): Allows the phase timing plan in effect to be active.
Note • The timing plan in effect may be selected by input or by
Time Base Action Plan (MM-5-4), Coordinator Pattern
(MM-3-3), Preemptor (MM-4-1), or Start/Flash (MM-2-5).
ACT WALK REST Actuated Rest in Walk YES enables
Use Toggle, 0/YES, to select YES (enable) or NO (disable) the NO disables
coordinated phase Actuated Walk to rest in walk.
YES: Allows actuated coordinated phase walk to rest in WALK
and begin pedestrian clearance at the Yield Point.
NO: Allows the actuated coordinated phase to time walk and
pedestrian clearance in response to a demand.
SEQUENCE Pattern Sequence 1-16 – selects
Controller 1
Selects the controller sequence when a higher priority routine has
sequence
not made a selection. Selection priorities, from highest to lowest
are: Manual, System, Coordinator, Hardware and Time Base. 17-20 – selects a
Diamond pre-
0 (zero): Sequence selection is by other means (hardware inputs
programmed
or Time Base).
sequence
1-16: Selects one of 16 possible configurations of sequence data
0 – allows
(refer to NTCIP 1202, 2.5.7.5 and 2.8.3.3).
sequence
For sequences 17 thru 20, refer to Appendix Q, Diamond selection by
Intersection Application Notes. others
17-20: Selects one of 4 pre-programmed controllers (Econolite
feature), each with one pre-programmed sequence:
 17 = Diamond 4-Phase controller
 18 = Diamond 3-Phase controller
 19 = Diamond Separate Intersection controller
 20 = Diamond NEMA controller (8 phase Standard Quad)

ASC/3 Programming Manual 8-23

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Coordinator
Programming Summary

MM-3-2
Parameter Description Range

PHASE RESRVCE Allows all phases (including the coordinated phases) to cycle YES enables
between those that have open permissives and to rest in any NO disables
phase. Automatic calls are only placed on the coordinated phases
when it is time to return.
Use Toggle, 0/YES, to select YES (enable) or NO (disable) the re-
servicing of phases during a single coordination cycle.
YES: Enables the coordinator to allow the controller to respond
to demands on any phase that has an open permissive.
Note • When you run a sequence with a leading left turn phase,
you can program the coordinator to allow the leading
left turn phase to be reserviced while the other ring is
still servicing the coordinated phase. To enable this
operation, you must program SPLIT EXT (MM-3-2) of the
ring that has the leading left turn phase to allow an
earlier coordinated phase yield. The leading left turn
phase would then be reserviced if the phase minimum
time of the leading left turn phase can be serviced in the
remaining coordinated phase split.
NO: Disallows re-servicing of phases during a single
coordination cycle. Once the controller has exited and returned to
the coordinated phases, it will not service any demand until the
next cycle.
Note • For phase re-service to function, the controller must be
fully actuated, including coordinated phases, actuated
coordination programmed and automatic permissive
enabled.
ACTION PLAN Action Plan During Coordination Pattern 0 disables
Selects the time base action plan that will be active during this 1-100 selects
coordination pattern. The properties of the selected action plan plan
will be “OR’ed” with those in effect. The pattern, flash, red rest,
and timing plan in this action plan will not be in effect.
Use the numeric keys (0-9) to select the Time Base Action Plan
(1-100) to be in effect or enter 0 (zero) to disable selection.
0 (zero): Disables any selection of a Time Base Action Plan by
this Coordination Pattern.
1-100: Selects the Time Base Action Plan that will be in effect
when this Coordinator Pattern is in effect.
Note • The properties of this Time Base Action Plan and any
other that may be in effect will be “OR’ed” with the
exception of Pattern, Flash, Red Rest and Timing Plan.

8-24 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Coordinator
Programming Summary

MM-3-2
Parameter Description Range

MAX SELECT Use this field to override the MAX SELECT setting in MM-3-1 NONE,
when this pattern is in effect. MAXINH,
MAX 1,
Press Toggle, 0/YES, to select NONE, MAXINH, MAX1,
MAX2 or MAX3. MAX 2,
NONE: MAX SELECT is determined by the MAX SELECT MAX 3
setting in MM-3-1.
MAXINH: when this pattern is in effect, it overrides MAX
SELECT setting in MM-3-1. This option allows the coordinator
phase split to control the time a phase is allowed to be green in
the selected coordination pattern only.
MAX1, MAX2 or MAX3: when this pattern is in effect, it
overrides MAX SELECT setting in MM-3-1. This option allows
the shorter of the MAX timing (MM-2-1) or the coordinator
phase split to control the time a phase is allowed to be green in
the selected coordination pattern only.
FORCE OFF Determines position of the phase force off NONE,
When this pattern is in effect, it overrides the FORCE OFF FIXED,
setting in MM-3-1. FLOAT
Press Toggle, 0/YES, to select:
NONE: (default) The FORCE OFF mode is determined by the
FORCE OFF setting in MM-3-1.
FIXED: When this pattern is in effect, it overrides the FORCE
OFF setting in MM-3-1. This option will force off the phase at
the fixed position in the cycle regardless of when it started.
FLOAT: When this pattern is in effect, it overrides the FORCE
OFF setting in MM-3-1. This option will force off after it has
serviced its split regardless of when it started.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 8-25

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Coordinator
Programming Summary

MM-3-2
Parameter Description Range

SPT Division of cycle time into sections (split intervals) establishes the 0-255 sec. or
maximum amount of time that is allocated to each timing phase 0-99%
during coordination.
IMPORTANT • Observe the CAUTIONs listed below.
ECPI COORD = NO, the coordinator will go free when:
 Entering zero for any active phase-split.
 Entering phase-splits that are smaller than the minimum phase
time
 Entering splits that exceed the cycle length.
ECPI COORD = YES, then:
 Entering zero for any active phase-split will omit that phase.
 Entering phase-split(s) that are smaller than the minimum
phase time(s) or that exceed the cycle length may cause loss of
coordination.
Note • PHASE SPLIT is the maximum amount of time available
to a phase during coordination if Floating Force-Offs is
in effect. If using Fixed Force Offs are in effect and the
split timer starts early due to time left over from
preceding phases, the phase can be extended by
demand up to the force-off point. The maximum time
available can only be lowered by selecting MAX SELECT
(MM-3-1) and if the max time in effect is shorter than
the split.

8-26 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Coordinator
Programming Summary

MM-3-2
Parameter Description Range

PREF 1 Preference 1 and 2 Phase Unused Split Allocation 0 deselects

PREF 2
0: Deselect or 1-16 selects
1-16: Select a phase for allocation of unused split time.
IMPORTANT • For this feature to operate, in MM-3-1 or MM-3-
2, make sure that the FORCE OFF parameter is
set to FLOAT.
You can program any unused split time from an Initial phase to
time in a Subsequent/Preference phase, as needed. The
Subsequent/Preference phase must be in the same ring as the
Initial phase.
Procedure:
1 In PREF 1, move the cursor to the Initial phase (1-16).

2 Enter the number of the Subsequent/Preference phase (1-16)

to time any unused split time from the Initial phase. To
program another Subsequent/Preference phase, repeat the
procedure with PREF 2. A value of 0 in PREF 1/PREF 2
means that phase is not programmed to use its unused split
time.
Note • If you program PREF 1 and PREF 2, the unused split
time will first be available to the PREF 1 Subsequent
phase to use if it maxed out in last cycle. If PREF 1
Subsequent phase does not qualify, the unused split
time will be available to the PREF 2 subsequence
phase. If PREF 1/PREF 2 subsequent phases do not
need the Initial unused split time, the unused split time
is added to the coordinated phase. The allocation of the
unused split time does not affect the sum of the split
time used for each ring.
Example: Phase sequence is
2 1|3 4
6 5|7 8
Phase 2, 6 are coordinated phases. Initial phase 1 has PREF 1
Phase 4. If there is any unused split time from Initial phase 1, and
Subsequent phase 4 is available and maxed out during last cycle,
then the unused time could be used by Subsequent phase 4 if it
has the demand.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 8-27

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Coordinator
Programming Summary

MM-3-2
Parameter Description Range

SPLT EXT Coordinated Phase Split Extension 0-99%

Vehicle extension time for an actuated coordinated phase. 0-255 sec.
0 to (CYCLE minus 1) seconds or 0-99% allows the coordinated
phase in each ring to extend by actuations from the SPLIT
EXTENSION time before coordinated phase split termination.
Once gapped, the ring can service any open permissive phase.
Note • Requires ACTUATED COORDINATION. Units of measure
will be same as the SPLIT option.
VEH PERM. Vehicle Permissive Period 1 (VPP1) 0-99%
(1st column)
Portion of the cycle length during which phases other than the 0-255 sec.
coordinated phases may be serviced. This period begins timing at
the coordinated phase yield point. If Vehicle Permissive Period 2
(VPP2) or Vehicle Permissive Period 2 Displacement (VPP2D) is
equal to zero, all non-coordinated phases may be serviced during
this period. If VPP2 or VPP2D are not equal to zero (dual
permissive operation), then only the first phase(s) following the
coordinated phase(s) (first permissive phases) are serviced during
this period.
Use numeric keys (0-9) to enter 0 to (CYCLE minus 1). The units
of measure are the same as for the SPLIT units (seconds or
percentage).
1 to (CYCLE minus 1) enables the Vehicle Permissive Period 1
(VPP1) that is the portion of the cycle following Yield in which
phase(s) following a coordinated phase may be serviced.
Note • If VPP2 or VPP2D is zero, all phases will be serviced
during VPP1.
0 (zero) enables the coordinator to calculate an “AUTO
PERMISSIVE” for each phase when VPP2 is also zero.

8-28 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Coordinator
Programming Summary

MM-3-2
Parameter Description Range

VEH PERM. Vehicle Permissive Period 2 (VPP2) 0-99%

(2nd column)
Portion of the cycle length during which phases other than the 0-255 sec.
coordinated phases and those directly following may be serviced.
This period begins timing immediately after the vehicle
permissive 2 displacement period. Only phases other than those
serviced during the first permissive period can be serviced as
phase omits are applied to the first permissive phase(s).
Use numeric keys (0-9) to enter 0 to (CYCLE minus 1). The units
of measure are the same as for the SPLIT units (seconds or
percentage).
1 to (CYCLE minus 1) enables VPP2 that starts after VPP2D
has timed out following the Coordinator Yield. It is the portion
of the subsequent cycle that phase(s) other than those that
directly follow coordinated phase(s) may be serviced.
Note • If VPP2 or VPP2D is zero, all phases will be serviced
during VPP1.
0 (zero) enables the coordinator to calculate an “AUTO
PERMISSIVE” for each phase when VPP1 is also zero.
VEH PERM. Vehicle Permissive Period 2 Displacement (VPP2D) 0-99%
(3rd column)
This starts timing at the coordinated phase yield point. At the end 0-255 sec.
of this displacement period, the second permissive period begins
timing.
Use numeric keys (0-9) to enter 0 to (CYCLE minus 1). The units
of measure are the same as for the SPLIT units (seconds or
percentage).
1 to (CYCLE minus 1) is the portion of cycle between the
YIELD POINT and the beginning of VPP2.
0 (zero) enables all phases to be serviced during the first
permissive period when VPP 1 is non-zero.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 8-29

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Coordinator
Programming Summary

MM-3-2
Parameter Description Range

RING DISP Ring Displacement From Ring 1 0-255 seconds

Use the numeric keys (0-9) to select the displacement (Offset) (0 to CYCLE
from Ring Offset One that independent ring coordinated minus 1) or
phase(s) will start. (0-99%)
0 to (CYCLE minus 1) seconds or 0-99% is the displacement
Ring 1 for Rings 2, 3 and 4.
Cycle to 255 seconds or 100-255% results in no displacement.
The Offset for the rings are as follows:
Ring 1 offset is the programmed offset.
Ring 2 offset is the programmed offset plus the Ring 1-2
Offset.
Ring 3 offset is the programmed offset plus the Ring 1-3
Offset.
Ring 4 offset is the programmed offset plus the Ring 1-4
Offset.
Note • When two or more rings (1-4) have a barrier in common,
the higher numbered ring is forced to use the value of
the lower numbered ring.
Example: Rings 1 and 3 have a barrier in common. The Ring
Displacement 1-3 will be ignored and Ring 3 will use the offset of
Ring 1.
SPLIT DEMAND Split Demand Patterns 1 and 2 0 disables
PTRN
Enter the pattern to be in effect when enabled by split demand 1-120 selects
screen (MM-3-5) programming.
The coordinator uses these phase splits in place of those in the
SPLIT PATTERN when the SPLIT DEMAND PATTERN is in
effect. The coordinated phase(s) and modes are still taken from
the SPLIT PATTERN.
Use the numeric keys (0-9) to enter the number of the SPLIT
DEMAND pattern to be in effect when enabled.(MM-3-5).
1-120 selects the SPLIT PATTERN that will be in effect when
SPLIT DEMAND 1 or 2 is in effect. If both are in effect, SPLIT
DEMAND PATTERN 2 is selected.
0 (zero) disables the split demand operation.
Note • Crossing artery coordination takes precedence over
Split demand.

8-30 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Coordinator
Programming Summary

MM-3-2
Parameter Description Range

XART PATTERN Crossing Artery Pattern 0-120

Use the numeric keys (0-9) to select and enable the crossing artery
operation when the Dual Coordination input is TRUE.
0 (zero): Disables the crossing artery coordination.
1-120: Selects the Split Pattern to be used when crossing artery
operation is requested.
Note • Crossing artery coordination takes precedence over
Split demand. The crossing artery coordinated phases
are programmed as CNA2 phases.
COORD Coordinated Phases. X select
Use Toggle, 0/8, to select (X) or deselect (“.”) phases for “.” deselect
coordination.
Note • Observe the information below:
 All coordinated phases must be compatible (in the same
concurrent group).
 There must be a coordinated phase entered for each ring in that
concurrent group.
 It is permissible to have only one ring in the concurrent group.
VE RCALL Use Toggle, 0/8, to select (X) or deselect (“.”) phases that vehicle X select
recall will be placed in coordination. “.” deselect
PD RCALL Use Toggle, 0/8, to select (X) or deselect (“.”) phases that ped X select
recall will be placed in coordination. “.” deselect
MX RCALL Use Toggle, 0/8, to select (X) or deselect (“.”) phases that max X select
recall will be placed in coordination. “.” deselect
OMIT Use Toggle, 0/8, to select (X) or deselect (“.”) phases that will be X select
omitted in coordination. “.” deselect
SF OUT Coordinator Pattern Special Function Outputs X enable
Toggle to enable (X) or disable (“.”) up to eight special function “.” disable
outputs when this Coordination Pattern is in effect.
These outputs are typically Mapped to a controller output, input,
or used by a Logic Processor (MM-1-8-2) Statement.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 8-31

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Coordinator
Added Parameters

Added Parameters 8

The parameters that follow are not shown on any of the data entry screens. They are
included here because they are necessary to understand the data entry parameters for this
section.

Parameter Description

Permissive Operation The coordinator is programmed to calculate permissive periods by one of

three operations: Automatic, Dual and Single.
Auto Permissive Automatically computed permissive period. Each sequential phase is
automatically assigned a vehicle and pedestrian permissive period. The length
of the vehicle permissive period is determined by the phase split interval and
phase minimum time. Phase minimum time is equal to auto permissive
minimum green, bike minimum green, or phase minimum green, whichever is
larger, plus the yellow and red clearance time. Auto permissive green time
allows you to set the phase minimum green to a low value, yet still ensures that
the auto permissive period provides sufficient green time if the controller
yields to the phase at the end of the permissive.
Dual Permissive A permissive operation that requires operator data entry of three parameter
values: VEH PERM 1, VEH PERM 2 and VEH PERM 2 DISP. During this
permissive operation, the Vehicle permissive period 1 times first. This period
begins at the yield point. Vehicle permissive period 2 begins timing
immediately after an adjustable time period (Vehicle Permissive Period 2
Displacement). During the vehicle permissive period 1, only those phases
immediately following the coordinated phases are serviced. If the controller
yields during the first permissive, all remaining calls are serviced in normal
sequence and the second permissive period is not used.
Single Permissive Single permissive operation is selected by setting the Vehicle Permissive 2
displacement to zero. Only the Vehicle Permissive Period 1 and its associated
pedestrian permissive period are timed and begin timing at the yield point.
During the Single Permissive period, the controller yields to any phase.

8-32 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Coordinator
Added Parameters

Parameter Description

Permissive Period End End Point = (Split Sum) - (K Phase Clear) - (Perm Phase Min Green and
Point Clear)
Where:
 Split Sum = Sum of splits from coordinated through permissive phases,
inclusive.
 K Phase Clear = Coordinated phase Yellow + All Red (If Walk Rest
Modifier input = TRUE).
 K Phase Clear = Coordinated phase Ped Clear + Yellow + All Red (If Walk
Rest Modifier input = FALSE).
 Perm Phase Min Green and Clear = Permissive phases minimum green +
Yellow + All Red.
 Perm Phase Min Green = Permissive Phase minimum green or (Walk +
Ped Clear), whichever is greater.
Yield Point Yield Point = Coordinated phase split interval - Coordinated phase clearance
time (Pedestrian and vehicle clearance times).
Actuated Yield Point Actuated Yield Point = Coordinated phase split interval - Coordinated phase
clearance time(s) – Ring split extension time.
Offset Point The offset entry establishes the offset point to the:
 LEAD: Referenced the start of the Local Dial to the start of the first
coordinated phase green.
 LAG: Referenced the start of the Local Dial to the start of the last
coordinated phase green.
 YIELD: Referenced the start of the Local Dial to the start of the first
coordinated phase yield.
 YELLOW: Referenced the start of the Local Dial to the start of the first
coordinated phase yellow.
Yield Points The coordinator uses multiple yield points, one yield point is computed per
ring. There may be four distinct yield points. Hold and Yield are independent
calculations based on offset, coordinated phase splits and coordinated phase
timing.
Minimum Controller The shortest possible cycle length allowing all phases to time their minimum
Cycle Time vehicle and pedestrian interval times.
Dual Coordination Dual coordination is established when the dual coordination input is TRUE.
This forces the crossing artery (XARTY PATTERN) phase splits to be used
and places a continuous vehicle demand on the call-to-non-actuated 2 (CNA
II) phases.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 8-33

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Coordinator
Split Pattern, MM-3-3

Split Pattern, MM-3-3 8

The split patterns are selected by the coordination patterns and identify coordinated phase,
split value and recall/omit selection. When you scroll this screen, you can specify all
coordinator split pattern data values.

When in a hyperlink field:

To follow the hyperlink:

For ASC/3, press SPEC FUNC, then

NEXT DATA.

For 2070, press B.

To go back:

For ASC/3, press SUB MENU.

For 2070, press ESC.

The display above repeats for Split Patterns 2 through 120.

Programming Summary 8

MM-3-3 Parameter Programming Summary

SPLIT PATTERN To advance to desired pattern, enter desired pattern

number after SPLIT PATTERN then press ENTER.
The hyperlink goes to MM-4-4, TSP/SCP SPLIT
PATTERN.
PHASE SPLIT Enter the split value for each active phase.
COORDINATED PHASE(S) Select the phase(s) that will be coordinated when the Split
(PHASE COORD) Pattern is operational.
VEHICLE RECALLS (VE Select the phase(s) where vehicle recalls are placed when
RCALL) the split pattern is operational.
PED RECALLS (PD RCALL) Select the phase(s) where ped recalls are placed when the
split pattern is operational.
MAX RECALLS (MX RCALL) Select the phase(s) where max recalls are placed when the
split pattern is operational.
PHASE OMITS (OMIT) Select the phase(s) that will be omitted when the split
pattern is operational.

8-34 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Coordinator
Programming Summary

MM-3-3
Parameter Description Range

SPLIT PATTERN Select the desired Split Pattern to edit or view as follows: 1-120
 1-120 will display the programming for the specified Split Pattern.
 The hyperlink goes to MM-4-4, TSP/SCP SPLIT PATTERN.

PHASE SPLIT Division of cycle time into sections (split intervals) establishes the 0-255
maximum amount of time that is allocated to each timing phase during sec. or
coordination. 0-99%
IMPORTANT • Observe the cautions listed below.
ECPI COORD = NO, the coordinator will go free when:
 Entering zero for any active phase-split.
 Entering phase-splits that are smaller than the minimum phase time
 Entering splits that exceed the cycle length.
ECPI COORD = YES, then:
 Entering zero for any active phase-split will omit that phase.
 Entering phase-split(s) that are smaller than the minimum phase
time(s) or that exceed the cycle length may cause loss of
coordination.
Note • PHASE SPLIT is the maximum amount of time available to a
phase during coordination if Floating Force-Offs is in effect. If
using Fixed Force Offs are in effect and the split timer starts
early due to time left over from preceding phases, the phase
can be extended by demand up to the force-off point. The
maximum time available can only be lowered by selecting
MAX SELECT (MM-3-1) and if the max time in effect is shorter
than the split.
COORD Coordinated Phases X select
Use Toggle, 0/YES, to select (X) or deselect (“.”) phases for “.”
coordination. deselect
Note • Observe the notes below.
 All coordinated phases must be compatible (in the same concurrent
group).
 There must be a Coordinated phase entered for each ring in that
concurrent group.
 It is permissible to have only one ring in the concurrent group.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 8-35

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Coordinator
Programming Summary

MM-3-3
Parameter Description Range

VE RCALL Vehicle Recalls X select

Use Toggle, 0/8, to select (X) or deselect (“.”) phases where vehicle “.”
recall is placed in coordination. deselect
PD RCALL Pedestrian Recalls X select
Use Toggle, 0/8, to select (X) or deselect (“.”) phases where ped recall “.”
is placed in coordination. deselect
MX RCALL Maximum Recalls X select
Use Toggle, 0/8, to select (X) or deselect (“.”) phases where max recall “.”
is placed in coordination. deselect
OMIT Phase Omits X select
Use Toggle, 0/8, to select (X) or deselect (“.”) phases that are omitted “.”
in coordination. deselect

8-36 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Coordinator
Automatic Permissive Minimum Green, MM-3-4

Automatic Permissive Minimum Green, MM-3-4 8

Use this display to specify all Auto Perm Minimum Green data values:
 Enter desired automatic permissive minimum green times for each phase 1-16. This
time is only used in the auto-permissive calculations and has no effect on the actual
phase minimum green.
 Zero entry disables the function for that phase.

AUTO PERM MINIMUM GREEN (SECONDS)

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
MIN GRN. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

PHASE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
MIN GRN. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

To enable automatic permissive operation:

 Go to MM-3-2 and set vehicle permissive periods (1) and (2) and vehicle permissive
displacement to zero.

MM-3-4
Parameter Description Range

MIN GRN Select the phase minimum green time (in seconds) to be used by the 0-255
coordinator. seconds
0-255 seconds or the phase INITIAL GREEN (MM-2-1) time,
whichever is larger, is used by the auto permissive algorithm in
determining the permissive for each phase.
Note • This entry is only in effect when the VEHICLE PERMISSIVE 1 and
2 are zero (set in MM-3-2).

ASC/3 Programming Manual 8-37

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Coordinator
Split Demand, MM-3-5

Split Demand, MM-3-5 8

SPLIT DEMAND
PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
DEMAND 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DEMAND 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DEMAND 1 2
DETECTOR......... 0 0
CALL TIME (SEC).. 0 0
CYCLE COUNT...... 0 0

Use this display to specify all Split Demand data values.

Enter desired phase(s) timing, detectors and continuous detector activity to enable split
demand 1 or 2. Select the number of coordinator cycles that split demand will be in
operation.

MM-3-5
Parameter Description Range

DEMAND 1 & 2 Split Demand 1 & 2 Phase(s) X enable

PHASES
Use Toggle, 0/YES, to select X (enable) or “.” (disable) phases for “.” disable
SPLIT DEMAND 1 and 2 operation.
The coordinator uses the split values in SPLIT DEMAND
PATTERN 1 or 2, as specified in COORDINATOR PATTERN
(MM-3-2) when the:
 DEMAND phase(s) are timing and
 DEMAND DETECTOR is continuously actuated and
 DEMAND CALL TIME has been exceeded.
When SPLIT DEMAND PATTERN has been selected, it remains
in effect for the number of cycles set in CYCLE COUNT after the
above conditions are no longer met.
Note • Split demand operation allows the intersection to call a
different SPLIT PATTERN (MM-3-2) to service local traffic
demand.

8-38 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Coordinator
Split Demand, MM-3-5

MM-3-5
Parameter Description Range

DETECTOR Split Demand Detector Assignment 0-64

Use the numeric (0-9) keys to select the detector to enable the
coordinator SPLIT DEMAND 1 or 2.
1-64: Selects the “RAW” detector input to be used. This detector
need not be assigned or programmed (MM-6-2).
0 (zero): Disables SPLIT DEMAND operation.
Note • A failed detector disables the SPLIT DEMAND 1 or 2
selections.
CALL TIME (SEC) Split Demand Call Time 0 disables
Use the numeric (0-9) keys to enter a number (1-255) to specify a 1-255 selects
call time or enter 0 (zero) to disable the split demand operation. time
1-255: Specifies the number of seconds of continuous detector
activity while the demand phase(s) are timing. Enables SPLIT
DEMAND operation.
0 (zero) disables the split demand operation.
CYCLE COUNT Split Demand Cycle Count 1-255
Use the numeric (0-9) keys to specify 1-255 cycles that SPLIT
DEMAND operation remains in effect after DEMAND CALL
TIME conditions are no longer met.
The coordinator uses the split values in SPLIT DEMAND
PATTERN 1 or 2, as specified in COORDINATOR PATTERN
(MM-3-2) when the:
 DEMAND phase/s are timing and
 DEMAND DETECTOR is continuously actuated and
 DEMAND CALL TIME has been exceeded.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 8-39

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
For your notes:

8-40 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 9
Preempt/TSP/SCP
Preempt Submenu, MM-4 9

Programming Summary 9

Data Group 1 is preempt plans 1 thru 10. Data Group 2 is preemptors that require or use
a filtered input.
If the ECPI Transit Signal Priority (TSP) special feature is enabled, configure with Data
Group 3. Use Data Group 4 to program the NTCIP Maximum Extension and Maximum
Reduction times in the SCP Split Pattern. You need a special feature Datakey® (dongle) to
enable TSP/SCP.

PREEMPT/TSP/SCP SUBMENU

1. PREEMPT PLAN 1-10

2. ENABLE PREEMPT FILTERING & TSP/SCP
3. TSP/SCP PLAN 1-6
4. TSP/SCP SPLIT PATTERN

MM-4 Menu Option Programming Summary

1. PREEMPT PLAN 1-10  Designate track clearance phases and overlaps.

 Designate dwell and cycling phase(s), pedestrian(s) and
overlap(s).
 Designate exit phases.
 Select phases to have calls placed at end of preemption.
 Enable Preemptor.
 Enable priority of preemptors.
 Designate preemption input as lock or non-lock.
 Enable dwell flash phases.
 Select dwell flash exit color.
 Terminate overlaps ASAP.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 9-1

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Preempt/TSP/SCP
Programming Summary

MM-4 Menu Option Programming Summary

1. PREEMPT PLAN 1-10  Terminate all timing Phase.

(cont.)
 Gate down extended green Time.
 Specify vehicle, pedestrian and overlap indications to
be as solid, flash and fast flash depending on the
interval.
 Enable pedestrian indications to be dark.
 Select pedestrian clearance to time thru yellow.
 Program preemptor/remote flash priority.
 Enable preemptor interlock input.
 Enable track clearance re-service.
 Set max presence in dwell interval time.
 Set preemptor re-service time.
 Set input extend time.
 Enable track phase red clearance to go to green.
 Enable rings to be free during preemption.
 Enable preemptor active output.
 Enable preemptor active output only during dwell.
 Set preemptor active output condition of other priority
preemptors that are not active.
 Set preemptor active output condition of other non-
priority preemptors that are not active.
 Enter preemptor minimum dwell interval time.
 Enter preemptor exit timing plan.
 Enable preemption to coordination.
 Enter minimum preemption duration time.
 Enter delay time between preemptor call and start of
preemption.
 Enter phase inhibit time.
 Enter min walk, pedestrian clearance, green, yellow, red
entrance interval times.
 Enter track clearance interval times.
 Enter dwell exit, yellow and red interval times.
 Enable preemptor linking.
 Select spare outputs to be active during preemption.

9-2 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Preempt/TSP/SCP
Programming Summary

MM-4 Menu Option Programming Summary

 Select preemptor exit phase:

pedestrian
vehicle
queue delay
exit to coordination, phase once or one free cycle
 Select the controller timing plan to be in effect after
preemption
 Select a conditional delay for the start of preemption
 Enter the minumum percent of Green necessary to
time in an Interrupted Phase
2. ENABLE PREEMPT 1 Select preemptor inputs that require filtering to
FILTERING & TSP/SCP separate a pulsing from a constant input.
2 Assign preemptors to use those filtered inputs.
3 Map TSP/SCP signals; refer to the separate manual,
TSP User Guide, ASC/3, P/N 100-0903-003.
3. TSP/SCP PLAN 1-6 For instructions to enter data in MM-4-3 and MM-4-4,
4. TSP/SCP SPLIT
refer to the Transit Signal Priority (TSP) User Guide for
PATTERN Advanced System Controllers ASC/3, P/N 100-0903-003.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 9-3

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Preempt/TSP/SCP
Preempt Plans 1-10, MM-4-1

Preempt Plans 1-10, MM-4-1 9

Line

1 PREEMPT PLAN [ 1] ENABLE.... NO

2 VEH/PED 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
3 OVERLAP A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P
4 TRKCLR V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 TRKCLR O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 ENA TRL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 DWEL VEH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 DWEL PED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9 DWEL OLP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10 CYC VEH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11 CYC PED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12 CYC OLP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13 EXIT PH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14 EXIT CAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15 SP FUNC . . . . . . . . (1-8)
16
17 ENABLE.... NO|PMT OVRIDE.X|INTERLOCK NO
18 DET LOCK.. X|DELAY.. 0|INHIBIT... 0
19 OVERIDE FL. .|DURATION 0|CLR>GRN... NO
20 TERM OLP.ASAP|PC>YEL NO|TERM PH NO
21 PED DARK.. NO|TC RESRV. NO|DWELL FL LDSW
22 LINK PMT....0|X FLCOLR GRN|EXIT OPT. OFF
23 X TMG PLN...0|RE-SERV.. 0|FLT TYPE HARD
24 FREE DUR PMT|R1 NO|R2 NO|R3 NO|R4 NO
25 --TIMING-----WALK|PED CL|MN GR| YEL| RED
26 ENTRANCE TM. 0| 255| 5| 4.0| 1.0
27 -----------MIN GR|EXT GR|MX GR| YEL| RED
28 TRACK CLEAR 0| 255| 5| 4.0| 1.0
29 -----------MIN DL|PMTEXT|MX TM| YEL| RED
30 DWL/CYC-EXIT 0| 0.0| 0| 4.0| 1.0
31 PMT ACTIVE OUT.. ON PMT ACT DWELL... NO
32 OTHER - PRI PMT.OFF NON-PRI PMT.....OFF
33 INH EXT TIME...25.5 PED PR RETURN...OFF
34 PRIORITY RETURN.OFF QUEUE DELAY.... OFF
35 COND DELAY......OFF
36 PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
37 PR RTN% 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
38 PHASES 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
39 PR RTN% 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Note • This screen repeats for preemptors 2 thru 10.

You can program up to 10 preempt plans. A programmed preempt plan is not used when
its ENABLE is set to NO. Service is prioritized so that the lowest number preemptor with
No Preemption Override enabled has the highest priority or can be programmed as first
come, first served.
There are several data entry screens per preempt plan. Use the screens to select preemption
phases, options and timing values. Priority preemptor # 1 screens are shown as examples.

9-4 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Preempt/TSP/SCP
Preempt Plans 1-10, MM-4-1

For Phases/Overlaps:
 Use the toggle key 0/YES to select track clearance, dwell, cycling overlaps, pedestrians
and spare outputs.

For Options:
 Use the toggle key 0/YES to select desired preemption option(s). YES and ‘X’ indicate
the option is enabled.

For Timing Values:

 Use keypad number keys to enter timing values for delay, duration, input extension,
inhibit, max presence, re-service, and minimum intervals times. Entering the desired
value after the parameter enables various timing options.
 A zero (0) entry typically disables the function. For detailed explanations of these
timers, reference their individual sections in the table that follows.

For Linked Preemptors:

 You can link Preemptors 2 thru 10 to a higher order priority preemptor. However, you
cannot link Preemptor 1 to any other preemptor because it is the highest priority
preemptor.

MM-4-1
Parameter Description Range

PREEMPT Use the numeric keys (0-9) to select the desired Preempt (PMT) to edit or 1-10 – goes
PLAN view as follows: to specified
PMT
1-10: Will display programming for the specified PMT.
ENABLE NO: This preempt operation is disabled. NO, YES
YES: Preempt operates with the programmable configuration that has up
to 16 sequences.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 9-5

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Preempt/TSP/SCP
Preempt Plans 1-10, MM-4-1

MM-4-1
Parameter Description Range

Phase and Overlap Setting

TRKCLR V Track Clearance Phase(s) X, F1, F2

(phases) or F5
Phases serviced first following Initial Clearance. Each ring will time
according to the Track Clearance Green, Yellow Change and Red Clearance
intervals. Each ring then holds in Red transfer until all have finished their
TRACK CLEARANCE timing. All rings then advance to the preemptor
DWELL interval together. The Yellow and Red indication will be solid but
the green will be as follows:
X: Solid Green when the phase is green.
F1: Flashing Green at 1 PPS when the phase is green
F2: Flashing Green at 2.5 PPS when the phase is green.
F5: Flashing Green at 5 PPS when the phase is green.
Note • Changes in flashing rate will take place when the phase green
starts to time. All TRACK CLEARANCE vehicle movements must
be permissive and compatible with each other (refer to Phase
Compatibility, MM-1-1-2 on page 6-11). TRACK CLEARANCE
vehicle movements cannot be DWELL or CYCLING vehicle
movements.
TRKCLR O Track Clearance Overlap(s) X, F1, F2,
F5 enable
Press Toggle, 0/YES, to enable (X, F1, F2, F5) or disable (“.”) overlaps
during Track Clearance. The Yellow and Red indication will be solid, but “.” disables
the Green will be as follows:
X: Display a solid Green when the overlap is green or timing between
two included phases.
F1: Display a flashing Green at 1 PPS when the phase is green or is
timing between two included phases.
F2: Display a flashing Green at 2.5 PPS when the phase is green or is
timing between two included phases.
F5: Display a flashing Green at 5 PPS when the phase is green or is
timing between two included phases.

9-6 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Preempt/TSP/SCP
Preempt Plans 1-10, MM-4-1

MM-4-1
Parameter Description Range

TRKCLR O Note • Observe the information below: X, F1, F2,

(cont.)
 Changes in flashing rate will take place when the phase green starts to F5 enable
time. “.” disables
 All Track Clearance vehicle movements must be permissive and
compatible with each other (Reference MM-1-1-2).
 Track Clearance vehicle movements cannot be dwell or cycling
movements.
 Track Clearance overlap indications will only be active if they have an
included phase (MM-2-2) programmed as a Track Clearance vehicle
movement.
 All overlap operations (including lead/lag timing, protect, modified and
not-overlap) will be active coming to, during, and exiting Track
Clearance.

ENA TRL Trailing Overlap Timing Disabled During Preemption X enables

Toggle to disable (.) the trailing overlap Green, Yellow and Red timing “.” disables
during preemption.
When enabled (X), the overlap will use its Green, Yellow and Red timing
during preemption.
DWEL VEH Dwell Phase(s) X, F1, F2
or F5
Phases that will be first served following the TRACK CLEARANCE
interval. The Yellow and Red indication will be solid but the green will be
as follows:
X: Solid Green when the phase is green.
F1: Flashing Green at 1 PPS when the phase is green
F2: Flashing Green at 2.5 PPS when the phase is green.
F5: Flashing Green at 5 PPS when the phase is green.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 9-7

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Preempt/TSP/SCP
Preempt Plans 1-10, MM-4-1

MM-4-1
Parameter Description Range

DWEL VEH Note • Observe the notes below: X, F1, F2

(cont.)
 Changes in flashing rate will take place when the phase green starts to or F5
time.
 All DWELL vehicle movements must be permissive and compatible
with each other (refer to Phase Compatibility, MM-1-1-2 on page 6-11).
 DWELL vehicle movements cannot be TRACK CLEARANCE vehicle
movements.
 DWELL phases may not be IDENTICAL to the CYCLE phases. For
example, Dwell 2/5, Cycle 2/5 is not allowed.
 An EXCLUSIVE PED phase may be used as a DWELL phase but its
corresponding DWELL PED phase must also be selected.
DWEL PED Dwell Pedestrian(s) X enables
Toggle to enable (X) or disable (“.”) dwell phase pedestrian movements to “.” disables
be served.
Note • If DWELL FLASH option is enabled, no pedestrian indications can
be serviced.
DWEL OLP Dwell Overlap(s) X, F1, F2,
F5
Press Toggle, 0/YES, to enable (X, F1, F2, F5) or disable (“.”) overlaps to
be first served following Track Clearance. Dwell overlap yellow and red “.” disables
indication will be solid, but the green will be as follows:
X: Solid Green when the Overlap phase is green.
F1: Flashing Green at 1 PPS when the phase is green.
F2: Flashing Green at 2.5 PPS when the phase is green.
F5: Flashing Green at 5 PPS when the phase is green.
Note • Observe the notes below:
 All Dwell vehicle movements must be permissive and compatible with
each other (refer to Phase Compatibility, MM-1-1-2 on page 6-11).
 Dwell vehicle movements cannot be Track Clearance vehicle
movements.
 Dwell overlap indications will only be active if they have an included
phase (MM-2-2) programmed as a Dwell vehicle movement.
 All overlap operations (including lead/lag timing, protect, modified, and
not-overlap) will be active coming to, during, and exiting Dwell interval.

9-8 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Preempt/TSP/SCP
Preempt Plans 1-10, MM-4-1

MM-4-1
Parameter Description Range

CYC VEH Cycling Phase(s) X, F1, F2

Phase(s) that will be served after the DWELL phase(s). The Yellow and Red or F5
enables
indication will be solid but the green will be as follows:
X: Solid Green when the phase is green.
F1: Flashing Green at 1 PPS when the phase is green
F2: Flashing Green at 2.5 PPS when the phase is green.
F5: Flashing Green at 5 PPS when the phase is green.
Note • Observe the notes below:
 Changes in flashing rate will take place when the phase green starts to
time.
 CYCLING vehicle movements cannot be TRACK CLEARANCE
vehicle movements.
 It is NOT VALID to use EXACTLY the same phase for both a CYCLE
movement and DWELL movement, for example Dwell 2,5 and
Cycle 2,5. However, for example, DWELL 2,5 and CYCLE 2,6,7,8
would be acceptable; in this example, the Dwell programming tells the
preemptor to service 2,5 first and then continue to the cycle phases as
they have demand.
 If no calls exist on any of the CYCLE phases, then the preemptor will
automatically apply VEHICLE calls to all CYCLE phases so the CYCLE
Phases will be serviced at least once.
 An EXCLUSIVE PED phase may be used as a CYCLE phase but its
corresponding CYCLE PED phase must also be selected.
CYC PED Cycling Pedestrian(s) X enables
Enables cycling phase pedestrian movements to be served. “.” disables
Toggle to enable (X) or disable (“.”) pedestrian movements that will be
served with the CYCLING phase.
X: Enables pedestrian movements that can time during the CYCLING
interval following the DWELL movements.
Note • Although the preemptor applies CYCLE VEH calls for Cycle
phases, it does not apply CYCLE PED calls.
“.”: Disables pedestrian movements with the CYCLE phases.
Note • If DWELL FLASH option is enabled, no pedestrian indications can
be serviced.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 9-9

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Preempt/TSP/SCP
Preempt Plans 1-10, MM-4-1

MM-4-1
Parameter Description Range

CYC OLP Cycling Overlaps X, F1, F2,

Press Toggle, 0/YES, to enable (X, F1, F2, F5) or disable (“.”) overlaps to F5
be first served following DWELL vehicle movements. Dwell overlap “.” disables
yellow and red indication will be solid, but the green will be as follows:
X: Solid Green when the Overlap phase is green.
F1: Flashing Green at 1 PPS when the phase is green.
F2: Flashing Green at 2.5 PPS when the phase is green.
F5: Flashing Green at 5 PPS when the phase is green.
Note • Observe the notes below:
 Cycling vehicle movements cannot be Track Clearance vehicle
movements.
 Cycling overlap indications will only be active if they have an included
phase (MM-2-2) programmed as a Cycling movement.
 All overlap operations (including lead/lag timing, protect, modified, and
not-overlap) will be active coming to, during, and exiting DWELL and
Cycling phases.
EXIT PH Preemption Exit Phase(s) X enables
With exit phase(s) enabled, the preemption sequence terminates when all
exit phases are timing.
When no exit phase is enabled and the PMT TO COORD option is not
active, the preemptor terminates immediately and exits from the
CYCLING interval directly to normal controller operation.
When no exit phase is enabled and the PMT TO COORD option is active,
the preemptor will terminate and exit from the CYCLING interval directly
to the lowest priority phase(s) that have an open coordination permissive
window. This allows the preemptor to exit directly into coordination
without requiring a pickup cycle or transition.
Note • EXIT phases must be permissive and compatible with each other
(Reference MM-1-1-2).
EXT CAL Preemption Exit Phase Vehicle Calls X enables
The phase(s) that the preemptor enters a vehicle call when exiting
preemption.

9-10 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Preempt/TSP/SCP
Preempt Plans 1-10, MM-4-1

MM-4-1
Parameter Description Range

SP FUNC Preemptor Special Function Outputs X enables

Toggle to enable (X) or disable (“.”) up to eight Special Function outputs “.” disables
when this preemptor is in effect.
These outputs are typically Mapped (MM-1-8) to a controller output, input,
or used by a Logic Processor (MM-1-8) Statement.

Feature Enable/Disable

ENABLE Preemptor Enable (ECPI feature) NO,

NO: Disable TSP/SCP operation called from this input. YES
YES: Standard phasing as programmed in (MM-1-1-1) and (MM-1-1-2).
PMT OVRIDE Preemptor Overrides Higher Numbered Preemptor Disable X, “.”
Note • A Higher Priority preempt can not interrupt a preempt currently
entering or timing TRACK CLEAR. The interrupted preempt will
finish timing its TRACK CLEAR and only then will it terminate so
that the Higher Level Preempt can run.
X: Allows this preemptor to override all higher numbered preemptors.
(Example: 2=X overrides 3 through 10)
“.”: Disables this preemptor from overriding the next active higher
numbered preemptor.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 9-11

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Preempt/TSP/SCP
Preempt Plans 1-10, MM-4-1

MM-4-1
Parameter Description Range

PMT OVRIDE Example: Preemptor 1 is the highest priority preemptor. X, “.”

(cont.)
Preemptor 2 has priority over all other active preemptions except
preemptor 1.
Preemptors 3-6 are equal and are serviced on a first-come, first-served basis.
They all override preemptors 7-10.
Preemptors 7- 10 are equal and are serviced on a first-come, first-served
basis.
PREEMPTOR OVERRIDE programming example to accomplish the above:
1=.
2=X
3=.
4=.
5=.
6=X
7=.
8=.
9=.
10 = (does not care)
INTERLOCK Preemptor Interlock Enable YES, NO
YES: Enables Preemptor Interlock. The PMT Interlock input must remain
at logic ground or TRUE state until that preemptor has an active input and
at logic high or FALSE state when that preemptor input is active. If this
condition is not met for at least 1 second and the preemptor is
programmed, the controller will revert to flash.
Note • Each of the 10 preempt inputs have a corresponding Interlock
Input EXCEPT for Preempts 1 & 2 which SHARE Interlock Input #1.
As a result, Interlock Input #2 is NEVER used.
NO: Disables PREEMPTOR INTERLOCK. The PMT interlock input
has no effect on controller operation.

9-12 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Preempt/TSP/SCP
Preempt Plans 1-10, MM-4-1

MM-4-1
Parameter Description Range

INTERLOCK Preemptor Interlock Enable YES, NO

(cont.)
Example: Preemptor 1-2 Interlock enabled.
Preemptor 1 or 2 are not active or timing Initial/Track Clearance:
1 Activate preemptors 1 and 2.

2 Clear to all red after Track Clearance.

3 Go to a latched flash condition by forcing Voltage Monitor/ Fault
Monitor FALSE.
Preemptor 1 is active after termination of Track Clearance:
1 Clear to all red.

2 Go to a latched flash condition by forcing Voltage Monitor/ Fault

Monitor FALSE.
Preemptor 2 is active and after termination of Track Clearance and
Preemptor 1 is not programmed:
1 Clear to all red.

2 To go to a latched flash condition, force Voltage/Fault Monitor false.

Preemptor 2 is active and after termination of Track Clearance and
Preemptor 1 is programmed:
1 Activate preemptor 1 and 2 inputs.

2 Clear to all red after Track Clearance.

3 Go to a latched flash condition by forcing Voltage Monitor/ Fault
Monitor FALSE.
Any preemptor is terminating (Going to Exit phase(s) or exiting Preemptor
Flash):
1 Restart the Preemptor 1 or 2 if either is timing

2 Activate preemptor 1 and 2 inputs

3 Clear to all red after Track Clearance.
4 Go to a latched flash condition by forcing Voltage Monitor/ Fault
Monitor FALSE.
Note • The preempt logic gives the preempt and interlock inputs 3
seconds to stabilize before it checks if they are logically opposite.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 9-13

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Preempt/TSP/SCP
Preempt Plans 1-10, MM-4-1

MM-4-1
Parameter Description Range

DET LOCK Latched Preemptor Call During Delay X, “.”

A preemptor may have either latched (X) or non- latched (.) detector inputs.
The non- latched parameter is in effect only during delay time.
“.” (Non- Latched): If preemptor call is dropped during delay time, the
preemptor is not serviced.
X (Latched Detector): If preemptor call is dropped during delay time, the
preemptor is serviced. Latched call until preemptor is serviced.
DELAY Delay Time 0-65535
The time between receipt of preemptor call and initialization of preemption sec.
movements. If preemption is not active when the call is not locked, then
preemption is removed before the delay timing period expires. Zero entry
causes no delay before the preempt input is acknowledged.
INHIBIT Inhibit Time 0-255 sec.
The last portion of delay time, during which phases that are not scheduled
for service at the beginning of the preemption sequence, and all pedestrian
movements are inhibited. Inhibit time must be less than or equal to delay
time. Zero entry causes no inhibit time at the beginning of the preemption
sequence.
OVERRIDE Preemption Has Priority Over Automatic Flash X, “.”
FL
“.”: Allows automatic flash to continue. Automatic flash will terminate until
after the preemption input is removed.
X: Allows the preemptor to override automatic flash and time the
preemptor sequence. The preemptor forces the exit from automatic flash,
times the complete preemption sequence and then allows the controller to
return to automatic flash.
This complies with the NEMA TS2 3.4.6 priority list.
DURATION Minimum Duration Time 0-65535
sec.
Required minimum time that the preempt run must be active. It begins
timing at the end of the Delay Interval. A preempt run MAY NOT EXIT
until this timer has expired.
With no Dwell phases programmed, a Zero entry allows preempt to exit
immediately after the Track Clearance interval if the preempt input is no
longer present. However, if Dwell phases are programmed, then the Dwell
phases will be serviced for their MIN DL time before the preemptor exits.

9-14 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Preempt/TSP/SCP
Preempt Plans 1-10, MM-4-1

MM-4-1
Parameter Description Range

CLR>GRN Yellow Clearance Reverts to Green YES, NO

YES: Allows a phase to go immediately to green if it has been timing a YEL
Clearance interval when the preemption call is received and the interval to
time next during preemption is that same phase green.
NO: Forces the phase and will proceed through red revert in the normal
sequence.
Note • You can not enable (YES) this entry and TERM PH at the same
time because they would be in direct conflict with one another.
This feature is automatically disabled if a Lagging Ovlp Green
starts timing on the way to Preempt.
TERM OLP Terminate Overlaps As Soon As Possible. ASAP, NO
ASAP: Forces overlaps to terminate immediately with their included phase
and ignore any Lagging Overlap programming.
NO: Allows overlaps to terminate nominally when the last overlap included
phase reaches the preemptor minimum yellow interval.
PC>YEL Pedestrian Clearance Through Yellow YES, NO
YES: Allows the Yellow Change indication to time with the completion of
Pedestrian Clearance interval when entering preemption.
NO: Provides normal pedestrian termination when entering preemption.
The Yellow Change interval is after the completion of Pedestrian Clearance.
TERM PH Preemptor Terminate Phases YES, NO
TOGGLE to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the option for the controller to
always terminate all timing phases before entering a preempt run. This has
the effect of forcing an ALL RED condition before the preempt starts.
YES: Terminate all timing phases and force an ALL RED condition before
starting the activated preempt. Phases will NOT be terminated if the
current GREEN phases exactly match the Preempt's entry phase(s) and the
entry phase(s) will not cause a Yellow Trap for conflicting PPLT type
Overlap (MM-2-2) programming.
NO: Controller only terminates phases not required by the activated
Preempt run.
Note • You can not enable (YES) this entry and CLR>GRN at the same
time because they would be in direct conflict with one another.
In order to accommodate a PPLT during preemption, program the
designated phase/overlap type that is associated with the PPLT to F1
(1 PPS flash).

ASC/3 Programming Manual 9-15

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Preempt/TSP/SCP
Preempt Plans 1-10, MM-4-1

MM-4-1
Parameter Description Range

PED DARK Pedestrian Indications Dark YES, NO

YES: Turns OFF all pedestrian output indications while the preemptor is
ACTIVE.
NO: Allows pedestrian indications to follow other preemptor
programming.
TC RESRV Track Clearance Re-Service YES, NO
YES: Allows the preemptor to re-service the track clearance phases when
the preemption call goes away and returns before the preemption sequences
terminate. With this option enabled, the PREEMPTION EXTEND
option is disabled.
NO: Disables re-servicing the preemption track clearance phases while in
the preemption sequence.
DWELL FL Dwell Phases Flash During the Dwell Interval OFF,
LDSW,
When the preemptor advances to the dwell interval (dwell phases may or
MON
may not be programmed), the load switch outputs behave as follows:
OFF: Load switch outputs do not flash.
LDSW: Causes the preemption DWELL phases to flash yellow while all
other phases flash red. DWELL FLASH operation is limited to one phase
per ring that are also permissive phases.
Note • This Flash exits to either the Exit Phases or (if no exit phases) to
the Dwell Phases.
MON: On NEMA cabinet, controller forces the controller to drop CVM
and puts the intersection into CABINET FLASH. On 300 Series cabinet,
for this to work, Conflict Monitor needs to have watchdog latching
disabled. In this mode, Watchdog can be stopped to produce cabinet flash.
Upon exiting PMT, the controller will time the POWER-UP RED before
going to the Start-up phases as programmed in MM-2-5.

9-16 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Preempt/TSP/SCP
Preempt Plans 1-10, MM-4-1

MM-4-1
Parameter Description Range

LINK PMT Preemptor to be Linked to this Preemptor 0-9

Select a higher priority (lower numbered) preemptor to be linked to this
preemptor. The linked preemptor will be called when this preemptor
completes the programmed minimum dwell time. The call to the linked
preemptor will be maintained as long as demand for this preemptor is
present. Calls to any lower priority or not valid preemption sequence will be
ignored.
The linking preemptor feature allows multiple track clearances or complex
preemption sequences with one preemptor calling another.
Example: Preemptor 3 is linked to 2, it will go through its TRACK
CLEARANCE interval and start the DWELL interval.
When the MIN DWELL-CYC GRN time is elapsed, a call is then placed
on preemptor 2. This transfers control to preemptor 2. Preemptor 2, in
turn, can then be linked to preemptor 1.
This example creates a possibility of five phase clearance prior to getting to
the preemptor 1 DWELL interval and timing its phases.
IMPORTANT • The MAX PRESENCE time for each preemptor must be
taken into account when this feature is used to insure the
desired operation.
X FLCOLR Dwell Flash Exit Color RED,
Press Toggle, 0/YES, to select RED, YEL or GRN. The controller will exit GRN, YEL
from DWELL phase flash to the selected color indication.
Note • For this option to operate, you must also select either DWELL
PHASES and/or EXIT PHASES. TRACK CLEARANCE vehicle
movements cannot be an EXCLUSIVE PED Phase.
EXIT OPT Refer to EXIT OPT on page 9-26. OFF,
CRD,
XPH,
CYC
X TMG PLN Refer to X TMG PLN on page 9-26. 0-4

ASC/3 Programming Manual 9-17

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Preempt/TSP/SCP
Preempt Plans 1-10, MM-4-1

MM-4-1
Parameter Description Range

RE-SERV Low Priority Preemption Re-service Time 0-255 sec.

Selects the time that a low priority preemptor is inhibited after preemption.
Note • Observe the notes listed below for MM-4-2.
 If both the SOLID and PULSING columns are BYPASSED for an
input, then it is a High Priority input.
 If either or both columns do NOT have a BYPASSED entry, then the
input is Low Priority.
0 (zero): Disables re-service Operation
255: Requires all active phases with calls, when the preemptor exits, to be
serviced before preemption can be serviced.
1 – 254: Specifies the minimum time allowed between low priority PMT
calls.
Note • This feature is disabled if the preemptor is not called by a low
priority input (determined by MM-4-2).
FLT TYPE High Priority Preemptor Fault Type HARD,
SOFT
You can treat the Gate Down Fault and the IEEE 1570 related fault as an
automatically recoverable fault or not.
SOFT: Fault is automatically recoverable when the fault condition ceases
to exist:
 Gate Down Fault – terminates when preemptor is deactivated.
 When IEEE-1570 is enabled – these faults will be detected:
Not receiving HRI RCOS
HRI RCOS SO is off
HRI RCOS RBHA is off
When set to SOFT, the controller will stay in flash for at least 60 seconds
before exit if it is recovered from an IEEE 1570 fault.
HARD: User intervention is required to clear the fault. Controller will stay
in Flash until you press CLEAR or MMU Reset.
This setting is per Preempt for Gate Down fault, but general for all IEEE
1570 related faults.
This setting is only applicable for high priority preempts (for train) in which
both SOLID and PULSING columns in MM-4-2 are set to BYPASSED.

9-18 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Preempt/TSP/SCP
Preempt Plans 1-10, MM-4-1

MM-4-1
Parameter Description Range

FREE DUR Free During Preemption YES, NO

PMT
YES: Enables an independent ring to time nominally during preemption if
the ring has no phases or barriers in common with any phase programmed
in the preemptor.
NO: Forces all phases in the ring to be red unless the phases are
programmed in the preemptor to be active.
Note • The user may only select those rings to go FREE that are NOT part
of the logical controller in preempt. Example: If the unit is
programmed to use 3 rings for one intersection, the user may NOT
select IN PREEMPT for rings 1 and 2, but FREE for ring 3.

Timing Parameters

ENTRANCE Preemption Entrance Minimum Times 0, 0-25.5

Enter the minimum times for the phases that are active when the preemptor sec.
TM

becomes active. or
WALK
WALK: 0-255 sec. 0-255 sec
PED CL PED CL: (PEDESTRIAN CLEARANCE): 0-255 sec.
MN GR MN GR (GREEN): 0-255 sec.

YEL YEL (YELLOW CHANGE): 0.0-25.5 sec.

RED (RED CLEARANCE): 0.0-25.5 sec.
RED
Note • Programming these values to 255 and 25.5 respectively, allows
the phase minimum times to be used. There is no way for the
phase indication time to be larger than their programming when
entering preemption.
IMPORTANT • If these values are set to zero and the GUARANTEED
MINIMUM TIMES are also zero, the indication will
terminate immediately when entering preemption
regardless of the time on the phase. This can result in a
clearance indication being omitted or shorter than the
MMU minimum clearance time resulting in a LATCHED
MMU Minimum Clearance failure.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 9-19

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Preempt/TSP/SCP
Preempt Plans 1-10, MM-4-1

MM-4-1
Parameter Description Range

TRACK Track Clearance Time, Minimum Green 0-255 sec

CLEAR
MIN GR MIN GR: 0-255 sec. TC Green, The preemptor times this setting
regardless of the phase timing. In any case, the indications will not time less
than the GUARANTEED MINIMUM TIMES (MM-2-4).
Note • 0 (zero): Track clearance green time omits the track clearance
interval regardless of programming.
Note • Programming this value to 255 allows the phase minimum times
to be used.
IMPORTANT • If the setting of these clearance values is zero and the
GUARANTEED MINIMUM TIMES are also zero, the
indication will terminate immediately when exiting track
clearance regardless of the time on the phase. This can
result in a clearance indication being omitted or shorter
than the MMU minimum clearance time resulting in a
LATCHED MMU Minimum Clearance failure.
TRACK Track Clearance Time, Preemptor Gate Down Ext Green 0 - 25.5 sec
CLEAR
EXT GR Note • For this feature to operate, GATE DWN EXT GR and GATE DWN
MAX GRN must be programmed.
0.0 (zero) disables the Gate Down option.
0.1 to 25.5 sec.: This timing will extend the TRACK CLEAR green time
after the GATE DOWN input is received.
This enables any cars that have just crossed the tracks to get through the
intersection on a Green light.
IMPORTANT • If the gate down maximum green timer times out, the
preemptor will force the intersection into flash!
Note • This timing only takes effect after the TRACK CLEAR Minimum
Green time is complete and the GATE DOWN input has been
received. If the GATE DOWN signal never happens, then the
Extend Green Time will never time and eventually the controller
will go into GATE DOWN FAULT FLASH.
TRACK Track Clearance Time, Maximum Track Clear Green 0 - 255 sec
CLEAR
MX GR Note • GATE DWN EXT GR and GATE DWN MAX GRN must be
programmed for this feature to operate.
0 (zero) disables the Gate Down option.
1 - 255 sec.: The maximum time that Track Clear Green may be serviced
when being extended by the Gate Down feature.
IMPORTANT • If the gate down maximum green timer times out, the
preemptor will force the intersection into flash!

9-20 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Preempt/TSP/SCP
Preempt Plans 1-10, MM-4-1

MM-4-1
Parameter Description Range

TRACK Track Clearance Time, Yellow or Red 0.0 - 25.5

YEL/ RED: 0.0 - 25.5 sec TC Yellow or Red also times the programmed sec.
CLEAR
YEL
value unless a value of 25.5 is used. In that case, the controller uses the
phase’s programmed time (MM-2-1). In any case, the indications will not
TRACK time less than the GUARANTEED MINIMUM TIMES (MM-2-4).
CLEAR
RED Note • Programming these values to 25.5 allows the phase minimum
times to be used.
IMPORTANT • If the setting of these clearance values is zero and the
GUARANTEED MINIMUM TIMES is also zero, the indication
will terminate immediately when exiting track clearance
regardless of the time on the phase. This can result in a
clearance indication being omitted or shorter than the
MMU minimum clearance time resulting in a LATCHED
MMU Minimum Clearance failure.
MIN DL Preemptor Minimum Dwell Time 0 - 255 sec
(time)
0 – 255: The minimum time (in seconds) for the DWELL and CYCLING
Phases. After this time the preemptor waits for the duration time to be
complete and the preemption input to go FALSE before exiting.
PMT EXT Preemption Input Extension time. 0.0 - 25.5
sec.
Preemptor remains in dwell interval for EXTEND INPUT time when
preempt call is removed. If preempt call is reapplied during this time, the
preemptor reverts to start of dwell interval. Zero entry causes no input
extension time and dwell interval ends when the preempt call is removed.
MX TM Preemptor Maximum Presence Interval 0 - 65535
The maximum time that a preemption call can be active and be recognized sec.
by the controller. When it has failed, the input must return to inactive state
to be recognized again. Zero entry disables the function for the associated
preempt run.
Note • This feature is disabled if the preemptor is not called by a low
priority input (determined by MM-4-2).

ASC/3 Programming Manual 9-21

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Preempt/TSP/SCP
Preempt Plans 1-10, MM-4-1

MM-4-1
Parameter Description Range

YEL/RED Exit Yellow Change and Red Clearance times when Exiting 0.0 - 25.5
(times) Preemption sec.
Depends on exit phase and automatic flash priority programming.
0.0 – 25.5: The preemptor times (in seconds) the smaller of these settings
or the phase programmed times (MM-2-1). In any case, the indications will
not time less than the GUARANTEED MINIMUM TIMES (MM-2-4).
IMPORTANT • If the setting of these values is zero and the GUARANTEED
MINIMUM TIMES is also zero, the indication will terminate
immediately when exiting preemption regardless of the
time on the phase. This can result in a clearance
indication being omitted or shorter than the MMU
minimum clearance time resulting in a LATCHED MMU
Minimum Clearance failure.

Preemptor Active Output Statuses

PMT ACTIVE Preemption Active Output ON, enable

OUT F1, F2,
Toggle to enable/disable the preemptor status output while the preempt
F5 = flash
Input is active.
at 1, 2.5, or
ON: Enable solid. 5 pps
F1: Enable flash at 1pps. OFF,
F2: Enable flash at 2.5pps. disable

F5: Enable flash at 5pps.

OFF: Disable.
Depending on the PMT ACT DWELL programming, it may be output only
during the dwell interval.
PMT ACT Preemption Active Output Only In Dwell. YES,
DWELL enable
Toggle to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the Preemptor Status output
only during the DWELL/CYCLIC interval. NO,
Note • This is ON only during the green dwell interval; it is not ON during disable
the dwell clearance interval.
When disabled, the Preemptor Status is output as long as the preemptor is
active.

9-22 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Preempt/TSP/SCP
Preempt Plans 1-10, MM-4-1

MM-4-1
Parameter Description Range

OTHER – Other Priority Preemptor Active Output(s) ON =

Toggle to enable/disable the preemptor status outputs of the other priority enable
PRI PMT

preemptors:
F1, F2, F5
ON: Enable solid. = flash at
F1: Enable flash at 1pps. 1, 2.5, or
5pps
F2: Enable flash at 2.5pps.
F5: Enable flash at 5pps. OFF =
OFF: Disable disable
Note • The status output will be OFF if the preemptor is not enabled.
NON-PRI Other (non-active) Non-Priority Preemptor Active Output(s) ON =
PMT enable
Toggle to enable/disable the preemptor status outputs of the other non-
priority preemptors:
ON: Enable solid. F1, F2, F5
= flash at
F1: Enable flash at 1pps.
1, 2.5, or
F2: Enable flash at 2.5pps. 5pps
F5: Enable flash at 5pps.
OFF: Disable. OFF =
Note • The status output will be OFF if the preemptor is not enabled. disable

INH EXT Inhibit Extension Timer 0-25.5

This parameter improves the operation of MX TM (Maximum Preemption seconds
TIME

Call Time), which is also in this MM-4-1 screen. You can program the
Inhibit Extension Timer for each of the 10 Preempt Runs.
This feature keeps the MX TM timing during brief interruptions of
reception of the Preempt signal emitted by an emergency vehicle. For
example, a high profile truck could drive by and briefly block (inhibit, INH)
the signal and give a false indication that the emergency vehicle has stopped
generating the signal. With this parameter, the MX TM will continue timing
(and not reset) if the Preempt signal is again received before this INH EXT
TIME times out.
0-25.5: Enter the time (seconds) to let the Maximum Preemption Call Time
(MX TM) continue to time during the interruption of the receipt of a
Preempt emergency signal.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 9-23

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Preempt/TSP/SCP
Preempt Plans 1-10, MM-4-1

MM-4-1
Parameter Description Range

Preemptor Exit Phases

Note • With respect to the preemptor exit phase parameters that follow,
if you enable multiple exit strategies, they are processed in the order listed
below. If a higher priority strategy is not satisfied, then the next highest will
be evaluated.
For example, if both Ped Priority Return (3rd in the list) and Priority Return
(4th in the list) are enabled but no Ped Priority Exit Phase is found (Preempt
did not interrupt a ped movement), then the preempt exit logic will check
if any phases met the criteria for a Priority Return Exit Phase.
1. Exit from CVM preempt flash state (preempt exits to
programmed start-up phases)
2. Exit to pending preempt
3. Ped priority return (PED PR RETURN)
4. Veh priority return (PRIORITY RETURN)
5. Queue delay recovery (QUEUE DELAY)
6. The selection for EXIT OPT in this Preempt Plan:
exit to coordination (CRD), exit to phase once (XPH)
or exit one free cycle (CYC).
7. Programmed exit phases
8. Currently GREEN phases
9. The next phase in the sequence rotation with a demand

PED PR Pedestrian Priority Return Exit Option OFF, ON,

Toggle to enable/disable the preemptor to check if the Walk or Ped Clear TOD
RETURN

timing has been interrupted by a preempt:

OFF: Disabled
ON: Enabled ALWAYS
TOD: Enabled only by Time-of-Day (TOD)
When this is enabled, the preempter will determine if WALK or PED
CLEAR timing has been shortened by the preempter as it attempts to start.
If so, then those interrupted PEDs will be selected as PED PRIORITY
RETURN Exit phases.

9-24 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Preempt/TSP/SCP
Preempt Plans 1-10, MM-4-1

MM-4-1
Parameter Description Range

Preemptor Exit Phases, continued

PRIORITY Vehicle Priority Return Exit Option OFF, ON,

Note • Interrupted Phases = phases timing when the preemptor tries to TOD
RETURN
start.
Toggle to enable/disable the preemptor to determine if an Interrupted
Phase will be selected as an exit phase:
OFF: Disabled
ON: Enabled ALWAYS
TOD: Enabled only by Time-of-Day (TOD)
When this is enabled, the preemptor:
1 Calculates the % Green timed of the Interrupted Phases.

2 Compares the % Green timed with the % value you entered in

PR RTN% for the Interrupted Phases.
3 If the % Green is less than the % value you entered in PR RTN% for a
phase, then selects that Interrupted Phase as a Veh Priority Return Exit
phase.
Note • For details about PR RTN%, refer to PR RTN% on page 9-27.
QUEUE Queue Delay Recovery Option OFF, ON,
DELAY TOD
Toggle to:
OFF: Disabled
ON: Enabled ALWAYS
TOD: Enabled only by Time-of-Day (TOD)
When this is enabled, the preemptor:
1 Checks phase wait time since last demand (WT).

2 Checks the number of cars waiting for service (CW).

3 Selects the phases with the greatest WT x CW values as possible Exit
Phases, one phase per ring. If the weighted delays for two phases are
equal, the next in the sequence is served first.
Example: Phase A wait = 50 secs with 10 cars in line; phase B wait = 80
secs with 7 cars in line. 80 x 7 (560) > 50 x 10 (500) so Phase B is selected.
Note • Also, to include a phase in the selection process, you must set
PMT QUEUE DELAY to YES in MM-6-2.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 9-25

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Preempt/TSP/SCP
Preempt Plans 1-10, MM-4-1

MM-4-1
Parameter Description Range

Preemptor Exit Phases, continued

EXIT OPT Preemption Exit Options for Timing Plan OFF,

This parameter Note • In the descriptions below, “Timing Plan” refers to the Timing Plan CRD,
is several lines set in X TMG PLN (the prompt that follows EXIT OPT). For XPH and XPH,
higher in CYC to operate, you must set a Timing Plan (1, 2, 3 or 4). CRD, CYC
MM-4-1 (refer however, operates with or without a Timing Plan.
to Line 22, Toggle to select the next phase after exit from a preemption:
page 9-4) but is
included here OFF: Disable
because it sets
a preemptor
CRD: The preemptor exits directly into the coordination sequence and
exit phase. does not require a pickup cycle when the coordinator is active.
XPH: The preemptor exits directly to the exit phase with a Timing Plan.
This preempt exit Timing Plan is used only for the timing of the exit phases.
CYC: The preemptor exits to Free for one cycle by a Timing Plan. Then the
controller will go back to running Coordination.
X TMG PLN Preemption Exit Timing Plan 0-4
This parameter Select the controller timing plan (MM-2-1) that will be in effect when
is several lines exiting preemption.
higher in
MM-4-1 (refer 1-4: Forces the controller to use selected timing plan for the first controller
to Line 23, cycle following preemption. That controller cycle will be complete when all
page 9-4) but is phases have been served that had demand when exiting preemption.
included here
because it sets 0 (zero): Lets you select the timing plan by normal controller operation.
the timing plan
for a preemptor Note • If the preemptor exits directly to coordination (Preemption to
exit phase.
Coordination), the timing plan selected by the preemptor will be
in effect as coordination is running until all phases with demand
at preempt exit have been serviced.

9-26 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Preempt/TSP/SCP
Preempt Plans 1-10, MM-4-1

MM-4-1
Parameter Description Range

Preemptor Exit Phases, continued

PR RTN% Vehicle Priority Return Green Percent Values 0 - 100

Note • Interrupted Phases = phases timing when the preemptor tries to
start.
Enter the minimum percent of green that is necessary to time in an
Interrupted Phase:
0: Disables
1 - 100: For an Interrupted Phase, minumum % of green to time
When you enter a % value (1-100), the preemptor:
1 Calculates the % Green timed of the Interrupted Phase.

2 Compares the % Green timed with the % value you entered for this
parameter for that phase.
3 If the % Green is less than the % value you entered for this phase, then
selects that Interrupted Phase as a Veh Priority Return Exit phase.

Preemptor Entry Timing

COND DELAY Conditional Delay Entrance Option OFF, ON,

Toggle to enable/disable the conditional delay to determine whether or not TOD
to apply omits to movements, as explained below:
OFF: Disabled
ON: Enabled ALWAYS
TOD: Enabled only by Time-of-Day (TOD)
When this is enabled, and a preempt is activated, the preemptor compares
its delay time to the minimum time required to service phase and pedestrian
movements. If the amount of time left in the delay timer is less than the
amount required to service a phase or ped, then the preemptor will apply
omits to those movements.
When all phases have been omitted due to lack of time, the preemptor will
direct the controller to the preempt Entry Phases so it can start the preempt
as soon as the Delay Timer reaches 0 (zero).

ASC/3 Programming Manual 9-27

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Preempt/TSP/SCP
Preempt Filtering & TSP/SCP Mapping, MM-4-2

Preempt Filtering & TSP/SCP Mapping, MM-4-2 9

ENABLE PREEMPT FILTERING & TSP/SCP

FILTERED SOLID PULSING
INPUT 1 ...BYPASSED.. ...BYPASSED..
2 ...BYPASSED.. ...BYPASSED..
3 ..PREEMPT 3. ..PREEMPT 7.
4 ..PREEMPT 4. ..PREEMPT 8.
5 ..PREEMPT 5. ..PREEMPT 9.
6 ..PREEMPT 6. ..PREEMPT 10.
7 ...BYPASSED.. ...BYPASSED..
8 ...BYPASSED.. ...BYPASSED..
9 ...BYPASSED.. ...BYPASSED..
10 ...BYPASSED.. ...BYPASSED..

To select active low priority preemptors that will respond to a delayed pulsing
or solid input:
 Use Toggle, 0/YES. The delay is caused by the input filtering required to discriminate
between a solid and a 6.25 Hz input on the same input.
 Use Solid typically for emergency vehicle preemptors (EVP) and Pulsing for bus
preemptors in Transit Signal Priority (TSP).

MM-4-2
Parameter Description Range

FILTERED Physical Preemptor 1-10 inputs

INPUT

SOLID Solid Filtered Input BYPASSED,

PREEMPT 1-10,
(ECPI feature for single-pulse and SOLID, signals)
TSP/SCP IN
Range: 1-6, TSP/SCP
BYPASSED, PREEMPT 1-10 OUT 1-6

TSP/SCP IN 1-6, TSP/SCP OUT 1-6

Toggle to select type:
BYPASSED: Filtering is bypassed for this input and it connects
directly to the preemptor of the same number. Use this for the
highest priority preempt, such as a train. For the bypass option to
work, both columns (SOLID and PULSING) must be set with
BYPASSED option.
Note • For High Priority Preempt, the RE-SERV time (Re-service
Time) and the MX TM (Maximum Preempt Call Time) are
ignored for a High Priority Preempt (these times are set in
MM-4-1).

9-28 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Preempt/TSP/SCP
Preempt Filtering & TSP/SCP Mapping, MM-4-2

MM-4-2
Parameter Description Range

SOLID Solid Filtered Input BYPASSED,

PREEMPT 1-10: Filters a SOLID input and maps the output to PREEMPT 1-10,
(cont.)

the preempt number selected. These are often used for Emergency TSP/SCP IN
Vehicle Preempts. 1-6, TSP/SCP
OUT 1-6
Note • For Low Priority Preempt: The priority of a preempt is
determined in MM-4-2. For an input in MM-4-2, if either or
both of the columns (SOLID and PULSING) do NOT have a
BYPASSED entry, then the input is Low Priority. Low
Priority Preempts honor both RE-SERV (Re-service Time)
and the MX TM (Maximum Preempt Call Time). Be
cautioned that a RE-SERV time of ZERO disables the Re-
service Interval. Refer to Low Priority Preemption
Re-service Time on page 9-18, a parameter in MM-4-1, for
details.
Note • For TSP/SCP: In MM-4-3, for each TSP/SCP PLAN with
SOLID signals, set DET SIGNAL = SOLID. If DET SIGNAL =
PULSING, then these signals would not be connected.
TSP/SCP IN 1-6: Maps a SOLID TSP/SCP Check-In signal.
TSP/SCP OUT 1-6: Maps a SOLID TSP/SCP Check-Out signal.
IMPORTANT • In MM-4-3, for each TSP/SCP PLAN with
SOLID signals, set SIGNAL TYPE = S.
If SIGNAL TYPE = P, then these signals would
not be connected.
PULSING Pulsing Filtered Input BYPASSED,
PREEMPT 1-10,
(ECPI & NTCIP feature for PULSING signals)
TSP/SCP 1-6
Range: BYPASSED, PREEMPT 1-10, TSP/SCP 1-6
Toggle to select type:
BYPASSED: Filtering is bypassed for this input and it connects
directly to the preemptor of the same number. Use this for the
highest priority preempt, such as a train.
PREEMPT 1-10: Filters a PULSING input and maps the output
to the preempt number selected.
TSP/SCP 1-6: Maps a PULSING TSP/SCP Signal.
IMPORTANT • In MM-4-3, for each TSP/SCP PLAN with
PULSING signals, set SIGNAL TYPE = P.
If SIGNAL TYPE = S, then these signals would
not be connected.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 9-29

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Preempt/TSP/SCP
TSP/SCP Plans 1-6, MM-4-3

TSP/SCP Plans 1-6, MM-4-31 9

TSP/SCP PLAN
TSP/SCP PLAN 1 2 3 4 5 6
TSP/SCP ENA T1 T2 . . . .
SIGNAL TYPE P P P P P P
DET LOCK . . . . . .
DELAY TIME XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX
MAX PRESENCE 0 0 0 0 0 0
PMT ENA RESERVICE X X X X X X
NO DELAY IN TSP X X X X X X
ACT SF INHIBIT 0 0 0 0 0 0
RESERVICE CYCLS 0 0 0 0 0 0
BUS HEADING NB SB EB WB
TSP OR SCP.... TSP FREE DEFAULT PLAN.120
HEADWAY ALLOWANCE 100%

----- TSP/SCP PHASE -----

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
TSP/SCP1 . T . P . T . P . . . . . . . .
TSP/SCP2 . . V T . . V T . . . . . . . .
TSP/SCP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TSP/SCP4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TSP/SCP5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TSP/SCP6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TSP/SCP Split Pattern, MM-4-4 9

Note • In MM-4-4, if the mode is TSP, the MAX EXTN (maximum extension) parameter
is not shown. This is only shown if you select the SCP mode.

When in a hyperlink field:

To follow the hyperlink:

For ASC/3, press SPEC FUNC, then

NEXT DATA.

For 2070, press B.

To go back:

For ASC/3, press SUB MENU.

For 2070, press ESC.

For instructions to enter data in MM-4-3 and MM-4-4, refer to the Transit Signal Priority (TSP)
1.
User Guide for Advanced System Controllers ASC/3, P/N 100-0903-003.

9-30 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 10
Time Base
Time Base Submenu, MM-5 10

Programming Summary 10

TIME BASE SUBMENU

1. CLOCK/CALENDAR DATA
2. ACTION PLAN
3. DAY PLAN/EVENT
4. SCHEDULE NUMBER
5. EXCEPTION DAYS

A brief description follows of the programming functions that can be viewed and/or
changed at each of the menu options.

MM-5 Menu Option Programming Summary

1. CLOCK/CALENDAR DATA  View current day of week, time, day and date.
 Enter current date and time.
 Enter manual Action Plan to override other action
plans.
 Enter synchronization reference time.
 Select the synchronization reference type.
 Enable/Disable Daylight Savings time correction.
 Select the time that the “Time Reset” input will set the
clock to.
 Enter the number of hours that local standard time is
behind GMT.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 10-1

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Time Base
Programming Summary

MM-5 Menu Option Programming Summary

2. ACTION PLAN You can define up to 100 Action Plans.

Assign:
 Coordination pattern number
 Vehicle detector plan number
 Controller sequence
 Timing plan
 Vehicle detector diagnostic plan
 Pedestrian detector diagnostic plan
Enable:
 Automatic flash
 System override
 Detector log
 Dimming
 Special functions
 Auxiliary functions
 Phase functions:
• Pedestrian recall
• Walk 2 enable
• Vehicle extension 2 enable
• Vehicle recall
• Vehicle max recall
• Max 2 enable
• Max 3 enable
• Conditional service inhibit
• Phase omit
3. DAY PLAN/EVENT You can select the start time for one of 100 action plans
for one of 50 day plans that comprise each of 16 day
plans.

10-2 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Time Base
Clock/Calendar Data, MM-5-1

MM-5 Menu Option Programming Summary

4. SCHEDULE NUMBER You can set up Day Plan schedules.

Set up a schedule of 200 entries of:
 One of 16 day plans
 Month(s) in effect
 Day(s) of month(s) in effect
 Day(s) or the week in effect
5. EXCEPTION DAYS  Select unique day plan for up to 36 exception days.
 Select fixed or floating holidays.
 Identify holidays by date, day of week or week of
month.

Clock/Calendar Data, MM-5-1 10

CLOCK/CALENDAR DATA
03/05/2012 MON 07:31:23
ENA ACTION PLAN. 0
SYNC REF TIME.00:00 SYNC REF.. REF TIME
TIME FROM GMT...-04 DAY LIGHT SAVE.USDLS
TIME RESET INPUT SET TIME...... 03:30:00

To set the date/time:

 Enter or change date and time.

 Correct the date and time as necessary for accurate controller operation in non-
interconnected mode.
 At any time when the cursor is at a time or date field, to update the time or date to
whatever is shown on the screen in the date and time fields, press ENTER.

To enable an action plan:

1 Manually select an action plan.

2 Go to ACTION PLAN screen (MM-5-4) and create desired program to be in effect

when the manual program is selected.
The manually-selected action plans go into effect on the minute’s boundaries.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 10-3

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Time Base
Clock/Calendar Data, MM-5-1

MM-5-1
Parameter Description Range

XX/XX/XXXX Date Set 01/01/1970 –

Use the numeric keys (0-9) to enter the current date in MM/DD/YY 12/31/2105
format.
Note • The display of the day of the week (DOW) is automatically
generated from this entry.
XX:XX:XX Time Set 00:00:00 –
Use the numeric keys (0-9) to enter the current time of day (TOD) in 23:59:59
the 24-hour format (00:00:00 to 23:59:59).
This time is used for all time-based functions and logging.
ENA ACTION Enable Action Plan 0-100
PLAN
Use the numeric keys (0-9) to select an Action Plan (ref. MM-5-4)
that specifies a coordination pattern. The Action Plan remains in
effect until another Action Plan is selected or until zero is entered.
0 (zero): Allows the automatic selection of Time Base Action Plans by
time of day.
1-100: Manually selects that Action Plan to be in effect. The selected
Action Plan remains in effect until another is selected.
Note • Manual selection overrides any other source. Manual
Pattern (MM-3-1) overrides Manual Action plan.
SYNC REF TIME Synchronization Reference Time 00:00 – 23:59
Use the numeric keys (0-9) to enter the time (in 24-hour format) that
is a user-specified time marking the beginning of all cycles. Reference
time is used for sync point calculation for a cycle called by the
coordination pattern. Sync point is computed using present time, sync
reference time, and current cycle length.
This sync reference time is used when:
 Reference Time is selected as Synchronization Reference.
 Time Base is the interconnect source, either by default or by
selection.
Note • A sync pulse is generated when the present time minus this
time is an even multiple of the coordinator cycle length.

10-4 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Time Base
Clock/Calendar Data, MM-5-1

MM-5-1
Parameter Description Range

SYNC REF Synchronization Reference Last Event,

Last Sync,
Use Toggle, 0/YES, to select the type of reference (LAST EVENT,
Reference
LAST SYNC, or REFERENCE TIME) to be used as the reference
Time
point for the sync generation.
REFERENCE TIME: Sync point is the sync reference time
entered by user.
LAST EVENT: Sync point is referenced to the time of the action
plan that initiated the current cycle.
LAST SYNC: Sync point is referenced to the point in time that
represents the end of the last complete cycle of the cycle length in
effect prior to selecting the current cycle length.
Note • A sync pulse is generated when the present time minus the
SYNCHRONIZATION REFERENCE time is an even multiple of
the coordinator cycle length.
TIME FROM GMT Standard Local Time from GMT -12 to +12
Toggle to specify the number of hours (–12 to +12) that the local
standard (non daylight savings time) is ahead (+) or behind (-)
Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
The Eastern hemisphere is ahead (+) and the Western hemisphere is
behind (-).
Note • For Non Day Time Saving, observe the differences in time
zones listed below.
USA Eastern Time Zone is GMT -5 hours.
USA Central Time Zone is GMT -6 hours.
USA Mountain Time Zone is GMT -7 hours.
USA Pacific Time Zone is GMT -8 hours.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 10-5

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Time Base
Creating an Action Plan, MM-5-2

MM-5-1
Parameter Description Range

DAY LIGHT Enable Daylight Savings Time Adjustment USDLS

SAVE enable
Toggle to enable (USDLS) or disable (NO) United States Daylight
Savings time adjustment. NO disable
Enables daylight savings to be enabled from the second Sunday of
March to the first Sunday of November.
TIME RESET Use the numeric (0-9) keys to enter a time of day value (00:00:00 to 00:00:00 to
INPUT 23:59:59). 23:59:59
The controller internal time will be set to this value when the TIME
RESET input is TRUE. The internal time starts when the TIME
RESET input is removed.

Creating an Action Plan, MM-5-2 10

Use this screen (with vertical scrolling) to select an Action plan for viewing or editing and
provide data entry fields to program the plan for appropriate actions.
Action plans are created to select the coordination pattern, and to enable various functions
by time of day. Up to 100 action plans are available. Daily programs may contain any
number of action plan steps up to available limit.

When in a hyperlink field:

To follow the hyperlink:

For ASC/3, press SPEC FUNC, then

NEXT DATA.

For 2070, press B.

To go back:

For ASC/3, press SUB MENU.

For 2070, press ESC.

10-6 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Time Base
Creating an Action Plan, MM-5-2

Action Plan Functions

Assign:
 Coordination pattern number
 Vehicle detector plan number
 Controller sequence
 Timing plan
 Vehicle detector diagnostic plan
 Pedestrian detector diagnostic plan
Enable:
 Automatic flash
 System override
 Detector log
 Dimming
 Special function outputs
 Auxiliary function outputs
 By-Phase functions:
• Pedestrian recall
• Walk 2 enable
• Vehicle extension 2 enable
• Vehicle recall
• Vehicle max recall
• Max 2 enable
• Max 3 enable
• Conditional service inhibit
• Phase omit
 Logic Processor (LP) Statements (1-100)

ASC/3 Programming Manual 10-7

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Time Base
Creating an Action Plan, MM-5-2

MM-5-2
Parameter Description Range

ACTION PLAN Action Plan Number 1-100

selects
Use the numeric (0-9) keys to specify the Action Plan (1-100) to be
plan
viewed or edited.
PATTERN Coordination Pattern Selected by the Action Plan 0, 1-120,
Use the numeric (0-9) keys to enter the Coordination Pattern number 254, 255
used by this Action Plan.
0 (zero): Indicates that no pattern is being selected. The Time Base
relinquishes control and allows lower priority control (i.e., hardware
interconnect if available).
1-120: Selects the coordination pattern for this Action Plan.
254: Selects FREE operation. Sequence defaults to 1 if not specified.
255: Selects automatic FLASH operation. Same as Enabling FLASH
below. AUTOMATIC FLASH pattern is treated in the same priority
as any other pattern.
Note • Selecting a pattern that does not exist or does not meet the
timing parameters will set the controller to FREE.
SYS OVERRIDE System Override YES
enable
Toggle to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the Time Base Coordination
Pattern to override system commands. NO
YES: Coordination Pattern selected by the Action Plan overrides the disable
pattern selected by current telemetry or hardwired system
commands.
NO: Coordination Pattern selected by the Day Plan Event does not
override the pattern selected by telemetry or hardwired system
commands.

10-8 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Time Base
Creating an Action Plan, MM-5-2

MM-5-2
Parameter Description Range

TIMING PLAN Timing Plan 0-4

Use the numeric (0-9) keys to select the Timing Plan (1-4) when a
higher priority routine has not selected one.
0 (zero): Allows the Timing Plan in effect to be used.
1-4: Selects the timing plan.
Note • The priorities (from highest to lowest) are listed below.
1 Manual

2 Preemptor
3 System
4 Coordinator
5 Hardware
6 Time Base
If the PATTERN field on MM-5-2 (ACTION PLAN) is selected,
and if the selected PATTERN (MM-3-2) has a timing plan
programmed, then this field will be read-only. The Timing Plan in
MM-3-2 overrides this field.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 10-9

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Time Base
Creating an Action Plan, MM-5-2

MM-5-2
Parameter Description Range

SEQUENCE Controller Sequence 0-20

Selects the controller sequence to operate.
Selects the controller sequence, for this Action Plan, when a higher
priority routine has not made a selection. Selection priorities, from
highest to lowest are: Manual, System, Coordinator, Hardware and
Time Base.
0 (zero): Sequence selection is by other means (hardware inputs or
Time Base). Defaults to 1 if no sequence number is specified
anywhere else.
1-16: Selects one of 16 possible configurations of sequence data
(refer to NTCIP 1202, 2.8.3.3).
For sequences 17 thru 20, refer to Appendix Q, Diamond Intersection
Application Notes. The pre-programmed sequences for Diamond
Intersections are for user-specific requirements that exceed NEMA
or NTCIP specifications.
17-20: Selects one of 4 pre-programmed controllers (Econolite
feature), each with one pre-programmed sequence.
 17 = Diamond 4-Phase controller
 18 = Diamond 3-Phase controller
 19 = Diamond Separate Intersection controller
 20 = Diamond NEMA controller (8 phase Standard Quad)
If the PATTERN field on MM-5-2 (ACTION PLAN) is selected,
and if the selected PATTERN (MM-3-2) has the sequence field
programmed, then this field will be read-only. The sequence field in
MM-3-2 overrides this field.
VEH DETECTOR Vehicle Detector Recall Plan 0-4
PLAN
Use the numeric (0-9) keys to enter the Vehicle Detector Recall Plan
number (0-4) to be applied by this Action Plan.
0 (zero): Allows the Day Plan Event to use the Vehicle Detector Plan
already in effect.
1-4: Selects the vehicle detector plan when a higher priority routine
has not selected one.
Note • The priorities (from highest to lowest) are: Manual,
Preemptor, System, Coordinator, Hardware, and Time
Base.

10-10 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Time Base
Creating an Action Plan, MM-5-2

MM-5-2
Parameter Description Range

DET LOG Internal Detector Log Enable NONE, 5,

15, 30, 60
Toggle to select NONE, 5, 15, 30, or 60 minutes detector logging.
Note • This selection is only in effect when the ECPI LOG Period in
Log-Speed Detector Setup (MM-6-4) is set to TBAP.
FLASH Automatic Flash YES
enable NO
Toggle to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the request for Automatic
disable
Flash by this Action Plan. This is the same as setting coord pattern
to 255 above.
Note • This request is “OR’ed” with all other requests for
automatic flash.
RED REST Red Rest (Call Away) YES
enable
Toggle, 0/YES, enable (YES) or disable (NO) the request for Red
Rest (Call Away) operation by this Action Plan. NO
Note • This request is “OR’ed” with all other requests for Red Rest. disable
VEH DET DIAG PLN Vehicle Detector Diagnostic Plan 0 no
diagnostic
Use the numeric (0-9) keys to select the vehicle detector diagnostic
selected
plan by this Action Plan if one has not been selected.
1-4 selects
0 (zero): No vehicle detector diagnostic is selected.
by priority.
1-4: Selects the vehicle detector diagnostic plan if a higher priority
routine has not already selected one.
Note • The priorities (from highest to lowest) are: Manual,
Hardware, and Time Base.

PED DET DIAG PLN Pedestrian Detector Diagnostic Plan 0-4

Selects the Pedestrian Detector Diagnostic Plan if one has not been
selected. Use the numeric (0-9) keys to enter the number (0-4) of the
diagnostic plan.
0 (zero): No pedestrian detector diagnostic is selected.
1-4: Selects the pedestrian detector diagnostic plan when a higher
priority routine has not been selected one.
Note • The priorities (from highest to lowest) are: Manual,
Hardware, and Time Base.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 10-11

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Time Base
Creating an Action Plan, MM-5-2

MM-5-2
Parameter Description Range

DIMMING ENABLE Dimming Enable YES/NO

Toggle to enable (YES) or disable (NO) dimming by this Action
Plan.
Dimming of the signals also requires:
 Dimming input is TRUE.
 Dimming polarity is programmed (MM-1-3).
PED RCL Pedestrian Recall X enable
Toggle to enable (X) or disable (“.”) application of Pedestrian Recall “.” disable
by this Action Plan.
X: Enables, but is “OR’ed” with other Pedestrian Recall
programming and inputs.
“.”: Disables pedestrian recall by this Action Plan.
WALK 2 Walk 2 X enables
Toggle to enable (X) or disable (“.”) application of Walk 2 by this “.”
Action Plan. disables
X: Enables, but is “OR’ed” with other Walk 2 selections and inputs.
“.”: Disables Walk 2 by this Action Plan.
VEX 2 Vehicle Extension 2 X enables
Toggle to enable (X) or disable (“.”) application of Vehicle Extension “.”
2 by this Action Plan. disables
X: Enables, but is “OR’ed” with other Vehicle Extension 2 selections
and inputs.
“.”: Disables Vehicle Extension 2 by this Action Plan.
VEH RCL Vehicle Recall X enables
Toggle to enable (X) or disable (“.”) application of Vehicle Recall by “.”
this Action Plan. disables
X: Enables, but is “OR’ed” with other Vehicle Recall selections and
inputs.
“.”: Disables Vehicle Recall by this Action Plan.

10-12 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Time Base
Creating an Action Plan, MM-5-2

MM-5-2
Parameter Description Range

MAX RCL Maximum Recall X enables

Toggle to enable (X) or disable (“.”) application of Max Recall by this “.”
Action Plan. disables
X: Enables, but is “OR’ed” with other Max Recall selections and
inputs.
“.”: Disables Max Recall by this Action Plan.
MAX 2 Max 2 X enables
Toggle to enable (X) or disable (“.”) application of Max 2 by this “.”
Action Plan. disables
X: Enables, but is “OR’ed” with other Max selections and inputs.
“.”: Disables Max 2 by this Action Plan.
Note • Overrides are as listed below:
MAX 2 selection overrides MAX 1.
MAX 3 selection overrides MAX 1 & 2.
MAX 3 Max 3 X enables
Toggle to enable (X) or disable (“.”) application of Max 3 by this “.”
Action Plan. disables
X: Enables, but is “OR’ed” with other Max selections and inputs.
“.”: Disables Max 2 by this Action Plan.
Note • MAX 3 selection overrides MAX 1 or 2.
CS INH Conditional Service Inhibit X enables
Toggle to enable (X) or disable (“.”) application of Conditional “.”
Inhibit by this Action Plan. disables
X: Enables, but is “OR’ed” with other Conditional Service Inhibit
selections and inputs.
“.”: Disables Conditional Inhibiting by this Action Plan.
OMIT Phase Omit X enables
Toggle to enable (X) or disable (“.”) application of Phase Omit by “.”
this Action Plan. disables
X: Enables, but is “OR’ed” with other Phase Omit selections and
inputs.
“.”: Disables Phase Omit by this Action Plan.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 10-13

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Time Base
Creating a Day Plan, MM-5-3

MM-5-2
Parameter Description Range

SPC FCT(1-8) Special Function 1-8 X enables

Toggle to enable (X) or disable (“.”) Time Base Special Function 1-8 “.”
outputs by this Action Plan. disables
AUX FCT(1-3) Auxiliary Function 1-3 X enables
Toggle to enable (X) or disable (“.”) Time Base Auxiliary Function 1- “.”
3 outputs by this Action Plan. disables
LP 1-100 Action Plan Logic Processor Statements E enables
Toggle to enable (E), disable (D), or let others (“.”) determine.
E: Allows the logic processor statement to be evaluated unless a D disables
higher priority command is in effect.
D: Disallows the Logic Processor Statement from being evaluated “.” others
unless a higher priority command is in effect.
“.”: Allows the evaluation of a Logic Processor Statement to be
determined by lower priority command.

Creating a Day Plan, MM-5-3 10

DAY PLAN [ 1] DAY PLAN IN EFFECT [ 0] v

EVENT ACTION PLAN START TIME
1 0 00:00
2 0 00:00
3 0 00:00
4 0 00:00
5 0 00:00
6 0 00:00
7 0 00:00
8 0 00:00
9 0 00:00
10 0 00:00
11 0 00:00
12 0 00:00
13 0 00:00
//
50 0 00:00

Use this screen to create up to 16 Day Plan events that select Action Plans during different
times of the day.

10-14 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Time Base
Creating a Day Plan, MM-5-3

To create daily programs in the time base:

1 Enter the desired Day Plan number (1-16) to be in effect for this time of day.

2 Position the cursor in the ACTION PLAN column opposite the EVENT number (1-
50) to be programmed.
3 Enter the Action Plan number (1-100) that is to be in effect.

4 Enter the desired start time (00:00 to 23:59) for this Day Plan Event.

MM-5-3
Parameter Description Range

DAY PLAN Use the numeric keys (0-9) to enter the number (1-16) of the Day Plan 1-16
to be created.
Note • If an invalid number is entered (not within 1-16 range), an
INVALID DATA notice appears when the cursor leaves the
field. Use the UP cursor key to return to the Day Plan field
and enter a valid number.
DAY PLAN IN This is not a data entry field. This field displays a number (0-16) 0-16 display
EFFECT indicating the number of the Day Plan that is currently in effect, if any.
Zero (0) indicates no Day Plan is in effect.
EVENT Day Plan Event 1-50 selects
specified
With the cursor in the ACTION PLAN column, scroll DOWN as
event
needed until the cursor is directly opposite the Day Plan EVENT
number (1-50) to be viewed or edited.
1-50: Selects that Day Plan Event to view or edit. A day event is
activated when:
 The Day Plan is in effect;
 The current time matches with the programmed start time;
or
 The programmed start time is between the day plan previously
selected and the current time.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 10-15

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Time Base
Day Plan Schedule, MM-5-4

MM-5-3
Parameter Description Range

ACTION PLAN Action Plan Number 1-100 selects

Use the numeric (0-9) keys to enter an Action Plan Number (1-100). specified plan
1-100: Assigns the action plan to be commanded when this day plan
event is in effect.
START TIME Day Plan Event Start Time 00:00 to 23:59
Use the numeric (0-9) keys to enter the Start Time (00:00 to 23:59) for
the Day Plan. Once selected, the Day Plan will stay in effect until
another Day Plan Event is selected.
Note • Changing HH:MM will force transaction mode to make sure
the entire time is entered before committing. Accepting
time change on each field may cause an action plan to take
effect unintentionally.

Day Plan Schedule, MM-5-4 10

SCHEDULE NUMBER [ 1]
DAY PLAN NO ..... 0 CLEAR ALL FIELDS.. X
SELECT ALL MONTHS.. . DOW.. . DOM.. .
MONTH J F M A M J J A S O N D
. . . . . . . . . . . .
DAY (DOW): SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT
. . . . . . .
DAY(DOM):1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
. . . . . . . . . . .
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
. . . . . . . . . . .
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
. . . . . . . . .

Use this screen to create up to 200 Day Plan Schedule entries that assign the days and
months that a specified Day Plan can be in effect. Use this screen to:
 Create day plan schedule entries.
 Enter desired daily program number (1-16).
 Enter the month(s) of the year that the day program will be in effect.
 Enter the day(s) of the week that the day program will be in effect.
 Enter the day(s) of the month that the day program will be in effect.

10-16 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Time Base
Day Plan Schedule, MM-5-4

Note • A day plan will only be in effect the months that the day of week (DOW)
corresponds to the day of month (DOM). However, EXCEPTION DAY programming
(MM-5-5) overrides this selection.

Example: Day Plan 15 is to be in effect during summer break from June 15 to

September 3 on Monday through Friday. Program as follows:
Schedule 1: Day plan 15 with the month of June (JUN), days of the week Monday
through Friday (MON – FRI) and days of the month 15 – 30 enabled.
Schedule 2: Day plan 15 with the months of July and August (JUL - AUG), days of the
week Monday through Friday (MON – FRI) and days of the month 1 – 31 enabled.
Schedule 3: Day plan 15 with the month of September (SEP), days of the week Monday
through Friday (MON – FRI) and days of the month 1 – 3 enabled.

MM-5-4
Parameter Description Range

SCHEDULE Time Base Schedule Program Number 0-200

NUMBER
Use the numeric (0-9) keys to enter number of the Time Base
Schedule program to be viewed and/or edited.
0 (zero): Selects the next open Time Base Schedule program.
1-200: Specifies the Time Base Schedule Program Number to be
viewed or edited.
DAY PLAN NO. Use the numeric (0-9) keys to enter the Day Plan Number 0 clears
0 (zero): Clears all programming of this Time Base Schedule Program. schedule
1-16 selects
1-16: Selects the Day Plan to be in effect when this Time Base
Day Plan
Schedule program is in effect.
CLEAR ALL Clear All Fields X, “.”
FIELDS
ECPI Feature
TOGGLE to select (X) or deselect (.) to clear all selections on
schedule.
X: Clears all selections on the schedule when you press ENTER. The
display will return to the default state (.) after selecting.
“.” : Does not clear all selections.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 10-17

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Time Base
Day Plan Schedule, MM-5-4

MM-5-4
Parameter Description Range

SELECT ALL Select All Months X, “.”

MONTHS ECPI Feature
TOGGLE to select (X) or deselect (.) selecting all months on the
schedule.
X: Selects all months of the schedule when you press ENTER.
The display returns to the default state (.) after selecting.
“.” : Does not select all months of the schedule.
MONTH Month(s) This Schedule is in Effect X enables
Use Toggle, 0/YES, to enable (X) or disable (“.”) the months that the “.” disables
Schedule program shall be allowed.
Note • A Time Base Schedule program will be in effect, when it is
allowed under the Month, DOW and DOM programming.
HOLIDAY programming (MM-5-5) overrides this selection.

DAY (DOW) Days of Week (DOW) this Program is in Effect X enables

Use Toggle, 0/YES, to enable (X) or disable (“.”) the day(s) of the “.” disables
week that the Time Base Schedule program shall be allowed.
DAY (DOM) Days of Month (DOM) this Program is in Effect X enables
Use Toggle, 0/YES, to enable (X) or disable (“.”) the date(s) of the “.” disables
month that the Time Base Schedule program shall be allowed.

10-18 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Time Base
Exception Days, MM-5-5

Exception Days, MM-5-5 10

As shown below, scroll through this screen to view or edit the control parameters for up
to 36 Exception Days or any day having special traffic demands.

EXCEPTION DAY PROGRAM

EXCEPTION FLOAT/ MON/ DOW/ WOM/ DAY
DAY FIXED MON DOM YEAR PLAN
1 FIXED 0 0 0 0
2 FIXED 0 0 0 0
3 FIXED 0 0 0 0
4 FIXED 0 0 0 0
5 FIXED 0 0 0 0
6 FIXED 0 0 0 0
7 FIXED 0 0 0 0
8 FIXED 0 0 0 0
9 FIXED 0 0 0 0
10 FIXED 0 0 0 0
11 FIXED 0 0 0 0
12 FIXED 0 0 0 0
13 FIXED 0 0 0 0
//
36 FIXED 0 0 0 0

To program an Exception Day:

1 Create a Day Plan (1-16) to be used on an Exception Day.

2 Move the cursor up or down the Exception Day column or use the numeric (0-9) keys
to select a specific Exception Day number (1-36) to program or edit.
3 In the FLOAT/FIXED column, use Toggle, 0/YES, to select the FLOAT or FIXED
parameter for the Exception Day. For more information, refer to Floating or Fixed
Exception Day on page 10-21.
4 In the MON/MON column, enter the number of the month (0 disables or 1-12) in
which the Exception Day occurs.
• For a Floating Exception Day, enter the DOW (day of week, 1-7, Sunday = 1, or 0
disables) and WOM (week of month, 1-5 or 0 disables) on which the Exception Day
occurs.
• For a Fixed Exception Day, enter the DOM (day of month –1-31 or 0 disables) and
the Year (1970-2105 or 0 for annually) on which the Exception Day occurs. Once
active, the exception day programming will be cleared.
5 Enter the number of the Day Plan (1-16 or 0 disables) to be selected on Exception Day
specified.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 10-19

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Time Base
Exception Days, MM-5-5

Note • Observe the programming notes listed below:

 The Exception Day program is effective only if Time Base is the command
source.
 DOW = 1 = Sunday.
 DOW, DOM, WOM, or Day Plan = 0 disables the Exception Day.
 YEAR = 0 = repeat Exception Day annually.

FLOAT/FIXED Examples
Thanksgiving is a floating Exception Day. It always occurs on the fourth Thursday in
November. It is programmed as follows: FLOAT/FIXED is set to FLOAT, MON/MON
is set to 11 for the month of November, DOW/DOM is set to day of the week 5 for
Thursday, and WOM/YEAR is set to 4 for the fourth week of the month.
Independence Day is a fixed Exception Day. It always occurs on July 4th regardless of
the day of the week. It is programmed as follows: FLOAT/FIXED is set to FIXED,
MON/MON is set to 7 for July, DOW/DOM is set to 4 for the 4th day of the month, and
WOM/YEAR is set to 0 for annually.

MM-5-5
Parameter Description Range

EXCEPTION DAY Move the cursor up and down the Exception Day column to select a 1-36
specific Exception Day (1-36) to view or edit.
Note • Observe the programming notes below:
 Up to 36 different Exception Days programs can be created.
 The Exception Day program is effective only if Time Base is the
command source.
 An Exception Day program overrides the Day Plan program
normally used on that specific day.

10-20 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Time Base
Exception Days, MM-5-5

MM-5-5
Parameter Description Range

FLOAT/FIXED Floating or Fixed Exception Day FLOAT or

FIXED
Use Toggle, 0/YES, to select FIXED or FLOAT.
FLOAT: Occurs on an ordinal numbered (1st, 2nd, etc.) day-of-the-
week (DOW) of a month.
Note • The WOM is counted from the first week of the month
(MON) that contains the DOM. For example, Labor Day for
2006 was September 4. September 4 (1st Monday in
September) is considered in the 1st WOM (even though
there were 2 days of September in the previous week).
FIXED: Occurs on a specific date of the year.
Note • For the date to apply to all years, enter “0” in the
WOM/YEAR field.
Examples:
FLOAT: Thanksgiving is a floating Exception Day. It always
occurs on the 4th Thursday in November. To program
Thanksgiving (for all years):
“FLOAT”, MON/MON = 11, DOW/DOM = 5, and
WOM/YEAR = 4
FIXED: July 4th is a fixed Exception Day. It always occurs on
July 4, regardless of the day of the week. To program for year 2007:
“FIXED”, MON/MON = 7, DOW/DOM = 4, and
WOM/YEAR = 2007
To program for all years:
“FIXED”, MON/MON = 7, DOW/DOM = 4, and
WOM/YEAR = 0
Note • When the current date matches the floating holiday (Month,
DOW and WOM) or fixed holiday (Month, DOM and Year), the
day plan assigned to the Exception Day plan replaces day
plan selected by the Time Base Schedule.
MON/MON Month in which Exception Day occurs 1-12 =
Jan-Dec
1-12: Selects the month in which the Exception Day occurs.
0 disables
0 (zero): Disables the Exception Day.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 10-21

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Time Base
Exception Days, MM-5-5

MM-5-5
Parameter Description Range

DOW/DOM Day of the Week or Day of the Month 1-7 = Sun-Sat

1-7: Selects the day of the week (Sunday – Saturday, respectively) for 1-31 = DOM
a FLOAT Exception Day. 0 disables day
1-31: Selects the day of the month for a FIXED Exception Day.
0 (zero): Disables the Exception Day.
WOM/YEAR Week of the Month or Year 1-5 = WOM
1970-2105 =
1-5: Selects the week of the month for a FLOAT Exception Day.
Year
1970-2105: Selects the year for the FIXED Exception day.
0 (zero)
0 (zero): Repeats the Exception Day year after year. makes annual
Note • Week of Month (WOM) greater than 5 or Years less than
1970 disable the Exception Day.
Note • Observe the programming notes below:
 The WOM is counted from the first week of the month (MON)
that contains the DOM. For example, Labor Day for 2006 was
September 4. September 4 (1st Monday in September) is
considered in the 1st WOM (even though there were 2 days of
September in the previous week).
 When the current date matches the floating holiday (Month, DOW
and WOM) or fixed holiday (Month, DOM and Year), the day plan
assigned to the Exception Day plan replaces day plan selected by
the Time Base Schedule.
DAY PLAN Exception Day Plan 1-16
1-16: Selects Day Plan for this Exception Day. 0 disables
0 (zero): Disables the Exception Day.

10-22 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 11
Detectors
Detector Submenu, MM-6 11

DETECTOR SUBMENU

1. VEH DET PHASE ASSIGNMENT

2. VEHICLE DETECTOR SETUP

3. PED DETECTOR INPUT ASSIGNMENT

4. LOG INT / SPEED DETECTOR SETUP

5. VEHICLE DETECTOR DIAGNOSTICS

6. PEDESTRIAN DETECTOR DIAGNOSTICS

Programming Summary 11

A brief description follows of the programming functions that can be viewed and/or
changed at each of the menu options.

MM-6 Menu Option Programming Summary

1. VEHICLE DETECTOR Accesses a data entry screen (MM-6-1) with which you
PHASE ASSIGNMENT can view or edit Detector Setup for all detectors (1-64).
This menu enables NTCIP and ECPI Phase assignments.
2. VEHICLE DETECTOR Accesses a data entry screen (MM-6-2) with which you
SETUP can specify Vehicle Detector Type and TS2 Detector
Select for all detectors (1-64).
Assign one of the detector types for each of the 64
detectors.
Select TS1 detectors installed in the detector rack.
Select:
 TS 2 detector
 ECPI log

ASC/3 Programming Manual 11-1

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Detectors
Programming Summary

MM-6 Menu Option Programming Summary

3. PED DETECTOR INPUT Accesses a data entry screen (MM-6-3) with which you
ASSIGNMENT can assign Pedestrian Detectors to phases.
4. LOG INT/SPEED Accesses a data entry screen (MM-6-4) with which you
DETECTOR SETUP can set NTCIP and ECPI log periods and set six different
parameters related to speed detection:
 Enter interval times for NTCIP and ECPI detector
logging.
 Assign local detectors to up to 16 speed detectors.
 Select one or two detector speed calculations.
 Specify length for Vehicle and Trap length.
 Enable logging of vehicle speeds.
 Specify English or Metric units.
5. VEHICLE DETECTOR Accesses a data entry screen (MM-6-5) to view and edit
DIAGNOSTICS the four Vehicle Detector Diagnostic Plans.
Enter:
 Erratic count limit.
 No activity time
 Maximum presence time
 Multiplier for no-activity and max-presence time
 Fail extension
 Fail delay
6. PEDESTRIAN DETECTOR Accesses a data entry screen (MM-6-6) to view and edit
DIAGNOSTICS the four Pedestrian Detector Diagnostic Plans.
Enter:
 Erratic count limit
 No activity time
 Maximum presence time
 Multiplier for no-activity and max-presence time

11-2 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Detectors
Vehicle Detector Phase Assignment, MM-6-1

Vehicle Detector Phase Assignment, MM-6-1 11

VEH DET PH ASSIGN VEH DET PLAN [ 1] > v

[ ADDITIONAL PHASE CALLS ]
DET PH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 T
1 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S
2 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S
3 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S
4 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S
5 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S
6 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S
7 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S
8 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S
9 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S
10 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S
11 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S
12 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S
13 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S
14 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S
15 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S
16 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S
//
64 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S

Scroll through this screen to view, inhibit (NTCIP) or assign Vehicle phases to Detectors
for all detectors (1 thru 64). You can also assign Vehicle phases to Detectors in MM-6-2.

MM-6-1
Parameter Description Range

VEHICLE DET Vehicle Detector Plan Number 1-4

PH ASSIGN VEH
DET PLAN 1 NTCIP 1202 2.3.2
2-4 ECPI (Econolite) Feature
Select the detector plan (1-4) to view or edit.
PH Assigned Phase 0 - 16
NTCIP 1202 2.3.2.3
Select enable (1-16) or inhibit (0) the phase to which this detector is
assigned.
0 (zero): Inhibits the detector from calling or extending any phase.
This is used when the detector is an NTCIP system detector logging
or ECPI system (MM-6-4) detector exclusively.
1-16: Enables the detector to call and extend that phase depending on
programming.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 11-3

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Detectors
Vehicle Detector Phase Assignment, MM-6-1

MM-6-1
Parameter Description Range

1 thru 16 Phases Called By This Detector X, “.”

This is an ECPI Feature.
TOGGLE to enable (X) or disable (.) this detector to call and extend
phases in addition to the assigned phase.
Note • This is displayed as READ-ONLY in status screen.
Entries for each of 64 detectors:
NEMA TS1 or TS2 Type controller detectors:
1-8 are available on the A, B, C connectors.
9-16 are available on the D connector.
17 – 24 are available on the optional 25-pin telemetry module.
NEMA TS2 Type 1 and 2 controller detectors:
1-16 are available through DET BIU 1.
17-32 are available through DET BIU 2.
33-48 are available through DET BIU 3.
49-64 are available through DET BIU 4.

11-4 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Detectors
Vehicle Detector Phase Assignment, MM-6-1

MM-6-1
Parameter Description Range

T Column Detector Type S, D, P, C, R,

G, N, B
1 Move cursor to the T column.

The full name of the selected detector type comes into view next
to its letter abbreviation.
2 Toggle to select detector type.
Below are the available types. For detailed descriptions of each
detector type, refer to Vehicle Detector Setup, MM-6-2 on page 11-6.
S-STANDARD (with EXTEND/DELAY)
Type S, was ASC/2 Type 1
D-DISCONNECT TYPE QUEUE/STOP BAR
Type D, was ASC/2 Type 4
P-PASSAGE TYPE QUEUE/STOP BAR
Type P, was ASC/3 Type 2, ASC/2 Type 3 or 5
C-CALLING
Type C, was ASC/2 Type 6
R-RED EXTENSION
Type R, was ASC/3 Type 3
G-GREEN EXTENSION/DELAY
Type G, was ASC/3 Type 1, ASC/2 Type 2
N-NTCIP
Type N, was ASC/3 Type 0
B-BIKE
Type B, was ASC/2 Type 7

ASC/3 Programming Manual 11-5

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Detectors
Vehicle Detector Setup, MM-6-2

Vehicle Detector Setup, MM-6-2 11

Use this menu to select the correct detector type and the associated parameters for your
needs. Except for Type G, Type P, and Type R, all detectors types are NTCIP 1202
compliant. The un-related NTCIP parameters for each NTCIP 1202 compliant detector
type are hidden to reduce programming complexity. NTCIP detector type is retained for
backward visual compatibility. For your convenience, you can also assign Vehicle phases
(PH) to Detectors (DET) here in MM-6-2 as well as in MM-6-1.

Detector Type Available Options

S-STANDARD DETECTION with VEH DETECTOR [ 1] VEH DET PLAN [ 1]

EXTEND/DELAY TYPE: S-STANDARD
TS2 DETECTOR..... X ECPI LOG....... NO
Type S, was ASC/2 Type 1 DET PH - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The detector output will call for the phase(s) and RESETS EXTEND TIME... 0.0 DELAY TIME... 0.0
USE ADDED INITIAL . CROSS SWITCH PH.. 0
the phase green EXT TIME (MM-2-1). LOCK IN....... NONE NTCIP VOL . OR OCC .
PMT QUEUE DELAY. NO
EXTEND TIME, if used: When there is a gap in the input
to this detector this feature extends the output call to the DELAY TIME, if used: Delays the call to
phase(s) by the time that is programmed on the EXTEND the phase (when in yellow or red) until the
TIME. delay timer times out. Then the detector
will call the phase. If the detector call drops
and another call is placed, the delay feature
will start again.
D-DISCONNECT QUEUE/STOP BAR VEH DETECTOR [ 1] VEH DET PLAN [ 1]
TYPE: D-DISCONNECT TYPE QUEUE/STOP BAR
Type D, was ASC/2 TYPE 4: TS2 DETECTOR..... X ECPI LOG....... NO
DET PH - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
This is a Stop Bar disconnect detector. 1 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISCONNECT TIME..................... 0
The reasons this detector will disconnect are: USE ADDED INITIAL . CROSS SWITCH PH.. 0
LOCK IN....... NONE NTCIP VOL . OR OCC .
 There is a GAP to the detector input. PMT QUEUE DELAY. NO

 The detector DISCONNECT TIME times out. Note • The DISCONNECT TIME should be
greater than ZERO.
Note • For this detector to operate, there
must be a call on this detector's
input before the phase goes
green.

11-6 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Detectors
Vehicle Detector Setup, MM-6-2

Detector Type Available Options

P-PASSAGE QUEUE/STOP BAR VEH DETECTOR [ 1] VEH DET PLAN [ 1]

TYPE: P-PASSAGE TYPE QUEUE/STOP BAR
Type P, was ASC/3 Type 2, ASC/2 Type 3/5: TS2 DETECTOR..... X ECPI LOG....... NO
DET PH - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
This is a Stop Bar disconnect detector. 1 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PASSAGE TIME....................... 0.0
This detector will disconnect when there is a gap in the USE ADDED INITIAL . CROSS SWITCH PH.. 0
LOCK IN....... NONE NTCIP VOL . OR OCC .
detector input that is greater than the PASSAGE timer. PMT QUEUE DELAY. NO

Note • For this detector to operate, there

must be a call on this detector
input before the phase goes
green.

C-CALLING DETECTOR VEH DETECTOR [ 1] VEH DET PLAN [ 1]

TYPE: C-CALLING
Type C, was ASC/2 Type 6: TS2 DETECTOR..... X ECPI LOG....... NO
DET PH - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Places a call on the phase(s) only when the phase is NOT 1 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
USE ADDED INITIAL . CROSS SWITCH PH.. 0
Green. LOCK IN....... NONE NTCIP VOL . OR OCC .
PMT QUEUE DELAY. NO

R-RED EXTENSION VEH DETECTOR [ 1] VEH DET PLAN [ 1]

TYPE: R-RED EXTENSION
Type R, was ASC/3 Type 3: TS2 DETECTOR..... X ECPI LOG....... NO
DET PH - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
When you enable this feature, the phase RED CLEAR 1 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

interval can be EXTENDED to time up to the RED MAX

interval programmed in MM-2-1.
G-GREEN EXTENSION/DELAY VEH DETECTOR [ 1] VEH DET PLAN [ 1]
TYPE: G-GREEN EXTENSION/DELAY
Type G, was ASC/3 Type 1, ASC/2 Type 2: TS2 DETECTOR..... X ECPI LOG....... NO
DET PH - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Using this detector type enables the delay timer and 1 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXTEND TIME... 0.0 DELAY TIME... 0.0
extension timer to function during the green time of all USE ADDED INITIAL . CROSS SWITCH PH.. 0
assigned phases. LOCK IN....... NONE NTCIP VOL . OR OCC .
PMT QUEUE DELAY. NO
The detector extension timer works normally. The first call
received when the phase goes green, whether present when The delay timer of this detector does not
green starts or received later, is recognized immediately. function during the NOT GREEN time of
Calls received before the extension time gaps out will reset the assigned phase(s).
the EXTENSION TIME timer. When the extension timer Delay only works if the assigned phase is
times out, all further calls are delayed by the DELAY green and the extension time is set to zero.
TIMER.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 11-7

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Detectors
Vehicle Detector Setup, MM-6-2

Detector Type Available Options

N-NTCIP VEH DETECTOR [ 1] VEH DET PLAN [ 1]

TYPE: N-NTCIP
Type N, was ASC/3 Type 0: TS2 DETECTOR..... X ECPI LOG....... NO
DET PH - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
NTCIP defined detector. 1 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CALL OPTION.... YES DELAY TIME... 0.0
Supports all NTCIP functionality. EXT OPTION. PASSAGE EXTENSION TIME. 0.0
USE ADDED INITIAL . CROSS SWITCH PH.. 0
Note • Passage/Queue and Yellow/Red locks have been LOCK IN....... NONE NTCIP VOL . OR OCC .
combined for ease of programming. PMT QUEUE DELAY. NO

B-BIKE VEH DETECTOR [ 1] VEH DET PLAN [ 1]

TYPE: B-BIKE
Type B, was ASC/2 Type 7: TS2 DETECTOR..... X ECPI LOG....... NO
DET PH - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Operates like the standard detector but enables the bike 1 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXTEND TIME... 0.0 NTCIP VOL . OR OCC .
minimum green interval when the phase is served. Bike
minimum green times concurrently with phase minimum
green. During phase green the detector operates in extend
mode and phase green is extended by the detector extend
time.

Use this display to view or edit all of the parameters listed for four Vehicle Plans. It is
repeated for plans 2-4 and detectors 2-64.
Detectors are identified by numbers 1 through 64. These are assigned various functions,
times, and phases. Detectors must be defined at this data entry page to use for phases
and/or logging.

To assign vehicle detectors 1-64 to any of the 16 system detector phases:

1 Select the vehicle plan number (VEH DET PLAN).

2 Select the detector number (VEH DETECTOR).

3 Assign the type of detector (TYPE).

4 Enter other options as necessary.

11-8 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Detectors
Vehicle Detector Setup, MM-6-2

MM-6-2
Parameter Description Range

VEH DETECTOR Vehicle Detector Number 1-64

Use the numeric (0-9) keys to specify the detector (1-64) to view
or edit or specify 0 (zero) to select the next non-programmed
detector.
1-64: Selects the detector to view or edit.
VEH DET PLAN Vehicle Detector Plan Number 1-4
Use the numeric keys to specify the detector plan (1-4) to view or
edit.
1 = NTCIP 1202 2.3.2
2-4 = Econolite feature
TYPE Detector Type S, D, P, C, R, G,
Refer to detailed Detector Type descriptions in the previous table B, N
in Vehicle Detector Setup, MM-6-2 on page 11-6.
TS2 DETECTOR NEMA TS2 Rack Detector Enable X enables
Allows a NEMA TS1 detector to be installed in the TS2 detector “.” disables
rack without failing because of a failed detector processor. The
TS1 rack detector did not have this signal.
“.”: The installed detector is not a TS2 detector. The enabled
detector and its companion output will not be forced TRUE
when a detector process monitor failure is reported. This allows
the use of non-NEMA TS2 detectors, such as TS1 detector, in the
NEMA TS2 detector rack.
X: The installed detector is a TS2 detector. This and its
companion output must comply with the NEMA TS2
specification.
Note • Detectors are companions (occupy the same detector
rack slot) if they are odd-even pair (for example, 5-6 are
companions).
Non-NEMA TS2 detectors do NOT supply Processor Monitor,
Shorted Loop, Open Loop or Excessive Inductance change
information.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 11-9

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Detectors
Vehicle Detector Setup, MM-6-2

MM-6-2
Parameter Description Range

ECPI LOG Log of Detector Activity YES enable

YES: Enables the local logging of this detector’s volume and NO disable
occupancy activity.
NO: Disables.
Note • The period of the log is ECPI LOG PERIOD (MM-6-4) and
DET LOG (MM-5-2) in the Action Plan in effect.
EXTEND TIME Detector Extend/Passage Time 0.0 – 25.5 sec

Or Use the numeric (0-9) keys to specify the extend time (0.0 to 25.5
seconds) that a passage detector extends the assigned phase after
PASSAGE TIME termination of the input.
Or Note • The assigned phase may also be extended additionally
by the phase extension time (MM-2-1).
EXTENSION
TIME

DELAY TIME Detector Delay Time 0.0 – 255.0

seconds
Use the numeric (0-9) keys to define the time (0.0 – 255.0
seconds) that the raw detector input is ignored or delayed when
the assigned or called phase(s) is not green.
Note • The controller does not skip a phase that has an active
but delayed detector. A delayed detector (that has a
delay time in this field) is serviced when DUAL ENTRY
(MM-2-6-1) is enabled.
USE ADDED Use Added Initial YES enable
INITIAL
Toggle to enable (YES) or disable (NO) this detector to NO disable
accumulate counts used in the added initial calculation by the
assigned or called phase(s). Counts are accumulated for a phase
from the beginning of the yellow interval, through red, the
beginning of the next green interval.
Note • The phase uses the most active detector unless the
Added Initial Calculation by Phase option (AI CALC
MM-2-8) is enabled for the phase. It allows this
detection to extend a concurrent timing phase.

11-10 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Detectors
Vehicle Detector Setup, MM-6-2

MM-6-2
Parameter Description Range

CROSS SWITCH Vehicle Detector Switch Phase 1-16 enable

PH
Use the numeric (0-9) keys to enable (1-16) or disable (0) 0 disable
switching of this detector output.
1-16: Switches the detector call and vehicle extension time to this
phase when the assigned phase is not green and the switch phase
is green.
Note • When you assign cross switching to a detector, the
cross switching is functional for multiple phases
assigned to that detector.
0 (zero): Disables any switching of the detector output.
Note • This is suggested for a permissive movement that is
allowed to extend with calls from a concurrent phase.
The cross-switched Gap Time will never override a
greater active vehicle extension timer. If the switch
phase reaches a Gap Out state, it can no longer be
extended and you should use Simultaneous Gap
(MM-1-1-4) programming.
When there is a phase switch, the extension timer is included with
the call. The timer used for the gap time will always be the greater
of the active vehicle extension time and the gap time.
LOCK IN Lock Detector During Phase Yellow or Red NONE
NONE: Disables—no lock on the detector. RED
RED: Start locking detector on RED when not timing. YELLOW
Note • When set to RED, this sets a “Red Smart Lock” state in
which the detector only locks on RED after the phase
stops timing. The red clear interval is not included so an
unnecessary call will not remain for a left turn vehicle
that is in the intersection during a red clear.
YELLOW: Start locking detector on YELLOW.
NTCIP VOL NTCIP Volume Detector YES enable
Toggle to enable (YES) or disable (NO) this detector. NO disable
YES: Enables this detector to accumulate volume counts
according to NTCIP.
Note • This is the volume count over the NTCIP LOG PERIOD
(MM-6-4).

ASC/3 Programming Manual 11-11

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Detectors
Vehicle Detector Setup, MM-6-2

MM-6-2
Parameter Description Range

NTCIP OCC NTCIP Occupancy Detector YES enable

Toggle to enable (YES) or disable (NO) this detector. NO disable
YES: Enables this detector to accumulate occupancy data
according to NTCIP.
Note • The occupancy count is in .05% counts over the NTCIP
LOG PERIOD (MM-6-4).
PMT QUEUE Preempt Queue Delay Detector Select YES enable
DELAY
When selected, this detector is used to calculate the wait time of NO disable
its assigned phase since last demand and the number of actuations
(cars waiting) of that phase.
Note • To use wait times and cars waiting values in preempt,
you must set PMT QUEUE DELAY to YES here in MM-6-2
and also set QUEUE DELAY to YES in MM-4-1.
DISCONNECT Disconnect or Queue Detector Limit Time 0 – 255 seconds
TIME
Use the numeric (0-9) keys to define the time (0 – 255 seconds)
after the phase becomes green that “Q” detection can continue to
extend the assigned green phase.
Note • “Q” detector operation allows the extension of the green
interval on the assigned phase until the input is
removed or the phase has been green for a period equal
to the Queue Limit time, whichever occurs first. Phase
green may be shorter due to other overriding
parameters (i.e., Maximum time, Force Offs, etc.). Once
disconnected, the assigned phase must terminate
green to reset the “Q” detector operation.

11-12 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Detectors
Vehicle Detector Setup, MM-6-2

MM-6-2
Parameter Description Range

CALL OPTION Detector Phase Call Option YES enable

Toggle to enable (YES) or disable (NO) this detector to call the NO disable
assigned phase when it is not green.
YES: Enables detector to place a call to the assigned and called
phase(s) while they are not green.
NO: Disables the detector from calling.
EXT OPTION Extension Mode Options NONE,
PASSAGE,
This parameter is the combination of the 2 NTCIP parameters
QUEUE option and PASSAGE option. QUEUE

PASSAGE: extend the assigned phase during green up to the

EXTENSION TIME (parameter to the right—range 0-25.5 sec.).
QUEUE: “Q” detector operation allows the extension of the
green interval on the assigned phase until the input is removed or
the phase has been green for a period equal to the QUEUE
LIMIT time (parameter to the right— range 0-255 sec.),
whichever occurs first. Once disconnected, the assigned phase
must terminate green to reset the “Q” detector operation.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 11-13

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Detectors
Pedestrian and System Detector Options, MM-6-3

Pedestrian and System Detector Options, MM-6-3 11

You can select from two modes of operation, as shown below:

MM-6-3
Parameter Description Range

MODE NTCIP: Use this mode to assign multiple phases to a single NTCIP,
detector. ECONOLITE
ECONOLITE: This mode gives you more flexibility because you
can use it to assign multiple phases to multiple detectors.
The data assignment is not interchangeable between these 2 modes.
When you select a new mode, it is necessary for the system to go
through Transaction Mode before it enables the new mode.

NTCIP Mode with MM-6-3 11

PED DET PHASE ASSIGNMENT MODE: NTCIP

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DETECTOR 1 2 3 . . . 5 .

PHASE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
DETECTOR 10 . . . . . . .

Assign pedestrian detectors 1-16 to any of the 16 phases.

MM-6-3
Parameter Description Range

DETECTOR Phase For Pedestrian Detector 1-16

1-16: Move the cursor under a phase number (PHASE #), 1-16, and 0 disables
then enter the pedestrian detector input number (1-16) for that
phase.
0 (zero): Disables any pedestrian detector input to that phase.
Note • The same pedestrian detector can be assigned to multiple
phases.

11-14 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Detectors
Econolite Mode with MM-6-3

Econolite Mode with MM-6-3 11

PED DET PHASE ASSIGNMENT MODE:ECONOLITEv

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
D 1 X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E 2 . X . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E 4 . . . . B . . . . . . . . . . .
C 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T 6 . . . . . . . 2 . . . . . . . .
O 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10 . . . . . . . . X . . . . . . .
11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Assign pedestrian detectors 1-16 to any of the 16 phases.

MM-6-3
Parameter Description Range

DETECTOR Phase For Pedestrian Detector “.”

Toggle to enable/disable the pedestrian detector to call the assigned X
phase(s). 2
“.” = No assignment, disabled B
X = Assigns Pedestrian Push Button (PPB) to call the phase or
phases
2 = Call for Ped timing 2
B = Allows for the PPB to call for Min Green 2 (BIKE GREEN)

ASC/3 Programming Manual 11-15

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Detectors
Log Interval - Speed Detector Setup, MM-6-4

Log Interval - Speed Detector Setup, MM-6-4 11

LOG - SPEED DETECTOR SETUP

NTCIP LOG. 0 ECPI LOG. TBAP LENGTH.INCH
SPEED DET 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LOCAL DET....... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ONE/TWO DET..... 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
VEH LENGTH...... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
TRAP LENGTH..... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ENABLE LOG...... . . . . . . . .

SPEED DET 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
LOCAL DET....... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ONE/TWO DET..... 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
VEH LENGTH...... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
TRAP LENGTH..... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ENABLE LOG...... . . . . . . . .

Use this display to view or edit the NTCIP and ECPI Log Period settings and, with
horizontal scrolling, view or edit the settings for five different parameters on 16 Speed
Detectors.

MM-6-4
Parameter Descripton Range

NTCIP LOG Period for Logging of NTCIP Detectors 0-255 seconds

PERIOD
Use the numeric (0-9) keys to select the number of seconds in each
period of volume and occupancy data collection.
Note • Observe the programming notes below:
 Changing this entry resets the data collection period and deletes any
accumulated data.
 Only NTCIP Volume or Occupancy enabled detectors (MM-6-2)
will be logged.
 Only the last complete sample is maintained in memory.

11-16 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Detectors
Log Interval - Speed Detector Setup, MM-6-4

MM-6-4
Parameter Descripton Range

ECPI LOG Period for Logging of ECPI Log Detectors TBAP = Time
PERIOD Base Action
Toggle to select the number of minutes (5, 15, 30, or 60) for local
Plan or
logging of detector data or select TBAP to allow the Time Base
Action Plan (TBAP) to select the log interval. 5, 15, 30, 60
Note • Observe the programming notes below: minutes
 Changing of this entry will take place when the present log interval
is complete.
 Only ECPI LOG enabled detectors (MM-6-2) will have volume
and occupancy logged.
 Only enabled speed detectors will have their speed logged.
 The logs are maintained until the log buffer is full. When full, the
log buffer deletes the oldest entry to make space for the newest.
LENGTH Selects units of inches or centimeters for all parameters related to INCH, CM
distance. This affects the calculations display and logging of speed.
Toggle to select INCH or CM (centimeter), as appropriate.
Note • Inches calculates speed in miles per hour. Centimeters
calculates speed in kilometers per hour.
SPEED Sixteen (1-16) detectors can be used for vehicle speed. 1-16
DETECTOR
NUMBER

LOCAL DET Speed Detector Local Detector Number 1-64

Position the cursor beneath the number (0-16) of the Speed Detector 0 = not active
to be edited, then use the numeric (0-9) keys to enter the number (1-
64) of the Vehicle Detector to be assigned or enter 0 to disable that
Speed Detector.
Note • Observe the programming notes listed below:
 Detectors assigned to a phase may be used as a speed detector.
 One-detector speed calculation can use even or odd-numbered
detectors.
 Two-detector speed calculation requires an odd-numbered
detector to be assigned. The next even-numbered detector is the
second detector for the speed calculations.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 11-17

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Detectors
Log Interval - Speed Detector Setup, MM-6-4

MM-6-4
Parameter Descripton Range

ONE/TWO DET Use Toggle, 0/YES, to enable one (1) or two (2) speed calculations for 1 or 2
Speed Detectors 1-16.
1: One-detector Speed. The detector encountering a passing vehicle starts
a counter by an actuation and stops the counter when it is deactivated.
Speed is calculated using the vehicle travel time over the detection
zone and the vehicle length.
2: Two-detector speed calculation. The first detector encountered by a
passing vehicle is the Start Detector and the second is the End
Detector. A travel time counter is started by an actuation of the Start
Detector and stopped by an actuation of the End Detector. Speed is
calculated using the vehicle travel time and distance between
detectors.
Note • Observe the programming notes below:
 The LENGTH UNIT entry INCH calculates speed in miles per
hour. CM (centimeter) calculates speed in kilometers per hour.
 Speed that reads back to the arterial master is used to generate a log
of speed readings in low, nominal, and high speed bands.
VEH LENGTH Average Vehicle Length 0-999 in.
0-999: Enter the average vehicle length in centimeters or inches 0-999 cm.
encountered in the traffic lane for one-detector speed calculations.
Note • This length is used in conjunction with the effective length
of the detection zone (TRAP LENGTH) and the time that the
detector is occupied to determine the one-detector speed.
TRAP LENGTH 0-999: The effective Trap Length distance. 0-999 in.
For one-detector speed trap calculation, it is the effective detection 0-999 cm.
distance from start edge to stop edge of detection.
For two-detector speed trap calculation it is the effective detection
distance between two detectors from start edge to start edge of
detection.
Note • The effective detection zone will differ from physical length
due to a variety of electrical and magnetic factors. Enter the
length that produces the most representative speeds.
ENABLE LOG Enable Speed Trap Log X enables
X: Enables local logging of speed data. “.” disables
“.” : Disables logging.

11-18 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Detectors
Vehicle Detector Diagnostics, MM-6-5

Vehicle Detector Diagnostics, MM-6-5 11

VEH DET DIAG v

VEH DIAG PLAN NUMBER[ 1] | FAILED |
DET COUNT|ACT|PRES| X’S|TIME|CL DELAY|
1 255 255 255 60 255 0
2 0 0 0 1 255 0
3 0 0 0 1 255 0
4 0 0 0 1 255 0
5 0 0 0 1 255 0
6 0 0 0 1 255 0
7 0 0 0 1 255 0
8 0 0 0 1 255 0
9 0 0 0 1 255 0
10 0 0 0 1 255 0
11 0 0 0 1 255 0
12 0 0 0 1 255 0
13 0 0 0 1 255 0
//
64 0 0 0 1 255 0

Screen above is repeated for plans 2-4.

For this screen:

1 Enter Vehicle Diagnostic Plan Number to be viewed or edited.

2 For each of 64 detectors (DET column) enter desired diagnostic parameters in the
COUNT, ACT, PRES, X’S, FAILED TIME and FAILED CL DELAY columns.

Note • The Detector Diagnostic Plans are enabled by the Time Base Action Plan.

MM-6-5
Parameter Description Range

VEH DIAG PLAN Use the numeric (0-9) keys to enter the number (1-4) of the Vehicle 1-4
NUMBER Diagnostics Plan that you wish to view or edit.
DET Vehicle Detector Number 1-64
column
Go to the desired detector number by using the cursor or enter the
desired detector number (1-64) and press ENTER.
COUNT Vehicle Erratic Counts 1-255 CPM
column
1-255: Specifies the vehicle detector Counts Per Minute (CPM) that, 0 disables
when exceeded, logs a failed vehicle detector if logging is enabled.
0 (zero): Disables this diagnostic calculation for that vehicle detector.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 11-19

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Detectors
Vehicle Detector Diagnostics, MM-6-5

MM-6-5
Parameter Description Range

ACT Vehicle No-Activity 1-255 min.

column
1-255 minutes: Time interval between vehicle detections that, when
exceeded, logs a failed vehicle detector if logging is enabled.
0 (zero): Disables the No Activity diagnostic.
PRES Vehicle Maximum Presence 0-255 min.
column
1-255 minutes: Time for continuous vehicle detection that when
exceeded, logs a failed vehicle detector if logging is enabled.
0 (zero): Disables Maximum Presence diagnostic.
X’S Multiplier (Scaling Factor) 1, 2, 10, 15,
column
Determines length of the No-Activity and Maximum Presence periods. 60
1, 2, 15, 60: No-Activity and Maximum Presence periods that have
values between 1 and 255 minutes will be multiplied by these values
resulting in desired period length.
Examples:
No Activity period = 60 min, Multiplier = 2. Result: No Activity is
reported if detector is inactive for (60 x 2) or 120 minutes.
Maximum Presence period = 50 sec, Multiplier = 15. Result: Max
presence failure is reported if detector is active for (50 x 15) or 750
minutes.

11-20 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Detectors
Pedestrian Detector Diagnostics, MM-6-6

MM-6-5
Parameter Description Range

FAILED TIME Failed Detector Extend Time 0-255

column
Use the numeric (0-9) keys to specify the time (0-255 seconds) the failed seconds
detector can extend the assigned phase.
1-254: Allows the failed detector to call and extend the assigned phase
for the programmed time.
255: Places a max recall on the phase.
0 (zero): Disables the failed detector from calling or extending the
assigned phase.
Note • NTCIP 1202 2.3.2.12 Bits 0-3 defines an NTCIP failed
detector. Bit 7 defines a detector that failed the internal
detector diagnostics (MM-7-6).
FAILED CL Failed Detector Delay Time 0-255
DELAY seconds
column Use the numeric (0-9) keys to specify the time (0-255 seconds) that a
failed detector will be delayed.
1-255: Defines the time that a failed detector will not put a call on the
assigned phase after it terminated green.
0 (zero): Disables the delay.

Pedestrian Detector Diagnostics, MM-6-6 11

PED DETECTOR DIAG PLAN[1]

DET COUNTS ACT PRES MULTIPLIER
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 0 1
3 0 0 0 1
4 0 0 0 1
5 0 0 0 1
6 0 0 0 1
7 0 0 0 1
8 0 0 0 1
9 0 0 0 1
10 0 0 0 1
11 0 0 0 1
12 0 0 0 1
13 0 0 0 1
14 0 0 0 1
15 0 0 0 1
16 0 0 0 1

Screen above is repeated for plans 2-4.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 11-21

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Detectors
Pedestrian Detector Diagnostics, MM-6-6

For this screen:

1 Enter the Pedestrian Diagnostic Plan Number (1-4) to view or edit.

2 For each of 16 detectors (DET column) enter desired diagnostic parameters in the
Counts, Act, Pres, and Multiplier columns.

Note • The Detector Diagnostic Plans are enabled by the Time Base Action Plan.

MM-6-6
Parameter Description Range

PED DETECTOR Use the numeric (0-9) keys to enter the number (1-4) of the Pedestrian 1-4
DIAGNOSTIC Diagnostic Plan that you wish to view or edit.
PLAN NUMBER

DET Pedestrian Detector Number 1-16

column
Go to the desired detector number by using the cursor or enter the
desired detector number (1-16) and press the ENTER key.
COUNTS Pedestrian Erratic Counts 0-255
column
1-255: Specifies the pedestrian detector Counts Per Minute (CPM) that, CPM
when exceeded, logs a failed pedestrian detector if log is enabled.
0 (zero): Disables this diagnostic calculation for the pedestrian detector.
ACT Pedestrian No-Activity 0-255
column
1-255 minutes: Time interval between pedestrian detections that, when min.
exceeded, logs a failed pedestrian detector if logging is enabled.
0 (zero): Disables the No Activity diagnostic.

11-22 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Detectors
Pedestrian Detector Diagnostics, MM-6-6

MM-6-6
Parameter Description Range

PRES Pedestrian Maximum Presence 0-255

column min.
1-255 minutes: Time for continuous pedestrian detection, that when
exceeded, logs a failed pedestrian detector if logging is enabled.
0 (zero): Disables Maximum Presence diagnostic.
MULTIPLIER Multiplier (Scaling Factor) 1, 2, 10,
column 15, and 60
Determines the length of the No-Activity and Maximum Presence
periods.
1, 2, 10, 15, 60: No-Activity and Maximum Presence periods that have
values between 1 and 255 minutes are multiplied by these values
resulting in period length.
Examples:
 No Activity period = 60 min, Multiplier = 2. Result: No Activity is
reported if detector is inactive for (60 x 2) or 120 minutes.
 Maximum Presence period = 50 min, Multiplier = 15. Result: Max
presence failure is reported if detector is active for (50 x 15) or 750
minutes.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 11-23

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
For your notes:

11-24 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 12
Status Displays
Introduction 12

The ASC/3 Main Status Display (to access, press STATUS DISPLAY), is designed to show
an overall status at a glance, with more detailed status screens available for each function.
The layout of each status display is carefully designed to fit the compact display area and
also give as much information as possible. The status displays are designed as 16-line
displays. For 2070, press NEXT to toggle the status display to see the full view.
The displays are grouped into one Main Status Display and eight functional categories,
listed below in the order they are given in this chapter.

Status Display Navigation

The Main Status Display, a summary of important Press STATUS DISPLAY

status information. (for 2070, press E)
The full display for this is 16-lines.
Controller MM-7-1
Coordinator MM-7-2
Preemption/Transit Signal Priority (TSP) MM-7-3
Time Base: Time of Day (TBC)/Action Plan MM-7-4
Communications MM-7-5
Detectors MM-7-6
Flash/ Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC)/ MM-7-7
Malfunction Management Unit (MMU)
Inputs/Outputs MM-7-8

ASC/3 Programming Manual 12-1

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Status Displays
Main Status Displays

In all the status displays, there are a number of procedures with which you can get more
information or make calls. These procedures are listed below:

From a black hyperlink field, to go the related data entry screen:

 For ASC/3, press SPEC FUNC then NEXT DATA.
To return to this display, press SUB MENU.
 For 2070, press * then D. To return to this display, press ESC.

To get context-sensitive Help for a status field:

 Move the cursor to that field, and press HELP (for 2070, press F).

To make a Call on a Display Row:

1 Use number keys to make a call on Vehicle, Pedestrian, or Preemptor.

2 Move the cursor to the related display row and press a related key(s), 0 thru 9, to enter
a number from 1 thru 10. This is an internal call. If the cursor is in the first row of the
status display, pressing a numeric key causes a call on the corresponding Vehicle phase.

To make a Call on a Cursor Field (Vehicle, Pedestrian, Preemptor, or TSP):

1 Move the cursor to the related field.

2 Press ENTER. This is an internal call.

To hear a beeper sound when there is a data change:

1 Move the cursor to the status field.

2 When a change occurs in the field, you hear a beep.

Main Status Displays 12

There are two Main Status Displays—Basic and Advanced. These are shown below,
followed by definitions of their entries.

To select the type of Main Status Display for the default:

1 Go to MM-1-7-2.

2 Cursor to MAIN STATUS DISPLAY MODE.

3 Toggle to BASIC or ADVANCED.

To view the Main Status Display:

1 Press STATUS DISPLAY (for 2070, press E).

2 From the Main Status Display, to toggle between the Advanced and Basic Main Status
Display, press NEXT SCREEN (for 2070, press NEXT).

12-2 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Status Displays
Main Status Displays

Remember: From a hyperlink field (highlighted in black), to go the related data entry
screen, press SPEC FUNC then NEXT DATA (2070: press * then D). To return to this display,
press SUB MENU (2070: press ESC).
Refer to the table below for the definitions of the possible entries for the Active Plan or State
located in square brackets, on the first line, to the right of STATUS.

Basic Main Status Display Line Advanced Main Status Display

STATUS DISPLAY: [ ] 1 1 1 1
PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 2
4 MGR1 0.0 T/N . G R R G R R R - - - - 3
PDCL 12.0 VEH . I I . . . . . . . . . 4
8 YEL 0.0 PED . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
FORCE OFF 6
7
8
9
CMD SRC TBC COORD ACT. PLAN 100 10
LOCAL CYC:115/120s DAY PLAN 1 11
SYS CYL: 110s START:08:00 TUE 12
13
PREEMPTOR 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15
- - - - - - - - - - / / : : 16

Note • The table below is applicable not only for the main status displays but also for
line 1 of MM-7-1, MM-7-2, MM-7-3-1 and MM-7-3-2.

Active Plan or State—Controller Status (M M-7-1, MM-7-2, MM-7-3-1/2), Line 1

Parameter Definition Parameter Definition

MMU response errors. Critical error.

[FAULT-MMU/ERR] Check MM-7-7-2. [FAULT-CTR/ERR] Check MM-7-7-1.

Preemptor sensed during start-

TF BIU 1-4 error.
[FAULT-BIU/TF] [FAULT-PMT/PUP] up. Deactivate preempt to exit
Check MM-7-7-2.
flash.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 12-3

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Status Displays
Main Status Displays

Parameter Definition Parameter Definition

Preempt, Interlock fail for 3

possible causes:
• Preemptor and Interlock
inputs both are ACTIVE Preempt DB CRC not matched
simultaneously, even after (MM-1-7-1). Need to change
[FAULT-PMT/LCK] Input Delay Time. [FAULT-PMT/CRC] DB or rewire hardware CRC
• Interlock input is TRUE
before 1 second was up.
inputs.
• Both Preemptor and Interlock
inputs are INACTIVE
simultaneously.

Local Flash detected

[FLSH-ST MMU] MMU MMU detected error. Stop Time
[FLSH-LOCAL FL] detected error. Stop time [FLSH- ST MMU] applied with Flash. Check MMU
applied with Flash. Check for error information.
MMU for error information.

Controller caused Flash. Verify

that the database matches the
Flash by Time Base Control.
[FLSH– CTR CVM] controller type. For example, [FLSH– CTR TBC] Check active Action Plan.
the 2070 A3000.db requires the
2070-2A module.

Flash by Coord Pattern. Check MMU detects AUTO/FLASH

[FLSH– CTR SYS] active Coordination Pattern. [FLSH MMU INPT] input active.

Preemptor xx is in its INHIBIT

Preemptor xx is timing down
interval yyy. VEH/PED calls
its Delay Timer yyy. When it
[PMTxx DLY yyy] [PMTxx INH yyy] received during this interval will
reaches ZERO, the preempt
not be serviced until after the
will start.
preemptor exits.

Track Clear Timing: Preemptor

Data is in the process of
[PMTxx TCK yyy] xx is timing its Track Clear [XXX DOWNLOAD] download.
Grn, Yel or Red.

Preemptor xx is timing down

its Minimum Dwell time.
[PMTxx DWL yyy] [XXX UPLOAD] Data is in the process of upload.
Preempt may not exit until this
timer reaches ZERO.

Preemptor xx is timing down Preemptor xx is timing down its

its Minimum Dwell Flash time. Minimum Dwell Time. Preempt
[PMTxx FLSHyyy] Preempt cannot exit until this [PMTxx EXT2CRD] cannot exit until this timer
timer reaches ZERO. reaches ZERO.

Pmt xx is attempting to exit to

Preemptor xx is exiting with no
[PMTxx EXT2PHS] phases as directed by the [PMTxx EXTNONE] exit phases selected.
coordinator.

Manual Control Enable,

[MNL CT ENA IA] [STOP TIME ] Stop Time input is applied.
Interval Advance

[xxx UPLOAD] Port xxx is uploading. [xxx DOWNLOAD] Port xxx is downloading.

12-4 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Status Displays
Main Status Displays

Parameter Definition Parameter Definition

In Coordination, pattern yyy is In Coordination, pattern yyy is

[CRD SYS Pyyy] active and is commanded by [CRD TBC Pyyy]] active and is commanded by
system software. Time Base Control (TBC).

[CRD FREE ALM] In Coordination, incorrect

In coordination, manual
[CRD MAN Pyyy] parameter found in the
pattern yyy is active.
commanding pattern.

[CRD yyFO ERR] In Coordination, phase yy [CRD LZ ERR] In Coordination, coordinated

failed to be Forced-Off. phase is not active at local zero.

In free, manual free pattern is In Free, commanded by

[FREE MAN] in effect. [FREE INPUT] hardware input.

In Free, commanded by System In Free, commanded by Time

[FREE SYS] source. [FREE TBC] Base Control (TBC).

In Coordination, TSP call x and In Free, TSP call x and split

[CRD TSPxSyyy] split pattern yyy are active. [FREE TSPxSyyy] pattern yyy are active.

Gate Down timer: Preemptor

xx is timing down its Extend
Track Green Timer yyy.
[PMTxx GATEyyy] Note • The timer will not [FREE-DEFAULT ] Free by Default
start to time down
until after the GATE
DOWN input has
occurred.

[ADAPTIVE-SYS] Adaptive Mode [ADAPTIVE P%3d] Adaptive Pnnn

[FAULT-HRI/SO ] Railway Non Operational [FAULT-HRI/RX ] No Railway Communication

Consistency error detected at

[FAULT-HRI/GDN] Preemptor Gate Down Err [FAULT-CC_PUP ] power up

Railway Equipment is not Flash Stop Time Conflict

[FLT-HRI/RHBA ] receiving CU transmissions. [FLSH- ST CFM] Monitor

Flash crossing number not

[FLSH CROS-PMT] [FLSH RR NOPMT] Flash RR preempt not enable
assigned to preempt.

Flash RR preemptor is not set

[FLSH RRLOWPMT] [PENDING ADAPT] Pending Adaptive Pattern
to high priority.

[DET BIU ERROR] DET BIU 1-8 Problem

Other Entries on Main Status Display, Line 1

 Current Controller Date in MM/DD/YY format
 Current Controller Time in HH:MM:SS format

ASC/3 Programming Manual 12-5

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Status Displays
Main Status Displays

Phase Status, in Order of Precedence, Main Status Display, Line 3

PH STAT Definition

— Phase is NOT enabled

N Phase in Next
R Phase is Red
Y Phase is timing Yellow
y (lower case y) Protected Permitted Left Turn (PPLT) — Flashing Yellow
special

D Phase is timing delay green

G Phase is Green
. Phase is Red and not timing
X Exclusive Pedestrian
f Flashing Green

Vehicle Call Information, Main Status Display, Line 4

VEH CALL Definition

Blank Phase not enabled

O Phase Omitted
E Red extension call
C Active vehicle detector call
B Bike call
N Phase is non-actuated (CNA1, CNA2, Pre-timed)
F Call placed by detector diagnostic (Failed Detector)
M Max recall programmed for phase
R Vehicle recall programmed for phase
X Call placed by Max out
I Call placed by internal application (Power Up, Preemptor, Keypad input)
L Locked vehicle detector call

12-6 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Status Displays
Main Status Displays

VEH CALL Definition

S Call placed by Soft recall or do not rest here

. No phase demand

Pedestrian Call Information, Main Status Display, Line 5

PED CALL Definition

Blank Ped not enabled

O Ped Omitted
C Active Pedestrian Detector Call
2 Active Pedestrian 2 Detector Call
N Pedestrian Phase is non-actuated (CNA1, CNA2, Pre-timed)
F Call placed by detector diagnostic (Failed Detector)
R Pedestrian Recall
I Call placed by internal application (Power Up, Keypad input, Logic)
L Locked pedestrian call on the phase
. No Pedestrian demand

Ring and Active Phase for the Ring, Main Status Display, Line 6
If a Ring is NOT active, the phase is a “. .”

Parameter Definition Ranges

RX/PH YY Ring Number/Active Phase X = 1 thru 4 YY = 01 thru 16

For example, R1/PH 04|R2/PH 08|R3/PH . .|R4/PH . .

shows that Ring 1 has active phase 4| Ring 2 has active phase 8| Ring 3 is not active|
Ring 4 is not active.

Active Phase Timing and Intervals, Main Status Display, Line 7

Up to two active timers or intervals are shown simultaneously for the related ring.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 12-7

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Status Displays
Main Status Displays

Note • For a timer, the timer value is shown to its right.

Parameter Definition

EXT1 Green vehicle extension

EXT2 Green vehicle extension 2
GAPr Gap reduction is in effect
GRNp Preemptor minimum green override
GRN HOLD Phase in HOLD interval
GRN REST Phase rests in absence of calls
GRN XFER Phase awaits timeout of another phase
INACTIVE Phase is inactive
MGRN1 Minimum Green
MGRN2 Bike minimum green
MGRa Additional Initial Green
MGRNd Delay green for early walk
MGRNc Conditional Service minimum green
MGRNg Guaranteed minimum green
PED ONLY Phase is timing pedestrian timing only
RED– Vehicle red clearance
RED REST Red rest
REDg Guaranteed red clearance
REDp Preemptor red override
RED Phase is timing red extension
EXTEND

RED XFER Phase is in red transfer

RRVT Phase is next but its red revert is timing
YEL– Vehicle yellow change

12-8 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Status Displays
Main Status Displays

Parameter Definition

YELg Guaranteed yellow change

YELp Preemptor yellow override

Active Phase Maximum Timing Control and Reason for Phase

Termination, Main Status Display, Line 8
When a phase is actively timing, the parameter for the phase maximum is shown.
When the phase is terminated, it shows the reason for the termination (during the clearance
interval of the phase — usually during yellow/red clearance).

Parameter Definition

FORCE OFF Terminated by command or force-off signal

GAP OUT Gap between vehicles exceeded gap-out limit in effect in volume density
operation
GUAR PASS Full vehicle extension timed after time out of reduced gap
MAN ADV Terminated by manual advance
MAX1 Max 1 is timing
MAX2 Max 2 is timing
MAX3 Max 3 is timing
MAXD Max Dynamic is timing
MAX OUT Green ext time reached its maximum limit
MAX GAP Minimum gap was in effect when gap-out occurred
PC–1 Ped Clear 1 is timing
PC–2 Ped Clear 2 is timing
PC–G Guarantee Ped Clear is timing
PC–M Ped Clear Max is timing
PC–P Preemptor is timing Ped Clear
PREEMPT Terminated by preemption
REDm Vehicle red clearance maximum
SPLT Coordinator or TSP/SCP split timing is being used for the phase MAX
time

ASC/3 Programming Manual 12-9

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Status Displays
Main Status Displays

Parameter Definition

TSP TSP Split is timing

WK–1 Walk 1 is timing

WK–G Guarantee Walk is timing

WALK HOLD The phase is in Walk Hold
WALK REST The Phase is in Walk Rest
WK–2 Walk 2 is timing
WLFT Pre Time Walk (FT) is timing
WL-P Preemptor is timing walk
WK-M Walk max is timing

Current Controller Configuration, Main Status Display, Line 9

Parameter Definition Range

PLAN SPLT:XXX Plan Split Pattern Number XXX = 001 thru 120
TP:XX Timing Plan Number XX = 01 thru 04
SEQ:XX Sequence Page Number XX = 01 thru 16
ACT:XXX Action Plan Number XXX = 001 thru 100
DP:X Detector Plan Number X = 1 thru 4

Coordination-Specific Timing Information, Main Status Display,

Line 10
These are in four separate areas, as show below: Local Cycle Counter, System Cycle
Counter, Interconnect Format Cross Reference, and Current Coordination Status.

Parameter Definition Ranges

LC:XXX+/YYY + = s for seconds YYY = actual cycle

Local Cycle Counter XXX = counter
or % for percent length programmed

SYS CYC:XXX+ System Cycle Counter + = s for seconds

XXX = counter
(Master Clock) or % for percent

12-10 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Status Displays
Main Status Displays

Parameter Definition Ranges

Interconnect Format Cross Reference

PLN XXX Interconnect Format = PLN XXX = Plan Number

TS2 XX-X Interconnect Format = TS2 XX–X = Cycle / Split Combination

COS XXX Interconnect Format = STD XXX = Cycle / Offset / Split Combination

Current Coordination Status

FREE Free

SYNC Sync Pulse

PICKUP In pickup mode

COORD Coordinated (in step)

DWELL Dwelling / transition N/A

ADDONLY Add Only Transition

DEDUCT Subtracting in Smooth

Transition

ADDING Adding in Smooth Transition

Preempt (PMT) & Transit Signal Priority (TSP) Input Status, Main
Status Display, Line 12
10 possible Preempts (1 thru 10) are on the left, and 6 possible TSPs (1 thru 6) are on the
right.

Parameter Definition

PMT Status (left 1 thru 10)

- Not programmed
R Re-service period
I Preemptor is Inhibited
D Delay timer is running for that preempt
A Preempt run is active
C Call, but that preempt is not yet active
. Preempt is programmed/enabled, but there is no activity on it

ASC/3 Programming Manual 12-11

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Status Displays
Main Status Displays

Parameter Definition

TSP Input Status (right 1 thru 6)

X TSP is not programmed correctly

(omits on TSP phases, no TSP pattern, no TSP phases)
R Re-service period
I Inhibited
A Call is being/about-to-be served
N NTCIP Commanded
C Call pending from inputs
. Enabled and Idle

Logic Processor Flag Status, Main Status Display, Line 13

16 possible Logic Processor Flags, 1 thru 16

LP
FLAG Definition

A Active
. Inactive
- Not used

The communications subsection of the Main Status Display provides an overview of the
communications status of the CU with a remote system (e.g. ASC/2 master controller or
icons or Centracs central system). The active address the controller is accepting commands
from is indicated by the “TLM ADD” field. The transmit and receive status for each port
is also monitored and can be used by an operator to diagnose and troubleshoot basic
communications issues. Further information can be gathered from the respective port or
protocol status screens if necessary. The following example describes how one would
interpret the example Main Status Display subsection illustrated above.

12-12 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Status Displays
Main Status Displays

In the example above, “TLM ADD” indicates that the controller is configured to accept
messages addressed to controller “1”. Further inspection of the port priorities, reveals that
PORT 2 is configured with the highest priority, therefore it can be inferred that PORT 2
is configured with address “1”. The reception and transmission status of PORT 2 is “OK”,
which indicates that communications is active valid, where validity of messages are
determined by the controller traffic application software and therefore provide the best
indication of the controller’s communications status. If communications is intermittent or
with a delay longer than 50 ms, the appropriate port status field will indicate such a
condition by changing from an “OK” to a “ .”. Further lack of communications beyond
the ports drop-out timer will be indicated with an “ID”. This state is important to the
communications of controller because only at this time will it consider the port to be non-
active and allow other remote systems communication over ports of lower-priority to
begin commanding the controller. Keep in mind, polling messages/status requests are
always accepted and replied to, regardless of port priority settings.

Highest Priority Telemetry Address (TLM ADD), Main Status Display,

Line 14
The range is 0 thru 65535.
In the example above, this address is 0.

Communication Port Status, Main Status Display, Lines 15 and 16

Lines 15 and 16 show the status of four communication ports. For each port, you see:
The name of the port and its priority — Receive (RX) status — Transmit (TX) status

Status of the Communications Ports in the EXAMPLE above

Name of the Port Receive Transmit
RX TX
Parameter Full Name Priority Status* Status*

ETH Ethernet port 2 ID .

P2 Port 2 1 OK OK
P3A RS232, Port 3A 3 ID .
P3B FSK/RS232, Port 3B 0/Disabled - -

* Refer to the table below for the meanings of the RX and TX status entries.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 12-13

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Status Displays
Main Status Displays

Communication Ports Status, Main Status Display, Lines 15 and 16

Parameter Definition

ETH Ethernet port

NEMA Ports

P2 Port 2 (terminal port)

P3A Port 3A (RS232 port)
P3B Port 3B (FSK/RS232 port)

2070 Ports

C50 C50S (front port on 2070)

C21 C21S (Optional module, either FSK or RS232; one module includes
C21 & C22)
C22 C22S

Receive Status, RX

- Port disabled
OK Reception in progress and with valid message
. Port NOT Receiving (port Drop Timer still running)
ID Port IDle (Drop Time expired)

Transmit Status, TX

- Port disabled
OK Transmission in Progress, and the message is valid
. Port NOT Receiving (port Drop Timer still running)

12-14 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Status Displays
Status Display Submenu, MM-7

Status Display Submenu, MM-7 12

STATUS DISPLAY SUBMENU

1. CONTROLLER 6. DETECTORS

2. COORDINATOR 7. FLASH/SDLC/MMU

3. PREEMPTION/TSP 8. INPUTS / OUTPUTS

4. TBC/ACTION PLAN

5. COMMUNICATIONS

Brief descriptions follow of the contents of the ASC/3 Status Displays.

Main Status Screen

Press STATUS DISPLAY to see these Status Display parameters:

MM-7 Menu Option Controller Status Display

1. CONTROLLER  Current controller status including coordination source

and pattern in effect or preemption status
 Current date and time
 Current phase status including Red, Yellow, Red and
Phase Next for active phases
 Current overlap status including Red, Yellow, and Red
for active phases
 Current pedestrian status including Walk, Pedestrian
Clearance and Don’t Walk
 Current vehicle and pedestrian demand for active
phases
 Current split plan, timing plan, sequence, action plan
and detector plan
 Current phase and interval currently timing and time
remaining by ring
 Current density and maximum timers
 Current overlap signal timing and time remaining
 Current logic processor flag status

ASC/3 Programming Manual 12-15

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Status Displays
Status Display Submenu, MM-7

MM-7 Menu Option Controller Status Display

2. COORDINATOR  Current coordination status including coordination

source and pattern in effect or preemption status.
 Current date and time
 Current phase status including Red, Yellow, Red and
Phase Next for active phases
 Current vehicle and pedestrian demand for active
phases
 Current vehicle and pedestrian permissive
 Current phase and interval currently timing and time
remaining by ring
 Current split plan, timing plan, sequence, action plan
and detector plan
 Current local cycle timing and value, system cycle
timing, COS received and coordination status
 Indicates the next plan and the time of change
 Indicated the split demand pattern and number of
cycles remaining
 Indicates per ring, hold, force off, split count down,
split extension and the ring offset.

12-16 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Status Displays
Status Display Submenu, MM-7

MM-7 Menu Option Controller Status Display

3. PREEMPTION/TSP From MM-7-3-1 you can see these Preemptor Status

Display parameters:
 Current controller status including coordination source
and pattern in effect or preemption status.
 Current date and time
 Current phase status including Red, Yellow, Red and
Phase Next for active phases
 Current pedestrian overlap status including Walk,
Pedestrian Clearance and Don’t Walk
 Current vehicle and pedestrian demand for active
phases
 Current local cycle timing and value, system cycle
timing, COS received and coordination status
 Current preempt timing by ring
 Current phase and interval currently timing and time
remaining by ring
 Current preempt and TSP input status
 Current logic processor flag status
From MM-7-3-2 you can see these TSP Status
Display parameters:
 Current controller status including coordination source
and pattern in effect or preemption status.
 Current date and time
 Current phase status including Red, Yellow, Red and
Phase Next for active phases
 Current vehicle and pedestrian demand for active
phases
 TSP or SCP plan in effect and status
 Current split plan, timing plan, sequence, action plan
and detector plan
 Current local cycle timing and value, system cycle
timing, COS received and coordination status
 Current phase and interval currently timing and time
remaining by ring
 Current preempt and TSP input status
 Current logic processor flag status

ASC/3 Programming Manual 12-17

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Status Displays
Status Display Submenu, MM-7

MM-7 Menu Option Controller Status Display

4. TBC/ACTION PLAN Note • TBC = Time Base Control

From MM-7-4 you can see these Time Base Status
Display parameters:
 Current date and time
 Command source
 The day plan that will be in effect next
 Indicates program step number in effect
 Indicates current day plan event start time and action
plan number
 Indicates next twenty nine events, start time and action
plan number
5. COMMUNICATIONS  Ethernet, MM-7-5-1
 Port 2/C50S, MM-7-5-2
 Port 3A/C21S, MM-7-5-3
 Port 3B/C22S, MM-7-5-4
 NTCIP, MM-7-5-5
 ECPIP, MM-7-5-6
 IEEE 1570, MM-7-5-7 (for details, refer to the ASC/3
IEEE 1570 User Guide, P/N 100-0903-008)
6. DETECTORS  Current date and time
 Detector selected, detector timing, delay and extend
values
 Controller detector diagnostics
 TS-2 Detector diagnostics
 Detector status:
F: Failed diagnostics
D: Delay is timing
E: Extend is timing
C: Active with no delay or extend
S: Speed detector(s)
“.”: No activity
“-”: Not programmed, assigned or enabled

12-18 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Status Displays
Status Display Submenu, MM-7

MM-7 Menu Option Controller Status Display

7. FLASH/SDLC/MMU From MM-7-7 you can see the Flash/MMU Status

Display parameters. This display shows the cause of a
cabinet Flash condition. The various MM-7-7-1 Flash
displays are:
 If there is no flash, it shows a NO FLASH
CONDITION indicator
 Emergency Flash Conditions
 Both Emergency and MMU Flash Conditions
 Controller Flash Conditions including Automatic Flash
Conditions
From MM-7-7-2 you can see the Port 1 status messages
from the BIUs and the MMU
From MM-7-7-3 you can see the MMU compatibility
programming in the controller and the MMU.
8. INPUTS / OUTPUTS From MM-7-8 you can see the real time status of the
inputs and outputs. The inputs and outputs can be viewed
as:
 Functions – menu selections 1 & 2
 Hardware – menu selections 3 & 4
 Aux hardware – D and Telemetry – menu selection 5
 BIUs – selections 6 & 7
 Logic Processor– menu selection 8
 I/0 Differences– menu selection 9

ASC/3 Programming Manual 12-19

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Status Displays
Controller Status Display, MM-7-1

Controller Status Display, MM-7-1 12

When in a hyperlink field:

To follow the hyperlink:

For ASC/3, press SPEC FUNC, then

NEXT DATA.

For 2070, press B.

To go back:

For ASC/3, press SUB MENU.

For 2070, press ESC.

Active Plan or State — Controller Status, MM-7-1, Line 1

For this information (same as in the Main Status Display), refer to the table
ActivePlanorState—ControllerStatus(MM-7-1,MM-7-2,MM-7-3-1/2),Line 1 on page 12-3.

Other Entries on Controller Status, Line 1

Current Controller Date in MM/DD/YY format
Current Controller Time in HH:MM:SS format

Phase Status, in Order of Precedence — Controller Status, MM-7-1,

Line 3

PH STAT Definition

— Phase is NOT enabled

N Phase in Next
R Phase is timing Red
Y Phase is timing Yellow
y (lower case y) special Protected Permitted Left Turn (PPLT) yellow
D Phase is timing delay green
. Phase is Red and not timing
G Phase is Green

12-20 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Status Displays
Controller Status Display, MM-7-1

PH STAT Definition

X Simultaneous Red/Yellow (orange)

F# (special) Canadian FF (future native feature) F1, F2, F3

Vehicle Overlaps — Controller Status, MM-7-1, Line 4

VEH OVL Definition

= Overlap is not programmed (omitted)

A Overlap is timing Advance green
N Overlap is next
Y Overlap is timing Yellow
y (special) Protected Permitted Left Turn (PPLT)
G Overlap is green
F# Flashing Green Overlap
L Overlap is Timing Lagging green
R Overlap is Red

Pedestrian Overlap Status (order of precedence) — Controller Status,

MM-7-1, Line 5

PED OVL Definition

- PED is not enabled

N PED is next
W PED is timing/in WALK
C PED is timing PED CLEAR
O PED is Omitted
D PED is in DON'T WALK

ASC/3 Programming Manual 12-21

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Status Displays
Controller Status Display, MM-7-1

Vehicle Call Information — Controller Status, MM-7-1, Line 6

VEH CALL Definition

O Phase Omitted
E Red extension call
C Active vehicle detector call
B Bike call
I Call placed by internal application (Power Up, Preemptor, Keypad input)
N Phase is non-actuated (CNA1, CNA2, Pre-timed)
F Call placed by detector diagnostic (Failed Detector)
M Max recall programmed for phase
R Vehicle recall programmed for phase
X Call placed by Max out
L Locked vehicle detector call
S Call placed by Soft recall or do not rest here
. No phase demand

To make a Vehicle Call:

1 Go to MM-7-1, Line 6, VEH CALL.

2 Obey the applicable procedure, below.

To Make a Vehicle Call on: Procedure

All Phases 1 Move the cursor to the second L of VEH CALL

2 Press ENTER.

One Phase (range 1 thru 16) 1 Move the cursor to the applicable phase, 1 thru 16.

2 Press ENTER.

One Phase (range 1 thru 10) 1 Move the cursor to anywhere in the VEH CALL line.

2 Press the applicable number key 1 thru 0.

Note • You can use the same procedure, above, to make a Vehicle Call from any status
display that has the VEH CALL parameter.

12-22 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Status Displays
Controller Status Display, MM-7-1

Pedestrian Call Information — Controller Status, MM-7-1, Line 7

PED CALL Definition

O Ped Omitted
C Active Pedestrian Detector Call
2 Active Pedestrian 2 Detector Call
I Call placed by internal application (Power Up, Keypad input, Logic)
N Pedestrian Phase is non-actuated (CNA1, CNA2, Pre-timed)
F Call placed by detector diagnostic (Failed Detector)
R Pedestrian Recall
L Locked pedestrian call on the phase
. No Pedestrian demand

To make a Pedestrian Call:

1 Go to MM-7-1, Line 7, PED CALL.

2 Obey the applicable procedure, below.

To Make a Pedestrian Call on: Procedure

All Phases 1 Move the cursor to the second L of PED CALL

2 Press ENTER.

One Phase (range 1 thru 16) 1 Move the cursor to the applicable phase, 1 thru 16.

2 Press ENTER.

One Phase (range 1 thru 10) 1 Move the cursor to anywhere in the PED CALL line.

2 Press the applicable number key 1 thru 0.

Note • You can use the same procedure, above, to make a Pedestrian Call from any
status display that has the PED CALL parameter.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 12-23

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Status Displays
Controller Status Display, MM-7-1

Current Controller Configuration — Controller Status, MM-7-1, Line 8

Hyperlink Fields

Parameter Definition Range

PLAN SPLT:XXX Plan Split Pattern Number XXX = 001 thru 120
TP:XX Timing Plan Number XX = 01 thru 04
SEQ:XX Sequence Page Number XX = 01 thru 16
ACT:XXX Action Plan Number XXX = 001 thru 100
DP:X Detector Plan Number X = 1 thru 4

Ring and Active Phase for the Ring — Controller Status, MM-7-1,
Line 9
If a Ring is not active, the phase is a “.”

Parameter Definition Ranges

RX/PH YY Ring Number/Active Phase X = 1 thru 4 YY = 1 thru 16

For example, R1/PH 4|R2/PH 8|R3/PH .|R4/PH .

shows that Ring 1 has active phase 4| Ring 2 has active phase 8| Ring 3 is not active|
Ring 4 is not active

Active Phase Timing and Intervals — Controller Status, MM-7-1,

Lines 10 and 11
Up to two active timers or intervals are shown simultaneously for the related ring.

Note • For a timer, the timer value is shown to its right.

Parameter Definition

EXT1 Green vehicle extension

EXT2 Green vehicle extension 2
GAPr Gap reduction is in effect
GRNp Preemptor minimum green override
GRN HOLD Phase in HOLD interval

12-24 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Status Displays
Controller Status Display, MM-7-1

Parameter Definition

GRN REST Phase rests in absence of calls

GRN XFER Phase awaits timeout of another phase
INACTIVE Ring is inactive
MGRN1 Minimum Green
MGRN2 Bike minimum green
MGRa Additional Initial Green
MGRNd Delay green for early walk
MGRNc Conditional Service minimum green
MGRNg Guaranteed minimum green
PED ONLY Phase is timing pedestrian timing only
RED– Vehicle red clearance
RED REST Red rest
REDg Guaranteed red clearance
REDp Preemptor red override
RED EXTEND Phase is timing red extension
RED XFER Phase is in red transfer
RRVT Phase is next but its red revert is timing
YEL– Vehicle yellow change
YELg Guaranteed yellow change
YELp Preemptor yellow override

Car/Time before Reduction — Controller Status, MM-7-1, Line 12

This is the count-down timer for time before reduction for each ring for the active phase
operating under volume density (DEN).
DEN00/000
00/ = Cars waiting
/000 = Time before Reduction

ASC/3 Programming Manual 12-25

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Status Displays
Controller Status Display, MM-7-1

Maximum Time in Effect — Controller Status, MM-7-1, Line 13

Maximum Time in Effect (Max 1, 2, 3 or current Dynamic Max value)

Overlay Display (A, B, C, D), Color and Timing — Controller Status,

MM-7-1, Line 14
For the general expression, OL? C##.# , the key:
OL = Overlap
? = A, B, C or D (the identifier of the overlay display)
C = G, Y, R (the color)
##.# = Overlap Timing

Logic Processor Flag Status — Controller Status, MM-7-1, Line 16

16 possible Logic Processor Flags, 1 thru 16

LP FLAG Definition

A Active
. Inactive
- Not used

To make a Vehicle Call:

1 Go to Line 6, VEH CALL.

2 Obey the applicable procedure, below.

To Make a Vehicle Call on: Procedure

All Phases 1 Move the cursor to the second L of VEH CALL

2 Press ENTER.

One Phase 1 Move the cursor to the applicable phase, 1 thru 16.

2 Press ENTER.

One Phase, 1 thru 10 1 Move the cursor to anywhere in Line 6, VEH CALL.

2 Press the applicable number key 1 thru 0.

12-26 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Status Displays
Coordinator Status Display, MM-7-2

Coordinator Status Display, MM-7-2 12

When in a hyperlink field:

To follow the hyperlink:

For ASC/3, press SPEC FUNC, then

NEXT DATA.

For 2070, press B.

To go back:

For ASC/3, press SUB MENU.

For 2070, press ESC.

Active Plan or State — Controller Status, MM-7-2, Line 1

For this information (same as in the Main Status Display), refer to the table
ActivePlanorState—ControllerStatus(MM-7-1,MM-7-2,MM-7-3-1/2),Line 1 on page 12-3.

Other Entries on Controller Status, Line 1

Current Controller Date in MM/DD/YY format
Current Controller Time in HH:MM:SS format

Phase Status, in Order of Precedence — Coordinator Status, MM-7-2,

Line 3

PH STAT Definition

— Phase is NOT enabled

N Phase in Next
R Phase is timing Red
Y Phase is timing Yellow
y (lower case y) special Protected Permitted Left Turn (PPLT) yellow
D Phase is timing delay green
. Phase is Red and not timing
G Phase is Green

ASC/3 Programming Manual 12-27

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Status Displays
Coordinator Status Display, MM-7-2

PH STAT Definition

X Simultaneous Red/Yellow (orange)

F# (special) Canadian FF (future native feature) F1, F2, F3

Vehicle Call Information — Coordinator Status, MM-7-2, Line 4

VEH CALL Definition

O Phase Omitted
E Red extension call
C Active vehicle detector call
B Bike call
I Call placed by internal application (Power Up, Preemptor, Keypad input)
N Phase is non-actuated (CNA1, CNA2, Pre-timed)
F Call placed by detector diagnostic (Failed Detector)
M Max recall programmed for phase
R Vehicle recall programmed for phase
X Call placed by Max out
L Locked vehicle detector call
S Call placed by Soft recall or do not rest here
. No phase demand

12-28 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Status Displays
Coordinator Status Display, MM-7-2

To make a Vehicle Call:

1 Go to MM-7-2, Line 4, VEH CALL.

2 Obey the applicable procedure, below.

To Make a Vehicle Call on: Procedure

All Phases 1 Move the cursor to the second L of VEH CALL

2 Press ENTER.

One Phase (range 1 thru 16) 1 Move the cursor to the applicable phase, 1 thru 16.

2 Press ENTER.

One Phase (range 1 thru 10) 1 Move the cursor to anywhere in the VEH CALL line.

2 Press the applicable number key 1 thru 0.

Note • You can use the same procedure, above, to make a Vehicle Call from any status
display that has the VEH CALL parameter.

Pedestrian Call Information — Coordinator Status, MM-7-2, Line 5

PED CALL Definition

O Ped Omitted
C Active Pedestrian Detector Call
2 Active Pedestrian 2 Detector Call
I Call placed by internal application (Power Up, Keypad input, Logic)
N Pedestrian Phase is non-actuated (CNA1, CNA2, Pre-timed)
F Call placed by detector diagnostic (Failed Detector)
R Pedestrian Recall
L Locked pedestrian call on the phase
. No Pedestrian demand

ASC/3 Programming Manual 12-29

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Status Displays
Coordinator Status Display, MM-7-2

To make a Pedestrian Call:

1 Go to MM-7-2, Line 5, PED CALL.

2 Obey the applicable procedure, below.

To Make a Pedestrian Call on: Procedure

All Phases 1 Move the cursor to the second L of PED CALL

2 Press ENTER.

One Phase (range 1 thru 16) 1 Move the cursor to the applicable phase, 1 thru 16.

2 Press ENTER.

One Phase (range 1 thru 10) 1 Move the cursor to anywhere in the PED CALL line.

2 Press the applicable number key 1 thru 0.

Note • You can use the same procedure, above, to make a Pedestrian Call from any
status display that has the PED CALL parameter.

Permissive Windows — Coordinator Status, MM-7-2, Line 6

PERMISVE Definition

V Vehicle Permissive window is open for this phase

P Pedestrian Permissive window is open for this phase.
Pedestrian permissive “P” overwrites Vehicle permissive “V” display.

Current Controller Configuration — Coordinator Status, MM-7-2,

Line 7

Hyperlink Fields

Parameter Definition Range

PLAN SPLT:XXX Plan Split Pattern Number XXX = 001 thru 120
TP:XX Timing Plan Number XX = 01 thru 04
SEQ:XX Sequence Page Number XX = 01 thru 16
ACT:XXX Action Plan Number XXX = 001 thru 100
DP:X Detector Plan Number X = 1 thru 4

12-30 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Status Displays
Coordinator Status Display, MM-7-2

Coordination-Specific Timing Information, Coordinator Status,

MM-7-2, Line 8
These are in four separate areas, as shown below: Local Cycle Counter, System Cycle
Counter, Interconnect Format Cross Reference, and Current Coordination Status

Parameter Definition Ranges

LC:XXX+/YYY + = s for seconds YYY = actual cycle

Local Cycle Counter XXX = counter
or % for percent length programmed

SYS CYC:XXX+ System Cycle Counter (Master + = s for seconds

XXX = counter
Clock) or % for percent

Interconnect Format Cross Reference

PLN XXX Interconnect Format = PLN XXX = Plan Number

TS2 XX-X Interconnect Format = TS2 XX–X = Cycle / Split Combination

COS XXX Interconnect Format = STD XXX = Cycle / Offset / Split Combination

Current Coordination Status

FREE Free

SYNC Sync Pulse

PICKUP In pickup mode

COORD Coordinated (in step)

DWELL Dwelling / Transition N/A

ADDONLY Add Only Transition

DEDUCT Subtracting in Smooth

Transition

ADDING Adding in Smooth Transition

Local Offset, Coordinator Status, MM-7-2, Line 9 (left side)

Parameter Definition Range

LOCAL OFFSET......XXs This is the programmed offset Seconds or %, set in MM-3-1

time of the running coordinated
pattern.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 12-31

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Status Displays
Coordinator Status Display, MM-7-2

Actual Offset, Coordinator Status, MM-7-2, Line 9 (right side)

Parameter Definition Range

ACTUAL OFFSET.....XXs This is the current offset time of Seconds or %, set in MM-3-1
the running coordinated pattern.
In transition, this value is
different from the local offset
and will keep changing until it
reaches the local offset value.

Next Plan, Coordinator Status, MM-7-2, Line 10 (left side)

Parameter Definition Range

NEXT PLAN......XXX Next Plan Number XXX = 1 thru 100

Next Time, Coordinator Status, MM-7-2, Line 10 (right side)

Parameter Definition Range

NEXT TIME...XX:XX:XX Next Scheduled Plan Time hh:mm:ss (time of day)

Split Demand, Coordinator Status, MM-7-2, Line 11

Parameter Definition Range

SPLIT DEMAND..XXX/YYY XXX = Split Pattern Number XXX = 001 thru 120
YYY = Remaining number of YYY = 01 thru 255
cycles for the selected pattern

Hold Applied to Phase, Coordinator Status, MM-7-2, Line 12

Parameter Definition Range

HOLD APPLIED TO PHASE Identifies which phases have a Phases 1 thru 16

hold applied. The phase number
is shown under the ring number
in which it is currently timing.

12-32 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Status Displays
Coordinator Status Display, MM-7-2

Force-Off Ring, Coordinator Status, MM-7-2, Line 13

Parameter Definition Range

FORCE OFF RING Identifies which rings have a X = Force-off on the ring
force-off applied to the phase . = No force-off on the ring
timing.

Split Timing, Coordinator Status, MM-7-2, Line 14

Parameter Definition Range

SPLIT TIMING Shows the remaining available 0 thru 999

split time (in seconds) for each
active phase in each ring. If a
phase has “redirected split” time
allocated to it from another
phase, the SPLIT TIMING timer
shall show the calculated split
time.

Split Extension Time, Coordinator Status, MM-7-2, Line 15

Parameter Definition Range

SPLIT EXTENSION TIME Shows any split extension time Cycle length -1 in seconds or
(in seconds or percent of cycle, 0 thru 99 in percent
determined from coordination
options) for actuated
coordinated phases in each ring,
if actuated coordination is used.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 12-33

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Status Displays
Preemptor Status Display, MM-7-3-1

Ring Offsets, Coordinator Status, MM-7-2, Line 16

Parameter Definition Range

RING OFFSETS Ring 1 is the primary offset for the 0 thru Cycle length in seconds
coordinator. If the controller unit or 0 thru 99 in percent
has been set up that all rings can
time independently, the offsets
under Ring 2 thru 4 can then be
used to create a transitional
difference between each ring.
Example:
If Ring 1 to be green first then
Ring 2 to delay, then in MM-3-2,
put in an offset value in RING
DISP field for Ring 2.

Preemptor Status Display, MM-7-3-1 12

When in a hyperlink field:

To follow the hyperlink:

For ASC/3, press SPEC FUNC, then

NEXT DATA.

For 2070, press B.

To go back:

For ASC/3, press SUB MENU.

For 2070, press ESC.

Active Plan or State — Controller Status, MM-7-3-1, Line 1

For this information (same as in the Main Status Display), refer to the table
ActivePlanorState—ControllerStatus(MM-7-1,MM-7-2,MM-7-3-1/2),Line 1 on page 12-3.

Other Entries on Controller Status, Line 1

Current Controller Date in MM/DD/YY format
Current Controller Time in HH:MM:SS format

12-34 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Status Displays
Preemptor Status Display, MM-7-3-1

Phase Status, in Order of Precedence — Preemptor Status, MM-7-3-1,

Line 3

PH STAT Definition

— Phase is NOT enabled

N Phase in Next
R Phase is timing Red
Y Phase is timing Yellow
y (lower case y) special Protected Permitted Left Turn (PPLT) yellow
D Phase is timing delay green
. Phase is Red and not timing
G Phase is Green
X Simultaneous Red/Yellow (orange)
F# (special) Canadian FF (future native feature) F1, F2, F3

Vehicle Overlaps — Preemptor Status, MM-7-3-1, Line 4

VEH OVL Definition

— Overlap is not programmed (omitted)

A Overlap is timing Advance green
N Overlap is next
Y Overlap is timing Yellow
y (special) Protected Permitted Left Turn (PPLT)
G Overlap is green
F# Flashing Green Overlap
L Overlap is Timing Lagging green
R Overlap is Red

ASC/3 Programming Manual 12-35

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Status Displays
Preemptor Status Display, MM-7-3-1

Pedestrian Status Overlap (order of precedence) — Preemptor Status,

MM-7-3-1, Line 5

PED OVL Definition

— PED is not enabled

N PED is next
W PED is timing/in WALK
C PED is timing PED CLEAR
O PED is Omitted
D PED is in DON'T WALK

Vehicle Call Information — Preemptor Status, MM-7-3-1, Line 6

VEH CALL Definition

O Phase Omitted
E Red extension call
C Active vehicle detector call
B Bike call
I Call placed by internal application (Power Up, Preemptor, Keypad input)
N Phase is non-actuated (CNA1, CNA2, Pre-timed)
F Call placed by detector diagnostic (Failed Detector)
M Max recall programmed for phase
R Vehicle recall programmed for phase
X Call placed by Max out
L Locked vehicle detector call
S Call placed by Soft recall or do not rest here
. No phase demand

12-36 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Status Displays
Preemptor Status Display, MM-7-3-1

To make a Vehicle Call:

1 Go to MM-7-3-1, Line 6, VEH CALL.

2 Obey the applicable procedure, below.

To Make a Vehicle Call on: Procedure

All Phases 1 Move the cursor to the second L of VEH CALL

2 Press ENTER.

One Phase (range 1 thru 16) 1 Move the cursor to the applicable phase, 1 thru 16.

2 Press ENTER.

One Phase (range 1 thru 10) 1 Move the cursor to anywhere in the VEH CALL line.

2 Press the applicable number key 1 thru 0.

Note • You can use the same procedure, above, to make a Vehicle Call from any status
display that has the VEH CALL parameter.

Pedestrian Call Information — Preemptor Status, MM-7-3-1, Line 7

PED CALL Definition

O Ped Omitted
C Active Pedestrian Detector Call
2 Active Pedestrian 2 Detector Call
I Call placed by internal application (Power Up, Keypad input, Logic)
N Pedestrian Phase is non-actuated (CNA1, CNA2, Pre-timed)
F Call placed by detector diagnostic (Failed Detector)
R Pedestrian Recall
L Locked pedestrian call on the phase
. No Pedestrian demand

ASC/3 Programming Manual 12-37

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Status Displays
Preemptor Status Display, MM-7-3-1

To make a Pedestrian Call:

1 Go to MM-7-3-1, Line 7, PED CALL.

2 Obey the applicable procedure, below.

To Make a Pedestrian Call on: Procedure

All Phases 1 Move the cursor to the second L of PED CALL

2 Press ENTER.

One Phase (range 1 thru 16) 1 Move the cursor to the applicable phase, 1 thru 16.

2 Press ENTER.

One Phase (range 1 thru 10) 1 Move the cursor to anywhere in the PED CALL line.

2 Press the applicable number key 1 thru 0.

Note • You can use the same procedure, above, to make a Pedestrian Call from any
status display that has the PED CALL parameter.

Coordination-Specific Timing Information, Preemptor Status,

MM-7-3-1, Line 8
These are in four separate areas, as show below: Local Cycle Counter, System Cycle
Counter, Interconnect Format Cross Reference, and Current Coordination Status

Parameter Definition Ranges

LC:XXX+/YYY + = s for seconds YYY = actual cycle

Local Cycle Counter XXX = counter
or % for percent length programmed

SYS CYC:XXX+ System Cycle Counter (Master + = s for seconds

XXX = counter
Clock) or % for percent

Interconnect Format Cross Reference

PLN XXX Interconnect Format = PLN XXX = Plan Number

TS2 XX-X Interconnect Format = TS2 XX–X = Cycle / Split Combination

COS XXX Interconnect Format = STD XXX = Cycle / Offset / Split Combination

12-38 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Status Displays
Preemptor Status Display, MM-7-3-1

Parameter Definition Ranges

Current Coordination Status

FREE Free

SYNC Sync Pulse

PICKUP In pickup mode

COORD Coordinated (in step)

N/A
DWELL Dwelling / Transition

ADDONLY Add Only Transition

DEDUCT Subtracting in Smooth

Transition

ADDING Adding in Smooth Transition

Ring and Active Phase for the Ring — Preemptor Status, MM-7-3-1,
Line 9
If a Ring is not active, the phase is a “.”

Parameter Definition Ranges

RX/PH YY Ring Number/Active Phase X = 1 thru 4 YY = 1 thru 16

For example, R1/PH 4|R2/PH 8|R3/PH .|R4/PH .

shows that Ring 1 has active phase 4| Ring 2 has active phase 8| Ring 3 is not active|
Ring 4 is not active

Preemptor Interval Status — Preemptor Status, MM-7-3-1, Line 10

Parameter Definition

NOT PMT Not in Preemption

PMT STRT Preemptor going to Entrance phases
CLR TRK Preemptor going to Track Clear phases and functions
DWL/CYCL Preemptor is in the dwell
cycle movement
EXITING Preemptor Exit

ASC/3 Programming Manual 12-39

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Status Displays
Preemptor Status Display, MM-7-3-1

Active Phase Timing and Intervals — Preemptor Status, MM-7-3-1,

Line 11
Up to two active timers or intervals are shown simultaneously for the related ring.

Note • For a timer, the timer value is shown to its right.

Parameter Definition

EXT1 Green vehicle extension

EXT2 Green vehicle extension 2
GAPr Gap reduction is in effect
GRNp Preemptor minimum green override
GRN HOLD Phase in HOLD interval
GRN REST Phase rests in absence of calls
GRN XFER Phase awaits timeout of another phase
INACTIVE Ring is inactive
MGRN1 Minimum Green
MGRN2 Bike minimum green
MGRa Additional Initial Green
MGRNd Delay green for early walk
MGRNc Conditional Service minimum green
MGRNg Guaranteed minimum green
PED ONLY Phase is timing pedestrian timing only
RED– Vehicle red clearance
RED REST Red rest
REDg Guaranteed red clearance
REDp Preemptor red override
RED EXTEND Phase is timing red extension
RED XFER Phase is in red transfer

RRVT Phase is next but its red revert is timing

12-40 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Status Displays
Preemptor Status Display, MM-7-3-1

Parameter Definition

YEL– Vehicle yellow change

YELg Guaranteed yellow change
YELp Preemptor yellow override

Phase Termination Timing, Preemptor Status, MM-7-3-1, Line 12

When a phase is terminated (during yellow change and red clearance), the reason for the
termination is shown here.

Parameter Definition

FORCE OFF Terminated by command or force-off signal

GAP OUT Gap between vehicles exceeded gap-out limit in effect in volume
density operation
GUAR PASS Full vehicle extension timed after time out of reduced gap
MAN ADV Terminated by manual advance
MAX1 Max 1 is timing
MAX2 Max 2 is timing
MAX3 Max 3 is timing
MAXD Max Dynamic is timing
MAX OUT Green ext time reached its maximum limit
MAX GAP Minimum gap was in effect when gap-out occurred
PDCL Ped Clearance
PC–1 Ped Clear 1 is timing
PC–2 Ped Clear 2 is timing
PC–G Guarantee Ped Clear is timing
PC–M Ped Clear Max is timing
PC–P Preemptor is timing Ped Clear
PREEMPT Terminated by preemption

REDm Vehicle red clearance maximum

ASC/3 Programming Manual 12-41

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Status Displays
Preemptor Status Display, MM-7-3-1

Parameter Definition

SPLT SPLT: Coordinator or TSP/SCP split timing is being used for the
phase MAX time.
TSP TSP Split is timing
WK–1 Walk 1 is timing
WK–G Guarantee Walk is timing
WALK HOLD The phase is in Walk Hold
WALK REST The Phase is in Walk Rest
WK–2 Walk 2 is timing
WLFT Pre Time Walk (FT) is timing
WL-P Preemptor is timing walk
WK-M Walk max is timing

Preemptor (PMT) & Transit Signal Priority (TSP) Input Status

Preemptor Status, MM-7-3-1, Line 15
10 possible Preempts (1 thru 10) are on the left, and 6 possible TSPs (1 thru 6) are on the
right

Parameter Definition

PMT Status (left 1 thru 10)

— Not Programmed
R Re-service period
I Preemptor is Inhibited
D Delay timer is running for that preempt
A Preempt run is active
C Call, but that preempt is not yet active
. Preempt is programmed/enabled, but there is no activity on it

12-42 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Status Displays
Preemptor Status Display, MM-7-3-1

Parameter Definition

TSP Input Status (right 1 thru 6)

X TSP is not programmed correctly

(omits on TSP phases, no TSP pattern, no TSP phases)
R Re-service period
I Inhibited
A Call is being served
N NTCIP Commanded
C Call from inputs
. Enabled and Idle

Logic Processor Flag Status, Preemptor Status, MM-7-3-1, Line 16

16 possible Logic Processor Flags, 1 thru 16

LP FLAG Definition

A Active
. Inactive
— Not used

ASC/3 Programming Manual 12-43

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Status Displays
TSP/SCP Status Display, MM-7-3-2

TSP/SCP Status Display, MM-7-3-2 12

For more information about Transit Signal Priority (TSP) and Signal Control and
Prioritization (SCP), refer to the TSP User Guide, ASC/3, P/N 100-0903-003.

When in a hyperlink field:

To follow the hyperlink:

For ASC/3, press SPEC FUNC, then

NEXT DATA.

For 2070, press B.

To go back:

For ASC/3, press SUB MENU.

For 2070, press ESC.

Active Plan or State — Controller Status, MM-7-3-2, Line 1

For this information (same as in the Main Status Display), refer to the table
ActivePlanorState—ControllerStatus(MM-7-1,MM-7-2,MM-7-3-1/2),Line 1 on page 12-3.

Other Entries on Controller Status, Line 1

Current Controller Date in MM/DD/YY format
Current Controller Time in HH:MM:SS format

Phase Status, in Order of Precedence — TSP/SCP Status, MM-7-3-2,

Line 3

PH STAT Definition

— Phase is not enabled

N Phase in Next
R Phase is timing Red
Y Phase is timing Yellow
y (lower case y) special Protected Permitted Left Turn (PPLT) yellow
D Phase is timing delay green
. Phase is Red and not timing

G Phase is Green

12-44 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Status Displays
TSP/SCP Status Display, MM-7-3-2

PH STAT Definition

X Simultaneous Red/Yellow (orange)

F# (special) Canadian FF (future native feature) F1, F2, F3

Vehicle Overlaps — TSP/SCP Status, MM-7-3-2, Line 4

VEH OVL Definition

- Overlap is not programmed (omitted)

A Overlap is timing Advance green
N Overlap is next
Y Overlap is timing Yellow
y (special) Protected Permitted Left Turn (PPLT)
G Overlap is green
F# Flashing Green Overlap
L Overlap is Timing Lagging green
R Overlap is Red

Pedestrian Overlap Status (order of precedence) — TSP/SCP Status,

MM-7-3-2, Line 5

PED OVL Definition

- PED is not enabled

N PED is next
W PED is timing/in WALK
C PED is timing PED CLEAR
O PED is Omitted
D PED is in DON'T WALK

ASC/3 Programming Manual 12-45

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Status Displays
TSP/SCP Status Display, MM-7-3-2

Vehicle Call Information — TSP/SCP Status, MM-7-3-2, Line 6

VEH CALL Definition

O Phase Omitted
E Red extension call
C Active vehicle detector call
B Bike call
I Call placed by internal application (Power Up, Preemptor, Keypad input)
N Phase is non-actuated (CNA1, CNA2, Pre-timed)
F Call placed by detector diagnostic (Failed Detector)
M Max recall programmed for phase
R Vehicle recall programmed for phase
X Call placed by Max out
L Locked vehicle detector call
S Call placed by Soft recall or do not rest here
. No phase demand

To make a Vehicle Call:

1 Go to MM-7-3-2, Line 4, VEH CALL.

2 Obey the applicable procedure, below.

To Make a Vehicle Call on: Procedure

All Phases 1 Move the cursor to the second L of VEH CALL

2 Press ENTER.

One Phase (range 1 thru 16) 1 Move the cursor to the applicable phase, 1 thru 16.

2 Press ENTER.

One Phase (range 1 thru 10) 1 Move the cursor to anywhere in the VEH CALL line.

2 Press the applicable number key 1 thru 0.

Note • You can use the same procedure, above, to make a Vehicle Call from any status
display that has the VEH CALL parameter.

12-46 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Status Displays
TSP/SCP Status Display, MM-7-3-2

Pedestrian Call Information — TSP/SCP Status, MM-7-3-2, Line 7

PED CALL Definition

O Ped Omitted
C Active Pedestrian Detector Call
2 Active Pedestrian 2 Detector Call
I Call placed by internal application (Power Up, Keypad input, Logic)
N Pedestrian Phase is non-actuated (CNA1, CNA2, Pre-timed)
F Call placed by detector diagnostic (Failed Detector)
R Pedestrian Recall
L Locked pedestrian call on the phase
. No Pedestrian demand

To make a Pedestrian Call:

1 Go to MM-7-3-2, Line 5, PED CALL.

2 Obey the applicable procedure, below.

To Make a Pedestrian Call on: Procedure

All Phases 1 Move the cursor to the second L of PED CALL

2 Press ENTER.

One Phase (range 1 thru 16) 1 Move the cursor to the applicable phase, 1 thru 16.

2 Press ENTER.

One Phase (range 1 thru 10) 1 Move the cursor to anywhere in the PED CALL line.

2 Press the applicable number key 1 thru 0.

Note • You can use the same procedure, above, to make a Pedestrian Call from any
status display that has the PED CALL parameter.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 12-47

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Status Displays
TSP/SCP Status Display, MM-7-3-2

Active TSP/SCP Plan — TSP/SCP Status, MM-7-3-2, Line 8 (left side)

Parameter Definition Range

ACT TSP/SCP Number of the active TSP/SCP plan 1 thru 6

TSP/SCP Plan Status — TSP/SCP Status, MM-7-3-2, Line 8 (right

side)

Parameter Definition Range

STATUS TSP Status for the TSP plans X = D, P, I, O, H, or E

1X D = TSP/SCP Disabled
2X P = No valid TSP/SCP Pattern
3X I = TSP Phase inhibited
4X O = Omits on TSP/SCP phases
5X H = No TSP/SCP phases
6X E = Enabled and Idle

Current Controller Configuration — TSP/SCP Status, MM-7-3-2,

Line 9

Hyperlink Fields

Parameter Definition Range

PLAN SPLT:XXX Plan Split Pattern Number XXX = 001 thru 120
TP:XX Timing Plan Number XX = 01 thru 04
SEQ:XX Sequence Page Number XX = 01 thru 16
ACT:XXX Action Plan Number XXX = 001 thru 100
DP:X Detector Plan Number X = 1 thru 4

12-48 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Status Displays
TSP/SCP Status Display, MM-7-3-2

Coordination-Specific Timing Information, TSP/SCP Status,

MM-7-3-2, Line 10
These are in four separate areas, as show below: Local Cycle Counter, System Cycle
Counter, Current Coordination Status, and Highest Priority Telemetry Address

Parameter Definition Ranges

LC:XXX+/YYY + = s for seconds YYY = actual cycle

Local Cycle Counter XXX = counter
or % for percent length programmed

SC:XXX+ System Cycle Counter (Master + = s for seconds

XXX = counter
Clock) or % for percent

Current Coordination Status

FREE Free

SYNC Sync Pulse

PICKUP In pickup mode

COORD Coordinated (in step)

N/A
DWELL Dwelling / Transition

ADDONLY Add Only Transition

DEDUCT Subtracting in Smooth

Transition

ADDING Adding in Smooth Transition

Highest Priority Telemetry Address

TLM ADD XXXXX Highest Priority Telemetry

XXXXX = 0 thru 65535
Address

Ring and Active Phase for the Ring — TSP/SCP Status, MM-7-3-2,
Line 11
If a Ring is NOT active, the phase is a “.”

Parameter Definition Ranges

RX/PH YY Ring Number/Active Phase X = 1 thru 4 YY = 1 thru 16

For example, R1/PH 4|R2/PH 8|R3/PH .|R4/PH .

shows that Ring 1 has active phase 4| Ring 2 has active phase 8| Ring 3 is not active|
Ring 4 is not active

ASC/3 Programming Manual 12-49

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Status Displays
TSP/SCP Status Display, MM-7-3-2

Active Phase Timing and Intervals — TSP/SCP Status, MM-7-3-2,

Line 12

Note • For a timer, the timer value is shown to its right.

Parameter Definition

EXT1 Green vehicle extension

EXT2 Green vehicle extension 2
GAPr Gap reduction is in effect
GRNp Preemptor minimum green override
GRN HOLD Phase in HOLD interval
GRN REST Phase rests in absence of calls
GRN XFER Phase awaits timeout of another phase
INACTIVE Ring is inactive
MGRN1 Minimum Green
MGRN2 Bike minimum green
MGRa Additional Initial Green
MGRNd Delay green for early walk
MGRNc Conditional Service minimum green
MGRNg Guaranteed minimum green
PED ONLY Phase is timing pedestrian timing only
RED– Vehicle red clearance
RED REST Red rest
REDg Guaranteed red clearance
REDp Preemptor red override
RED EXTEND Phase is timing red extension
RED XFER Phase is in red transfer
RRVT Phase is next but its red revert is timing
YEL– Vehicle yellow change

12-50 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Status Displays
TSP/SCP Status Display, MM-7-3-2

Parameter Definition

YELg Guaranteed yellow change

YELp Preemptor yellow override

Phase Termination Timing, TSP/SCP Status, MM-7-3-2, Line 13

When a phase is terminated (during yellow change and red clearance), the reason for the
termination is shown here.

Parameter Definition

FORCE OFF Terminated by command or force-off signal

GAP OUT Gap between vehicles exceeded gap-out limit in effect in volume
density operation
GUAR PASS Full vehicle extension timed after time out of reduced gap
MAN ADV Terminated by manual advance
MAX1 Max 1 is timing
MAX2 Max 2 is timing
MAX3 Max 3 is timing
MAXD Max Dynamic is timing
MAX OUT Green ext time reached its maximum limit
MAX GAP Minimum gap was in effect when gap-out occurred
PC–1 Ped Clear 1 is timing
PC–2 Ped Clear 2 is timing
PC–G Guarantee Ped Clear is timing
PC–M Ped Clear Max is timing
PC–P Preemptor is timing Ped Clear
PREEMPT Terminated by preemption
REDm Vehicle red clearance maximum
SPLT SPLT: Coordinator or TSP/SCP split timing is being used for the
phase MAX time.
TSP TSP Split is timing

ASC/3 Programming Manual 12-51

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Status Displays
TSP/SCP Status Display, MM-7-3-2

Parameter Definition

WK–1 Walk 1 is timing

WK–G Guarantee Walk is timing
WALK HOLD The phase is in Walk Hold
WALK REST The Phase is in Green Reset
WK–2 Walk 2 is timing
WLFT Pre Time Walk (FT) is timing
WL-P Preemptor is timing walk
WK-M Walk max is timing

Preemptor (PMT) & Transit Signal Priority (TSP) Input Status

TSP/SCP Status, MM-7-3-2, Line 15
10 possible Preempts (1 thru 10) are on the left, and 6 possible TSPs (1 thru 6) are on the
right

PMT/TSP Definition

PMT Status (left 1 thru 10)

- Not Programmed
R Re-service period
I Preemptor is Inhibited
D Delay timer is running for that preempt
A Preempt run is active
C Call, but that preempt is not yet active
. Preempt is programmed/enabled, but there is no activity on it

12-52 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Status Displays
TSP/SCP Status Display, MM-7-3-2

PMT/TSP Definition

TSP Input Status (right 1 thru 6)

- Disabled
X TSP is not programmed correctly
(omits on TSP phases, no TSP pattern, no TSP phases)
R Re-service period
I Inhibited
A Call is being served
N NTCIP Commanded
C Call from inputs
. Enabled, but there is no activity on it
G A TSP phase is timing in early or Extended Green

TSP/SCP Field Testing

To test operation and place a manual TSP/SCP call:

1 Go to MM-7-3-2.

2 Move the cursor to the applicable TSP input field on the PMT/TSP row, Line 15.

3 Press ENTER and hold the key down. This will apply a continuous pulsing signal to the
designated TSP input, simulating a TSP call.

Logic Processor Flag Status, TSP/SCP Status, MM-7-3-2, Line 16

16 possible Logic Processor Flags, 1 thru 16

LP FLAG Definition

A Active
. Inactive
- Not used

ASC/3 Programming Manual 12-53

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Status Displays
Time Base Status Display, MM-7-4

Time Base Status Display, MM-7-4 12

Shows the current schedule, day plan, event and the corresponding start time and action
plan if a Time Base Control (TBC) day plan is in effect. The next 9 events and their
corresponding schedule, day plan, event start time and action plan are also shown.

When in a hyperlink field:

To follow the hyperlink:

For ASC/3, press SPEC FUNC, then

NEXT DATA.

For 2070, press B.

To go back:

For ASC/3, press SUB MENU.

For 2070, press ESC.

Time Base Status, MM-7-4, Line 1

Current Controller Date in MM/DD/YY format
Current Controller Time in HH:MM:SS format

12-54 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Status Displays
Time Base Status Display, MM-7-4

Source of Command, Time Base Status, MM-7-4, Line 2 (left side)

SOURCE Definition

MANUAL Source of Command is Manual

HOLIDAY Source of Command is based on Holiday schedule
TIMEBASE Source of Command is based on Timebase schedule
TELEMETRY Source of Command is based on Telemetry

Next Day Plan, Time Base Status, MM-7-4, Line 2 (right side)

Parameter Definition Range

NEXT DAY PLAN The next scheduled day plan Day of the Week, SUN thru SAT

Entries on Time Base Status, MM-7-4, Line 2 (right side)

Current Controller Date in MM/DD/YY format
Current Controller Time in HH:MM:SS format

Schedule Commands 1 thru 30, Time Base Status, MM-7-4, Lines 4

thru 33 (column 1)

Parameter Definition Range

SCHDL Schedule 0 thru 200

When this Schedule is programmed, it overrides the schedule selected
from the schedule plan in MM-5-2. When the Schedule command is in
effect, the screen only shows the events, start times and action plans of
the day plan in effect.

Day Plan, Time Base Status, MM-7-4, Lines 4 thru 33 (column 2)

Parameter Definition Range

DAY PLN Day Plan 0 thru 16

When this Day Plan is programmed, it overrides the other day plan
commands. When the Day Plan command is in effect, the screen only
shows the events, start times and action plans of the day plan in effect.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 12-55

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Status Displays
Time Base Status Display, MM-7-4

Day Plan Event Command, Time Base Status, MM-7-4, Lines 4 thru 33
(column 3)

Parameter Definition Range

DP EVENT Day Plan Event Command 0 thru 16

This must be an event in the day plan in effect. When programmed, it
overrides the current event selected by the time-of-day.

Action Plan, Time Base Status, MM-7-4, Lines 4 thru 33 (column 4)

Parameter Definition Range

ACT PLN Action Plan Command 0 thru 100

This overrides any other action plan commands.

Day Plan Event Start Time, Time Base Status, MM-7-4, Lines 4
thru 33 (column 5)

Parameter Definition Range

START Day Plan event start time Time

00:00 thru 23:59
This is the start time of the Day Plan, scheduled in MM-5-3.
Once selected, the day plan will stay in effect until another Day (hour and minute)
Plan Event is selected. Refer to NTCIP 1201 2.4.4.3.

12-56 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Status Displays
Communications Submenu, MM-7-5

Communications Submenu, MM-7-5 12

COMMUNICATIONS SUBMENU
1. ETHERNET 5. NTCIP
2. PORT 2/C50S 6. ECPIP
3. PORT 3A/C21S 7. IEEE 1570
4. PORT 3B/C22S

This display lists seven communications status data display groups that are briefly
described below. This menu and the displays for Serial Ports are applicable to ASC/3 and
2070 controllers, unless otherwise indicated.
For your convenience, all Communications Status displays are hyperlinked to their related
Configuration displays.

Ethernet Communication Status, MM-7-5-1 12

ETHERNET THU 02/07/12│17:48:30

MAC ADDRESS...........
00:00:00:00:00:00
LINK SPEED/DUPLEX............. 100/FULL
RX PACKET COUNT................... 65535
TX PACKET COUNT................... 65535
RX PACKET ERROR COUNT............. 65535
TX PACKET ERROR COUNT............. 65535
DEFAULT GATEWAY REACHABLE........... YES

SERVER REACHABLE....................
YES

To reset some parameters:

 Press CLEAR — for 2070, press C

ASC/3 Programming Manual 12-57

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Status Displays
Ports 2/C50S, 3A/C21S, 3B/C22S Status

MM-7-5-1
Parameter Description

MAC ADDRESS The Media Access Control (MAC) address uniquely

identifies the Controller Unit on Ethernet networks.
It is factory-programmed and can NOT be changed.
LINK SPEED/DUPLEX Interface bandwidth in bits per second. The link speed
and duplex setting is auto-negotiated when the
controller is connected to an Ethernet network in the
order that follows:
100/FULL
100/HALF
10/FULL
10/HALF
RX PACKET COUNT Total packets Received on the interface
TX PACKET COUNT Total packets Transmitted on the interface
RX PACKET ERROR COUNT The number of Inbound packets that contained errors
TX PACKET ERROR COUNT The number of Outbound packets that could NOT be
transmitted
DEFAULT GATEWAY REACHABLE The default gateway (configured in MM-1-5-1) has
received and responded to an ICMP ping packet
SERVER REACHABLE The server (configured in MM-1-5-1) has received and
responded to an ICMP ping packet

Ports 2/C50S, 3A/C21S, 3B/C22S Status 12

Serial Ports generally have similar functions, but their front-panel connectors are different.
ASC/3 serial ports:
 Can operate in the same four Protocols (ECPIP, TERMINAL, NTCIP and AB3418)
and
 The information is in the same format in each status display, with Port status on the
left and Protocol status on the right.

Note • The 2070 serial ports have Protocol limitations, which are shown at the
bottom of the display, when applicable.

12-58 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Status Displays
Ports 2/C50S, 3A/C21S, 3B/C22S Status

To select the Protocol:

1 Go to the configuration display for the communication port — for example, MM-1-5-
2 for Port 2/C50S or MM-1-5-3 for Port 3A/C21S.
2 Toggle the PROTOCOL parameter to the applicable Protocol (ECPIP, TERMINAL,
NTCIP or AB3418).
The status display then uses the Protocol selected during controller configuration to adjust
the status display to show the relevant and/or supported fields. Each display has its status
in a 2-column format: the left column shows Port status and the right column shows
Protocol status.
The sections that follow give:
 The Port fields for each platform
 A description of the common Protocol variations
 A description of the global NTCIP and ECPIP Protocol status displays. This is because
they contain communications status information that is not port-specific.

Serial Ports with Terminal Protocol, Status Displays

ASC/3 Ports 2070 Ports

MM-7-5-2, Port 2 MM-7-5-2, Port C50S

COMM PORT 2 NNN DD/MM/YY|HH:MM:SS COMM PORT C50S NNN DD/MM/YY|HH:MM:SS
RECEIVE.......... X PROTOCOL..... TERM RECEIVE.......... X PROTOCOL..... TERM
TRANSMIT......... X RX BYTE COUNT. 65535 TRANSMIT......... X
READY TO SEND.... X TX BYTE COUNT. 65535
CLEAR TO SEND.... X
DATA TERM READY.. X
DATA SET READY... X
CARRIER DETECT... X

ASC/3 Programming Manual 12-59

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Status Displays
Ports 2/C50S, 3A/C21S, 3B/C22S Status

ASC/3 Ports 2070 Ports

MM 7-5-3, Port 3A MM 7-5-3, Port C21S

COMM PORT 3A NNN DD/MM/YY|HH:MM:SS COMM PORT C21S NNN DD/MM/YY|HH:MM:SS

RECEIVE.......... X PROTOCOL..... TERM RECEIVE.......... X PROTOCOL..... TERM
TRANSMIT......... X RX BYTE COUNT. 65535 TRANSMIT......... X RX BYTE COUNT. 65535
READY TO SEND.... X TX BYTE COUNT. 65535 READY TO SEND.... X TX BYTE COUNT. 65535
CARRIER DETECT... X CLEAR TO SEND.... X
DATA TERM READY.. X
Note • Port 3A does NOT have the RS-232 flow DATA SET READY... X
control lines listed below. Thus, these CARRIER DETECT... X
status fields are not shown:
CLEAR TO SEND
DATA TERM READY
DATA SET READY

MM 7-5-4 Port 3B MM 7-5-4 Port C22S

COMM PORT 3B NNN DD/MM/YY|HH:MM:SS COMM PORT C22S NNN DD/MM/YY|HH:MM:SS

RECEIVE.......... X PROTOCOL..... TERM RECEIVE.......... X PROTOCOL..... TERM
TRANSMIT......... X RX BYTE COUNT. 65535 TRANSMIT......... X RX BYTE COUNT. 65535
READY TO SEND.... X TX BYTE COUNT. 65535 READY TO SEND.... X TX BYTE COUNT. 65535
CLEAR TO SEND.... X CLEAR TO SEND.... X
DATA TERM READY.. X DATA TERM READY.. X
DATA SET READY... X DATA SET READY... X
CARRIER DETECT... X CARRIER DETECT... X

Parameters for Serial Port Status Displays

Parameter Definition

Port Status

RECEIVE The state of the RXD input signal

TRANSMIT The state of the TXD output signal
READY TO SEND The state of the RTS output signal
CLEAR TO SEND The state of the CTS input signal
DATA TERM READY The state of the DTR output signal
DATA SET READY The state of the DSR input signal
CARRIER DETECT The state of the CD input signal

12-60 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Status Displays
Ports 2/C50S, 3A/C21S, 3B/C22S Status

Parameter Definition

Protocol Status

RX BYTE COUNT Number of characters received

TX BYTE COUNT Number of characters transmitted

Serial Port Status Displays with Other Protocols

The protocol variations that follow are shown with Port 2/C50S and Port 3A/C21S.
However, the protocol-specific fields in the right column are applicable to all serial port
status displays, if they are supported by that port and platform. Refer to Appendix B,
ASC/3 Screens, for other combinations.

ASC/3 Ports 2070 Ports

MM-7-5-2 Port 2 (NTCIP with ASC/3-IM)

Note • Port 2 is the only port that supports the

ASC/3 Intersection Monitor (ASC/3-IM)
feature. MM 7-5-2 Port C50S (NTCIP)
COMM PORT 2 NNN DD/MM/YY|HH:MM:SS COMM PORT C50S NNN DD/MM/YY|HH:MM:SS
RECEIVE.......... X PROTOCOL..... NTCIP RECEIVE.......... X PROTOCOL..... NTCIP
TRANSMIT......... X RX BYTE COUNT. 65535 TRANSMIT......... X RX BYTE COUNT. 65535
READY TO SEND.... X TX BYTE COUNT. 65535 TX BYTE COUNT. 65535
CLEAR TO SEND.... X DROP-OUT TIMER 65535
DATA TERM READY.. X
DATA SET READY... X
CARRIER DETECT... X

INTERSECTION MONITOR:
COMMAND MODEM ANSWER.................. X

MM-7-5-3 Port 3A (ECPIP) MM-7-5-3 Port C21S (ECPIP)

COMM PORT 3A NNN DD/MM/YY|HH:MM:SS This is not supported.
RECEIVE.......... X PROTOCOL..... ECPIP
TRANSMIT......... X RX BYTE COUNT. 65535
READY TO SEND.... X TX BYTE COUNT. 65536
CARRIER DETECT... X DROP-OUT TIMER 65535

MM-7-5-2 Port 2 (AB3418) MM-7-5-2 Port C50S (AB3418)

COMM PORT 2 NNN DD/MM/YY|HH:MM:SS COMM PORT C50S NNN DD/MM/YY|HH:MM:SS
RECEIVE.......... X PROTOCOL..... AB3418 RECEIVE.......... X PROTOCOL..... AB3418
TRANSMIT......... X RX BYTE COUNT. 65535 TRANSMIT......... X RX BYTE COUNT. 65535
READY TO SEND.... X TX BYTE COUNT. 65535 X TX BYTE COUNT. 65535
CLEAR TO SEND.... X DROP-OUT TIMER 65535
DATA TERM READY.. X
DATA SET READY... X
CARRIER DETECT... X

ASC/3 Programming Manual 12-61

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Status Displays
Ports 2/C50S, 3A/C21S, 3B/C22S Status

Parameter Definition

MM-7-5-2, Port 2 (NTCIP with ASC/3-IM)

COMMAND MODEM ANSWER Manually command the ASC/3 to answer an incoming ASC/3
Intersection Monitor (ASC/3-IM) phone call. Press ENTER to take the
phone off-hook. The ‘X’ will clear when the request is processed. If you
do NOT have the ASC/3-IM feature enabled, the request will remain
pending.

MM-7-5-2, Port C50S (NTCIP)

PROTOCOL Provides an NTCIP-compatible connection between computers and

modems. This protocol is designed to function in an NTCIP System.
DROP-OUT TIMER The time from the last valid command before the port goes back to local
control

MM-7-5-3, Port 3A (ECPIP)

PROTOCOL Provides an ECPIP-compatible connection between computers,

modems and Zone Masters. This protocol is designed to function in an
Econolite Aries or Zone Master System

MM-7-5-2, Port 2/C50S (AB3418)

PROTOCOL Supplies an AB4318-compatible connection between computers and

modems. This protocol is designed to comply with the California
AB3418 specification.

12-62 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Status Displays
NTCIP Status Screen, MM-7-5-5

NTCIP Status Screen, MM-7-5-5 12

NTCIP NNN MM/DD/YY|HH:MM:SS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3
DYNAMIC OBJ X X X X X X X X X X X X X
SPECIAL FUNC X X X X X X X X
RX SNMP MESSAGE COUNT............. 65535
TX SNMP MESSAGE COUNT............. 65535
RX STMP MESSAGE COUNT............. 65535
TX STMP MESSAGE COUNT............. 65535
ACTIVE CONTROL PORT................ C50S
LAST TIME SYNC.................... 65535
DATABASE STATE................ ALL SAVED
CONFIGURATION TRANSFER IN PROGRESS. NO

The Communications Status displays for the NTCIP and AB3418 protocols are identical,
except for the PROTOCOL value shown. The NTCIP version is shown above. The
AB3418 version is the same except that AB3418 is shown as the PROTOCOL value. For
definitions of the parameters in this display, refer to the table that follows.

MM-7-5-5
Parameter Description

DYNAMIC OBJ Status fields representing which dynamic objects are valid
(X) or invalid (.) (“under creation” is not shown because it
is a transient state).
There are 13 total dynamic objects.
SPECIAL FUNC The current status of the special function output (logical or
physical) in the device.
X = ON
“.” = OFF
RX SNMP MESSAGE COUNT The total number of Messages delivered to the SNMP
entity from the transport service.
TX SNMP MESSAGE COUNT The total number of SNMP Messages that were passed
from the SNMP protocol entity to the transport service.
RX STMP MESSAGE COUNT The total number of Messages delivered to the STMP entity
from the transport service.
TX STMP MESSAGE COUNT The total number of STMP Messages that were passed
from the SNMP protocol entity to the transport service.
ACTIVE CONTORL PORT This field identifies which hardware port is currently in
control of the Command Objects.
LAST TIME SYNC Seconds since last time sync was received.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 12-63

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Status Displays
ECPIP Status Screen, MM-7-5-6

MM-7-5-5
Parameter Description

DATABASE STATE ALL SAVED: Database changes have been saved to the
NVRAM and files.
SAVED TO NVRAM: Database changes have been saved
to the NVRAM and are being saved to the files.
SAVING - WAIT: Database changes are pending to be
saved to NVRAM and files.
ACQUIRED BY NTCIP: Database has been acquired by
NTCIP command.
ACQUIRED BY USER: Database has been acuired by
user - using key sequences or making changes from the
keyboard.
ACQUIRED BY ECPIP: Database has been acquired by
ECPIP command.
CONFIGURATION Indicates if a configuration transfer is in progress (no, up,
TRANSFER IN PROGRESS or down). Controller configuration transfers are done over
ECPIP or NTCIP or AB3418 (e.g. Aries or icons or Centracs).

ECPIP Status Screen, MM-7-5-6 12

ECPIP NNN DD/MM/YY|HH:MM:SS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
TELEMETRY MODE X X X X X X X
SPECIAL FUNCTION X X X X
RX MESSAGE COUNT.................. 65535
TX MESSAGE COUNT.................. 65535
RX MESSAGE ERROR COUNT............ 65535
TX MESSAGE ERROR COUNT............ 65535
LAST VALID COMMAND................ 65535

LAST TIME SYNC.................... 65535

CONFIGURATION TRANSFER IN PROGRESS. NO

To reset some parameters:

 Press CLEAR — for 2070, press C.

12-64 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Status Displays
IEEE 1570 Status, MM-7-5-7

The Communications Status display for the ECPIP protocol gives Activity, Timing, Mode,
and Special Functions information. For definitions of the parameters in this display, refer
to the table that follows.

MM-7-5-6
Parameter Description

TELEMETRY MODE X: Indicates these Telemetry Modes have been

downloaded to this controller:
1 = Dual Coordination
2 = Flash
3 = Free
4 = Max Recall
5, 6, and 7 = Spare
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS X: Indicates these Special Functions have been
downloaded to all addresses:
1 = System Flash
2, 3, and 4 = Spare
RX MESSAGE COUNT Number of valid ECPIP messages received
TX MESSAGE COUNT Number of valid ECPIP messages transmitted
RX MESSAGE ERROR COUNT Number of invalid ECPIP messages received
TX MESSAGE ERROR COUNT Number of invalid ECPIP messages transmitted
LAST VALID COMMAND Seconds since last valid command was received
LAST TIME SYNC Seconds since last time sync was received
CONFIGURATION TRANSFER Indicates if a configuration transfer is in progress (up or
IN PROGRESS down). Controller configuration transfers are done over
ECPIP or NTCIP or AB3418 (e.g. Aries or icons or
Centracs).

IEEE 1570 Status, MM-7-5-7 12

Refer to the IEEE 1570 User Guide, P/N 100-0903-008, for complete a description of the
Status screen.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 12-65

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Status Displays
Detector Status Display, MM-7-6

Detector Status Display, MM-7-6 12

This display has status display positions for all detectors (01-64).

When in a hyperlink field:

To follow the hyperlink:

For ASC/3, press SPEC FUNC, then

NEXT DATA.

For 2070, press B.

To go back:

For ASC/3, press SUB MENU.

For 2070, press ESC.

To know the status of a detector:

1 Move the cursor to a programmed detector.

2 To simulate the detector call, press ENTER.

Beep sound: Indicates when the raw detector is active.

MM-7-6
Parameter Description Range

DET Vehicle Detector Number (NTCIP 1202 2.3.2.1) 1-64

To view its status or edit, enter the number of a detector.
Note • This is a hyperlink field, linked to MM-6-2, the Vehicle
Detector Setup for this Detector.
TIME When the detector is being delayed, extending, or is a speed Refer to the
detector, the value is displayed: ranges given in
the column to
0.0-255.0: DELAY countdown, in sec.
the left.
0.0-25.5: EXTEND countdown, in sec.
0-99: The last speed recorded, in MPH
DELAY Detector Delay Time (NTCIP 1202 2.3.2.5) 0.0-255.0 sec.
Defines the time that the raw detector input is ignored or delayed
when the assigned phase is not green.

12-66 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Status Displays
Detector Status Display, MM-7-6

MM-7-6
Parameter Description Range

EXTEND Detector Extend Time (NTCIP 1202 2.3.2.6) 0.0-255.0 sec.

Defines the time that a passage detector extends the assigned phase
after termination of the input.
Note • The assigned phase may also be extended additionally by
the phase extension time (MM-2-1).
DET PH Phases Called by this Detector X
Range: X, “.” “.”
Read only configuration status of this detector that calls and extends
phases in addition to the assigned phase.
01 thru 64 The indications below are in order of precedence. F
Detector 01-64: D
F: Failed diagnostics E
D: Delay is timing C
E: Extend is timing L
C: Active call with no delay or extend S
L: Locked call on the detector input “.”
S: Speed detector “-”
“.”: No activity
“-”: Not programmed, assigned or enabled

ASC/3 Programming Manual 12-67

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Status Displays
Flash/SDLC/MMU Status Display, MM-7-7

Flash/SDLC/MMU Status Display, MM-7-7 12

FLASH/SDLC/MMU STATUS

1. FLASH STATUS

2. SDLC STATUS

3. MMU STATUS

4. MMU EXTENDED STATUS

5. MMU AC STATUS

6. MMU COMPATIBILITY STATUS

Flash Status Display, MM-7-7-1 12

FLASH STATUS:
AUTOMATIC FLASH

AUTO FLASH REMOTE INPUT

RING 1
RING 2

MM-7-7-1 shows the cause of a cabinet Flash condition. The example above is for an
Automatic Flash condition. If there is no flash condition, MM-7-7-1 shows
NO FLASH ACTIVE.

12-68 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Status Displays
Flash Status Display, MM-7-7-1

Note • There may be many flash conditions that are true at the same time.

15 Flash Categories Abbreviations in Flash Status Messages

0 = No Flash Active CFM: Controller Fault Monitor

1 = Power-ON Flash CMU: Conflict Monitor Unit
2 = MMU-initiated flash CRC: Cyclical Redundancy Check
3 = CMU-initiated flash CVM: Controller Voltage Monitor
4 = Controller-initiated CVM flash FIO: Field Input and Output
5 = External Start during Preemption IDOT: Illinois Department of Transportation
6 = Fault flash MIN: Minimum
7 = 3 Critical Errors in 24 hours MON: Monitor
8 = Preemption programmed CVM flash MMU: Malfunction Management Unit
9 = Cabinet Local Flash NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers Association
10 = Preemption-programmed flash PGM’D: Programmed
11 = Automatic/Remote flash RFE: Response Frame Error
12 = FIO card failed or missing (2070) SDLC: Synchronous Data Link Control
13 = Database FIO type mismatch (2070) TF: Terminal and Facilities
14 = Unknown flash source TLM: Telemetry

The information in the 15 categories of flash displays is described in the table below.

Flash Display Information, MM-7-7-1

MM-7-7-1
Parameter Description

Category 0, No Flash Active

NO FLASH ACTIVE

Category 1, Power-ON Flash

POWER ON FLASH

TIMING POWER-ON FLASH The controller is timing Power-ON Flash that was
previously programmed. Refer to Start/Flash Data,
MM-2-5 on page 7-20.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 12-69

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Status Displays
Flash Status Display, MM-7-7-1

MM-7-7-1
Parameter Description

TIMING POWER-ON ALL RED (NO FLASH) This was programmed in MM-2-5.
Although POWER-ON ALL RED is NOT a flash
Condition, it is shown because the controller is still in the
Power-On interval.
EXTERNAL START Flash caused by External Start Input. At power ON to the
Controller, the External Start Input is TRUE and preempt
is active. External Start Input is programmed in the
controller submenu, Start/Flash Data (MM-2-5).
PREEMPTOR CALL INPUT Flash caused by Active Preempt Input. This indicates the
conditions were TRUE when the Controller started.
PREEMPTOR CALL INPUT FROM KEYBOARD Flash caused by Active Preempt Input, activated from the
keypads. This indicates the conditions were TRUE when
the Controller started.
MMU OUTPUT RELAY TRANSFERED MMU is in the flash state

Category 2, MMU-Initiated Flash

These error conditions are as reported by the MMU.

MMU CRITICAL ERROR FLASH - FROM RF129

CONTROLLER VOLTAGE MONITOR The MMU detected a Controller Voltage Monitor/
Controller Fault Monitor failure.
+24 VOLTAGE MONITOR I The MMU detected a +24 Volt Monitor I failure.

+24 VOLTAGE MONITOR II The MMU detected a +24 Volt Monitor II failure.

COLOR CONFLICT Indicates that a color conflict at an intersection caused the

flash condition. The flash status display indicates, with X,
the status of all channels by phase color (red, yellow,
green) at the time the conflict occurred.
An X is shown under each active channel and next to the
corresponding color.
Conflicts can be observed by comparing the phases and
colors. Channel and phase relationships are determined by
the phase-to-load-switch assignment programmed at the
controller.

12-70 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Status Displays
Flash Status Display, MM-7-7-1

MM-7-7-1
Parameter Description

RED FAILURE A red indication was not given when it should have been.
The flash status display shows an X under each channel
and next to the phase color. To identify red failure, check
for X on red on all movements that should indicate red.
MMU DIAGNOSTIC FAILURE The MMU has detected that it has a diagnostic failure. The
Controller is alerted.
MINIMUM CLEARANCE FAILURE The minimum clearance time (yellow) was not long
enough.
PORT 1 TIME OUT The MMU detected a failure from the controller. Possible
causes for this failure include: interrupted
communications between controller and MMU.

Category 3, CMU-INITIATED FLASH

CMU CRITICAL ERROR FLASH

Category 4, CONTROLLER-INITIATED CVM FLASH

Controller Voltage Monitor (CVM)/Controller Fault Monitor (CFM) failure has caused the flash
condition

CRITICAL ERROR FLASH — ASC/3-GENERATED

MEMORY ERROR Memory diagnostics have detected a hardware memory
failure or loss of critical information related to critical
stored data.
CRITICAL PREEMPT ERROR The Preemptor detected a critical preemption-related
error condition (Interlock Fail, Gate Down, etc.)
CYCLE FAILURE ERROR A cycle failure occurs when there are calls present on a
phase that has not been serviced for 2 cycles. Keyboard
reset clears the flash condition.
IDOT CRC CHECK FAILURE IDOT CRC is enabled and one of these two possible
failures occurred:
 An intersection failed the IDOT CRC test at power-
ON.
Or
 The CRC of data entered in Supervisor mode did NOT
match the IDOT hardwired CRC inputs.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 12-71

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Status Displays
Flash Status Display, MM-7-7-1

MM-7-7-1
Parameter Description

COMPATIBILITY ERROR The program on the MMU program card and the MMU
program entered at the controller do not match. The fault
status display shows the channel number(s) where there is
a mismatch, the controller state (0,1), and MMU state
(0 or 1).
The MMU program card should be pulled from the
cabinet to verify (using the Software Modules display,
MM-8-7) whether the controller program or the MMU
program must be corrected, as applicable.
If COMPATIBIITY ERROR is indicated, MM-7-7-6
shows which bits within SDLC response frame 131
(refer to NEMA TS2-2003, - 3.3.1.4.2.3) are in conflict
with programming on MM-1-4-2.
COLOR MISMATCH A color difference was detected between the colors
generated by the controller and the channel colors
returned by the MMU. The flash status display shows the
controller read-back of the MMU channels and phase
colors. An X appears below each channel and next to its
associated phase color. The conflict is summarized at the
bottom of the display where the channel numbers,
mismatched output and MMU colors are indicated. Each
color mismatch will show a two-digit channel number
(01-16) followed by two letters (G for green, Y for yellow,
R for red and N for no color). The first letter represents
the channel color sent by the controller and the second
the channel color seen by the MMU.
Example: 13GN indicates channel 13, output color =
Green, MMU color = No color).
There is a display similar to that shown below.
Color mismatch is by channel, by color. So it is possible to
see a display for Channel 01 as shown below:
COLOR MISMATCH
01GN 01NY 01NR 12GY, etc.
Channel and phase relationships are determined by the
phase-to-load-switch assignment programmed at the
controller. Keyboard reset clears flash condition.

12-72 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Status Displays
Flash Status Display, MM-7-7-1

MM-7-7-1
Parameter Description

Category 5, External Start During Preemption

EXTERNAL START DURING PREEMPT

PREEMPT CALL INPUT Can not exit flash state because a Preemption Call input is
active.
PREEMPT CALL INPUT FROM KEYBOARD Can not exit flash state because a Keyboard-entered
Preemption Call is active.

Category 6, Fault Flash

FAULT FLASH
RFE 128 Flagged if 6 or more out of the last 10 frames (in a second)
are not correctly received
RFE 129 Flagged if 6 or more out of the last 10 frames (in a second)
are not correctly received
RFE 131 Flagged if 6 or more out of the last 10 frames (in a second)
are not correctly received
RFE 138 Flagged if 6 or more out of the last 10 frames (in a second)
are not correctly received
RFE 139 Flagged if 6 or more out of the last 10 frames (in a second)
are not correctly received
RFE 140 Flagged if 6 or more out of the last 10 frames (in a second)
are not correctly received
RFE 141 Flagged if 6 or more out of the last 10 frames (in a second)
are not correctly received
3 CRITICAL ERRORS IN 24 HOURS Flagged if 3 critical RFE errors happened in 24 hours.

Category 7, 3 Critical Errors in 24 Hours

3 CRITICAL ERRORS IN 24 HOURS

Category 8, Preemption Programmed Controller Voltage Monitor (CVM) Flash

PREEMPT PGM’D CVM FLASH

ASC/3 Programming Manual 12-73

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Status Displays
Flash Status Display, MM-7-7-1

MM-7-7-1
Parameter Description

Category 9, Cabinet Local Flash

LOCAL FLASH INPUT The local flash input from the cabinet is active.
Example: Police switch at the cabinet.

Category 10, Preemption-Programmed Flash

PREEMPT PGM’D FLASH Preemptor program is calling for flash as part of the
preemption sequence.
RING 1 Ring commanded to flash
RING 2
RING 3
RING 4

Category 11, Automatic/Remote Flash

AUTOMATIC FLASH
AUTO FLASH LOCAL INPUT If IDOT CRC is indicated on the same line, then the
automatic flash is caused by a detected IDOT CRC error.
Ring 1-4 flash is shown for the Preemptor.
AUTO FLASH REMOTE INPUT Flash triggered by Flash Remote input

PREEMPTOR COMMANDED FLASH Flash triggered by the Preemptor input programmed in

MM-4-1.
COORDINATOR PATTERN FLASH Coordinator Pattern 255 commanded flash.

TIME BASE COMMANDED FLASH A time-of-day program step is calling for flash. To disable
flash, modify the time-of-day program step.
RING 1 Ring commanded to flash by the coordinator pattern 255
RING 2
RING 3
RING 4

Category 12, FIO Card Failed Or Missing (2070)

FIO CARD FAILED OR MISSING

Category 13, DATABASE FIO TYPE MISMATCH (2070)

DATABASE FIO TYPE MISMATCH

12-74 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Status Displays
SDLC (Port 1) Status, MM-7-7-2

MM-7-7-1
Parameter Description

Category 14, Unknown Flash Source

UNDEFINED FLASH SOURCE REPORTED

SDLC (Port 1) Status, MM-7-7-2 12

When in a hyperlink field:

To follow the hyperlink:

For ASC/3, press SPEC FUNC, then

NEXT DATA.

For 2070, press B.

To go back:

For ASC/3, press SUB MENU.

For 2070, press ESC.

MM-7-7-2
Parameter Description

SDLC STATUS Note • This is a hyperlink field, linked to MM-1-4-1, which

configures Port 1 (SDLC).

MMU MMU = Malfunction Management Unit

TF TF = Terminal and Facilities
MMU STATUS
MMU STATUS = Shows what was programmed in
DET
TEST MM-1-4-1, for ENABLE MMU EXTENDED STATUS.
DET = Detector
TEST = Diagnostics Frame
The real-time status for each SDLC response frame:
0-5: There has been the indicated number of Response Frame
Errors in the past 10 transmissions.
6-10: There has been the indicated number of Response Frame
Errors in the past 10 transmissions. The SDLC command
response is failed.
DISABLED: The Command is not enabled.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 12-75

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Status Displays
MMU Status, MM-7-7-3

MMU Status, MM-7-7-3 12

EDI or RENO MMU Other MMUs

MMU STATUS MFG: EDI MMU STATUS MFG: ...........

CHANNEL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 CHANNEL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
RED..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RED..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
YELLOW.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . YELLOW.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GREEN... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GREEN... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FAULT... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FAULT... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ENA-Y-CK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENA-Y-CK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FAIL STATS X RLY TRANFR X CONFLICT... X FAIL STATS . RLY TRANFR . CONFLICT... .
FIELD CHK X DUAL IND . X SPARE BIT 3 X SPARE 1... . SPARE 2... . SPARE 3.... .
EXT WDOG.. X Y+R CLR... X SPARE BIT 6 X SPARE 4... . SPARE 5... . SPARE 6.... .
PORT 1 FL. X RED FAIL.. X MIN CL FAIL X PORT 1 FL. . RED FAIL.. . MIN CL FAIL .
CVM....... X MMU DIAG.. X STRUP FL CL X CVM....... . MMU DIAG.. . STRUP FL CL .
24V MON 1. X 24V MON 2. X 24V MON INH X 24V MON 1. . 24V MON 2. . 24V MON INH .
MMU RESET. X RED ENABLE X LOCAL AU/FL X MMU RESET. . RED ENABLE . LOCAL AU/FL .
FL TIME. s 24V LATCH. X CVM LATCH.. X FL TIME. 5s 24V LATCH. X CVM LATCH.. X

MM-7-7-3
Line(s) Parameter—MMU Status Description

1 MFG Name of the manufacturer of the MMU.

3 thru 5 RED This data shows a comparison of channel colors sent by the
YELLOW ASC/3 controller (CU) and channel colors reported by the
GREEN
MMU. Each channel color may have one the following four
values:
“.” : The CU did not set a channel color and none was
reported by the MMU.
C: The CU set this channel color, but it was not reported
by the MMU.
M: The MMU reported this channel color, but it was not
set by the CU.
X: The CU channel color matches the channel color
reported by the MMU.
6 FAULT These are MMU detected-and-reported channel (not phase)
faults. This information is a summary of all channel faults.
The user must examine other information returned by the
MMU to determine the exact fault source.

12-76 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Status Displays
MMU Status, MM-7-7-3

MM-7-7-3
Line(s) Parameter—MMU Status Description

7 ENA-Y-CK Enabled Yellow Check

SDLC Response Frame 131, bits 129-144, returns an exact
image of the Minimum Yellow Change Disable status
programmed in the MMU. We have chosen to show the
inversion of this channel data:
X: The feature is enabled.
“.” : The feature is disabled.
8 FAIL STATS Type 129 Response Frame
Immediate Response to Failure detected.
8 RLY TRANFR X: The Fail Output Relay of the MMU is closed.
8 CONFLICT X: The MMU senses two or more signals in conflict. Refer to
more help on FIELD CHK bit (MM-7-7-3).
9 SPARE 1 X: indicates the EDI or Reno A&E MMU is reporting a Field
FIELD CHECK STATUS or Check Fault or Field Check Status.
FIELD CHECK FAULT
The MMU continuously checks to see if the colors received
on its channel inputs match the colors in SDLC Command
sent by the Controller Unit. These are Field Check Status bits
that show the channel(s) on which the faulty colors were
detected.
The Field Check Status is reported with the Conflict, Red Fail,
Clearance Fail, or Dual Indication monitoring functions of
the MMU to produce additional diagnostic information about
the detected fault. If a Conflict, Red Fail, Clearance Fail, or
Dual Indication Fail occurs, the MMU will also identify the
field inputs that did not match the Controller Unit output
data (Spare Bit #1/FLDCHK FLT is set). This indicates that
the cause of the Conflict, Red Fail, Clearance Fail, or Dual
Indication malfunction was due to a problem in the load bay
or field wiring or field loads on the reported channel(s).
Note that if a Conflict, Red Fail, Clearance Fail, or Dual
Indication fault is reported with NO Field Check Status
(Spare Bit #1/FLDCHK FLT is clear), then the cause of the
malfunction could be related to the Controller or MMU
programming or both.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 12-77

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Status Displays
MMU Status, MM-7-7-3

MM-7-7-3
Line(s) Parameter—MMU Status Description

9 SPARE 1 When a Field Check Fault occurs (Spare Bit #1/FLDCHK

FIELD CHECK STATUS or FLT is set, and no other fault bits are set) then the colors
(cont.) FIELD CHECK FAULT
failed to match 10 consecutive times without causing a
Conflict, Red Fail, Clearance Fail, or Dual Indication Fail.
This is typically related to a Controller/MMU programming
error or cabinet miswiring issue.
Refer to help text for FC/RED, FC/YELLOW, and
FC/GREEN in MM-7-7-4. This information is returned in
SDLC Response Frame 129, bit 67.
9 SPARE 2 X: The EDI or Reno A&E MMU is reporting a Dual
DUAL INDICATOR Indication Fault (multiple colors on the same channel).
This information is returned in SDLC Response Frame 129,
bit 68. Refer to more help on FIELD CHK bit (MM-7-7-3).
9 SPARE 3 X: The EDI MMU is reporting a Recurrent Pulse Detection
RECURRENT PULSE Status.
DETECTION
Refer to the help text for RP/RED, RP/YELLOW and
RP/GREEN in MM-7-7-4. This information is returned in
SDLC Response Frame 129, bit 69.
10 SPARE 4 X: The EDI or Reno A&E MMU is reporting the External
EXTERNAL WATCHDOG Watchdog Fault.
FAULT.
This information is returned in SDLC Response Frame 129,
bit 70.
10 SPARE 5 X: The EDI or Reno A&E MMU is reporting a Yellow/Red
YELLOW/RED CLEARANCE Clearance Fault (short yellow or short yellow/red).
FAULT
This information is returned in SDLC Response Frame 129,
bit 71. Refer to more help on FIELD CHK bit (MM-7-7-3).
10 SPARE 6 Currently not used. This information is returned in SDLC
Response Frame 129, bit 72.
11 PORT 1 FL Type 129 Response Frame. Port 1 Timeout Failure detected.
11 RED FAIL X: One or more channels do not display a green or yellow or
red as sensed by the MMU. Refer to more help on FIELD
CHK bit (MM-7-7-3).
11 MIN CL FAIL X: The minimum clearance between greens was less than
2.6 seconds, as sensed by the MMU.

12-78 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Status Displays
MMU Status, MM-7-7-3

MM-7-7-3
Line(s) Parameter—MMU Status Description

12 CVM X: The MMU is reporting a Controller Voltage

Monitor/Fault Monitor condition. This information is
returned in SDLC Response Frame 129, bit 57.
12 MMU DIAG X: The MMU is reporting an internal diagnostic failure. This
information is returned in SDLC Response Frame 129, bit 73.
12 STRUP FL CL X: The MMU is about to transfer the Output relay to the NO
FAULT state. To allow the CU to revert to its out-of-flash
state, the signal is generated for ½ second before the Output
relay changes state. This information is returned in SDLC
Response Frame 129, bit 80.
13 24V MON 1 X: +24 VDC Monitor Input 1 is less than +18 VDC, as
measured by the MMU.
13 24V MON 2 X: The +24 VDC Monitor Input 2 is less than +18 VDC, as
measured by the MMU.
13 24V MON INH X: The +24 VDC Monitor Inhibit input to the MMU is active.
14 MMU RESET X: The reset input to the MMU is active.
14 RED ENABLE X: The red enable input to the MMU is active.
14 LOCAL AU/FL X: The MMU’s local/cabinet flash input is TRUE. This
information is returned in SDLC Response Frame 129, bit 79.
Note • This NEMA label is misleading because the status
has nothing to do with Automatic Flash.

15 FL TIME X: The value, in seconds, of the MMU Flash Time (6-16

seconds) programmed in the MMU. This information is
returned in SDLC Response Frame 131, bits 145-148.
15 24V LATCH X: This row shows +24 Volt Latch programming in the
MMU.
15 CVM LATCH This is the status of the CVM/Fault Monitor latch option that
is programmed in the MMU.
X: The MMU is programmed to latch these failure conditions.
This information is returned in SDLC Response Frame 131,
bit 150.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 12-79

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Status Displays
MMU Extended Status, MM-7-7-4

MMU Extended Status, MM-7-7-4 12

MMU EXT STATUS MFG: ….

CHANNEL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
FC/RED.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FC/YEL.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FC/GREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RP/RED.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RP/YEL.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RP/GREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RY GON.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FAULT... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LAST FAULT REPORT: 00:00:00 00/00/00
NO FAULT

If this feature is disabled, the display below will come into view.

MMU EXT STATUS

EXTENDED MMU STATUS DISPLAY IS DISABLED.
AND/OR MMU IS DISABLED.
GO TO MM-1-4-1 TO ENABLE IF MMU IS
COMPATIBLE WITH THIS FEATURE.

SUPPORTED MMU FOR EXTENDED MMU STATUS:

ECONOLITE
EDI
RENO A&E

MM-7-7-4
Parameter Description

MFG Name of the manufacturer of the MMU.

FC/RED These are Field Check Faults. The MMU continuously checks to see if the colors
FC/YEL received on its channel inputs match the colors in SDLC Command Frame 0 (the
FC/GREEN
commanded CU channel colors). If the colors fail to match 10 consecutive times,
the MMU generates a Field Check Fault and transfers the Output relay to the fault
position. This data shows the channel(s) on which the fault was detected.
RP/RED This is a proprietary feature of the EDI MMU. These are Recurrent Pulse Faults
RP/YEL reported only by the EDI MMU. There are cases where signals monitored for
RP/GREEN
faults are pulsing or of an intermittent nature and are short enough not to meet
the triggering timing condition defined by the NEMA TS2 standard. Basically,
this feature generates a fault if these recurring fault conditions are detected over
a longer time interval, but are too short to meet NEMA timing requirements.
For more information, refer to the EDI MMU operations manual.

12-80 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Status Displays
MMU Extended Status, MM-7-7-4

MM-7-7-4
Parameter Description

RY GON These faults are reported only by the EDI MMUs. The Red + Yellow Gon Status
indicates the channel(s) that caused the MMU to detect a Minimum Yellow Plus
Red Clearance fault (TS2 clause 4.4.5.1). Fault Status will report the channels that
the Yellow Plus Red Clearance fault occurred on (channel terminating). The Red
+ Yellow Gon Status report the channels that caused the clearance fault (channel
going active/Green).
For all other fault types the Red + Yellow Gon Status is not relevant and will be
zero.
Example: If phase 2 Walk (channel 13) terminates, and phase 8 Green (channel
8) goes active in less than 2.8 seconds, the fault status bytes for this Minimum
Yellow Plus Red Clearance fault will indicate channel 13, and the Red + Yellow
Gon Status will indicate channel 8.
FAULT These are MMU detected and reported channel (not phase) faults. This
information is a summary of all channel faults. The user must examine other
information returned by the MMU to determine the exact fault source.
LAST FAULT There are two items associated with this input::
REPORT
 Time-of-day and date. This value shows current time and date as long as there
is no MMU detected fault. If the MMU is reporting a fault, the time and date
will report the exact time and date the fault occurred.
 There is a message below the time and date line that describes the fault.
Possible messages:
NO FAULT, CVM, 24V MON 1, 24VMON 2, CVM AND 24V MON 1, CVM
AND 24V MON 2, 24V MON 1 AND 2, CVM, 24V MON 1 AND 2,
EXTERNAL WATCHDOG, PROGRAM CARD, CONFLICT, RED FAIL,
SHORT YELLOW, SKIPPED YELLOW, SHORT RED+YELLOW, PORT 1
FAULT, MMU DIAGNOSTIC, DUAL INDICATION, FIELD CHECK,
TYPE FAULT, LOCAL FLASH, CONFIGURATION CHANGE,
BROWNOUT, RECURRENT PULSE CONFLICT, RECURRENT PULSE
RED FAIL, RECURRENT PULSE DUAL INDICATION, UNKNOWN
FAULT

ASC/3 Programming Manual 12-81

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Status Displays
MMU AC Status, MM-7-7-5

MMU AC Status, MM-7-7-5 12

MMU AC STATUS MFG: ...

NO FAULT
AC LINE: 0 VRMS AT N/A HZ,TEMP: -40 F
RED ENABLE: 0 VRMS
CHANNEL: 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
RED: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
YEL: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
GRN: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
CHANNEL: 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
RED: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
YEL: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
GRN: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

LAST FAULT REPORT: 00/00/00 00:00:00

If this feature is disabled, the display below will come into view.

MMU AC STATUS REPORT

EXTENDED MMU STATUS DISPLAY IS DISABLED.
AND/OR MMU IS DISABLED.
GO TO MM-1-4-1 TO ENABLE IF MMU IS
COMPATIBLE WITH THIS FEATURE.

SUPPORTED MMU FOR EXTENDED MMU STATUS:

ECONOLITE
EDI
RENO A&E

MM-7-7-5
Parameter Description

MFG Name of the manufacturer of the MMU.

NO FAULT, etc. This line describes the fault. Possible messages:

NO FAULT, CVM, 24V MON 1, 24VMON 2, CVM AND 24V MON 1, CVM
AND 24V MON 2, 24V MON 1 AND 2, CVM, 24V MON 1 AND 2,
EXTERNAL WATCHDOG, PROGRAM CARD, CONFLICT, RED FAIL,
SHORT YELLOW, SKIPPED YELLOW, SHORT RED+YELLOW, PORT 1
FAULT, MMU DIAGNOSTIC, DUAL INDICATION, FIELD CHECK,
TYPE FAULT, LOCAL FLASH, CONFIGURATION CHANGE,
BROWNOUT, RECURRENT PULSE CONFLICT, RECURRENT PULSE
RED FAIL, RECURRENT PULSE DUAL INDICATION, UNKNOWN
FAULT

12-82 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Status Displays
MMU AC Status, MM-7-7-5

MM-7-7-5
Parameter Description

AC LINE This is the AC line RMS voltage. The information is returned by Reno A&E
(SDLC Response Frame 192) or EDI MMU (SDLC Response Frame 202).

VRMS AT This is the AC line frequency in Hertz with a resolution of 0.1 Hz (for example,
___ HZ 60.2 Hz). The information is returned by Reno A&E (SDLC Response Frame
192) or EDI MMU (SDLC Response Frame 202).

TEMP, °F This is the cabinet temperature in degrees Fahrenheit (-40 to 214), where N/A
indicates data is not available. The information is returned by Reno A&E (SDLC
Response Frame 192) or EDI MMU (SDLC Response Frame 202).

RED ENABLE, VRMS This is the RMS voltage value of the RED ENABLE input to the MMU. The
information is returned by Reno A&E SDLC Response Frame 192 or EDI SDLC
Response Frame 202.

RED RED (01-08), YELLOW (01-08), GREEN (01-08),

YEL
GRN RED (09-16), YELLOW (09-16), GREEN (09-16)
These are the AC RMS voltages on each channel color input. The information is
returned by Reno A&E (SDLC Response Frame 192) or EDI MMU (SDLC
Response Frame 202).

LAST FAULT Time-of-day and date. This value shows current time and date as long as there is
REPORT no MMU detected fault. If the MMU is reporting a fault, the time and date will
report the exact time and date the fault occurred.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 12-83

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Status Displays
MMU Compatibility Status, MM-7-7-6, ECPI Feature

MMU Compatibility Status, MM-7-7-6, ECPI Feature 12

MMU COMPATIBILITY STATUS MFG:

CH|6 5 4|3 2 1|0 9 8|7 6 5|4 3 2
1 . . . . . X . . . . X X . . .
2 . . . . . X . X . C X X . .
3 . . . . X . . . X X . . .
4 . . . M X . X . X X . .
5 . . . . . . . X . . .
6 . . . . . X . X . .
7 . . . . . . X . .
8 . . . . X . X .
9 . . . . . X .
10 . . . . X .
11 . . . . .
12 . . . .
13 . . .
14 . .
15 .

This display shows the real time comparison between the controller INTERNAL
Compatibility (MM-1-4-2) and the MMU programming card, as reported by SDLC
communications.
“.” : Neither the Controller Unit (CU) or the MMU is programmed.
C: The CU is programmed but the MMU is not.
M: The MMU is programmed but the CU is not.
X: Both the CU and the MMU are programmed.

12-84 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Status Displays
Input/Output Status Submenu, MM-7-8

Input/Output Status Submenu, MM-7-8 12

INPUT / OUTPUT SUBMENU

1.CONTROLLER INPUTS 6.T&f BIU I/O

2.CONTROLLER OUTPUTS 7.D/R BIU I/O

3.HARDWARE INPUTS 8.RESERVED

4.HARDWARE OUTPUTS 9.I/O DIFFERENCES

5.AUX HARDWARE I/O

Controller Inputs, MM-7-8-1 12

These displays show the real-time status of the inputs for NEMA functions or 332 layout
inputs:

NEMA Functional Inputs 332 Layout Inputs

INPUTS FUNCTIONS C1/C11 INPUT FUNCTIONS

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 I INPUT FILE
VEH DET.. . . . . . . . . S#01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 11 12 13 14
PED DET.. . . . . . . . . P#56 39 63 47 58 41 65 49 60 80 67 68 81
VEH OMIT. . . . . . . . . F: . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PED OMIT. . . . . . . . . P#-- 43 76 -- -- 45 78 -- 62 53 69 70 82
HOLD..... . . . . . . . . W: . . . . . . . . .

INPUTS— RG 1 RG 2
FORCE OFF... . . J INPUT FILE
INHIBIT MAX. . . S#01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 11 12 13 14
MAX II...... . . P#55 40 64 48 57 42 66 50 59 54 71 72 51
OMIT RED CL. . . F: . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PED RECYCLE. . . P#-- 44 77 -- -- 46 79 -- 61 75 73 74 52
RED REST.... . . W: . . . . . . . . .
STOP TIME... . .
INPUTS-- 2A MODULE C11S INPUTS
PREEMPT........ 2-. 4-. 5-. 6-.
IO MODE SELECT. A-. B-. C-. PIN# 10 11 12 13 15 16 17 18 19
TEST INPUT..... A-. B-. C-. FUNC: . . . . . . . . .
CALL NON ACT... 1-. 2-. PIN# 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
COORD/FREE. .|EXT START. .|MINRECALL. . FUNC: . . . . . . . . . . .
LAMP OFF... .|INTER ADV. .|MCE....... .
WLK RST MOD .|

ASC/3 Programming Manual 12-85

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Status Displays
Controller Outputs, MM-7-8-2

I/O Status Indicator:

 X: Active

 “.”: Inactive

 * : NOT Used

The beeper is normally disabled. When the data that the cursor is under changes, the
beeper will sound for 1/10 second, regardless of the programming in MM-1-7-2.

Controller Outputs, MM-7-8-2 12

These displays show the real time status of the outputs for NEMA or 332 functional
outputs.

NEMA Functional Outputs 332 Functional Outputs

OUTPUT FUNCTIONS C1/C11 OUTPUT FUNCTIONS

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PH: V1 V2 P2 V3 V4 P4 V5 V6 P6 V7 V8 P8
RED...... . . . . . . . . PIN# 16 12 10 07 04 02 32 29 27 24 21 19
YELLOW... . . . . . . . . RED: . . . . . . . . . . . .
GREEN.... . . . . . . . . PIN# 17 13 35 08 05 37 33 30 36 25 22 38
DONT WALK . . . . . . . . YEL: . . . . . . . . . . . .
PED CLEAR . . . . . . . . PIN# 18 15 11 09 06 03 34 31 28 26 23 20
WALK..... . . . . . . . . GRN: . . . . . . . . . . . .
PH CHECK. . . . . . . . . 2A MODULE C1 OUTPUTS
PH NEXT.. . . . . . . . . OL: A B C D TBC FUNCTION SPARE
PHASE ON. . . . . . . . . PIN# 97 94 88 85 83 101 91
OVLP A B C D | RING 1 2 | SPEC RED: . . . . SF1 . CABFLASH . SP –
RED . . . . |STAT A . . |CVM . PIN# 98 95 89 86 100 102 93
YEL . . . . |STAT B . . | FM . YEL: . . . . SF2 . DETRESET . SP .
GRN . . . . |STAT C . . | FL . PIN# 99 96 90 87 84 103
GRN: . . . . SF3 . WATCHDOG .
2A MODULE C11S OUTPUTS

PIN# 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
. . . . . . . .

I/O Status Indicator:

 X: Active

 “.”: Inactive

 * : NOT Used

The beeper is normally disabled. When the data that the cursor is under changes, the
beeper will sound for 1/10 second, regardless of the programming in MM-1-7-2.

12-86 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Status Displays
Hardware Inputs, MM-7-8-3

Hardware Inputs, MM-7-8-3 12

These displays show the real time status of the inputs for the NEMA ABC or the 332
C1/C11 physical inputs:

NEMA A, B,C Inputs 332 C1 & C11 Inputs

ABC INPUTS C1/C11 INPUTS

CONNECTOR MS-A K L M N P R S T f g h CONNECTOR PIN
INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . C1-Input 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
CONNECTOR MS-A i j k m n q v w x y z . . . . . . . . . .
INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . C1-Input 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58
CONNECTOR MS-A AA BB EE FF GG HH . . . . . . . . . .
INPUTS . . . . . . C1-Input 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68
CONNECTOR MS-B B L M N P R S T U V W X . . . . . . . . . .
INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . C1-Input 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78
CONNECTOR MS-B g h i j k m n v x y z . . . . . . . . . .
INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . C1-Input 79 80 81 82
CONNECTOR MS-C P R S T U V W X Y Z a b . . . .
INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . C11-Input 10 11 12 13 15 16 17 18 19 20
CONNECTOR MS-C m n p q r s t u v EE . . . . . . . . . .
INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . C11-Input 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
. . . . . . . . . .
INPUTS

ASC3 1000/2070 2N MODULE

There are no HARDWARE inputs for this

Controller. To view I/O on this
Controller, check T&F or D/R I/O.

I/O Status Indicator:

 X: Active

 “.”: Inactive

 * : NOT Used

The beeper is normally disabled. When the data that the cursor is under changes, the
beeper will sound for 1/10 second, regardless of the programming in MM-1-7-2.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 12-87

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Status Displays
Hardware Outputs, MM-7-8-4

Hardware Outputs, MM-7-8-4 12

These displays show the real time status of the outputs for the NEMA ABC or the 332
C1/C11 physical outputs:

NEMA A, B,C Outputs 332 C1 & C11 Outputs

ABC OUTPUTS C1/C11 OUTPUTS

CONNECTOR PINS CONNECTOR
MS-A A C D E F G H J X Y Z C1-02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS A a b c d e r s t u CC DD C1-15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS-B A C D E F G H J K Y Z a C1-27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS B b c d e f p q r s t u w C1-83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 90 91
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS B AA BB CC DD EE FF GG HH C1-93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS-C A B C D E F G H J K L M N C11-01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS C c d e f g h i j k w x y z
. . . . . . . . . . . . . OUTPUTS
MS C AA BB CC DD FF GG HH
. . . . . . . ASC3 1000/2070 2N MODULE
MS C JJ KK LL MM NN PP
. . . . . . There are no HARDWARE outputs for this
Controller. To view I/O on this
Controller, check T&F or D/R I/O.

I/O Status Indicator:

 X: Active
 “.”: Inactive

 * : NOT Used

12-88 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Status Displays
Auxiliary Hardware I/O, MM-7-8-5

Auxiliary Hardware I/O, MM-7-8-5 12

These displays show the real time status of the outputs for the Auxiliary Hardware I/O:

NEMA Auxiliary Hardware I/O 332 Auxiliary Hardware I/O

D I/O D I/O

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 A B C D E F G H J K L M N P R S T U V W
O O I I O I * 0 I I O I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k m n p q r s
I O I I I I I O O O O I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
O O O I I O O O I I I I I t u v w x y z AA BB CC DD EE FF GG HH JJ
I I I I I I O O O O O O O O O O
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52
I O O O O O O I O I I O O KK LL MM NN PP
* O * * *
53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61
O O I I I I O I I

TLM I/O
TELEMETRY
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13
I I I I I I I I O O * * *

14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
I I I I I I I I O O * *

I/O Status Indicator:

 I or O: Active

 “.”: Inactive

 * : NOT Used

ASC/3 Programming Manual 12-89

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Status Displays
T&F BIU I/O, MM-7-8-6

T&F BIU I/O, MM-7-8-6 12

This display shows the real time status of the outputs for the T&F BIU I/O Status:

T&F BIU I/O

BIU # 1 I/O Function
TF- OUT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
. . . . . . . .
OUT 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
. . . . . . .
TF- I/O 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
IO IO IO IO IO IO IO IO
I/O 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
IO IO IO IO IO IO IO IO
I/O 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
IO IO IO IO IO IO IO IO
TF- IN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
. . . . . . . .
TF- OPTO 1 2 3 4
. . . .

I/O Status Indicator:

 O: Active Output
 I : Active Input

 “.”: Inactive Input or Output

D&R BIU I/O, MM-7-8-7 12

This display shows the real time status of the outputs for the D/R BIU I/O Status.

D/R BIU I/O

BIU # 1
I/O Function
DR- DETECTOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
. . . . . . . .
DETECTOR 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
. . . . . . . .

I/O Status Indicator:

 O: Active Output

 I: Active Input

 “.”: Inactive Input or Output

12-90 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Status Displays
I/O Differences Status, MM-7-8-9, ECPI Feature

I/O Differences Status, MM-7-8-9, ECPI Feature 12

Example Display

M CNR/PIN DEFAULT DB ACTIVE DB

0 A/o-F PHASE 02 RED PHASE 04 RED
0 A/o-d PHASE 02 CHK PHASE 10 RED
0 A/i-h PHASE 01 HOLD PHASE 10 HOLD
0 B/o-E PHASE 03 YEL PHASE 04 YEL
0 C/o-C PHASE 08 DWK PHASE 06 DWK
TF1/o-18B DIMMING ENABLE TLM SPC FUNC 2
TF1/o-02B LOADSW 09 YEL PHASE 01 GRN
TF1/x-21A NOT ASSIGN OVERLP I GRN
0 T/i-16 MAINTENANCE REQ PHASE 10 OMIT
- C01o103
- C11o07

For definitions of abbreviations used in connector pin functions, Refer to Abbreviations in

Connector Pin Functions on page T-14 .
This display shows the I/O mapping differences between the Default DB and the Active
DB.
M: I/O Mode, only applicable to TS 1 and TS 2 type cabinet.
CNR/PIN: Connector/Pin
Lower case o is for output
Lower case i is for input
Lower case x is either input or output
DEFAULT DB: Signal assignment on the Econolite Default DB
ACTIVE DB: Signal assignment on the active DB

Note • ASC/3 Configurator can be used to remap the pin and the function.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 12-91

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
For your notes:

12-92 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 13
Utilities
Utilities Submenu, MM-8 13

UTILITIES SUBMENU

1. COPY / CLEAR 5. SIGN ON

2. USB MANAGEMENT 6. LOG BUFFERS

3. PRINT 7. SOFTWARE MODULES

4. TRANSFER

Programming Summary 13

A brief description follows of the programming functions that you can see and/or change
at each of the menu options.

MM-8 Menu Option Programming Summary

1. COPY / CLEAR You can copy or clear back to default 13 different data
groups: Phase Data, Timing Plan Data, Phase Detector
Options Plan Data, Detector Plan Data, Coordinator
Pattern Data, Split Pattern Data, Sequence Data, Datakey
Data, Controller Data, Default Database, Econolite
Database, MMU Program Card Data, and Special
Features Data.
2. USB MANAGEMENT Work with files on a USB flash drive plugged into the
USB port of a 2070-1C CPU module installed in a 2070
controller.
3. PRINT Select either Port 2/C50S or Port 3A/C21S as the print
port and enable (X) or disable (.) nine different options to
print.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 13-1

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Utilities
Copy/Clear Utility, MM-8-1

MM-8 Menu Option Programming Summary

4. TRANSFER Transfer data between eight different areas: Data Module,

Data Flash, Port, I/O Mapping, Logic Processor, and
Access codes.

To transfer:
1 Select one FROM and one TO.

2 To transfer, press ENTER (for 2070, press ENT)

5. SIGN ON In the System Sign-On screen, you can edit the text in two
lines: the line with “Solutions that Move the World” and
the line that follows.
6. LOG BUFFERS Display, Print, or Clear the log buffers for Controller
Events, Detector Events, Detector Activity, MMU
Events, or Select All.
7. SOFTWARE MODULES This displays the name, part number, and revision level
for all installed software modules. This information can
be seen and/or edited, as applicable.

Copy/Clear Utility, MM-8-1 13

COPY / CLEAR UTILITY

FROM > TO
PHASE TIMING.... . > PHASE TIMING.... .
TIMING PLAN..... . > TIMING PLAN..... .
PH DET OPT PLAN. . > PH DET OPT PLAN. .
DETECTOR PLAN... . > DETECTOR PLAN... .
COORD PATTERN... . > COORD PATTERN... .
SPLIT PATTERN... . > SPLIT PATTERN... .
SEQUENCE........ . > SEQUENCE........ .
ACTION PLAN..... . > ACTION PLAN..... .
PREEMPT PLAN.... . > PREEMPT PLAN.... .
LP STATEMENT.... . > LP STATEMENT.... .
DATA KEY........ . > CONTROLLER DATA. .
CONTROLLER DATA. . > DATA KEY........ .
DEFAULT DATABASE . > CONTROLLER DATA. .
ECONOLITE DBASE . > CONTROLLER DATA. .
CONTROLLER DATA. . > DEFAULT DATABASE .
MMU PROGRAM..... . > CONTROLLER...... .
SPECIAL FEATURES . > CONTROLLER...... .

TOGGLE TO SELECT A “FROM” AND A “TO”

THEN PRES ENTER

Use this screen to copy 13 different data groups as described in the paragraphs that follow.
As shown, this screen has two columns (labeled FROM and TO).

13-2 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Utilities
Copy/Clear Utility, MM-8-1

To make a copy:
1 Move the cursor to the applicable row.

2 Enter applicable data in the FROM and TO data entry fields (for instructions, refer to
the paragraphs that follow).
3 To make a copy, press ENTER (for 2070, press ENT).

Note • As you read through the table that follows, observe the notes below:

 If the data entry in the TO column is non-zero, the data in the FROM column copies
to the one related destination in the TO column. However, if you can enter 0 (zero) in
a TO column data entry field, the zero causes the related FROM field to copy its data
to all the possible recipients in the TO field.
 If the data entry in the FROM column is a zero, default data will be copied to the
specified destination in the TO column.

MM-8-1
Parameter Description Range

PHASE TIMING Copy Phase/Timing Data (MM-2-1) FROM column:

(0-16) (0-4)
When you press ENTER, copies all data from the specified
FROM column Phase number (1-16) and Timing Plan number TO column:
(1-4) to the specified TO column Phase number (0-16) and (0-16) (0-4)
Timing Plan number (0-4).
For a 0 (zero) entry in the TO or FROM column, refer to the
Note before this table.
TIMING PLAN Copy Timing Plan Data (MM-2-1) FROM column:
When you press ENTER, copies all data from the specified (0-4)
FROM column Timing Plan number (1-4) to the specified TO TO column:
column Timing Plan number (0-4). (0-4)
For a 0 (zero) entry in the TO or FROM column, refer to the
Note before this table.
PH DET OPT Copy Phase Detector Options Plan Data (MM-6-3) FROM column:
When you press ENTER, copies all phase level detector locking- (0-4)
PLAN

recall, No Rest, and Added Initial data from the specified TO column:
FROM column Phase Detector Option Plan (1-4) to the (0-4)
specified TO column Phase Detector Option Plan (0-4).
For a 0 (zero) entry in the TO column, refer to the Note before
this table.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 13-3

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Utilities
Copy/Clear Utility, MM-8-1

MM-8-1
Parameter Description Range

DETECTOR PLAN Copy Detector Plan Data (MM-6-2) FROM column:

(0-4)
When you press ENTER, copies all data from the specified
FROM column Vehicle Detector Plan number (1-4) to the TO column:
specified TO column Vehicle Detector Plan number (0-4). (0-4)
For a 0 (zero) entry in the TO or FROM column, refer to the
Note before this table.
SPLIT PATTERN Copy Split Pattern Data (MM-3-3). FROM column:
(0-120)
When you press ENTER, copies all data from the specified
FROM column Split Pattern number (1-120) to the specified TO column:
TO column Split Pattern number (0-120). (0-120)
For a 0 (zero) entry in the TO or FROM column, refer to the
Note before this table.
COORD PATTERN Copy Coordination Pattern Data (MM-3-2). FROM column:
(0-120)
When you press ENTER, copies all data from the specified
FROM column Coordination Pattern number (1-120) to the TO column:
specified TO column Coordination Pattern number (0-120). (0-120)
For a 0 (zero) entry in the TO or FROM column, refer to the
Note before this table.
SEQUENCE Copy Sequence Data (MM-1-1-1) FROM column:
(0-16)
When you press ENTER, copies all data from the specified
FROM column Sequence Pattern number (1-16) to the TO column:
specified TO column Sequence Pattern number (0-16). (0-16)
Exception: Entry is ignored if you enter sequence 1 or the
sequence in effect.
For a 0 (zero) entry in the TO or FROM column, refer to the
Note before this table.
ACTION PLAN Copy Action Plan Data (MM-5-2) FROM column:
(0-100)
When you press ENTER, copies all data from the specified
FROM column Action Plan number to the specified TO TO column:
column. (0-100)
For a 0 (zero) entry in the TO or FROM column, refer to the
Note before this table.

13-4 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Utilities
Copy/Clear Utility, MM-8-1

MM-8-1
Parameter Description Range

PREEMPT PLAN Copy Preempt Plan Data (MM-4-1) FROM column:

(0-10)
When you press ENTER, copies all data from the specified
FROM column Preempt Plan number to the specified TO TO column:
column. (0-10)
For a 0 (zero) entry in the TO or FROM column, refer to the
Note before this table.
LP STATEMENT Copy LP Statement (MM-1-8-2) FROM column:
(0-100)
When you press ENTER, copies all data from the specified
FROM column LP Statement number to the specified TO TO column:
column. (0-100)
For a 0 (zero) entry in the TO or FROM column, refer to the
Note before this table.
DATA KEY Copy Datakey Data to Controller X enables
to
CONTROLLER When you press ENTER, copies all Datakey data to the “.” disables
DATA Controller when both the FROM and TO columns are enabled
with an “X”. “.” in either column disables the Copy function.
CONTROLLER Copy Controller Data to Datakey X enables
DATA
to When you press ENTER, copies all Controller data to the “.” disables
DATA KEY Datakey when both the FROM and TO columns are enabled
with an “X”. “.” in either column disables the Copy function.
DEFAULT Copy Default Database to Controller FROM column:
DATABASE X, “.”
to When you press ENTER, copies the Default Database to the
CONTROLLER Controller when both the FROM and TO columns are enabled TO column:
DATA with an “X”. “.” in either column disables the Copy function. X, “.”
Note • Requires supervisor access code to be set.
Note • To work, this requires an existing Default Database. To
create Default Database, refer to MM-8-1, Copy
Controller Database to Default Database on
page 13-6.
ECONOLITE Lets you copy Econolite default data to the controller. You must X enables
DATABASE enable both COPY FROM and TO with an X.
to “.” disables
CONTROLLER
DATA

ASC/3 Programming Manual 13-5

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Utilities
Copy/Clear Utility, MM-8-1

MM-8-1
Parameter Description Range

CONTROLLER Copy Controller Database to Default Database FROM column:

DATA
Note • Requires supervisor access code to be set. X, “.”
to
DEFAULT When you press ENTER, copies the Controller Database to the TO column:
DATABASE Default Database when both the FROM and TO columns are X, “.”
enabled with an “X”. “.” in either column disables the Copy
function.
MMU PROGRAM MMU Program Card Copy X, “.”
ECPI Feature
Requires that the supervisor's access code be set.
TOGGLE to select (X) or deselect (.) to copy the MMU
Program Card to the MMU PROGRAM entries.
X: Copies the MMU PROGRAM CARD data that is received in
response frame 131 to the ASC/3 MM-1-4-2 programming.
The display will return to the default state (.) after copying.
This copy makes the controller programming identical to this
MMU’s compatibility programming.
“.”: Does not copy the MMU Program Card data.

13-6 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Utilities
Copy/Clear Utility, MM-8-1

MM-8-1
Parameter Description Range

SPECIAL Enable a Special Feature(s) X, “.”

FEATURES
ECPI Feature
To enable a Special Feature in an ASC/3 controller, use this
procedure:
1 Get a blue Datakey® with the Special Feature enabled. TSP
(Datakey Part No. SFDT1000000000) and ACS Lite
adaptive control (Datakey Part No. SFDT0010000000) are
possible Special Features.
2 Power up the ASC/3.
3 Insert the blue Datakey into the DATAKEY slot.
4 In this screen, (MM-8-1), toggle to select (X) SPECIAL
FEATURES.
5 Move the cursor to the right to CONTROLLER and toggle
to select (X).
6 Press ENTER to enable the programmed Special Features.
7 When processing is completed, a message will be displayed
to indicate the special features that have been enabled.
8 To keep the Special Feature enabled, keep the blue Datakey
inserted in its slot. If you remove the blue Datakey, the
ASC/3 will disable the Special Feature at midnight.
Note • After you use a black Datakey to copy the controller
database, it is OK to remove the Datakey. You do not
need to keep the black Datakey in its slot to keep the
database settings.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 13-7

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Utilities
USB Management, MM-8-2

USB Management, MM-8-2 13

USB OPTIONS

1 SOFTWARE UPDATE

2 CONFIGURATION UPDATE

3 SAVE FROM CONTROLLER

Note • This USB Management screen is only for a 2070 with (1) a 2070-1C CPU
module and (2) ASC/3-LX software Version 32.55.00 or later. You must plug in a USB
flash drive (formatted for FAT 16/32) into the USB port of the 2070-1C CPU.

To manage your data files with a USB flash drive:

1 Copy the files you want to manage to the root directory of a USB flash drive (formatted
for FAT16/32). For example, to upgrade the software, you typically copy seven files.
2 Press A and go to the Main Menu.

3 At the rear of your 2070, in the top left corner of the 2070-1C CPU module, plug the
USB flash drive into the USB port:

USB Port

4 After a few seconds, screen MM-8-2 (shown above) opens automatically.

5 Select what you want to do and the screens that follow will prompt you as necessary.

6 The sub-menu screens are shown in Appendix B on page B-36.

Note • To complete a software installation: (1) remove the USB flash drive and
(2) wait at least 5 minutes, then recycle the controller to activate the new software. After
you complete your DB management, always immediately remove the USB flash drive.

13-8 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Utilities
Print Utility, MM-8-3

File Name Syntax

A typical configuration (CFG) file is of the form DB_XX.XX.XX.XX_YYMMDD_HHMMSS.CFG where:
XX.XX.XX.XX is the IP address of the controller
YY are the last two digits of the year
MM is the month of the year
DD is the day of the month
HH is the hour in military (24 hour) time
MM are the minutes
SS are the seconds
Thus, for the example DB_10.70.10.51_130225_174233.CFG :
This is a current database file where 10.70.10.51 is the IP address of the controller and
this file was saved in the year 2013 on February 25 at 5:42 pm and 33 seconds.

Print Utility, MM-8-3 13

PRINT

PRINT TO PORT... 2
SELECT ALL...... .

CONFIGURATION... . TIME BASE....... .

CONTROLLER...... . DETECTOR........ .

COORDINATOR..... . LOGIC PROCESSOR. .

PREEMPTOR....... . TSP AND SCP..... .

TOGGLE TO SELECT AND THEN PRESS ENTER

TO BEGIN PRINTING

To print information to a port:

1 Press toggle 0/YES to select the print output port, Port 2/C50S, Port 3A/C21S or
USB.

Note • USB is only for a 2070 with a 2070-1C CPU module. You must plug in a USB
flash drive (formatted for FAT 16/32) into the USB port of the 2070-1C CPU. When you
select USB, the controller prints the selected database configurations to the text file,
DB_XX.XX.XX.XX_YYMMDD_HHMMSS.TXT, in the USB flash drive.

2 As applicable, press toggle 0/YES to Enable (X) or Disable (.) the nine possible fields
to print.

To print the enabled field(s) to the selected port:

 Press ENTER./ENT

ASC/3 Programming Manual 13-9

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Utilities
Transfer Utility, MM-8-4

Transfer Utility, MM-8-4 13

TRANSFER UTILITY

PORT................. 2
DIRECTION.......TRANSMIT

DATABASE............. .

COMMAND MODEM ANSWER. .

TOGGLE TO SELECT THEN PRESS ENTER

TO TRANSFER

Use this utility to transmit the Database to either Port 2/C50S or Port 3A/C21S.

To transmit the Database:

1 At the PORT parameter, toggle to select the exit port, 2/C50S or 3A/C21S.

2 At the DATABASE parameter, toggle to X to enable the transfer.

To execute the transfer:

 Press ENTER./ENT

COMMAND MODEM ANSWER

This is used exclusively in an ASC/3-IM (Intersection Monitor) setup. When you enable
COMMAND MODEM ANSWER, the controller attempts to negotiate with Aries. This
is only necessary when the ASC/3-IM does not have the ability to auto-answer, or if the
line is already off hook and connected to the Aries central office by the operator.

13-10 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Utilities
Sign-On Screen Utility, MM-8-5

Sign-On Screen Utility, MM-8-5 13

****************************************
* ECONOLITE CONTROL PRODUCTS, INC. *
* *
* ASC/3-2100 *
* Copyright (C) 2004-2012 *
* *
* Solutions that Move the World *
* *
* CITY.... 0 INTERSECTION.. 0 *
* *
* SOFTWARE....................V2.52.00 *
* *
* *
* *
* CONFIGURATION..................N3000 *
****************************************

Use this utility with the numeric keypad in alpha/numeric mode to edit the sign-on screen:
the “Solutions that Move the World” line and the CITY and INTERSECTION fields.
The cursor is in the farthest right column in which you can enter characters. Each character
you enter goes into that far right column. When you enter a subsequent character, the
previous character(s) moves to the left.

To edit a line:
1 Move the cursor to the applicable line.

2 To scroll to a character, repeatedly press its key in less than one-second intervals until
the correct character comes into view.

Note • If you use the same key to enter two consecutive characters, wait at least two
seconds after you enter the first character.

1 enters (space) * - # , ’ & / @ . 1

2 enters A, B, C, a, b, c, 2

3 enters D, E, F, d, e, f, 3

4 enters G, H, I, g, h, i, 4

5 enters J, K, L, j, k, l, 5

6 enters M, N, O, m, n, o, 6

7 enters P, Q, R, p, q, r, 7

8 enters S, T, U, s, t, u, 8

9 enters W, X, Y, Z, w, x, y, z, 9

ASC/3 Programming Manual 13-11

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Utilities
Log Buffers Submenu, MM-8-6

0 enters 0

CLEAR (C for 2070) deletes the entire entry.

< (Cursor Left) clears the character in the far right column.

Note • ASC/3 Configurator Software gives an easy means to edit two lines of the sign-
on screen. Refer to the ASC/3 Configurator User Guide that comes with every software
CD.

Log Buffers Submenu, MM-8-6 13

Use the utilities in this menu to display, print, or clear the log buffers.

LOG BUFFERS SUBMENU

1. DISPLAY

2. PRINT

3. CLEAR

ASC/3 has four different event logs, listed below.

When the controller reaches the maximum limit, it will start to discard the oldest events.

Log Type Max Events

Controller Events 500

Detector Events 300
Detector Activity 228
MMU Events 50

13-12 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Utilities
Display Log Buffers Submenu, MM-8-6-1

Display Log Buffers Submenu, MM-8-6-1 13

DISPLAY SUBMENU

1. CONTROLLER EVENTS

2. DETECTOR EVENTS

3. DETECTOR ACTIVITY

4. MMU EVENTS

Press a key 1 thru 4 to show a display of the related log buffer: Controller Events,
Detector Events, Detector Activity, or MMU Events.

Navigation Notes
You can scroll a page at a time in MM-8-6-1-1, MM-8-6-1-2, and MM-8-6-1-3. To scroll a
page at a time, press NEXT DATA/D.
In MM-8-6-1-4, to toggle between the top and bottom part of the screen, press
NEXT DATA/D.
Example:
When:
VolOccDets = 10
SpeedDets = 10
TimePeriod = 15 minutes
—and you substitute the values given above in the formulas:
RecSize = 18+(VolOccDets*3)+(SpeedDets)
18 + (10 * 3) + 10 = 58
MaxRecs = 65,088/RecSize
= 1122.2068
RecsPerDay = 60minPerHour/TimePeriod*24
= (60/15 * 24) = 96
MaxTime = MaxRecs/RecsPerDay
= 1122.2068/96
= 11.69 days

ASC/3 Programming Manual 13-13

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Utilities
Print Log Buffers, MM-8-6-2

Print Log Buffers, MM-8-6-2 13

PRINT LOG BUFFERS

PRINT TO PORT.............. 2
NUMBER OF DAYS............. 10

CONTROLLER EVENTS........... .
DETECTOR EVENTS............. .
DETECTOR ACTIVITY........... .
MMU EVENTS.................. .
SELECT ALL.................. .

PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO SELECT

THEN ENTER TO PRINT

To print log buffers to a port:

1 Press toggle 0/YES to select the print output port, Port 2/C50S, Port 3A/C21S, or
USB.

Note • USB is only for a 2070 with a 2070-1C CPU module. You must plug in a USB
flash drive (formatted for FAT 16/32) into the USB port of the 2070-1C CPU. When you
select USB, the controller prints the selected log events to the text file, LOGPrint.txt, in
the USB flash drive.

2 Enter the number of log days to print.

3 As applicable, press toggle 0/YES to Enable (X) or Disable (.) Controller Events,
Detector Events, Detector Activity, MMU Events, or Select All.

To print the enabled field(s) to the selected port:

 Press ENTER/ENT.

13-14 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Utilities
Clear Submenu, MM-8-6-3

Clear Submenu, MM-8-6-3 13

CLEAR SUBMENU

1. CONTROLLER EVENTS

2. DETECTOR EVENTS

3. DETECTOR ACTIVITY

4. MMU EVENTS

5. ALL LOGS

Use this utility to clear log buffers from memory:

1 Press a key 1 thru 4 to select the related log, or press 5 to select all logs.

2 To clear the selected log(s), press ENTER/ENT.

Note • When the buffer fills, if the buffers have not been cleared, the newest data
automatically overwrites the oldest data.

Software Modules, MM-8-7 13

SOFTWARE MODULES
NAME PART NUMBER VERSION

BOOT N/A N/A

APPLICATON 100-1082-250 V2.51.00

CONFIGURATION 100-1049-001 N3000, 8

HELP 100-1050-001 01.00.00

DEFINITIONS 100-1051-001 02.10.00

TEXT 100-1052-001 02.10.00

TELEMETRY N/A N/A

This utility displays the name, part number, and version for all installed software modules.

Note • The Part Number and Version number on your screen should be the same as the
numbers applicable to the software actually installed in your system.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 13-15

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
For your notes:

13-16 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 14
Diagnostics Information
Front Panel LED Indicator 14

The front-panel LED logics provide “at-a-glance” status feedback depending on the mode
selected, as shown in the tables below. The LED indicates different conditions that depend
on the mode of the LED — Tri-Color or Single-Color. To select the LED Mode, refer to
Display Options, MM-1-7-2 on page 6-53.

Tri-Color Mode (ASC/3-2100, 1000, RM) 14

ASC/3-1000, ASC/3-2100, and ASC/3-RM support the Tri-Color mode.

Color and Frequency Indication

YELLOW SOLID Datakey In Use (Do not remove warning)

YELLOW FAST Transaction Mode triggered by Keyboard
YELLOW SLOW Configuration Diagnostic Warning
(Refer to Compile and View Active Warnings,
MM-9-2-2 on page 14-5)
GREEN SOLID Reserved
GREEN FAST Reserved
GREEN SLOW Controller OK
RED SOLID Boot: Upgrading OS DO NOT POWER OFF
RED FAST Boot: Could Not Start Traffic Application
RED SLOW Reserved

ASC/3 Programming Manual 14-1

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Diagnostics Information
Single-Color Mode (2070 Controller)

Single-Color Mode (2070 Controller) 14

2070 hardware supports single-color mode. It only has a Red LED.

Color and Frequency Indication

RED SOLID Controller OK

RED FAST Transaction Mode triggered by Keyboard
RED SLOW Database Diagnostic Warning

Diagnostics Information, MM-9 14

DIAGNOSTICS SUBMENU

1. DIAGNOSTICS INFORMATION

2. WARNING CHECKS

3. ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS

Diagnostics Information, MM-9-1 14

DIAGNOSTICS INFORMATION

HARDWARE DIAGNOSTICS ARE PERFORMED WHILE

THE CONTROLLER IS NOT OPERATIONAL.

REFER TO APPENDIX F IN THE PROGRAMMING

MANUAL FOR INSTRUCTIONS ON LOADING THE
DIAGNOSTIC FILE AND ITS OPERATION.

Warning Check Submenu, MM-9-2 14

WARNING CHECK SUBMENU

1. ENABLE WARNING CHECK CATEGORIES

2. COMPILE & VIEW ACTIVE WARNINGS

3. VIEW/EDIT DISABLED WARNINGS

14-2 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Diagnostics Information
What is a Warning Check?

What is a Warning Check? 14

In the ASC/3 controller, following a database download or object data alteration via key
board, the controller runs Consistency Checks to look for critical errors. If it detects errors,
they must be corrected or all database changes are discarded.
After you program the controller, it may appear that a certain feature does not operate
correctly, but it may be because of incorrect programming. To call attention to a possible
incorrect programmed entry, the controller generates a Warning. The controller generates
a Warning if, in the opinion of Econolite, you override the programmed parameter setting
from a database with an unusual selection, or select a combination of programmed values
that may not give you the operation you probably expect. Warning Checks are intelligent
diagnostics designed to tell you of data entries that, by themselves or in combination with
other entries, may result in unexpected operation.

IMPORTANT • One thing to keep in mind: a warning is not an error.

Occasionally, it could be that programming results in “incorrect” operation, but is

acceptable to you because it provides a benefit to you that compensates for an occasional
operational anomaly. For example, some users routinely program Walk and Pedestrian
Clearance times that exceed phase split times in coordinated operation because there are
very few pedestrian calls and the user does not mind the occasional coordinator
resynchronization that follows the service of a pedestrian call. Because we cannot possibly
anticipate what you have in mind, it is left to you to decide what action, if any, to take to
correct the situation that caused a Warning message.
Initially, the software framework and a limited set of diagnostics will be available. Warning
Checks are viewed as a long-term “work-in-progress”. These checks will be expanded as
users and developers find situations that cause an unexpected controller operation.
For a complete list of supported Warning messages, refer to Appendix R, Warning Checks.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 14-3

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Diagnostics Information
Context-Sensitive Warning

Context-Sensitive Warning 14

With this feature, the new data can be checked at the time it is entered from the keypad.
This includes checking the dependencies with the other parameters; parameters with
multiple valid ranges; e.g., 0, 1-10, 20-30. The result of the checks will be displayed
immediately. This lets you make the correction or adjustment immediately. For example,
if the phase split is set to less than the phase min time, a warning message (see below) is
shown. Depending upon the data, the new data could be checked against the other
settings. In this example, it also checks if the split sum is greater or less than the cycle
length.

WARNING(S):

*Phase split < Phase minimum time

Phase split = 8.0 secs
Timing Plan 1 2 3 4
Min Time (secs) 15.0 12.0 10.0 9.0

*Split sum < Cycle length (100 secs)

Rings Split sum
1 2 80 secs

Press [CLEAR] key 3 times in this screen

to suppress warning check in next 30 sec

Enable Warning Check Categories, MM-9-2-1 14

WARNING CHECK SELECTION – DISABLE ALL

WARNING CHECK ENABLED
1. CONFIGURATION NO
2. CONTROLLER NO
3. COORDINATOR NO
4. PREEMPTOR/TSP NO
5. TIME BASE NO
6. DETECTORS NO
7. AT DATA ENTRY NO

NOTE: Controller automatically performs

Warning Check at power up only.
User should run Warning Check with
MM-9-2-2 after data entry changes.
Individual Warnings can be disabled
at MM-9-2-3

Use this display to select the warning check categories.

To enable or disable all the warning check categories:

 On the first line, toggle to select ENABLE ALL or DISABLE ALL.

14-4 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Diagnostics Information
Compile and View Active Warnings, MM-9-2-2

To individually enable/disable the warning check categories:

1 On the first line, toggle to select COMMANDS.

2 Cursor to the respective line to individually select YES to enable or NO to disable the
seven warning check categories:
1. Configuration
2. Controller
3. Coordinator
4. Preemptor/TSP
5. Time Base
6. Detectors
7. At Data Entry

Note • The default is DISABLE ALL.

Compile and View Active Warnings, MM-9-2-2 14

When you select this display, the controller runs all enabled Warning Checks. If any
warning(s) is detected, it is shown on the display. An example display is shown below.

Example Warnings Display

When in a hyperlink field:

To follow the hyperlink:

For ASC/3, press SPEC FUNC, then

NEXT DATA.

For 2070, press B.

To go back:

For ASC/3, press SUB MENU.

For 2070, press ESC.

ASC/3 Programming Manual 14-5

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Diagnostics Information
Compile and View Active Warnings, MM-9-2-2

When you move the cursor to one of the warning messages, the options that follow are
available:

Press at the
Warning Line Action

Hyperlink keys This takes you to MM-9-2-3 where you can suppress the particular
warning.
SPEC FUNC + NEXT DATA
(2070: * + D)
HELP/F See more information about the warning. For example, text associated
with “Yellow Clear Override” might reference the relevant NEMA and/or
NTCIP paragraph, explain why the message was generated and show a list
of the phases with this apparent error—remember that a warning check is
not an error, just something that does not look correct. You can scroll
through this help text. Below is an example of a help display for a warning.
ENTER/ENT It will take you to the data entry screen, where you can make changes to
avoid the particular warning. You can also press this key while in HELP
for this warning.

Example Help Display for a Warning

2103 Ped Clear Override

Phase Ped Clear timing (MM-2-1) will be

Overridden by Guaranteed Minimum Ped
Clear (MM-2-4) on the following

PHASES:
2

The indicated problem may be on any of

four possible timing plans - be sure to
check each timing plan.

If no warning diagnostics are generated,

“THERE ARE NO WARNINGS TO BE DISPLAYED” is shown.

If you want to disable a warning check in the future runs:

1 Move the cursor to the warning message.

2 At the same time, press SPEC FUNC and NEXT DATA ( for 2070, * and D).

3 MM-9-2-3 comes into view with the specified warning number selected.

4 Use the DISABLE command to suppress this warning check in future runs.

14-6 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Diagnostics Information
Edit/View Disabled Warnings, MM-9-2-3

The first two digits of the warning number indicate the first two levels of the display in
which the associated data is programmed.
Example: 3101 = Manual Pattern Enabled
The manual pattern is enabled in MM-3-1.
For a complete list of supported warnings, refer to Appendix R, Warning Checks .

Edit/View Disabled Warnings, MM-9-2-3 14

You can use this display to disable up to 40 Warning Checks.

To disable a Warning Check:

1 Enter the Warning Number in the square brackets, [ ].
2 Move the cursor to the right to COMMANDS.
3 The name of the Warning comes into view on the second line.

4 Toggle to ENABLE or DISABLE the Warning.

5 Move the cursor.

6 The Warning Number comes into view in the list of
DISABLED WARNING CHECKS. These are shown in ascending order.

Example Disabled Warnings Display

WARNING CHECKS [1201] COMMANDS .

Inactive Exclusive Ped Phase
DISABLED WARNING CHECKS:
2101 2102 3101 3201 3202 3301 3302 3304

ASC/3 Programming Manual 14-7

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Diagnostics Information
Startup Warning Message

Startup Warning Message 14

When you apply power, the controller runs the enabled Warning Checks. If any Warnings
are found, the display below comes into view. Warning Check is only run at power up
automatically. It is highly recommended to run warning check (MM-9-2-2) after a
configuration change.

Startup Warning Display

When in a hyperlink field:

To follow the hyperlink:

For ASC/3, press SPEC FUNC, then

NEXT DATA.

For 2070, press B.

To go back:

For ASC/3, press SUB MENU.

For 2070, press ESC.

14-8 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 A
ASC/3, ASC/3-2070 & ASC/3-LX Menu Tree
MM-1 CONFIGURATION MM-6-3 PEDESTRIAN DETECTOR INPUT ASSIGNMENT
MM-1-1 CONTROLLER SEQUENCE MM-6-4 LOG INTERVAL/SPEED DETECTOR SETUP
MM-1-1-1 PHASE RING SEQUENCE AND ASSIGNMENT MM-6-5 VEHICLE DETECTOR DIAGNOSTICS
MM-1-1-2 PHASE COMPATIBILITY MM-6-6 PEDESTRIAN DETECTOR DIAGNOSTICS
MM-1-1-3 BACKUP PREVENT PHASES MM-7 STATUS DISPLAY
MM-1-1-4 SIMULTANEOUS GAP PHASES MM-7-1 CONTROLLER
MM-1-1-5 DIAMOND SEQUENCE 17 TO 20 MM-7-2 COORDINATOR
MM-1-1-5-1 PHASE RING SEQUENCE & ASSIGNMENT MM-7-3 PREEMPTORS & TSP/SCP
MM-1-1-5-2 PHASE COMPATIBILITY MM-7-3-1 PREEMPTORS
MM-1-1-5-3 BACKUP PREVENT PHASES MM-7-3-2 TSP/SCP
MM-1-2 PHASE IN USE/EXCLUSIVE PED MM-7-4 TBC/ACTION PLANS
MM-1-3 LOAD SW ASSIGNMENT MM-7-5 COMMUNICATIONS
MM-1-4 PORT 1 (SDLC) MM-7-5-1 ETHERNET
MM-1-4-1 SDLC OPTIONS MM-7-5-2 PORT [2 or C50S]
MM-1-4-2 MMU PROGRAM MM-7-5-3 PORT [3A or C21S]
MM-1-4-3 COLOR CHECK ENABLE MM-7-5-4 PORT [3B or C22S]
MM-1-4-4 SECONDARY STATIONS/TESTS MM-7-5-5 NTCIP
MM-1-5 COMM PORTS MM-7-5-6 ECPIP
MM-1-5-1 ETHERNET MM-7-5-7 IEEE 1570
MM-1-5-2 PORT 2/C50S MM-7-6 DETECTORS
MM-1-5-3 PORT 3A/C21S MM-7-7 FLASH/SDLC/MMU STATUS
MM-1-5-4 PORT 3B/C22S MM-7-7-1 FLASH STATUS
MM-1-5-5 NTCIP MM-7-7-2 SDLC STATUS
MM-1-5-6 ECPIP MM-7-7-3 MMU STATUS
MM-1-6 ENABLE LOGGING MM-7-7-4 MMU EXTENDED STATUS
MM-1-6-1 EVENT LOGGING MM-7-7-5 MMU AC STATUS
MM-1-7 DISPLAY/ACCESS MM-7-7-6 MMU COMPATIBILITY
MM-1-7-1 ADMINSTRATION MM-7-8 INPUT/OUTPUT STATUS
MM-1-7-2 DISPLAY OPTIONS MM-7-8-1 CONTROLLER INPUTS [NEMA or 2070 C1/C11 INPUT FUNCTIONS]
MM-1-7-3 SECURITY ACCESS MM-7-8-2 CONTROLLER OUTPUTS [NEMA or 2070 C1/C11 OUTPUT FUNCTIONS]
MM-1-8 LOGIC PROCESSOR MM-7-8-3 HARDWARE INPUTS [NEMA ABC or 2070 C1/C11 INPUTS]
MM-1-8-1 LOGIC STATEMENT CONTROL MM-7-8-4 HARDWARE OUTPUTS [NEMA ABC or 2070 C1/C11 OUTPUTS]
MM-1-8-2 LOGIC STATEMENTS MM-7-8-5 AUX HARDWARE I/O [ASC3 D & T or 2070 D HW I/O]
MM-2 CONTROLLER MM-7-8-6 T&F BIU I/O
MM-2-1 TIMING PLANS MM-7-8-7 D/R BIU I/O
MM-2-2 VEHICLE OVERLAPS MM-7-8-8 LOGIC PROCESSOR
MM-2-3 VEH/PED OVERLAPS MM-7-8-8-1 LOGIC PROCESSOR GATE
MM-2-4 GUARANTEED MIN TIME MM-7-8-8-2 LOGIC PROCESSOR ENABLE PLAN
MM-2-5 START/FLASH MM-7-8-9 I/O DIFFERENCES
MM-2-6 OPTION DATA MM-8 UTILITIES
MM-2-6-1 CONTROLLER OPTIONS MM-8-1 COPY
MM-2-6-2 EXTENDED OPTIONS MM-8-2 USB MANAGEMENT
MM-2-7 ACTUATED PRE-TIMED MODE MM-8-3 PRINT
MM-2-8 PHASE RECALL OPTIONS MM-8-4 TRANSFER
MM-3 COORDINATOR MM-8-5 SIGN ON
MM-3-1 COORDINATOR OPTIONS MM-8-6 LOG BUFFERS
MM-3-2 COORDINATOR PATTERNS MM-8-6-1 DISPLAY
MM-3-3 SPLIT PATTERNS MM-8-6-1-1 CONTROLLER EVENTS
MM-3-4 AUTO PERM MIN GREEN MM-8-6-1-2 DETECTOR EVENTS
MM-3-5 SPLIT DEMAND MM-8-6-1-3 DETECTOR ACTIVITY
MM-4 PREEMTOR/TSP/SCP MM-8-6-1-4 MMU EVENTS
MM-4-1 PREEMPT PLAN 1-10 MM-8-6-2 PRINT LOG BUFFERS
MM-4-2 ENABLE PREEMPT FILTERING & TSP/SCP MM-8-6-3 CLEAR
MM-4-3 TSP/SCP PLAN 1-6 MM-8-6-3-1 CONTROLLER EVENTS
MM-4-4 TSP/SCP SPLIT PATTERN MM-8-6-3-2 DETECTOR EVENTS
MM-5 TIME BASE MM-8-6-3-3 DETECTOR ACTIVITY
MM-5-1 CLOCK/CALENDAR DATA MM-8-6-3-4 MMU EVENTS
MM-5-2 ACTION PLAN MM-8-6-3-5 ALL LOGS
MM-5-3 DAY PLAN/EVENT MM-8-7 SOFTWARE MODULES
MM-5-4 SCHEDULE NUMBER MM-9 DIAGNOSTICS
MM-5-5 EXCEPTION DAYS MM-9-1 DIAGNOSTICS INFORMATION
MM-6 DETECTORS MM-9-2 WARNING CHECKS
MM-6-1 VEHICLE DETECTOR PHASE ASSIGNMENT MM-9-2-1 ENABLE WARNING CHECK CATEGORIES
MM-6-2 VEHICLE DETECTOR SETUP MM-9-2-2 COMPILE & VIEW ACTIVE WARNINGS
MM-9-2-3 VIEW/EDIT DISABLED WARNINGS

ASC/3 Programming Manual A-1

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
For your notes:

A- 2 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 B
ASC/3 Screens
The LCD display on the Econolite ASC/3 controller is 16 lines vertical by 40 characters
horizontal. Some of the screens in this appendix contain more than 16 lines and/or more
than 40 characters in a line. In those cases, use the cursor keys to scroll the display vertically
and/or horizontally to move through the display. For screen size and navigation for both
ASC/3 and 2070 screens, refer to Chapter 5, MAIN MENU and Screen Navigation.
Screen titles, above the screen illustrations, show the keys to press to navigate to that
screen. For example, to go to screen MM-1-4-3, press MAIN MENU then 1 then 4 then 3.
POWER ON automatically shows one of these three screens:

**************************************** Power up flash

* ECONOLITE CONTROL PRODUCTS INC. * corrupted file system
* *
* ASC/3-2100 *
* Copyright (C) 2004-2012 * MISSING APPLICATION FILES
* *
* Solutions that Move the World * THE CONTROLLER HAS MISSING OR
* * CORRUPTED APPLICATION FILES.
* CITY.... 0 INTERSECTION.. 0 * REFER TO THE ASC/3 PROGRAMMING
* * MANUAL FOR INSTRUCTIONS ON LOADING
* SOFTWARE....................v2.59.00 * NEW OPERATIONAL FILES.
* * PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE.
* *
* CONFIGURATION. .................N3000*
* WARM START *
****************************************

ASC/3 Programming Manual B-1

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
ASC/3 Screens
Appendix B

MM MM-1
MAIN MENU CONFIGURATION SUBMENU

1. CONFIGURATION 6. DETECTORS 1. CONTROLLER SEQ 5. COMMUNICATIONS

2. CONTROLLER 7. STATUS DISPLAY 2. PHASE IN USE/PED 6. ENABLE LOGGING

3. COORDINATOR 8. UTILITIES 3. LOAD SW ASSIGN 7. DISPLAY/ACCESS

4. PREEMPTOR/TSP 9. DIAGNOSTICS 4. PORT 1 (SDLC) 8. LOGIC PROCESSOR

5. TIME BASE

MM-1-1 MM-1-1-1

CONTROLLER SEQUENCE SUBMENU CONTROLLER SEQUENCE [ 1]

SEQUENCE COMMANDS . HW ALT SEQ ENA. NO
1. PHASE RING SEQUENCE AND ASSIGNMENT 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
BC-B - B - B - - - - - - - - - - -
2. PHASE COMPATIBILITY R1- 01 02 03 04 . . . . . . . . . . .
R2- 06 05 07 08 . . . . . . . . . . .
3. BACKUP PREVENT PHASES R3- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R4- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. SIMULTANEOUS GAP PHASES
R1-R4=RING 1-4, DATA ENTRY, PHASES 1-16
5. DIAMOND SEQUENCE 17 TO 20 BC=BARRIER CONTROL, VALUES: B,C
B= BARRIER MODE
C=COMPATIBILITY MODE

MM-1-1-2 MM-1-1-3
PHASE COMPATIBILITY ^ ENABLE BACKUP PREVENT
6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 TMG\BKUP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 B . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 . C B . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . B . . . . . . . . . .
7 . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . C B . . . . . . . .
9 . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10 . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . X . . . . . .
11 . . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12 . . . . 12 . . . . . . . . . . X . . . .
13 . . . 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14 . . 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15 . 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-2 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 ASC/3 Screens
Appendix B

MM-1-1-4 MM-1-1-5
SIMULTANEOUS GAP PHASES DIAMOND SEQUENCE 17 TO 20 SUBMENU
GAP\PH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 . . . . X X . . . . . . . . . . 1. PHASE RING SEQUENCE AND ASSIGNMENT
2 . . . . X X . . . . . . . . . .
3 . . . . . . X X . . . . . . . . 2. PHASE COMPATIBILITY
4 . . . . . . X X . . . . . . . .
5 X X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. BACKUP PREVENT PHASES
6 X X . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 . . X X . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 . . X X . . . . . . . . . . . .
9 . . . . . . . . . . X X . . . .
10 . . . . . . . . . . X X . . . .
11 . . . . . . . . X X . . . . . .
12 . . . . . . . . X X . . . . . .
13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X X
14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X X
15 . . . . . . . . . . . . X X . .
16 . . . . . . . . . . . . X X . .
DISABLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MM-1-1-5-1 MM-1-1-5-1 (continued)

PHASE RING ASSIGNMENT
SEQUENCE 17 SEQUENCE 19
RING 1 2 3 4 9 11 12 1 0 0 0 0 RING 1 1 2 3 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
RING 2 15 16 5 6 7 8 13 0 0 0 0 RING 2 5 6 7 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
RING 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RING 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
RING 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RING 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
RING............. 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 RING............. 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
PHASE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 PHASE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
RING............. 1 0 1 1 2 0 2 2 RING............. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

SEQUENCE 18 SEQUENCE 20
RING 1 10 4 9 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 RING 1 1 2 3 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
RING 2 14 8 13 7 6 5 0 0 0 0 0 RING 2 5 6 7 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
RING 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RING 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
RING 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RING 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
RING............. 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 RING............. 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
PHASE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 PHASE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
RING............. 1 1 0 0 2 2 0 0 RING............. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

ASC/3 Programming Manual B-3

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
ASC/3 Screens
Appendix B

MM-1-1-5-2 MM-1-1-5-2 (continued)

PHASE COMPATIBILITY PHASE COMPATIBILITY
SEQUENCE 17 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SEQUENCE 19 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 . . . . X X X . . . . X . . . 1 . . . X X X X . . . . . . . .
2 . . . X . . . . . . . . . X X 2 . . . X X X X . . . . . . . .
3 . . . X . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . X X X X . . . . . . . .
4 . . . X . . . . . . . . . . . 4 . . . X X X X . . . . . . . .
5 . X X X . . . X . . . . . . . 5 X X X X . . . . . . . . . . .
6 X . . . . . . . . X X . . . . 6 X X X X . . . . . . . . . . .
7 X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 X X X X . . . . . . . . . . .
8 X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 X X X X . . . . . . . . . . .
9 . . . . X . . . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11 . . . . . X . . . . . . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12 . . . . . X . . . . . . . . . 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13 X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15 . X . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16 . X . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PHASE COMPATIBILITY PHASE COMPATIBILITY

SEQUENCE 18 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SEQUENCE 20 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 . . . X X . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . X X . . . . . . . . . .
2 . . . X X . . . . . . . . . . 2 . . . X X . . . . . . . . . .
3 . . . . . X . . . . . X . . . 3 . . . . . X X . . . . . . . .
4 . . . . . . X . . . . . X . . 4 . . . . . X X . . . . . . . .
5 X X . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 X X . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 X X . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 X X . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 . . X . . . . X . . . . . . . 7 . . X X . . . . . . . . . . .
8 . . . X . . . . X . . . . . . 8 . . X X . . . . . . . . . . .
9 . . . . . . X . . . . X . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10 . . . . . . . X . . . . X . . 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13 . . X . . . . . X . . . . . . 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14 . . . X . . . . . X . . . . . 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-4 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 ASC/3 Screens
Appendix B

MM-1-1-5-3 MM-1-1-5-3 (continued)

BACKUP PREVENT PHASES BACKUP PREVENT PHASES
SEQUENCE 17 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SEQUENCE 19 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TIMING 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIMING 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BACKUP PREVENT PHASES BACKUP PREVENT PHASES

SEQUENCE 18 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SEQUENCE 20 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TIMING 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIMING 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MM-1-2 MM-1-3
PHASES IN USE / EXCLUSIVE PED LD SWITCH ASSIGN
PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PHASE DIMMING ---FLASH---
IN USE....... X X X X X X X X /OVLP TYPE R Y G D PWR AUT TGR
EXCLUSIVE PED . . . . . . . . 1 1 O . . . + X . .
2 2 O . . . + X . .
PHASE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 3 3 O . . . + X . .
IN USE....... X . . . . . . . 4 4 O . . . + X . .
EXCLUSIVE PED X . . . . . . . 5 5 O . . . + X . .
6 6 O . . . + X . .
7 7 O . . . + X . .
8 8 O . . . + X . .
9 2 P . . . + X . .
10 4 P . . . + X . .
11 6 P . . . + X . .
12 8 P . . . + X . .
13 13 O . . . + X . .
14 14 O . . . + X . .
15 15 O . . . + X . .
16 16 O . . . + X . .

ASC/3 Programming Manual B-5

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
ASC/3 Screens
Appendix B

MM-1-4 MM-1-4-1
PORT 1 (SDLC) SUBMENU SDLC PORT 1 CONFIG
BIU 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1. SDLC OPTIONS TERM & FACILITY . . . . . . . .
DETECTOR RACK . . . . . . . .
2. MMU PROGRAM
ENABLE TS2/MMU TYPE CABINET......... NO
3. COLOR CHECK ENABLE ENABLE MMU EXTENDED STATUS.......... NO
ENABLE SDLC STOP TIME............... NO
4. SECONDARY STATIONS/TESTS ENABLE 3 CRITICAL RFEs LOCKUP....... YES
MMU TO CU SDLC EXTERNAL START... ENABLED

MM-1-4-2 MM-1-4-3

MMU PROGRAM [MANUAL] ERROR COLOR CHECK ENABLE

MMU CH 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 ENABLE COLOR CHECK..X
1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMU/LS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . RED X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
4 . . . . . . . . . . . . YELLOW X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
5 . . . . . . . . . . . GREEN X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
6 . . . . . . . . . .
7 . . . . . . . . .
8 . . . . . . . .
9 . . . . . . .
10 . . . . . .
11 . . . . .
12 . . . .
13 . . .
14 . .
15 .

MM-1-4-4 MM-1-5
SECONDARY TO SECONDARY ADDRESSING COMMUNICATIONS SUBMENU
T&F 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 MMU
. . . . . . . . . 1. ETHERNET
D/R 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 DIAG
. . . . . . . . . 2. PORT 2/C50S
ENABLE SDLC DIAGNOSTIC TEST...........NO
3. PORT 3A/C21S

4. PORT 3B/C22S

5. NTCIP

6. ECPIP

B-6 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 ASC/3 Screens
Appendix B

MM-1-5-1 MM-1-5-2, Port 2 on ASC/3 (GPS NMEA)

ETHERNET MAC FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF COMM PORT 2
CONTROLLER IP........... 255.255.255.255 ENABLE......... NO PROTOCOL GPS NMEA
SUBNET MASK............. 255.255.255.255 BIT RATE.... 4800
DEFAULT GATEWAY IP...... 255.255.255.255 D/P/S........ 8/N/1
SERVER IP .............. 255.255.255.255 DUPLEX........ FULL
LINK SPEED/DUPLEX............. 1000/FULL FLOW CONTROL... YES
DROP-OUT TIME...................... 300

MM-1-5-2, Port 2 on ASC/3 (TERM) MM-1-5-2, Port 2 on ASC/3 (NTCIP)

COMM PORT 2 COMM PORT 2
ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL..... TERM ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL..... NTCIP
BIT RATE.... 115200 BIT RATE.... 115200 ADDRESS....... 65535
D/P/S........ 8/N/1 D/P/S........ 8/N/1 GROUP ADDRESS. 65535
DUPLEX........ HALF DUPLEX........ HALF SINGLE FLAGGED.. YES
FLOW CONTROL... YES FLOW CONTROL... YES DROP-OUT TIME. 65535

INTERSECTION MONITOR:
MODEM SETUP STRING................. USER
USER STRING:

MM-1-5-2, Port 2 on ASC/3 (ECPIP) MM-1-5-2, Port 2 on ASC/3 (AB3418)

COMM PORT 2 COMM PORT 2
ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL..... ECPIP ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL..... AB3418
BIT RATE.... 115200 TRD (ms)....... 0.0 BIT RATE.... 115200 ADDRESS....... 65535
D/P/S........ 8/N/1 DROP-OUT TIME. 65535 D/P/S........ 8/N/1 GROUP ADDRESS. 65535
DUPLEX........ HALF DUPLEX........ HALF SINGLE FLAGGED.. YES
FLOW CONTROL... YES FLOW CONTROL... YES DROP-OUT TIME. 65535

MM-1-5-2, Port 2 on ASC/3 (METRO RAPID) MM-1-5-2, Port 2 on ASC/3 (IEEE 1570)
COMM PORT 2 COMM PORT 2
ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL.METRO RAPID ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL IEEE 1570
BIT RATE.... 115200 ADDRESS....... 0 BIT RATE.... 9600 ATCS RAILROAD... 0
D/P/S........ 8/N/1 D/P/S........ 8/N/1 ATCS RR LINE.... 0
DUPLEX........ HALF DUPLEX........ HALF ATCS GROUP...... 0
FLOW CONTROL... YES FLOW CONTROL... YES WAYSIDE ATC
DEVICE 0 0
SUBNODE 0 0

ASC/3 Programming Manual B-7

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
ASC/3 Screens
Appendix B

MM-1-5-2, Port C50S on 2070 MM-1-5-2, Port C50S on 2070 (TERM)

(GPS NMEA)
COMM PORT C50S COMM PORT C50S
ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL GPS NMEA ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL..... TERM
BIT RATE.... 4800 BIT RATE.... 38400
D/P/S........ 8/N/1 D/P/S........ 8/N/1
DUPLEX........ FULL DUPLEX........ HALF

MM-1-5-2, Port C50S on 2070 (NTCIP) MM-1-5-2, Port C50S on 2070 (AB3418)

COMM PORT C50S COMM PORT C50S

ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL..... NTCIP ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL..... AB3418
BIT RATE.... 38400 ADDRESS....... 65535 BIT RATE.... 38400 ADDRESS....... 65535
D/P/S........ 8/N/1 GROUP ADDRESS. 65535 D/P/S........ 8/N/1 GROUP ADDRESS. 65535
DUPLEX........ HALF DROP-OUT TIME. 65535 DUPLEX........ HALF DROP-OUT TIME. 65535

MM-1-5-3, Port 3A on ASC/3 MM-1-5-3, Port C21S on 2070

(GPS NMEA) (GPS NMEA)
COMM PORT 3A COMM PORT C21S
ENABLE......... NO PROTOCOL GPS NMEA ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL GPS NMEA
BIT RATE.... 4800 BIT RATE.... 4800
D/P/S........ 8/N/1 D/P/S........ 8/N/1
DUPLEX........ FULL DUPLEX........ FULL
FLOW CONTROL... YES

MM-1-5-3, Port 3A on ASC/3 (TERM) MM-1-5-3, Port C21S on 2070 (TERM)

COMM PORT 3A COMM PORT C21S

ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL..... TERM ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL..... TERM
BIT RATE.... 115200 BIT RATE.... 115200
D/P/S........ 8/N/1 D/P/S........ 8/N/1
DUPLEX........ HALF DUPLEX........ HALF
FLOW CONTROL... YES FLOW CONTROL... YES

B-8 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 ASC/3 Screens
Appendix B

MM-1-5-3, Port 3A on ASC/3 (NTCIP) MM-1-5-3, Port C21S on 2070 (NTCIP)

COMM PORT 3A COMM PORT C21S

ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL..... NTCIP ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL..... NTCIP
BIT RATE.... 115200 ADDRESS....... 65535 BIT RATE.... 115200 ADDRESS....... 65535
D/P/S........ 8/N/1 GROUP ADDRESS. 65535 D/P/S........ 8/N/1 GROUP ADDRESS. 65535
DUPLEX........ HALF SINGLE FLAGGED.. YES DUPLEX........ HALF DROP-OUT TIME. 65535
FLOW CONTROL... YES DROP-OUT TIME. 65535 FLOW CONTROL... YES

MM-1-5-3, Port 3A on ASC/3 (ECPIP) MM-1-5-3, Port C21S on 2070 (ECPIP)

COMM PORT 3A COMM PORT C21S

ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL..... ECPIP ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL..... ECPIP
BIT RATE.... 115200 ADDRESS....... 65535 BIT RATE.... 115200 TRD (ms)....... 0.0
D/P/S........ 8/N/1 TRD (ms)........ 255 D/P/S........ 8/N/1 DROP-OUT TIME. 65535
DUPLEX........ HALF DROP-OUT TIME. 65535 DUPLEX........ HALF
FLOW CONTROL... YES FLOW CONTROL... YES

MM-1-5-3, Port 3A on ASC/3 MM-1-5-3, Port C21S on 2070 (AB3418)

(AB3418)
COMM PORT 3A COMM PORT C21S
ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL..... AB3418 ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL..... AB3418
BIT RATE.... 115200 ADDRESS....... 65535 BIT RATE.... 115200 ADDRESS....... 65535
D/P/S........ 8/N/1 GROUP ADDRESS. 65535 D/P/S........ 8/N/1 GROUP ADDRESS. 65535
DUPLEX........ HALF SINGLE FLAGGED.. YES DUPLEX........ HALF DROP-OUT TIME. 65535
FLOW CONTROL... YES DROP-OUT TIME. 65535 FLOW CONTROL... YES

ASC/3 Programming Manual B-9

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
ASC/3 Screens
Appendix B

MM-1-5-4, Port 3B on ASC/3 MM-1-5-4, Port C22S on 2070 (NTCIP)

(NTCIP)
COMM PORT 3B COMM PORT C22S
ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL..... NTCIP ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL..... NTCIP
BIT RATE.... 115200 ADDRESS....... 65535 BIT RATE.... 115200 ADDRESS....... 65535
D/P/S........ 8/N/1 GROUP ADDRESS. 65535 D/P/S........ 8/N/1 GROUP ADDRESS. 65535
DUPLEX........ HALF SINGLE FLAGGED.. YES DUPLEX........ HALF DROP-OUT TIME. 65535
FLOW CONTROL... YES DROP-OUT TIME. 65535 FLOW CONTROL... YES
RTS-CTS DELAY. 6810
RTS TURN OFF.. 6810
EARLY RTS...... YES

MM-1-5-4, Port 3B on ASC/3 MM-1-5-4, Port C22S on 2070 (ECPIP)

(ECPIP)
COMM PORT 3B
ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL..... ECPIP
BIT RATE.... 115200 ADDRESS....... 65535 (not supported)
D/P/S........ 8/N/1 TRD (ms)........ 255
DUPLEX........ HALF DROP-OUT TIME. 65535
FLOW CONTROL... YES
RTS-CTS DELAY. 6810
RTS TURN OFF.. 6810
EARLY RTS...... YES
FSK HARDWARE... YES

MM-1-5-4, Port 3B on ASC/3 MM-1-5-4, Port C22S on 2070

(TERM) (TERM)
COMM PORT 3B COMM PORT C22S
ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL..... TERM ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL..... TERM
BIT RATE.... 115200 BIT RATE.... 115200
D/P/S........ 8/N/1 D/P/S........ 8/N/1
DUPLEX........ HALF DUPLEX........ HALF
FLOW CONTROL... YES FLOW CONTROL... YES
RTS-CTS DELAY. 6810
RTS TURN OFF.. 6810
EARLY RTS...... YES

MM-1-5-4, Port 3B on ASC/3 MM-1-5-4, Port C22S on 2070 (AB3418)

(AB3418)
COMM PORT 3B COMM PORT C22S
ENABLE....... RS232 PROTOCOL..... AB3418 ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL..... AB3418
BIT RATE.... 115200 ADDRESS....... 65535 BIT RATE.... 115200 ADDRESS....... 65535
D/P/S........ 8/N/1 GROUP ADDRESS. 65535 D/P/S........ 8/N/1 GROUP ADDRESS. 65535
DUPLEX........ HALF SINGLE FLAGGED.. YES DUPLEX........ HALF DROP-OUT TIME. 65535
FLOW CONTROL... YES DROP-OUT TIME. 65535 FLOW CONTROL... YES
RTS-CTS DELAY. 6810
RTS TURN OFF.. 6810
EARLY RTS...... YES

B-10 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 ASC/3 Screens
Appendix B

MM-1-5-5 on ASC/3 MM-1-5-5 on 2070

NTCIP NTCIP
BACKUP TIME....................... 65535 BACKUP TIME....................... 65535
UDP PORT.......................... 65535 UDP PORT.......................... 65535
ETHERNET PRIORITY..................... 1 ETHERNET PRIORITY..................... 1
PORT 2 PRIORITY....................... 4 PORT C50S PRIORITY.................... 4
PORT 3A PRIORITY...................... 2 PORT C21S PRIORITY.................... 2
PORT 3B PRIORITY...................... 3 PORT C22S PRIORITY.................... 3

MM-1-5-6 on ASC/3 MM-1-5-6 on 2070

ECPIP DAY MM/DD/YYYY|HH:MM:SS
CONTROLLER ADDRESS.....................0
EXPANDED SYSTEM DETECTOR ADDRESS.......0 RESERVED

SYSTEM DETECTOR ASSIGNMENT:

SYSTEM DET 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LOCAL DET 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64
SYSTEM DET 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
LOCAL DET 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64

MM-1-6-1 MM-1-7
EVENT LOGGING
RFEs (MMU/TF).. YES 3 RFEs >24H..... YES DISPLAY/ACCESS SUBMENU
MMU FL FAULTS.. YES LOCAL FLASH..... YES
RFEs (DET/TEST) YES DETECTOR ERRORS. YES 1. ADMINISTRATION
COORD ERRORS... YES CTR DOWNLOAD.... YES
PREEMPT........ YES TSP............. YES 2. DISPLAY OPTIONS
POWER ON/OFF... YES LOW BATTERY..... YES
ACCESS......... YES DATA CHANGE..... YES 3. SECURITY ACCESS
ONLINE/OFFLINE. YES
ALARM 1........ YES ALARM 2......... YES
ALARM 3........ YES ALARM 4......... YES
ALARM 5........ YES ALARM 6......... YES
ALARM 7........ YES ALARM 8......... YES
ALARM 9........ YES ALARM 10........ YES
ALARM 11....... YES ALARM 12........ YES
ALARM 13....... YES ALARM 14........ YES
ALARM 15....... YES ALARM 16........ YES

ASC/3 Programming Manual B-11

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
ASC/3 Screens
Appendix B

MM-1-7-1 MM-1-7-2
ADMINISTRATION DISPLAY OPTIONS
KEY CLICK ENABLE.................... YES
ENABLE CU/CABINET INTERLOCK CRC.... NO
CU/CABINET INTERLOCK CRC VALUE..... 0000 BACKLIGHT ENABLE.................... YES
CU/CABINET INTERLOCK HW VALUE...... 0000
LED MODE........................... AUTO
REQUEST DOWNLOAD CONTROLLER DATA... NO
CONTROLLER DATABASE CRC ........... C2C5 MAIN STATUS DISPLAY MODE....... ADVANCED
ENABLE AUTOMATIC BACKUP TO DATAKEY. NO
SCREEN FORMAT.................. ADVANCED

MM-1-7-3 MM-1-7-3, User Security Change

SECURITY ACCESS -SELECT NAME- USER ACCOUNT 2

01 administrator-- 02 L TA-----------
03 B HELLIAR------ 04 D MCNULTY------
05 G MEREDITH----- 06 J PASTRANO----- CURRENT CHANGE
07 L LINDLEY------ 08 L MAGASWERAN---
09 M PHAM--------- 10 P HOLLINGSWORTH NAME L TA L TA
11 public--------- 12 public---------
13 public--------- 14 public--------- ACCESS READ-ONLY READ-WRITE
15 public--------- 16 public---------
17 public--------- 18 public--------- ACCESS CODE ******** 0
19 public--------- 20 public---------
21 public--------- 22 public--------- ACCESS CODE CONFIRM 0
23 public--------- 24 public---------
25 public--------- 26 public---------
27 public--------- 28 public--------- 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
29 public--------- 30 public--------- SPACE ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZ
// //
49 public--------- 50 public---------

MM-1-8 MM-1-8-1
LOGIC STATEMENT CONTROL
LOGIC PROCESSOR SUBMENU 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5
LP 1-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1. LOGIC STATEMENT CONTROL LP 16-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LP 31-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. LOGIC STATEMENTS LP 46-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LP 61-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LP 76-90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LP 91-100. . . . . . . . . .

D = DISABLED E = ENABLED
"." = ENABLED / DISABLED BY OTHER SOURCE

B-12 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 ASC/3 Screens
Appendix B

MM-1-8-2 MM-2
LOGIC # 98 ACTIVE: N CONTROLLER SUBMENU

IF GREEN ON PHASE 10 IS ON 1. TIMING PLANS 5. START/FLASH

AND VEHICLE DET # 1 IS ON
OR MINGRN TMR ON PHASE 10 < 15.7 2. VEHICLE OVERLAPS 6. OPTION DATA

THEN SET VEHICLE DET # 1 OFF 3. VEH/PED OVERLAPS 7. PRE-TIMED

SET GREEN OVERLAP B OFF
SET YELLOW OVERLAP B ON 4. GUAR MIN TIME 8. PHASE RECALL

ELSE DELAY FOR 15.7 SECONDS

SET VEHICLE DET # 1 ON

MM-2-1

ASC/3 Programming Manual B-13

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
ASC/3 Screens
Appendix B

MM-2-2 (TYPE: OTHER/ECONOLITE) MM-2-2 (TYPE: NORMAL)

TMG VEH OVLP...[A] TYPE:OTHER/ECONOLITE TMG VEH OVLP...[A] TYPE: .......NORMAL
PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
INCLUDED . . . . . . . X . . . . . . . . INCLUDED . . . . . . . X . . . . . . . .
PROTECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PED PRTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LAG GRN 0.0 YEL 0.0 RED 0.0
NOT OVLP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FLSH GRN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LAG X PH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LAG 2 PH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LAG GRN 0.0 YEL 0.0 RED 0.0 ADV GRN 0.0

MM-2-2 (TYPE: -GRN/YEL) MM-2-2 (TYPE: PPLT FYA)

TMG VEH OVLP...[A] TYPE: .....-GRN/YEL TMG VEH OVLP...[A] TYPE: .....PPLT FYA
PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
INCLUDED . . . . . . . X . . . . . . . . PROTECTED PHASE (LEFT TURN)......... 0
MODIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PERMISSIVE PHASE (OPPOSING THRU).... 0
FLASHING ARROW OUTPUT.....CH 0 GRN OLP

DELAY START OF: FYA..0.0 CLEARANCE..0.0

ACTION PLAN SF BIT DISABLE........... 0

B-14 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 ASC/3 Screens
Appendix B

MM-2-3 MM-2-4
VEH/PED OVERLAPS GUARANTEED MINIMUM TIME DATA
INCLUDED 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 PHASE A01 B02 C03 D04 E05 F06 G07 H08
VEH OL A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIN GRN 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
VEH OL B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WALK 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
VEH OL C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PED CLR 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
VEH OL D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . YELLOW 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0
VEH OL E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RED CLR 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
VEH OL F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OVL GRN 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
VEH OL G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PHASE I09 J10 K11 L12 M13 N14 O15 P16
VEH OL H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIN GRN 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
VEH OL I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WALK 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
VEH OL J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PED CLR 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
VEH OL K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . YELLOW 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0
VEH OL L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RED CLR 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
VEH OL M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OVL GRN 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
VEH OL N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VEH/PED OVERLAPS
INCLUDED 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
VEH OL O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VEH OL P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PD OL 01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PD OL 02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PD OL 03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PD OL 04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PD OL 05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PD OL 06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PD OL 07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PD OL 08 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PD OL 09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PD OL 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PD OL 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PD OL 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VEH/PED OVERLAPS
INCLUDED 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
PD OL 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PD OL 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PD OL 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PD OL 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ASC/3 Programming Manual B-15

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
ASC/3 Screens
Appendix B

MM-2-5 MM-2-6
START/FLASH DATA
-------START UP------------------------- OPTION DATA SUBMENU
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
PHASE R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R 1. CONTROLLER OPTIONS
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P
OVERLAP X X X X . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. EXTENDED OPTIONS
FLASH>MON. NO FL TIME..255 ALL RED... 6
PWR START SEQ.. 1 MUTCD->YES Y->G: NO
------AUTOMATIC FLASH-------------------
PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
ENTRY . X . . . X . . . . . . . . . .
EXIT . X . . . X . . . . . . . . . .
OVERLAP A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P
EXIT X X X X . . . . . . . . . . . .
FLASH>MON. NO EXIT FL. W MIN FLASH. 8
MINIMUM RECALL. NO CYCLE THRU PHASE. NO

MM-2-6-1

CONTROLLER OPTIONS
PED CLEAR PROTECT . UNIT RED REVERT 2.0
MUTCD 3 SECONDS DONT WALK .......... NO
PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FLASHING GRN PH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GUAR PASSAGE.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NON-ACT I....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NON-ACT II...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DUAL ENTRY...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COND SERVICE.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COND RESERVICE.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PED RESERVICE... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REST IN WALK.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FLASHING WALK... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PED CLR>YELLOW.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PED CLR>RED..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IGRN + VEH EXT.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MM-2-6-2 MM-2-7
EXTENDED OPTIONS
PRE-TIMED MODE
IDOT 5 SECTION HEAD CONTROL.......ON
LP FEATURE.......................OFF ENABLE PRE-TIMED MODE............... NO
CANADIAN LEFT TURN...............OFF FREE INPUT ENABLES PRE-TIMED........ YES
PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
PRETIMED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-16 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 ASC/3 Screens
Appendix B

MM-2-8 MM-3
COORDINATOR SUBMENU

1. COORDINATOR OPTIONS

2. COORDINATOR PATTERNS

3. SPLIT PATTERNS

4. AUTO PERM MIN GREEN

5. SPLIT DEMAND

ASC/3 Programming Manual B-17

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
ASC/3 Screens
Appendix B

MM-3-1 MM-3-2
COORD OPTIONS
MANUAL PATTERN... 1 ECPI COORD......YES
SYSTEM SOURCE.. TBC SYSTEM FORMAT.. STD
SPLITS IN....SECONDS OFFSET IN...SECONDS
TRANSITION.. ADDONLY MAX SELECT. MAXINH
DWELL/ADD TIME... 0 ENABLE MAN SYNC. NO
DLY COORD WK-LZ. NO FORCE OFF... FIXED
OFFSET REF.... LEAD CAL USE PED TM..YES
PED RECALL...... NO PED RESERVE..... NO
LOCAL ZERO OVRD.. NO FO ADD INI GRN.. NO
RE-SYNC COUNT.... 0 MULTISYNC....... NO

MM-3-3 MM-3-4
AUTO PERM MINIMUM GREEN (SECONDS)

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
MIN GRN. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

PHASE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
MIN GRN. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

B-18 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 ASC/3 Screens
Appendix B

MM-3-5 MM-4
SPLIT DEMAND PREEMPT/TSP/SCP SUBMENU
PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
DEMAND 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. PREEMPT PLAN 1-10
DEMAND 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DEMAND 1 2 2. ENABLE PREEMPT FILTERING & TSP/SCP
DETECTOR......... 0 0
CALL TIME (SEC).. 0 0 3. TSP/SCP PLAN 1-6
CYCLE COUNT...... 0 0
4. TSP/SCP SPLIT PATTERN

MM-4-1 MM-4-2
PREEMPT PLAN [ 1] ENABLE.... NO ENABLE PREEMPT FILTERING & TSP/SCP
VEH/PED 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 FILTERED SOLID PULSING
OVERLAP A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P INPUT 1 ...BYPASSED.. ...BYPASSED..
TRKCLR V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 ...BYPASSED.. ...BYPASSED..
TRKCLR O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 ..PREEMPT 3. ..PREEMPT 7.
ENA TRL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 ..PREEMPT 4. ..PREEMPT 8.
DWEL VEH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 ..PREEMPT 5. ..PREEMPT 9.
DWEL PED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 ..PREEMPT 6. ..PREEMPT 10.
DWEL OLP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 ...BYPASSED.. ...BYPASSED..
CYC VEH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 ...BYPASSED.. ...BYPASSED..
CYC PED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 ...BYPASSED.. ...BYPASSED..
CYC OLP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 ...BYPASSED.. ...BYPASSED..
EXIT PH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXIT CAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP FUNC . . . . . . . . (1-8)

PREEMPT PLAN [ 1] ENABLE.... NO

ENABLE.... NO|PMT OVRIDE.X|INTERLOCK NO
DET LOCK.. X|DELAY.. 0|INHIBIT... 0
OVERIDE FL. .|DURATION 0|CLR>GRN... NO
TERM OLP.ASAP|PC>YEL NO|TERM PH NO
PED DARK.. NO|TC RESRV. NO|DWELL FL LDSW
LINK PMT....0|X FLCOLR GRN|EXIT OPT. OFF
X TMG PLN...0|RE-SERV.. 0|FLT TYPE HARD
FREE DUR PMT|R1 NO|R2 NO|R3 NO|R4 NO
--TIMING-----WALK|PED CL|MN GR| YEL| RED
ENTRANCE TM. 0| 255| 5| 4.0| 1.0
-----------MIN GR|EXT GR|MX GR| YEL| RED
TRACK CLEAR 0| 255| 5| 4.0| 1.0
-----------MIN DL|PMTEXT|MX TM| YEL| RED
DWL/CYC-EXIT 0| 0.0| 0| 4.0| 1.0
PMT ACTIVE OUT.. ON PMT ACT DWELL... NO
OTHER - PRI PMT.OFF NON-PRI PMT.....OFF
INH EXT TIME...25.5 PED PR RETURN...OFF
PRIORITY RETURN.OFF QUEUE DELAY.... OFF
COND DELAY......OFF
PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PR RTN% 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
PHASES 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
PR RTN% 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

ASC/3 Programming Manual B-19

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
ASC/3 Screens
Appendix B

MM-4-3 MM-4-4
TSP/SCP PLAN
TSP/SCP PLAN 1 2 3 4 5 6
TSP/SCP ENA T1 T2 . . . .
SIGNAL TYPE P P P P P P
DET LOCK . . . . . .
DELAY TIME XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX
MAX PRESENCE 0 0 0 0 0 0
PMT ENA RESERVICE X X X X X X
NO DELAY IN TSP X X X X X X
ACT SF INHIBIT 0 0 0 0 0 0
RESERVICE CYCLS 0 0 0 0 0 0
BUS HEADING NB SB EB WB
TSP OR SCP.... TSP FREE DEFAULT PLAN.120
HEADWAY ALLOWANCE 100%

----- TSP/SCP PHASE -----

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
TSP/SCP1 . T . P . T . P . . . . . . . .
TSP/SCP2 . . V T . . V T . . . . . . . .
TSP/SCP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TSP/SCP4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TSP/SCP5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TSP/SCP6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MM-5 MM-5-1
TIME BASE SUBMENU CLOCK/CALENDAR DATA
MM/DD/YYYY DAY HH:MM:SS
1. CLOCK/CALENDAR DATA ENA ACTION PLAN. 0
SYNC REF TIME.00:00 SYNC REF.. REF TIME
2. ACTION PLAN TIME FROM GMT...-04 DAY LIGHT SAVE.USDLS
TIME RESET INPUT SET TIME...... 03:30:00
3. DAY PLAN/EVENT

4. SCHEDULE NUMBER

5. EXCEPTION DAYS

B-20 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 ASC/3 Screens
Appendix B

MM-5-2 MM-5-3
DAY PLAN [ 1] DAY PLAN IN EFFECT [ 0] v
EVENT ACTION PLAN START TIME
1 0 00:00
2 0 00:00
3 0 00:00
4 0 00:00
5 0 00:00
6 0 00:00
7 0 00:00
8 0 00:00
9 0 00:00
10 0 00:00
11 0 00:00
12 0 00:00
13 0 00:00
14 0 00:00

DAY PLAN [ 1] DAY PLAN IN EFFECT [ 0]^v

EVENT ACTION PLAN START TIME
15 0 00:00
16 0 00:00
17 0 00:00
18 0 00:00
19 0 00:00
20 0 00:00
21 0 00:00
22 0 00:00
23 0 00:00
24 0 00:00
25 0 00:00
26 0 00:00
//
50 0 00:00

MM-5-4 MM-5-5
SCHEDULE NUMBER [ 1] EXCEPTION DAY PROGRAM v
DAY PLAN NO ..... 0 CLEAR ALL FIELDS.. X EXCEPTION FLOAT/ MON/ DOW/ WOM/ DAY
SELECT ALL MONTHS.. . DOW.. . DOM.. . DAY FIXED MON DOM YEAR PLAN
MONTH J F M A M J J A S O N D 1 FIXED 0 0 0 0
. . . . . . . . . . . . 2 FIXED 0 0 0 0
DAY (DOW): SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT 3 FIXED 0 0 0 0
. . . . . . . 4 FIXED 0 0 0 0
DAY(DOM):1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 5 FIXED 0 0 0 0
. . . . . . . . . . . 6 FIXED 0 0 0 0
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 7 FIXED 0 0 0 0
. . . . . . . . . . . 8 FIXED 0 0 0 0
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 9 FIXED 0 0 0 0
. . . . . . . . . 10 FIXED 0 0 0 0
11 FIXED 0 0 0 0
12 FIXED 0 0 0 0
13 FIXED 0 0 0 0

EXCEPTION DAY PROGRAM ^v

EXCEPTION FLOAT/ MON/ DOW/ WOM/ DAY
DAY FIXED MON DOM YEAR PLAN
//
36 FIXED 0 0 0 0

ASC/3 Programming Manual B-21

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
ASC/3 Screens
Appendix B

MM-6
DETECTOR SUBMENU

1. VEH DET PHASE ASSIGNMENT

2. VEHICLE DETECTOR SETUP

3. PED DETECTOR INPUT ASSIGNMENT

4. LOG INT / SPEED DETECTOR SETUP

5. VEHICLE DETECTOR DIAGNOSTICS

6. PEDESTRIAN DETECTOR DIAGNOSTICS

MM-6-1
VEH DET PH ASSIGN VEH DET PLAN [ 1] > v
[ ADDITIONAL PHASE CALLS ]
DET PH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 T-TYPE
1 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-STANDARD
2 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-DISCONNECT TYPE QUEUE/STOP BAR
3 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-PASSAGE TYPE QUEUE/STOP BAR
4 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-CALLING
5 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-RED EXTENSION
6 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-GREEN EXTENSION/DELAY
7 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-NTCIP
8 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-BIKE
9 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-STANDARD
10 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-STANDARD
11 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-STANDARD
12 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-STANDARD
13 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-STANDARD

14 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-STANDARD
15 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-STANDARD
16 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-STANDARD
17 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-STANDARD
18 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-STANDARD
19 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-STANDARD
20 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-STANDARD
21 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-STANDARD
22 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-STANDARD
23 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-STANDARD
24 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-STANDARD
25 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-STANDARD
26 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-STANDARD
27 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-STANDARD
//
64 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-STANDARD

B-22 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 ASC/3 Screens
Appendix B

MM-6-2 (STANDARD) MM-6-2 (DISCONNECT)

VEH DETECTOR [ 1] VEH DET PLAN [ 1] VEH DETECTOR [ 1] VEH DET PLAN [ 1]
TYPE: S-STANDARD TYPE: D-DISCONNECT TYPE QUEUE/STOP BAR
TS2 DETECTOR..... X ECPI LOG....... YES TS2 DETECTOR..... X ECPI LOG....... NO
DET PH - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 DISCONNECT TIME..................... 0
1 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USE ADDED INITIAL . CROSS SWITCH PH.. 0
EXTEND TIME... 0.0 DELAY TIME... 0.0 LOCK IN....... NONE NTCIP VOL X OR OCC X
USE ADDED INITIAL . CROSS SWITCH PH.. 0 PMT QUEUE DELAY. NO
LOCK IN..... YELLOW NTCIP VOL X OR OCC X
PMT QUEUE DELAY. NO

MM-6-2 (PASSAGE QUEUE) MM-6-2 (CALLING)

VEH DETECTOR [ 1] VEH DET PLAN [ 1] VEH DETECTOR [ 1] VEH DET PLAN [ 1]
TYPE: P-PASSAGE TYPE QUEUE/STOP BAR TYPE: C-CALLING
TS2 DETECTOR..... X ECPI LOG....... NO TS2 DETECTOR..... X ECPI LOG....... NO
PASSAGE TIME....................... 0.0 USE ADDED INITIAL . CROSS SWITCH PH.. 0
USE ADDED INITIAL . CROSS SWITCH PH.. 0 LOCK IN....... NONE NTCIP VOL X OR OCC X
LOCK IN....... NONE NTCIP VOL X OR OCC X PMT QUEUE DELAY. NO
PMT QUEUE DELAY. NO

MM-6-2 (RED EXTENSION) MM-6-2 (GREEN EXTENSION)

VEH DETECTOR [ 1] VEH DET PLAN [ 1] VEH DETECTOR [ 1] VEH DET PLAN [ 1]
TYPE: R-RED EXTENSION TYPE: G-GREEN EXTENSION/DELAY
TS2 DETECTOR..... X ECPI LOG....... NO TS2 DETECTOR..... X ECPI LOG....... NO
EXTEND TIME... 0.0 DELAY TIME... 0.0
USE ADDED INITIAL . CROSS SWITCH PH.. 0
LOCK IN....... NONE NTCIP VOL X OR OCC X
PMT QUEUE DELAY. NO

MM-6-2 (NTCIP) MM-6-2 (BIKE)

VEH DETECTOR [ 1] VEH DET PLAN [ 1] VEH DETECTOR [ 1] VEH DET PLAN [ 1]
TYPE: N-NTCIP TYPE: B-BIKE
TS2 DETECTOR..... X ECPI LOG....... NO TS2 DETECTOR..... X ECPI LOG....... NO
CALL OPTION.... YES DELAY TIME... 0.0 EXTEND TIME... 0.0 NTCIP VOL X OR OCC X
EXT OPTION. PASSAGE EXTENSION TIME. 0.0
USE ADDED INITIAL . CROSS SWITCH PH.. 0
LOCK IN....... NONE NTCIP VOL X OR OCC X
PMT QUEUE DELAY. NO

ASC/3 Programming Manual B-23

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
ASC/3 Screens
Appendix B

MM-6-3 (NTCIP MODE) MM-6-3 (ECONOLITE MODE)

PED DET PHASE ASSIGNMENT MODE: NTCIP PED DET PHASE ASSIGNMENT MODE:ECONOLITEv
PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 D 1 X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DETECTOR 1 2 3 . . . 5 . E 2 . X . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PHASE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 E 4 . . . . B . . . . . . . . . . .
DETECTOR 10 . . . . . . . C 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T 6 . . . . . . . 2 . . . . . . . .
O 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10 . . . . . . . . X . . . . . . .
11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MM-6-4 MM-6-5
LOG - SPEED DETECTOR SETUP VEH DET DIAG v
NTCIP LOG. 0 ECPI LOG. TBAP LENGTH.INCH VEH DIAG PLAN NUMBER[ 1] | FAILED |
SPEED DET 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 DET COUNT|ACT|PRES| X'S|TIME|CL DELAY|
LOCAL DET....... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 255 255 255 60 255 0
ONE/TWO DET..... 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 0 0 0 1 255 0
VEH LENGTH...... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 1 255 0
TRAP LENGTH..... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 1 255 0
ENABLE LOG...... . . . . . . . . 5 0 0 0 1 255 0
SPEED DET 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 6 0 0 0 1 255 0
LOCAL DET....... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 0 0 0 1 255 0
ONE/TWO DET..... 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 8 0 0 0 1 255 0
VEH LENGTH...... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 0 0 0 1 255 0
TRAP LENGTH..... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 1 255 0
ENABLE LOG...... . . . . . . . . 11 0 0 0 1 255 0
12 0 0 0 1 255 0
13 0 0 0 1 255 0

VEH DET DIAG ^v

VEH DIAG PLAN NUMBER[ 1] | FAILED |
DET COUNT|ACT|PRES| X'S|TIME|CL DELAY|
14 0 0 0 1 255 0
15 0 0 0 1 255 0
16 0 0 0 1 255 0
17 0 0 0 1 255 0
18 0 0 0 1 255 0
19 0 0 0 1 255 0
20 0 0 0 1 255 0
21 0 0 0 1 255 0
22 0 0 0 1 255 0
23 0 0 0 1 255 0
24 0 0 0 1 255 0
25 0 0 0 1 255 0
26 0 0 0 1 255 0
//
64 0 0 0 1 255 0

B-24 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 ASC/3 Screens
Appendix B

MM-6-6 Main Status Display

PED DETECTOR DIAG PLAN[1] v STATUS [CORD SYS P120] MM/DD/YY|HH:MM:SS
DET COUNTS ACT PRES MULTIPLIER PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 0 0 0 1 PH STAT . G R R G R R R - - - - - - - -
2 0 0 0 1 VEH CALL . I I . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 0 0 0 1 PED CALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 0 0 0 1 R1/PH 04|R2/PH 08|R3/PH ..|R4/PH ..
5 0 0 0 1 MGR1 0.0|YEL 0.0|INACTIVE |INACTIVE
6 0 0 0 1 PDCL 12.0|FORCE OFF| |
7 0 0 0 1 PLAN SPLT:.12|TP:.4|SEQ:.1|ACT:100|DP:4
8 0 0 0 1 LC:115s/120|SYS CYC:110s|COS 111| COORD
9 0 0 0 1 FUNCTION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
10 0 0 0 1 PMT|TSP - - - - - - - - - -|X X X X X X
11 0 0 0 1 LP FLAG . A . . . A . . . . . . . . . .
12 0 0 0 1 COMMUNICATIONS PORT STATUS|TLM ADD: 0
13 0 0 0 1 ETH RX TX|P2 RX TX|P3A RX TX|P3B RX TX
14 0 0 0 1 2 .- .-|1 OK OK|3 ID |3 .. ..
15 0 0 0 1
16 0 0 0 1

MM-7 MM-7-1
STATUS DISPLAY SUBMENU CONTROL[CORD SYS P120] MM/DD/YY|HH:MM:SS
PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
1. CONTROLLER 6. DETECTORS PH STAT . G R R G R R R - - - - - - - -
VEH OVL R G R - - - - - - - - - - - - -
2. COORDINATOR 7. FLASH/SDLC/MMU PED OVL - D - C - D - D - - - - - - - -
VEH CALL . I I . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. PREEMPTOR/TSP 8. INPUTS / OUTPUTS PED CALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLAN SPLT:.12|TP:.4|SEQ:.1|ACT:100|DP:4
4. TBC/ACTION PLAN R1/PH 04|R2/PH 08|R3/PH ..|R4/PH ..
MGR1 0.0|YEL 0.0|INACTIVE |INACTIVE
5. COMMUNICATIONS PDCL 12.0|FORCE OFF| |
DEN00/000|DEN00/000|DEN00/000|DEN00/000
MAX 00.0|MAX 00.0|MAX 00.0|MAX 00.0
OLA G . |OLB Y 2.9|OLC R . |OLD R .
FUNCTION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
LP FLAG . A . . . A . . . . . . . . . .

MM-7-2 MM-7-3
COORD [CORD SYS P120] MM/DD/YY|HH:MM:SS PREEMPTION/TSP SUBMENU
PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
PH STAT R G R R G R R R - - - - - - - - 1. PREEMPTOR
VEH CALL . I I . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PED CALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. TSP/SCP
PERMISVE . P . . V P . . . . . . . . . .
PLAN SPLT:.12|TP:.4|SEQ:.1|ACT:100|DP:4
LC:115s/120|SYS CYL:110s|COS 111| COORD
LOCAL OFFSET... 0s ACTUAL OFFSET.. 0s
NEXT PLAN.....XXXX NEXT TIME...xx:xx:xx
SPLIT DEMAND..XXX/00 RING 1 2 3 4
HOLD APPLIED TO PHASE 2 6 . .
FORCE OFF RING . . . .
SPLIT TIMING 0s 0s 0s 0s
SPLIT EXTENSION TIME 0s 0s 0s 0s
RING OFFSETS 0s 0s 0s 0s

ASC/3 Programming Manual B-25

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
ASC/3 Screens
Appendix B

MM-7-3-1 MM-7-3-2
PREEMPT[CORD SYS P120] MM/DD/YY|HH:MM:SS TSP/SCP[FREE-TBC ]MM/DD/YY|HH:MM:SS
PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
PH STAT R G R R G R R R - - - - - - - - PH STAT R G R R G R R R - - - - - - - -
VEH OVL R O R G - - - - - - - - - - - - VEH OVL - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
PED OVL - D - D - D - D - - - - - - - - PED OVL W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W
VEH CALL . I I . . . . . . . . . . . . . VEH CALL . I I . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PED CALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PED CALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LC: 6s/ 0|SYS CYC: 0s|COS 111| COORD ACT TSP/SCP[0]| STATUS 1H 2H 3H 4H 5H 6H
R1/PH 4|R2/PH 8|R3/PH .|R4/PH . PLAN SPLT:.12|TP:.4|SEQ:.1|ACT:100|DP:4
NOT PMT | CLR TRK | CYCLING | DWELL LC: 6s/ 0|SC: 0s[ FREE]TLM ADD: 0
MGR1 0.0|YEL 0.0|RED REST |RED REST R1/PH 4|R2/PH 8|R3/PH .|R4/PH .
PDCL 12.0|FORCE OFF| | MGR1 0.0|YEL 0.0|RED REST |RED REST
PDCL 12.0|FORCE OFF| |
FUNCTION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 FUNCTION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
PMT/TSP . . . . . . . . . .|. . . . . . PMT/TSP . . . . . . . . . .|. . . . . .
LP FLAG . A . . . A . . . . . . . . . . LP FLAG . A . . . A . . . . . . . . . .

MM-7-4

TIME BASE STATUS DAY MM/DD/YY|HH:MM:SS

SOURCE...TIME BASE NEXT DAY PLAN:FRI
# SCHDL |DAY PLN|DP EVENT|ACT PLN|START
1 1 |WED 1 | 5 | 4 |09:10
2 1 |WED 1 | 6 | 5 |11:45
3 1 |WED 1 | 7 | 10 |14:20
4 1 |WED 1 | 12 | 2 |15:45
5 1 |WED 1 | 2 | 4 |19:15
6 1 |WED 1 | 1 | 1 |21:00
7 1 |THU 1 | 5 | 4 |09:00
8 1 |THU 1 | 6 | 5 |11:45
9 1 |WED 1 | 1 | 1 |21:00
10 1 |WED 1 | 1 | 1 |21:00
11 0 |--- 0 | 0 | 0 |00:00
12 0 |--- 0 | 0 | 0 |00:00
13 0 |--- 0 | 0 | 0 |00:00

# SCHDL |DAY PLN|DP EVENT|ACT PLN|START

//
30 0 |--- 0 | 0 | 0 |00:00

MM-7-5 MM-7-5-1
COMMUNICATIONS SUBMENU ETHERNET DAY MM/DD/YY|HH:MM:SS
MAC ADDRESS........... FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF
1. ETHERNET LINK SPEED/DUPLEX............. 1000/FULL
RX PACKET COUNT................... 65535
2. PORT 2/C50S TX PACKET COUNT................... 65535
RX PACKET ERROR COUNT............. 65535
3. PORT 3A/C21S TX PACKET ERROR COUNT............. 65535
DEFAULT GATEWAY REACHABLE........... YES
4. PORT 3B/C22S
SERVER REACHABLE.................... YES
5. NTCIP

6. ECPIP

B-26 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 ASC/3 Screens
Appendix B

MM-7-5-2, Port 2 on ASC/3 MM-7-5-2, Port C50S on 2070 (AB3418)

(AB3418)
COMM PORT 2 DAY DD/MM/YY HH:MM:SS COMM PORT C50S DAY MM/DD/YY|HH:MM:SS
RECEIVE.......... X PROTOCOL..... AB3418 RECEIVE.......... X PROTOCOL..... AB3418
TRANSMIT......... X RX BYTE COUNT. 65535 TRANSMIT......... X RX BYTE COUNT. 65535
READY TO SEND.... X TX BYTE COUNT. 65535 TX BYTE COUNT. 65535
CLEAR TO SEND.... X DROP-OUT TIMER 65535
DATA TERM READY.. X
DATA SET READY... X
CARRIER DETECT... X

MM-7-5-2, Port 2 on ASC/3 MM-7-5-2, Port C50S on 2070

(NTCIP with ASC/3-IM) (NTCIP)
COMM PORT 2 DAY DD/MM/YY HH:MM:SS COMM PORT C50S DAY MM/DD/YY|HH:MM:SS
RECEIVE.......... X PROTOCOL..... NTCIP RECEIVE.......... X PROTOCOL..... NTCIP
TRANSMIT......... X RX BYTE COUNT. 65535 TRANSMIT......... X RX BYTE COUNT. 65535
READY TO SEND.... X TX BYTE COUNT. 65535 TX BYTE COUNT. 65535
CLEAR TO SEND.... X DROP-OUT TIMER 65535
DATA TERM READY.. X
DATA SET READY... X
CARRIER DETECT... X

INTERSECTION MONITOR:
COMMAND MODEM ANSWER.................. X

MM-7-5-2, Port 2 on ASC/3 MM-7-5-2, Port C50S on 2070 (ECPIP)

(ECPIP)
COMM PORT 2 DAY DD/MM/YY HH:MM:SS
RECEIVE.......... X PROTOCOL..... ECPIP
TRANSMIT......... X RX BYTE COUNT. 65535 (not supported)
READY TO SEND.... X TX BYTE COUNT. 65535
CLEAR TO SEND.... X DROP-OUT TIMER 65535
DATA TERM READY.. X
DATA SET READY... X
CARRIER DETECT... X

MM-7-5-2, Port 2 on ASC/3 MM-7-5-2, Port C50S on 2070 (TERM)

(TERM)
COMM PORT 2 DAY DD/MM/YY HH:MM:SS COMM PORT C50S DAY MM/DD/YY|HH:MM:SS
RECEIVE.......... X PROTOCOL..... TERM RECEIVE.......... X PROTOCOL..... TERM
TRANSMIT......... X RX BYTE COUNT. 65535 TRANSMIT......... X
READY TO SEND.... X TX BYTE COUNT. 65535
CLEAR TO SEND.... X
DATA TERM READY.. X
DATA SET READY... X
CARRIER DETECT... X

ASC/3 Programming Manual B-27

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
ASC/3 Screens
Appendix B

MM-7-5-3, Port 3A on ASC/3 MM-7-5-3, Port C21S on 2070 (AB3418)

(AB3418)
COMM PORT 3A DAY DD/MM/YY HH:MM:SS COMM PORT C21S DAY DD/MM/YY HH:MM:SS
RECEIVE.......... X PROTOCOL..... AB3418 RECEIVE.......... X PROTOCOL..... AB3418
TRANSMIT......... X RX BYTE COUNT. 65535 TRANSMIT......... X RX BYTE COUNT. 65535
READY TO SEND.... X TX BYTE COUNT. 65535 READY TO SEND.... X TX BYTE COUNT. 65535
CARRIER DETECT... X DROP-OUT TIMER 65535 CLEAR TO SEND.... X DROP-OUT TIMER 65535
DATA TERM READY.. X
DATA SET READY... X
CARRIER DETECT... X

MM-7-5-3, Port 3A on ASC/3 MM-7-5-3, Port C21S on 2070

(NTCIP) (NTCIP)
COMM PORT 3A DAY DD/MM/YY HH:MM:SS COMM PORT C21S DAY DD/MM/YY HH:MM:SS
RECEIVE.......... X PROTOCOL..... NTCIP RECEIVE.......... X PROTOCOL..... NTCIP
TRANSMIT......... X RX BYTE COUNT. 65535 TRANSMIT......... X RX BYTE COUNT. 65535
READY TO SEND.... X TX BYTE COUNT. 65535 READY TO SEND.... X TX BYTE COUNT. 65535
CARRIER DETECT... X DROP-OUT TIMER 65535 CLEAR TO SEND.... X DROP-OUT TIMER 65535
DATA TERM READY.. X
DATA SET READY... X
CARRIER DETECT... X

MM-7-5-3, Port 3A on ASC/3 MM-7-5-3, Port C21S on 2070 (ECPIP)

(ECPIP)
COMM PORT 3A DAY DD/MM/YY HH:MM:SS
RECEIVE.......... X PROTOCOL..... ECPIP
TRANSMIT......... X RX BYTE COUNT. 65535 (not supported)
READY TO SEND.... X TX BYTE COUNT. 65536
CARRIER DETECT... X DROP-OUT TIMER 65535

MM-7-5-3, Port 3A on ASC/3 MM-7-5-3, Port C21S on 2070 (TERM)

(TERM)
COMM PORT 3A DAY DD/MM/YY HH:MM:SS COMM PORT C21S DAY DD/MM/YY HH:MM:SS
RECEIVE.......... X PROTOCOL..... TERM RECEIVE.......... X PROTOCOL..... TERM
TRANSMIT......... X RX BYTE COUNT. 65535 TRANSMIT......... X RX BYTE COUNT. 65535
READY TO SEND.... X TX BYTE COUNT. 65535 READY TO SEND.... X TX BYTE COUNT. 65535
CARRIER DETECT... X CLEAR TO SEND.... X
DATA TERM READY.. X
DATA SET READY... X
CARRIER DETECT... X

B-28 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 ASC/3 Screens
Appendix B

MM-7-5-4, Port 3B on ASC/3 MM-7-5-4, Port C22S on 2070 (AB3418)

(AB3418)
COMM PORT 3B DAY DD/MM/YY HH:MM:SS COMM PORT C22S DAY DD/MM/YY HH:MM:SS
ENABLE....... RS232 PROTOCOL..... AB3418 RECEIVE.......... X PROTOCOL..... AB3418
BIT RATE.... 115200 ADDRESS....... 65535 TRANSMIT......... X RX BYTE COUNT. 65535
D/P/S........ 8/N/1 GROUP ADDRESS. 65535 READY TO SEND.... X TX BYTE COUNT. 65535
DUPLEX........ HALF SINGLE FLAGGED.. YES CLEAR TO SEND.... X DROP-OUT TIMER 65535
FLOW CONTROL... YES DROP-OUT TIME. 65535 DATA TERM READY.. X
RTS-CTS DELAY. 6810 DATA SET READY... X
RTS TURN OFF.. 6810 CARRIER DETECT... X
EARLY RTS...... YES

MM-7-5-4, Port 3B on ASC/3 MM-7-5-4, Port C22S on 2070

(NTCIP) (NTCIP)
COMM PORT 3B DAY DD/MM/YY HH:MM:SS COMM PORT C22S DAY DD/MM/YY HH:MM:SS
ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL..... NTCIP RECEIVE.......... X PROTOCOL..... NTCIP
BIT RATE.... 115200 ADDRESS....... 65535 TRANSMIT......... X RX BYTE COUNT. 65535
D/P/S........ 8/N/1 GROUP ADDRESS. 65535 READY TO SEND.... X TX BYTE COUNT. 65535
DUPLEX........ HALF SINGLE FLAGGED.. YES CLEAR TO SEND.... X DROP-OUT TIMER 65535
FLOW CONTROL... YES DROP-OUT TIME. 65535 DATA TERM READY.. X
RTS-CTS DELAY. 6810 DATA SET READY... X
RTS TURN OFF.. 6810 CARRIER DETECT... X
EARLY RTS...... YES

MM-7-5-4, Port 3B on ASC/3 MM-7-5-4, Port C22S on 2070 (ECPIP)

(ECPIP)
COMM PORT 3B DAY DD/MM/YY HH:MM:SS
ENABLE......... YES PROTOCOL..... ECPIP
BIT RATE.... 115200 ADDRESS....... 65535 (not supported)
D/P/S........ 8/N/1 TRD (ms)........ 255
DUPLEX........ HALF DROP-OUT TIME. 65535
FLOW CONTROL... YES
RTS-CTS DELAY. 6810
RTS TURN OFF.. 6810
EARLY RTS...... YES

MM-7-5-4, Port 3B on ASC/3 MM-7-5-4, Port C22S on 2070 (TERM)

(TERM)
COMM PORT 3B DAY DD/MM/YY HH:MM:SS COMM PORT C22S DAY DD/MM/YY HH:MM:SS
RECEIVE.......... X PROTOCOL..... TERM RECEIVE.......... X PROTOCOL..... TERM
TRANSMIT......... X RX BYTE COUNT. 65535 TRANSMIT......... X RX BYTE COUNT. 65535
READY TO SEND.... X TX BYTE COUNT. 65535 READY TO SEND.... X TX BYTE COUNT. 65535
CLEAR TO SEND.... X CLEAR TO SEND.... X
DATA TERM READY.. X DATA TERM READY.. X
DATA SET READY... X DATA SET READY... X
CARRIER DETECT... X CARRIER DETECT... X

ASC/3 Programming Manual B-29

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
ASC/3 Screens
Appendix B

MM-7-5-5 MM-7-5-6 (ASC/3 only)

NTCIP DAY MM/DD/YY|HH:MM:SS ECPIP DAY DD/MM/YY|HH:MM:SS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DYNAMIC OBJ X X X X X X X X X X X X X TELEMETRY MODE X X X X X X X
SPECIAL FUNC X X X X X X X X SPECIAL FUNCTION X X X X
RX SNMP MESSAGE COUNT............. 65535 RX MESSAGE COUNT.................. 65535
TX SNMP MESSAGE COUNT............. 65535 TX MESSAGE COUNT.................. 65535
RX STMP MESSAGE COUNT............. 65535 RX MESSAGE ERROR COUNT............ 65535
TX STMP MESSAGE COUNT............. 65535 TX MESSAGE ERROR COUNT............ 65535
ACTIVE CONTORL PORT................ C50S LAST VALID COMMAND................ 65535
LAST TIME SYNC.................... 65535
TRANSACTION MODE.................... YES LAST TIME SYNC.................... 65535
CONFIGURATION TRANSFER IN PROGRESS. NO CONFIGURATION TRANSFER IN PROGRESS. NO

MM-7-6 MM-7-7
DETECTOR STATUS MM/DD/YY|HH:MM:SS FLASH/SDLC/MMU STATUS
DET [ 5]TIME 0.0 DELAY 0.0 EXTEND 0.0
DET DIAG|CTR:MAX PRES |TS2:Excess Change 1. FLASH STATUS
DET PH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. SDLC STATUS
01-08 . . . . C . . C 01-08
09-16 . . . . . . . . 09-16 3. MMU STATUS
17-24 . . . . . . . . 17-24
25-32 . . . . . . - - 25-32 4. MMU EXTENDED STATUS
33-40 - - - - - - - - 33-40
41-48 - - - - - - - - 41-48 5. MMU AC STATUS
49-56 - - - - - - - - 49-56
57-64 - - - - - - - - 57-64 6. MMU COMPATIBILITY STATUS

MM-7-7-1 MM-7-7-2
FLASH STATUS: SDLC STATUS
AUTOMATIC FLASH
MMU 128 DISABLED TF 138 DISABLED
AUTO FLASH REMOTE INPUT 129 DISABLED 139 DISABLED
131 DISABLED 140 DISABLED
RING 1 141 DISABLED
RING 2 MMU STATUS:MMU DISABLED

DET 148 DISABLED DET 152 DISABLED

149 DISABLED 153 DISABLED
150 DISABLED 154 DISABLED
151 DISABLED 155 DISABLED

TEST 158 DISABLED

B-30 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 ASC/3 Screens
Appendix B

MM-7-7-3 MM-7-7-4
MMU STATUS MFG: ........... MMU EXT STATUS MFG: EDI
CHANNEL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 CHANNEL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
RED..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FC/RED.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
YELLOW.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FC/YEL.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GREEN... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FC/GREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FAULT... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RP/RED.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ENA-Y-CK X . X . X . X . . X . X . X . X RP/YEL.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FAIL STATS . RLY TRANFR . CONFLICT... . RP/GREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPARE 1... . SPARE 2... . SPARE 3.... . RY GON.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPARE 4... . SPARE 5... . SPARE 6.... . FAULT... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PORT 1 FL. . RED FAIL.. . MIN CL FAIL . LAST FAULT REPORT: 00:00:00 00/00/00
CVM....... . MMU DIAG.. . STRUP FL CL . NO FAULT
24V MON 1. . 24V MON 2. . 24V MON INH .
MMU RESET. . RED ENABLE . LOCAL AU/FL .
FL TIME. 5s 24V LATCH. X CVM LATCH.. X

MM-7-7-5 MM-7-7-6

MMU AC STATUS MFG: ... MMU COMPATIBILITY STATUS MFG:

NO FAULT CH|6 5 4|3 2 1|0 9 8|7 6 5|4 3 2
AC LINE: 0 VRMS AT N/A HZ,TEMP: -40 F 1 . . . . . X . . . . X X . . .
RED ENABLE: 0 VRMS 2 . . . . . X . X . C X X . .
CHANNEL: 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 3 . . . . X . . . X X . . .
RED: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 . . . M X . X . X X . .
YEL: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 . . . . . . . X . . .
GRN: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 . . . . . X . X . .
CHANNEL: 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 7 . . . . . . X . .
RED: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 . . . . X . X .
YEL: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 . . . . . X .
GRN: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 . . . . X .
11 . . . . .
LAST FAULT REPORT: 00/00/00 00:00:00 12 . . . .
13 . . .
14 . .
15 .

MM-7-8
INPUT / OUTPUT SUBMENU

1.CONTROLLER INPUTS 6.T&f BIU I/O

2.CONTROLLER OUTPUTS 7.D/R BIU I/O

3.HARDWARE INPUTS 8.LOGIC PROCESSOR

4.HARDWARE OUTPUTS 9.I/O DIFFERENCES

5.AUX HARDWARE I/O

ASC/3 Programming Manual B-31

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
ASC/3 Screens
Appendix B

MM-7-8-1 (NEMA Functional Inputs) MM-7-8-1 (332 Layout Inputs)

INPUTS FUNCTIONS v C1/C11 INPUT FUNCTIONS v
PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 I INPUT FILE
VEH DET.. . . . . . . . . S#01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 11 12 13 14
PED DET.. . . . . . . . . P#56 39 63 47 58 41 65 49 60 80 67 68 81
VEH OMIT. . . . . . . . . F: . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PED OMIT. . . . . . . . . P#.. 43 76 .. .. 45 78 .. 62 53 69 70 82
HOLD..... . . . . . . . . W: . . . . . . . . .

INPUTS- RG 1 RG 2
FORCE OFF... . . J INPUT FILE
INHIBIT MAX. . . S#01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 11 12 13 14
MAX II...... . . P#55 40 64 48 57 42 66 50 59 54 71 72 51
OMIT RED CL. . . F: . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PED RECYCLE. . . P#.. 44 77 .. .. 46 79 .. 61 75 73 74 52
RED REST.... . . W: . . . . . . . . .
STOP TIME... . .

INPUTS-- 2A MODULE C11S INPUTS

PREEMPT........ 2-. 4-. 5-. 6-.
IO MODE SELECT. A-. B-. C-. PIN# 10 11 12 13 15 16 17 18 19
TEST INPUT..... A-. B-. C-. FUNC: . . . . . . . . .
CALL NON ACT... 1-. 2-. PIN# 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
COORD/FREE. .|EXT START. .|MINRECALL. . FUNC: . . . . . . . . . . .
LAMP OFF... .|INTER ADV. .|MCE....... .
WLK RST MOD .|

MM-7-8-2 (NEMA Functional Outputs) MM-7-8-2 (332 Layout Outputs)

OUTPUT FUNCTIONS C1/C11 OUTPUT FUNCTIONS
PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PH: V1 V2 P2 V3 V4 P4 V5 V6 P6 V7 V8 P8
RED...... . . . . . . . . PIN# 16 12 10 07 04 02 32 29 27 24 21 19
YELLOW... . . . . . . . . RED: . . . . . . . . . . . .
GREEN.... . . . . . . . . PIN# 17 13 35 08 05 37 33 30 36 25 22 38
DONT WALK . . . . . . . . YEL: . . . . . . . . . . . .
PED CLEAR . . . . . . . . PIN# 18 15 11 09 06 03 34 31 28 26 23 20
WALK..... . . . . . . . . GRN: . . . . . . . . . . . .
PH CHECK. . . . . . . . . 2A MODULE C1 OUTPUTS
PH NEXT.. . . . . . . . . OL: A B C D TBC FUNCTION SPARE
PHASE ON. . . . . . . . . PIN# 97 94 88 85 83 101 91
OVLP A B C D | RING 1 2 | SPEC RED: . . . . SF1 . CABFLASH . SP -
RED . . . . |STAT A . . |CVM . PIN# 98 95 89 86 100 102 93
YEL . . . . |STAT B . . | FM . YEL: . . . . SF2 . DETRESET . SP .
GRN . . . . |STAT C . . | FL . PIN# 99 96 90 87 84 103
GRN: . . . . SF3 . WATCHDOG .

2A MODULE C11S OUTPUTS

PIN# 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
. . . . . . . .

B-32 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 ASC/3 Screens
Appendix B

MM-7-8-3 (NEMA A, B, C Inputs) MM-7-8-3 (332 C1 & C11 Inputs)

ABC INPUTS C1/C11 INPUTS
CONNECTOR MS-A K L M N P R S T f g h CONNECTOR PIN
INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . C1-Input 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
CONNECTOR MS-A i j k m n q v w x y z . . . . . . . . . .
INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . C1-Input 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58
CONNECTOR MS-A AA BB EE FF GG HH . . . . . . . . . .
INPUTS . . . . . . C1-Input 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68
CONNECTOR MS-B B L M N P R S T U V W X . . . . . . . . . .
INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . C1-Input 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78
CONNECTOR MS-B g h i j k m n v x y z . . . . . . . . . .
INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . C1-Input 79 80 81 82
CONNECTOR MS-C P R S T U V W X Y Z a b . . . .
INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . C11-Input 10 11 12 13 15 16 17 18 19 20
CONNECTOR MS-C m n p q r s t u v EE . . . . . . . . . .
INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . C11-Input 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
. . . . . . . . . .

INPUTS

ASC3 1000/2070 2N MODULE

There are no HARDWARE inputs for this

Controller. To view I/O on this
Controller, check T&F or D/R I/O.

MM-7-8-4 (NEMA A, B, C Outputs) MM-7-8-4 (332 C1 & C11 Outputs)

ABC OUTPUTS v C1/C11 OUTPUTS
CONNECTOR PINS CONNECTOR
MS-A A C D E F G H J X Y Z C1-02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS A a b c d e r s t u CC DD C1-15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS-B A C D E F G H J K Y Z a C1-27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS B b c d e f p q r s t u w C1-83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 90 91
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS B AA BB CC DD EE FF GG HH C1-93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS-C A B C D E F G H J K L M N C11-01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS C c d e f g h i j k w x y z
. . . . . . . . . . . . .

MS C AA BB CC DD FF GG HH OUTPUTS
. . . . . . .
MS C JJ KK LL MM NN PP ASC3 1000/2070 2N MODULE
. . . . . .
There are no HARDWARE outputs for this
Controller. To view I/O on this
Controller, check T&F or D/R I/O.

ASC/3 Programming Manual B-33

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
ASC/3 Screens
Appendix B

MM-7-8-5 (NEMA Auxiliary Hardware I/O) MM-7-8-5 (332 Auxiliary Hardware I/O)
D I/O D I/O

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 A B C D E F G H J K L M N P R S T U V W
O O I I O I * 0 I I O I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k m n p q r s
I O I I I I I O O O O I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
O O O I I O O O I I I I I t u v w x y z AA BB CC DD EE FF GG HH JJ
I I I I I I O O O O O O O O O O
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52
I O O O O O O I O I I O O KK LL MM NN PP
* O * * *
53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61
O O I I I I O I I

ASC3 TLM I/O

TELEMETRY
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13
I I I I I I I I O O * * *

14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
I I I I I I I I O O * *

MM-7-8-6 MM-7-8-7
T&F BIU I/O D/R BIU I/O
BIU # 1 I/O Function BIU # 1
TF- OUT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 I/O Function
. . . . . . . . DR- DETECTOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OUT 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . DETECTOR 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
TF- I/O 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 . . . . . . . .
IO IO IO IO IO IO IO IO
I/O 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
IO IO IO IO IO IO IO IO
I/O 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
IO IO IO IO IO IO IO IO
TF- IN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
. . . . . . . .
TF- OPTO 1 2 3 4
. . . .

B-34 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 ASC/3 Screens
Appendix B

MM-7-8-8-1 MM-7-8-8-2 (Manual Logic

(Logic Processor Gate Status) Processor Statement Enable Plan Status)
LOGIC #98 ACTIVE: Y LOGIC PROCESSOR ENABLE PLAN
RESULT: FALSE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5
IF GREEN ON PHASE 10 IS ON F LP 1-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AND VEHICLE DET # 1 IS ON F LP 16-30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OR MINGRN TMR ON PHASE 10 < 15.7 F LP 31-45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LP 46-60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
THEN SET VEHICLE DET # 1 OFF LP 61-75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SET GREEN OVERLAP B OFF LP 76-90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SET YELLOW OVERLAP B ON LP 91-100 . . . . . . . . . .

ELSE DELAY FOR 15.7 SECONDS

SET VEHICLE DET # 1 ON

MM-7-8-9 MM-8
M CNR/PIN DEFAULT DB ACTIVE DB UTILITIES SUBMENU
0 A/o-F PHASE 02 RED PHASE 04 RED
0 A/o-d PHASE 02 CHK PHASE 10 RED 1. COPY 5. SIGN ON
0 A/i-h PHASE 01 HOLD PHASE 10 HOLD
0 B/o-E PHASE 03 YEL PHASE 04 YEL 2. USB MANAGEMENT 6. LOG BUFFERS
0 C/o-C PHASE 08 DWK PHASE 06 DWK
TF1/o-18B DIMMING ENABLE TLM SPC FUNC 2 3. PRINT 7. SOFTWARE MODULES
TF1/o-02B LOADSW 09 YEL PHASE 01 GRN
TF1/x-21A NOT ASSIGN OVERLP I GRN 4. TRANSFER
0 T/i-16 MAINTENANCE REQ PHASE 10 OMIT
- C01o103
- C11o07

MM-8-1
COPY / CLEAR UTILITY v
FROM > TO
PHASE TIMING.... . > PHASE TIMING.... .
TIMING PLAN..... . > TIMING PLAN..... .
PH DET OPT PLAN. . > PH DET OPT PLAN. .
DETECTOR PLAN... . > DETECTOR PLAN... .
COORD PATTERN... . > COORD PATTERN... .
SPLIT PATTERN... . > SPLIT PATTERN... .
SEQUENCE........ . > SEQUENCE........ .
ACTION PLAN..... . > ACTION PLAN..... .
PREEMPT PLAN.... . > PREEMPT PLAN.... .
LP STATEMENT.... . > LP STATEMENT.... .
DATA KEY........ . > CONTROLLER DATA. .
CONTROLLER DATA. . > DATA KEY........ .

DEFAULT DATABASE . > CONTROLLER DATA. .

ECONOLITE DBASE. . > CONTROLLER DATA. .
CONTROLLER DATA. . > DEFAULT DATA.... .
MMU PROGRAM..... . > CONTROLLER...... .
SPECIAL FEATURES . > CONTROLLER...... .
TOGGLE TO SELECT A "FROM" AND A "TO"
THEN PRESS ENTER

ASC/3 Programming Manual B-35

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
ASC/3 Screens
Appendix B

MM-8-2 MM-8-2-1
USB OPTIONS USB COPY SUCCEEDED

1 SOFTWARE UPDATE ****************************************

* PLEASE REMOVE ALL USB FLASH DRIVES. *
2 CONFIGURATION UPDATE * TURN OFF FOR 3 SECONDS THEN TURN ON. *
****************************************
3 SAVE FROM CONTROLLER

MM-8-2-2 MM-8-2-3
SELECT FILE USB OPTIONS
/media/usb/
>. 1 SAVE CURRENT CONFIGURATION (CFG)
DB_10.70.10.51_130127_083444.CFG 2 PRINT CONFIGURATION
DB_10.70.10.51_130128_081531.CFG 3 PRINT LOGS
DB_10.70.10.51_130225_174233.CFG 4 SAVE VIOT FILE
DB_10.70.10.51_130301_154416.CFG 5 SAVE ALL
PRESS 1 ON CFG OR DB TO BE UPDATED

MM-8-2-3-1 MM-8-2-3-2
SAVE CURRENT CONFIGURATION (CFG) PRINT CONFIGURATION

SUCCESSFUL COMPLETION SUCCESSFUL COMPLETION

MM-8-2-3-3 MM-8-2-3-4
PRINT LOGS SAVE VIOT FILE

SUCCESSFUL COMPLETION SUCCESSFUL COMPLETION

MM-8-2-3-5
SAVE ALL

SUCCESSFUL COMPLETION

B-36 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 ASC/3 Screens
Appendix B

MM-8-3 MM-8-4
PRINT TRANSFER UTILITY

PRINT TO PORT... 2 PORT................. 2

SELECT ALL...... . DIRECTION.......TRANSMIT

CONFIGURATION... . TIME BASE....... . DATABASE............. .

CONTROLLER...... . DETECTOR........ . COMMAND MODEM ANSWER. .

COORDINATOR..... . LOGIC PROCESSOR. .

PREEMPTOR....... . TSP AND SCP..... . TOGGLE TO SELECT THEN PRESS ENTER

TO TRANSFER
TOGGLE TO SELECT AND THEN PRESS ENTER
TO BEGIN PRINTING

MM-8-5 MM-8-6
****************************************
* ECONOLITE CONTROL PRODUCTS, INC. * LOG BUFFERS SUBMENU
* *
* ASC/3-2100 *
* Copyright (C) 2004-2013 * 1. DISPLAY
* *
* Solutions that Move the World * 2. PRINT
* *
* CITY.... 0 INTERSECTION.. 0 * 3. CLEAR
* *
* SOFTWARE....................V2.55.00 *
* *
* *
* *
* CONFIGURATION................ N3000 *
****************************************

MM-8-6-1 MM-8-6-2
DISPLAY SUBMENU PRINT LOG BUFFERS

1. CONTROLLER EVENTS PRINT TO PORT.............. 2

NUMBER OF DAYS............. 10
2. DETECTOR EVENTS
CONTROLLER EVENTS........... .
3. DETECTOR ACTIVITY DETECTOR EVENTS............. .
DETECTOR ACTIVITY........... .
4. MMU EVENTS MMU EVENTS.................. .
SELECT ALL.................. .

PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO SELECT

THEN ENTER TO PRINT

ASC/3 Programming Manual B-37

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
ASC/3 Screens
Appendix B

MM-8-6-3 MM-8-7
CLEAR SUBMENU SOFTWARE MODULES
NAME PART NUMBER VERSION
1. CONTROLLER EVENTS
BOOT N/A N/A
2. DETECTOR EVENTS
APPLICATON 100-1082-242 V2.55.00
3. DETECTOR ACTIVITY
CONFIGURATION 100-1049-001 N3000, 2
4. MMU EVENTS
HELP 100-1050-001 01.00.00
5. ALL LOGS
DEFINITIONS 100-1051-001 02.10.00

TEXT 100-1052-001 02.10.00

TELEMETRY N/A N/A

MM-9 MM-9-1
DIAGNOSTICS SUBMENU DIAGNOSTICS INFORMATION

1. DIAGNOSTICS INFORMATION HARDWARE DIAGNOSTICS ARE PERFORMED WHILE

THE CONTROLLER IS NOT OPERATIONAL.
2. WARNING CHECKS
REFER TO APPENDIX F IN THE PROGRAMMING
3. ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS MANUAL FOR INSTRUCTIONS ON LOADING THE
DIAGNOSTIC FILE AND ITS OPERATION.

MM-9-2 MM-9-2-1
WARNING CHECK SUBMENU WARNING CHECK SELECTION - DISABLE ALL
WARNING CHECK ENABLED
1. ENABLE WARNING CHECK CATEGORIES 1. CONFIGURATION NO
2. CONTROLLER NO
2. COMPILE & VIEW ACTIVE WARNINGS 3. COORDINATOR NO
4. PREEMPTOR/TSP NO
3. VIEW/EDIT DISABLED WARNINGS 5. TIME BASE NO
6. DETECTORS NO
7. AT DATA ENTRY NO

NOTE: Controller automatically performs

Warning Check at power up only.
User should run Warning Check with
MM-9-2-2 after data entry changes.
Individual Warnings can be disabled
at MM-9-2-3

B-38 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 ASC/3 Screens
Appendix B

MM-9-2-2 (example) MM-9-2-3 (example)

ACTIVE DIAGNOSTIC WARNING CHECKS (WC) WARNING CHECKS [1201] COMMANDS .
1201 Inactive Exclusive Ped Phase Inactive Exclusive Ped Phase
1202 In-use phase not in sequence DISABLED WARNING CHECKS:
3101 Manual Pattern enabled 2101 2102 3101 3201 3202 3301 3302 3304
4104 Preempt MAX Presence time enabled

Startup Warning Display

STATUS [CORD SYS P120] MM/DD/YY|HH:MM:SS
PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
PH STAT . G R R G R R R - - - - - - - -
VEH CALL . I I . . . . . . . . . . . . .
****************************************
* DATABASE IRREGULARITIES FOUND *
* GO TO MM-9-2-2 FOR DETAILS. *
* *
* TO DISABLE A SPECIFIC WARNING, *
* GO TO MM-9-2-3. *
****************************************
PMT|TSP - - - - - - - - - -|X X X X X X
LP FLAG . A . . . A . . . . . . . . . .
COMMUNICATIONS PORT STATUS|TLM ADD: 0
ETH RX TX|P2 RX TX|P3A RX TX|P3B RX TX
2 .- .-|1 OK OK|3 ID |3 .. ..

ASC/3 Programming Manual B-39

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
For your notes:

B-40 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 C
Reserved
(reserved for future use)

ASC/3 Programming Manual C-1

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
For your notes:

C-2 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 D
Program Reference Card
ASC/3 Program Reference Card 4

Intersection: _____________________________________________________________
Controller Number: __________ Entered By: __________________ Date: ___/___/___
Boot: ____________ Main: ____________ Help: ___________ Database: ___________

ASC/3 Programming Manual D-1

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Program Reference Card
Appendix D

Configuration Submenu 4

MM-1-1-1 Phase Ring Assignment (PRI = Priority) 4

Sequence 1

CONFIGURE UTILITY HW ALTERNATE SEQUENCE ENABLE

PRI 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
BC
R1
R2
R3
R4

Sequence 2

PRI 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
BC
R1
R2
R3
R4

Sequence 3

PRI 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
BC
R1
R2
R3
R4

Sequence 4

PRI 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
BC
R1
R2
R3
R4

D-2 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Program Reference Card
Appendix D

Sequence 5

PRI 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
BC
R1
R2
R3
R4

Sequence 6

PRI 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
BC
R1
R2
R3
R4

Sequence 7

PRI 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
BC
R1
R2
R3
R4

Sequence 8

PRI 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
BC
R1
R2
R3
R4

ASC/3 Programming Manual D-3

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Program Reference Card
Appendix D

Sequence 9

PRI 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
BC
R1
R2
R3
R4

Sequence 10

PRI 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
BC
R1
R2
R3
R4

Sequence 11

PRI 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
BC
R1
R2
R3
R4

Sequence 12

PRI 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
BC
R1
R2
R3
R4

D-4 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Program Reference Card
Appendix D

Sequence 13

PRI 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
BC
R1
R2
R3
R4

Sequence 14

PRI 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
BC
R1
R2
R3
R4

Sequence 15

PRI 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
BC
R1
R2
R3
R4

Sequence 16

PRI 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
BC
R1
R2
R3
R4

ASC/3 Programming Manual D-5

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-1-1-2 Phase Compatibility 4

PHASE 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02

10

11

12

13

14

15

MM-1-2 Phases In Use / Exclusive Ped 4

PHASE 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08

PHASES IN USE

EXCLUSIVE PED

PHASE 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

PHASES IN USE

EXCLUSIVE PED

D-6 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-1-1-3 Enable Backup Prevent 4

TMG\BKUP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

MM-1-1-4 Simultaneous Gap 4

GAP\PH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
DISABLE

ASC/3 Programming Manual D-7

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-1-3 Phase-to-Load-Switch (MMU) Assignment 4

DIMMING AUTOMATIC FLASH

PHASE (+,-)

TOGETHER
DIMMING
YELLOW

YELLOW
PHASE/

GREEN

FLASH
RED

RED
LOAD OVERLAP TYPE
SWITCH 1-16 (V,P,O)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

MM-1-4-1 SDLC Options 4

BIU NUMBER

TERM & FACILITY 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ENABLE
DETECTOR RACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ENABLE
ENABLE TS2 /MMU TYPE CABINET
ENABLE MMU EXTENDED STATUS
ENABLE SDLC STOP TIME
ENABLE 3 CRITICAL RFEs LOCKUP
MMU TO CU SDLC EXTERNAL START

D-8 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-1-4-2 MMU Program 4

MMU COMPATIBILITY

CH 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

MM-1-4-3 Color Check Enable 4

ENABLE COLOR CHECK DIAGNOSTICS

MMU Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
RED / DW
YELLOW / PC
GREEN / WALK

MM-1-4-4 Secondary Stations/Tests 4

SECONDARY TO SECONDARY ADDRESSING

T&F 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 MMU

D/R 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 DIAG

ENABLE SDLC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

ASC/3 Programming Manual D-9

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-1-5-1 Ethernet Port Configuration 4

MAC ADDRESS
CONTROLLER IP
SUBNET MASK
DEFAULT GATEWAY IP
SERVER IP
LINK SPEED / DUPLEX
DROP-OUT TIME

MM-1-5-2 ASC/3 Port 2 – 2070 C50S 4

ENABLE (YES/NO) PROTOCOL

BIT RATE ADDRESS
DATA BITS/PARITY/STOP BITS GROUP ADDRESS / TDR
DUPLEX (HALF/FULL) SIGNAL FLAGGED (YES/NO)
FLOW CONTROL (YES/NO) DROP-OUT TIME
INTERSECTION MONITOR
MODEM SETUP STRING
USER STRING

MM-1-5-3 ASC/3 Port 3A – 2070 C21S 4

ENABLE (YES/NO) PROTOCOL

BIT RATE ADDRESS
DATA BITS/PARITY/STOP BITS GROUP ADDRESS / TDR
DUPLEX (HALF/ FULL) SIGNAL FLAGGED (YES/NO)
FLOW CONTROL (YES/NO) DROP-OUT TIME

MM-1-5-4 ASC/3 Port 3B – 2070 C22S 4

ENABLE (YES/NO) PROTOCOL

BIT RATE ADDRESS
DATA BITS/PARITY/STOP BITS GROUP ADDRESS / TDR
DUPLEX (HALF/ FULL) SIGNAL FLAGGED (YES/NO)
FLOW CONTROL (YES/NO) DROP-OUT TIME
RTS-CTS DELAY
RTS TURN OFF
EARLY RTS

D-10 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-1-5-5 Global Port Parameters 4

NTCIP BACKUP TIME (SECONDS)

UDP PORT
ETHERNET PRIORITY
PORT 2/C50S PRIORITY
PORT 3A/C21S PRIORITY
PORT 3B/C22S PRIORITY

MM-1-5-6 ECPIP 4

CONTROLLER ADDRESS
EXPANDED SYSTEM DETECTOR ADDRESS
SYSTEM DETECTOR ASSIGNMENT:
SYSTEM DET 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LOCAL DET
SYSTEM DET 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
LOCAL DET

MM-1-6-1 Enable Event Logs 4

CRITICAL RFE’S (MMU/T&F) 3 CRITICAL RFE ERRORS IN 24 HOURS

MMU FLASH FAULTS LOCAL FLASH FAULTS
NON-CRITICAL RFE'S DETECTOR ERRORS
COORDINATION ERRORS CONTROLLER DOWNLOAD
PREEMPT TSP/SCP
POWER ON/OFF LOW BATTERY
ACCESS DATA CHANGE
ONLINE/OFFLINE
ALARM 1 ALARM 2
ALARM 3 ALARM 4
ALARM 5 ALARM 6
ALARM 7 ALARM 8
ALARM 9 ALARM 10
ALARM 11 ALARM 12
ALARM 13 ALARM 14
ALARM 15 ALARM 16

ASC/3 Programming Manual D-11

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-1-7-1 Administration 4

ENABLE CU/CABINET INTERLOCK CRC

CU/CABINET INTERLOCK CRC VALUE
CU/CABINET INTERLOCK HW VALUE
REQUEST DOWNLOAD OF PROGRAMMED DATA
CONTROLLER DATA SUMCHECK (CRC) #
ENABLE AUTOMATIC BACKUP TO DATAKEY

MM-1-7-2 Display Options 4

KEY CLICK ENABLE

BACKLIGHT ENABLE
LED MODE
MAIN STATUS DISPLAY MODE
SCREEN FORMAT

MM-1-8-1 Logic Statement Control 4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
LP 01-15
LP 16-30
LP 31-45
LP 46-60
LP 61-75
LP 76-90
LP 91-100

D-12 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-1-8-2 Logic Processor Statements 4

LOGIC GATE NUMBER 1 LOGIC GATE NUMBER 2

IF IF

THEN THEN

ELSE ELSE

LOGIC GATE NUMBER 3 LOGIC GATE NUMBER 4

IF IF

THEN THEN

ELSE ELSE

ASC/3 Programming Manual D-13

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Program Reference Card
Appendix D

LOGIC GATE NUMBER LOGIC GATE NUMBER

IF IF

THEN THEN

ELSE ELSE

LOGIC GATE NUMBER LOGIC GATE NUMBER

IF IF

THEN THEN

ELSE ELSE

D-14 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Program Reference Card
Appendix D

LOGIC GATE NUMBER LOGIC GATE NUMBER

IF IF

THEN THEN

ELSE ELSE

LOGIC GATE NUMBER LOGIC GATE NUMBER

IF IF

THEN THEN

ELSE ELSE

ASC/3 Programming Manual D-15

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Program Reference Card
Appendix D

Controller Submenu 4

MM-2-1 Controller Timing Data, sheet 1 of 2 4

TIMING PLAN ______

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
MINIMUM GREEN
BICYCLE MINIMUM GREEN
CONDITIONAL SERVICE MIN. GREEN
DELAYED GREEN
WALK
WALK 2
WALK MAX
PEDESTRIAN CLEARANCE
PEDESTRIAN CLEARANCE 2
PEDESTRIAN CLEARANCE MAX
PEDESTRIAN CARRY OVER
VEHICLE EXTENSION
VEHICLE EXTENSION 2
MAX1
MAX2
MAX3
DYNAMIC MAX
DYNAMIC MAX STEP
YELLOW CHANGE
RED CLEARANCE
RED MAX
RED REVERT
ACTUATIONS BEFORE GAP REDUCTION
SECONDS PER ACTIONS ADDED TO INITIAL

MAXIMUM ADDED INITIAL GREEN

TIME BEFORE GAP REDUCTION
CARS WAITING BEFORE GAP REDUCTION

STEP TO REDUCE
TIME TO REDUCE TO MINIMUM
MINIMUM GAP

D-16 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-2-1 Controller Timing Data, sheet 2 of 2 0

TIMING PLAN ______

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
MINIMUM GREEN
BICYCLE MINIMUM GREEN
CONDITIONAL SERVICE MIN. GREEN
DELAYED GREEN
WALK
WALK 2
WALK MAX
PEDESTRIAN CLEARANCE
PEDESTRIAN CLEARANCE 2
PEDESTRIAN CLEARANCE MAX
PEDESTRIAN CARRY OVER
VEHICLE EXTENSION
VEHICLE EXTENSION 2
MAX1
MAX2
MAX3
DYNAMIC MAX
DYNAMIC MAX STEP
YELLOW CHANGE
RED CLEARANCE
RED MAX
RED REVERT
ACTUATIONS BEFORE GAP REDUCTION
SECONDS PER ACTIONS ADDED TO INITIAL

MAXIMUM ADDED INITIAL GREEN

TIME BEFORE GAP REDUCTION
CARS WAITING BEFORE GAP REDUCTION

STEP TO REDUCE
TIME TO REDUCE TO MINIMUM
MINIMUM GAP

ASC/3 Programming Manual D-17

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-2-2 Vehicle Overlaps, sheet 1 of 6 0

Other/Econolite Overlap
TIMING VEHICLE OVERLAP (A-P)
PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
INCLUDED
PROTECT
PED PRTC
NO OVLP
FLSH GRN
LAG X PH
LAG 2 PH
LAG GRN LAG YEL LAG RED ADV GRN

Normal Overlap (NTCIP)

TIMING VEHICLE OVERLAP (A-P)
PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
INCLUDED
LAG GRN LAG YEL LAG RED

-GRN/YEL Overlap (NTCIP)

TIMING VEHICLE OVERLAP (A-P)
PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
INCLUDED
MODIFIER

PPLT FYA Overlap

TIMING VEHICLE OVERLAP (A-P) PPLT FYA=Protected Permissive Left Turn Flashing Yellow Arrow
PROTECTED PHASE (LEFT TURN), 0-16
PERMISSIVE PHASE (OPPOSING THRU), 0-16
FLASHING ARROW OUTPUT ISOLATE
FLASHING ARROW OUTPUT YELLOW PED
FLASHING ARROW OUTPUT GREEN OVERLAP
DELAY START OF FYA (0.0-25.5 sec.)
DELAY START OF CLEARANCE (0.0-25.5 sec.)
ACTION PLAN SPECIAL FUNCTION BIT DISABLE (0-8)

D-18 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-2-2 Vehicle Overlaps, sheet 2 of 6 0

Other/Econolite Overlap
TIMING VEHICLE OVERLAP (A-P)
PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
INCLUDED
PROTECT
PED PRTC
NO OVLP
FLSH GRN
LAG X PH
LAG 2 PH
LAG GRN LAG YEL LAG RED ADV GRN

Normal Overlap (NTCIP)

TIMING VEHICLE OVERLAP (A-P)
PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
INCLUDED
LAG GRN LAG YEL LAG RED

-GRN/YEL Overlap (NTCIP)

TIMING VEHICLE OVERLAP (A-P)
PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
INCLUDED
MODIFIER

PPLT FYA Overlap

TIMING VEHICLE OVERLAP (A-P) PPLT FYA=Protected Permissive Left Turn Flashing Yellow Arrow
PROTECTED PHASE (LEFT TURN), 0-16
PERMISSIVE PHASE (OPPOSING THRU), 0-16
FLASHING ARROW OUTPUT ISOLATE
FLASHING ARROW OUTPUT YELLOW PED
FLASHING ARROW OUTPUT GREEN OVERLAP
DELAY START OF FYA (0.0-25.5 sec.)
DELAY START OF CLEARANCE (0.0-25.5 sec.)
ACTION PLAN SPECIAL FUNCTION BIT DISABLE (0-8)

ASC/3 Programming Manual D-19

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-2-2 Vehicle Overlaps, sheet 3 of 6 0

Other/Econolite Overlap
TIMING VEHICLE OVERLAP (A-P)
PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
INCLUDED
PROTECT
PED PRTC
NO OVLP
FLSH GRN
LAG X PH
LAG 2 PH
LAG GRN LAG YEL LAG RED ADV GRN

Normal Overlap (NTCIP)

TIMING VEHICLE OVERLAP (A-P)
PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
INCLUDED
LAG GRN LAG YEL LAG RED

-GRN/YEL Overlap (NTCIP)

TIMING VEHICLE OVERLAP (A-P)
PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
INCLUDED
MODIFIER

PPLT FYA Overlap

TIMING VEHICLE OVERLAP (A-P) PPLT FYA=Protected Permissive Left Turn Flashing Yellow Arrow
PROTECTED PHASE (LEFT TURN), 0-16
PERMISSIVE PHASE (OPPOSING THRU), 0-16
FLASHING ARROW OUTPUT ISOLATE
FLASHING ARROW OUTPUT YELLOW PED
FLASHING ARROW OUTPUT GREEN OVERLAP
DELAY START OF FYA (0.0-25.5 sec.)
DELAY START OF CLEARANCE (0.0-25.5 sec.)
ACTION PLAN SPECIAL FUNCTION BIT DISABLE (0-8)

D-20 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-2-2 Vehicle Overlaps, sheet 4 of 6 0

Other/Econolite Overlap
TIMING VEHICLE OVERLAP (A-P)
PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
INCLUDED
PROTECT
PED PRTC
NO OVLP
FLSH GRN
LAG X PH
LAG 2 PH
LAG GRN LAG YEL LAG RED ADV GRN

Normal Overlap (NTCIP)

TIMING VEHICLE OVERLAP (A-P)
PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
INCLUDED
LAG GRN LAG YEL LAG RED

-GRN/YEL Overlap (NTCIP)

TIMING VEHICLE OVERLAP (A-P)
PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
INCLUDED
MODIFIER

PPLT FYA Overlap

TIMING VEHICLE OVERLAP (A-P) PPLT FYA=Protected Permissive Left Turn Flashing Yellow Arrow
PROTECTED PHASE (LEFT TURN), 0-16
PERMISSIVE PHASE (OPPOSING THRU), 0-16
FLASHING ARROW OUTPUT ISOLATE
FLASHING ARROW OUTPUT YELLOW PED
FLASHING ARROW OUTPUT GREEN OVERLAP
DELAY START OF FYA (0.0-25.5 sec.)
DELAY START OF CLEARANCE (0.0-25.5 sec.)
ACTION PLAN SPECIAL FUNCTION BIT DISABLE (0-8)

ASC/3 Programming Manual D-21

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-2-2 Vehicle Overlaps, sheet 5 of 6 4

Other/Econolite Overlap
TIMING VEHICLE OVERLAP (A-P)
PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
INCLUDED
PROTECT
PED PRTC
NO OVLP
FLSH GRN
LAG X PH
LAG 2 PH
LAG GRN LAG YEL LAG RED ADV GRN

Normal Overlap (NTCIP)

TIMING VEHICLE OVERLAP (A-P)
PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
INCLUDED
LAG GRN LAG YEL LAG RED

-GRN/YEL Overlap (NTCIP)

TIMING VEHICLE OVERLAP (A-P)
PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
INCLUDED
MODIFIER

PPLT FYA Overlap

TIMING VEHICLE OVERLAP (A-P) PPLT FYA=Protected Permissive Left Turn Flashing Yellow Arrow
PROTECTED PHASE (LEFT TURN), 0-16
PERMISSIVE PHASE (OPPOSING THRU), 0-16
FLASHING ARROW OUTPUT ISOLATE
FLASHING ARROW OUTPUT YELLOW PED
FLASHING ARROW OUTPUT GREEN OVERLAP
DELAY START OF FYA (0.0-25.5 sec.)
DELAY START OF CLEARANCE (0.0-25.5 sec.)
ACTION PLAN SPECIAL FUNCTION BIT DISABLE (0-8)

D-22 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-2-2 Vehicle Overlaps, sheet 6 of 6 4

Other/Econolite Overlap
TIMING VEHICLE OVERLAP (A-P)
PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
INCLUDED
PROTECT
PED PRTC
NO OVLP
FLSH GRN
LAG X PH
LAG 2 PH
LAG GRN LAG YEL LAG RED ADV GRN

Normal Overlap (NTCIP)

TIMING VEHICLE OVERLAP (A-P)
PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
INCLUDED
LAG GRN LAG YEL LAG RED

-GRN/YEL Overlap (NTCIP)

TIMING VEHICLE OVERLAP (A-P)
PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
INCLUDED
MODIFIER

PPLT FYA Overlap

TIMING VEHICLE OVERLAP (A-P) PPLT FYA=Protected Permissive Left Turn Flashing Yellow Arrow
PROTECTED PHASE (LEFT TURN), 0-16
PERMISSIVE PHASE (OPPOSING THRU), 0-16
FLASHING ARROW OUTPUT ISOLATE
FLASHING ARROW OUTPUT YELLOW PED
FLASHING ARROW OUTPUT GREEN OVERLAP
DELAY START OF FYA (0.0-25.5 sec.)
DELAY START OF CLEARANCE (0.0-25.5 sec.)
ACTION PLAN SPECIAL FUNCTION BIT DISABLE (0-8)

ASC/3 Programming Manual D-23

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-2-3 Veh/Ped Overlaps 4

VEH OL/PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
VEH OVERLAP A
VEH OVERLAP B
VEH OVERLAP C
VEH OVERLAP D
VEH OVERLAP E
VEH OVERLAP F
VEH OVERLAP G
VEH OVERLAP H
VEH OVERLAP I
VEH OVERLAP J
VEH OVERLAP K
VEH OVERLAP L
VEH OVERLAP M
VEH OVERLAP N
VEH OVERLAP O
VEH OVERLAP P

PED OL/PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
PED OVERLAP 1
PED OVERLAP 2
PED OVERLAP 3
PED OVERLAP 4
PED OVERLAP 5
PED OVERLAP 6
PED OVERLAP 7
PED OVERLAP 8
PED OVERLAP 9
PED OVERLAP 10
PED OVERLAP 11
PED OVERLAP 12
PED OVERLAP 13
PED OVERLAP 14
PED OVERLAP 15
PED OVERLAP 16

D-24 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-2-4 Guaranteed Minimum Times 4

OL/PHASE A01 B02 C03 D04 E05 F06 G07 H08

MIN GRN
WALK
PED CLR
YELLOW
RED CLR
OVL GRN

OL/PHASE I09 J10 K11 L12 M13 N14 O15 P16

MIN GRN
WALK
PED CLR
YELLOW
RED CLR
OVL GRN

MM-2-5 Start/Flash Data 4

START UP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
PHASE
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P
OVERLAP
FLASH>MON. FLASH TIME ALL RED TIME
PWR START SEQ. MUTCD Y->G

AUTOMATIC FLASH
PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
ENTRY
EXIT
OVERLAP A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P
EXIT
FLASH>MON. EXIT FLASH MIN FLASH
MINIMUM RECALL CYCLE THROUGH PHASES

ASC/3 Programming Manual D-25

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-2-6-1 Controller Options 4

PEDESTRIAN CLEARANCE PROTECT UNIT RED REVERT

MUTCD 3 SECONDS DONT WALK
PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FLASHING GRN PH
GUAR PASSAGE
NON-ACT I
NON ACT II
DUAL ENTRY
COND SERVICE
COND RESERVICE
PED RESERVICE
REST IN WALK
FLASHING WALK
PED CLEAR > YELLOW
PED CLEAR > ALL RED
INIT GRN + VEH EXT

MM-2-7 Pre-Timed Mode 4

ENABLE PRE-TIMED OPERATION

FREE INPUT ENABLES PRE-TIMED
PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
PRETIMED

D-26 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-2-8 Phase Recall Options 4

TIMING PLAN NUMBER [1]

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
LOCK DET INPUT
VEH RECALL
PED RECALL
MAX TIME RECALL
SOFT RECALL
NO REST IN PHASE
ADDED INIT CALC
TIMING PLAN NUMBER [2]
PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
LOCK DET INPUT
VEH RECALL
PED RECALL
MAX TIME RECALL
SOFT RECALL
NO REST IN PHASE
ADDED INIT CALC
TIMING PLAN NUMBER [3]
PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
LOCK DET INPUT
VEH RECALL
PED RECALL
MAX TIME RECALL
SOFT RECALL
NO REST IN PHASE
ADDED INIT CALC
TIMING PLAN NUMBER [4]
PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
LOCK DET INPUT
VEH RECALL
PED RECALL
MAX TIME RECALL
SOFT RECALL
NO REST IN PHASE
ADDED INIT CALC

ASC/3 Programming Manual D-27

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Program Reference Card
Appendix D

Coordinator Submenu 4

MM-3-1 Coordinator Options 4

COORD OPTIONS
MANUAL PATTERN ECPI COORD
SYSTEM SOURCE SYSTEM FORMAT
SPLITS IN OFFSET IN
TRANSITION MAX SELECT
DWELL/ADD TIME ENABLE MAN SYNC
DLY COORD WK-LZ FORCE OFF
OFFSET REF CAL USE PED TM
PED RECALL PED RESERVE
LOCAL ZERO OVRD FO ADD INI GRN
RE-SYNC COUNT MULTISYNC

D-28 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-3-2 Coordinator Pattern, sheet 1 of 2 4

COORDINATOR PATTERN
USE SPLIT PATTERN
TS2 PATTERN / OFFSET
CYCLE STD (COS)
OFFSET VAL DWELL/ADD TIME
ACTUATED COORD TIMING PLAN
ACT WALK REST SEQUENCE
PHASE RESERVICE ACTION PLAN
MAX SELECT FORCE OFF
SPLIT PREFERENCE PHASES
PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SPLIT PATTERN
PREF 1
PREF 2
SPLT EXT
VEH PERM DISP
RING DISP (RINGS 2-4)
SPLIT PREFERENCE PHASES
PHASE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
SPLIT PATTERN
PREF 1
PREF 2

SPLIT DEMAND PATTERN (1 or 2) X ARTERY PATTERN

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
COORD
VE RCALL
PD RCALL
MX RCALL
OMIT
SF OUT (1-8)

ASC/3 Programming Manual D-29

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-3-2 Coordinator Pattern, sheet 2 of 2 4

COORDINATOR PATTERN
USE SPLIT PATTERN
TS2 PATTERN / OFFSET
CYCLE STD (COS)
OFFSET VAL DWELL/ADD TIME
ACTUATED COORD TIMING PLAN
ACT WALK REST SEQUENCE
PHASE RESERVICE ACTION PLAN
MAX SELECT FORCE OFF
SPLIT PREFERENCE PHASES
PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SPLIT PATTERN
PREF 1
PREF 2
SPLT EXT
VEH PERM DISP
RING DISP (RINGS 2-4)
SPLIT PREFERENCE PHASES
PHASE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
SPLIT PATTERN
PREF 1
PREF 2

SPLIT DEMAND PATTERN (1 or 2) X ARTERY PATTERN

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
COORD
VE RCALL
PD RCALL
MX RCALL
OMIT
SF OUT (1-8)

D-30 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-3-3 Split Pattern, sheet 1 of 4 4

SPLIT PATTERN NUMBER

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SPLIT

PHASE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
SPLIT

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
COORD
VEH RECALL
PED RECALL
MAX RECALL
OMIT

SPLIT PATTERN NUMBER

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SPLIT

PHASE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
SPLIT

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
COORD
VEH RECALL
PED RECALL
MAX RECALL
OMIT

ASC/3 Programming Manual D-31

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-3-3 Split Pattern, sheet 2 of 4 4

SPLIT PATTERN NUMBER

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SPLIT

PHASE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
SPLIT

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
COORD
VEH RECALL
PED RECALL
MAX RECALL
OMIT

SPLIT PATTERN NUMBER

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SPLIT

PHASE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
SPLIT

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
COORD
VEH RECALL
PED RECALL
MAX RECALL
OMIT

D-32 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-3-3 Split Pattern, sheet 3 of 4 4

SPLIT PATTERN NUMBER

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SPLIT

PHASE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
SPLIT

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
COORD
VEH RECALL
PED RECALL
MAX RECALL
OMIT

SPLIT PATTERN NUMBER

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SPLIT

PHASE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
SPLIT

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
COORD
VEH RECALL
PED RECALL
MAX RECALL
OMIT

ASC/3 Programming Manual D-33

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-3-3 Split Pattern, sheet 4 of 4 4

SPLIT PATTERN NUMBER

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SPLIT

PHASE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
SPLIT

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
COORD
VEH RECALL
PED RECALL
MAX RECALL
OMIT

SPLIT PATTERN NUMBER

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SPLIT

PHASE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
SPLIT

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
COORD
VEH RECALL
PED RECALL
MAX RECALL
OMIT

D-34 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-3-4 Auto Permissive Minimum Green Time 4

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
MIN GRN

PHASE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
MIN GRN

MM-3-5 Split Demand 4

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
DEMAND 1
DEMAND 2
DEMAND 1 2
DETECTOR
CALL TIME (SEC)
CYCLE COUNT

ASC/3 Programming Manual D-35

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Program Reference Card
Appendix D

Preemptor Submenu 4

MM-4-1 Preemptor, sheet 1 of 2 4

PREEMPTOR NUMBER
VEH/PED 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
OVERLAP A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P
TRACKCLR V
TRACKCLR O
ENA TRL
DWEL VEH
DWEL PED
DWEL OLP
CYC VEH
CYC PED
CYC OLP
EXIT PH
EXIT CAL
SP FUNC
ENABLE PREEMPTION OVERRIDE INTERLOCK ENABLE
NON-LOCK INPUT DELAY TIME (SECONDS) INHIBIT TIME (SECONDS)
AUTOMATIC FLASH HAS PRIORITY DURATION TIME (SECONDS) RED CLEAR GOES GREEN
TERMINATE OVERLAPS ASAP PED CLEAR THRU YELLOW TERM PH
PED DARK TRACK CLEARANCE RESERVICE DWELL FL
LINKED PREEMPTOR FLASH EXIT COLOR PREEMPTION EXIT OPTION
EXIT TIMING PLAN RESERVICE TIME
FREE DURING PREEMPTION RING 1 RING 2 RING 3 RING 4
TIMING WALK PED CLEAR MIN GREEN YELLOW RED
ENTRANCE MIN TIMES
MIN GREEN EXT GREEN MAX GREEN YELLOW RED
TRACK CLEAR
MIN DWELL PMT EXT MAX TIME YELLOW RED
DWELL/CYCLE - EXIT
PREEMPTOR ACTIVE OUT PREEMPTOR ACTIVE OUT IN DWELL
OTHER PRIORITY PREEMPTOR OUT NON-PRIORITY PREEMPTOR OUT
INHIBIT EXTENSION TIME PEDESTRIAN PRIORITY RETURN EXIT OPTION
VEHICLE PRIORITY RETURN EXIT OPTION QUEUE DELAY RECOVERY OPTION
CONDITIONAL DELAY ENTRANCE OPTION
PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
PRIORITY RTN GRN % A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P

D-36 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-4-1 Preemptor, sheet 2 of 2 4

PREEMPTOR NUMBER
VEH/PED 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
OVERLAP A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P
TRACKCLR V
TRACKCLR O
ENA TRL
DWEL VEH
DWEL PED
DWEL OLP
CYC VEH
CYC PED
CYC OLP
EXIT PH
EXIT CAL
SP FUNC
ENABLE PREEMPTION OVERRIDE INTERLOCK ENABLE
NON-LOCK INPUT DELAY TIME (SECONDS) INHIBIT TIME (SECONDS)
AUTOMATIC FLASH HAS PRIORITY DURATION TIME (SECONDS) RED CLEAR GOES GREEN
TERMINATE OVERLAPS ASAP PED CLEAR THRU YELLOW TERM PH
PED DARK TRACK CLEARANCE RESERVICE DWELL FL
LINKED PREEMPTOR FLASH EXIT COLOR PREEMPTION EXIT OPTION
EXIT TIMING PLAN RESERVICE TIME
FREE DURING PREEMPTION RING 1 RING 2 RING 3 RING 4
TIMING WALK PED CLEAR MIN GREEN YELLOW RED
ENTRANCE MIN TIMES
MIN GREEN EXT GREEN MAX GREEN YELLOW RED
TRACK CLEAR
MIN DWELL PMT EXT MAX TIME YELLOW RED
DWELL/CYCLE - EXIT
PREEMPTOR ACTIVE OUT PREEMPTOR ACTIVE OUT IN DWELL
OTHER PRIORITY PREEMPTOR OUT NON-PRIORITY PREEMPTOR OUT
INHIBIT EXTENSION TIME PEDESTRIAN PRIORITY RETURN EXIT OPTION
VEHICLE PRIORITY RETURN EXIT OPTION QUEUE DELAY RECOVERY OPTION
CONDITIONAL DELAY ENTRANCE OPTION
PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
PRIORITY RTN GRN % A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P

ASC/3 Programming Manual D-37

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-4-2 Low Priority Preemptor Selection 4

ENABLE PREEMPT FILTERING & TSP/SCP

FILTERED INPUT SOLID PULSING
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

MM-4-3 TSP/SCP Plan (Optional) 4

TSP/SCP PLAN 1 2 3 4 5 6
TSP/SCP ENABLED
SIGNAL TYPE (S or P)
DETECTOR LOCK
DELAY TIME
MAX PRESENCE
PREEMPT ENABLES RESERVICE
NO DELAY IN TSP PHASES
ACTION SPECIAL FUNCTION INHIBIT
RESERVICE CYCLES
BUS HEADING (NB, SB, EB, WB)
MODE (TSP or SCP) FREE DEFAULT PTN
HEADWAY ALLOWANCE
----- TSP/SCP PHASE -----
VEH/PED 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
TSP/SCP1
TSP/SCP2
TSP/SCP3
TSP/SCP4
TSP/SCP5
TSP/SCP6

D-38 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-4-4 TSP/SCP Split Pattern (Optional) 4

TSP/SCP SPLIT PATTERN

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
MAX REDUCTION
MIN GREEN (computed automatically)
MAX EXTENSION

PHASE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
MAX REDUCTION
MIN GREEN (computed automatically)
MAX EXTENSION

ASC/3 Programming Manual D-39

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Program Reference Card
Appendix D

Time Base Submenu 4

MM-5-1 Clock/Calendar Data 4

Are the Date and Time set OK? (Yes, No) STANDARD TIME FROM GMT
MANUAL ACTION PLAN SYNC REFERENCE
SYNC REFERENCE TIME DAYLIGHT SAVINGS
TIME RESET INPUT TIME SET

MM-5-2 Action Plan, sheet 1 of 4 4

ACTION PLAN
PATTERN SYSTEM OVERRIDE
TIMING PLAN SEQUENCE
VEHICLE DETECTOR PLAN DETECTOR LOG
FLASH RED REST
VEHICLE DET DIAGNOSTIC PLAN PED DET DIAGNOSTIC PLAN
DIMMING ENABLE

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
PED RECALL
WALK 2
VEH EXT 2
VEH RECALL
MAX RECALL
MAX 2
MAX 3
CS INHIBIT
PHASE OMIT
SPEC FUNCTION (1-8)
AUX FUNCTION (1-3)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
LP 1-15
LP 16-30
LP 31-45
LP 46-60
LP 61-75
LP 76-90
LP 91-100

D-40 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-5-2 Action Plan, sheet 2 of 4 4

ACTION PLAN
PATTERN SYSTEM OVERRIDE
TIMING PLAN SEQUENCE
VEHICLE DETECTOR PLAN DETECTOR LOG
FLASH RED REST
VEHICLE DET DIAGNOSTIC PLAN PED DET DIAGNOSTIC PLAN
DIMMING ENABLE

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
PED RECALL
WALK 2
VEH EXT 2
VEH RECALL
MAX RECALL
MAX 2
MAX 3
CS INHIBIT
PHASE OMIT
SPEC FUNCTION (1-8)
AUX FUNCTION (1-3)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
LP 1-15
LP 16-30
LP 31-45
LP 46-60
LP 61-75
LP 76-90
LP 91-100

ASC/3 Programming Manual D-41

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-5-2 Action Plan, sheet 3 of 4 4

ACTION PLAN
PATTERN SYSTEM OVERRIDE
TIMING PLAN SEQUENCE
VEHICLE DETECTOR PLAN DETECTOR LOG
FLASH RED REST
VEHICLE DET DIAGNOSTIC PLAN PED DET DIAGNOSTIC PLAN
DIMMING ENABLE

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
PED RECALL
WALK 2
VEH EXT 2
VEH RECALL
MAX RECALL
MAX 2
MAX 3
CS INHIBIT
PHASE OMIT
SPEC FUNCTION (1-8)
AUX FUNCTION (1-3)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
LP 1-15
LP 16-30
LP 31-45
LP 46-60
LP 61-75
LP 76-90
LP 91-100

D-42 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-5-2 Action Plan, sheet 4 of 4 4

ACTION PLAN
PATTERN SYSTEM OVERRIDE
TIMING PLAN SEQUENCE
VEHICLE DETECTOR PLAN DETECTOR LOG
FLASH RED REST
VEHICLE DET DIAGNOSTIC PLAN PED DET DIAGNOSTIC PLAN
DIMMING ENABLE

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
PED RECALL
WALK 2
VEH EXT 2
VEH RECALL
MAX RECALL
MAX 2
MAX 3
CS INHIBIT
PHASE OMIT
SPEC FUNCTION (1-8)
AUX FUNCTION (1-3)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
LP 1-15
LP 16-30
LP 31-45
LP 46-60
LP 61-75
LP 76-90
LP 91-100

ASC/3 Programming Manual D-43

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-5-3 Day Plan, sheet 1 of 2 4

DAY PLAN #
EVENT # ACTION PLAN # START TIME EVENT # ACTION PLAN # START TIME
1 : 26 :
2 : 27 :
3 : 28 :
4 : 29 :
5 : 30 :
6 : 31 :
7 : 32 :
8 : 33 :
9 : 34 :
10 : 35 :
11 : 36 :
12 : 37 :
13 : 38 :
14 : 39 :
15 : 40 :
16 : 41 :
17 : 42 :
18 : 43 :
19 : 44 :
20 : 45 :
21 : 46 :
22 : 47 :
23 : 48 :
24 : 49 :
25 : 50 :

D-44 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-5-3 Day Plan, sheet 2 of 2 4

DAY PLAN #
EVENT # ACTION PLAN # START TIME EVENT # ACTION PLAN # START TIME
1 : 26 :
2 : 27 :
3 : 28 :
4 : 29 :
5 : 30 :
6 : 31 :
7 : 32 :
8 : 33 :
9 : 34 :
10 : 35 :
11 : 36 :
12 : 37 :
13 : 38 :
14 : 39 :
15 : 40 :
16 : 41 :
17 : 42 :
18 : 43 :
19 : 44 :
20 : 45 :
21 : 46 :
22 : 47 :
23 : 48 :
24 : 49 :
25 : 50 :

ASC/3 Programming Manual D-45

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-5-4 Schedule, sheet 1 of 3 4

SCHEDULE NUMBER
DAY PLAN NUMBER

J F M A M J J A S O N D
MONTH

DAY OF SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT

WEEK (DOW)

DAY OF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
MONTH
(DOM)
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

SCHEDULE NUMBER
DAY PLAN NUMBER

J F M A M J J A S O N D
MONTH

DAY OF SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT

WEEK (DOW)

DAY OF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
MONTH
(DOM)
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

D-46 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-5-4 Schedule, sheet 2 of 3 4

SCHEDULE NUMBER
DAY PLAN NUMBER

J F M A M J J A S O N D
MONTH

DAY OF SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT

WEEK (DOW)

DAY OF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
MONTH
(DOM)
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

SCHEDULE NUMBER
DAY PLAN NUMBER

J F M A M J J A S O N D
MONTH

DAY OF SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT

WEEK (DOW)

DAY OF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
MONTH
(DOM)
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

ASC/3 Programming Manual D-47

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-5-4 Schedule, sheet 3 of 3 4

SCHEDULE NUMBER
DAY PLAN NUMBER

J F M A M J J A S O N D
MONTH

DAY OF SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT

WEEK (DOW)

DAY OF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
MONTH
(DOM)
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

SCHEDULE NUMBER
DAY PLAN NUMBER

J F M A M J J A S O N D
MONTH

DAY OF SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT

WEEK (DOW)

DAY OF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
MONTH
(DOM)
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

D-48 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-5-5 Exception Day Program 4

EXCEPTION DAY FLOAT / FIXED MON / MON DOW / DOM WOM / YEAR DAY PLAN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36

ASC/3 Programming Manual D-49

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Program Reference Card
Appendix D

Detector Submenu 4

MM-6-1 Vehicle Detector Assignment, sheet 1 of 2 4

VEHICLE DETECTOR PLAN NUMBER [ ]

DET PH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 T (TYPE)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64

D-50 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-6-1 Vehicle Detector Assignment, sheet 2 of 2 4

VEHICLE DETECTOR PLAN NUMBER [ ]

DET PH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 T (TYPE)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64

ASC/3 Programming Manual D-51

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-6-2 Vehicle Detector Setup, sheet 1 of 16 4

General Detector Parameters — Note: Enter DET PH in MM-6-1.

VEHICLE DETECTOR NUMBER (1-64) VEHICLE DETECTOR PLAN NUMBER (1-4)
DETECTOR TYPE (S, D, P, C, R, G, N, B)
ENABLE TS2 DETECTOR? ENABLE ECPI LOG?
PHASE NO. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Parameters Specific to the Detector Type — Note: There are no more parameters for type R (Red Extension).
TYPE S STANDARD DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
EXTEND TIME (0-25.5 SEC.) DELAY TIME (0-255.0 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE D DISCONNECT QUEUE/STOP BAR DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
DISCONNECT TIME (0-255 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE P PASSAGE QUEUE/STOP BAR DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
PASSAGE EXTENSION TIME (0-255 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE C CALLING DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE G GREEN EXTENSION/DELAY DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
EXTEND TIME (0-25.5 SEC.) DELAY TIME (0-255.0 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE N NTCIP DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
CALL OPTION (YES/NO) DELAY TIME (0-255.0 SEC.)
EXTENSION OPTION (PASSAGE) EXTENSION TIME (0-25.5 SEC)
EXTENSION OPTION (QUEUE) QUEUE LIMIT (0-255 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE B BIKE DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
EXTEND TIME (0-25.5 SEC.) NTCIP VOLUME
NTCIP OCCUPANCY

D-52 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-6-2 Vehicle Detector Setup, sheet 2 of 16 4

General Detector Parameters — Note: Enter DET PH in MM-6-1.

VEHICLE DETECTOR NUMBER (1-64) VEHICLE DETECTOR PLAN NUMBER (1-4)
DETECTOR TYPE (S, D, P, C, R, G, N, B)
ENABLE TS2 DETECTOR? ENABLE ECPI LOG?
PHASE NO. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Parameters Specific to the Detector Type — Note: There are no more parameters for type R (Red Extension).
TYPE S STANDARD DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
EXTEND TIME (0-25.5 SEC.) DELAY TIME (0-255.0 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE D DISCONNECT QUEUE/STOP BAR DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
DISCONNECT TIME (0-255 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE P PASSAGE QUEUE/STOP BAR DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
PASSAGE EXTENSION TIME (0-255 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE C CALLING DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE G GREEN EXTENSION/DELAY DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
EXTEND TIME (0-25.5 SEC.) DELAY TIME (0-255.0 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE N NTCIP DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
CALL OPTION (YES/NO) DELAY TIME (0-255.0 SEC.)
EXTENSION OPTION (PASSAGE) EXTENSION TIME (0-25.5 SEC)
EXTENSION OPTION (QUEUE) QUEUE LIMIT (0-255 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE B BIKE DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
EXTEND TIME (0-25.5 SEC.) NTCIP VOLUME
NTCIP OCCUPANCY

ASC/3 Programming Manual D-53

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-6-2 Vehicle Detector Setup, sheet 3 of 16 4

General Detector Parameters — Note: Enter DET PH in MM-6-1.

VEHICLE DETECTOR NUMBER (1-64) VEHICLE DETECTOR PLAN NUMBER (1-4)
DETECTOR TYPE (S, D, P, C, R, G, N, B)
ENABLE TS2 DETECTOR? ENABLE ECPI LOG?
PHASE NO. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Parameters Specific to the Detector Type — Note: There are no more parameters for type R (Red Extension).
TYPE S STANDARD DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
EXTEND TIME (0-25.5 SEC.) DELAY TIME (0-255.0 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE D DISCONNECT QUEUE/STOP BAR DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
DISCONNECT TIME (0-255 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE P PASSAGE QUEUE/STOP BAR DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
PASSAGE EXTENSION TIME (0-255 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE C CALLING DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE G GREEN EXTENSION/DELAY DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
EXTEND TIME (0-25.5 SEC.) DELAY TIME (0-255.0 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE N NTCIP DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
CALL OPTION (YES/NO) DELAY TIME (0-255.0 SEC.)
EXTENSION OPTION (PASSAGE) EXTENSION TIME (0-25.5 SEC)
EXTENSION OPTION (QUEUE) QUEUE LIMIT (0-255 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE B BIKE DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
EXTEND TIME (0-25.5 SEC.) NTCIP VOLUME
NTCIP OCCUPANCY

D-54 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-6-2 Vehicle Detector Setup, sheet 4 of 16 4

General Detector Parameters — Note: Enter DET PH in MM-6-1.

VEHICLE DETECTOR NUMBER (1-64) VEHICLE DETECTOR PLAN NUMBER (1-4)
DETECTOR TYPE (S, D, P, C, R, G, N, B)
ENABLE TS2 DETECTOR? ENABLE ECPI LOG?
PHASE NO. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Parameters Specific to the Detector Type — Note: There are no more parameters for type R (Red Extension).
TYPE S STANDARD DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
EXTEND TIME (0-25.5 SEC.) DELAY TIME (0-255.0 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE D DISCONNECT QUEUE/STOP BAR DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
DISCONNECT TIME (0-255 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE P PASSAGE QUEUE/STOP BAR DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
PASSAGE EXTENSION TIME (0-255 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE C CALLING DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE G GREEN EXTENSION/DELAY DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
EXTEND TIME (0-25.5 SEC.) DELAY TIME (0-255.0 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE N NTCIP DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
CALL OPTION (YES/NO) DELAY TIME (0-255.0 SEC.)
EXTENSION OPTION (PASSAGE) EXTENSION TIME (0-25.5 SEC)
EXTENSION OPTION (QUEUE) QUEUE LIMIT (0-255 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE B BIKE DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
EXTEND TIME (0-25.5 SEC.) NTCIP VOLUME
NTCIP OCCUPANCY

ASC/3 Programming Manual D-55

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-6-2 Vehicle Detector Setup, sheet 5 of 16 4

General Detector Parameters — Note: Enter DET PH in MM-6-1.

VEHICLE DETECTOR NUMBER (1-64) VEHICLE DETECTOR PLAN NUMBER (1-4)
DETECTOR TYPE (S, D, P, C, R, G, N, B)
ENABLE TS2 DETECTOR? ENABLE ECPI LOG?
PHASE NO. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Parameters Specific to the Detector Type — Note: There are no more parameters for type R (Red Extension).
TYPE S STANDARD DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
EXTEND TIME (0-25.5 SEC.) DELAY TIME (0-255.0 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE D DISCONNECT QUEUE/STOP BAR DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
DISCONNECT TIME (0-255 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE P PASSAGE QUEUE/STOP BAR DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
PASSAGE EXTENSION TIME (0-255 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE C CALLING DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE G GREEN EXTENSION/DELAY DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
EXTEND TIME (0-25.5 SEC.) DELAY TIME (0-255.0 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE N NTCIP DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
CALL OPTION (YES/NO) DELAY TIME (0-255.0 SEC.)
EXTENSION OPTION (PASSAGE) EXTENSION TIME (0-25.5 SEC)
EXTENSION OPTION (QUEUE) QUEUE LIMIT (0-255 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE B BIKE DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
EXTEND TIME (0-25.5 SEC.) NTCIP VOLUME
NTCIP OCCUPANCY

D-56 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-6-2 Vehicle Detector Setup, sheet 6 of 16 4

General Detector Parameters — Note: Enter DET PH in MM-6-1.

VEHICLE DETECTOR NUMBER (1-64) VEHICLE DETECTOR PLAN NUMBER (1-4)
DETECTOR TYPE (S, D, P, C, R, G, N, B)
ENABLE TS2 DETECTOR? ENABLE ECPI LOG?
PHASE NO. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Parameters Specific to the Detector Type — Note: There are no more parameters for type R (Red Extension).
TYPE S STANDARD DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
EXTEND TIME (0-25.5 SEC.) DELAY TIME (0-255.0 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE D DISCONNECT QUEUE/STOP BAR DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
DISCONNECT TIME (0-255 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE P PASSAGE QUEUE/STOP BAR DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
PASSAGE EXTENSION TIME (0-255 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE C CALLING DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE G GREEN EXTENSION/DELAY DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
EXTEND TIME (0-25.5 SEC.) DELAY TIME (0-255.0 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE N NTCIP DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
CALL OPTION (YES/NO) DELAY TIME (0-255.0 SEC.)
EXTENSION OPTION (PASSAGE) EXTENSION TIME (0-25.5 SEC)
EXTENSION OPTION (QUEUE) QUEUE LIMIT (0-255 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE B BIKE DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
EXTEND TIME (0-25.5 SEC.) NTCIP VOLUME
NTCIP OCCUPANCY

ASC/3 Programming Manual D-57

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-6-2 Vehicle Detector Setup, sheet 7 of 16 4

General Detector Parameters — Note: Enter DET PH in MM-6-1.

VEHICLE DETECTOR NUMBER (1-64) VEHICLE DETECTOR PLAN NUMBER (1-4)
DETECTOR TYPE (S, D, P, C, R, G, N, B)
ENABLE TS2 DETECTOR? ENABLE ECPI LOG?
PHASE NO. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Parameters Specific to the Detector Type — Note: There are no more parameters for type R (Red Extension).
TYPE S STANDARD DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
EXTEND TIME (0-25.5 SEC.) DELAY TIME (0-255.0 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE D DISCONNECT QUEUE/STOP BAR DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
DISCONNECT TIME (0-255 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE P PASSAGE QUEUE/STOP BAR DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
PASSAGE EXTENSION TIME (0-255 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE C CALLING DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE G GREEN EXTENSION/DELAY DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
EXTEND TIME (0-25.5 SEC.) DELAY TIME (0-255.0 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE N NTCIP DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
CALL OPTION (YES/NO) DELAY TIME (0-255.0 SEC.)
EXTENSION OPTION (PASSAGE) EXTENSION TIME (0-25.5 SEC)
EXTENSION OPTION (QUEUE) QUEUE LIMIT (0-255 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE B BIKE DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
EXTEND TIME (0-25.5 SEC.) NTCIP VOLUME
NTCIP OCCUPANCY

D-58 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-6-2 Vehicle Detector Setup, sheet 8 of 16 4

General Detector Parameters — Note: Enter DET PH in MM-6-1.

VEHICLE DETECTOR NUMBER (1-64) VEHICLE DETECTOR PLAN NUMBER (1-4)
DETECTOR TYPE (S, D, P, C, R, G, N, B)
ENABLE TS2 DETECTOR? ENABLE ECPI LOG?
PHASE NO. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Parameters Specific to the Detector Type — Note: There are no more parameters for type R (Red Extension).
TYPE S STANDARD DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
EXTEND TIME (0-25.5 SEC.) DELAY TIME (0-255.0 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE D DISCONNECT QUEUE/STOP BAR DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
DISCONNECT TIME (0-255 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE P PASSAGE QUEUE/STOP BAR DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
PASSAGE EXTENSION TIME (0-255 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE C CALLING DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE G GREEN EXTENSION/DELAY DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
EXTEND TIME (0-25.5 SEC.) DELAY TIME (0-255.0 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE N NTCIP DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
CALL OPTION (YES/NO) DELAY TIME (0-255.0 SEC.)
EXTENSION OPTION (PASSAGE) EXTENSION TIME (0-25.5 SEC)
EXTENSION OPTION (QUEUE) QUEUE LIMIT (0-255 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE B BIKE DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
EXTEND TIME (0-25.5 SEC.) NTCIP VOLUME
NTCIP OCCUPANCY

ASC/3 Programming Manual D-59

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-6-2 Vehicle Detector Setup, sheet 9 of 16 4

General Detector Parameters — Note: Enter DET PH in MM-6-1.

VEHICLE DETECTOR NUMBER (1-64) VEHICLE DETECTOR PLAN NUMBER (1-4)
DETECTOR TYPE (S, D, P, C, R, G, N, B)
ENABLE TS2 DETECTOR? ENABLE ECPI LOG?
PHASE NO. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Parameters Specific to the Detector Type — Note: There are no more parameters for type R (Red Extension).
TYPE S STANDARD DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
EXTEND TIME (0-25.5 SEC.) DELAY TIME (0-255.0 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE D DISCONNECT QUEUE/STOP BAR DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
DISCONNECT TIME (0-255 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE P PASSAGE QUEUE/STOP BAR DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
PASSAGE EXTENSION TIME (0-255 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE C CALLING DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE G GREEN EXTENSION/DELAY DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
EXTEND TIME (0-25.5 SEC.) DELAY TIME (0-255.0 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE N NTCIP DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
CALL OPTION (YES/NO) DELAY TIME (0-255.0 SEC.)
EXTENSION OPTION (PASSAGE) EXTENSION TIME (0-25.5 SEC)
EXTENSION OPTION (QUEUE) QUEUE LIMIT (0-255 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE B BIKE DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
EXTEND TIME (0-25.5 SEC.) NTCIP VOLUME
NTCIP OCCUPANCY

D-60 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-6-2 Vehicle Detector Setup, sheet 10 of 16 4

General Detector Parameters — Note: Enter DET PH in MM-6-1.

VEHICLE DETECTOR NUMBER (1-64) VEHICLE DETECTOR PLAN NUMBER (1-4)
DETECTOR TYPE (S, D, P, C, R, G, N, B)
ENABLE TS2 DETECTOR? ENABLE ECPI LOG?
PHASE NO. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Parameters Specific to the Detector Type — Note: There are no more parameters for type R (Red Extension).
TYPE S STANDARD DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
EXTEND TIME (0-25.5 SEC.) DELAY TIME (0-255.0 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE D DISCONNECT QUEUE/STOP BAR DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
DISCONNECT TIME (0-255 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE P PASSAGE QUEUE/STOP BAR DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
PASSAGE EXTENSION TIME (0-255 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE C CALLING DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE G GREEN EXTENSION/DELAY DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
EXTEND TIME (0-25.5 SEC.) DELAY TIME (0-255.0 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE N NTCIP DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
CALL OPTION (YES/NO) DELAY TIME (0-255.0 SEC.)
EXTENSION OPTION (PASSAGE) EXTENSION TIME (0-25.5 SEC)
EXTENSION OPTION (QUEUE) QUEUE LIMIT (0-255 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE B BIKE DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
EXTEND TIME (0-25.5 SEC.) NTCIP VOLUME
NTCIP OCCUPANCY

ASC/3 Programming Manual D-61

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-6-2 Vehicle Detector Setup, sheet 11 of 16 4

General Detector Parameters — Note: Enter DET PH in MM-6-1.

VEHICLE DETECTOR NUMBER (1-64) VEHICLE DETECTOR PLAN NUMBER (1-4)
DETECTOR TYPE (S, D, P, C, R, G, N, B)
ENABLE TS2 DETECTOR? ENABLE ECPI LOG?
PHASE NO. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Parameters Specific to the Detector Type — Note: There are no more parameters for type R (Red Extension).
TYPE S STANDARD DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
EXTEND TIME (0-25.5 SEC.) DELAY TIME (0-255.0 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE D DISCONNECT QUEUE/STOP BAR DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
DISCONNECT TIME (0-255 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE P PASSAGE QUEUE/STOP BAR DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
PASSAGE EXTENSION TIME (0-255 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE C CALLING DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE G GREEN EXTENSION/DELAY DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
EXTEND TIME (0-25.5 SEC.) DELAY TIME (0-255.0 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE N NTCIP DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
CALL OPTION (YES/NO) DELAY TIME (0-255.0 SEC.)
EXTENSION OPTION (PASSAGE) EXTENSION TIME (0-25.5 SEC)
EXTENSION OPTION (QUEUE) QUEUE LIMIT (0-255 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE B BIKE DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
EXTEND TIME (0-25.5 SEC.) NTCIP VOLUME
NTCIP OCCUPANCY

D-62 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-6-2 Vehicle Detector Setup, sheet 12 of 16 4

General Detector Parameters — Note: Enter DET PH in MM-6-1.

VEHICLE DETECTOR NUMBER (1-64) VEHICLE DETECTOR PLAN NUMBER (1-4)
DETECTOR TYPE (S, D, P, C, R, G, N, B)
ENABLE TS2 DETECTOR? ENABLE ECPI LOG?
PHASE NO. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Parameters Specific to the Detector Type — Note: There are no more parameters for type R (Red Extension).
TYPE S STANDARD DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
EXTEND TIME (0-25.5 SEC.) DELAY TIME (0-255.0 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE D DISCONNECT QUEUE/STOP BAR DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
DISCONNECT TIME (0-255 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE P PASSAGE QUEUE/STOP BAR DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
PASSAGE EXTENSION TIME (0-255 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE C CALLING DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE G GREEN EXTENSION/DELAY DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
EXTEND TIME (0-25.5 SEC.) DELAY TIME (0-255.0 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE N NTCIP DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
CALL OPTION (YES/NO) DELAY TIME (0-255.0 SEC.)
EXTENSION OPTION (PASSAGE) EXTENSION TIME (0-25.5 SEC)
EXTENSION OPTION (QUEUE) QUEUE LIMIT (0-255 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE B BIKE DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
EXTEND TIME (0-25.5 SEC.) NTCIP VOLUME
NTCIP OCCUPANCY

ASC/3 Programming Manual D-63

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-6-2 Vehicle Detector Setup, sheet 13 of 16 4

General Detector Parameters — Note: Enter DET PH in MM-6-1.

VEHICLE DETECTOR NUMBER (1-64) VEHICLE DETECTOR PLAN NUMBER (1-4)
DETECTOR TYPE (S, D, P, C, R, G, N, B)
ENABLE TS2 DETECTOR? ENABLE ECPI LOG?
PHASE NO. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Parameters Specific to the Detector Type — Note: There are no more parameters for type R (Red Extension).
TYPE S STANDARD DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
EXTEND TIME (0-25.5 SEC.) DELAY TIME (0-255.0 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE D DISCONNECT QUEUE/STOP BAR DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
DISCONNECT TIME (0-255 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE P PASSAGE QUEUE/STOP BAR DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
PASSAGE EXTENSION TIME (0-255 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE C CALLING DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE G GREEN EXTENSION/DELAY DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
EXTEND TIME (0-25.5 SEC.) DELAY TIME (0-255.0 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE N NTCIP DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
CALL OPTION (YES/NO) DELAY TIME (0-255.0 SEC.)
EXTENSION OPTION (PASSAGE) EXTENSION TIME (0-25.5 SEC)
EXTENSION OPTION (QUEUE) QUEUE LIMIT (0-255 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE B BIKE DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
EXTEND TIME (0-25.5 SEC.) NTCIP VOLUME
NTCIP OCCUPANCY

D-64 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-6-2 Vehicle Detector Setup, sheet 14 of 16 4

General Detector Parameters — Note: Enter DET PH in MM-6-1.

VEHICLE DETECTOR NUMBER (1-64) VEHICLE DETECTOR PLAN NUMBER (1-4)
DETECTOR TYPE (S, D, P, C, R, G, N, B)
ENABLE TS2 DETECTOR? ENABLE ECPI LOG?
PHASE NO. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Parameters Specific to the Detector Type — Note: There are no more parameters for type R (Red Extension).
TYPE S STANDARD DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
EXTEND TIME (0-25.5 SEC.) DELAY TIME (0-255.0 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE D DISCONNECT QUEUE/STOP BAR DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
DISCONNECT TIME (0-255 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE P PASSAGE QUEUE/STOP BAR DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
PASSAGE EXTENSION TIME (0-255 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE C CALLING DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE G GREEN EXTENSION/DELAY DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
EXTEND TIME (0-25.5 SEC.) DELAY TIME (0-255.0 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE N NTCIP DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
CALL OPTION (YES/NO) DELAY TIME (0-255.0 SEC.)
EXTENSION OPTION (PASSAGE) EXTENSION TIME (0-25.5 SEC)
EXTENSION OPTION (QUEUE) QUEUE LIMIT (0-255 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE B BIKE DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
EXTEND TIME (0-25.5 SEC.) NTCIP VOLUME
NTCIP OCCUPANCY

ASC/3 Programming Manual D-65

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-6-2 Vehicle Detector Setup, sheet 15 of 16 4

General Detector Parameters — Note: Enter DET PH in MM-6-1.

VEHICLE DETECTOR NUMBER (1-64) VEHICLE DETECTOR PLAN NUMBER (1-4)
DETECTOR TYPE (S, D, P, C, R, G, N, B)
ENABLE TS2 DETECTOR? ENABLE ECPI LOG?
PHASE NO. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Parameters Specific to the Detector Type — Note: There are no more parameters for type R (Red Extension).
TYPE S STANDARD DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
EXTEND TIME (0-25.5 SEC.) DELAY TIME (0-255.0 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE D DISCONNECT QUEUE/STOP BAR DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
DISCONNECT TIME (0-255 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE P PASSAGE QUEUE/STOP BAR DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
PASSAGE EXTENSION TIME (0-255 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE C CALLING DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE G GREEN EXTENSION/DELAY DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
EXTEND TIME (0-25.5 SEC.) DELAY TIME (0-255.0 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE N NTCIP DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
CALL OPTION (YES/NO) DELAY TIME (0-255.0 SEC.)
EXTENSION OPTION (PASSAGE) EXTENSION TIME (0-25.5 SEC)
EXTENSION OPTION (QUEUE) QUEUE LIMIT (0-255 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE B BIKE DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
EXTEND TIME (0-25.5 SEC.) NTCIP VOLUME
NTCIP OCCUPANCY

D-66 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-6-2 Vehicle Detector Setup, sheet 16 of 16 4

General Detector Parameters — Note: Enter DET PH in MM-6-1.

VEHICLE DETECTOR NUMBER (1-64) VEHICLE DETECTOR PLAN NUMBER (1-4)
DETECTOR TYPE (S, D, P, C, R, G, N, B)
ENABLE TS2 DETECTOR? ENABLE ECPI LOG?
PHASE NO. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Parameters Specific to the Detector Type — Note: There are no more parameters for type R (Red Extension).
TYPE S STANDARD DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
EXTEND TIME (0-25.5 SEC.) DELAY TIME (0-255.0 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE D DISCONNECT QUEUE/STOP BAR DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
DISCONNECT TIME (0-255 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE P PASSAGE QUEUE/STOP BAR DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
PASSAGE EXTENSION TIME (0-255 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE C CALLING DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE G GREEN EXTENSION/DELAY DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
EXTEND TIME (0-25.5 SEC.) DELAY TIME (0-255.0 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE N NTCIP DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
CALL OPTION (YES/NO) DELAY TIME (0-255.0 SEC.)
EXTENSION OPTION (PASSAGE) EXTENSION TIME (0-25.5 SEC)
EXTENSION OPTION (QUEUE) QUEUE LIMIT (0-255 SEC.)
USE ADDED INITIAL CALCULATION CROSS SWITCH PHASE (0-16)
LOCK IN RED NTCIP VOLUME
LOCK IN YELLOW NTCIP OCCUPANCY PMT QUEUE DELAY
TYPE B BIKE DETECTOR PARAMETER SETTINGS
EXTEND TIME (0-25.5 SEC.) NTCIP VOLUME
NTCIP OCCUPANCY

ASC/3 Programming Manual D-67

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-6-3 Ped Detector Phase Assignment 4

NTCIP Mode
PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DETECTOR
PHASE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
DETECTOR

Econolite Mode
PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1
2
3
4
D 5
E 6
T 7
E 8
C
9
T
10
O
11
R
12
13
14
15
16

MM-6-4 Log Intervals – Speed Detector Setup 4

NTCIP LOG PERIOD ECPI LOG PERIOD LENGTH UNITS

SPEED DET 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LOCAL DET
ONE/TWO DET
VEH LENGTH
TRAP LENGTH
ENABLE LOG
SPEED DET 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
LOCAL DET
ONE/TWO DET
VEH LENGTH
TRAP LENGTH
ENABLE LOG

D-68 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-6-5 Vehicle Detector Diagnostics, sheet 1 of 4 4

VEHICLE DIAGNOSTIC PLAN NUMBER 1

MAX PRESENCE

MAX PRESENCE
MIN (ERRATIC)

MIN (ERRATIC)
EXTEND TIME

EXTEND TIME
COUNTS PER

COUNTS PER
NO ACTIVITY

NO ACTIVITY
MULTIPLIER

MULTIPLIER
DELAY TIME

DELAY TIME
FAILED DET

FAILED DET

FAILED DET

FAILED DET
INTERVAL

INTERVAL

INTERVAL

INTERVAL
DET

DET
1 33
2 34
3 35
4 36
5 37
6 38
7 39
8 40
9 41
10 42
11 43
12 44
13 45
14 46
15 47
16 48
17 49
18 50
19 51
20 52
21 53
22 54
23 55
24 56
25 57
26 58
27 59
28 60
29 61
30 62
31 63
32 64

ASC/3 Programming Manual D-69

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-6-5 Vehicle Detector Diagnostics, sheet 2 of 4 4

VEHICLE DIAGNOSTIC PLAN NUMBER 2

MAX PRESENCE

MAX PRESENCE
MIN (ERRATIC)

MIN (ERRATIC)
EXTEND TIME

EXTEND TIME
COUNTS PER

COUNTS PER
NO ACTIVITY

NO ACTIVITY
MULTIPLIER

MULTIPLIER
DELAY TIME

DELAY TIME
FAILED DET

FAILED DET

FAILED DET

FAILED DET
INTERVAL

INTERVAL

INTERVAL

INTERVAL
DET

DET
1 33
2 34
3 35
4 36
5 37
6 38
7 39
8 40
9 41
10 42
11 43
12 44
13 45
14 46
15 47
16 48
17 49
18 50
19 51
20 52
21 53
22 54
23 55
24 56
25 57
26 58
27 59
28 60
29 61
30 62
31 63
32 64

D-70 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-6-5 Vehicle Detector Diagnostics, sheet 3 of 4 4

VEHICLE DIAGNOSTIC PLAN NUMBER 3

MAX PRESENCE

MAX PRESENCE
MIN (ERRATIC)

MIN (ERRATIC)
EXTEND TIME

EXTEND TIME
COUNTS PER

COUNTS PER
NO ACTIVITY

NO ACTIVITY
MULTIPLIER

MULTIPLIER
DELAY TIME

DELAY TIME
FAILED DET

FAILED DET

FAILED DET

FAILED DET
INTERVAL

INTERVAL

INTERVAL

INTERVAL
DET

DET
1 33
2 34
3 35
4 36
5 37
6 38
7 39
8 40
9 41
10 42
11 43
12 44
13 45
14 46
15 47
16 48
17 49
18 50
19 51
20 52
21 53
22 54
23 55
24 56
25 57
26 58
27 59
28 60
29 61
30 62
31 63
32 64

ASC/3 Programming Manual D-71

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-6-5 Vehicle Detector Diagnostics, sheet 4 of 4 4

VEHICLE DIAGNOSTIC PLAN NUMBER 4

MAX PRESENCE

MAX PRESENCE
MIN (ERRATIC)

MIN (ERRATIC)
EXTEND TIME

EXTEND TIME
COUNTS PER

COUNTS PER
NO ACTIVITY

NO ACTIVITY
MULTIPLIER

MULTIPLIER
DELAY TIME

DELAY TIME
FAILED DET

FAILED DET

FAILED DET

FAILED DET
INTERVAL

INTERVAL

INTERVAL

INTERVAL
DET

DET
1 33
2 34
3 35
4 36
5 37
6 38
7 39
8 40
9 41
10 42
11 43
12 44
13 45
14 46
15 47
16 48
17 49
18 50
19 51
20 52
21 53
22 54
23 55
24 56
25 57
26 58
27 59
28 60
29 61
30 62
31 63
32 64

D-72 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Program Reference Card
Appendix D

MM-6-6 Ped Detector Diagnostics 4

PED DETECTOR DIAG PLAN 1 PED DETECTOR DIAG PLAN 2

MAX PRESENCE

MAX PRESENCE
MIN (ERRATIC)

MIN (ERRATIC)
COUNTS PER

COUNTS PER
NO ACTIVITY

NO ACTIVITY
MULTIPLIER

MULTIPLIER
INTERVAL

INTERVAL

INTERVAL

INTERVAL
DET DET

1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
16 16

PED DETECTOR DIAG PLAN 3 PED DETECTOR DIAG PLAN 4

MAX PRESENCE

MAX PRESENCE
MIN (ERRATIC)

MIN (ERRATIC)
COUNTS PER

COUNTS PER
NO ACTIVITY

NO ACTIVITY
MULTIPLIER

MULTIPLIER
INTERVAL

INTERVAL

INTERVAL

INTERVAL

DET DET

1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
16 16

ASC/3 Programming Manual D-73

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
For your notes:

D-74 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 E
Event Log Messages
Log Message Description

3 CRITICAL RFES IN 24 HOURS 3 critical SDLC communication errors occurred in the last 24
hours.
3 CRITICAL RFES IN 24 HOURS 3 critical SDLC communication errors cleared.
CLEARED

ACCESS GRANTED:USER # User login from keyboard is successful and access is granted.
ALARM ACTIVE An alarm event happens.
ALARM INACTIVE An alarm event clears.
AUTOMATIC FLASH ACTIVE Controller is in automatic flash.
AUTOMATIC FLASH INACTIVE Controller exits from automatic flash.
BATTERY LOW Battery voltage drops below normal level.
CABINET DOOR CLOSED Cabinet door has just been closed.
CABINET DOOR OPEN Cabinet door is open.
COLOR MISMATCH FAULT FLASH Controller SDLC output colors and MMU intersection colors have
not matched for over 800 ms.
COMPATIBILITY FAULT FLASH The controller compatibility table does not match the MMU
compatibility table.
CONFLICT FAULT FLASH MMU detected Conflict calls. Two or more conflicting colors are
ON for over 500 ms.
COORDINATOR ACTIVE Controller is running in Coordination mode.
COORDINATOR DATA ERRORS Invalid settings are found in the commanded pattern data. Fall back
(FREE) to Free mode.
COORDINATOR FAILURE (FREE) When a Coordinator Fault is in effect and a Cycle Fault occurs
again within two cycles of the coordination retry. Fall back to Free
mode.

ASC/3 Programming Manual E-1

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Event Log Messages
Appendix E

Log Message Description

COORDINATOR FAULT (FREE) When a Cycle Fault is in effect and the serviceable call has been
serviced within two cycles after the Cycle Fault. Fall back to Free
mode.
COORDINATOR LOCAL FREE Input commands the controller to go to FREE mode.
COORDINATOR PROGRAM FREE TBC commands the controller to go to FREE mode.
CRC PROTECT FAIL - NEMA CRC CRC error was detected in the running database.
CHECKING

CYCLE FAILURE FLASH Cycling diagnostics indicate that a serviceable call exists that has
not been serviced for two cycles during Free.
CYCLE FAULT (FREE) Cycling diagnostics indicate that a serviceable call exists that has
not been serviced for two cycles during Coordination. Thus the
controller will be in Free mode.
DATA CHANGE INITIATED Data change from keyboard detected since last data change
(KEYBOARD) timeout.
DATA CHANGE TIME OUT No data change from keyboard in the last 20 minutes.
(KEYBOARD)

DET BIU # RFE Detector BIU communication error.

DET BIU # RFE CLEAR Detector BIU communication error clears.
DET BIU DISABLED # Record which detector BIU is disabled.
DET BIU ENABLED # Record which detector BIU is enabled.
ECPIP DATABASE DOWNLOAD New database has been downloaded to the controller through the
ECPIP protocols.
EXIT ERROR FLASH MMU flash error is cleared.
FLASH TEST Flash Test has failed (ASC/3 NEMA only).
HRI CROSSING# TO PMT NOT HRI messages are being received but all the crossing numbers are
SET not associated with a preempt.
HRI PMT# IS NOT ENABLED HRI messages are being received for a crossing but the preempt
associated with the crossing is not enabled.
HRI PMT# IS NOT HIGH Preempt is linked to an HRI crossing but is low priority. It needs
PRIORITY to be high priority.
HRI RBHA FAULT FLASH The HRI message is not receiving messages from the controller.
HRI RX FAULT FLASH HRI messages are not being received by the controller.

E- 2 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Event Log Messages
Appendix E

Log Message Description

HRI SO FAULT FLASH HRI messages indicate that the railroad equipment is offline.
IDOT CRC FAULT FLASH HRI CRC check has failed.
IDOT DATABASE CRC CHECKING IDOT database CRC does not match with the preset value.
FAILED

IDOT TRACK SWITCH FAIL IDOT track switch fail input is active.
IM DATABASE DOWNLOAD Intersection Monitor – new database has been downloaded to the
controller.
IM PREEMPTOR MAX PRESENCE Intersection Monitor – a preemption has been active longer than or
equal to the programmed maximum presence time.
IM PREEMPTOR NO ACTIVITY Intersection Monitor – no preemption is active in the programmed
NO ACTIVITY time.
IM PREEMPTOR NORMAL Intersection Monitor – a No Activity or Maximum Presence event
clears.
IM REP CALL DIAG Intersection Monitor – failed to connect the phone call.
IM TRACK SWITCH FAIL CLEAR IDOT track switch fail input clears.
LOCAL FLASH ACTIVE The CU has detected local flash going active.
LOCAL FLASH INACTIVE The CU has detected local flash being removed.
MAX GREEN EVENT Intersection Monitor – maximum green time on a phase is greater
than or equal to the programmed maximum green time.
MAX GREEN EVENT CLEAR Intersection Monitor – a maximum green event has been logged
and the phase later terminates with a total accumulated green time
less than the programmed maximum green time.
MMU DISABLED MMU is disabled.
MMU ENABLED MMU is enabled.
MMU FLASH: +24 VOLT MONITOR MMU is reporting that the 24 Volts is not within limits and placed
I the intersection in Flash.
MMU FLASH: +24 VOLT MONITOR MMU is reporting that the 24 Volts II is not within limits and
II placed the intersection in Flash.
MMU FLASH: CONFLICT MMU is reporting that is has detected a conflict between two
channels and placed the intersection in Flash.

ASC/3 Programming Manual E-3

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Event Log Messages
Appendix E

Log Message Description

MMU FLASH: DIAGNOSTIC MMU is reporting that a diagnostic failure has occurred and placed
FAILURE the intersection in Flash.
MMU FLASH: MINIMUM MMU is reporting that yellow color has not been on long enough
CLEARANCE FAILURE and placed the intersection in Flash.
MMU FLASH: PORT I TIMEOUT MMU is not receiving valid communication from the controller
FAILURE and placed the intersection in Flash.
MMU FLASH: RED FAILURE MMU is reporting that one or more channels have no colors
present.
MMU FLASH: VOLTAGE MONITOR MMU is reporting that the CVM is not active.
MMU RFE MMU communication error.
MMU RFE CLEAR MMU communication error clears.
MMU STATUS FLASH (HARDWARE This is a second message added to the log to indicate that the MMU
INPUTS) has found an error.
NETWORK DOWN: STARTUP MAC Ethernet port fails to operate.
INCORRECT

OFF LINE The CU is not in normal operation (that is, in flash or preempt).
ON LINE The CU is in normal operation.
PMT GATEDOWN FAULT FLASH The CU has detected a gatedown fault and put the intersection into
flash.
PMT INTERLOCK FAULT FLASH The CU has detected a preempt interlock error and put the
intersection into flash.
PORT 3B CANNOT BE SET TO Port 3B is set incorrectly for terminal, possibly via IM command.
TERMINAL

PORTS CANNOT BE SET TO SAME Same Protocol cannot be set on a different port, possibly via IM
PROTOCOL command.
POWER FAILURE DETECTED Power interruption is detected.
POWER OFF Power OFF Event.
POWER ON Power ON Event.
POWER ON FLASH ACTIVE The CU is powering up and keeping the intersection in flash.
POWER ON FLASH INACTIVE The CU is coming out of power ON flash.
POWER RESTORE Short power interruption happened and power is restored.

E- 4 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Event Log Messages
Appendix E

Log Message Description

PREEMPTOR ACTIVE The controller is operating in preemption mode.

PREEMPTOR INACTIVE The preemption goes inactive.
RESPONSE FRAME FAULT FLASH The CU has detected an RFE error and put the intersection into
flash.
RF129 DUAL INDICATION FAULT Enhanced MMU – one or more channels have multiple colors
FLASH active. Refer to MM-7-7-3 for more information.
RF129 EXTERNAL WATCHDOG Enhanced MMU – the external WDOG signal to the MMU has a
FAULT FLASH failure.
RF129 FIELD CHECK FAULT Enhanced MMU Message. Refer to MMU Manufacturer’s manual
FLASH for more information.
RF129 RP DETECTION STATUS Enhanced MMU – one or more channels turning ON and OFF.
For more details, go to MM-7-7-5.
RF129 SPARE #1 MMU bit setting. Refer to MMU Manufacturer’s manual for more
information.
RF129 SPARE #2 MMU bit setting. Refer to MMU Manufacturer’s manual for more
information.
RF129 SPARE #3 MMU bit setting. Refer to MMU Manufacturer’s manual for more
information.
RF129 SPARE #3 FLASH Enhanced MMU message. Refer to MMU Manufacturer’s manual
for more information.
RF129 SPARE #4 MMU bit setting. Refer to MMU Manufacturer’s manual for more
information.
RF129 SPARE #5 MMU bit setting. Refer to MMU Manufacturer’s manual for more
information.
RF129 SPARE #6 MMU bit setting. Refer to MMU Manufacturer’s manual for more
information.
RF129 SPARE #6 FLASH Enhanced MMU. Refer to MMU Manufacturer’s manual for more
information.
RF129 YELLOW PLUS RED Enhanced MMU – Short or Skipped Yellow.
CLEARANCE FLASH

RFE TEST RFE 158 Test.

RFE TEST CLEAR Clear RFE 158 Test.

ASC/3 Programming Manual E-5

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Event Log Messages
Appendix E

Log Message Description

STATIC RAM TEST OS has failed a static RAM test (ASC/3 NEMA only).
TEST DISABLE Disable RFE 158 Test.
TEST ENABLE Enable RFE 158 Test.
TF # RFE TF BIU # has RFE errors.
TF # RFE CLEAR TF BIU # RFE errors have been cleared.
TF # DISABLED TF BIU # has been disabled.
TF # ENABLED TF BIU # has been enabled.
TSP CALL RECEIVED A TSP call is detected.
TSP CYCLE ACTIVATED A TSP call is being serviced. TSP timings, omits and recalls are in
effect.
TSP CYCLE TERMINATED TSP operation has been terminated.
TSP INHIBITED CALL RECEIVED A TSP call is detected but cannot be serviced.
UPS POWER OFF Intersection Monitor – Controller is running on UPS power.
UPS POWER ON Intersection Monitor – Controller is no longer running on UPS
power.
WSA ON BEFORE TRACK HRI – WSA occurred before the CU entered track clearance.
CLEARANCE

YELLOW PLUS RED CLEARANCE Enhanced MMU – short or missing Yellow.

FLASH

E- 6 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 F
ASC/3 Hardware Diagnostic Screens
The ASC/3 Controller hardware diagnostics software is a part of the ASC/3 Boot
software package and appears as option 7 on the Boot Menu.

To access the Hardware Diagnostic Menu:

1 While powering up the controller, simultaneously press 1 and CLEAR.

The Boot Menu screen comes into view:

MM/DD/YYYY BOOT MENU HH:MM:SS

1. DOWNLOAD FILES 6. SET WORKING DIR

2. UPLOAD OPTIONS 7. RUN H/W DIAGS
3. FILE SYSTEM 8. CLOCK/CALENDAR
4. SETUP NETWORK 9. SHOW BOOT CFG
5. SELECT APP 0. RESTART

PRESS KEYS 1..9, OR 0 TO SELECT

2 Press 7.

The Hardware Diagnostic Menu (Screen HD, also shown below) comes into view.

HARDWARE DIAGNOSTIC MENU

1. DISPLAY 8. TELEMETRY I/O

2. KEYPAD 9. S-RAM
3. PORT1 0. ETHERNET
4. PORT2 A. RTC/OTHER
5. PORT3A B. DATA MODULE
6. PORT3B C. AUTO-LOOP
7. TS2 "ABCD" I/O D. TS2 SUITCASE

PRESS
0..9 TO SELECT 0-9
SPEC FUNC 1-3 TO SELECT A-C

ASC/3 Programming Manual F-1

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
ASC/3 Hardware Diagnostic Screens
Appendix F

Diagnostic Screen Examples 6

HD-1 HD-2

LCD DISPLAY TEST KEYPAD TEST

/ \ / \ / \ / \
\ / \ / \ / \ / / \ / \ / \
/ \ \ / \ / \ /
\ / / \ / \ / \
/ \ / \ / \ \ / \ / \ /
\ / \ / \ / / \ / \ / \
/ \ \ / \ / \ /
\ / / \ / \ / \
/ \ / \ / \ \ / \ / \ /
************* \ / \ / \ /
*TEST PASSED*
************* LAST KEY PRESSED = [SUB]

PRESS ANY KEY TO RETURN PRESS SUB MENU TWICE TO EXIT

HD-3 HD-4

PORT 1 TEST PORT 2 TEST

TESTING HANDSHAKE SIGNALS [PASS]

PACKET TESTING PPPPPPPPPPPPPPPP PACKET TESTING PPPPPPPPPPPPPPPP

No tx/rx failures! No tx/rx failures!

************* *************
*TEST PASSED* *TEST PASSED*
************* *************

PRESS ANY KEY TO RETURN PRESS ANY KEY TO RETURN

F-2 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 ASC/3 Hardware Diagnostic Screens
Appendix F

HD-5 HD-6
PORT 3A TEST TELEMETRY INTERFACE LOOPBACK

TESTING CTRL SIGS [PASS]

TESTING HANDSHAKE SIGNALS [PASS] TESTING HANDSHAKE SIGNALS [PASS]
PACKET TESTING PPPPPPPPPPPPPPPP
PACKET TESTING P3B PPPPPPPPPPPPPPPP
No tx/rx failures! No tx/rx failures!

PACKET TESTING P3C PPPPPPPPPPPPPPPP

No tx/rx failures!

************* *************
*TEST PASSED* *TEST PASSED*
************* *************

PRESS ANY KEY TO RETURN PRESS ANY KEY TO RETURN

HD-7 HD-8
TS2 TYPE 2 LOOPBACK TELEMETRY I/O LOOPBACK

Testing output 118

Input 94 has failed with Output 118

3827 3830 3831 3832 391f 3a2b 3b25 3c33

3d41 3e42 3f44 4034 4133 4234 433a 443d
4446 4539 4638 4735 4843 4934 4a3d 4a46
4b40 4c3f 4d45 4e47 4f3c 5036 5133 5242
533e 543e 5537 5636 5735 5845 5938 5a44
5b65 5c62 5d61 5d67 5e68 5f63 6064 6166
624c 635d 64 ************* 4d 684b 694a *************
6a60 6b55 6c *TEST FAILED* 54 7053 7152 *NO HARDWARE*
7256 7358 74 ************* 5a 765c 765e *************
2c2c 2c2e 2d1c 2e21 2f1e 2f2d 3048 313b
PRESS ANY KEY TO RETURN PRESS ANY KEY TO RETURN

HD-9 HD-0
S-RAM TEST ETHERNET TEST

PINGING 90.0.0.1 [PASSED]

CURRENTLY TESTING LOCATION 207FFF0

512kb MEMORY TESTS GOOD

************* *************
*TEST PASSED* *TEST PASSED*
************* *************

PRESS ANY KEY TO RETURN PRESS ANY KEY TO RETURN

ASC/3 Programming Manual F-3

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
ASC/3 Hardware Diagnostic Screens
Appendix F

HD-A HD-B

RTC/OTHER TESTS DATA MODULE TEST

GETTING TIME [PASSED] FORMAT COMPLETE

GETTING TIME [PASSED]
CLOCK IS RUNNING [PASSED] CHECKING ERASURE [PASSED]
TESTING LINE FREQ. [PASSED]
TESTING CVM/FM SIGS. [PASSED] READING FLASH BLOCK [PASSED]

************* *************
*TEST PASSED* *TEST PASSED*
************* *************

PRESS ANY KEY TO RETURN PRESS ANY KEY TO RETURN

HD-C HD-D

AUTOMATICALLY PERFORMS TS1 SUITCASE TEST

ENTIRE SEQUENCE OF 14 Inputs
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS AND 0123........ ........ ........ ........
THEN DISPLAYS STATS 4567........ ........ ........ ........
OF THE RESULTS BEFORE 89AB........ ........ ........ ........
REPEATING THE FULL C ........ ........ ........ ........
SEQUENCE.
Outputs
0123........ ........ ........ ........
4567........ ........ ........ ........
89AB........ ........ ........ ........
CDE ........ ........ ........ ........
01234567 01234567 01234567 01234567

PRESS ANY KEY TO RETURN

F-4 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 G
Part Number and Software File Management
ASC/3, ASC/3-2070 and ASC/3-LX Part Numbers 7

ASC/3 Traffic software technology is common for both ASC/3 NEMA HW and 2070
HW. Because of SW similarity, part numbers listed below for Controller software running
on these 2 HW platforms are, therefore, similar.

Control Part # Description Note

ASC/3 NEMA Related Parts

100-1082-2xx ASC/3 SW, where xx is the ECO SW version number of

the form 2.xx.yy.
100-1082-5xx ASC/3 SW CD, where xx is the ECO SW version
number of the form 2.xx.yy.
100-1047-2xx ASC/3 OS SW version 1.xx.yy, 60 Hz version USA
100-1105-2xx ASC/3 OS SW version 2.xx.yy, 50 Hz version International
100-1095-501 ASC/3 Data Key for TSP
100-1095-502 ASC/3 Data Key for ASC/3 IM
100-1095-503 ASC/3 Data Key for ASC/3 TSP/IM

ASC/3-2070 Related Parts

117-1082-2xx ASC/3-2070 SW, where xx is the ECO SW version

number of the form 22.xx.yy.
117-1082-5xx ASC/3-2070 SW CD, where xx is the ECO SW version
number of the form 22.xx.yy.
117-1052-001 ASC/3-2070 Keyboard Overlay
117-1053-2xx 2002 OS Image for 2002 version of 2070 HW. Required
for ASC/3 2070 SW support on 2002 HW.
xx = The version number (to order the latest version, use xx in the part number)
yy = Possible maintenance number

ASC/3 Programming Manual G-1

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Part Number and Software File Management
Appendix G

Control Part # Description Note

117-1054-2xx 1999 OS Image for 2002 version of 2070 HW. Required

for ASC/3-2070 SW support on 2002 HW.
117-1096-501 ASC/3-2070 Token Key TSP

ASC/3-LX Related Parts

117-1052-001 ASC/3-2070 (also for ASC/3-LX) Keyboard Overlay

117-1096-501 ASC/3-2070 (also for ASC/3-LX) Token Key TSP
119-1046-2xx Software, U-Boot, Linux, LX/2070 Engine Board
119-1047-2xx Software, Linux Package, LX/2070 Engine Board
119-1048-2xx Software, LPC-1754 Micro Controller, LX/2070 Engine
Board
119-1049-2xx Software, LPC 1343 Micro Controller, 2070 Host Board
119-1051-2xx Software, ASC/3-LX/2070 Traffic Application where
xx is the ECO SW version number of the form
32.xx.yy

Documents and Utilities

100-0903-001 Programming Manual for ASC/3, ASC/3-2070 and

ASC/3-LX
100-0904-001 ASC/3 Maintenance Manual
100-0903-003 TSP Manual
100-0903-004 ASC/3 Configurator Manual
100-0903-005 Intersection Monitor Quick Start Guide — only for
ASC/3
100-0903-007 ASC/3 Program Reference Card
100-0903-008 ASC/3 IEEE 1570 User Guide
100-1104-001 ASC/3 Configurator
100-1081-001 ASC/3 Security File Manager
xx = The version number (to order the latest version, use xx in the part number)
yy = Possible maintenance number

G-2 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Part Number and Software File Management
Appendix G

Database Sets 7

ASC/3 and ASC/3-2070 Database Set 7

Both ASC/3 on NEMA HW and ASC/3-2070 on 2070 HW are designed in accordance

with ASC/3 Database requirements. The ASC/3 Database consists of a set of files. The
Database set is created by authorized personnel using various SW tools and can be
downloaded via the method and protocol associated with those SW tools. This document
goes over major aspects of the Database Set Creation, Modification and Management.
ASC/3 Database is a set of files that are user-configurable and is loaded to the controller
through various methods. Below are the listing and the descriptions of the Database files.

Filename on
Filename on PC Controller Description

For ASC/3: 1 ASC3.DB Copied to the controller as ASC3.DB,

Nxxxx.db becoming the current DB. This is the active
primary Database for the controller. It
For ASC/3-C1/C11 and TS2 Type 1
contains timing, configuration, and I/O
version of the rackmount: 1 mapping information.
Rxxxx.db
Nxxxx.DB Copied to the controller with the same
For ASC/3-2070 2A module: 1
Axxxx.db Rxxxx.DB filename. If file on the controller has this name,
it is treated as the default Database. If there are
Or
For ASC/3-2070 2B and 2N modules: 1 multiple default databases of the same type, the
Bxxxx.db Axxxx.DB highest number default database is selected.
AnyName.db can be used. Conversion Or
takes place during download. Bxxxx.DB

ASC3.DT ASC3.DT Secondary database that contains optional

feature or extended feature such as TSP, IM.
USERCFG.DB USERCFG.DB Security file that is used to determine who has
access or not. Not needed if no access control
is required.
ASC3.EXT ASC3.EXT Extended Logic Processor file that is used by
ASC/3 to manage groups of Logic Processor
Statements. Not needed if no Logic Processor
Statement is required above Statement 100.
1 xxxx
is a four-digit number from 3001 to 9999, formally assigned and managed by Cabinet Engineering to designate a
customer. 3000 is reserved for the default engineering database configuration.

ASC/3 Programming Manual G-3

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Part Number and Software File Management
Appendix G

ASC/3-LX Database Set 7

An 2070 running ASC/3-LX software on a Linux module runs on a single configuration

file. The database set is created by authorized personnel using various SW tools and can be
downloaded via the method and protocol associated with those SW tools. This document
goes over major aspects of the Database Set Creation, Modification and Management.
The database is a set of files that are user-configurable and is loaded to the controller
through various methods. Below are the listing and the descriptions of the database files.

Filename on
Filename on PC Controller Description

ASC3.CFG ASC3.CFG This is the active database for the controller. It contains
timing, configuration, I/O, access control and groups of
logic processor statements.
Note • In the ASC/3 and ASC/3-2070, this data is
stored separately in ASC3.DB, ASC3.DT,
USERCFG.DB and ASC3.EXT.

Lxxxx1.CFG Lxxxx.CFG Copied to the controller with the same filename. If the file
on the controller has this name, it is treated as the default
Database. If there are multiple default databases of the
same type, the highest number default database is
selected.
L3000.CFG is the default database for the 2070-1C CPU
module. However, it does not contain any I/O mapping
information. When the file is loaded in the controller:
1 The I/O mapping is set to the default I/O mapping of
the running FIO (for example, 2A).
2 The I/O mapping is saved in ASC3.CFG, which
configures it for this FIO.
3 When the FIO is changed, at power up, the controller
goes into flash and shows a message that asks if you
want to change the I/O mapping to the default I/O
mapping of the new FIO.
4 The changes are enabled on the next power up.

1
xxxx is a four-digit number from 3001 to 9999, formally assigned and managed by Cabinet Engineering to
designate a customer.

G-4 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Part Number and Software File Management
Appendix G

Features Unique to the ASC/3-LX Releases First Introduced in

Ver. 32.58.00
 Single Configuration file for all controller and cabinet types. This file replaces
ASC3.DB, ASC3.DT, ASC3.EXT and USERCFG.DB
• Default Econolite configuration file is L3000.CFG
• Active DB is ASC3.CFG
• Default DB is Lxxxx .CFG
 You can move the Configuration file from one controller type to another controller
type. The I/O mapping resets to adapt to the new controller.
 You can use the USB port to:
• Print a Log (MM-8-6-2)
• Print the Configuration (MM-8-3)
• Upgrade the software
• Upgrade the configuration
• Upload the configuration

Single USB Update for 2070-1C Application Software

 A script has been created that can update an ATC NEMA controller using one USB
drive. It is capable of updating at the same time all 4 of the previous individual USB
drive contents. The One Disk script processes the files from the 4 disk USB zip set.
There are 4 groups, one from each of the 4 original zip files:
• Disk 1: OSPackage-<version>.zip for the Engine Board OS
• Disk 2: microcontroller.zip for the various microcontrollers
• Disk 3: AGC OS
• Disk 4: asc3app and cobalt zip files

Creating and Restoring Default Database 7

Upon the acceptance of the programmed database, we advise you to set it as the default
database using the MM-8-1 Copy feature: Controller Data > Default Database.
Restoring to the Default Database (MM-8-1 Copy feature: DEFAULT DATABASE >
CONTROLLER DATA) will not operate if you do not create the Default Database.

ASC/3 Programming Manual G-5

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Part Number and Software File Management
Appendix G

Database Creation and Modification 7

There are several ways to upgrade ASC/3, ASC/3-2070 or ASC/3-LX software. The
easiest way to upgrade SW is to use the Single Click software Installation Utility that comes
with every software release package. Instruction for the Utility is also included.

IMPORTANT • Database upgrade is a destructive operation that may potentially change

the Input and Output mapping of the Controller. Incorrect Input and Output mapping
brings the intersection to flash. You must make sure that the upgraded Database has the
same or desirable mapping for that controller.

Note • You can upgrade the ASC/3-LX software through the USB port in the
2070-1C CPU module.

Supporting Software 7

There are other tools to create, manage, download (to the controller) and upload (from the
controller) the ASC/3 database.These tools are capable of Database Management:

Communication
Software Description Method

ASC/3 Configurator Standalone software that can create and modify ASC3.DB Via ASC/3 SW
and ASC3.DT Installers
ASC/3 SW Installer Standalone software that can download Application SW, Serial Z-modem or
Database, OS, and raw files to ASC/3 NEMA Controller Ethernet FTP
HW. It can upload a Database Set and logs. All database
files must be in a single folder with no more than 1 type per
file.
ASC/3-2070 SW Standalone software that can install Application SW, Serial Z-modem or
Installer Database, OS, and raw files to 2070 controller HW. It can Ethernet FTP
upload Database Set and, in the future, logs. All database
files must be in a single folder, with no more than 1 type per
file.
ASC/3-LX SW Standalone software that can install Application SW, Serial Z-modem or
Installer Database, OS, and raw files to 2070 controller HW. It can Ethernet FTP
upload Database Set and, in the future, logs. All database
files must be in a single folder, with no more than 1 type per
file.
ASC/3 File Security Create and Manage ASC/3 front panel security access. Via ASC/3 SW
Manager Utility Security file generated from this utility can be downloaded, Installers
via the SW Installer, to allow security to take effect.

G-6 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Part Number and Software File Management
Appendix G

Communication
Software Description Method

icons or Centracs Econolite Central SW NTCIP over Serial

or Ethernet
ACS Lite FHWA funded Adaptive Control Software NTCIP over Serial
or Ethernet
Centracs Local Edition Econolite standalone Centracs LE. The special version also NTCIP over Serial
(LE) provides the ability to import and export Logic Processor or Ethernet
Statements from one database to another database.
Aries Econolite Central SW over ECPIP Serial via ASC/2M
Aries Direct Connect Econolite standalone Centracs LE over NTCIP NTCIP over Serial
or Ethernet

ASC/3 Programming Manual G-7

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
For your notes:

G-8 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 H
Coordination Pattern
Selected by TS2 inputs
Pattern TS2 Plan - Offset Pattern TS2 Plan - Offset Pattern TS2 Plan - Offset
1 0-1 41 13-2 81 -
2 0-2 42 13-3 82 -
3 0-3 43 14-1 83 -
4 1-1 44 14-2 84 -
5 1-2 45 14-3 85 -
6 1-3 46 15-1 86 -
7 2-1 47 15-2 87 -
8 2-2 48 15-3 88 -
9 2-3 49 - 89 -
10 3-1 50 - 90 -
11 3-2 51 - 91 -
12 3-3 52 - 92 -
13 4-1 53 - 93 -
14 4-2 54 - 94 -
15 4-3 55 - 95 -
16 5-1 56 - 96 -
17 5-2 57 - 97 -
18 5-3 58 - 98 -
19 6-1 59 - 99 -
20 6-2 60 - 100 -
21 6-3 61 - 101 -
22 7-1 62 - 102 -
23 7-2 63 - 103 -
24 7-3 64 - 104 -
25 8-1 65 - 105 -
26 8-2 66 - 106 -
27 8-3 67 - 107 -
28 9-1 68 - 108 -
29 9-2 69 - 109 -
30 9-3 70 - 110 -
31 10-1 71 - 111 -
32 10-2 72 - 112 -
33 10-3 73 - 113 -
34 11-1 74 - 114 -
35 11-2 75 - 115 -
36 11-3 76 - 116 -
37 12-1 77 - 117 -
38 12-2 78 - 118 -
39 12-3 79 - 119 -
40 13-1 80 - 120 -

ASC/3 Programming Manual H-1

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
For your notes:

H- 2 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 I
ASC/3 Boot Menu Tree
To enter the Boot Menu, while powering up the controller
 Simultaneously press 1 and CLEAR.

MM ASC/3 BOOT MENU MM-4-5 SET CONSOLE (PORT 3A) BAUD RATE
MM-1 DOWNLOAD FILES MM-4-5-1 9600
MM-1-1 DOWNLOAD CONTROLLER IMAGE/SCREENS MM-4-5-2 19200
MM-1-1-1 DOWNLOAD USING FTP MM-4-5-3 38400
MM-1-1-2 DOWNLOAD USING ZMODEM MM-4-5-4 57600
MM-1-2 DOWNLOAD SCREEN FILES ONLY MM-4-5-5 115200
MM-1-2-1 DOWNLOAD USING FTP MM-5 SELECT APP
MM-1-2-2 DOWNLOAD USING ZMODEM MM-5-1 asc3App
MM-1-3 DOWNLOAD OPERATING SYSTEM IMAGE MM-6 SET WORKING DIR
MM-1-3-1 DOWNLOAD USING FTP MM-6-1 set1
MM-1-3-2 DOWNLOAD USING ZMODEM MM-6-2 set2
MM-1-4 DOWNLOAD AUX. APPLICATION MM-7 RUN H/W DIAGS
MM-1-4-1 DOWNLOAD USING FTP MM-7-1 DISPLAY
MM-1-4-2 DOWNLOAD USING ZMODEM MM-7-2 KEYPAD
MM-2 UPLOAD OPTIONS MM-7-3 PORT1
MM-2-1 UPLOAD CONTROLLER FILES MM-7-4 PORT2
MM-2-2 UPLOAD DATABASE MM-7-5 PORT3A
This is also in the main controller. MM-7-6 PORT3B
MM-7-7 TS2 “ABCD” I/O
MM-3 FILE SYSTEM
MM-7-8 TELEMETRY I/O
MM-3-1 FORMAT FILE SYSTEM
MM-7-9 S-RAM
MM-3-2 REPAIR FILE SYSTEM
MM-7-0 ETHERNET
MM-3-3 SHOW FILE LIST
MM-7-A RTC/OTHER
MM-4 SETUP NETWORK
MM-7-B DATA MODULE
MM-4-1 SET LOCAL IP ADDRESS
MM-7-C AUTO-LOOP
MM-4-2 SET LOCAL IP MASK
MM-8 CLOCK/CALENDAR
MM-4-3 SET FTP SERVER/HOST ADDRESS
MM-9 SHOW BOOT CONFIG
MM-4-4 VIEW ETHERNET MAC ADDRESS
MM-0 RESTART

ASC/3 Programming Manual I-1

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
For your notes:

I-2 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 J
Interface Connector Pin Lists
Default Mapping for ASC/3 and ASC/3-2070 10

Connector A Connector B Connector C

55-Pin (Plug) Type #22-55P 55-Pin (Socket) Type #22-55S 61-Pin (Socket) Type #24-61S

PIN FUNCTION I/O PIN FUNCTION I/O PIN FUNCTION I/O

A Fault Monitor [O] A φ1 Phase Next [O] A Status Bit A (Ring 2) [O]
B +24 VDC External [O] B Preempt 2 Detector [I] B Status Bit B (Ring 2) [O]
C Voltage Monitor [O] C φ2 Phase Next [O] C φ8 Dont Walk [O]
D φ1 Red [O] D φ3 Green [O] D φ8 Red [O]
E φ1 Dont Walk [O] E φ3 Yellow [O] E φ7 Yellow [O]
F φ2 Red [O] F φ3 Red [O] F φ7 Red [O]
G φ2 Dont Walk [O] G φ4 Red [O] G φ6 Red [O]
H φ2 Ped Clear [O] H φ4 Ped Clear [O] H φ5 Red [O]
J φ2 Walk [O] J φ4 Dont Walk [O] J φ5 Yellow [O]
K Vehicle Detector 2 [I] K φ4 Check [O] K φ5 Ped Clear [O]
L Ped Detector 2 [I] L Vehicle Detector 4 [I] L φ5 Dont Walk [O]
M φ2 Hold [I] M Ped Detector 4 [I] M φ5 Phase Next [O]
N Stop Time (Ring 1) [I] N Vehicle Detector 3 [I] N φ5 Phase On [O]
P Inhibit MaxTerm(Ring1) [I] P Ped Detector 3 [I] P Vehicle Detector 5 [I]
R External Start [I] R φ3 Phase Omit [I] R Ped Detector 5 [I]
S Interval Advance [I] S φ2 Phase Omit [I] S Vehicle Detector 6 [I]
T Indicator Lamp Control [I] T φ5 Ped Omit [I] T Ped Detector 6 [I]
U AC-Common [I] U φ1 Phase Omit [I] U Ped Detector 7 [I]
V Chassis Ground [I] V Ped Recycle(Ring 2) [I] V Vehicle Detector 7 [I]
W Logic Ground [O] W Preempt 4 Detector [I] W Ped Detector 8 [I]
X Flashing Logic Out [O] X Preempt 5 Detector [I] X φ8 Hold Off [I]
Y Status Bit C (Ring1) [O] Y φ3 Walk [O] Y Force-Off (Ring 2) [I]
Z φ1 Yellow [O] Z φ3 Ped Clear [O] Z Stop Time (Ring 2) [I]
a φ1 Ped Clear [O] a φ3 Dont Walk [O] a Inhibit Max Term (Ring 2)[I]
b φ2 Yellow [O] b φ4 Green [O] b Test C [I]
c φ2 Green [O] c φ4 Yellow [O] c Status Bit C (Ring 2) [O]
d φ2 Check [O] d φ4 Walk [O] d φ8 Walk [O]
e φ2 Phase On [O] e φ4 Phase On [O] e φ8 Yellow [O]
f Vehicle Detector 1 [I] f φ4 Phase Next [O] f φ7 Green [O]
g Ped Detector 1 [I] g φ4 Phase Omit [I] g φ6 Green [O]
h φ1 Hold [I] h φ4 Hold [I] h φ6 Yellow [O]
i Force-Off (Ring 1) [I] i φ3 Hold [I] i φ5 Green [O]
j Ext Min Recall [I] j φ3 Ped Omit [I] j φ5 Walk [O]
k Manual Control Enable [I] k φ6 Ped Omit [I] k φ5 Check [O]
m Call To Non Actuate I [I] m φ7 Ped Omit [I] m φ5 Hold [I]
n Test A [I] n φ8 Ped Omit [I] n φ5 Phase Omit [I]
p AC+ (Control) [I] p Overlap A Yellow [O] p φ6 Hold [I]

ASC/3 Programming Manual J-1

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Interface Connector Pin Lists
Appendix J

Connector A Connector B Connector C

55-Pin (Plug) Type #22-55P 55-Pin (Socket) Type #22-55S 61-Pin (Socket) Type #24-61S

PIN FUNCTION I/O PIN FUNCTION I/O PIN FUNCTION I/O

q I/O Mode Bit A [I] q Overlap A Red [O] q φ6 Phase Omit [I]
r Status Bit B (Ring 1) [O] r φ3 Check [O] r φ7 Phase Omit [I]
s φ1 Green [O] s φ3 Phase On [O] s φ8 Phase Omit [I]
t φ1 Walk [O] t φ3 Phase Next [O] t Vehicle Detector 8 [I]
u φ1 Check [O] u Overlap D Red [O] u Red Rest Mode (Ring 2) [I]
v φ2 Ped Omit [I] v Preempt 6 Detector [I] v Omit Red Clear (Ring 2) [I]
w Omit AllRed Clr(Ring1) [I] w Overlap D Green [O] w φ8 Ped Clear [O]
x Red Rest (Ring 1) [I] x φ4 Ped Omit [I] x φ8 Green [O]
y I/O Mode Bit B [I] y Free (No Coord) [I] y φ7 Dont Walk [O]
z Call To Non Act II [I] z MaxII Select(Ring 2)[I] z φ6 Dont Walk [O]
AA Test B [I] AA Overlap A Green [O] AA φ6 Ped Clear [O]
BB Walk Rest Modifier [I] BB Overlap B Yellow [O] BB φ6 Check [O]
CC Status Bit A (Ring 1) [O] CC Overlap B Red [O] CC φ6 Phase On [O]
DD φ1 Phase On [O] DD Overlap C Red [O] DD φ6 Phase Next [O]
EE φ1 Ped Omit [I] EE Overlap D Yellow [O] EE φ7 Hold [I]
FF Ped Recycle (Ring 1) [I] FF Overlap C Green [O] FF φ8 Check [O]
GG Max II Select(Ring 1) [I] GG Overlap B Green [O] GG φ8 Phase On [O]
HH I/O Mode Bit C [I] HH Overlap C Yellow [O] HH φ8 Phase Next [O]
JJ φ7 Walk [O]
KK φ7 Ped Clear [O]
LL φ6 Walk [O]
MM φ7 Check [O]
NN φ7 Phase On [O]
PP φ7 Phase Next [O]

Default Mapping for ASC/3-LX 10

Note • The ASC/3-LX database is used in a 2070 controller with a 2070-1C CPU Module.

This default mapping is configured when an ASC/3-LX database (Ver. 32.59.00 and later)
is loaded as a new database or if an existing database is deleted and then the ASC/3-LX
database is loaded as a new database. Otherwise, the default mapping is as given in the
previous table. The pins that are mapped differently—some pins mapped to channels (load
switches) instead of phases—compared to the mapping in the previous table are in bold
type. For a TS1 type cabinet, this gives you the ability use MM-1-3 to change the load
switch outputs.

Note • This ASC/3-LX mapping does not operate in a 332 type cabinet.

In this table, LS = Load Switch

J-2 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Interface Connector Pin Lists
Appendix J

Connector A Connector B Connector C

55-Pin (Plug) Type #22-55P 55-Pin (Socket) Type #22-55S 61-Pin (Socket) Type #24-61S

PIN FUNCTION I/O PIN FUNCTION I/O PIN FUNCTION I/O

A Fault Monitor [O] A φ1 Phase Next [O] A Status Bit A (Ring 2) [O]
B +24 VDC External [O] B Preempt 2 Detector [I] B Status Bit B (Ring 2) [O]
C Voltage Monitor [O] C φ2 Phase Next [O] C LS 12 Red Dont Walk [O]
D LS 1 Red Dont Walk [O] D LS 3 Green Walk [O] D LS 8 Red Dont Walk [O]
E φ1 Dont Walk [O] E LS 3 Yell Ped Clear [O] E LS 7 Yellow Ped Clear [O]
F LS 2 Red Dont Walk [O] F LS 3 Red Dont Walk [O] F LS 7 Red Dont Walk [O]
G LS 9 Red Dont Walk [O] G LS 4 Red Dont Walk [O] G LS 6 Red Dont Walk [O]
H LS 9 Yellow Ped Clear [O] H LS 10 Yell Ped Clear[O] H LS 5 Red Dont Walk [O]
J LS 9 Green Walk [O] J LS 10 Red Dont Walk [O] J LS 5 Yellow Ped Clear [O]
K Vehicle Detector 2 [I] K φ4 Check [O] K φ5 Ped Clear [O]
L Ped Detector 2 [I] L Vehicle Detector 4 [I] L φ5 Dont Walk [O]
M φ2 Hold [I] M Ped Detector 4 [I] M φ5 Phase Next [O]
N Stop Time (Ring 1) [I] N Vehicle Detector 3 [I] N φ5 Phase On [O]
P Inhibit MaxTerm(Ring1) [I] P Ped Detector 3 [I] P Vehicle Detector 5 [I]
R External Start [I] R φ3 Phase Omit [I] R Ped Detector 5 [I]
S Interval Advance [I] S φ2 Phase Omit [I] S Vehicle Detector 6 [I]
T Indicator Lamp Control [I] T φ5 Ped Omit [I] T Ped Detector 6 [I]
U AC-Common [I] U φ1 Phase Omit [I] U Ped Detector 7 [I]
V Chassis Ground [I] V Ped Recycle(Ring 2) [I] V Vehicle Detector 7 [I]
W Logic Ground [O] W Preempt 4 Detector [I] W Ped Detector 8 [I]
X Flashing Logic Out [O] X Preempt 5 Detector [I] X φ8 Hold Off [I]
Y Status Bit C (Ring1) [O] Y φ3 Walk [O] Y Force-Off (Ring 2) [I]
Z LS 1 Yellow Ped Clear [O] Z φ3 Ped Clear [O] Z Stop Time (Ring 2) [I]
a φ1 Ped Clear [O] a φ3 Dont Walk [O] a Inhibit Max Term (Ring 2)[I]
b LS 2 Yellow Ped Clear [O] b LS 4 Green Walk [O] b Test C [I]
c LS 9 Green Walk [O] c LS 4 Yell Ped Clear [O] c Status Bit C (Ring 2) [O]
d φ2 Check [O] d LS 10 Green Walk [O] d LS 12 Green Walk [O]
e φ2 Phase On [O] e φ4 Phase On [O] e LS 8 Yellow Ped Clear [O]
f Vehicle Detector 1 [I] f φ4 Phase Next [O] f LS 7 Green Walk [O]
g Ped Detector 1 [I] g φ4 Phase Omit [I] g LS 6 Green Walk [O]
h φ1 Hold [I] h φ4 Hold [I] h LS 6 Yellow Ped Clear [O]
i Force-Off (Ring 1) [I] i φ3 Hold [I] i LS 5 Green Walk [O]
j Ext Min Recall [I] j φ3 Ped Omit [I] j φ5 Walk [O]
k Manual Control Enable [I] k φ6 Ped Omit [I] k φ5 Check [O]
m Call To Non Actuate I [I] m φ7 Ped Omit [I] m φ5 Hold [I]
n Test A [I] n φ8 Ped Omit [I] n φ5 Phase Omit [I]
p AC+ (Control) [I] p LS 13 Yell Ped Clear[O] p φ6 Hold [I]
q I/O Mode Bit A [I] q LS 13 Red Dont Walk [O] q φ6 Phase Omit [I]
r Status Bit B (Ring 1) [O] r φ3 Check [O] r φ7 Phase Omit [I]
s LS 1 Green Walk [O] s φ3 Phase On [O] s φ8 Phase Omit [I]

ASC/3 Programming Manual J-3

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Interface Connector Pin Lists
Appendix J

Connector A Connector B Connector C

55-Pin (Plug) Type #22-55P 55-Pin (Socket) Type #22-55S 61-Pin (Socket) Type #24-61S

PIN FUNCTION I/O PIN FUNCTION I/O PIN FUNCTION I/O

t φ1 Walk [O] t φ3 Phase Next [O] t Vehicle Detector 8 [I]
u φ1 Check [O] u LS 16 Red Dont Walk [O] u Red Rest Mode (Ring 2) [I]
v φ2 Ped Omit [I] v Preempt 6 Detector [I] v Omit Red Clear (Ring 2) [I]
w Omit AllRed Clr(Ring1) [I] w LS 16 Green Walk [O] w LS 12 Yellow Ped Clear [O]
x Red Rest (Ring 1) [I] x φ4 Ped Omit [I] x LS 8 Green Walk [O]
y I/O Mode Bit B [I] y Free (No Coord) [I] y φ7 Dont Walk [O]
z Call To Non Act II [I] z MaxII Select(Ring 2)[I] z LS 11 Red Dont Walk [O]
AA Test B [I] AA LS 13 Green Walk [O] AA LS 11 Yellow Ped Clear [O]
BB Walk Rest Modifier [I] BB LS 14 Yel Ped Clear [O] BB φ6 Check [O]
CC Status Bit A (Ring 1) [O] CC LS 14 Red Dont Walk [O] CC φ6 Phase On [O]
DD φ1 Phase On [O] DD LS 15 Red Dont Walk [O] DD φ6 Phase Next [O]
EE φ1 Ped Omit [I] EE LS 16 Yel Ped Clear [O] EE φ7 Hold [I]
FF Ped Recycle (Ring 1) [I] FF LS 15 Green Walk [O] FF φ8 Check [O]
GG Max II Select(Ring 1) [I] GG LS 14 Green Walk [O] GG φ8 Phase On [O]
HH I/O Mode Bit C [I] HH LS 15 Yel Ped Clear [O] HH φ8 Phase Next [O]
JJ φ7 Walk [O]
KK φ7 Ped Clear [O]
LL LS 11 Green Walk [O]
MM φ7 Check [O]
NN φ7 Phase On [O]
PP φ7 Phase Next [O]

I/O Mode Bits (3 per unit) 10

Mode Bit States State

# A B C Names

0 OFF OFF OFF TS 1 Compatible

1 ON OFF OFF Hardwire Interconnect

2 OFF ON OFF System Interface

3 ON ON OFF Reserved

4 OFF OFF ON Reserved

5 ON OFF ON Reserved

6 OFF ON ON Manufacturer Specific

7 ON ON ON Manufacturer Specific

Voltage Levels: OFF = +24 ON = 0V

J-4 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Interface Connector Pin Lists
Appendix J

I/O Functions

I/O Pin Mode 0 Mode 1 Mode 2

Inputs

A-h Phase 1 Hold Preempt 1 Preempt 1

A-M Phase 2 Hold Preempt 3 Preempt 3
B-i Phase 3 Hold Vehicle Detector 9 Vehicle Detector 9
B-h Phase 4 Hold Vehicle Detector 10 Vehicle Detector 10
C-m Phase 5 Hold Vehicle Detector 13 Vehicle Detector 13
C-p Phase 6 Hold Vehicle Detector 14 Vehicle Detector 14
C-EE Phase 7 Hold Vehicle Detector 15 Vehicle Detector 15
C-X Phase 8 Hold Vehicle Detector 16 Vehicle Detector 16
B-U Phase 1 Phase Omit Vehicle Detector 11 Vehicle Detector 11
B-S Phase 2 Phase Omit Vehicle Detector 12 Vehicle Detector 12
B-R Phase 3 Phase Omit Timing Plan C Vehicle Detector 17
B-g Phase 4 Phase Omit Timing Plan D Vehicle Detector 18
C-n Phase 5 Phase Omit Alternate Sequence A Vehicle Detector 19
C-q Phase 6 Phase Omit Alternate Sequence B Vehicle Detector 20
C-r Phase 7 Phase Omit Alternate Sequence C Alarm 1
C-s Phase 8 Phase Omit Alternate Sequence D Alarm 2
A-EE Phase 1 Ped Omit Dimming Enable Dimming Enable
A-v Phase 2 Ped Omit Automatic Flash Local Flash Status
B-j Phase 3 Ped Omit Timing Plan A Address Bit 0
B-x Phase 4 Ped Omit Timing Plan B Address Bit 1
B-T Phase 5 Ped Omit Offset 1 Address Bit 2
B-k Phase 6 Ped Omit Offset 2 Address Bit 3
B-m Phase 7 Ped Omit Offset 3 Address Bit 4
B-n Phase 8 Ped Omit TBC On Line MMU Flash Status

ASC/3 Programming Manual J-5

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Interface Connector Pin Lists
Appendix J

I/O Functions

I/O Pin Mode 0 Mode 1 Mode 2

Outputs

A-DD Phase 1 Phase On Preempt 1 Status Preempt 1 Status

A-e Phase 2 Phase On Preempt 3 Status Preempt 3 Status
B-s Phase 3 Phase On TBC Auxiliary 1 TBC Auxiliary 1
B-e Phase 4 Phase On TBC Auxiliary 2 TBC Auxiliary 2
C-N Phase 5 Phase On Timing Plan A Timing Plan A
C-CC Phase 6 Phase On Timing Plan B Timing Plan B
C-NN Phase 7 Phase On Offset 1 Offset 1
C-GG Phase 8 Phase On Offset 2 Offset 2
B-A Phase 1 Phase Next Preempt 2 Status Preempt 2 Status
B-C Phase 2 Phase Next Preempt 4 Status Preempt 4 Status
B-t Phase 3 Phase Next Preempt 5 Status Preempt 5 Status
B-f Phase 4 Phase Next Preempt 6 Status Preempt 6 Status
C-M Phase 5 Phase Next Offset 3 Offset 3
C-DD Phase 6 Phase Next Timing Plan C Timing Plan C
C-PP Phase 7 Phase Next Timing Plan D Timing Plan D
C-HH Phase 8 Phase Next Reserved Reserved
A-u Phase 1 Check Free/Coord Status Free/Coord Status
A-d Phase 2 Check Automatic Flash Automatic Flash
B-r Phase 3 Check TBC Auxiliary 3 TBC Auxiliary 3
B-K Phase 4 Check Reserved Reserved
C-k Phase 5 Check Reserved System Special Function 1
C-BB Phase 6 Check Reserved System Special Function 2
C-MM Phase 7 Check Reserved System Special Function 3
C-FF Phase 8 Check Reserved System Special Function 4

J-6 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Interface Connector Pin Lists
Appendix J

Connector D 10

PIN Function Secondary Function I/O Notes

7 KEY POSITION
60 AUTOMATIC FLASH [I]
58 ABSOLUTE STOP TIME [I]
14 CONTROLLER TIME RESET [I]
26 FORCE COORDINATOR FREE [I]
17 DETECTOR #09 [I]
47 DETECTOR #10 [I]
31 DETECTOR #11 [I]
18 DETECTOR #12 [I]
30 DETECTOR #13 [I]
39 DETECTOR #14 [I]
40 DETECTOR #15 [I]
13 DETECTOR #16 [I]
38 FORCE DUAL COORDINATION [I]
25 EXT SYS CMD CYCLE BIT 1 IN [I]
35 EXT SYS CMD CYCLE BIT 2 IN [I]
6 EXT SYS CMD CYCLE BIT 3 IN [I]
12 EXT SYS CMD OFFSET BIT 1 IN EXT ADDRESS BIT 0 [I]
10 EXT SYS CMD OFFSET BIT 2 IN EXT ADDRESS BIT 1 [I]
36 EXT SYS CMD OFFSET BIT 3 IN EXT ADDRESS BIT 2 [I]
16 EXT SYS CMD SPLIT BIT 1 IN EXT ADDRESS BIT 3 [I]
9 EXT SYS CMD SPLIT BIT 2 IN EXT ADDRESS BIT 4 [I]
4 EXT SYS CMD SYNC INPUT [I]
57 PREEMPTOR CALL #1 RR1 [I]
49 PREEMPTOR CALL #2 RR2 [I]
50 PREEMPTOR CALL #3 EVP A /BUS PREEMPTOR #1 [I]
55 PREEMPTOR CALL #4 EVP B /BUS PREEMPTOR #2 [I]
56 PREEMPTOR CALL #5 EVP C /BUS PREEMPTOR #3 [I]
61 PREEMPTOR CALL #6 EVP D /BUS PREEMPTOR #4 [I]
3 SPLIT DEMAND 1 INPUT [I]
20 TEST INPUT C [I]
37 TEST INPUT D [I]
19 TEST INPUT E [I]
27 COORDINATOR STATUS OUT [O]

ASC/3 Programming Manual J-7

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Interface Connector Pin Lists
Appendix J

PIN Function Secondary Function I/O Notes

5 CROSS STREET SYNC OUT [O]
43 INT SYS STATUS CYCLE BIT 1 OUT [O]
44 INT SYS STATUS CYCLE BIT 2 OUT [O]
29 INT SYS STATUS CYCLE BIT 3 OUT [O]
33 INT SYS STATUS OFFSET BIT 1 OUT [O]
42 INT SYS STATUS OFFSET BIT 2 OUT [O]
2 INT SYS STATUS OFFSET BIT 3 OUT [O]
21 INT SYS STATUS SPLIT BIT 1 OUT [O]
46 INT SYS STATUS SPLIT BIT 2 OUT [O]
53 INT SYS STATUS SYNC OUT [O]
59 PMT/CTR TO CABINET INTERLOCK [O]
23 PREEMPTOR #1 ACTIVE [O] Priority preemptors 1 & 2 respond to any NEMA
defined input applied to Preemptor Call input 1 & 2,
32 PREEMPTOR #2 ACTIVE [O] respectively.
22 PREEMPTOR #3 EVP A ACTIVE [O] Priority preemptors 3-6 respond to any NEMA
defined input applied for at least 0.8 seconds to
34 PREEMPTOR #4 EVP B ACTIVE [O] Preemptor Call inputs 3-6, respectively. Bus
Preemptors 1-4 respond to a pulsing (1pps at 50%
1 PREEMPTOR #5 EVP C ACTIVE [O] duty cycle) NEMA defined input applied to Preemptor
48 PREEMPTOR #6 EVP D ACTIVE [O] Call input 3-6, respectively.

15 PREEMPTOR FLASH CONTROL (1K PULL UP) [O]

41 SPARE OUTPUT 4 [O]
45 SPARE OUTPUT 5 [O]
51 SPARE OUTPUT 6 [O]
52 SPARE OUTPUT 7 [O]
54 SPARE OUTPUT 8 [O]
28 TOD SPECIAL FUNCTION 1 [O]
8 TOD SPECIAL FUNCTION 2 [O]
24 TOD SPECIAL FUNCTION 3/ SPARE OUTPUT 1 [O]
11 TOD SPECIAL FUNCTION 4/ SPARE OUTPUT 2 [O]

J-8 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Interface Connector Pin Lists
Appendix J

Port 3B 25-pin Telemetry Connector 10

PIN Function I/O FSK Serial

1 SYSTEM DETECTOR C2 [I]

2 SYSTEM DETECTOR A2 [I]

3 SYSTEM DETECTOR A1 [I]

4 SYSTEM DETECTOR C1 [I]

5 SYSTEM DETECTOR B1 [I]

6 TLM SPARE 2 [I]

7 SYSTEM DETECTOR D1 [I]

8 SYSTEM DETECTOR D2 [I]

9 TLM SPECIAL FUNCTION 1 [O]

10 TLM SPECIAL FUNCTION 3 [O]

11 Key Position -

12 TRANSMIT 1 [O]

13 TRANSMIT 2 [O]

14 TLM SPARE 1 [I]

15 EXTERNAL ADDRESS ENABLE [I]

16 DOOR OPEN [I]

17 ALARM 1 [I]

18 LOCAL FLASH [I]

19 SYSTEM DETECTOR B2 [I]

20 CONFLICT FLASH [I]

21 ALARM 2 [I]

22 TLM SPECIAL FUNCTION 2 [O]

23 TLM SPECIAL FUNCTION 4 [O]

24 RECEIVE 1 [O]

25 RECEIVE 2 [O]

ASC/3 Programming Manual J-9

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Interface Connector Pin Lists
Appendix J

CU Port 1 SDLC 10

PIN CU Function I/O Notes Other Port 1

1 Tx Data + [O] Rx Data +

2 Logic Ground [-]

3 Tx Clock + [O] Rx Clock +

4 Logic Ground [-]

5 Rx Data + [I] Tx Data +

6 Logic Ground [-]

7 Rx Clock + [I] Tx Clock +

8 Logic Ground [-]

9 Tx Data - [O] Rx Data -

10 Port 1 Disable [I] (0VDC=disable)

11 Tx Clock - [O] Rx Clock -

12 Chassis Ground [-] Chassis Ground

13 Rx Data - [I] Tx Data -

14 Reserved

15 Rx Clock - [I] Tx Clock -

NOTE:
TX pins at the BIU are RX pins at the controller.
RX pins at the BIU are TX pins at the controller.

J-10 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Interface Connector Pin Lists
Appendix J

Type 1 Power 10

PIN Function I/O

A AC Neutral [I]

B Not Used

C AC Line [I]

D Not Used

E Not Used

F Fault Monitor [O]

G Logic Ground [O]

H Chassis Ground [I]

I Not Used

J Not Used

Port 2/C50S Terminal 10

PIN Function I/O

1 GND Chassis Ground [-]

2 TXD Transmit Data [O]

3 RXD Receive Data [I]

4 RTS Request To Send [O]

5 CTS Clear To Send [I]

6 Not Used

7 GND Logic Ground [-]

8 DCD Data Carrier Det [I]

9-19 Not Used

20 DTR Data Termnl Ready [O]

21-25 Not Used

ASC/3 Programming Manual J-11

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Interface Connector Pin Lists
Appendix J

Port 3A EIA-232 Telemetry 10

PIN Function I/O

1 CTS Clear To Send [I]

2 RXD Receive Data [I]

3 TXD Transmit Data [O]

4 DTR Data Termnl Ready [O]

5 GND Logic Ground [-]

6 DSR Data Set Ready [O]

7 RTS Request To Send [O]

8 Not Used

9 Not Used

Port 3B 9-pin FSK Telemetry Connector 10

PIN Function I/O

1 TXD+ Transmit 2 [O]

2 TXD- Transmit 2 [O]

3 Reserved

4 RXD+ Receive 1 [I]

5 RXD- Receive 2 [I]

6 Chassis Ground [-]

7 Reserved

8 Reserved

9 Chassis Ground [-]

Equipment 170 Controller C1 Default Assignment Per Safetran Cabinet Standard

Connectivity Controller Type ASC/3-RM or 2070 2A - C1 Connector

J-12 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Interface Connector Pin Lists
Appendix J

Pin # - Safetran 332 Safetran 330 Safetran 336 Safetran 303 Safetran 337
Input TBD TBD TBD TBD
Pin 39 VEHICLE DET 02
Pin 40 VEHICLE DET 18
Pin 41 VEHICLE DET 06
Pin 42 VEHICLE DET 22
Pin 43 VEHICLE DET 10
Pin 44 VEHICLE DET 26
Pin 45 VEHICLE DET 14
Pin 46 VEHICLE DET 30
Pin 47 VEHICLE DET 04
Pin 48 VEHICLE DET 20
Pin 49 VEHICLE DET 08
Pin 50 VEHICLE DET 24
Pin 51 PREEMPT CALL 1
Pin 52 PREEMPT CALL 2
Pin 53 MAN CONT ENA
Pin 54 TEST A
Pin 55 VEHICLE DET 17
Pin 56 VEHICLE DET 01
Pin 57 VEHICLE DET 21
Pin 58 VEHICLE DET 05
Pin 59 VEHICLE DET 25
Pin 60 VEHICLE DET 09
Pin 61 VEHICLE DET 29
Pin 62 VEHICLE DET 13
Pin 63 VEHICLE DET 03
Pin 64 VEHICLE DET 19
Pin 65 VEHICLE DET 07
Pin 66 VEHICLE DET 23
Pin 67 PED DET 02
Pin 68 PED DET 06
Pin 69 PED DET 04
Pin 70 PED DET 08
Pin 71 PREEMPT CALL 3
Pin 72 PREEMPT CALL 4
Pin 73 PREEMPT CALL 5
Pin 74 PREEMPT CALL 6
Pin 75 SPLIT DEMAND 1
Pin 76 VEHICLE DET 11
Pin 77 VEHICLE DET 27
Pin 78 VEHICLE DET 15
Pin 79 VEHICLE DET 31
Pin 80 INT ADV
Pin 81 LOCAL FLASH
Pin 82 STOP TIME

ASC/3 Programming Manual J-13

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
For your notes:

Pin # - Safetran 332 Safetran 330 Safetran 336 Safetran 303 Safetran 337
Output TBD TBD TBD TBD
Pin 2 PH 4 DON'T WLK
Pin 3 PH 4 WALK
Pin 4 PH 4 RED
Pin 5 PH 4 YELLOW
Pin 6 PH 4 GREEN
Pin 7 PH 3 RED
Pin 8 PH 3 YELLOW
Pin 9 PH 3 GREEN
Pin 10 PH 2 DON'T WLK
Pin 11 PH 2 WALK
Pin 12 PH 2 RED
Pin 13 PH 2 YELLOW
Pin 15 PH 2 GREEN
Pin 16 PH 1 RED
Pin 17 PH 1 YELLOW
Pin 18 PH 1 GREEN
Pin 19 PH 8 DON'T WLK
Pin 20 PH 8 WALK
Pin 21 PH 8 RED
Pin 22 PH 8 YELLOW
Pin 23 PH 8 GREEN
Pin 24 PH 7 RED
Pin 25 PH 7 YELLOW
Pin 26 PH 7 GREEN
Pin 27 PH 6 DON'T WLK
Pin 28 PH 6 WALK
Pin 29 PH 6 RED
Pin 30 PH 6 YELLOW
Pin 31 PH 6 GREEN
Pin 32 PH 5 RED
Pin 33 PH 5 YELLOW
Pin 34 PH 5 GREEN
Pin 35 OLA GREEN
Pin 36 OLB GREEN
Pin 37 OLA YELLOW
Pin 38 OVERLAP B YELLOW
Pin 83 TOD SPEC FUNC 1
Pin 84 TOD SPEC FUNC 3
Pin 85 OLD RED
Pin 86 OLD YELLOW
Pin 87 OLD GREEN
Pin 88 OLC RED
Pin 89 OLC YELLOW
Pin 90 OLC GREEN

J-14 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Interface Connector Pin Lists
Appendix J

Pin # - Safetran 332 Safetran 330 Safetran 336 Safetran 303 Safetran 337
Output TBD TBD TBD TBD
Pin 91 COORD FREE STAT
Pin 93 CRD SYNC OUT
Pin 94 OLB RED
Pin 95 OLB YELLOW
Pin 96 OLB GREEN
Pin 97 OLA RED
Pin 98 OLA YELLOW
Pin 99 OLA GREEN
Pin 100 TOD SPEC FUNC 2
Pin 101 AUTOMATIC FLASH
Pin 102 TOD SPEC FUNC 4
Pin 103 WATCHDOG

ASC/3 Programming Manual J-15

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
For your notes:

J-16 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 K
BIU Connector Pin Lists
Pin Function TF #1 Function TF #2 Function TF #3 Function TF #4 Function
1a +24 VDC IN

1b +24 VDC IN

2a Output 1 Load Switch 1 Red Driver Load Switch 9 Red Driver Timing Plan A Output Phase 1 On

2b Output 2 Load Switch 1 Yellow Driver Load Switch 9 Yellow Driver Timing Plan B Output Phase 2 On

3a Output 3 Load Switch 1 Green Driver Load Switch 9 Green Driver Timing Plan C Output Phase 3 On

3b Output 4 Load Switch 2 Red Driver Load Switch 10 Red Driver Timing Plan D Output Phase 4 On

4a Output 5 Load Switch 2 Yellow Driver Load Switch 10 Yellow Driver Offset 1 Output Phase 5 On

4b Output 6 Load Switch 2 Green Driver Load Switch 10 Green Driver Offset 2 Output Phase 6 On

5a Output 7 Load Switch 3 Red Driver Load Switch 11 Red Driver Offset 3 Output Phase 7 On

5b Output 8 Load Switch 3 Yellow Driver Load Switch 11 Yellow Driver Automatic Flash Phase 8 On

6a Output 9 Load Switch 3 Green Driver Load Switch 11 Green Driver System Special Func 1 Phase 1 Next

6b Output 10 Load Switch 4 Red Driver Load Switch 12 Red Driver System Special Func 2 Phase 2 Next

7a Output 11 Load Switch 4 Yellow Driver Load Switch 12 Yellow Driver System Special Func 3 Phase 3 Next

7b Output 12 Load Switch 4 Green Driver Load Switch 12 Green Driver System Special Func 4 Phase 4 Next

8a Output 13 Load Switch 5 Red Driver Load Switch 13 Red Driver Reserved Phase 5 Next

8b Output 14 Load Switch 5 Yellow Driver Load Switch 13 Yellow Driver Reserved Phase 6 Next

9a Output 15 Load Switch 5 Green Driver Load Switch 13 Green Driver Reserved Phase 7 Next

9b Input/Output 1 Load Switch 6 Red Driver [O] Load Switch 14 Red Driver[O] Ring 1 Status Bit A[O] Phase 8 Next[O]

10a Input/Output 2 Load Switch 6 Yellow Driver[O] Load Switch 14 Yellow Driver [O] Ring 1 Status Bit B[O] Phase 1 Check[O]

10b Input/Output 3 Load Switch 6 Green Driver [O] Load Switch 14 Green Driver [O] Ring 1 Status Bit C[O] Phase 2 Check[O]

11a Input/Output 4 Load Switch 7 Red Driver [O] Load Switch 15 Red Driver [O] Ring 2 Status Bit A[O] Phase 3 Check[O]

11b Input/Output 5 Load Switch 7 Yellow Driver [O] Load Switch 15 Yellow Driver [O] Ring 2 Status Bit B[O] Phase 4 Check[O]

12a Input/Output 6 Load Switch 7 Green Driver [O] Load Switch 15 Green Driver[O] Ring 2 Status Bit C[O] Phase 5 Check[O]

12b Input/Output 7 Load Switch 8 Red Driver [O] Load Switch 16 Red Driver [O] Red Rest Ring 1[I] Phase 6 Check[O]

13a Input/Output 8 Load Switch 8 Yellow Driver [O] Load Switch 16 Yellow Driver [O] Red Rest Ring 2[I] Phase 7 Check[O]

13b Input/Output 9 Load Switch 8 Green Driver [O] Load Switch 16 Green Driver [O] Omit All Red Ring 1[I] Phase 8 Check[O]

14a Input/Output 10 TBC Aux #1 Output [O] TBC Aux #3 Output [O] Omit All Red Ring 2[I] Address Bit 0[I]

14b Input/Output 11 TBC Aux #2 Output [O] Free/Coord Status [O] Ped Recycle Ring 1[I] Address Bit 1[I]

15a Input/Output 12 Preempt 1 Output [O] Preempt 3 Output [O] Ped Recycle Ring 2[I] Address Bit 2[I]

ASC/3 Programming Manual K-1

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
BIU Connector Pin Lists
Appendix K

Pin Function TF #1 Function TF #2 Function TF #3 Function TF #4 Function

15b Input/Output 13 Preempt 2 Output [O] Preempt 4 Output [O] Alternate Sequence A[I] Address Bit 3[I]

16a Input/Output 14 Preempt 1 Input [I] Preempt 5 Output [O] Alternate Sequence B[I] Address Bit 4[I]

16b Input/Output 15 Preempt 2 Input [I] Preempt 6 Output [O] Alternate Sequence C[I] Spare

17a Input/Output 16 Test Input A [I] Preempt 3 Input [I] Alternate Sequence D[I] Spare

17b Input/Output 17 Test Input B [I] Preempt 4 Input [I] Phase Omit 1[I] Spare

18a Input/Output 18 Automatic Flash [I] Preempt 5 Input [I] Phase Omit 2[I] Spare

18b Input/Output 19 Dimming Enable [I] Preempt 6 Input [I] Phase Omit 3[I] Spare

19a Input/Output 20 Manual Control Enable [I] Call To Nonactuated II [I] Phase Omit 4[I] Reserved

19b Input/Output 21 Interval Advance [I] Spare Phase Omit 5[I] Reserved

20a Input/Output 22 External Minimum Recall [I] Spare Phase Omit 6[I] Reserved

20b Input/Output 23 External Start [I] Spare Phase Omit 7[I] Reserved

21a Input/Output 24 TBC ON Line [I] Spare Phase Omit 8[I] Reserved

21b Input 1 Stop Time Ring 1 (Stop Time) Inhibit Max Ring 1 Hold Phase 1 Ped Omit 1

22a Input 2 Stop Time Ring 2 Inhibit Max Ring 2 Hold Phase 2 Ped Omit 2

22b Input 3 Max II Selection Ring 1 Local Flash Hold Phase 3 Ped Omit 3

23a Input 4 Max II Selection Ring 2 MMU Flash Hold Phase 4 Ped Omit 4

23b Input 5 Force Off Ring 1 (Force Off) Alarm 1 Hold Phase 5 Ped Omit 5

24a Input 6 Force Off Ring 2 Alarm 2 Hold Phase 6 Ped Omit 6

24b Input 7 Call To Non Act I Free (No Coord) Hold Phase 7 Ped Omit 7

25a Input 8 Walk Rest Modifier Test Input C Hold Phase 8 Ped Omit 8

25b Opto Input 1 Phase 1 Ped Call Phase 5 Ped Call (Signal Plan A) Timing Plan A Input Offset 1 Input

26a Opto Input 2 Phase 2 Ped Call Phase 6 Ped Call (Signal Plan B) Timing Plan B Input Offset 2 Input

26b Opto Input 3 Phase 3 Ped Call Phase 7 Ped Call Timing Plan C Input Offset 3 Input

27a Opto Input 4 Phase 4 Ped Call Phase 8 Ped Call Timing Plan D Input Spare

27b Opto Common 12 VAC 12 VAC Interconnect Common Interconnect Common

28a Address Select 0 Open Logic GND Open Log GND

28b Address Select 1 Open Open Logic GND Log GND

29a Address Select 2 Open Open Open Open

29b Address Select 3 Open Open Open Open

30a

30b Data Transmit

31b Data Receive

31a Line Frequency

32b Logic Ground

K-2 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 BIU Connector Pin Lists
Appendix K

Pin Function DET #1 Function DET #2 Function DET #3 Function DET #4 Function
1a +24 VDC IN

1b +24 VDC IN

2a Output 1 Detector Reset Slot ½

2b Output 2 Detector Reset Slot 3/4

3a Output 3 Detector Reset Slot 5/6

3b Output 4 Detector Reset Slot 7/8

4a Output 5 Reserved

4b Output 6 Reserved

5a Output 7 Reserved

5b Output 8 Reserved

6a Output 9 Reserved

6b Output 10 Reserved

7a Output 11 Reserved

7b Output 12 Reserved

8a Output 13 Reserved

8b Output 14 Reserved

9a Output 15 Reserved

9b Input/Output 1 Channel 1 Call[I] Channel 17 Call [I] Channel 33 Call[I] Channel 49 Call[I]

10a Input/Output 2 Channel 2 Call[I] Channel 18 Call [I] Channel 34 Call[I] Channel 50 Call[I]

10b Input/Output 3 Channel 3 Call[I] Channel 19 Call [I] Channel 35 Call[I] Channel 51Call[I]

11a Input/Output 4 Channel 4 Call[I] Channel 20 Call [I] Channel 36 Call[I] Channel 52 Call[I]

11b Input/Output 5 Channel 5 Call[I] Channel 21 Call [I] Channel 37 Call[I] Channel 53 Call[I]

12a Input/Output 6 Channel 6 Call[I] Channel 22 Call [I] Channel 38 Call[I] Channel 54 Call[I]

12b Input/Output 7 Channel 7 Call[I] Channel 23 Call [I] Channel 39 Call[I] Channel 55 Call[I]

13a Input/Output 8 Channel 8 Call[I] Channel 24 Call [I] Channel 40 Call[I] Channel 56 Call[I]

13b Input/Output 9 Channel 9 Call[I] Channel 25 Call [I] Channel 41 Call[I] Channel 57 Call[I]

14a Input/Output 10 Channel 10 Call[I] Channel 26 Call [I] Channel 42 Call[I] Channel 58 Call[I]

14b Input/Output 11 Channel 11 Call[I] Channel 27 Call [I] Channel 43 Call[I] Channel 59 Call[I]

15a Input/Output 12 Channel 12 Call[I] Channel 28 Call [I] Channel 44 Call[I] Channel 60 Call[I]

15b Input/Output 13 Channel 13 Call[I] Channel 29 Call [I] Channel 45 Call[I] Channel 61 Call[I]

16a Input/Output 14 Channel 14 Call[I] Channel 30 Call [I] Channel 46 Call[I] Channel 62 Call[I]

16b Input/Output 15 Channel 15 Call[I] Channel 31 Call [I] Channel 47 Call[I] Channel 63 Call[I]

ASC/3 Programming Manual K-3

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
BIU Connector Pin Lists
Appendix K

Pin Function DET #1 Function DET #2 Function DET #3 Function DET #4 Function
17a Input/Output 16 Channel 16 Call[I] Channel 32 Call [I] Channel 48 Call[I] Channel 64 Call[I]

17b Input/Output 17 Channel 1 Fault Status[I] Channel 17 Fault Status [I] Channel 33 Fault Status [I] Channel 49 Fault Status [I]

18a Input/Output 18 Channel 2 Fault Status[I] Channel 18 Fault Status [I] Channel 34 Fault Status [I] Channel 50 Fault Status [I]

18b Input/Output 19 Channel 3 Fault Status[I] Channel 19 Fault Status [I] Channel 35 Fault Status [I] Channel 51 Fault Status [I]

19a Input/Output 20 Channel 4 Fault Status[I] Channel 20 Fault Status [I] Channel 36 Fault Status [I] Channel 52 Fault Status [I]

19b Input/Output 21 Channel 5 Fault Status[I] Channel 21 Fault Status [I] Channel 37 Fault Status [I] Channel 53 Fault Status [I]

20a Input/Output 22 Channel 6 Fault Status[I] Channel 22 Fault Status [I] Channel 38 Fault Status [I] Channel 54 Fault Status [I]

20b Input/Output 23 Channel 7 Fault Status[I] Channel 23 Fault Status [I] Channel 39 Fault Status [I] Channel 55 Fault Status [I]

21a Input/Output 24 Channel 8 Fault Status[I] Channel 24 Fault Status [I] Channel 40 Fault Status [I] Channel 56 Fault Status [I]

21b Input 1 Channel 9 Fault Status Channel 25 Fault Status Channel 41 Fault Status Channel 57 Fault Status

22a Input 2 Channel 10 Fault Status Channel 26 Fault Status Channel 42 Fault Status Channel 58 Fault Status

22b Input 3 Channel 11 Fault Status Channel 27 Fault Status Channel 43 Fault Status Channel 59 Fault Status

23b Input 4 Channel 12 Fault Status Channel 28 Fault Status Channel 44 Fault Status Channel 60 Fault Status

23a Input 5 Channel 13 Fault Status Channel 29 Fault Status Channel 45 Fault Status Channel 61 Fault Status

24b Input 6 Channel 14 Fault Status Channel 30 Fault Status Channel 46 Fault Status Channel 62 Fault Status

24a Input 7 Channel 15 Fault Status Channel 31 Fault Status Channel 47 Fault Status Channel 63 Fault Status

25a Input 8 Channel 16 Fault Status Channel 32 Fault Status Channel 48 Fault Status Channel 64 Fault Status

25b Opto Input 1 Reserved

26a Opto Input 2 Reserved

26b Opto Input 3 Reserved

27a Opto Input 4 Reserved

27b Opto Common Reserved

28b Address Select 0 - Logic GND - Logic GND

28a Address Select 1 - - Logic GND Logic GND

29b Address Select 2 - - - -

29a Address Select 3 Logic GND Logic GND Logic GND Logic G

30b Data Transmit

(reserved)

30a Data Receive

(reserved)

31b Earth Ground

31a Line Frequency Ref.

32b Logic Ground

K-4 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 L
Logic Processor Operation
Introduction 12

The Logic Processor provides a means to command the controller inputs and outputs
based upon a set of Logical Elements. This increases the flexibility of the controller and
allows the knowledgeable user to implement and verify modifications to the operation of
the ASC/3.
Each Logic Processor Statement (LPS) can be controlled by manual data entry
(MM-1-8-1), Time Base Action Plan (MM-5-4), or Remote Command. It is recommended
that the LPSs that are being developed be programmed in MM-1-8-1 as “D” (disabled).
Once the complete operation is developed and ready for evaluation, the statements can be
programmed as “E” (enabled). When the LPSs operate correctly, the statements can be left
enabled or can be put under Time Base action plan (MM-1-5-4) control (“.”).

IMPORTANT • The controller must be on the bench and not operating an intersection
when the Logic Processor is being programmed. Changing an LPS will force transaction
mode for additional safety.

The format of Logic Processor Statements is based upon IF-THEN-ELSE elements. A

Logic Processor Statement is divided into the following parts:

Name Type Description

LP # n/a Logic Processor statement number.

IF Testable element Up to 10 elements can be programmed in the IF
condition. Multiple elements must be separated
by a logical operator (below).
logical operator Testable element Logical operator lines are optional. After the first
Testable element, additional Testable elements
must be preceded by a logical operator (AND,
OR, NAND, NOR, XOR).
THEN Executable element Up to 5 THEN elements can be programmed.
ELSE Executable element Up to 5 ELSE elements can be programmed.

For example: IF x THEN y ELSE z

ASC/3 Programming Manual L-1

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Logic Processor Operation
Appendix L

Several LP statements can be linked together as “Linked LP Statements” to perform a

unique function. The order of LPSs is critical for correct operation.
The ASC/3 evaluates each statement every one tenth of a second, in top-down order. When
a Logic Processor statement requires information that is developed by another statement,
that information must be developed in an earlier statement.
A total of 200 LPSs are available for programming. Statements 1-100 are enabled and
disabled via the Controller menus MM-1-8-1 and MM-5-4. Statements 101-200 are
Extended Options and must be enabled in a special file called ASC3.EXT. (For more
information about programming statements 101-200, refer to Extended Logic Processor Group
on page 6-64.)
Defining each statement is done in MM-1-8-2. However, statements 101-200 cannot be
accessed on an actual ASC/3 controller; instead, statements 101-200 must be programmed
using the ASC/3 Controller Configurator run on a PC.

General LP Programming Operation 12

IF Condition – Testable Elements 12

The LP (Logic Processor) IF elements can determine the state of selected internal timers,
states, CIB (Controller Input Buffer) and COB (Controller Output Buffer) locations. Also,
the controller mapping may determine whether or not the result of the LPS causes an
output to the field or an input from the field. For example, if the LPS is testing Preemption
10 input but there is no connector input pin 00 mapped to that location, the LPS will never
see a change to that location in the CIB.
Each IF condition is comprised of up to 10 testable elements. Testable elements are
conditions within the controller that can be evaluated to be either true or false. Examples
of testable elements include:
 VEH GREEN ON PH 2
 DET #1 IS ON
 PMT DELAY TIMER > 5 seconds (where > means “is greater than”)
 COORDINATION PLAN IS FREE
These testable elements can be linked together to form an IF condition. Because each
testable element results in either a true or false condition, linking of several testable
elements into an IF condition will result in an overall true or false condition.

L-2 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Logic Processor Operation
Appendix L

Linking occurs through the following logical operators:

Operator Description

AND The result is true only if both elements are true.

OR The result is true if at least one element is true.
NAND The result is false only if both elements are true.
NOR The result is true only if both elements are false.
XOR The result is true if one element (but not both) is true.

The following table shows the results for these logical operations:

Statement 1 Operator Statement 2 Result

TRUE AND TRUE TRUE

TRUE AND FALSE FALSE

FALSE AND TRUE FALSE

FALSE AND FALSE FALSE

TRUE OR TRUE TRUE

TRUE OR FALSE TRUE

FALSE OR TRUE TRUE

FALSE OR FALSE FALSE

TRUE NAND TRUE FALSE

TRUE NAND FALSE TRUE

FALSE NAND TRUE TRUE

FALSE NAND FALSE TRUE

TRUE NOR TRUE FALSE

TRUE NOR FALSE FALSE

FALSE NOR TRUE FALSE

FALSE NOR FALSE TRUE

TRUE XOR TRUE FALSE

TRUE XOR FALSE TRUE

FALSE XOR TRUE TRUE

FALSE XOR FALSE FALSE

ASC/3 Programming Manual L-3

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Logic Processor Operation
Appendix L

For example, several testable elements can be linked in the IF condition as:
(1) IF Phase 2 Green is ON
(2) AND Vehicle Detector #1 is ON
(3) OR Preempt Delay Timer > 5 seconds
(4) OR Coord Plan is FREE

Every one tenth of a second, this expression is evaluated to either true or false.
Testable elements are evaluated from top to bottom. In this example, elements (1) and (2)
are evaluated first, and the result is evaluated against element (3); this result is then
evaluated against element (4). This process continues for all testable elements in the IF
condition.
Using the previous example, assume that:
 phase 2 is green
 vehicle detector #1 is off
 the preempt delay timer is at 10 seconds
 the coord plan is not FREE
The results when each testable element is evaluated independently are:
Phase 2 Green is ON ==> TRUE
Vehicle Detector #1 is ON ==> FALSE
Preempt Delay Timer > 5 seconds ==> TRUE
Coord Plan is FREE ==> FALSE

When the first two testable elements are evaluated, the result is FALSE:
TRUE (1) AND FALSE (2) = FALSE (1,2)

When this result is evaluated against the third testable element, the result is TRUE:
FALSE (1,2) OR TRUE (3) = TRUE (1,2,3)

When this result is evaluated against the last testable element, the result is TRUE:
TRUE (1,2,3) OR FALSE (4) = TRUE (1,2,3,4)

Thus, the final result for the whole expression is TRUE.

The order of testable elements is very important. In the above example if elements 2 and 3
are reversed:
(1) IF Phase 2 Green is ON
(2) OR Preempt Delay Timer > 5 seconds
(3) AND Vehicle Detector #1 is ON
(4) OR Coord Plan is FREE

the final result for the whole expression is now FALSE:

L-4 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Logic Processor Operation
Appendix L

When the first two testable elements are evaluated, the result is TRUE:
TRUE (1) OR TRUE (2) = TRUE (1,2)

When this result is evaluated against the third testable element, the result is FALSE:
TRUE (1,2) AND FALSE (3) = FALSE (1,2,3)

When this result is evaluated against the last testable element, the result is FALSE:
FALSE (1,2,3) OR FALSE (4) = FALSE (1,2,3,4)

THEN/ELSE – Executable Elements 12

The Logic Processor THEN/ELSE statements perform several functions. For CIB
(Controller Input Buffer) and COB (Controller Output Buffer) operation, the controller
mapping determines whether or not the results of these elements cause an output to the
field or input from the field. For example, if the executable element sets PHASE GREEN
16 ON but no pin is mapped to that element, there will be no output.
Once the result of the IF condition is determined, the THEN statement specifies what the
controller does when the IF condition is true, and the ELSE statement specifies what the
controller does when the IF condition is false. Each THEN/ELSE action is comprised of
up to 5 executable elements.
Examples of executable elements include:
 Set Vehicle Detector #2 ON
 Delay 10 seconds
 Set Phase 10 Green output OFF
Adding these elements to the preceding example:
(1) IF Phase 2 Green is ON
(2) AND Vehicle Detector #1 is ON
(3) OR Preempt Delay Timer > 5 seconds
(4) OR Coord Plan is FREE
(5) THEN Set Vehicle Detector #2 ON
(6) Set Phase 10 Green output OFF
(7) ELSE Set Vehicle Detector #2 OFF
(8) Set Phase 10 Green output ON

when the IF condition is true, the logic processor will set vehicle detector #2 ON and
phase 10 green output OFF; when the IF condition is false, the logic processor will set
vehicle detector #2 OFF and phase 10 green output ON.

ASC/3 Programming Manual L-5

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Logic Processor Operation
Appendix L

IMPORTANT • When phase colors are being controlled, the complete set of phase
indications must be considered. In this example, the THEN element turns Phase 10 Green
off. If it was on, there will be no color output for that phase. The intersection will go to a
Red Fail flash condition if the controller is operating in a TS2 environment. Similarly, the
ELSE element turns Phase 10 Green on. If it was off, there will be two color outputs for
that phase. The intersection will go to a Dual Indication flash condition if the controller is
operating in a TS2 environment.

Delay Timers
Delay timers can be set as an executable element to temporarily suspend execution of
certain elements. When an executable element that contains a delay interval is encountered,
the delay timer will begin timing down from its programmed value. All remaining
executable elements will be disregarded until the delay timer has expired. The delay timer
will continue timing as long as the conditional element remains in a constant state.

Note • If the result of the IF condition changes, the delay timer will be reset.

Adding a delay timer to the previous example illustrates this behavior:

(1) IF Phase 2 Green is ON
(2) AND Vehicle Detector #1 is ON
(3) OR Preempt Delay Timer > 5 seconds
(4) OR Coord Plan is FREE
(5) THEN Set Vehicle Detector #2 ON
Delay 3 seconds
(6) Set Phase 10 Green output OFF
(7) ELSE Set Vehicle Detector #2 OFF
Delay 5 seconds
(8) Set Phase 10 Green output ON

In this example, when the IF condition is true, vehicle detector #2 turns on immediately;
if the IF condition remains true for at least 3 seconds, phase 10 green output turns off.
When the IF condition is false, vehicle detector #2 turns off immediately; if the IF
condition remains false for at least 5 seconds, phase 10 green output turns on.

Note • When the IF condition changes value, all delay timers are reset.

Multiple delay timers can be placed within a single THEN statement, as shown here:
(1) IF Phase 2 Green is ON
(2) AND Vehicle Detector #1 is ON
(3) OR Preempt Delay Timer > 5 seconds
(4) OR Coord Plan is FREE
(5) THEN Set Vehicle Detector #2 ON
Delay 3 seconds
(6) Set Phase 10 Green output OFF
Delay 3 seconds
(8) Set Phase 10 Green output ON

L-6 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Logic Processor Operation
Appendix L

In this example, if the IF condition remains true for at least 3 seconds, phase 10 green
output turns off; if the IF condition remains true for an additional 3 seconds, phase 10
green output turns on.
The order of executable elements and delay elements is very important. If the THEN
statements are rearranged as shown below, vehicle detector #2 turns on and phase 10
green output turns off immediately; six seconds later, phase 10 green output turns on:
(5) THEN Set Vehicle Detector #2 ON
(6) Set Phase 10 Green output OFF
Delay 3 seconds
Delay 3 seconds
(8) Set Phase 10 Green output ON

Logic Flags 12

The ASC/3 supports 64 user-settable logic flags. These logic flags are Boolean, i.e., they
can have a value of true or false. The flags can be used as testable elements and can be set
by executable elements. They can be used to link several testable elements together.
When the controller restarts, these flags are set to false. Otherwise, flags set to true remain
true until explicitly set to false.

Example:
Statement #1
IF … (up to 10 testable elements)
THEN Set Logic Flag #1 ON

Statement #2
IF Logic Flag #1 is ON
AND … (up to 9 more testable elements)
THEN Set Logic Flag #2 ON

Statement #3
IF Logic Flag #2 is ON
AND … (up to 9 more testable elements)
THEN …

This example uses two logic flags to link three logical elements together. A maximum of
28 testable elements can be linked together.

ASC/3 Programming Manual L-7

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Logic Processor Operation
Appendix L

The order of executable elements and setting of logic flags is very important. In this
example, if Statements 2 and 3 are reversed:
Statement #1
IF … (up to 10 testable elements)
THEN Set Logic Flag #1 ON

Statement #3
IF Logic Flag #2 is ON
AND … (up to 9 more testable elements)
THEN …

Statement #2
IF Logic Flag #1 is ON
AND … (up to 9 more testable elements)
THEN Set Logic Flag #2 ON

Statement 3 does not get evaluated until the next tenth of a second because Logic Flag #2
does not get set until Statement 2 is processed.

L-8 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Logic Processor Operation
Appendix L

Testable Elements in the IF Condition 12

The following is a list of the ASC/3 Logic Processor testable elements. Each entry
describes the element, condition, and range of values to test against.

Note • The condition “!=” means “not equal”.

Phase Testable Elements 12

Testable Element Range Operator Condition Description

CTR ON PH FORC OFF 0-16 IS ON/OFF The selected phase (1-16) or any (0) phase has FORCE OFF
on. This state indicated when the selected phase (1-16) or
any (0) green has been forced off. This testable element is
true during the yellow Change and Red Clearance of the
selected phase.

CTR ON PH PED CHK 0-16 IS ON/OFF The selected active phase (1-16) or any (0) phase
pedestrian demand is ON or OFF.

CTR ON PHASE CALL 0-16 IS ON/OFF The selected phase (1-16) or any (0) phase check is ON or
OFF if it is part of the active sequence.
“CALL ON PHASE” does not indicate true if the phase is not
part of the active sequence or omitted for any reason, This
include an input, Coordinator, Preemptor, Time Base
programming along with any other feature that omits the
phase.

CTR ON PHASE CHECK 0-16 IS ON/OFF The selected phase (1-16) or any (0) phase demand
(check) is ON or OFF.

CTR ON PHASE HOLD 0-16 IS ON/OFF The selected phase (1-16) or any (0) phase hold is ON or
OFF.

CTR ON PHASE OMIT 0-16 IS ON/OFF The selected phase (1-16) or any (0) phase omit is ON or
OFF.

CTR PED CALL ON PH 0-16 IS ON/OFF The selected active phase (1-16) or any (0) phase
pedestrian check is ON or OFF.
PED CALL ON PHASE does not indicate true if the phase
pedestrian movement is not part of the active sequence or
is omitted for any reason. This includes an input,
Coordinator, Preemptor, Time Base programming along
with any other feature that omits the phase pedestrian
movement.

CTR PED OMIT ON PH 0-16 IS ON/OFF The selected phase (1-16) or any (0) phase pedestrian
omit is ON or OFF.

CTR PH NEXT ON PHS 0-16 IS ON/OFF The selected phase (1-16) or any (0) phase next is ON or
OFF.

CTR PHASE TIMING 0-16 IS ON/OFF The selected phase (1-16) or any (0) phase timing is ON or
OFF.

ASC/3 Programming Manual L-9

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Logic Processor Operation
Appendix L

Testable Element Range Operator Condition Description

DET FAIL ON PHASE 0-16 IS ON/OFF The selected active phase (1-16) or any (0) phase failed
detector is ON or OFF.

PED ON PH DONT WLK 0-16 IS ON/OFF The selected phase (1-16) or any (0) phase don’t walk is
ON or OFF.

PED ON PH PED CLR 0-16 IS ON/OFF The selected active phase (1-16) or any (0) phase
pedestrian clearance is ON or OFF.

PED ON PH WALK 0-16 IS ON/OFF The selected active phase (1-16) or any (0) phase walk is
ON or OFF.

VEH GREEN ON PH 0-16 IS ON/OFF The selected phase (1-16) or any (0) phase green is ON or
OFF.

VEH RED ON PH 0-16 IS ON/OFF The selected phase (1-16) or any (0) phase red is ON or
OFF.

VEH YELLOW ON PH 0-16 IS ON/OFF The selected phase (1-16) or any (0) phase yellow is ON or
OFF.

Ring Timer Testable Elements 12

To determine when a timer is equal to a partial second, set a flag on the next higher value
and delay the partial second required.

Example:
Determine when Minimum green for phase 1 (ring 1) has 1.2 seconds left. This will
function only if stop time or manual advance is not applied during the delay period.
IF MIN GREEN TME RING 1 IS 2
AND GREEN ON PHASE 1 IS ON (true for 1/10 second)
THEN SET LOGIC FLAG 1 ON
IF LOGIC FLAG 1 IS ON
THEN DELAY FOR 0.8

After the delay statement you can insert the elements that you want to become active when
phase 1 minimum green has 1.2 seconds left.

IMPORTANT • Be sure to clear the logic flag when it is no longer required.

L-10 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Logic Processor Operation
Appendix L

Testable Element Range Operator Condition Description

CTR MAX GRN TMR Rβ β = 1-4 IS 0-255 A phase in RING β is timing Maximum Green down from the
!= programmed value to zero in tenths of a second (.01 sec.).
The value is entered in seconds. This value counts down.
>
When in a phase is green with no conflicting demand, the
<
Max Green Timer is set to zero.

CTR MAX OUT CNT PH 0-16 IS 0-255 Test condition for the number of times continuous Max Out
!= event happens on a specific phase.
>
<

CTR MIN GRN TMR Rβ β = 1-4 IS 0-255 A phase in RING β is timing Minimum Green down from the
!= programmed value to zero in tenths of a second (.01 sec.).
The value is entered in seconds. This value counts down.
>
<

CTR PED CLR TMR Rβ β = 1-4 IS 0-255 A phase in RING β is timing Pedestrian Clearance down
!= from the programmed value to zero in tenths of a second
(.01 sec.). The value is entered in seconds. This value
>
counts down.
<

CTR PED WLK TMR Rβ β = 1-4 IS 0-255 A phase in RING β is timing Walk down from the
!= programmed value to zero in tenths of a second (.01 sec.).
The value is entered in seconds. This value counts down.
>
<

CTR RED TIMER Rβ β = 1-4 IS 0-255 A phase in RING β is timing Red Clearance down from the
!= programmed value to zero in tenths of a second (.01 sec.).
The value is entered in seconds. This value counts down.
>
<

VEH YELLOW TMR Rβ β = 1-4 IS 0-255 A phase in RING β is timing Yellow Change down from the
!= programmed value to zero in tenths of a second (.01 sec.).
The value is entered in seconds. This value counts down.
>
<

ASC/3 Programming Manual L-11

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Logic Processor Operation
Appendix L

Ring Input Testable Elements 12

Testable Element Range Operator Condition Description

CTR FORCE OFF RING 0-4 IS ON/OFF Force off input to the selected ring (1-4) or any ring (0) is ON
or OFF.

CTR GAP OUT CNT PH 0-16 IS 0-255 Test condition for the number of times continuous Gap Out
!= event happens on a specific phase.
>
<

CTR INHBT MAX RING 0-4 IS ON/OFF Inhibit Maximum input to the selected ring (1-4) or any ring
(0) is ON or OFF.

CTR MAX β RING β = 0-4 IS ON/OFF Max β is input to the selected ring (1-4) or any ring (0) is ON
or OFF.

CTR OMT RD CLR RNG 0-4 IS ON/OFF Omit Red Clearance input to the selected ring (1-4) or any
ring (0) is ON or OFF.

CTR PED RECYC RING 0-4 IS ON/OFF Pedestrian recycle input to the selected ring (1-4) or any
ring (0) is ON or OFF.

CTR RED REST RING 0-4 IS ON/OFF Red rest input to the selected ring (1-4) or any ring (0) is ON
or OFF.

CTR STOP TIME RING 0-4 IS ON/OFF Stop Time input to the selected ring (1-4) or any ring (0) is
ON or OFF.

L-12 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Logic Processor Operation
Appendix L

Overlap Testable Elements 12

Testable Element Range Operator Condition Description

CTR OL GRN EXT 0-16 IS ON/OFF Overlap A-P (1-16) or any overlap (0) is timing lag or trailing
green.

CTR OL TRL RED CLR 0-16 IS ON/OFF Overlap A-P (1-16) or any overlap (0) is in red clearance.

CTR OVERLAP OMIT 0-16 IS ON/OFF Overlap A-P (1-16) or any overlap (0) omit is ON or OFF.

PED OL DON’T WALK 0-16 IS ON/OFF Overlap walk 1-16 or any overlap (0) Don’t Walk is ON or
OFF.
An Overlap Don’t Walk is a ped overlap enabled in MM-2-3
even if it is only one phase.
The Ped Overlap must be comprised of at least one phase
that has an enabled pedestrian movement. If it does not,
the Don’t Walk will not be sensed.
The Ped Overlap Don’t Walk will toggle at 1 PPS during the
Pedestrian clearance.

PED OL PED CLEAR 0-16 IS ON/OFF Overlap walk 1-16 or any overlap (0) Ped Clearance is ON
or OFF.
An Overlap Ped Clearance is a ped overlap enabled in
MM-2-3 even if it is only one phase.

PED OL WALK 0-16 IS ON/OFF Overlap walk 1-16 or any overlap (0) Walk is ON or OFF. An
Overlap Walk is a ped overlap enabled in MM-2-3 even if it
is only one phase.

VEH OVERLAP 0-16 IS ON/OFF Overlap A-P (1-16 respectively) or any overlap (0) is active.

VEH OVERLAP GREEN 0-16 IS ON/OFF Overlap A-P (1-16 respectively) or any overlap (0) is active.

VEH OVERLAP RED 0-16 IS ON/OFF Overlap A-P (1-16) or any overlap (0) is red. NOTE: OVERLAP
RED 0 will be true unless all overlaps are either green or
yellow. Any non-programmed overlap will be red.

VEH OVERLAP YLW 0-16 IS ON/OFF Overlap A-P (1-16) or any overlap (0) is timing lag or trailing
green.

ASC/3 Programming Manual L-13

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Logic Processor Operation
Appendix L

Coordinator Testable Elements 12

Testable Element Range Operator Condition Description

COORD CYCLE LENGTH IS 0-999 The cycle length in effect IS, !=, >, or < the programmed
!= value even if the coordinator is free.
>
<

COORD CYCLE TIMER IS 0-2047 The coordinated cycle timer IS, !=, >, or < the programmed
!= value in tenths of a second.
>
<

COORD FLASH IS ON/OFF The coordinator is commanding flash (Pattern 255).

COORD FREE IS ON/OFF The coordinator is commanding free (Pattern 254). If the
TOD commanded free is required, set a Special Function
output when that Action Plan is in effect and test for that
output.

COORD IN STEP IS ON/OFF The coordinator is commanded to a pattern even if the

coordinator is free.

COORD MSTR CYC TMR IS 0-999 The master cycle timer IS, !=, >, or < the programmed
!= value in seconds.
>
<

COORD OFFSET IS 0-255 The offset in effect IS, !=, >, or < the programmed value
!= even if the coordinator is free.
>
<

COORD PLAN 1-63 IS 0-120 The coordinated plan in effect IS, !=, >, or < the
!= programmed value even if the coordinator is free.
>
<

COORD SPLT TMR RNG 0-4 IS 0-2047 The split timer for ring (1-4) or any ring (0) IS (!=, >, or <)
!= the programmed value in seconds. Example: To determine
the split timing for a specific phase, use the following:
>
IF PHASE TIMING 4 IS ON
<
AND COORD SPLT TMR RNG 1 < 10 seconds

L-14 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Logic Processor Operation
Appendix L

Preemptor Testable Elements 12

Testable Element Range Operator Condition Description

PMT ADV TO EXIT IS ON/OFF The preemption is preparing to exit. The PMT call is false.
Minimum Dwell and Duration times are complete.

PMT ADV TO FLASH IS ON/OFF The active preemptor is timing Track Clearance intervals
yellow, all red and the preemptor will flash the dwell
phases yellow and others red.

PMT ADV TRACK CLR IS ON/OFF There is a preemptor timing entrance green, walk,
pedestrian clearance, yellow or all red and there is a track
clearance movement.

PMT ADVNCE TO HOLD IS ON/OFF Indicated that the preemptor is starting to time the
Cycling/Dwell phases.

PMT CYC DLY TMR IS 0-255 Check the EXTEND PREEMPT INPUT TIMER against the
!= conditional setting.
>
<

PMT CYCLE DELAY IS ON/OFF The Preemptor is timing the Extend Input time during
Dwell/Cycling phases.

PMT CYCLING IS ON/OFF The active preemptor is timing cycling phases.

PMT DELAY IS ON/OFF There is a preemptor delay timing and there is no active
preemptor.

PMT DELAY TIMER 0-10 IS 0-2047 Time is entered in seconds for Preemptor 1-10 or any
!= Preemptor “0” delay.
>
<

PMT DURATION TMR IS 0-255 The Duration Timer for the preemptor in effect is
!= compared against the entered value and the element is
set true when the selected conditions are true.
>
<

PMT DWELL IS ON/OFF The active preemptor is timing dwell phases.

PMT FLASH IS ON/OFF The Preemptor is being held during the Extend Input
timing. This element is true when the Extend timer is
timing and the preemption is in Dwell Flash.

PMT FLASH DELAY IS ON/OFF The Preemptor is timing the Extend Input time during dwell
flash.

PMT HOLD GREEN TMR IS 0-255 The Preemptor is being held during the Extend Input
!= timing. This element measures the Extend timer.
>
<

ASC/3 Programming Manual L-15

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Logic Processor Operation
Appendix L

Testable Element Range Operator Condition Description

PMT INPUT 0-10 IS ON/OFF The selected preempt (1-10) or any preempt (0) input is
active. This is regardless of the programming for that
preemptor.

PMT MAX CALL TMR IS 0-255 The maximum time that a non-priority preemption call can
!= be active and be recognized by the controller. Once failed,
the input must return to inactive state to be recognized
>
again.
<

PMT MIN DWELL TMR IS 0-255 The Dwell Timer for the preemptor in effect is compared
!= against the entered value and the element is set true
when the selected conditions are true.
>
<

PMT PREEMPT ACTIVE 0-10 IS ON/OFF The selected preempt (1-10) or any preempt (0) is active.

PMT RE-SERV TMR 0-10 IS 0-2047 The Preemption Reservice time is tested against a
!= particular value.
>
<

PMT TRACK CLEAR IS ON/OFF The active preemptor is timing Track Clearance intervals
green, yellow and all red.

PMT TRACK GRN TMR IS 0-255 The Track Clearance Green Timer for the preemptor in
!= effect is compared against the entered value and the
element is set true when the selected conditions are true.
>
<

PMT WAIT FOR PMT IS ON/OFF There is no preemptor active and the controller will
respond to the next preemption input. This feature is true
during delay timing, all during preemption. It is not true
when the controller is not in preemption or an input is
inhibited because of Reservice timing.

L-16 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Logic Processor Operation
Appendix L

Detector Testable Elements 12

Testable Element Range Operator Condition Description

CTR PED ABSNC FAIL 0-16 IS ON/OFF The selected (1-16) or any (0) pedestrian detector has failed
because of no activity. Refer to MM-6-7.

CTR PED ERRTC FAIL 0-16 IS ON/OFF The selected (1-16) pedestrian detector has failed because
of excessive counts. Refer to MM-6-7.

CTR PED LOCK FAIL 0-16 IS ON/OFF The selected (1-16) or any (0) pedestrian detector has failed
because of max presence. Refer to MM-6-7.

DET 1-64 IS ON/OFF The selected vehicle detector (1-64) is ON or OFF when the
detector is assigned to a phase.

DET FAIL ON DET 1-64 IS ON/OFF The selected vehicle detector (1-64) failure is ON or OFF
when the detector is assigned to a phase. When not
assigned to a phase. The detector does not fail.

DET OCCUPANCY % 1-64 IS 0-999 The selected (1-64) vehicle detector occupancy in 0.5%
!= increments for an enabled detector (MM-6-2) that was
collected during the last NTCIP Log Period (MM-6-4).
>
0-200 = 0 to 100% in 0.5% increments. Enter the occupancy
<
level that is being tested multiplied by 2 (for example,
0 = 0%, 36 = 18%, 63 = 31.5%).
210 = Max Presence Fault
211 = No Activity Fault
212 = Open Loop Fault
213 = Shorted Loop Fault
214 = Excessive Change Fault
216 = Watchdog Fault
217 = Erratic count Fault
NOTE: When there is more than one fault active, the highest
number is reported.

DET PED 0-16 IS ON/OFF The selected (1-16) or any (0) pedestrian detector is on or
off ON or OFF when the detector is assigned to a phase and
that phase has a ped movement programmed.

DET TMR DELAY 1-64 IS ON/OFF The selected vehicle detector (1-64) is timing delay when
the detector is assigned to a phase. When not assigned to a
phase. The detector delay does not time.

DET TMR EXTND 1-64 IS ON/OFF The selected vehicle detector (1-64) is extension is timing
when the detector is assigned to a phase. When not
assigned to a phase. The detector extension does not time.

DET VOLUME 1-64 IS 0-2047 The selected (1-64) vehicle detector volume count for an
!= enabled detector (MM-6-2) that was collected during the
last NTCIP Log Period (MM-6-4).
>
0-254 = The volume data collected.
<
255 = The volume of the data collected is greater than 254.

ASC/3 Programming Manual L-17

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Logic Processor Operation
Appendix L

Time-of-Day (TOD) Testable Elements 12

Testable Element Operator Condition Description

TOD DAY OF WEEK IS 1-7 Determines if the TOD Day of Week is equal to, not equal to, greater
!= than or less than the compared-to value. Sunday is day 1 for this
comparison.
>
<

TOD DOM IS 1-31 Determines if the TOD Day of Month is equal to, not equal to, greater
!= than or less than the compared to value.
>
<

TOD HOUR IS 0-23 Determines if the TOD Hour is equal to, not equal to, greater than or
!= less than the compared-to value. Sunday is day 1 for this comparison.
>
<

TOD MINUTE IS 0-59 Determines if the TOD Day of Week is equal to, not equal to, greater
!= than or less than the compared to value. Sunday is day 1 for this
comparison.
>
<

TOD MONTH IS 1-12 Determines if the TOD Month is equal to, not equal to, greater than or
!= less than the compared-to value.
>
<

TOD SECOND IS 0-59 Determines if the TOD Day of Week is equal to, not equal to, greater
!= than or less than the compared-to value. Sunday is day 1 for this
comparison.
>
<

TOD TENTH SEC IS 0-9 Determines if the TOD Day of Week is equal to, not equal to, greater
!= than or less than the compared-to value. Sunday is day 1 for this
comparison.
>
<

L-18 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Logic Processor Operation
Appendix L

Logic Processor (LP) Testable Elements 12

Testable Element Range Operator Condition Description

LP FLAG 1-64 IS ON/OFF Determines if a logic flag is ON (set) or OFF (reset).

The logic flags are not automatically reset except at power
ON. When used, an LP element, when no longer required,
must reset them.

LP STATEMENT 1-64 IS ON/OFF Determines if a logic statement is enabled from any source.
These sources are enabled manually (MM-1-8-1) and, if
allowed, by the action plan in effect (MM-5-4).

CIB & COB Testable Elements 12

Note • CIB = Controller Input Buffer; COB = Controller Output Buffer.

Testable Element Range Description

LP CIB CODE OFF 0-575 Checks if the state of the selected CIB bit number (0-575) is OFF.

LP CIB CODE ON 0-575 Checks if the state of the selected CIB bit number (0-575) is ON.

LP COB CODE OFF 0-767 Checks if the state of the selected COB bit number (0-767) is OFF.

LP COB CODE ON 0-767 Checks if the state of the selected CIB bit number (0-767) is ON.

Miscellaneous Testable Elements 12

Testable Element Range Operator Condition Description

COORD SPLIT PATTERN IS 1-120 Checks if split pattern (1-120) is in effect.

CTR BIKE GRN ON PH 1-16 IS ON/OFF Checks if bike Green timing on phase (1-16) is ON or OFF.

CTR PH RECALL PLAN IS 1-4 Checks if phase recall plan (1-4) is in effect.

CTR SEQUENCE # IS 1-20 Checks if controller is running a particular sequence

number.

CTR TM PLN N EFFCT IS 1-4 Checks if timing plan (1-4) is in effect.

DET BIKE CALL PH 1-16 IS ON/OFF Checks if bike call on phase (1-16) is ON or OFF.

DET PLAN NUM IS 1-4 Checks if detector plan (1-4) is in effect.

TOD ACTION PLAN # IS 1-100 Checks if action plan (1-100) is in effect.

TOD DAY PLAN # IS 1-4 Checks if day plan (1-4) is in effect.

ASC/3 Programming Manual L-19

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Logic Processor Operation
Appendix L

Executable Elements in THEN/ELSE 12

The following is a list of the ASC/3 Logic Processor Executable Elements. Each entry
describes the element, range of values, and individual SET action.

Phase Output Executable Elements 12

Executable Element Range Action Description

SIG SET PH D WALK 0-16 ON/OFF Sets the phase don’t walk output ON or OFF. The state of the green output
will return to the phase state every tenth of a second. To keep the output
ON or OFF, the logic processor must turn it ON or OFF every tenth of a
second.

SIG SET PH GREEN 0-16 ON/OFF Sets the phase green output ON or OFF. The state of the green output will
return to the phase state every tenth of a second. To keep the output ON
or OFF, the logic processor must turn it ON or OFF every tenth of a second.

SIG SET PH PED CLR 0-16 ON/OFF Sets the phase pedestrian clearance output ON or OFF. The state of the
green output will return to the phase state every tenth of a second. To
keep the output ON or OFF, the logic processor must turn it ON or OFF
every tenth of a second.

SIG SET PH YELLOW 0-16 ON/OFF Sets the phase yellow output ON or OFF. The state of the green output will
return to the phase state every tenth of a second. To keep the output ON
or OFF, the logic processor must turn it ON or OFF every tenth of a second.

SIG SET PHASE RED 0-16 ON/OFF Sets the phase red output ON or OFF. The state of the green output will
return to the phase state every tenth of a second. To keep the output ON
or OFF, the logic processor must turn it ON or OFF every tenth of a second.

SIG SET PHASE WALK 0-16 ON/OFF Sets the phase walk output ON or OFF. The state of the green output will
return to the phase state every tenth of a second. To keep the output ON
or OFF, the logic processor must turn it ON or OFF every tenth of a second.

Overlap Output Executable Elements 12

Executable Element Range Action Description

SIG SET OLP RED 0-16 ON/OFF Sets the overlap red output ON or OFF. The state of the green output will
return to the phase state every tenth of a second. To keep the output ON
or OFF, the logic processor must turn it ON or OFF every tenth of a second.

SIG SET OLP YELLOW 0-16 ON/OFF Sets the overlap yellow output ON or OFF. The state of the green output will
return to the phase state every tenth of a second. To keep the output ON
or OFF, the logic processor must turn it ON or OFF every tenth of a second.

SIG SET OVLP GREEN 0-16 ON/OFF Sets the overlap green output ON or OFF. The state of the green output will
return to the phase state every tenth of a second. To keep the output ON
or OFF, the logic processor must turn it ON or OFF every tenth of a second.

L-20 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Logic Processor Operation
Appendix L

Detector Input Executable Elements 12

Executable Element Range Action Description

DET SET PED 1-8 ON/OFF Sets the “raw” pedestrian detector.
If attempting to interrupt a pedestrian call and redirect it, use the SET COB
ON 64-79 ON/OFF executable element.

DET SET PED2 1-16 ON/OFF Sets the “raw” pedestrian detector 2.

DET SET VEH 1-16 1-16 ON/OFF Sets the “raw” vehicle detector 1-16 ON or OFF.

DET SET VEH 17-32 17-32 ON/OFF Sets the “raw” vehicle detector 17-32 ON or OFF.

DET SET VEH 33-48 33-48 ON/OFF Sets the “raw” vehicle detector 33-48 ON or OFF.

DET SET VEH 49-64 49-64 ON/OFF Sets the “raw” vehicle detector 49-64 ON or OFF.

DET SET VH PLN A-C 1-4 ON Sets the specified vehicle plan ON.

Ring Input Executable Elements 12

Executable Element Range Action Description

CTR OMIT RD CLR RG 0-4 ON/OFF Turns OMIT RED CLEARANCE input ON or OFF to a selected ring (1-4) or all
rings (0).

CTR SET FO RING 0-4 ON/OFF Turns FORCE OFF input ON or OFF to a selected ring (1-4) or all rings (0).

CTR SET INH MAX RG 0-4 ON/OFF Turns INHIBIT MAX input ON or OFF to a selected ring (1-4) or all rings (0).

CTR SET MAX2 RING 0-4 ON/OFF Turns MAX 2 input ON or OFF to a selected ring (1-4) or all rings (0).

CTR SET MAX3 RING 0-4 ON/OFF Turns MAX 3 input ON or OFF to a selected ring (1-4) or all rings (0).

CTR SET PED REC RG 0-4 ON/OFF Turns PEDESTRIAN RECYCLE input ON or OFF to a selected ring (1-4) or all
rings (0).

CTR SET RD REST RG 0-4 ON/OFF Turns RED REST input ON or OFF to a selected ring (1-4) or all rings (0).

CTR SET STIME RING 0-4 ON/OFF Turns STOP TIME input ON or OFF to a selected ring (1-4) or all rings (0).

ASC/3 Programming Manual L-21

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Logic Processor Operation
Appendix L

Unit Input Executable Elements 12

Executable Element Range Action Description

CRD SET FREE ON/OFF Turns COORDINATION FREE input ON or OFF.

CRD SET OSET B 1-3 0-3 ON/OFF Turns OFFSET BIT INPUTS input ON or OFF for a selected offset bit input
(1-3) or all inputs (0).

CRD SET SPL DEMND1 ON/OFF Turns SPLIT DEMAND 1 input ON or OFF.

CRD SET SPL DEMND2 ON/OFF Turns SPLIT DEMAND 2 input ON or OFF.

CRD SET SPLT B 1-2 0-2 ON/OFF Turns SPLIT BIT INPUTS input ON or OFF for a selected split bit input (1-2)
or all inputs (0).

CRD SET SYNC ON/OFF Turns COORDINATION SYNC input ON or OFF.

CRD ST CYC BIT 1-3 0-3 ON/OFF Turns CYCLE BIT inputs input ON or OFF for a selected cycle bit input (1-3)
or all inputs (0).

CRD ST DUAL COORD ON/OFF Turns DUAL COORDINATION input ON or OFF.

CTR SET ALARM 0-16 ON/OFF Turns input for selected alarms (1-16) or all alarms (0) ON or OFF.

CTR SET AT SEQ A-D 0-4 ON/OFF Turns selected (1-4) or all (0) ALTERNATE SEQUENCE inputs ON or OFF.
Use SET CIB CODE ON/OFF for locations 416-420 respectively for A-D.
Sequence 0-15 is a BCD representation of A-D, where D is highest. These
inputs must be enabled in MM-1-1-1.
Seq ALT CALT BALT A
1 OFFOFF ON
2 OFFON OFF
3 OFFON ON
4 ONOFF OFF
5 ONOFF ON
6 ONON OFF
7 ONON ON
8 OFFOFF OFF
9 OFFOFF ON
10 OFFON OFF
11 OFFON ON
12 ONOFF OFF
13 ONOFF ON
14 ONON OFF
15 ONON ON
16 OFFOFF OFF

CTR SET AUTO FLASH ON/OFF Turns AUTO FLASH input ON or OFF.

CTR SET CNA 1 ON/OFF Turns CAN 1 (call to non-actuated) input ON or OFF.

CTR SET CNA 2 ON/OFF Turns CAN 2 (call to non-actuated) input ON or OFF.

L-22 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Logic Processor Operation
Appendix L

Executable Element Range Action Description

CTR SET DB CRC 0-16 ON/OFF Turns selected (1-16) or all (0) DATA BASE CRC (Circular Redundant
Check) inputs ON or OFF.

CTR SET DIMMING EN ON/OFF Turns DIMMING ENABLE input ON or OFF.

CTR SET DIS PRETM ON/OFF Turns DISABLE PRE-TIMED OPERATION input ON or OFF.

CTR SET EXT START ON/OFF Turns EXTERNAL START input ON or OFF.

CTR SET INT ADV ON/OFF Turns INTERVAL ADVANCE input ON or OFF.

CTR SET LMP CTRL ON/OFF Turns INDICATOR LAMP input ON or OFF.

CTR SET LOCAL FL ON/OFF Turns LOCAL FLASH input ON or OFF.

CTR SET MAINT REQD ON/OFF Turns MAINTENANCE REQUIRED (door open) input ON or OFF.

CTR SET MAN CTR EN ON/OFF Turns MANUAL CONTROL ENABLE input ON or OFF.

CTR SET MIN RECALL ON/OFF Turns MINIMUM RECALL input ON or OFF.

CTR SET MMU FLASH ON/OFF Turns MMU FLASH input ON or OFF.

CTR SET MMU STIME ON/OFF Turns MMU STOP TIME input ON or OFF.

CTR SET PH NEXT RX ON/OFF Turns PHASE NEXT DECISION MADE IN RED TRANSFER input ON or OFF.

CTR SET STIME ALL ON/OFF Turns STOP TIME ALL RINGS input ON or OFF.

CTR SET TEST A-E 1-5 ON/OFF 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 correspond to input pins Test A, Test B, Test C, Test D, and
Test E, respectively.

CTR SET TMGPLN A-C 0-3 ON/OFF Turns selected bits (1-3) or none (0) TIMING PLAN BIT inputs ON or OFF.
Timing Plan 1 = 100, Plan 2 = 010, Plan 3 = 110, and Plan 4 = 001 Bits
A-C, respectively.
Any other combination of Bits A, B, C result in the Timing Plan called by the
Time Base.

CTR SET WK RST MOD ON/OFF Turns WALK REST MODIFIER input ON or OFF.

DET SET PEDDIA A-C 0-3 ON/OFF Turns selected (1-3) PEDESTRIAN DIAGNOSTIC PLAN inputs ON or OFF.

DET SET VH DIA A-C 0-3 ON/OFF Turns selected (1-3) VEHICLE DIAGNOSTIC PLAN inputs ON or OFF.

IM SET PWR SENSE ON/OFF Turns INTERSECTION MONITOR POWER SENSE input ON or OFF.

OL OMIT OVLP A-P 0-16 ON/OFF Turns selected (1-16) or all (0) OVERLAP OMIT inputs ON or OFF.

PMT CALL L PRI PMT 0-10 ON/OFF Turns selected (1-10) or all (0) CALL LOW PRIORITY PREEMPTION inputs
ON or OFF.

PMT CALL PMT SEQ 0-10 ON/OFF Turns input for selected (1-10) or all (0) preemptors ON or OFF.

PMT SET INTERLOCK 0-10 ON/OFF Turns selected (1-10) or all (0) PREEMPTION INTERLOCK inputs ON or
OFF.

ASC/3 Programming Manual L-23

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Logic Processor Operation
Appendix L

Executable Element Range Action Description

PMT SET KBD LOCK 0-10 ON/OFF Turns input from the keyboard for selected (1-10) or all (0) preemptors ON
or OFF.

SET VEH PLAN A-C 0-3 ON/OFF Turns selected (1-3) or all (0) VEHICLE DETECTION PLAN inputs ON or OFF.

SIG TERM OVLP A-P 0-16 ON/OFF Turns selected (1-16) or all (0) TERMINATE OVERLAP NOW inputs ON or
OFF.
To keep the overlap off, apply “OL OMIT OVLP A-P” at the same time.

TLM S ADDR BIT 0-4 0-4 ON/OFF Turns ADDRESS BIT inputs input ON or OFF for a selected address bit input
(1-4) or all inputs (0).

TLM SET EXT ADDR ON/OFF Turns TELEMETRY EXTERNAL ADDRESS ENABLE input ON or OFF.

TLM SET SPARE 1 ON/OFF Turns TELEMETRY SPARE 1 input ON or OFF.

TLM SET SPARE 2 ON/OFF Turns TELEMETRY SPARE 2 input ON or OFF.

TOD SET TBC ON LNE ON/OFF Turns TIME BASE CONTROL input ON or OFF.

TOD SET TIME RESET ON/OFF Turns EXTERNAL TIME REST input ON or OFF.

TSP SET CHKIN DET 0-6 ON/OFF Turns selected (1-6) or all (0) TRANSIT SIGNAL PRIORITY CHECK-IN inputs
ON or OFF.

TSP SET CHKOUT DET 0-6 ON/OFF Turns selected (1-6) or all (0) TRANSIT SIGNAL PRIORITY CHECK-OUT
inputs ON or OFF.

Phase Input Executable Elements 12

Executable Element Range Action Description

CTR CALL PED PHASE 0-16 ON/OFF Turns selected (1-16) or all (0) PHASE PEDESTRIAN CALL inputs ON or
OFF.

CTR CALL PHASE 0-16 ON/OFF Turns selected (1-16) or all (0) PHASE VEHICLE CALL inputs ON or OFF.

CTR HOLD PHASE 0-16 ON/OFF Turns HOLD input ON or OFF to a selected phase (1-16) or all phases (0).

CTR OMIT PED PHASE 0-16 ON/OFF Turns PED OMIT input ON or OFF to a selected phase (1-16) or all phases
(0).

CTR OMIT PHASE 0-16 ON/OFF Turns OMIT input ON or OFF to a selected phase (1-16) or all phases (0).

CTR SET PED EXT PH 0-16 ON/OFF Turns selected (1-16) or all (0) PEDESTRIAN EXTEND DETECTOR inputs ON
or OFF.

CTR SET RED EXT PH 0-16 ON/OFF Turns selected (1-16) or all (0) RED EXTEND inputs ON or OFF.

DET CALL BIKE PH 0-16 ON/OFF Turns selected (1-16) or all (0) PHASE BICYCLE CALL inputs ON or OFF.

DET CALL PED2 PH 0-16 ON/OFF Turns selected (1-16) or all (0) PHASE PEDESTRIAN 2 inputs ON or OFF.

L-24 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Logic Processor Operation
Appendix L

Logic Processor (LP) Executable Elements 12

Executable Element Range Action Description

LP DELAY FOR 0.0 - 204.7 Delay for the entered time before the following elements will be
seconds executed.

LP SET CIB OFF 0-575 Sets the selected CIB bit number (0-575) OFF.

LP SET CIB ON 0-575 Sets the selected CIB bit number (0-575) ON.

LP SET COB OFF 0-767 Sets the selected COB bit number (0-767) OFF.

LP SET COB ON 0-767 Sets the selected COB bit number (0-767) ON.

LP SET LOGIC FLAG 0-63 ON/OFF Sets LOGIC flag ON or OFF. Once set, the Logic Flag will remain ON until
turned OFF.

LP SET LP GROUP 0-10 Sets the specified Logic Processor Group ON.

Miscellaneous Executable Elements 12

Executable Element Range Action Description

CTR S EXT STRT DIS ON/OFF If this is programmed, Ignore External Start Input for 20 minutes. The
preferred method is to use MM-1-4-2, MMU TO CU SDLC EXTERNAL START
option.

TOD SET ACT PLN ON 1-100 Activate the programmed Action Plan.

TOD SET TMG PLN ON 1-4 Activate the programmed Timing Plan.

ASC/3 Programming Manual L-25

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
For your notes:

L-26 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 M
Hardware Diagnostic Cables
General Information 13

When performing the Auto-Loop diagnostic test which automatically cycles through all of
the individual diagnostic tests in sequence, the ASC/3 controller power should be
disconnected and all loopback cables should be installed before the Auto-Loop test is
started. When performing individual tests that require a loopback cables, power should be
disconnected before the any loopback cable is installed.
The tables that follow describe the configuration of each of the individual ASC/3
controller loopback cables.

ASC/3 Programming Manual M-1

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Hardware Diagnostic Cables
Appendix M

33279G1 – ASC-2100 A Connector Loop Back Cable 13

Wire Prep Length From From From To To To

No. Item (inches) Item Term Fit Item Term Fit Remarks

1 1 8 PA f C PA s C 26 WHT
2 1 8 PA g C PA Z C 26 WHT
3 1 8 PA h C PA D C 26 WHT
4 1 8 PA N C PA t C 26 WHT
5 1 8 PA EE C PA a C 26 WHT
6 1 8 PA FF C PA E C 26 WHT
7 1 8 PA w C PA DD C 26 WHT
8 1 8 PA P C PA u C 26 WHT
9 1 8 PA T C PA CC C 26 WHT-W/NEXT WIRE
10 1 8 PA CC C PA R C 26 WHT-W/NEXT WIRE
11 1 8 PA R C PA AA C 26 WHT
12 1 8 PA S C PA r C 26 WHT-W/NEXT WIRE
13 1 8 PA r C PA k C 26 WHT
14 1 8 PA BB C PA Y C 26 WHT-W/NEXT WIRE
15 1 8 PA Y C PA j C 26 WHT
16 1 8 PA m C PA X C 26 WHT-W/NEXT WIRE
17 1 8 PA X C PA z C 26 WHT
18 1 8 PA K C PA c C 26 WHT
19 1 8 PA L C PA b C 26 WHT
20 1 8 PA M C PA F C 26 WHT
21 1 8 PA n C PA J C 26 WHT
22 1 8 PA v C PA H C 26 WHT
23 1 8 PA i C PA G C 26 WHT
24 1 8 PA x C PA e C 26 WHT
25 1 8 PA GG C PA d C 26 WHT
26 1 8 PA A C PA q C 26 WHT
27 1 8 PA C C PA HH C 26 WHT-W/NEXT WIRE
28 1 8 PA HH C PA y C 26 WHT
29 2 6 PWR AC+ S PA p C 20 BLK SPLICE W/PWR CORD BLK
30 3 6 PWR AC- S PA U C 20 WHT SPLICE W/PWR CORD WHT
31 4 6 PWR GND S PA V C 20 GRN SPLICE W/PWR CORD GRN

M-2 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Hardware Diagnostic Cables
Appendix M

33279G2 – ASC-2100 B Connector Loop Back Cable 13

From Item From Term From Fit To Item To Term To Fit Remarks
PB N C PB D C W/NEXT WIRE
PB D C PB AA C
PB P C PB E C W/NEXT WIRE
PB E C PB p C
PB i C PB F C W/NEXT WIRE
PB F C PB q C
PB R C PB Y C W/NEXT WIRE
PB Y C PB FF C
PB m C PB Z C W/NEXT WIRE
PB Z C PB HH C W/NEXT WIRE
PB HH C PB T C W/NEXT WIRE
PB T C PB a C W/NEXT WIRE
PB a C PB DD C
PB j C PB s C W/NEXT WIRE
PB s C PB A C
PB U C PB r C
PB V C PB t C
PB L C PB b C W/NEXT WIRE
PB b C PB GG C
PB M C PB c C W/NEXT WIRE
PB c C PB BB C
PB h C PB G C W/NEXT WIRE
PB G C PB CC C
PB g C PB d C W/NEXT WIRE
PB d C PB w C
PB n C PB H C W/NEXT WIRE
PB H C PB EE C W/NEXT WIRE
PB EE C PB k C W/NEXT WIRE
PB k C PB J C W/NEXT WIRE
PB J C PB u C
PB x C PB e C W/NEXT WIRE
PB e C PB C C
PB S C PB K C
PB z C PB f C W/NEXT WIRE
PB f C PB B C W/NEXT WIRE
PB B C PB W C W/NEXT WIRE
PB W C PB X C W/NEXT WIRE
PB X C PB v C W/NEXT WIRE
PB v C PB y C

ASC/3 Programming Manual M-3

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Hardware Diagnostic Cables
Appendix M

33279G3 – ASC-2100 C Connector Loop Back Cable 13

Wire Description Length From From From To To To

Remarks
No. of Wire (inches) Item Term Fit Item Term Fit
1 26 AWG WHT 8 PC P C PC i C W/NEXT WIRE
2 26 AWG WHT 8 PC i C PC K C W/NEXT WIRE
3 26 AWG WHT 8 PC K C PC M C
4 26 AWG WHT 8 PC R C PC J C W/NEXT WIRE
5 26 AWG WHT 8 PC J C PC L C W/NEXT WIRE
6 26 AWG WHT 8 PC L C PC DD C
7 26 AWG WHT 8 PC m C PC H C W/NEXT WIRE
8 26 AWG WHT 8 PC H C PC N C
9 26 AWG WHT 8 PC n C PC j C W/NEXT WIRE
10 26 AWG WHT 8 PC j C PC k C
11 26 AWG WHT 8 PC a C PC PP C
12 26 AWG WHT 8 PC u C PC HH C
13 26 AWG WHT 8 PC v C PC A C
14 26 AWG WHT 8 PC Z C PC B C
15 26 AWG WHT 8 PC Y C PC c C
16 26 AWG WHT 8 PC S C PC g C W/NEXT WIRE
17 26 AWG WHT 8 PC g C PC AA C
18 26 AWG WHT 8 PC T C PC h C W/NEXT WIRE
19 26 AWG WHT 8 PC h C PC z C
20 26 AWG WHT 8 PC p C PC G C W/NEXT WIRE
21 26 AWG WHT 8 PC G C PC CC C
22 26 AWG WHT 8 PC q C PC LL C W/NEXT WIRE
23 26 AWG WHT 8 PC LL C PC BB C
24 26 AWG WHT 8 PC V C PC f C W/NEXT WIRE
25 26 AWG WHT 8 PC f C PC KK C
26 26 AWG WHT 8 PC U C PC E C W/NEXT WIRE
27 26 AWG WHT 8 PC E C PC y C
28 26 AWG WHT 8 PC EE C PC F C W/NEXT WIRE
29 26 AWG WHT 8 PC F C PC NN C
30 26 AWG WHT 8 PC r C PC JJ C W/NEXT WIRE
31 26 AWG WHT 8 PC JJ C PC MM C
32 26 AWG WHT 8 PC t C PC x C W/NEXT WIRE
33 26 AWG WHT 8 PC x C PC w C
34 26 AWG WHT 8 PC W C PC e C W/NEXT WIRE
35 26 AWG WHT 8 PC e C PC C C
36 26 AWG WHT 8 PC X C PC D C W/NEXT WIRE
37 26 AWG WHT 8 PC D C PC GG C
38 26 AWG WHT 8 PC s C PC d C W/NEXT WIRE
39 26 AWG WHT 8 PC d C PC FF C W/NEXT WIRE
40 26 AWG WHT 8 PC FF C PC b C

M-4 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Hardware Diagnostic Cables
Appendix M

33279G4 – ASC-2100 D Connector Loop Back Cable 13

Wire Description Length From From From To To To

No. of Wire (inches) Item Term Fit Item Term Fit Remarks

1 26 AWG WHT 8 D 1 C D 57 C
2 26 AWG WHT 8 D 2 C D 50 C
3 26 AWG WHT 8 D 5 C D 60 C W/NEXT WIRE
4 26 AWG WHT 8 D 60 C D 49 C
5 26 AWG WHT 8 D 8 C D 61 C
6 26 AWG WHT 8 D 11 C D 55 C
7 26 AWG WHT 8 D 15 C D 56 C
8 26 AWG WHT 8 D 21 C D 58 C
9 26 AWG WHT 8 D 22 C D 9 C
10 26 AWG WHT 8 D 23 C D 38 C
11 26 AWG WHT 8 D 24 C D 3 C
12 26 AWG WHT 8 D 27 C D 12 C
13 26 AWG WHT 8 D 28 C D 36 C
14 26 AWG WHT 8 D 29 C D 10 C
15 26 AWG WHT 8 D 32 C D 6 C
16 26 AWG WHT 8 D 33 C D 4 C
17 26 AWG WHT 8 D 34 C D 47 C
18 26 AWG WHT 8 D 41 C D 20 C
19 26 AWG WHT 8 D 42 C D 13 C
20 26 AWG WHT 8 D 43 C D 16 C
21 26 AWG WHT 8 D 44 C D 14 C
22 26 AWG WHT 8 D 45 C D 19 C
23 26 AWG WHT 8 D 46 C D 18 C
24 26 AWG WHT 8 D 48 C D 17 C
25 26 AWG WHT 8 D 51 C D 25 C
26 26 AWG WHT 8 D 52 C D 30 C
27 26 AWG WHT 8 D 53 C D 26 C W/NEXT WIRE
28 26 AWG WHT 8 D 26 C D 40 C
29 26 AWG WHT 8 D 54 C D 31 C W/NEXT WIRE
30 26 AWG WHT 8 D 31 C D 35 C
31 26 AWG WHT 8 D 59 C D 37 C W/NEXT WIRE
32 26 AWG WHT 8 D 37 C D 39 C

ASC/3 Programming Manual M-5

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Hardware Diagnostic Cables
Appendix M

33279G5 – 25-Pin FSK Loop Back Diagnostic Cable 13

Wire Description Length From From From To To To

No. of Wire (inches) Item Term Fit Item Term Fit Remarks

1 26 AWG WHT 8 P3 9 C P3 3 C W/NEXT WIRE

2 26 AWG WHT 8 P3 3 C P3 4 C W/NEXT WIRE
3 26 AWG WHT 8 P3 4 C P3 14 C W/NEXT WIRE
4 26 AWG WHT 8 P3 14 C P3 15 C
5 26 AWG WHT 8 P3 22 C P3 2 C W/NEXT WIRE
6 26 AWG WHT 8 P3 2 C P3 1 C W/NEXT WIRE
7 26 AWG WHT 8 P3 1 C P3 17 C W/NEXT WIRE
8 26 AWG WHT 8 P3 17 C P3 20 C
9 26 AWG WHT 8 P3 10 C P3 5 C W/NEXT WIRE
10 26 AWG WHT 8 P3 5 C P3 7 C W/NEXT WIRE
11 26 AWG WHT 8 P3 7 C P3 21 C W/NEXT WIRE
12 26 AWG WHT 8 P3 21 C P3 18 C
13 26 AWG WHT 8 P3 23 C P3 19 C W/NEXT WIRE
14 26 AWG WHT 8 P3 19 C P3 8 C W/NEXT WIRE
15 26 AWG WHT 8 P3 8 C P3 6 C W/NEXT WIRE
16 26 AWG WHT 8 P3 6 C P3 16 C
17 R1 1 S R3 1 S INSTALL ASSY IN CONN
18 R1 2 S R4 1 S INSTALL ASSY IN CONN
19 R2 1 S R3 2 S INSTALL ASSY IN CONN
20 R2 2 S R4 2 S INSTALL ASSY IN CONN
21 26 AWG WHT 8 R3 2 S P3 12 C TRANSMIT 1
22 26 AWG WHT 8 R4 2 S P3 13 C TRANSMIT 2
23 26 AWG WHT 8 R3 1 S P3 24 C RECEIVE 1
24 26 AWG WHT 8 R4 1 S P3 25 C RECEIVE 2

M-6 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Hardware Diagnostic Cables
Appendix M

33279G6 – 9-Pin FSK Loop Back Cable 13

Description Length
Wire No. of Wire (inches) From Item From Term From Fit To Item To Term To Fit

1 26 AWG WHT 8 P7 1 C P7 4 C
2 26 AWG WHT 8 P7 2 C P7 5 C

33279G7 – 15-Pin SDLC Loop Back Cable 13

Description Length
Wire No. of Wire (inches) From Item From Term From Fit To Item To Term To Fit

1 26 AWG WHT 8 P5 1 C P5 5 C
2 26 AWG WHT 8 P5 3 C P5 7 C
3 26 AWG WHT 8 P5 9 C P5 13 C
4 26 AWG WHT 8 P5 11 C P5 15 C

33279G8 – 25-Pin Port 2 Loop Back Cable 13

Wire Description Length From From From To To To

No. of Wire (inches) Item Term Fit Item Term Fit Remarks

1 26 AWG WHT 6.5 P2 2 C P2 3 C TXD/RXD

2 26 AWG WHT 6.5 P2 4 C P2 5 C RTS/CTS
3 26 AWG WHT 6.5 P2 20 C P2 6 C DTR/DSR-TO NEXT WIRE
4 26 AWG WHT 6.5 P2 6 C P2 8 C DSR/DCD

100-1044-501 – 20-Pin Telemetry Interface Loopback

Connector 13

(mates to connector in front-panel slot used for optional modules)

Pins Listed Together are Soldered Together

5, 6
8, 9, 10, 11
13, 14
15, 16, 17

ASC/3 Programming Manual M-7

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Hardware Diagnostic Cables
Appendix M

33279G10 – 9-Pin Port 3A Test Cable 13

Description Length
Wire No. of Wire (inches) From Item From Term From Fit To Item To Term To Fit

1 26 AWG WHT 8 P1 1 C P1 7 C
2 26 AWG WHT 8 P1 2 C P1 3 C

Ethernet Crossover Cable 13

P1 to P2

1 3
2 6
3 1
4 2
5 4
6 5
7 7
8 8

32864G1 – ASC-2S/1000 Power Cable 13

Item # Wire Length (inches) From/Term To/Term

1 18 AWG GRN 6 P1-H P1-SHL

2 PWR CORD 18 AWG 3 COND 72 P1-C PWR-BLK (AC+)
3 PWR CORD 18 AWG 3 COND 72 P1-A PWR-WHT (AC-)
4 PWR CORD 18 AWG 3 COND 72 P1-H PWR-GRN (CG)

M-8 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 N
Pretimed Controller Operation
General Information 14

Pretimed operation provides the capability to extend walk on selected phases. Extending
walk means that the walk interval is expanded from its programmed time to an interval
equal to the phase’s maximum green minus ped clearance plus any ped clearance timed
during the phase’s yellow or yellow plus red clearance.
Use MM-2-7 to select the phases whose ped services are to be timed by the “Pretimed
Operation.” Pretimed phases are automatically converted to non-actuated phases with
vehicle recall.

Pretimed Operation 14

The diagram below shows how a pretimed ped service is timed. Even though the phase is
converted to non-actuated operation, the phase’s maximum green is used to establish the
length of the walk. Normally, the length of the walk will be the maximum green time for
the phase minus the time required by the ped clearance. However, if Coordinator is not
free, a hold is applied at end of walk, or the ped clear through yellow or yellow plus red
option is applied, the length of the pretimed walk may be reduced to the programmed walk
or expanded beyond the phase’s maximum green.

Time
Ped Time Walk Ped Clear Ped Clear thru Ped Clear thru
Yellow option Red option

Veh Time Max Green Yellow Red Red Transfer

Because a pretimed phase operates in non-actuated mode, the presence of a hold input
when the walk completes its timing will result in the walk signal being held on and the ped
service not being allowed to advance to ped clear. When the hold input is lifted, the ped
service will advance to ped clearance if there is an opposing call or if there is no opposing
call and the walk rest modifier isn’t applied.
As would be expected, the application of the ped clear through yellow or the ped clear
through yellow and red options requires less of the ped clear to be timed during the phase’s
green interval and allows the walk to be extended by the amount of ped clear timed in the
phase’s clearance intervals. It should be noted that a pretimed walk is never allowed to
extend beyond the end of the phase’s green interval.

ASC/3 Programming Manual N-1

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Pretimed Controller Operation
Appendix N

Pretimed Operation During Coordinated Operation 14

When the Coordinator isn’t free, it uses a phase’s specified split time to calculate the
amount of time the phase can remain green before it must advance to its clearance
intervals. During coordination, the maximum green calculated by the Coordinator replaces
the phase’s programmed maximum green when the length of the pretimed walk is
calculated.

N-2 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 O
Boot Mode Hyperterminal Transfer
(reserved for future use)

ASC/3 Programming Manual O-1

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
For your notes:

O- 2 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 P
ASC/3-2070 Software Utility
(reserved for future use)

ASC/3 Programming Manual P-1

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
For your notes:

P- 2 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Q
Diamond Intersection Application Notes
Diamond Intersection 17

The indicated movements (referred to as “phases” in the specification) are really “channel”
outputs. All movements except phases 2 and 6 and the 2/4/6/8 pedestrian outputs are
overlaps, as shown in Default Overlaps on page Q-6.

ASC/3 Programming Manual Q-1

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Diamond Intersection Application Notes
Appendix Q

Default Database Programming 17

To start Diamond Configuration, you must have a Diamond configured database loaded
and active in the controller. The ASC/3 Configurator allows the conversion of an ASC/3
database to Diamond Configuration.

To start a Diamond Configuration:

IMPORTANT • This operation is irreversible. Once a Diamond, it is always a Diamond.

1 Open the database file using the Configurator.

2 Click on the “Diamond Setting” check box. It should set all the programming values
described in this appendix.
3 Save the database with Diamond Configuration.

4 Use the appropriate ASC/3 SW Installer to download the Diamond configured

database to the controller.
5 After the database is downloaded, you can perform additional programming using the
controller’s front panel/keyboard.

MM-1-1-5

DIAMOND SEQUENCE 17 TO 20 SUBMENU

1. PHASE RING SEQUENCE AND ASSIGNMENT

2. PHASE COMPATIBILITY

3. BACKUP PREVENT PHASES

Q- 2 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Diamond Intersection Application Notes
Appendix Q

Diamond Menus and Configurations 17

Diamond Sequence & Phase Ring Assignment, MM-1-1-5-1 17

MM-1-1-5-1

PHASE RING ASSIGNMENT PHASE RING ASSIGNMENT

SEQUENCE 17 SEQUENCE 19
RING 1 2 3 4 9 11 12 1 0 0 0 0 RING 1 1 2 3 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
RING 2 15 16 5 6 7 8 13 0 0 0 0 RING 2 5 6 7 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
RING 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RING 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
RING 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RING 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
RING............. 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 RING............. 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
PHASE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 PHASE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
RING............. 1 0 1 1 2 0 2 2 RING............. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

SEQUENCE 18 SEQUENCE 20
RING 1 10 4 9 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 RING 1 1 2 3 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
RING 2 14 8 13 7 6 5 0 0 0 0 0 RING 2 5 6 7 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
RING 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RING 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
RING 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RING 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
RING............. 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 RING............. 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
PHASE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 PHASE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
RING............. 1 1 0 0 2 2 0 0 RING............. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

There are four Diamond phasing arrangements:

Sequence Type

17 (DIA4) Four-phase (channels)

18 (DIA3) Three-phase (channels)
19 (DIAQ) Eight-phase quad
20 (DIAS) Two independent four-phase

Phase and sequence information is defined by these NTCIP objects, which are factory pre-
programmed:
 phaseRing
 phaseConcurrency
 sequenceTable
This screen shows associated phase ring assignments and order-of-rotation for each
Diamond configuration. Refer to MM-1-1-1 HELP for more information.

ASC/3 Programming Manual Q-3

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Diamond Intersection Application Notes
Appendix Q

Diamond Phase Compatibility, MM-1-1-5-2 17

MM-1-1-5-2
PHASE COMPATIBILITY PHASE COMPATIBILITY
SEQUENCE 17 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SEQUENCE 19 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 . . . . X X X . . . . X . . . 1 . . . X X X X . . . . . . . .
2 . . . X . . . . . . . . . X X 2 . . . X X X X . . . . . . . .
3 . . . X . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . X X X X . . . . . . . .
4 . . . X . . . . . . . . . . . 4 . . . X X X X . . . . . . . .
5 . X X X . . . X . . . . . . . 5 X X X X . . . . . . . . . . .
6 X . . . . . . . . X X . . . . 6 X X X X . . . . . . . . . . .
7 X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 X X X X . . . . . . . . . . .
8 X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 X X X X . . . . . . . . . . .
9 . . . . X . . . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11 . . . . . X . . . . . . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12 . . . . . X . . . . . . . . . 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13 X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15 . X . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16 . X . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PHASE COMPATIBILITY PHASE COMPATIBILITY

SEQUENCE 18 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SEQUENCE 20 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 . . . X X . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . X X . . . . . . . . . .
2 . . . X X . . . . . . . . . . 2 . . . X X . . . . . . . . . .
3 . . . . . X . . . . . X . . . 3 . . . . . X X . . . . . . . .
4 . . . . . . X . . . . . X . . 4 . . . . . X X . . . . . . . .
5 X X . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 X X . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 X X . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 X X . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 . . X . . . . X . . . . . . . 7 . . X X . . . . . . . . . . .
8 . . . X . . . . X . . . . . . 8 . . X X . . . . . . . . . . .
9 . . . . . . X . . . . X . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10 . . . . . . . X . . . . X . . 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13 . . X . . . . . X . . . . . . 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14 . . . X . . . . . X . . . . . 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

There are four Diamond phasing arrangements:

Sequence Type
17 (DIA4) Four-phase (channels)
18 (DIA3) Three-phase (channels)
19 (DIAQ) Eight-phase quad
20 (DIAS) Two independent four-phase

Phase and sequence information is defined by NTCIP objects phaseRing,

phaseConcurrency, and sequenceTable for order-of-rotation. These variables are factory
pre-programmed. This screen shows phase concurrency for each Diamond configuration.
Refer to MM-1-1-2 HELP for more information.

Q- 4 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Diamond Intersection Application Notes
Appendix Q

Diamond Backup Prevent, MM-1-1-5-3 17

MM-1-1-5-3
BACKUP PREVENT PHASES BACKUP PREVENT PHASES
SEQUENCE 17 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SEQUENCE 19 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TIMING 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIMING 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BACKUP PREVENT PHASES BACKUP PREVENT PHASES

SEQUENCE 18 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SEQUENCE 20 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TIMING 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIMING 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

There are four Diamond phasing arrangements:

Sequence Type
17 (DIA4) Four-phase (channels)
18 (DIA3) Three-phase (channels)
19 (DIAQ) Eight-phase quad
20 (DIAS) Two independent four-phase

This screen shows backup prevent programming for each Diamond configuration. Refer
to MM-1-1-3 HELP for more information.

ASC/3 Programming Manual Q-5

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Diamond Intersection Application Notes
Appendix Q

Default Overlaps 17

Overlap Phase

A = 1+2+9+10
B = 5+6+13+14
I = 1+9+10
J = 3+11
K = 4+12
L = 5+13+14
M = 7+15
N = 8+16

Default Channel Assignments 17

Channel No. Source (Overlap) Type

1 9 (I) OLP
2 2 VEH
3 10 (J) OLP
4 11 (K) OLP
5 12 (L) OLP
6 6 VEH
7 13 (M) OLP
8 14 (N) OLP
9 1 (A) OLP
10 2 (B) OLP
11 3 (C) OLP
12 4 (D) OLP
13 2 PED
14 4 PED
15 6 PED
16 8 PED

Q- 6 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Diamond Intersection Application Notes
Appendix Q

Selection of Diamond Phasing 17

Selection of Diamond phasing is done by setting the controller Sequence Number to 17,
18, 19 or 20, where the sequence numbers are associated as follows:
 Sequence 1-16 = Phasing as programmed using screens MM-1-1-1 and MM-1-1-2.
 Sequence Number 17 = Four-Phase Diamond
 Sequence Number 18 = Three-Phase Diamond
 Sequence Number 19 = NEMA Eight-Phase Standard Quad
 Sequence Number 20 = Separate Intersections (two independent four-ring controllers)
Sequences 1-16 are controller sequences associated with a 16-phase quad controller. These
sequences are associated with certain phase ring assignments and concurrency
configurations programmable through screens MM-1-1-1 and MM-1-1-2. This data can be
read or written using NTCIP objects. The default phasing is a 16-phase quad controller.
Sequences 17-20 are used to specify Diamond intersection control, as listed above.
The data entry PWR START SEQ in MM-2-5 may be programmed to any valid sequence
and specifies the startup phasing/sequence. Because we have existing controller databases
in the field, the variable location used to store the Power Start Sequence variable may NOT
contain a zero. If you enter zero, the controller will automatically convert the entry to
Sequence 1.
All ASC/3 phasing and sequence selection, including the various Diamonds, is done as
follows (in order of priority):
1 Hardware Inputs – Four bits are set in the Controller Input Buffer (CIB) as signals
416 through 419 (bits A through D, respectively). These signals are set via selected
controller input pins (mapped inputs) or the Logic Processor. These inputs are used
only if HW ALT SEQ ENA (Hardware Alternate Sequence Enable) on MM-1-1-1 is set
to YES.
2 Coordinator Active Pattern – Refer to MM-3-2, SEQUENCE.
3 Time Base Active Step – Refer to MM-5-2, SEQUENCE.

4 ASC/3 Main Form – Sequence (UpDown control, Windows only).

For the programmed settings just listed, a value of zero is “no selection”. The controller
searches, in priority order, for a non-zero value, where any value between 1 and
MAXSEQLIMIT (currently 20) results in a Command Sequence Number. When the
controller reaches a point where the sequence change can take place, the Command
Sequence Number is set as Run Sequence Number. If there are no valid selections, the
controller defaults to Run Sequence Number 1. The Command and Run Sequence
numbers are displayed in the lower right corner of the Main Status Display and Controller
Status Display (MM-7-1). The display shows “CMD/RUN xx/yy”, where “xx” is the
commanded sequence and “yy” is the running sequence.

ASC/3 Programming Manual Q-7

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Diamond Intersection Application Notes
Appendix Q

There is a slight delay between the input selection of Sequence Number and the update of
Command Sequence Number. This prevents the controller from reacting to multiple
sequential changes in Command Sequence Number (a minor problem when using the
Windows UpDown control). The delay is approximately one second on the ASC/3 and
five seconds on the Windows platform. On the Windows platform a message shows the
“commanded” and “run” Sequence Number on the right of the Sequence UpDown
switch, so the user can see the delay between the “command” and the “run” number. The
message also shows the command source, where:
 DFT = default/startup

 HDW = hardware/remote inputs

 CRD = Coordinator

 TBS = Timebase
 MFM = Main Form selection.

Switching Sequences/Phasing 17

Switching between Sequences 1-16 simply results in selection of sequence data as defined
in NTCIP 1202 2.8.3.3 and as programmed using the screens at MM-1-1-1.
Switching to or from any sequence in the range 1-16 to 17, 18, 19, 20, or between any of
the sequences 17 through 20 requires certain transitions of timing phases. These transitions
are described as follows:

If the four-phase Diamond is running:

 Place vehicle calls everywhere, omit phases 3/4/7/8 and lift all vehicle detectors.

 When phases 5 and 9 are green, omit all phases and wait for both rings to go to green
rest.
 Leave all omits applied, apply Rest in Red and wait until no phases are timing.
 If the new sequence is 18-20, remove omits on phases 1 and 5 (start phases 1 and 5).
If the new sequence is 1-16, remove all omits (start phases at the top of the first
concurrent group).
 Finally, set the new run sequence and terminate the sequence transfer.

Q- 8 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Diamond Intersection Application Notes
Appendix Q

If the three-phase Diamond is running:

 Place vehicle calls everywhere, omit all phases except 1 and 5 and lift all vehicle
detectors.
 When phases 1 and 5 go green, omit all phases except 4 and 8.
 When phases 4 and 8 go green, omit all phases and wait for both phases to go to green
rest.
 Leave all omits applied, and apply Rest in Red and wait until no phases are timing.
 If the new sequence is 17, remove omits on phases 2 and 5 (start phases 2 and 5). If the
new sequence is 19 or 20, remove omits on phases 1 and 5 (start phases 1 and 5). In all
other cases, remove all omits (start phases at the top of the first concurrent group).
 Finally, set the new run sequence and terminate the sequence transfer.

In all other cases:

 Place vehicle calls everywhere, omit all phases, lift all vehicle detectors, apply Rest in
Red and wait until no phases are timing.
 If the new sequence is 17, remove omits on phases 2 and 5 (start phases 2 and 5). If the
new sequence is 18-20 remove omits on phases 1 and 5 (start phases 1 and 5). In all
other cases, remove all omits (start phases at the top of the first concurrent group).

Phase Timing and Detector Programming 17

To provide maximum flexibility for Diamond operation, and the ability to switch
dynamically between Diamond sequences, the ASC/3 makes maximum use of the ability
to store four Vehicle Timing Plans and four Vehicle Detector Plans.
Each Diamond sequence is automatically associated with Vehicle Timing Plans and
Vehicle Detector Plans as follows:
 Sequence 17 – Four-Phase Diamond – Automatic selections of Vehicle Timing Plan 4
and Vehicle Detector Plan 4.
 Sequence 18 – Three-Phase Diamond – Automatic selections of Vehicle Timing Plan
3 and Vehicle Detector Plan 3.
 Sequence 1-16, 19 – NTCIP/NEMA Eight-Phase Standard Quad – Automatic
selections of Vehicle Timing Plan 1 and Vehicle Detector Plan 1.
 Sequence 20 – Separate Intersections – Automatic selections of Vehicle Timing Plan 2
and Vehicle Detector Plan 2.
Programming of detectors for the Four-Phase and Three-Phase Diamonds are given in the
sections discussing these operations as these are critical to correct operation. The other
sequences can be programmed as the user wishes.

ASC/3 Programming Manual Q-9

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Diamond Intersection Application Notes
Appendix Q

Four-Phase Diamond 17

Four-Phase Diamond Mode 17

Refer to Controller Programming Status on page Q-25 for detailed sequence charts related to
this sequence diagram.

Sequence and Concurrency Programming 17

Ring sequence (order of rotation)

Traffic Standard ID Standard ID

Ring 1 Ring 2

2 15 1725

16 1825

25

3 35

4 5 45

9 L-R

101 N/A

11 3516

12 6 4516
1 Although phases 10 and 14 are shown in the ring and
concurrency programming, these phases are not active. This
is an internal operation.

Q-10 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Diamond Intersection Application Notes
Appendix Q

Traffic Standard ID Standard ID

Ring 1 Ring 2

1 16

7 17

8 18

13 R-L

141 N/A
1 Although phases 10 and 14 are shown in the ring and
concurrency programming, these phases are not active. This
is an internal operation.

Concurrency

Phase Ring Concurrent Phases Active

1 1 6-7-8-13-14 Yes

2 1 5-15-16 Yes

3 1 5 Yes

4 1 5 Yes

5 2 2-3-4-9-10 Yes

6 2 1-11-12 Yes

7 2 1 Yes

8 2 1 Yes

9 1 5 Yes

10 1 5 No

11 1 6 Yes

12 1 6 Yes

13 2 1 Yes

14 2 1 No

15 2 2 Yes

16 2 2 Yes

ASC/3 Programming Manual Q-11

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Diamond Intersection Application Notes
Appendix Q

Four-Phase Diamond Detector Programming 17

In the table below:

 The columns with black headings are programmed in MM-6-2, VEHICLE
DETECTOR SETUP, VEHICLE DETECTOR PLAN 4, and DET NUMBERs
1-18. All other data on these screens is not programmed.
 The column with a blue heading1 is programmed in MM-6-1, VEH DET TYPE / TS1
DET SELECT, DET TYPE, DET NUMBERs 1-18. All other data on this screen is
not programmed. Note that this programming is the same for all Diamond detectors.

Detector Assigned Switch Call Passage Delay Extend Detector

Number Phase Phase Option Option Time Time Type

1 6 9 YES NO 0.0 0.0 0

2 2 0 YES YES 2.0 0.0 0

3 3 11 YES YES 2.0 0.0 0

4 4 12 YES YES 2.0 0.0 0

5 2 13 YES NO 0.0 0.0 0

6 6 0 YES YES 2.0 0.0 0

7 7 15 YES YES 2.0 0.0 0

8 8 16 YES YES 2.0 0.0 0

9 6 9 YES NO 0.0 0.0 0

10 6 9 YES NO 0.0 0.0 0

11 2 0 YES YES 0.0 0.2 2

12 4 12 YES YES 0.0 0.2 2

13 2 13 YES NO 0.0 0.0 0

14 2 13 YES NO 0.0 0.0 0

15 6 0 YES YES 0.0 0.2 2

16 8 16 YES YES 0.0 0.2 2

17 3 11 YES YES 0.0 0.2 2

18 7 15 YES YES 0.0 0.2 2

1. This heading appears gray in a black-and-white copy.

Q-12 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Diamond Intersection Application Notes
Appendix Q

Coordination 17

To coordinate a Four-Phase Diamond controller:

 Split time for disabled phases must be zero.

 The sum of splits for phases 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, and 8 must equal the cycle length.
 Split time for phase 15 and phase 16 must be less than the split time for phase 2.
 Split time for phase 11 and phase 12 must be less than the split time for phase 6.
 The phase 9 split time, left to right clearance, must be less than the individual split time
of phase 2, phase 3 and phase 4.
 The phase 13 split time, right to left clearance, must be less than the individual split
time of phase 6, phase 7 and phase 8.
 The green time of each clearance phase, 9, 11, 12, 13, 15, and 16, is the phase split time
less the yellow plus red clearance time.
 The split time for phase 5 should be at least equal to the split time of phase 2, 3, or 4.
 The split time for phase 1 should be at least equal to the split time of phase 6, 7, or 8.
 Split times for each phase must satisfy minimum phase time plus allowance for short-
way (subtract) transition for the selected pattern. The minimum phase time is the larger
of minimum vehicle phase time or minimum pedestrian phase time. Minimum vehicle
phase time is the sum of minimum green plus yellow and red clearance times. Minimum
pedestrian phase time is the sum of walk plus pedestrian clearance plus yellow and red
clearance times, adjusted for pedestrian clearance through yellow or red clearance. If
Added Initial is enabled, minimum vehicle green is the larger of Minimum Green or
Max Initial.
 When selecting the coordinated phases, the selection of phase 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, or 8 is
allowed. Phases 1 and 5 must be selected coordinated phases. The user must place the
coordinated phase on recall. The selection of split time, recall and coordinated phase
follows the NTCIP split table object entry for NTCIP 1202 paragraph 2.5.9.
 The controller verifies all of the above information before setting coordination active.
If any of the above criteria fails, the controller will display one of the NTCIP reasons
on the “coordinator status screen” for plan failure. These reasons are described in
NTCIP 1202 paragraph 2.5.11.

ASC/3 Programming Manual Q-13

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Diamond Intersection Application Notes
Appendix Q

Three-Phase Diamond 17

Three-Phase Diamond Mode 17

Sequence and Concurrency Programming 17

Ring sequence (order of rotation)

Traffic Standard ID Standard ID

Ring 1 Ring 2

121 161 N/A

111 151 N/A

10 14 15

4 8 48

9 13 15

3 7 37

2 6 26

1 5 15
1 Although phases 11, 12, 15, and 16 are shown in the ring
and concurrency programming, these phases are not active.

Q-14 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Diamond Intersection Application Notes
Appendix Q

Concurrency

Phase Ring Concurrent Phases Active

1 1 5-6 Yes

2 1 5-6 Yes

3 1 7-13 Yes

4 1 8-14 Yes

5 2 1-2 Yes

6 2 1-2 Yes

7 2 3-9 Yes

8 2 4-10 Yes

9 1 7-13 Yes

10 1 8-14 Yes

11 1 15-16 No

12 1 15-16 No

13 2 3-9 Yes

14 2 4-10 Yes

15 2 11-12 No

16 2 11-12 No

ASC/3 Programming Manual Q-15

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Diamond Intersection Application Notes
Appendix Q

Three-Phase Diamond Detector Programming 17

In the table below:

 The columns with black headings are programmed in MM-6-2, VEHICLE
DETECTOR SETUP, VEHICLE DETECTOR PLAN 3, and DET NUMBERs
1-18. All other data on these screens is not programmed.
 The column with a blue heading2 is programmed in MM-6-1, VEH DET TYPE / TS1
DET SELECT, DET TYPE, DET NUMBERs 1-18. All other data on this screen is
not programmed. Note that this programming is the same for all Diamond detectors.

Detector Assigned Phase Switch Call Passage Delay Extend Detector

Number Phase Called Phase Option Option Time Time Type

1 1 1,9,10 0 YES YES 0.0 0.0 0

2 2 -- 0 YES YES 2.0 0.0 0

3 3 -- 0 YES YES 2.0 0.0 0

4 4 -- 0 YES YES 2.0 0.0 0

5 5 5,13,14 0 YES YES 0.0 0.0 0

6 6 -- 1 YES YES 2.0 0.0 0

7 7 -- 0 YES YES 2.0 0.0 0

8 8 -- 0 YES YES 2.0 0.0 0

9 9 9,10 0 YES YES 0.0 0.0 0

10 10 9,10 0 YES YES 0.0 0.0 0

11 2 -- 0 YES YES 0.0 0.2 2

12 4 -- 0 YES YES 0.0 0.2 2

13 13 13,14 0 YES YES 0.0 0.0 0

14 14 13,14 0 YES YES 0.0 0.0 0

15 6 -- 0 YES YES 0.0 0.2 2

16 8 -- 0 YES YES 0.0 0.2 2

17 3 -- 0 YES YES 0.0 0.2 2

18 7 -- 0 YES YES 0.0 0.2 2

2. This heading appears gray in a black-and-white copy.

Q-16 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Diamond Intersection Application Notes
Appendix Q

Coordination 17

To coordinate a Three-Phase Diamond controller:

 Split time for disabled phases must be zero.

 The sum of splits for phases 4, 9, 3, 2, and 1 must equal the cycle length.
 The sum of splits for phases 8, 13, 7, 6, and 5 must equal the cycle length.
 Split time for phases 10 and 14 must be set less than or equal to split time for phase 4
and 8. The controller has internal logic to control phases 10 and 14 even though they
are not part of the cycle length.
 The sum of splits for phases 1 and 2 must equal the sum of splits for phases 5 and 6.
 The sum of splits for phases 3 and 9 must equal the sum of splits for phases 7 and 13.
 The coordinated phases must be placed on recall.

ASC/3 Programming Manual Q-17

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Diamond Intersection Application Notes
Appendix Q

Separate Intersections 17

Separate Intersection Mode 17

Sequence and Concurrency Programming 17

Ring sequence (order of rotation)

Traffic Standard ID

Ring 1 Ring 2

1 5

2 6

3 7

4 8

91 131

101 141

111 151

121 161
1 Although phases 9 through 16 are shown in
the ring and concurrency programming,
these phases are not active.

Q-18 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Diamond Intersection Application Notes
Appendix Q

Concurrency

Phase Ring Concurrent Phases Active

1 1 5-6-7-8-13-14-15-16 Yes

2 1 5-6-7-8-13-14-15-16 Yes

3 1 5-6-7-8-13-14-15-16 Yes

4 1 5-6-7-8-13-14-15-16 Yes

5 2 1-2-3-4-9-10-11-12 Yes

6 2 1-2-3-4-9-10-11-12 Yes

7 2 1-2-3-4-9-10-11-12 Yes

8 2 1-2-3-4-9-10-11-12 Yes

9 1 5-6-7-8-13-14-15-16 No

10 1 5-6-7-8-13-14-15-16 No

11 1 5-6-7-8-13-14-15-16 No

12 1 5-6-7-8-13-14-15-16 No

13 2 1-2-3-4-9-10-11-12 No

14 2 1-2-3-4-9-10-11-12 No

15 2 1-2-3-4-9-10-11-12 No

16 2 1-2-3-4-9-10-11-12 No

ASC/3 Programming Manual Q-19

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Diamond Intersection Application Notes
Appendix Q

Separate Intersection Diamond Detector Programming 17

In the table below:

 The columns with black headings are programmed in MM-6-2, VEHICLE
DETECTOR SETUP, VEHICLE DETECTOR PLAN 2, and DET NUMBERs
1-18. All other data on these screens is not programmed.
 The column with a blue heading3 is programmed in MM-6-1, VEH DET TYPE / TS1
DET SELECT, DET TYPE, DET NUMBERs 1-18. All other data on this screen is
not programmed. Note that this programming is the same for all Diamond detectors.

Detector Assigned Phase Switch Call Passage Delay Extend Detector

Number Phase Called Phase Option Option Time Time Type

1 1 -- 0 YES YES 0.0 0.0 0

2 2 -- 0 YES YES 0.0 0.0 0

3 3 -- 0 YES YES 0.0 0.0 0

4 4 -- 0 YES YES 0.0 0.0 0

5 5 -- 0 YES YES 0.0 0.0 0

6 6 -- 0 YES YES 0.0 0.0 0

7 7 -- 0 YES YES 0.0 0.0 0

8 8 -- 0 YES YES 0.0 0.0 0

9 1 -- 2 YES YES 0.0 0.0 0

10 1 -- 2 YES YES 0.0 0.0 0

11 2 -- 0 YES YES 0.0 0.2 2

12 4 -- 0 YES YES 0.0 0.2 2

13 5 -- 6 YES YES 0.0 0.0 0

14 5 -- 6 YES YES 0.0 0.0 0

15 6 -- 0 YES YES 0.0 0.2 2

16 8 -- 0 YES YES 0.0 0.2 2

17 3 -- 0 YES YES 0.0 0.2 2

18 7 -- 0 YES YES 0.0 0.2 2

Note • Disable Phases 9 through 16 (does not require programming).

3. This heading appears gray in a black-and-white copy.

Q-20 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Diamond Intersection Application Notes
Appendix Q

Coordination 17

To coordinate a Separate Intersection controller:

 Split time for disabled phases must be zero.

 The sum of splits for phases 1, 2, 3, and 4 must equal the cycle length.
 The sum of splits for phases 5, 6, 7, and 8 must equal the cycle length.

ASC/3 Programming Manual Q-21

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Diamond Intersection Application Notes
Appendix Q

NEMA 17

Sequence and Concurrency Programming 17

Ring sequence (order of rotation)

Traffic Standard ID

Ring 1 Ring 2

1 5

2 6

3 7

4 8

91 131

101 141

111 151

121 161
1 Although phases 9 through 16 are shown in
the ring and concurrency programming,
these phases are not active.

Q-22 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Diamond Intersection Application Notes
Appendix Q

Concurrency

Phase Ring Concurrent Phases Active

1 1 5-6 Yes

2 1 5-6 Yes

3 1 7-8 Yes

4 1 7-8 Yes

5 2 1-2 Yes

6 2 1-2 Yes

7 2 3-4 Yes

8 2 3-4 Yes

9 1 13-14 No

10 1 13-14 No

11 1 15-16 No

12 1 15-16 No

13 2 9-10 No

14 2 9-10 No

15 2 11-12 No

16 2 11-12 No

ASC/3 Programming Manual Q-23

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Diamond Intersection Application Notes
Appendix Q

ASC/3 Changes 17

Controller Start/Flash, MM-2-5, PWR START SEQ 17

Refer to the Help screens for PWR START SEQ.

Coordinator Active Pattern, MM-3-2, SEQUENCE 17

The parameter SEQUENCE allows the coordinator to select a commanded sequence in

the range 0 through MAXSEQLIMIT (currently 20), where zero (0) is no selection.

Time Base Active Step, See MM-5-4, CONTROLLER SEQ 17

The parameter SEQUENCE (previously CONTROLLER SEQ) allows the time base to
select a commanded sequence in the range 0 through MAXSEQLIMIT (currently 20),
where zero (0) is no selection.

Commanded and Runtime Sequences 17

The Command and Run Sequence numbers are displayed in the lower right corner of the
Main Status Display and Controller Status Display (MM-7-1). The display shows
“CMD/RUN xx/yy”, where “xx” is the commanded sequence and “yy” is the running
sequence.

Q-24 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Diamond Intersection Application Notes
Appendix Q

Controller Programming Status 17

Pre-Programmed Database Selection Menus 17

There are several Diamond programming screens in the ASC/3 controller, as shown in
this section. With these screens you can view pre-programmed portions of the database
related to Diamond intersections.

Accessing the Diamond Programming Screens

The Controller Sequence Submenu has an option for “DIAMOND SEQUENCE 17 to 20”:

MM-1-1

CONTROLLER SEQUENCE SUBMENU

1. PHASE RING SEQUENCE AND ASSIGNMENT

2. PHASE COMPATIBILITY

3. BACKUP PREVENT PHASES

4. SIMULTANEOUS GAP PHASES

5. DIAMOND SEQUENCE 17 TO 20

The Diamond Sequence 17 to 20 Submenu has options for three Diamond screens:

MM-1-1-5

DIAMOND SEQUENCE 17 TO 20 SUBMENU

1. PHASE RING SEQUENCE AND ASSIGNMENT

2. PHASE COMPATIBILITY

3. BACKUP PREVENT PHASES

For more details about these screens, refer to the next three sections.

ASC/3 Programming Manual Q-25

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Diamond Intersection Application Notes
Appendix Q

Phase Ring Sequence and Assignment Screen, MM-1-1-5-1 17

MM-1-1-5-1
PHASE RING ASSIGNMENT PHASE RING ASSIGNMENT
SEQUENCE 17 SEQUENCE 19
RING 1 2 3 4 9 11 12 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RING 1 1 2 3 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
RING 2 15 16 5 6 7 8 13 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RING 2 5 6 7 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
RING 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RING 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
RING 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RING 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
RING............. 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 RING............. 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
PHASE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 PHASE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
RING............. 1 0 1 1 2 0 2 2 RING............. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

SEQUENCE 18 SEQUENCE 20
RING 1 10 4 9 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RING 1 1 2 3 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
RING 2 14 8 13 7 6 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RING 2 5 6 7 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
RING 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RING 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
RING 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RING 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
RING............. 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 RING............. 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
PHASE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 PHASE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
RING............. 1 1 0 0 2 2 0 0 RING............. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Q-26 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Diamond Intersection Application Notes
Appendix Q

Phase Compatibility Screen, MM-1-1-5-2 17

MM-1-1-5-2
PHASE COMPATIBILITY v > PHASE COMPATIBILITY v >
SEQUENCE 17 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SEQUENCE 19 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 . . . . X X X . . . . X . . . 1 . . . X X X X . . . . . . . .
2 . . . X . . . . . . . . . X X 2 . . . X X X X . . . . . . . .
3 . . . X . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . X X X X . . . . . . . .
4 . . . X . . . . . . . . . . . 4 . . . X X X X . . . . . . . .
5 . X X X . . . X . . . . . . . 5 X X X X . . . . . . . . . . .
6 X . . . . . . . . X X . . . . 6 X X X X . . . . . . . . . . .
7 X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 X X X X . . . . . . . . . . .
8 X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 X X X X . . . . . . . . . . .
9 . . . . X . . . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11 . . . . . X . . . . . . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12 . . . . . X . . . . . . . . . 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13 X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15 . X . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16 . X . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PHASE COMPATIBILITY PHASE COMPATIBILITY

SEQUENCE 18 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SEQUENCE 20 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 . . . X X . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . X X . . . . . . . . . .
2 . . . X X . . . . . . . . . . 2 . . . X X . . . . . . . . . .
3 . . . . . X . . . . . X . . . 3 . . . . . X X . . . . . . . .
4 . . . . . . X . . . . . X . . 4 . . . . . X X . . . . . . . .
5 X X . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 X X . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 X X . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 X X . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 . . X . . . . X . . . . . . . 7 . . X X . . . . . . . . . . .
8 . . . X . . . . X . . . . . . 8 . . X X . . . . . . . . . . .
9 . . . . . . X . . . . X . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10 . . . . . . . X . . . . X . . 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13 . . X . . . . . X . . . . . . 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14 . . . X . . . . . X . . . . . 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ASC/3 Programming Manual Q-27

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Diamond Intersection Application Notes
Appendix Q

Backup Prevent Phases Screen, MM-1-1-5-3 17

MM-1-1-5-3
BACKUP PREVENT PHASES v > BACKUP PREVENT PHASES > v
SEQUENCE 17 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SEQUENCE 19 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 6 5
1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16 . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BACKUP PREVENT PHASES BACKUP PREVENT PHASES

SEQUENCE 18 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SEQUENCE 20 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Q-28 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Diamond Intersection Application Notes
Appendix Q

NEMA Sequence Charts for Four-Phase Diamond 17

The tables in this section are sequence charts for the Diamond Four-Phase Diamond
Mode. Note the tables have a left and right side. On the left are the channel/overlap colors,
on the right are the corresponding phase/overlap colors. The four columns on each side
show channels/phases/overlaps for Ring 1, Overlap A, Ring 2, and Overlap B.

Sequences Starting From Phases 2 and 5 17

Channel/Overlap Phase/Overlap

From 25 to 35
2G AG 5G BG 2G AG 5G BG
2Y AY 5G BG 2Y AY 5G BG
3G AR 5G BG 3G AR 5G BG

From 25 to 45

2G AG 5G BG 2G AG 5G BG
2Y AY 5G BG 2Y AY 5G BG
4G AR 5G BG 4G AR 5G BG

From 25 to 16 R1 uses overlap I (1 + 9)

2G AG 5G BG 2G AG 5G BG
2Y AG 5G BG 2Y AG 5G BG
1G AG 5G BG 9G AG 5G BG
1G AG 5Y BG 9Y AG 5Y BG
1G AG 6G BG 1G AG 6G BG

From 25 to 17/18 R1 uses overlap I (1 + 9)

2G AG 5G BG 2G AG 5G BG
2Y AG 5G BG 2Y AG 5G BG
1G AG 5G BG 9G AG 5G BG
1G AG 5Y BY 9Y AG 5Y BY
1G AG 7G BR 1G AG 7G BR
1G AG 8G BR 1G AG 8G BR

ASC/3 Programming Manual Q-29

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Diamond Intersection Application Notes
Appendix Q

Sequences Starting From Phases 3 and 5 17

Channel/Overlap Phase/Overlap

From 35 to 25

3G AR 5G BG 3G AR 5G BG
3Y AR 5G BG 3Y AR 5G BG
2G AG 5G BG 2G AG 5G BG

From 35 to 45

3G AR 5G BG 3G AR 5G BG
3Y AR 5G BG 3Y AR 5G BG
4G AR 5G BG 4G AR 5G BG

From 35 to 16 R1 uses overlap J (3 +11)

3G AR 5G BG 3G AR 5G BG
3G AR 5Y BG 3Y AR 5Y BG
3G AR 6G BG 11G AR 6G BG
3Y AR 6G BG 11Y AR 6G BG
1G AG 6G BG 1G AG 6G BG

From 35 to 17/18 R1 uses overlap I (1 + 9)

3G AR 5G BG 3G AR 5G BG
3Y AR 5G BG 3Y AR 5G BG
1G AG 5G BG 9G AG 5G BG
1G AG 5Y BY 9Y AG 5Y BY
1G AG 7G BR 1G AG 7G BR
1G AG 8G BR 1G AG 8G BR

Q-30 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Diamond Intersection Application Notes
Appendix Q

Sequences Starting From Phases 4 and 5 17

Channel/Overlap Phase/Overlap

From 45 to 25

4G AR 5G BG 4G AR 5G BG
4Y AR 5G BG 4Y AR 5G BG
2G AG 5G BG 2G AG 5G BG

From 45 to 35

4G AR 5G BG 4G AR 5G BG
4Y AR 5G BG 4Y AR 5G BG
3G AR 5G BG 3G AR 5G BG

From 45 to 16 R1 uses overlap K (4 +12)

4G AR 5G BG 4G AR 5G BG
4G AR 5Y BG 4Y AR 5Y BG
4G AR 6G BG 12G AR 6G BG
4Y AR 6G BG 12Y AR 6G BG
1G AG 6G BG 1G AG 6G BG

From 45 to 17/18 R1 uses overlap I (1 + 9)

4G AR 5G BG 4G AR 5G BG
4Y AR 5G BG 4Y AR 5G BG
1G AG 5G BG 9G AG 5G BG
1G AG 5Y BY 9Y AG 5Y BY
1G AG 7G BR 1G AG 7G BR
1G AG 8G BR 1G AG 8G BR

ASC/3 Programming Manual Q-31

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Diamond Intersection Application Notes
Appendix Q

Sequences Starting From Phases 1 and 6 17

Channel/Overlap Phase/Overlap

From 16 to 17

1G AG 6G BG 1G AG 6G BG
1G AG 6Y BY 1G AG 6Y BY
1G AG 7G BR 1G AG 7G BR

From 16 to 18

1G AG 6G BG 1G AG 6G BG
1G AG 6Y BY 1G AG 6Y BY
1G AG 8G BR 1G AG 8G BR

From 16 to 25 R2 uses overlap L (5 +13)

1G AG 6G BG 1G AG 6G BG
1G AG 6Y BG 1G AG 6Y BG
1G AG 5G BG 1G AG 13G BG
1Y AG 5G BG 1Y AG 13Y BG
2G AG 5G BG 2G AG 5G BG

From 16 to 35/45 R2 uses overlap L (5 +13)

1G AG 6G BG 1G AG 6G BG
1G AG 6Y BG 1G AG 6Y BG
1G AG 5G BG 1G AG 13G BG
1Y AY 5G BG 1Y AY 13Y BG
3G AR 5G BG 3G AR 5G BG
4G AR 5G BG 4G AR 5G BG

Q-32 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Diamond Intersection Application Notes
Appendix Q

Sequences Starting From Phases 1 and 7 17

Channel/Overlap Phase/Overlap

From 17 to 16

1G AG 7G BR 1G AG 7G BR
1G AG 7Y BR 1G AG 7Y BR
1G AG 6G BG 1G AG 6G BG

From 17 to 18

1G AG 7G BR 1G AG 7G BR
1G AG 7Y BR 1G AG 7Y BR
1G AG 8G BR 1G AG 8G BR

From 17 to 25 R2 uses overlap M (7 +15)

1G AG 7G BR 1G AG 7G BR
1Y AG 7G BR 1Y AG 7Y BR
2G AG 7G BR 2G AG 15G BR
2G AG 7Y BR 2G AG 15Y BR
2G AG 5G BG 2G AG 5G BG

From 17 to 35/45 R2 uses overlap L (5 +13)

1G AG 7G BR 1G AG 7G BR
1G AG 7Y BR 1G AG 7Y BR
1G AG 5G BG 1G AG 13G BG
1Y AY 5G BG 1Y AY 13Y BG
3G AR 5G BG 3G AR 5G BG
4G AR 5G BG 4G AR 5G BG

ASC/3 Programming Manual Q-33

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Diamond Intersection Application Notes
Appendix Q

Sequences Starting From Phases 1 and 8 17

Channel/Overlap Phase/Overlap

From 18 to 16

1G AG 8G BR 1G AG 8G BR
1G AG 8Y BR 1G AG 8Y BR
1G AG 6G BG 1G AG 6G BG

From 18 to 17

1G AG 8G BR 1G AG 8G BR
1G AG 8Y BR 1G AG 8Y BR
1G AG 7G BR 1G AG 7G BR

From 18 to 25 R2 uses overlap N (8 +16)

1G AG 8G BR 1G AG 8G BR
1Y AG 8G BR 1Y AG 8Y BR
2G AG 8G BR 2G AG 16G BR
2G AG 8Y BR 2G AG 16Y BR
2G AG 5G BG 2G AG 5G BG

From 18 to 35/45 R2 uses overlap L (5 +13)

1G AG 8G BR 1G AG 8G BR
1G AG 8Y BR 1G AG 8Y BR
1G AG 5G BG 1G AG 13G BG
1Y AY 5G BG 1Y AY 13Y BG
3G AR 5G BG 3G AR 5G BG
4G AR 5G BG 4G AR 5G BG

Q-34 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 R
Warning Checks
Refer to page 14-2 through page 14-8 for displays and information about Warning Checks.
Warning Checks are a “work-in-progress” so the number of Warning Checks may increase
over time and some may be deleted. The current list of Warning Checks is described in this
appendix.
There are several categories of Warning Checks:
 Configuration
 Controller
 Coordinator
 Preemptor/TSP
 Time Base
 Detector
The first two numbers in the Warning Number refer to the related display. For example,
for Warning 1201, refer to MM-1-2.

ASC/3 Programming Manual R-1

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Warning Checks
Appendix R

Configuration Checks 18

Warning No. Configuration Warning Description

1201 Inactive Exclusive Ped Phase The phases below are programmed for Exclusive
Pedestrian operation in MM-1-2, but are not
programmed as active (in-use) in MM-1-2.
1202 In-Use Phase Not In Sequence The phases below are set as in-use in MM-1-2, but do
not appear in any of the sequences programmed in
MM-1-1-1.
Please keep in mind that this warning is acceptable if
the purpose of the In-Use Phase feature is to cause
the controller to ignore sequence phases
programmed via MM-1-1-1.
1501 Intersection Monitor (IM) feature The Port 2/C50S is enabled to run IM in MM-1-5-2,
not enabled but no valid Datakey is detected. A valid Datakey is
required to enable the IM feature.
1503 No Expanded System Detector Local detectors assigned to System Detectors 9 thru
Address 16 in MM-1-5-6 are ignored because the Expanded
System Detector Address in MM-1-5-6 is not
programmed.
1504 No Detectors for Expanded An Expanded System Detector Address is
Speed Detector (SD) Address programmed in MM-1-5-6, but no local detectors are
assigned to System Detectors 9 thru 16 in MM-1-5-6.
1505 No Drop-out time on Ethernet Drop-out time was set to 0 in MM-1-5-1. This
Port disables communication on any ports with priority
lower than Ethernet.
1506 No Drop-out time on Drop-out time was set to 0 in MM-1-5-2. This
Port 2/C50S disables communication on any ports with priority
lower than this port.
1507 No Drop-out time on Drop-out time was set to 0 in MM-1-5-3. This
Port 3A/C21S disables communication on any ports with priority
lower than this port.
1508 No Drop-out time on Drop-out time was set to 0 in MM-1-5-4. This
Port 3B/C22S disables communication on any ports with priority
lower than this port.

R- 2 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Warning Checks
Appendix R

Warning No. Configuration Warning Description

1509 Backup Time disabled for Ethernet Drop Time and Backup time is set to 0 in
Ethernet MM-1-5-1 and MM-1-5-5. This will not clear any
parameters (e.g.: Phase Omit, Pedestrian Omit,
Force-off, Stop Time, MAX 2, MAX Inhibit, Red
Rest, Red Clear, Omit, Ped Recycle) that were
commanded.
1510 Backup Time disabled for Port 3A Port 3A Drop Time and Backup time set to 0 in
MM-1-5-3 and MM-1-5-5. This will not clear any
parameters (e.g.: Phase Omit, Pedestrian Omit,
Force-off, Stop Time, MAX 2, MAX Inhibit, Red
Rest, Red Clear, Omit, Ped Recycle.) that were
commanded.
1511 Backup Time disabled for Port 3B Port 3B Drop Time and Backup time set to 0 in
MM-1-5-4 and MM-1-5-5. This will not clear any
parameters (e.g.: Phase Omit, Pedestrian Omit,
Force-off, Stop Time, MAX 2, MAX Inhibit, Red
Rest, Red Clear, Omit, Ped Recycle) that were
commanded.
1512 Backup Time disabled for Port 2 Port 2 Drop Time and Backup time set to 0 in
MM-1-5-4 and MM-1-5-5. This will not clear any
parameters (e.g.: Phase Omit, Pedestrian Omit,
Force-off, Stop Time, MAX 2, MAX Inhibit, Red
Rest, Red Clear, Omit, Ped Recycle) that were
commanded.
1801 LP Flag in User & ExtOption The same LP Flag is programmed in both the user
stmts programmable LP statements (1-100) and in the
Extended Option statements (101-200). This could
lead to conflicts in statement execution for the listed
LP flags.
1802 Invalid LP Statements enabled: Invalid Logic Processor Statements are enabled by
KBD the KBD’s (MM-1-8-1) listed LP statements.
1803 Invalid LPStmts enabled: Invalid Logic Processor Statements are enabled by
ACTION PLAN one of the action plan’s (MM-5-2) listed LP
statements.

ASC/3 Programming Manual R-3

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Warning Checks
Appendix R

Controller Checks 18

Warning No. Controller Warning Description

2101 Minimum Green Override Phase Minimum Green timing (MM-2-1) will be
overridden by Guaranteed Minimum Green
(MM-2-4) on the phases listed.
The indicated problem may be on any of four
possible timing plans. Be sure to check each timing
plan.
2102 Walk Override Phase Walk timing (MM-2-1) will be overridden by
Guaranteed Minimum Walk (MM-2-4) on the phases
listed.
The indicated problem may be on any of four
possible timing plans. Be sure to check each timing
plan.
2103 Ped Clear Override Phase Ped Clear timing (MM-2-1) will be overridden
by Guaranteed Minimum Ped Clear (MM-2-4) on the
phases listed.
The indicated problem may be on any of four
possible timing plans. Be sure to check each timing
plan.
2104 Yellow Clear Override Phase Yellow timing (MM-2-1) will be overridden by
Guaranteed Minimum Yellow (MM-2-4) on the
phases listed.
The indicated problem may be on any of four
possible timing plans. Be sure to check each timing
plan.
2105 Red Clear Override Phase Red timing (MM-2-1) will be overridden by
Guaranteed Minimum Red (MM-2-4) on the phases
listed.
The indicated problem may be on any of four
possible timing plans. Be sure to check each timing
plan.
2106 Invalid Pedestrian Time Setting Walk and Pedestrian timing should both be set
(MM-2-4) on the phases listed.
The indicated problem may be on any of four
possible timing plans. Be sure to check each timing
plan.

R- 4 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Warning Checks
Appendix R

Warning No. Controller Warning Description

2107 Invalid Exclusive Ped Timing Exclusive Pedestrian phases (MM-1-2) require non-
zero Walk and Pedestrian Clear times (MM-2-1) or
the Exclusive Pedestrian phase will not time. The
phases listed do not have valid timing entries.
The indicated problem may be on any of four
possible timing plans. Be sure to check each timing
plan.
2108 Delay Green will extend Walk If Walk time is less than Delay Green time (MM-2-1),
Walk timing is automatically extended so it
terminates with Delay Green. Delay Green is
controlling Walk timing on the phases listed.
The indicated problem may be on any of four
possible timing plans. Be sure to check each timing
plan.
2109 Delay Green will extend Walk2 If Walk2 time is less than Delay Green time
(MM-2-1), Walk2 timing is automatically extended so
it terminates with Delay Green. Delay Green is
controlling Walk2 timing on the phases listed.
The indicated problem may be on any of four
possible timing plans. Be sure to check each timing
plan.
2110 Phase Yellow & Guaranteed No yellow will be timed because Phase Yellow timing
Yellow are both zero (MM-2-1) and Guaranteed Min Yellow (MM-2-4) are
both set to zero on the phases listed.
The indicated problem may be on any of four
possible timing plans. Be sure to check each timing
plan.
2201 Included Phase is an Exclusive An Included Phase is also an XPED phase. Verify
Ped Phase programming in MM-2-2 for the overlaps listed.
2202 Included Phase Not In-Use An Included Phase is not part of the current
sequence (MM-1-2). Verify programming in MM-2-2
for the overlaps listed.
2203 Modifier phase not in-use A Modifier Phase is not part of the current sequence
(MM-1-2). Verify programming in MM-2-2 for the
overlaps listed.

ASC/3 Programming Manual R-5

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Warning Checks
Appendix R

Warning No. Controller Warning Description

2204 Protected Phase Not In-Use A Protected Phase is not part of the current sequence
(MM-1-2). Verify programming in MM-2-2 for the
overlaps listed.
2205 Pedestrian Protected Phase Not A Ped Protect Phase is not part of the current
In-Use sequence (MM-1-2). Verify programming in MM-2-2
for the overlaps listed.
2206 Lag phase Not In-Use A Lag Phase is not part of the current sequence
(MM-1-2). Verify programming in MM-2-2 for the
overlaps listed.
2207 Not Overlap Phase Not In-Use A Not Overlap Phase is not part of the current
sequence (MM-1-2). Verify programming in MM-2-2
for the overlaps listed.
2208 Flashing Green Phase Not In-Use A Flash Green Phase is not part of the current
sequence (MM-1-2). Verify programming in MM-2-2
for the overlaps listed
2209 Lead Phase Can not be a Protected A Lead Phase is also programmed as a Protected
Phase Phase. Verify programming in MM-2-2 for the
overlaps listed.
2210 A Lag Phase Can not be a A Lag Phase is also programmed as a Protected
Protected Phase Phase. Verify programming in MM-2-2 for the
overlaps listed.
2211 Lead Phase is not In-Use A Lead Phase is not part of the current sequence
(MM-1-2). Verify programming in MM-2-2 for the
overlaps listed.
2213 Modifier Phase is also an Included A Modifier Phase may not also be an Included Phase.
Phase Verify programming in MM-2-2 for the overlaps
listed.
2214 Not Overlap Phase is also an A Not Ovlp Phase may not also be an Included
Included Phase Phase. Verify programming in MM-2-2 for the
overlaps listed.
2215 Modifier Phase Must Use Type Modifier Phase programmed but Overlap Type is not
GRN-YEL set to GRN-YEL. Verify programming in MM-2-2
for the overlaps listed.
2216 Protected Phase Must Use Type Protected Phase programmed but Overlap Type is
OTHER not set to OTHER. Verify programming in MM-2-2
for the overlaps listed.

R- 6 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Warning Checks
Appendix R

Warning No. Controller Warning Description

2217 Lag Phase Must Use Type Lag Phase programmed but Overlap Type is not set
OTHER to OTHER. Verify programming in MM-2-2 for the
overlaps listed.
2218 Lead Phase Must Use Type Lead Phase programmed but Overlap Type is not set
OTHER to OTHER. Verify programming in MM-2-2 for the
overlaps listed.
2219 Not Overlap Phase Must Use Not Olp Phase programmed but Overlap Type is not
Type OTHER set to OTHER. Verify programming in MM-2-2 for
the overlaps listed.
2220 Ped Protect Phase Must Use Type Ped Protect Ph programmed but Overlap Type is not
OTHER set to OTHER. Verify programming in MM-2-2 for
the overlaps listed.
2221 Lag Phases Programmed with Lag Phase programmed but both LAG GRN and
Invalid Timing LAG YEL are not set. Verify programming in
MM-2-2 for the overlaps listed.
2222 Lag GRN or YEL Programmed Lag GRN or YEL time programmed but no Lag
with No Lag Phase Phase selected. Verify programming in MM-2-2 for
the overlaps listed.
2223 Lead Phases with No Advance Lead Phase programmed but without ADV GRN
Green Time time. Verify programming in MM-2-2 for the
overlaps listed.
2224 Lag Phase Must be an Included A Lag phase is programmed that is not also selected
Phase as an included phase in MM-2-2 for the overlaps
listed.
2225 No Lead Phase with ADV GRN ADV GRN time programmed but no Lead Phase
Time selected. Verify programming in MM-2-2 for the
overlaps listed.
2501 Inactive Startup Phase The startup phase(s) shown below, programmed in
MM-2-5, are invalid because they have not been
programmed as IN-USE in MM-1-2.
2502 No Startup Phase There are no startup phases programmed in MM-2-5
for the rings shown below OR the startup phase is
not programmed as IN-USE in MM-1-2.

ASC/3 Programming Manual R-7

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Warning Checks
Appendix R

Warning No. Controller Warning Description

2503 No Startup Overlap The overlaps listed below include start-up phases
programmed in MM-2-5, but are not programmed as
startup overlaps on that same menu. This means the
overlap(s) will start in RED and revert to normal
overlap operation following the first phase change.
2504 Inactive Flash Entry Phase The phase(s) listed below are programmed as flash
entry phases in MM-2-5, but are not programmed as
IN-USE in MM-1-2.
2505 Invalid Flash Exit Phase The phase(s) listed below are programmed as flash
exit phases in MM-2-5, but are not programmed as
IN-USE in MM-1-2.
2506 No Flash Exit Overlap The overlaps below do not have flash exit
programming in MM-2-5. On flash exit, the overlaps
will display RED until a phase change.
2507 Invalid Power Start Sequence The programmed PWR START SEQ in MM-2-5 is
invalid. It should be set to a value 1 through 16 for
normal operation and 17 through 20 for Diamond
phasing.
2601 Invalid Dual Entry Phases The programmed DUAL ENTRY PHASES in
MM-2-6-1 are incompatible with current sequence
programming. DUAL ENTRY must have a barrier to
cross.
2602 Invalid Conditional Service The programmed Conditional Service phase
Phases (MM-2-6-1) is also programmed with Backup
Prevent phases in MM-1-1-3. The Conditional
Service feature will not function if the preceding
phase is not allowed to back up from the
programmed Conditional Service phase.

R- 8 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Warning Checks
Appendix R

Coordinator Checks 18

Warning No. Coordinator Warning Description

3101 Manual Pattern Enabled Coordinator manual pattern is enabled in MM-3-1.

Other pattern commands will be ignored.
3201 Pattern Cycle Length < 30 Cycle length (MM-3-2) is less than 30 seconds in the
seconds patterns listed.
3202 Invalid Pattern Offset Offset (MM-3-2) is larger than the cycle length in the
patterns listed.
3204 Split Sum > Cycle Length or Sum of phase splits (MM-3-3) is greater than the cycle
100% length (MM-3-2) or 100% in the patterns listed.
3205 FLASH Option Enabled In FLASH option (MM-5-2) is found enabled in the
Action Plan following patterns’ action plan (MM-3-2). It will not
take effect when the programmed patterns listed are
active.
3206 Xartery Split Pattern Not Phase splits (MM-3-3) are not programmed in the
Programmed listed patterns (MM-3-2) with Xartery split pattern
programmed.
3207 Split Demand Pattern Not Phase splits (MM-3-3) are not programmed in the
Programmed listed patterns (MM-3-2) with split demand pattern
programmed.
3208 Multiple COS mapping The COS command (MM-3-2) is assigned to more
than one pattern in the listed patterns.
3209 TSP Free Pattern Cycle Too Short TSP free pattern cycle length (MM-3-2) is less than
the sum of phase minimum in the listed timing plans.
3210 TSP Free Split Pattern not Splits are not programmed in TSP free pattern
programmed (MM-3-2).
3301 Invalid Coordinated Phases Coordinated phases (MM-3-3) are not compatible
with each other in the split patterns listed.
3302 Missing Coordinated Phase At least one ring does not have a Coordinated phase
(MM-3-3) in the split patterns listed.
3303 Split phases Not In-Use Phase split (MM-3-3) is programmed but the phase is
not programmed as an active phase in the sequences
(MM-1-2) in the split patterns listed.

ASC/3 Programming Manual R-9

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Warning Checks
Appendix R

Warning No. Coordinator Warning Description

3304 Phase with Zero Split Setting phase split (MM-3-3) to zero will omit the
phase in coordination. Zero phase splits are found in
the split patterns listed.
3305 Phase Split < Phase Minimum Phase split (MM-3-3) is less than the phase minimum
Time time in the split patterns listed.
The indicated problem may be on any of four
possible timing plans. Be sure to check each timing
plan.

Preemptor/TSP Checks 18

Warning No. Preemptor/TSP Warning Description

4101 Preempt Inhibit Time > Inhibit Time will not be honored because it must be
Delay Time less than the Delay Time. Verify programming in
MM-4-1 for the preempts listed.
4102 Linked Preemptor Not Enabled PMT run links to another PMT (MM-4-1), which is
not enabled for the preempts listed.
4103 Maximum Time Enabled for High Max Presence Time (MX TM, MM-4-1) is ignored
Priority Preempt for high priority (Railroad) preempts. A non-zero
value is programmed for the preempts listed.
4104 Maximum Time Not Max Presence Time (MX TM, MM-4-1) is not
Programmed for low Priority programmed for low Priority (EVT) preempts.
Preempt Without this option, PMT will never exit if input gets
stuck ON. Verify programming in MM-4-1 for the
preempts listed.
4105 Track Clear MinGrn Programmed Trk Clr Min Grn programmed but without TC
with No Track Clear Phases phases. Verify programming in MM-4-1 for the
preempts listed.
4106 Dwell Ped on Phase with No Ped Dwell Ped selected on phase with no ped time
time programmed. Verify programming in MM-4-1 for
the preempts listed.
4107 Cycle Ped on Phase with No Ped Cycle Ped selected on phase with no ped time
Time programmed. Verify programming in MM-4-1 for
the preempts listed.

R-10 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Warning Checks
Appendix R

Warning No. Preemptor/TSP Warning Description

4108 PMT MN GRN Entry time < Preempt Minimum Green Entry time is less than
Guar MinGrn Guaranteed Minimum Green. Preempt will use
guaranteed time. Verify programming in MM-4-1 for
the preempts listed.
4109 Preempt Minimum Green Track Preempt Min Grn TrkClr time is less than Guar Min
Clear < Guaranteed Minimum Green. Preempt will use guaranteed time. Verify
Green programming in MM-4-1 for the preempts listed.
4110 Preempt YELLOW Entry time < Preempt Yellow Entry time is less than Guaranteed
Guaranteed Yellow Yellow time. Preempt will use guaranteed time.
Verify programming in MM-4-1 for the preempts
listed.
4111 Preempt YELLOW Track Clear Preempt Yellow TrkClr time is less than Guaranteed
Time < Guaranteed Yellow Yellow time. Preempt will use guaranteed time.
Verify programming in MM-4-1 for the preempts
listed.
4112 Preempt RED Entry Time < Preempt Red Entry time is less than Guaranteed Red
Guaranteed Red Clear time. Preempt will use guaranteed time. Verify
programming in MM-4-1 for the preempts listed.
4113 Preempt RED Track Clear Time Preempt Red TrkClr time is less than Guaranteed
< Guaranteed Red Red Clear time. Preempt will use guaranteed time.
Verify programming in MM-4-1 for the preempts
listed.
4114 Preempt WALK Entry Time < Preempt Walk Entry time is less than Guaranteed
Guaranteed WALK Ped Walk time. Preempt will override guaranteed
time. Verify programming in MM-4-1 for the
preempts listed.
4115 Preempt Ped Clear Entry time < Preempt Ped Clear Entry time is less than
Guaranteed PED CLEAR Guaranteed Ped Clear time. Preempt will override
guaranteed time. Verify programming in MM-4-1 for
the preempts listed.
4116 Preempt YELLOW Entry Time < Preempt Yellow Entry time is less than 3 secs. Verify
3 seconds programming in MM-4-1 for the preempts listed.
4117 Preempt YELLOW Track Clear Preempt Yellow Trk Clr time is less than 3 secs.
Time < 3 seconds Verify programming in MM-4-1 for the preempts
listed.

ASC/3 Programming Manual R-11

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Warning Checks
Appendix R

Warning No. Preemptor/TSP Warning Description

4118 GateDown Incorrectly Enabled GateDown Ext and Max Track Clear GRN must both
be non-zero for Gate Down feature to operate. The
preeempt runs (MM-4-1) listed have one and not the
other.
4119 PMT: MAX Trk Clr GRN is TOO MAX Trk Clr Grn must be greater than Trk Clr Grn
SMALL plus Trk Clr Gate Down Ext for the Gate Down
feature to work. Verify programming in MM-4-1 for
the preempts listed.
4120 PMT Track YEL > Programmed Preempt Track YEL (MM-4-1) is greater than the
Phase YEL programmed phase YEL time (MM-2-1).
Programmed Phase YEL time, not PMT TRACK
YEL, will be used for the preempts listed.
4121 PMT Track RED > Programmed Preempt Track RED (MM-4-1) is greater than the
Phase REDCLR programmed phase RED time (MM-2-1).
Programmed Phase RED time, not PMT TRACK
RED, will be used for the preempts listed.
4122 PMT Dwell YEL > Programmed Preempt Dwell YEL (MM-4-1) is greater than the
Phase YEL programmed phase YEL time (MM-2-1). The
Programmed Phase YEL time, not PMT DWELL
YEL, will be used for the preempts listed.
4123 PMT Dwell RED > Programmed Preempt Dwell RED (MM-4-1) is greater than the
Phase REDCLR programmed phase RED time (MM-2-1).
Programmed Phase RED time, not PMT DWELL
RED, will be used for the preempts listed.
4127 PMT Run not compatible with The listed Preempt runs will not activate while
Sequences 1-16 controller is running Sequences 1-16.
4128 PMT Run not compatible with The Preempt Run is not compatible with Diamond
Sequence 17 Sequence 17. The listed Preempt runs will not
activate while controller is running Sequence 17.
4129 PMT Run not compatible with The Preempt Run is not compatible with Diamond
Sequence 18 Sequence 18. The listed Preempt runs will not
activate while controller is running Sequence 18.
4130 PMT Run not compatible with The Preempt Run is not compatible with Diamond
Sequence 19 Sequence 19. The listed Preempt runs will not
activate while controller is running Sequence 19.

R-12 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Warning Checks
Appendix R

Warning No. Preemptor/TSP Warning Description

4131 PMT Run not compatible with The Preempt Run is not compatible with Diamond
Sequence 20 Sequence 20. The listed Preempt runs will not
activate while controller is running Sequence 20.
4132 PMT Run is not compatible with The listed Preempt runs will never activate because
any Sequence they are not compatible with any sequence.
4201 GateDown Preempt not GateDown operation only valid on high priority, not
programmed as RR bus, preempts. Both Input Filters must be bypassed for
Railroad operation. Refer to MM-4-2.
4301 TSP Feature Not Enabled A TSP plan is enabled in MM-4-3 but no valid
Datakey is detected. A valid Datakey is required to
enable the TSP feature.
4302 No TSP Phases in TSP Plan A TSP plan is enabled in MM-4-3 but no active phase
is programmed as a TSP phase in the TSP plans
listed.
4303 TSP Run is not compatible with The TSP Run is not compatible with Sequences 1
Sequences 1 through 16 thru 16. The listed TSP runs will not activate while
the controller is running Sequences 1-16.
4304 TSP Run not compatible The TSP Run is not compatible with Diamond
w/ Seq 17 Sequence 17-D4. The listed TSP runs will not
activate while the controller is running that sequence.
4305 TSP Run not compatible The TSP Run is not compatible with Diamond
w/ Seq 18 Sequence 18-D4. The listed TSP runs will not
activate while the controller is running that sequence.
4306 TSP Run not compatible The TSP Run is not compatible with Diamond
w/ Seq 19 Sequence 19-DS. The listed TSP runs will not
activate while the controller is running that sequence.
4307 TSP Run not compatible The TSP Run is not compatible with Diamond
w/ Seq 20 Sequence 20-DQ. The listed TSP runs will not
activate while the controller is running that sequence.
4308 TSP Run is not compatible with The listed TSP runs will never activate because they
any Sequence are not compatible with any sequence.

Time Base Checks 18

ASC/3 Programming Manual R-13

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Warning Checks
Appendix R

Warning No. Time Base Warning Description

5401 No Day Plan in Schedule Day plan (MM-5-4) is not programmed in the
schedules listed.
5402 No Date is Specified in Schedule The month, day of month or day of week (MM-5-4)
is not specified in the schedules listed.
5501 No Day Plan in Exception Day Day plan (MM-5-5) is not programmed in the
Plan exception day plans listed.
5502 Invalid Day in Exception Day The month, day of month or day of week (MM-5-5)
Plan is not specified correctly in the exception day plans
listed.

Detector Checks 18

Warning No. Detector Warning Description

6101 Veh Detector on Exclusive Ped The vehicle detectors below are assigned to Exclusive
phase Ped phases in MM-6-1 or MM-6-2. The assigned
vehicle detector inputs have no effect on Exclusive
Ped phases.
The detector assignment may be on any of four
possible detector plans. Be sure to check each vehicle
detector plan.
6401 Invalid Speed Detector The local detector assigned to two-detector speed
Assignment calculations in MM-6-4 must be an odd-numbered
detector. The next even-numbered detector is
automatically assigned as the second detector. The
listed two-detector speed detectors have an invalid
even-numbered detector assignment.

R-14 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 S
CIB/COB Tables
Controller Input Buffer (CIB) 19

Word Bit Word Bit

/Bit Num Input Signal Description /Bit Num Input Signal Description

0 0 0 Detector 1 1 0 16 Detector 17 (SD A1)

0 1 1 Detector 2 1 1 17 Detector 18 (SD A2)
0 2 2 Detector 3 1 2 18 Detector 19 (SD B1)
0 3 3 Detector 4 1 3 19 Detector 20 (SD B2)
0 4 4 Detector 5 1 4 20 Detector 21 (SD C1)
0 5 5 Detector 6 1 5 21 Detector 22 (SD C2)
0 6 6 Detector 7 1 6 22 Detector 23 (SD D1)
0 7 7 Detector 8 1 7 23 Detector 24 (SD D2)
0 8 8 Detector 9 (XD 1) 1 8 24 Detector 25
0 9 9 Detector 10 (XD 2) 1 9 25 Detector 26
0 10 10 Detector 11 (XD 3) 1 10 26 Detector 27
0 11 11 Detector 12 (XD 4) 1 11 27 Detector 28
0 12 12 Detector 13 (XD 5) 1 12 28 Detector 29
0 13 13 Detector 14 (XD 6) 1 13 29 Detector 30
0 14 14 Detector 15 (XD 7) 1 14 30 Detector 31
0 15 15 Detector 16 (XD 8) 1 15 31 Detector 32

2 0 32 Detector 33 3 0 48 Detector 49
2 1 33 Detector 34 3 1 49 Detector 50
2 2 34 Detector 35 3 2 50 Detector 51
2 3 35 Detector 36 3 3 51 Detector 52
2 4 36 Detector 37 3 4 52 Detector 53
2 5 37 Detector 38 3 5 53 Detector 54
2 6 38 Detector 39 3 6 54 Detector 55
2 7 39 Detector 40 3 7 55 Detector 56
2 8 40 Detector 41 3 8 56 Detector 57
2 9 41 Detector 42 3 9 57 Detector 58
2 10 42 Detector 43 3 10 58 Detector 59
2 11 43 Detector 44 3 11 59 Detector 60
2 12 44 Detector 45 3 12 60 Detector 61
2 13 45 Detector 46 3 13 61 Detector 62
2 14 46 Detector 47 3 14 62 Detector 63
2 15 47 Detector 48 3 15 63 Detector 64

ASC/3 Programming Manual S-1

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
CIB/COB Tables
Appendix S

Word Bit Word Bit

/Bit Num Input Signal Description /Bit Num Input Signal Description

4 0 64 Ped Detector 1 5 0 80 Phase 1 Hold

4 1 65 Ped Detector 2 5 1 81 Phase 2 Hold
4 2 66 Ped Detector 3 5 2 82 Phase 3 Hold
4 3 67 Ped Detector 4 5 3 83 Phase 4 Hold
4 4 68 Ped Detector 5 5 4 84 Phase 5 Hold
4 5 69 Ped Detector 6 5 5 85 Phase 6 Hold
4 6 70 Ped Detector 7 5 6 86 Phase 7 Hold
4 7 71 Ped Detector 8 5 7 87 Phase 8 Hold
4 8 72 Ped Detector 9 5 8 88 Phase 9 Hold
4 9 73 Ped Detector 10 5 9 89 Phase 10 Hold
4 10 74 Ped Detector 11 5 10 90 Phase 11 Hold
4 11 75 Ped Detector 12 5 11 91 Phase 12 Hold
4 12 76 Ped Detector 13 5 12 92 Phase 13 Hold
4 13 77 Ped Detector 14 5 13 93 Phase 14 Hold
4 14 78 Ped Detector 15 5 14 94 Phase 15 Hold
4 15 79 Ped Detector 16 5 15 95 Phase 16 Hold

6 0 96 Phase 1 Omit 7 0 112 Ped Omit Phase 1

6 1 97 Phase 2 Omit 7 1 113 Ped Omit Phase 2
6 2 98 Phase 3 Omit 7 2 114 Ped Omit Phase 3
6 3 99 Phase 4 Omit 7 3 115 Ped Omit Phase 4
6 4 100 Phase 5 Omit 7 4 116 Ped Omit Phase 5
6 5 101 Phase 6 Omit 7 5 117 Ped Omit Phase 6
6 6 102 Phase 7 Omit 7 6 118 Ped Omit Phase 7
6 7 103 Phase 8 Omit 7 7 119 Ped Omit Phase 8
6 8 104 Phase 9 Omit 7 8 120 Ped Omit Phase 9
6 9 105 Phase 10 Omit 7 9 121 Ped Omit Phase 10
6 10 106 Phase 11 Omit 7 10 122 Ped Omit Phase 11
6 11 107 Phase 12 Omit 7 11 123 Ped Omit Phase 12
6 12 108 Phase 13 Omit 7 12 124 Ped Omit Phase 13
6 13 109 Phase 14 Omit 7 13 125 Ped Omit Phase 14
6 14 110 Phase 15 Omit 7 14 126 Ped Omit Phase 15
6 15 111 Phase 16 Omit 7 15 127 Ped Omit Phase 16

8 0 128 Inhibit Max Term (R1) 9 0 144 Inhibit Max Term (R3)
8 1 129 Max 2 Selection (R1) 9 1 145 Max 2 Selection (R3)
8 2 130 Max 3 Selection (R1) 9 2 146 Max 3 Selection (R3)
8 3 131 Omit Red Clear (R1) 9 3 147 Omit Red Clear (R3)
8 4 132 Red Rest (R1) 9 4 148 Red Rest (R3)
8 5 133 Ped Recycle (R1) 9 5 149 Ped Recycle (R3)
8 6 134 Force Off (R1) 9 6 150 Force Off (R3)
8 7 135 Stop Time (R1) 9 7 151 Stop Time (R3)
8 8 136 Inhibit Max Term (R2) 9 8 152 Inhibit Max Term (R4)
8 9 137 Max 2 Selection (R2) 9 9 153 Max 2 Selection (R4)
8 10 138 Max 3 Selection (R2) 9 10 154 Max 3 Selection (R4)
8 11 139 Omit Red Clear (R2) 9 11 155 Omit Red Clear (R4)
8 12 140 Red Rest (R2) 9 12 156 Red Rest (R4)
8 13 141 Ped Recycle (R2) 9 13 157 Ped Recycle (R4)
8 14 142 Force Off (R2) 9 14 158 Force Off (R4)
8 15 143 Stop Time (R2) 9 15 159 Stop Time (R4)

S-2 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 CIB/COB Tables
Appendix S

Word Bit Word Bit

/Bit Num Input Signal Description /Bit Num Input Signal Description

10 0 160 Test A 11 0 176 Address Bit 0

10 1 161 Test B 11 1 177 Address Bit 1
10 2 162 Test C 11 2 178 Address Bit 2
10 3 163 Test D 11 3 179 Address Bit 3
10 4 164 Test E 11 4 180 Address Bit 4
10 5 165 I/O Mode Bit A 11 5 181 Track Switch Fail
10 6 166 I/O Mode Bit B 11 6 182 Ind. Lamp Control
10 7 167 I/O Mode Bit C 11 7 183 External Start
10 8 168 Cycle Bit 1 / TP Bit A 11 8 184 Automatic (Remote) Flash
10 9 169 Cycle Bit 2 / TP Bit B 11 9 185 Flash Status/Local Flash
10 10 170 Cycle Bit 3 11 10 186 MMU Status/CMU Flash
10 11 171 Offset Bit 1 11 11 187 MMU (CMU) Stop Time
10 12 172 Offset Bit 2 11 12 188 External Time Reset
10 13 173 Offset Bit 3 11 13 189 TBC On Line
10 14 174 Split Bit 1 / TP Bit C 11 14 190 Dimming Enable
10 15 175 Split Bit 2 / TP Bit D 11 15 191 IM Power Sense

12 0 192 Coordinator Sync 13 0 208 Alarm 1

12 1 193 TLM Extern Address Enable 13 1 209 Alarm 2
12 2 194 TLM Maintenance Required 13 2 210 Alarm 3
12 3 195 Disable Pretimed Operation 13 3 211 Alarm 4
12 4 196 External Start Disable 13 4 212 Alarm 5
12 5 197 Canada Pretimed Walk Adjust 13 5 213 Alarm 6
12 6 198 TLM Spare Input 1 13 6 214 Alarm 7
12 7 199 TLM Spare Input 2 13 7 215 Alarm 8
12 8 200 Logic Processor Action Plan 13 8 216 Alarm 9
12 9 201 Logic Processor Action Plan 13 9 217 Alarm 10
12 10 202 Logic Processor Action Plan 13 10 218 Alarm 11
12 11 203 Logic Processor Action Plan 13 11 219 Alarm 12
12 12 204 Logic Processor Action Plan 13 12 220 Alarm 13
12 13 205 Logic Processor Action Plan 13 13 221 Alarm 14
12 14 206 Logic Processor Action Plan 13 14 222 Alarm 15
12 15 207 Logic Processor Action Plan 13 15 223 Alarm 16

14 0 224 Call Non-Act I 15 0 240

14 1 225 Call Non-Act II 15 1 241
14.2 226 Walk-Rest Modifier 15 2 242
14 3 227 Minimum Recall 15 3 243
14 4 228 Interval Advance 15 4 244
14 5 229 Manual Control Enable 15 5 245
14 6 230 Stop Time All Rings 15 6 246
14 7 231 Phase Next in RX 15 7 247
14 8 232 Coordinator Free 15 8 248
14 9 233 Split Demand 1 15 9 249
14 10 234 Split Demand 2 15 10 250
14 11 235 Dual Coordination 15 11 251
14 12 236 15 12 252
14 13 237 15 13 253
14 14 238 15 14 254
14 15 239 15 15 255

ASC/3 Programming Manual S-3

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
CIB/COB Tables
Appendix S

Word Bit Word Bit

/Bit Num Input Signal Description /Bit Num Input Signal Description

16 0 256 17 0 272
16 1 257 17 1 273
16 2 258 17 2 274
16 3 259 17 3 275
16 4 260 17 4 276
16 5 261 17 5 277
16 6 262 17 6 278
16 7 263 17 7 279
16 8 264 17 8 280
16 9 265 17 9 281
16 10 266 17 10 282
16 11 267 17 11 283
16 12 268 17 12 284
16 13 269 17 13 285
16 14 270 17 14 286
16 15 271 17 15 287

18 0 288 Preempt 1 Call 19 0 304 KBD Locked Preempt 1 Call

18 1 289 Preempt 2 Call 19 1 305 KBD Locked Preempt 2 Call
18 2 290 Preempt 3 Call 19 2 306 KBD Locked Preempt 3 Call
18 3 291 Preempt 4 Call 19 3 307 KBD Locked Preempt 4 Call
18 4 292 Preempt 5 Call 19 4 308 KBD Locked Preempt 5 Call
18 5 293 Preempt 6 Call 19 5 309 KBD Locked Preempt 6 Call
18 6 294 Preempt 7 Call 19 6 310 KBD Locked Preempt 7 Call
18 7 295 Preempt 8 Call 19 7 311 KBD Locked Preempt 8 Call
18 8 296 Preempt 9 Call 19 8 312 KBD Locked Preempt 9 Call
18 9 297 Preempt 10 Call 19 9 313 KBD Locked Preempt 10 Call
18 10 298 TSP Check-Out Detector 1 19 10 314 TSP Check-In Detector 1
18 11 299 TSP Check-Out Detector 2 19 11 315 TSP Check-In Detector 2
18 12 300 TSP Check-Out Detector 3 19 12 316 TSP Check In Detector 3
18 13 301 TSP Check-Out Detector 4 19 13 317 TSP Check In Detector 4
18 14 302 TSP Check-Out Detector 5 19 14 318 TSP Check In Detector 5
18 15 303 TSP Check-Out Detector 6 19 15 319 TSP Check In Detector 6

20 0 320 Preempt 1 Gate Down 21 0 336 Preempt 1 Interlock

20 1 321 Preempt 2 Gate Down 21 1 337 Preempt 2 Interlock
20 2 322 Preempt 3 Gate Down 21 2 338 Preempt 3 Interlock
20 3 323 Preempt 4 Gate Down 21 3 339 Preempt 4 Interlock
20 4 324 Preempt 5 Gate Down 21 4 340 Preempt 5 Interlock
20 5 325 Preempt 6 Gate Down 21 5 341 Preempt 6 Interlock
20 6 326 Preempt 7 Gate Down 21 6 342 Preempt 7 Interlock
20 7 327 Preempt 8 Gate Down 21 7 343 Preempt 8 Interlock
20 8 328 Preempt 9 Gate Down 21 8 344 Preempt 9 Interlock
20 9 329 Preempt 10 Gate Down 21 9 345 Preempt 10 Interlock
20 10 330 Reserved (OFF) 21 10 346 TSP Advance Detector 1
20 11 331 Not Assigned (OFF) 21 11 347 TSP Advance Detector 2
20 12 332 21 12 348 TSP Advance Detector 3
20 13 333 21 13 349 TSP Advance Detector 4
20 14 334 21 14 350 TSP Advance Detector 5
20 15 335 21 15 351 TSP Advance Detector 6

S-4 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 CIB/COB Tables
Appendix S

Word Bit Word Bit

/Bit Num Input Signal Description /Bit Num Input Signal Description

22 0 352 Phase 1 Vehicle Call 23 0 368 Phase 1 Pedestrian Call

22 1 353 Phase 2 Vehicle Call 23 1 369 Phase 2 Pedestrian Call
22 2 354 Phase 3 Vehicle Call 23 2 370 Phase 3 Pedestrian Call
22 3 355 Phase 4 Vehicle Call 23 3 371 Phase 4 Pedestrian Call
22 4 356 Phase 5 Vehicle Call 23 4 372 Phase 5 Pedestrian Call
22 5 357 Phase 6 Vehicle Call 23 5 373 Phase 6 Pedestrian Call
22 6 358 Phase 7 Vehicle Call 23 6 374 Phase 7 Pedestrian Call
22 7 359 Phase 8 Vehicle Call 23 7 375 Phase 8 Pedestrian Call
22 8 360 Phase 9 Vehicle Call 23 8 376 Phase 9 Pedestrian Call
22 9 361 Phase 10 Vehicle Call 23 9 377 Phase 10 Pedestrian Call
22 10 362 Phase 11 Vehicle Call 23 10 378 Phase 11 Pedestrian Call
22 11 363 Phase 12 Vehicle Call 23 11 379 Phase 12 Pedestrian Call
22 12 364 Phase 13 Vehicle Call 23 12 380 Phase 13 Pedestrian Call
22 13 365 Phase 14 Vehicle Call 23 13 381 Phase 14 Pedestrian Call
22 14 366 Phase 15 Vehicle Call 23 14 382 Phase 15 Pedestrian Call
22 15 367 Phase 16 Vehicle Call 23 15 383 Phase 16 Pedestrian Call

24 0 384 Phase 1 Bike Call 25 0 400 Database CRC Bit 0

24 1 385 Phase 2 Bike Call 25 1 401 Database CRC Bit 1
24 2 386 Phase 3 Bike Call 25 2 402 Database CRC Bit 2
24 3 387 Phase 4 Bike Call 25 3 403 Database CRC Bit 3
24 4 388 Phase 5 Bike Call 25 4 404 Database CRC Bit 4
24 5 389 Phase 6 Bike Call 25 5 405 Database CRC Bit 5
24 6 390 Phase 7 Bike Call 25 6 406 Database CRC Bit 6
24 7 391 Phase 8 Bike Call 25 7 407 Database CRC Bit 7
24 8 392 Phase 9 Bike Call 25 8 408 Database CRC Bit 8
24 9 393 Phase 10 Bike Call 25 9 409 Database CRC Bit 9
24 10 394 Phase 11 Bike Call 25 10 410 Database CRC Bit 10
24 11 395 Phase 12 Bike Call 25 11 411 Database CRC Bit 11
24 12 396 Phase 13 Bike Call 25 12 412 Database CRC Bit 12
24 13 397 Phase 14 Bike Call 25 13 413 Database CRC Bit 13
24 14 398 Phase 15 Bike Call 25 14 414 Database CRC Bit 14
24 15 399 Phase 16 Bike Call 25 15 415 Database CRC Bit 15

26 0 416 Sequence A 27 0 432 Ped 2 Detector 1

26 1 417 Sequence B 27 1 433 Ped 2 Detector 2
26 2 418 Sequence C 27 2 434 Ped 2 Detector 3
26 3 419 Sequence D 27 3 435 Ped 2 Detector 4
26 4 420 Sequence E 27 4 436 Ped 2 Detector 5
26 5 421 Timing Plan Bit A 27 5 437 Ped 2 Detector 6
26 6 422 Timing Plan Bit B 27 6 438 Ped 2 Detector 7
26 7 423 Timing Plan Bit C 27 7 439 Ped 2 Detector 8
26 8 424 AUX switch input 27 8 440 Ped 2 Detector 9
26 9 425 27 9 441 Ped 2 Detector 10
26 10 426 Flash Sense Std (Standard) 27 10 442 Ped 2 Detector 11
26 11 427 Flash Sense Mod 27 11 443 Ped 2 Detector 12
26 12 428 Disable FYA Operation 27 12 444 Ped 2 Detector 13
26 13 429 Early FYA 27 13 445 Ped 2 Detector 14
26 14 430 Ignore STOP TIME in CRD 27 14 446 Ped 2 Detector 15
26 15 431 27 15 447 Ped 2 Detector 16

ASC/3 Programming Manual S-5

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
CIB/COB Tables
Appendix S

Word Bit Word Bit

/Bit Num Input Signal Description /Bit Num Input Signal Description

28 0 448 Overlap A Terminate Now 29 0 464 Overlap A Omit

28 1 449 Overlap B Terminate Now 29 1 465 Overlap B Omit
28 2 450 Overlap C Terminate Now 29 2 466 Overlap C Omit
28 3 451 Overlap D Terminate Now 29 3 467 Overlap D Omit
28 4 452 Overlap E Terminate Now 29 4 468 Overlap E Omit
28 5 453 Overlap F Terminate Now 29 5 469 Overlap F Omit
28 6 454 Overlap G Terminate Now 29 6 470 Overlap G Omit
28 7 455 Overlap H Terminate Now 29 7 471 Overlap H Omit
28 8 456 Overlap I Terminate Now 29 8 472 Overlap I Omit
28 9 457 Overlap J Terminate Now 29 9 473 Overlap J Omit
28 10 458 Overlap K Terminate Now 29 10 474 Overlap K Omit
28 11 459 Overlap L Terminate Now 29 11 475 Overlap L Omit
28 12 460 Overlap M Terminate Now 29 12 476 Overlap M Omit
28 13 461 Overlap N Terminate Now 29 13 477 Overlap N Omit
28 14 462 Overlap O Terminate Now 29 14 478 Overlap O Omit
28 15 463 Overlap P Terminate Now 29 15 479 Overlap P Omit

30 0 480 Preempt 1 Low Priority Call 31 0 496 Veh Detector Plan Bit A
30 1 481 Preempt 2 Low Priority Call 31 1 497 Veh Detector Plan Bit B
30 2 482 Preempt 3 Low Priority Call 31 2 498 Veh Detector Plan Bit C
30 3 483 Preempt 4 Low Priority Call 31 3 499
30 4 484 Preempt 5 Low Priority Call 31 4 500
30 5 485 Preempt 6 Low Priority Call 31 5 501
30 6 486 Preempt 7 Low Priority Call 31 6 502 Veh Detector Diag Plan Bit A
30 7 487 Preempt 8 Low Priority Call 31 7 503 Veh Detector Diag Plan Bit B
30 8 488 Preempt 9 Low Priority Call 31 8 504 Veh Detector Diag Plan Bit C
30 9 489 Preempt 10 Low Priority Call 31 9 505 Ped Detector Diag Plan Bit A
30 10 490 31 10 506 Ped Detector Diag Plan Bit B
30 11 491 31 11 507 Ped Detector Diag Plan Bit C
30 12 492 31 12 508
30 13 493 31 13 509
30 14 494 31 14 510
30 15 495 31 15 511

S-6 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 CIB/COB Tables
Appendix S

Word Bit Word Bit

/Bit Num Input Signal Description /Bit Num Input Signal Description

32 0 512 Ped Extend Detector 1 33 0 528 Red Extend Detector 1

32 1 513 Ped Extend Detector 2 33 1 529 Red Extend Detector 2
32 2 514 Ped Extend Detector 3 33 2 530 Red Extend Detector 3
32 3 515 Ped Extend Detector 4 33 3 531 Red Extend Detector 4
32 4 516 Ped Extend Detector 5 33 4 532 Red Extend Detector 5
32 5 517 Ped Extend Detector 6 33 5 533 Red Extend Detector 6
32 6 518 Ped Extend Detector 7 33 6 534 Red Extend Detector 7
32 7 519 Ped Extend Detector 8 33 7 535 Red Extend Detector 8
32 8 520 Ped Extend Detector 9 33 8 536 Red Extend Detector 9
32 9 521 Ped Extend Detector 10 33 9 537 Red Extend Detector 10
32 10 522 Ped Extend Detector 11 33 10 538 Red Extend Detector 11
32 11 523 Ped Extend Detector 12 33 11 539 Red Extend Detector 12
32 12 524 Ped Extend Detector 13 33 12 540 Red Extend Detector 13
32 13 525 Ped Extend Detector 14 33 13 541 Red Extend Detector 14
32 14 526 Ped Extend Detector 15 33 14 542 Red Extend Detector 15
32 15 527 Ped Extend Detector 16 33 15 543 Red Extend Detector 16

34 0 544 Ped 2 Call 1 35 0 560

34 1 545 Ped 2 Call 2 35 1 561
34 2 546 Ped 2 Call 3 35 2 562
34 3 547 Ped 2 Call 4 35 3 563
34 4 548 Ped 2 Call 5 35 4 564
34 5 549 Ped 2 Call 6 35 5 565
34 6 550 Ped 2 Call 7 35 6 566
34 7 551 Ped 2 Call 8 35 7 567
34 8 552 Ped 2 Call 9 35 8 568
34 9 553 Ped 2 Call 10 35 9 569
34 10 554 Ped 2 Call 11 35 10 570
34 11 555 Ped 2 Call 12 35 11 571
34 12 556 Ped 2 Call 13 35 12 572
34 13 557 Ped 2 Call 14 35 13 573
34 14 558 Ped 2 Call 15 35 14 574
34 15 559 Ped 2 Call 16 35 15 575

ASC/3 Programming Manual S-7

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
CIB/COB Tables
Appendix S

Controller Output Buffer (COB) 19

Word Bit Word Bit

/Bit Num Output Signal Description /Bit Num Output Signal Description

0 0 0 Phase 1 Green 1 0 16 Phase 1 Yellow

0 1 1 Phase 2 Green 1.1 17 Phase 2 Yellow
0 2 2 Phase 3 Green 1 2 18 Phase 3 Yellow
0 3 3 Phase 4 Green 1 3 19 Phase 4 Yellow
0 4 4 Phase 5 Green 1 4 20 Phase 5 Yellow
0 5 5 Phase 6 Green 1 5 21 Phase 6 Yellow
0 6 6 Phase 7 Green 1 6 22 Phase 7 Yellow
0 7 7 Phase 8 Green 1 7 23 Phase 8 Yellow
0 8 8 Phase 9 Green 1 8 24 Phase 9 Yellow
0 9 9 Phase 10 Green 1 9 25 Phase 10 Yellow
0 10 10 Phase 11 Green 1 10 26 Phase 11 Yellow
0 11 11 Phase 12 Green 1 11 27 Phase 12 Yellow
0 12 12 Phase 13 Green 1 12 28 Phase 13 Yellow
0 13 13 Phase 14 Green 1 13 29 Phase 14 Yellow
0 14 14 Phase 15 Green 1 14 30 Phase 15 Yellow
0 15 15 Phase 16 Green 1 15 31 Phase 16 Yellow

2 0 32 Phase 1 Red 3 0 48 Phase 1 Walk

2 1 33 Phase 2 Red 3 1 49 Phase 2 Walk
2 2 34 Phase 3 Red 3 2 50 Phase 3 Walk
2 3 35 Phase 4 Red 3 3 51 Phase 4 Walk
2 4 36 Phase 5 Red 3 4 52 Phase 5 Walk
2 5 37 Phase 6 Red 3 5 53 Phase 6 Walk
2 6 38 Phase 7 Red 3 6 54 Phase 7 Walk
2 7 39 Phase 8 Red 3 7 55 Phase 8 Walk
2 8 40 Phase 9 Red 3 8 56 Phase 9 Walk
2 9 41 Phase 10 Red 3 9 57 Phase 10 Walk
2 10 42 Phase 11 Red 3 10 58 Phase 11 Walk
2 11 43 Phase 12 Red 3 11 59 Phase 12 Walk
2 12 44 Phase 13 Red 3 12 60 Phase 13 Walk
2 13 45 Phase 14 Red 3 13 61 Phase 14 Walk
2 14 46 Phase 15 Red 3 14 62 Phase 15 Walk
2 15 47 Phase 16 Red 3 15 63 Phase 16 Walk

4 0 64 Phase 1 Ped Clear 5 0 80 Phase 1 Don’t Walk

4 1 65 Phase 2 Ped Clear 5 1 81 Phase 2 Don’t Walk
4 2 66 Phase 3 Ped Clear 5 2 82 Phase 3 Don’t Walk
4 3 67 Phase 4 Ped Clear 5 3 83 Phase 4 Don’t Walk
4 4 68 Phase 5 Ped Clear 5 4 84 Phase 5 Don’t Walk
4 5 69 Phase 6 Ped Clear 5 5 85 Phase 6 Don’t Walk
4 6 70 Phase 7 Ped Clear 5 6 86 Phase 7 Don’t Walk
4 7 71 Phase 8 Ped Clear 5 7 87 Phase 8 Don’t Walk
4 8 72 Phase 9 Ped Clear 5 8 88 Phase 9 Don’t Walk
4 9 73 Phase 10 Ped Clear 5 9 89 Phase 10 Don’t Walk
4 10 74 Phase 11 Ped Clear 5 10 90 Phase 11 Don’t Walk
4 11 75 Phase 12 Ped Clear 5 11 91 Phase 12 Don’t Walk
4 12 76 Phase 13 Ped Clear 5 12 92 Phase 13 Don’t Walk
4 13 77 Phase 14 Ped Clear 5 13 93 Phase 14 Don’t Walk
4 14 78 Phase 15 Ped Clear 5 14 94 Phase 15 Don’t Walk
4 15 79 Phase 16 Ped Clear 5 15 95 Phase 16 Don’t Walk

S-8 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 CIB/COB Tables
Appendix S

Word Bit Word Bit

/Bit Num Output Signal Description /Bit Num Output Signal Description

6 0 96 Overlap 1 Green 7 0 112 Overlap 1 Yellow

6 1 97 Overlap 2 Green 7 1 113 Overlap 2 Yellow
6 2 98 Overlap 3 Green 7 2 114 Overlap 3 Yellow
6 3 99 Overlap 4 Green 7 3 115 Overlap 4 Yellow
6 4 100 Overlap 5 Green 7 4 116 Overlap 5 Yellow
6 5 101 Overlap 6 Green 7 5 117 Overlap 6 Yellow
6 6 102 Overlap 7 Green 7 6 118 Overlap 7 Yellow
6 7 103 Overlap 8 Green 7 7 119 Overlap 8 Yellow
6 8 104 Overlap 9 Green 7 8 120 Overlap 9 Yellow
6 9 105 Overlap 10 Green 7 9 121 Overlap 10 Yellow
6 10 106 Overlap 11 Green 7 10 122 Overlap 11 Yellow
6 11 107 Overlap 12 Green 7 11 123 Overlap 12 Yellow
6 12 108 Overlap 13 Green 7 12 124 Overlap 13 Yellow
6 13 109 Overlap 14 Green 7 13 125 Overlap 14 Yellow
6 14 110 Overlap 15 Green 7 14 126 Overlap 15 Yellow
6 15 111 Overlap 16 Green 7 15 127 Overlap 16 Yellow

8 0 128 Overlap 1 Red 9 0 144 CF24 Det Slots 1,2 Reset

8 1 129 Overlap 2 Red 9 1 145 CF24 Det Slots 3,4 Reset
8 2 130 Overlap 3 Red 9 2 146 CF24 Det Slots 5,6 Reset
8 3 131 Overlap 4 Red 9 3 147 CF24 Det Slots 7,8 Reset
8 4 132 Overlap 5 Red 9 4 148 CF25 Det Slots 1,2 Reset
8 5 133 Overlap 6 Red 9 5 149 CF25 Det Slots 3,4 Reset
8 6 134 Overlap 7 Red 9 6 150 CF25 Det Slots 5,6 Reset
8 7 135 Overlap 8 Red 9 7 151 CF25 Det Slots 7,8 Reset
8 8 136 Overlap 9 Red 9 8 152 CF26 Det Slots 1,2 Reset
8 9 137 Overlap 10 Red 9 9 153 CF26 Det Slots 3,4 Reset
8 10 138 Overlap 11 Red 9 10 154 CF26 Det Slots 5,6 Reset
8 11 139 Overlap 12 Red 9 11 155 CF26 Det Slots 7,8 Reset
8 12 140 Overlap 13 Red 9 12 156 CF27 Det Slots 1,2 Reset
8 13 141 Overlap 14 Red 9 13 157 CF27 Det Slots 3,4 Reset
8 14 142 Overlap 15 Red 9 14 158 CF27 Det Slots 5,6 Reset
8 15 143 Overlap 16 Red 9 15 159 CF27 Det Slots 7,8 Reset

10 0 160 LS 1 Green/Walk 11 0 176 LS 1 Yellow/PC

10 1 161 LS 2 Green/Walk 11 1 177 LS 2 Yellow/PC
10 2 162 LS 3 Green/Walk 11 2 178 LS 3 Yellow/PC
10 3 163 LS 4 Green/Walk 11 3 179 LS 4 Yellow/PC
10 4 164 LS 5 Green/Walk 11 4 180 LS 5 Yellow/PC
10 5 165 LS 6 Green/Walk 11 5 181 LS 6 Yellow/PC
10 6 166 LS 7 Green/Walk 11 6 182 LS 7 Yellow/PC
10 7 167 LS 8 Green/Walk 11 7 183 LS 8 Yellow/PC
10 8 168 LS 9 Green/Walk 11 8 184 LS 9 Yellow/PC
10 9 169 LS 10 Green/Walk 11 9 185 LS 10 Yellow/PC
10 10 170 LS 11 Green/Walk 11 10 186 LS 11 Yellow/PC
10 11 171 LS 12 Green/Walk 11 11 187 LS 12 Yellow/PC
10 12 172 LS 13 Green/Walk 11 12 188 LS 13 Yellow/PC
10 13 173 LS 14 Green/Walk 11 13 189 LS 14 Yellow/PC
10 14 174 LS 15 Green/Walk 11 14 190 LS 15 Yellow/PC
10 15 175 LS 16 Green/Walk 11 15 191 LS 16 Yellow/PC

ASC/3 Programming Manual S-9

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
CIB/COB Tables
Appendix S

Word Bit Word Bit

/Bit Num Output Signal Description /Bit Num Output Signal Description

12.0 192 LS 1 Red/DW 13 0 208 LS 1 Green/Walk +

12 1 193 LS 2 Red/DW 13 1 209 LS 2 Green/Walk +
12 2 194 LS 3 Red/DW 13 2 210 LS 3 Green/Walk +
12 3 195 LS 4 Red/DW 13 3 211 LS 4 Green/Walk +
12 4 196 LS 5 Red/DW 13 4 212 LS 5 Green/Walk +
12 5 197 LS 6 Red/DW 13 5 213 LS 6 Green/Walk +
12 6 198 LS 7 Red/DW 13 6 214 LS 7 Green/Walk +
12 7 199 LS 8 Red/DW 13 7 215 LS 8 Green/Walk +
12 8 200 LS 9 Red/DW 13 8 216 LS 9 Green/Walk +
12 9 201 LS 10 Red/DW 13 9 217 LS 10 Green/Walk +
12 10 202 LS 11 Red/DW 13 10 218 LS 11 Green/Walk +
12 11 203 LS 12 Red/DW 13 11 219 LS 12 Green/Walk +
12 12 204 LS 13 Red/DW 13 12 220 LS 13 Green/Walk +
12 13 205 LS 14 Red/DW 13 13 221 LS 14 Green/Walk +
12 14 206 LS 15 Red/DW 13 14 222 LS 15 Green/Walk +
12 15 207 LS 16 Red/DW 13 15 223 LS 16 Green/Walk +

14 0 224 LS 1 Yellow/PC + 15 0 240 LS 1 Red/DW +

14 1 225 LS 2 Yellow/PC + 15 1 241 LS 2 Red/DW +
14 2 226 LS 3 Yellow/PC + 15 2 242 LS 3 Red/DW +
14 3 227 LS 4 Yellow/PC + 15 3 243 LS 4 Red/DW +
14 4 228 LS 5 Yellow/PC + 15 4 244 LS 5 Red/DW +
14 5 229 LS 6 Yellow/PC + 15 5 245 LS 6 Red/DW +
14 6 230 LS 7 Yellow/PC + 15 6 246 LS 7 Red/DW +
14 7 231 LS 8 Yellow/PC + 15 7 247 LS 8 Red/DW +
14 8 232 LS 9 Yellow/PC + 15 8 248 LS 9 Red/DW +
14 9 233 LS 10 Yellow/PC + 15 9 249 LS 10 Red/DW +
14 10 234 LS 11 Yellow/PC + 15 10 250 LS 11 Red/DW +
14 11 235 LS 12 Yellow/PC + 15 11 251 LS 12 Red/DW +
14 12 236 LS 13 Yellow/PC + 15 12 252 LS 13 Red/DW +
14 13 237 LS 14 Yellow/PC + 15 13 253 LS 14 Red/DW +
14 14 238 LS 15 Yellow/PC + 15 14 254 LS 15 Red/DW +
14 15 239 LS 16 Yellow/PC + 15 15 255 LS 16 Red/DW +

16 0 256 LS 1 Green/Walk - 17 0 272 LS 1 Yellow/PC -

16 1 257 LS 2 Green/Walk - 17 1 273 LS 2 Yellow/PC -
16 2 258 LS 3 Green/Walk - 17 2 274 LS 3 Yellow/PC -
16 3 259 LS 4 Green/Walk - 17 3 275 LS 4 Yellow/PC -
16 4 260 LS 5 Green/Walk - 17 4 276 LS 5 Yellow/PC -
16 5 261 LS 6 Green/Walk - 17 5 277 LS 6 Yellow/PC -
16 6 262 LS 7 Green/Walk - 17 6 278 LS 7 Yellow/PC -
16 7 263 LS 8 Green/Walk - 17 7 279 LS 8 Yellow/PC -
16 8 264 LS 9 Green/Walk - 17 8 280 LS 9 Yellow/PC -
16 9 265 LS 10 Green/Walk - 17 9 281 LS 10 Yellow/PC -
16 10 266 LS 11 Green/Walk - 17 10 282 LS 11 Yellow/PC -
16 11 267 LS 12 Green/Walk - 17 11 283 LS 12 Yellow/PC -
16 12 268 LS 13 Green/Walk - 17 12 284 LS 13 Yellow/PC -
16 13 269 LS 14 Green/Walk - 17 13 285 LS 14 Yellow/PC -
16 14 270 LS 15 Green/Walk - 17 14 286 LS 15 Yellow/PC -
16 15 271 LS 16 Green/Walk – 17 15 287 LS 16 Yellow/PC –

S-10 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 CIB/COB Tables
Appendix S

Word Bit Word Bit

/Bit Num Output Signal Description /Bit Num Output Signal Description

18 0 288 LS 1 Red/DW - 19 0 304 Phase 1 Detector Fail

18 1 289 LS 2 Red/DW - 19 1 305 Phase 2 Detector Fail
18 2 290 LS 3 Red/DW - 19 2 306 Phase 3 Detector Fail
18 3 291 LS 4 Red/DW - 19 3 307 Phase 4 Detector Fail
18 4 292 LS 5 Red/DW - 19 4 308 Phase 5 Detector Fail
18 5 293 LS 6 Red/DW - 19 5 309 Phase 6 Detector Fail
18 6 294 LS 7 Red/DW - 19 6 310 Phase 7 Detector Fail
18 7 295 LS 8 Red/DW - 19 7 311 Phase 8 Detector Fail
18 8 296 LS 9 Red/DW - 19 8 312 Phase 9 Detector Fail
18 9 297 LS 10 Red/DW - 19 9 313 Phase 10 Detector Fail
18 10 298 LS 11 Red/DW - 19 10 314 Phase 11 Detector Fail
18 11 299 LS 12 Red/DW - 19 11 315 Phase 12 Detector Fail
18 12 300 LS 13 Red/DW - 19 12 316 Phase 13 Detector Fail
18 13 301 LS 14 Red/DW - 19 13 317 Phase 14 Detector Fail
18 14 302 LS 15 Red/DW - 19 14 318 Phase 15 Detector Fail
18 15 303 LS 16 Red/DW – 19 15 319 Phase 16 Detector Fail

20 0 320 Phase 1 Timing 21 0 336 Phase 1 Next

20 1 321 Phase 2 Timing 21 1 337 Phase 2 Next
20 2 322 Phase 3 Timing 21 2 338 Phase 3 Next
20 3 323 Phase 4 Timing 21 3 339 Phase 4 Next
20 4 324 Phase 5 Timing 21 4 340 Phase 5 Next
20 5 325 Phase 6 Timing 21 5 341 Phase 6 Next
20 6 326 Phase 7 Timing 21 6 342 Phase 7 Next
20 7 327 Phase 8 Timing 21 7 343 Phase 8 Next
20 8 328 Phase 9 Timing 21 8 344 Phase 9 Next
20 9 329 Phase 10 Timing 21 9 345 Phase 10 Next
20 10 330 Phase 11 Timing 21 10 346 Phase 11 Next
20 11 331 Phase 12 Timing 21 11 347 Phase 12 Next
20 12 332 Phase 13 Timing 21 12 348 Phase 13 Next
20 13 333 Phase 14 Timing 21 13 349 Phase 14 Next
20 14 334 Phase 15 Timing 21 14 350 Phase 15 Next
20 15 335 Phase 16 Timing 21 15 351 Phase 16 Next

22 0 352 Phase 1 Vehicle Check 23 0 368 Phase 1 Pedestrian Check

22 1 353 Phase 2 Vehicle Check 23 1 369 Phase 2 Pedestrian Check
22 2 354 Phase 3 Vehicle Check 23 2 370 Phase 3 Pedestrian Check
22 3 355 Phase 4 Vehicle Check 23 3 371 Phase 4 Pedestrian Check
22 4 356 Phase 5 Vehicle Check 23 4 372 Phase 5 Pedestrian Check
22 5 357 Phase 6 Vehicle Check 23 5 373 Phase 6 Pedestrian Check
22 6 358 Phase 7 Vehicle Check 23 6 374 Phase 7 Pedestrian Check
22 7 359 Phase 8 Vehicle Check 23 7 375 Phase 8 Pedestrian Check
22 8 360 Phase 9 Vehicle Check 23 8 376 Phase 9 Pedestrian Check
22 9 361 Phase 10 Vehicle Check 23 9 377 Phase 10 Pedestrian Check
22 10 362 Phase 11 Vehicle Check 23 10 378 Phase 11 Pedestrian Check
22 11 363 Phase 12 Vehicle Check 23 11 379 Phase 12 Pedestrian Check
22 12 364 Phase 13 Vehicle Check 23 12 380 Phase 13 Pedestrian Check
22 13 365 Phase 14 Vehicle Check 23 13 381 Phase 14 Pedestrian Check
22 14 366 Phase 15 Vehicle Check 23 14 382 Phase 15 Pedestrian Check
22 15 367 Phase 16 Vehicle Check 23 15 383 Phase 16 Pedestrian Check

ASC/3 Programming Manual S-11

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
CIB/COB Tables
Appendix S

Word Bit Word Bit

/Bit Num Output Signal Description /Bit Num Output Signal Description

24 0 384 NEMA Status Bit A (R1) 25 0 400 NEMA Status Bit A (R3)
24 1 385 NEMA Status Bit B (R1) 25 1 401 NEMA Status Bit B (R3)
24 2 386 NEMA Status Bit C (R1) 25 2 402 NEMA Status Bit C (R3)
24 3 387 Coord Direction (R1) 25 3 403 Coord Direction (R3)
24 4 388 25 4 404
24 5 389 25 5 405
24 6 390 25 6 406
24 7 391 25 7 407
24 8 392 NEMA Status Bit A (R2) 25 8 408 NEMA Status Bit A (R4)
24 9 393 NEMA Status Bit B (R2) 25 9 409 NEMA Status Bit B (R4)
24 10 394 NEMA Status Bit C (R2) 25 10 410 NEMA Status Bit C (R4)
24 11 395 Coord Direction (R2) 25 11 411 Coord Direction (R4)
24 12 396 25 12 412
24 13 397 25 13 413
24 14 398 25 14 414
24 15 399 25 15 415

26 0 416 Preemptor 1 Status 27 0 432 Cycle Bit 1 / TP Bit A

26 1 417 Preemptor 2 Status 27 1 433 Cycle Bit 2 / TP Bit B
26 2 418 Preemptor 3 Status 27 2 434 Cycle Bit 3
26 3 419 Preemptor 4 Status 27 3 435 Offset Bit 1
26 4 420 Preemptor 5 Status 27 4 436 Offset Bit 2
26 5 421 Preemptor 6 Status 27 5 437 Offset Bit 3
26 6 422 Preemptor 7 Status 27 6 438 Split Bit 1 / TP Bit C
26 7 423 Preemptor 8 Status 27 7 439 Split Bit 2 / TP Bit D
26 8 424 Preemptor 9 Status 27 8 440
26 9 425 Preemptor 10 Status 27 9 441
26 10 426 27 10 442
26 11 427 27 11 443
26 12 428 27 12 444
26 13 429 Preemptor Flash 27 13 445
26 14 430 FALSE (always logical 0) 27 14 446
26 15 431 TRUE (always logical 1) 27 15 447

28 0 448 29 0 464
28 1 449 29 1 465
28 2 450 Crd Alarm 29 2 466
28 3 451 Crd Error 29 3 467
28 4 452 Crd Sync Out 29 4 468
28 5 453 Crd X Street Sync Out 29 5 469
28 6 454 Crd Free Status 29 6 470
28 7 455 Crd No Fault Flash 29 7 471
28 8 456 29 8 472
28 9 457 29 9 473
28 10 458 29 10 474
28 11 459 29 11 475
28 12 460 29 12 476
28 13 461 29 13 477
28 14 462 29 14 478
28 15 463 29 15 479

S-12 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 CIB/COB Tables
Appendix S

Word Bit Word Bit

/Bit Num Output Signal Description /Bit Num Output Signal Description

30 0 480 31 0 496
30 1 481 31 1 497
30 2 482 31 2 498
30 3 483 31 3 499
30 4 484 31 4 500
30 5 485 31 5 501
30 6 486 31 6 502
30 7 487 31 7 503
30 8 488 31 8 504
30 9 489 31 9 505
30 10 490 31 10 506
30 11 491 31 11 507
30 12 492 31 12 508
30 13 493 31 13 509
30 14 494 31 14 510
30 15 495 31 15 511

32 0 512 TOD Special Function 1 33 0 528 Auxiliary 1

32 1 513 TOD Special Function 2 33 1 529 Auxiliary 2
32 2 514 TOD Special Function 3 33 2 530 Auxiliary 3
32 3 515 TOD Special Function 4 33 3 531
32 4 516 TOD Special Function 5 33 4 532
32 5 517 TOD Special Function 6 33 5 533
32 6 518 TOD Special Function 7 33 6 534
32 7 519 TOD Special Function 8 33 7 535
32 8 520 TLM Special Function 1 33 8 536 Address Bit 0
32 9 521 TLM Special Function 2 33 9 537 Address Bit 1
32 10 522 TLM Special Function 3 33 10 538 Address Bit 2
32 11 523 TLM Special Function 4 33 11 539 Address Bit 3
32 12 524 TLM Special Function 5 33 12 540 Address Bit 4
32 13 525 TLM Special Function 6 33 13 541
32 14 526 TLM Special Function 7 33 14 542 Voltage Monitor
32 15 527 TLM Special Function 8 33 15 543 Fault Monitor

34 0 544 Automatic (Remote) Flash 35 0 560 Coord Special Function 1

34 1 545 Preempt CMU Interlock 35 1 561 Coord Special Function 2
34 2 546 Flashing Logic 1 Hz 35 2 562 Coord Special Function 3
34 3 547 Flashing Logic 1.67 Hz 35 3 563 Coord Special Function 4
34 4 548 Flashing Logic 5 Hz 35 4 564 Coord Special Function 5
34 5 549 Flashing Logic 6.25 Hz 35 5 565 Coord Special Function 6
34 6 550 Local Flash Status 35 6 566 Coord Special Function 7
34 7 551 MMU Flash Status 35 7 567 Coord Special Function 8
34 8 552 No Fault Flash Status 35 8 568 Preempt Special Function 1
34 9 553 WDOG 35 9 569 Preempt Special Function 2
34 10 554 TSP 1 Active Status 35 10 570 Preempt Special Function 3
34 11 555 TSP 2 Active Status 35 11 571 Preempt Special Function 4
34 12 556 TSP 3 Active Status 35 12 572 Preempt Special Function 5
34 13 557 TSP 4 Active Status 35 13 573 Preempt Special Function 6
34 14 558 TSP 5 Active Status 35 14 574 Preempt Special Function 7
34 15 559 TSP 6 Active Status 35 15 575 Preempt Special Function 8

ASC/3 Programming Manual S-13

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
CIB/COB Tables
Appendix S

Word Bit Word Bit

/Bit Num Output Signal Description /Bit Num Output Signal Description

36 0 576 37 0 592
36 1 577 37 1 593
36 2 578 37 2 594
36 3 579 37 3 595
36 4 580 37 4 596
36 5 581 37 5 597
36 6 582 37 6 598
36 7 583 37 7 599
36 8 584 37 8 600
36 9 585 37 9 601
36 10 586 37 10 602
36 11 587 37 11 603
36 12 588 37 12 604
36 13 589 37 13 605
36 14 590 37 14 606
36 15 591 37 15 607

38 0 608 39 0 624
38 1 609 39 1 625
38 2 610 39 2 626
38 3 611 39 3 627
38 4 612 39 4 628
38 5 613 39 5 629
38 6 614 39 6 630
38 7 615 39 7 631
38 8 616 39 8 632
38 9 617 39 9 633
38 10 618 39 10 634
38 11 619 39 11 635
38 12 620 39 12 636
38 13 621 39 13 637
38 14 622 39 14 638
38 15 623 39 15 639

40 0 640 41 0 656
40 1 641 41 1 657
40 2 642 41 2 658
40 3 643 41 3 659
40 4 644 41 4 660
40 5 645 41 5 661
40 6 646 41 6 662
40 7 647 41 7 663
40 8 648 41 8 664
40 9 649 41 9 665
40 10 650 41 10 666
40 11 651 41 11 667
40 12 652 41 12 668
40 13 653 41 13 669
40 14 654 41 14 670
40 15 655 41 15 671

S-14 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 CIB/COB Tables
Appendix S

Word Bit Word Bit

/Bit Num Output Signal Description /Bit Num Output Signal Description

42 0 672 Preempt 1 Status Bit A 43 0 688 Preempt 4 Status Bit A

42 1 673 Preempt 1 Status Bit B 43 1 689 Preempt 4 Status Bit B
42 2 674 Preempt 1 Status Bit C 43 2 690 Preempt 4 Status Bit C
42 3 675 Preempt 1 Status Bit D 43 3 691 Preempt 4 Status Bit D
42 4 676 Preempt 1 Status Bit E 43 4 692 Preempt 4 Status Bit E
42 5 677 Preempt 2 Status Bit A 43 5 693 Preempt 5 Status Bit A
42 6 678 Preempt 2 Status Bit B 43 6 694 Preempt 5 Status Bit B
42 7 679 Preempt 2 Status Bit C 43 7 695 Preempt 5 Status Bit C
42 8 680 Preempt 2 Status Bit D 43 8 696 Preempt 5 Status Bit D
42 9 681 Preempt 2 Status Bit E 43 9 697 Preempt 5 Status Bit E
42 10 682 Preempt 3 Status Bit A 43 10 698 Preempt 6 Status Bit A
42 11 683 Preempt 3 Status Bit B 43 11 699 Preempt 6 Status Bit B
42 12 684 Preempt 3 Status Bit C 43 12 700 Preempt 6 Status Bit C
42 13 685 Preempt 3 Status Bit D 43 13 701 Preempt 6 Status Bit D
42 14 686 Preempt 3 Status Bit E 43 14 702 Preempt 6 Status Bit E
42 15 687 43 15 703

44 0 704 Preempt 7 Status Bit A 45 0 720 Preempt 10 Status Bit A

44 1 705 Preempt 7 Status Bit B 45 1 721 Preempt 10 Status Bit B
44 2 706 Preempt 7 Status Bit C 45 2 722 Preempt 10 Status Bit C
44 3 707 Preempt 7 Status Bit D 45 3 723 Preempt 10 Status Bit D
44 4 708 Preempt 7 Status Bit E 45 4 724 Preempt 10 Status Bit E
44 5 709 Preempt 8 Status Bit A 45 5 725
44 6 710 Preempt 8 Status Bit B 45 6 726
44 7 711 Preempt 8 Status Bit C 45 7 727
44 8 712 Preempt 8 Status Bit D 45 8 728
44 9 713 Preempt 8 Status Bit E 45 9 729
44 10 714 Preempt 9 Status Bit A 45 10 730
44 11 715 Preempt 9 Status Bit B 45 11 731
44 12 716 Preempt 9 Status Bit C 45 12 732
44 13 717 Preempt 9 Status Bit D 45 13 733
44 14 718 Preempt 9 Status Bit E 45 14 734
44 15 719 45 15 735

46 0 736 47 0 752
46 1 737 47 1 753
46 2 738 47 2 754
46 3 739 47 3 755
46 4 740 47 4 756
46 5 741 47 5 757
46 6 742 47 6 758
46 7 743 47 7 759
46 8 744 47 8 760
46 9 745 47 9 761
46 10 746 47 10 762
46 11 747 47 11 763
46 12 748 47 12 764
46 13 749 47 13 765
46 14 750 47 14 766
46 15 751 47 15 767

ASC/3 Programming Manual S-15

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
For your notes:

S-16 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 T
Glossary
Introduction 20

There are three tables in this glossary of controller-related terms:

• Acronyms, on this page.
• Controller terms, page T-2.
• Abbreviations of Connector Pin Functions, page T-14.
For Abbreviations in Flash Status Messages, refer to page 12-69.

Acronyms 20

Acronym Meaning

AC Alternating Current
BIU Bus Interface Unit
CA Controller Assembly
CU Controller Unit
EPROM Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
FEPROM Flash Programmable Read Only Memory
ITS Intelligent Transportation Systems
MMU Malfunction Management Unit
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NTCIP National Transportation Communication for ITS Protocol
PROM Programmable Read Only Memory
RAM Random Access Memory

ASC/3 Programming Manual T-1

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Glossary
Appendix T

Acronym Meaning

ROM Read Only Memory

SDLC Synchronous Data Link Control
TF Terminals and Facilities
TSP Transit Signal Priority

Controller Terms 20

Term Meaning

Auxiliary Equipment Separate devices used to add supplementary features to a controller

assembly.
Barrier A barrier (compatibility line) is a reference point in the preferred
sequence of a multi-ring CU at which all rings are interlocked.
Barriers assure there will be no concurrent selection and timing of
conflicting phases for traffic movements in different rings. All rings
cross the barrier operate simultaneously to select and time phases
on the other side.
BIU Bus Interface Unit. A module used to interface the controller
with the field terminals and detector loops in a TS2 cabinet.
Cabinet An outdoor enclosure for housing the controller unit and
associated equipment.
Call A registration of a demand for right-of-way by traffic (vehicles or
pedestrians) to a controller unit.
Serviceable Conflicting call:
 Occurs on a conflicting phase not having the right-of-way at the
time the call is placed.
 Occurs on a conflicting phase, which is capable of responding to
a call.
 When occurring on a conflicting phase operating in an
occupancy mode, remains present until given its right-of-way.
Check An output from a controller unit that indicates the existence of an
unanswered call(s).

T-2 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Glossary
Appendix T

Term Meaning

Connector A device enabling outgoing and incoming electrical circuits to be

connected and disconnected without the necessity of installing and
removing individual wires leading from the control unit.
Not Used Connections - The "Not Used" connector pin
termination(s) are used exclusively to prevent interchangeability
with units already in use not in conformance to this publication.
These connector pins are not to be internally connected.
Reserved Connections - The "Reserved" connector pin
termination are used exclusively for future assignment by NEMA
of additional specific input/output functions. The control unit
does not recognize any "reserved" input as valid nor shall it provide
a valid output on a "Reserved" output.
Spare Connections - The "Spare" connector pin terminations are
exclusively for manufacturer specific applications. A controller
Assembly wired to utilize one of these connections may not be
compatible with all manufacturer's control units.
Controller Assembly A complete electrical device mounted in a cabinet for controlling
the operation of a traffic control signal.
 Flasher Controller Assembly - A complete electrical device for
flashing a traffic signal or beacon.
 Full-Traffic-Actuated Controller Assembly - A type of
traffic-actuated controller assembly in which means are provided
for traffic actuation on all approaches to the intersection.
 Isolated Controller Assembly - A controller assembly for
operating traffic signals not under master supervision.
 Master Controller Assembly - A controller assembly for
supervising a system of secondary controller assemblies.
 Master-Secondary Controller Assembly - A controller
assembly operating traffic signals and providing supervision of
other secondary controller assemblies.
 Occupancy Controller Assembly (Lane-Occupancy
Controller or Demand Controller, and Presence Controller)
- A traffic-actuated controller which responds to the presence of
vehicles within an extended zone of detection.

ASC/3 Programming Manual T-3

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Glossary
Appendix T

Term Meaning

Controller Assembly (continued)  Pedestrian-Actuated Controller Assembly - A controller

assembly in which intervals, such as pedestrian Walk and
clearance intervals, can be added to or included in the controller
cycle by the actuation of a pedestrian detector.
 Pretimed Controller Assembly - A controller assembly for the
operation of traffic signals with predetermined:
• Fixed cycle length(s).
• Fixed interval duration(s).
• Interval sequence(s).
 Secondary Controller Assembly (slave) - A controller
assembly which operates traffic signals under the supervision of
a master controller assembly.
 Semi-Traffic Actuated Controller Assembly - A type of
traffic-actuated controller assembly in which means are provided
for traffic actuation on one or more but not all approaches to the
intersection.
 Traffic-Actuated Controller Assembly - A controller
assembly for supervising the operation of traffic control signals
in accordance with the varying demands of traffic as registered
with the controller by detectors.
Controller Unit A controller unit is that portion of a controller assembly that is
devoted to the selection and timing of signal displays.
Digital Controller Unit - A controller unit wherein timing is
based upon a defined frequency source such as a 60-hertz
alternating current source.
Multi-ring Controller Unit - A multi-ring CU contains two or
more interlocked rings which are arranged to time in a preferred
sequence and to allow concurrent timing of all rings, subject to the
restraint on Barrier.
Single-Ring Controller Unit - A single-ring CU contains two or
more sequentially-timed and individually-selected conflicting
phases so arranged as to occur in an established order.
Concentration The largest of Scaled Occupancy or Scaled Volume expressed in
percent.

T-4 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Glossary
Appendix T

Term Meaning

Coordination The control of controller units in a manner to provide a

relationship between specific green indications at adjacent
intersections in accordance with a time schedule to permit
continuous operation of groups of vehicles along the street at a
planned speed.
Coordinator A device, program or routine which provides coordination.
Cycle The total time to complete one sequence of signalization around an
intersection. In an actuated CU, a complete cycle is dependent on
the presence of calls on all phases. In a pretimed CU unit it is a
complete sequence of signal indications.
Cycle Length The time period in seconds required for one complete cycle.
Density A measure of the concentration of vehicles, stated as the number
of vehicles per mile per lane.
Detection Advisory Detection - The detection of vehicles on one or more
intersection approaches solely for the purpose of modifying the
phase sequence and/or length for other approaches to the
intersection.
Passage Detection - The ability of a vehicle detector to detect the
passage of a vehicle moving through the zone of detection and to
ignore the presence of a vehicle stopped within the zone of
detection.
Presence Detection - The ability of a vehicle detector to sense
that a vehicle, whether moving or stopped, has appeared in its zone
of detection.
Zone of Detection - The area or zone that a vehicle detector can
detect a vehicle.
Detector A device for indicating the presence or passage of vehicles or
pedestrians.
Bi-directional Detector - A detector that is capable of being
actuated by vehicles proceeding in either of two directions and of
indicating in which of the directions the vehicles were moving.
Calling Detector - A registration of a demand during red interval
for right-of-way by traffic (vehicles or pedestrians) to a controller
unit.
Classification Detector - A detector that has the capability of
differentiating among types of vehicles.

ASC/3 Programming Manual T-5

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Glossary
Appendix T

Term Meaning

Detector (continued) Directional Detector - A detector that is capable of being

actuated only by vehicles proceeding in one specified direction.
Extension Detector - A detector that is arranged to register an
actuation at the controller unit only during the green interval for
that approach so as to extend the green time of the actuating
vehicles.
Infrared Detector - A detector that senses radiation in the infrared
spectrum.
Light-Sensitive Detector - A detector that utilizes a light-
sensitive device for sensing the passage of an object interrupting a
beam of light directed at the sensor.
Loop Detector - A detector that senses a change in inductance of
its inductive loop sensor by the passage or presence of a vehicle
near the sensor.
Magnetic Detector - A detector that senses changes in the earth's
magnetic field caused by the movement of a vehicle near its sensor.
Magnetometer Detector - A detector that measures the
difference in the level of the earth's magnetic forces caused by the
passage or presence of a vehicle near its sensor.
Nondirectional Detector - A detector that is capable of being
actuated by vehicles proceeding in any direction.
Pedestrian Detector - A detector that is responsive to operation
by or the presence of a pedestrian.
Pneumatic Detector - A pressure-sensitive detector that uses a
pneumatic tube as a sensor.
Pressure-Sensitive Detector - A detector that is capable of
sensing the pressure of a vehicle passing over the surface of its
sensor.
Radar Detector - A detector that is capable of sensing the passage
of a vehicle through its field of emitted microwave energy.
System Detector - Any type of vehicle detector used to obtain
representative traffic flow information.
Side-Fire Detector - A vehicle detector with its sensor located to
one side of the roadway.

T-6 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Glossary
Appendix T

Term Meaning

Detector (continued) Sound-Sensitive Vehicle Detector - A detector that responds to

sound waves generated by the passage of a vehicle near the surface
of the sensor.
Ultrasonic Detector - A detector that is capable of sensing the
passage or presence of a vehicle through its field of emitted
ultrasonic energy.
Video Detection - A detector that is responds the Video image or
changes in the Video image of a vehicle.
Detector Mode A term used to describe the operation of a detector channel output
when a presence detection occurs.
Pulse Mode - Detector produces a short output pulse when
detection occurs.
Controlled Output - The ability of a detector to produce a pulse
that has a predetermined duration regardless of the length of time
a vehicle is in the zone of detection.
Continuous-Presence Mode - Detector output continues if any
vehicle (first or last remaining) remains in the zone of detection.
Limited-Presence Mode - Detector output continues for a
limited period of time if vehicles remain in zone of detection.
Device Electromechanical Device - A device which is characterized by
electrical circuits utilizing relays, step switches, motors, etc.
Electronic Device - A device which is characterized by electrical
circuits utilizing vacuum tubes, resistors, capacitors, inductors and
which may include electromechanical and solid state devices.
Solid State Device - A device which is characterized by electrical
circuits, the active components of which are semi-conductors, to
the exclusion of electromechanical devices or tubes.
Dial The cycle timing reference or coordination input activating same.
Dial is also frequently used to describe the cycle.
Dwell The interval portion of a phase when present timing requirements
have been completed.

ASC/3 Programming Manual T-7

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Glossary
Appendix T

Term Meaning

Entry Dual Entry - Dual entry is a mode of operation (in a multi-ring

CU) in which one phase in each ring must be in service. If a call
does not exist in a ring when it crosses the barrier, a phase is
selected in that ring to be activated by the CU in a predetermined
manner.
Single Entry - Single entry mode of operation (in multi-ring CU)
in which a phase in one ring can be selected and timed alone if there
is no demand for service in a nonconflicting phase on parallel
ring(s).
Extension Unit The timing interval during the extensible portion which is
resettable by each detector actuation. The green interval of the
phase may terminate on expiration of the unit extension time.
Flasher A device used to open and close signal circuits at a repetitive rate.
Force Off A command to force the termination of the Green extension in
actuated mode or Walk Hold in the nonactuated mode of the active
phase. Termination is subject to presence of a serviceable
conflicting call.
Gap Reduction A feature whereby the "unit extension" or allowed time spacing
between successive vehicle actuation(s) on the phase displaying the
green in the extensible portion of the interval is reduced.
Hold A command that retains the existing Green interval.
Interconnect A means of remotely controlling some or all of the functions of a
traffic signal.
Interval The parts of the signal cycle during which signal indications do not
change.
Minimum Green Interval - The shortest green time of a phase. If
a time setting control is designated as "minimum green," the green
time shall be not less than that setting.
Pedestrian Clearance Interval - The first clearance interval for
the pedestrian signal following the pedestrian Walk indication.
Red Clearance Interval - A clearance interval which may follow
the yellow change interval during which both the terminating phase
and the next phase display Red signal indications.
Sequence, Interval - The order of appearance of signal indications
during successive intervals of a cycle.

T-8 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Glossary
Appendix T

Term Meaning

Interval (continued) Yellow Change Interval - The first interval following the green
interval in which the signal indication for that phase is yellow.
Manual Manual Operation - The operation of a controller assembly by
means of a hand-operated device(s). A push-button is an example
of such a device.
Manual Push-button - An auxiliary device for hand operation of
a controller assembly.
Maximum Green The maximum green time with a serviceable opposing actuation,
which may start during the initial portion.
Memory Detector Memory - The retention of a call for future utilization by
the controller assembly.
EPROM - Read-Only, non-volatile, semiconductor memory that
is erasable (via ultra-violet light) and reprogrammable.
FEPROM - Read-Only, non-volatile, semiconductor memory that
is electrical erasable reprogrammable.
Nonlocking Memory - A mode of actuated-controller-unit
operation which does not require detector memory.
Non-Volatile Memory - Read/Write memory that is capable of
data retention during periods when AC power is not applied for a
minimum period of 30 days.
PROM - Read-Only, non-volatile, semiconductor memory that
allows a program to reside permanently in a piece of hardware.
RAM - Semiconductor Read/Write volatile memory. Data is lost if
power is turned off.
ROM - Read-Only, non-volatile, semiconductor memory
manufactured with data content, permanently stored.
Volatile Memory - Read/Write memory that loses data when
power is removed.
MMU Malfunction Management Unit - A device used to detect and
respond to improper and conflicting signals and improper
operating voltages in a traffic control system.
Modular Design A device concept such that functions are sectioned into units which
can be readily exchanged with similar units.
NTCIP National Transportation Communication for ITS Protocol

ASC/3 Programming Manual T-9

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Glossary
Appendix T

Term Meaning

Occupancy Actual - The percent of time that vehicles passing a point occupy
the roadway during a period in time. Typically expressed in Percent
of occupied per Hour or Vehicles per Hour per Lane.
Scaled - The percentage that the Actual Occupancy when
compared to a stated maximum. The stated maximum is
considered to be 100% use of the roadway.
Offset Offset is the time relationship, expressed in seconds or percent of
cycle length, determined by the difference between a defined point
in the coordinated green and a system reference point.
Omit Phase A command that causes omission of a selected phase.
(Special Skip, Force Skip)
Overlap A Green indication that allows traffic movement during the green
intervals of and clearance intervals between two or more phases.
Passage Time The time allowed for a vehicle to travel at a selected speed from the
detector to the stop line.
Pattern A unique set of coordination parameters (cycle, value, split values,
offset value, and sequence).
Phase Conflicting Phases - Conflicting phases are two or more traffic
phases which will cause interfering traffic movements if operated
concurrently.
Interrupted Phases - Timing when the preemptor tries to start.
Nonconflicting Phase - Nonconflicting phases are two or more
traffic phases which will not cause interfering traffic movements if
operated concurrently.
Parent Phase - A traffic phase with which a subordinate phase is
associated.
Pedestrian Phase - A traffic phase allocated to pedestrian traffic
which may provide a right-of-way pedestrian indication either
concurrently with one or more vehicular phases, or to the exclusion
of all vehicular phases.
Phase Sequence - A predetermined order in which the phases of
a cycle occur.
Traffic Phase - Those green, change and clearance intervals in a
cycle assigned to any independent movement(s) of traffic.
Vehicular Phase - A vehicular phase is a phase which is allocated
to vehicular traffic movement as timed by the controller unit.

T-10 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Glossary
Appendix T

Term Meaning

Portion Extensible Portion - That portion of the green interval of an

actuated phase following the initial portion which may be extended,
for example, by traffic actuation.
Initial Portion - The first timed portion of the green interval in an
actuated controller unit:
Fixed Initial Portion - A preset initial portion that does not
change.
Computed Initial Portion - An initial portion which is traffic
adjusted.
Maximum Initial Portion - The limit of the computed initial
portion.
Minimum Initial Portion - Refer to "Fixed Initial Portion"
Added Initial Portion - An increment of time added to the
minimum initial portion in response to vehicle actuation.
Interval Portion - A discrete subdivision of an interval during
which the signals do not change.
Preemption The transfer of the normal control of signals to a special signal
control mode for the purpose of servicing railroad crossings,
emergency vehicle passage, mass transit vehicle passage, and other
special tasks, the control of which require terminating normal
traffic control to provide the priority needs of the special task.
Preemptor, Traffic Controller A device or program/routine which provides preemption.
Preferred Sequence Normal order of phase selection within a ring with calls on all
phases.
Progression The act of various controller units providing specific green
indications in accordance with a time schedule to permit
continuous operation of groups of vehicles along the street at a
planned speed.
Red Indication, Minimum Provision within the controller unit to assure a minimum Red
(Red Revert) signal indication in a phase following the Yellow change interval of
that phase.
Rest The interval portion of a phase when present timing requirements
have been completed.
Ring A ring consists of two or more sequentially-timed and
individually-selected conflicting phases so arranged as to occur in
an established order.

ASC/3 Programming Manual T-11

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Glossary
Appendix T

Term Meaning

SDLC Synchronous Data Link Control - A protocol for transfer of data

between the controller, MMU and BIUs in a TS2 cabinet.
Signal A device which is electrically-operated by a controller assembly and
which communicates a prescribed action (or actions) to traffic.
Speed The speed of vehicles passing a point in the roadway during a
period in time. Typically expressed in Average Miles per Hour or
Average Miles per Hour per Lane.
Split The segment of the cycle length allocated to each phase or interval
that may occur (expressed in percent or seconds). In an actuated
controller unit, split is the time in the cycle allocated to a phase. In
a pretimed controller unit, split is the time allocated to an interval.
Suppressors Suppressor, Radio Interference - A device inserted in the power
line in the controller assembly (cabinet) that reduces the radio
interference.
Suppressor, Transient - A device which serves to reduce transient
over-voltages.
Switch Auto/Manual Switch - A device which, when operated,
discontinues normal signal operation and permits manual
operation.
Flash Control Switch - A device which, when operated,
discontinues normal signal operation and causes the flashing of any
predetermined combination of signal indications.
Power Line Switch (Disconnect Switch) - A manual switch for
disconnecting power to the controller assembly and traffic control
signals.
Recall Switch - A manual switch which causes the automatic
return of the right-of-way to its associated phase.
Signal Load Switch - A device used to switch power to the signal
lamps.
Signal Shut-Down Switch - A manual switch to discontinue the
operation of traffic control signals without affecting the power
supply to other components in the controller cabinet.
Terminals, Field Devices for connecting wires entering the controller assembly.
Time Base Control A means for the automatic selection of modes of operation of
traffic signals in a manner prescribed by a predetermined time
schedule.

T-12 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Glossary
Appendix T

Term Meaning

Timing Analog Timing - Pertaining to a method of timing that measures

continuous variables, such as voltage or current.
Concurrent Timing - A mode of controller unit operation
whereby a traffic phase can be selected and timed simultaneously
and independently with another traffic phase.
Digital Timing - Pertaining to a method of timing that operates
by counting discrete units.
Timing Plan - The Split times for all segments (Phase/Interval) of
the coordination cycle.
Transit Signal Priority (TSP) A special controller mode that operates when it detects a transit
vehicle (bus). It maximizes throughput for both transit and private
vehicles with no interruption of coordination and no omission of
phases.
Volume Actual - The count of vehicles passing a point in the roadway
during a period in time. Typically expressed in Vehicles per Hour
or Vehicles per Hour per Lane.
Scaled - The percentage that the Actual Volume is when compared
to a stated maximum. The stated maximum is considered to be
100% use of the roadway.
Yield A command which permits termination of the green interval.

ASC/3 Programming Manual T-13

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
Glossary
Appendix T

Abbreviations in Connector Pin Functions 20

For each page, the abbreviations in the table below are in alphabetical order down the left
half of the table and then the order continues in the right half of the table.

Abbreviation Meaning Abbreviation Meaning

ADD address EN enable

ADV advance ENA enable

CK check ENA 5 SEC HD CR enable 5 section head control

CL clear EXT external, extension

CNA call to non-actuated FL flash

CON control GRN green

CONT control GT gate

COORD coordination IM intersection monitor

CRC cyclical redundancy check IN in

CRD coordination IND indicator

CRD NOFLT FL coordination no fault flash INH inhibit

CTR controller INTER interval

CTR FAULT MON controller fault monitor INT-LCK interlock

CTR VOLT MON controller voltage monitor KBD keyboard

CYC cycle LK link

DET detector LS load switch

DIAG diagnostics MAN manual

DIR direction MCE manual control enable

DMAND demand MIN minimum

DR1 detector rack # MOD modifier

DWALK don’t walk MON monitor

DWN down MON FL STAT monitor flash status

T-14 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
 Glossary
Appendix T

Abbreviation Meaning Abbreviation Meaning

MX maximum SPE FUNC special function

NO FLT FL STAT no fault flash status SPL special, split

NOW now ST start time, stop time

NXT next ST TM stop time

OL overlap STAT status

OSET offset SW switch, software

P-CL pedestrian clear SYNC synchronous

PED pedestrian SYS system

PH phase TBC time-based control

PLN plan TK track

PMT preempt TM time

PMT CMU INTLK preemptor CMU interlock TMG timing

PRI priority TP timing plan

R ring TRM terminate

RD Read TSP transit signal priority

RECYC recycle TSP ACT transit signal priority active

RST rest, reset WLK walk

RX receive X ST SY cross street synchronization

SEL select YEL yellow

SL slot

ASC/3 Programming Manual T-15

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014
For your notes:

T-16 ASC/3 Programming Manual

Version 2.59.00/22.59.00/32.59.00 - April 2014